https://www.echeat.com/ Am I Financially Literate? Have you ever heard someone say, “If I had a million dollars, all my problems would be over”? Many people think that having more money would make life easier. But consider Lady Gaga. She is a millionaire many times over, but back in 2009, she was bankrupt from overspending on her Monster Ball concert tour. How did that happen? It all starts with a lack of financial literacy. At its simplest, the term finance means the management of money. Financial literacy describes the knowledge and skills we need in order to manage our finances effectively. “That’s fine,” you might be thinking, “for people who have money. But it doesn’t matter to me.” Don’t sell yourself short! On average, teens in the United States spend a total of $259 billion dollars of their own money per year. No wonder advertising companies are continually trying to market to teens. They have the money to spend. However, according to a recent nationwide survey, on average, high school seniors answered only 52.4% of questions about personal finance and economics correctly. With these statistics in hand, you’re probably not surprised at the newspaper headline that read, “They like to spend it, but young people don’t know much about how money works.” What Is Financial Literacy? Financial literacy is important for everyone—millionaires and people who make minimum wage, kids and adults. Being financially literate enables you to plan for your future, attain your financial goals, and make sound fiscal decisions that can affect your overall well-being. Without financial education and good money management skills, it doesn’t matter how much money you make, you can still end up with no money to pay your bills or pursue your dreams. Financial literacy is more than just having a job and earning a paycheck. It’s about what you do with your money once it’s in your hands. To be financially literate, you need to think about questions like these: How much money do I bring in? Where does it go? Do I have a budget? Do I stick to it? How much do I spend? How much do I save? Do I invest? Do I borrow money? Take out loans? Use credit? Feeling confident about answering these questions wisely is a goal of financial literacy. Why Does It Matter? Financial literacy also gives you the tools to survive in the world. As you grow up and earn more money, you will have to make choices about 2024-11-26T17:22:14.693-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Am-I-Financially-Literate-45599.aspx 1. CMI ASSIGNMENT CASE STUDY TITLE: RAMPTON HOSPITAL 2.TABLE OF CONTENTS (THIS INFORMATION IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE WORD COUNT) Slide number Slide title 6 Introduction to Rampton Hospital and Its Challenges 8 Environment Analysis 10 Equality, Diversity, and Inclusion –Why It Matters 12 EDI as an Enabler of Performance 14 Leadership Styles in Rampton Hospital 16 Impact of Leadership on EDI 18 Proposed Strategies for EDI 20 Metrics to Measure EDI Impact 22 Conclusion 24 Task 2 Briefing Notes 34 Reflection on Professional Area from CMI Code of Conduct and Practice 3. SLIDE 1:INTRODUCTION TO RAMPTON HOSPITAL AND ITS CHALLENGES • Rampton Hospital: A high-security psychiatric facility in the UK. • Provides care for individuals with severe mental health conditions, including those with learning disabilities and personality disorders. • High levels of patient and staff diversity due to the complex and varied needs of its population. • Current challenges: Limited recognition of staff efforts, poor change management, high stress levels, and low trust in senior leadership 4. NOTE FOR SLIDE 1 Rampton Hospital is one of three high-security psychiatric hospitals in England. It provides specialized treatment and care for individuals who have mental health conditions that pose a significant risk to themselves or others. These patients often require highly individualized and intensive care. However, like many healthcare organizations, Rampton faces significant challenges in fostering a truly inclusive and supportive environment for both staff and patients. Recent findings, such as staff surveys, indicate critical issues related to equality, diversity, and inclusion (EDI). For instance, only 20% of staff feel recognized by senior management, and just 15% believe that change is well-managed within the hospital. Additionally, a staggering 90% of employees report experiencing stress at work. The importance of addressing these challenges goes beyond mere compliance with legal requirements. A strong EDI strategy is key to improving organizational culture, enhancing staff engagement, and ultimately driving better patient outcomes. Research shows that diverse and inclusive organizations perform better, as employees who feel valued and supported are more likely to be engaged, innovative, and productive (McKinsey & Company, 2020). In the context of Rampton Hospital, this can lead to more effective care delivery and improved mental health outcomes for its diverse patient population. By tackling EDI issues head-on, Rampton Hospital can transform its internal culture, boost staff morale, and enhance patient care quality. In the following slides, we will explore how the hospital can strategically approach EDI, leverage leadership to promote inclusivity, and address key barriers to fostering a truly supportive and equitable workplace 5. SLIDE 2: ENVIRONMENT ANALYSIS (SWOT):Strengths: • Highly specialized psychiatric services for complex cases. • Diverse staff with specialized training in mental health 2024-10-22T01:56:53.063-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Rampton-Hospital-A-case-study-45588.aspx 2022-03-12T02:28:30.267-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/TARUS-KEVIN-SADLER-PRIVATE-FOUNDATION-45551.aspx A critical analysis of the UK Pharmaceutical Industry and my preparedness to work as a manager in this sector The referendum result in 2016 kickstarted Brexit, where the United Kingdom (UK) exited the European Union (Blitz, 2016). Of all the industries, biopharma was expected to remain stable pro-Brexit. UK’s biopharma industry supplies 3% of the medicines in the global market and top five in research and design of life sciences (EHealth, 2016). The UK government also put in place various initiatives, such as the Medicines and Medical Devices Act 2021, that would spearhead innovation in healthcare post-Brexit (GlobalData Healthcare, 2021). As expected, the UK’s pharmaceutical industry has remained stable post-Brexit, compared to industries such as banking and insurance (Blitz, 2016). Regardless of how robust the pharmaceutical industry is, Brexit has consequences on the supply chain in the United Kingdom. Specifically, there are uncertainties on how to import regulations, and delays will affect UK residents’ access to medicines (Milne-Ives et al., 2020). This study examines how the UK pharmaceutical industry manages supply chain uncertainties arising from the political decision popularly known as Brexit. Brexit was a significant geopolitical event that affected all aspects of the supply chain ranging from sourcing inputs, managing assets, human resource migration, and storage of materials (PWC, 2018; Hendry et al., 2019). Our interest in the pharmaceutical industry arises because the UK government outlined science and innovation as one of the 12 ‘negotiating priorities’ of Brexit (Gov UK, 2017). Considering the impacts of Brexit on the pharmaceutical industry, it is necessary to discuss the impact of Brexit on the pharmaceutical industry and its future development. The essay will investigate the effects of Brexit on the UK pharmaceutical industry, its stakeholders, and the way the UK pharmaceutical industry makes decisions. The main challenges and solutions facing the UK Pharmaceutical Industry The pharmaceutical supply chain is likely to face many challenges following Brexit. First, the UK has relied on the EU as the leading supplier of its medicine (EMA, 2018). Leaving the union then disrupts the supply, affecting drug production, authorization, regulation, trade, health and safety monitoring, and research (Lorgelly, 2018). Specifically, the joint research and design centers between the UK and Germany have to be separated, affecting the testing and release of medicines. Instead of EMA’s usual authorization of drugs, they will undergo an additional authorization process before reaching UK markets (EMA, 2018). This additional step will increase the cost 2022-01-23T10:56:10.183-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-critical-analysis-of-the-UK-Pharmaceutical-Industry-and-my-preparedness-to-work-as-a-manager-in-this-sector-45540.aspx Seguridad has a mission to become the world’s leading manufacture in aftermarket safety products for vehicles. Vehicles are used throughout the world which requires additional safety precautions. Seguridads' purpose is to become known worldwide for its safety features. With the introduction of its new product and services, Seguridad intends to reduce thefts and fatalities, while increasing vehicular safety. The SWOTT for this technology is as follows: Strengths: Low cost of production, easy process to infuse fingerprint technology and biometric engineering and product engineering capabilities, growing domestic automotive market for safety, manufacturing capabilities with international quality standards, high operation efficiency. Weakness: Low investments in R&D, Limited knowledge of product combination, limited penetration of middle-class income segment due to high price, limited experience in system integration. Opportunities: increasing revenue and purchasing power, gain more market share because of assimilating this technology into the auto industry, influence on product engineering expertise, procurement of foreign markets by new feature development 3 Threats: Development of new technology such as the fingerprint alcohol test might affect the other features within the vehicle, competition from China, Korea and other low-cost manufacturing countries, technology could prove incompatible for proposed operation. Trends: Improve on the desire to purchase an automobile with safety designs for the family, Limit the rate of drunk driving, and give stakeholders more of a marketable value. A channel management effect on the product for Seguridad Auto is important in ways that will determine if the product is valuable to the consumer. These effects are analyzed by factors such as volume of sales, cost of getting the product to the customer, and customer satisfaction. For Seguridad Auto, the new product and services are simply to deliver to the consumer. The product will be installed in the vehicle on delivery to the customer from the dealer or customers will deliver vehicles to the production warehouse for installation. The channel management system has certain areas of performance in the delivery of the new product or service. Those performances consist of information to the consumer on the product, promotion of the product, negotiation of the 4 product, ordering of the product, financing of the product, risk taking, payment, channel level, physical possession, and titling of the product. Seguridad Auto will have to provide information to the consumer of these services and the product. The more information on the product and service 2021-11-29T09:52:12.527-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Seguridad-Auto-A-SWOTT-Analysis-45522.aspx This essay examines several aspects of the Walt Disney Company. Disney The Mouse that Roared I Introduction The Walt Disney Company is one of the most famous corporations in the world, thanks to an improbable little rodent with big ears, and an amazing ability to market dreams. This paper analyzes the company with regard to its corporate culture, resources, finances, research and development, and information systems. II Corporate Culture The Walt Disney Company is now a global entertainment empire, employing over 114,000 people in its four “core” business segments: Parks and Resorts; Consumer Products; Media Networks; and Studio Entertainment. It has a two-fold aim: to build the “largest entertainment base” in the world, and to provide the greatest entertainment product in the world. (“The Walt Disney Company,” PG). In terms of revenue, the four in order are Media Networks; Parks and Resorts; Studio Entertainment and Consumer Products. “In 2001, Disney recorded over $25 billion in sales, had a gross profit margin of 18.1%, and has a diluted Earnings Per Share … of 0.72.” (“The Walt Disney Company,” PG). Despite rumors of shake-ups in top management, and the widely held belief that CEO Michael Eisner is no longer effective, the company remains tremendously profitable, showing a profit even in the middle of a long-lasting recession. At the corporate level, Disney’s officers are as follows: Michael Eisner, Chairman and CEO; Robert Iger; President, COO, Director; Roy Disney, Vice Chairman; Thomas Staggs, CFO, Senior Executive VP; Alan Braverman, Executive VP and General Counsel; and Peter Murphy, CSO and Senior Executive VP. (These names are current as of February 14, 2003). (“The Walt Disney Company (NYSE) - Officers and Directors: Individuals,” PG). There is also a 13 member Board of Directors; Eisner, Iger and Roy Disney also have seats on that board. Four of the board members have been appointed since 2000. (“The Walt Disney Company (NYSE),” PG). Michael Eisner is the undoubted power broker at Disney. He meets with the heads of all the divisions regularly, but he is in charge, and his need to retain control appears to be hampering the company somewhat. Most sources paint Eisner as an obsessive: “Eisner meets that criterion: he is driven, obsessive and a micro-managing control freak. Even Rupert Murdoch, something of a serial meddler himself, told the Financial Times last week that Eisner ‘cannot help but 2021-11-29T09:27:51.013-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Disney-The-Mouse-that-Roared-45521.aspx Some nice proverbs that we have 2021-10-21T14:00:47.017-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Some-known-and-funny-proverbs-45514.aspx 2020-10-19T23:32:18.627-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/I-just-want-an-outline-of-this-assignment-an-not-the-whole-thing-45500.aspx Essay SOMMAIRE L’objectif de cet essai est de déterminer s’il est préférable de partir en affaires par le démarrage de son entreprise ou d’en acquérir une déjà existante dans le but de s’approcher de l’indépendance financière. Bien que les référentiels disponibles à ce jour sont vastes et parfois complexes, il a été jugé pertinent de présenter dans le cadre de cet essai, les éléments essentiels qui ne viennent pas nécessairement en premier lieu dans l’esprit de l’entrepreneur lorsque celui-ci désire se lancer en affaires. La démarche suivie pour analyser ces théories est d’une part, la compréhension des différentes formes légales existantes d’entreprises, d’autre part, la revue des écrits concernant différents aspects à considérer lors d’un démarrage ou d’une acquisition d’entreprise. En dernier, une entrevue avec trois entrepreneurs sera réalisée pour soutenir les constats de la première partie. L’entrevue nous permettra de cerner la différence entre les théories versus la réalité sur le chantier. Ainsi, une recommandation par entrepreneur sera présentée afin de mieux guider les nouveaux entrepreneurs. En sommes, il a été difficile de mettre en lumière l’entièreté des concepts analysés dans le cadre de cet essai. En fait, la taille de notre échantillon constitue un enjeu de notre étude. Les entrevues avec les trois entrepreneurs de domaines différentes ne nous ont pas permis de valider certains concepts, car ceux-ci ne s’appliquaient pas dans leur domaine d’activité. Par conséquent, il peut être nécessaire de faire place au jugement quant à choisir entre un démarrage ou une acquisition d’entreprise. Mots clés : démarrage d’entreprise, création d’entreprise, indépendance financière, entrepreneur, entreprise individuelle, société par action, motivation, méthodes de démarrage, gestions de fonds de roulement, types de transferts, risques et défis du transfert 1 Introduction Depuis les dernières décennies, les médias sociaux sont de plus en plus accessibles et influents nous exposant quotidiennement à une vaste variété de contenu dont entre autres, des aperçus dans la vie des gens riches, personnalités influentes, ou encore, entrepreneurs vedettes notamment leur style de vie luxueuse. Bref, qui ne souhaitent pas devenir millionnaire? Ou du moins, tout simplement avoir assez d’argent pour pouvoir complètement profiter de la vie comme font ces entrepreneurs vedettes dans les réseaux sociaux? C’est un rêve commun à tous. La société projette une image du bonheur idéalisé, d’une vie parfaite et les tentations sont nombreuses. Les gens sont encouragés à voyager et à dépenser davantage pour être heureux, d’accumuler des biens matériaux, du luxe, mais aussi à enrichir 2020-07-31T08:35:52.16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/good-essay-for-final-cpa-essay-in-french-45494.aspx Active vs. Passive Management: Does Alpha Exist? By Name Name of Class Professor University City Date Active vs. Passive Management: Does Alpha Exist? An active investment management strategy relies on research analysts and investment managers to select the most profitable stocks that should be included in a portfolio. Passive management, on the other hand, involves the use of a specific stock index as a guide on which securities should be included in an investor’s portfolio. Investors that use a passive investment strategy believe in market efficiency as reflected by the availability of all current and future information about securities in the market, which is in line with the efficient market hypothesis theory (Phan & Zhou, 2014, 61). Investors that use an active investment strategy, on the other hand, believe that the market changes from time to time, and therefore a portfolio should adapt to these changes if profitability is to be maintained, which is in line with the adaptive market hypothesis (Hiremath & Kumari, 2014, 1). Both active and passive investment management strategies are frequently used in the exchange market and there is no clear consensus on the effectiveness of each in comparison to the other. Research Questions The key research question is whether there are significant differences in the performance of portfolios managed using active and passive management strategies, as gauged by portfolio alpha values. The investment alpha basically compares the rate of return of a given portfolio with a market index or a selected rate of return. The study will also seek to determine whether the alpha as a measure of performance is ideal for the comparison of the two management strategies. Research Aims and Objectives The study aims to identify the difference in the performance of a portfolio managed using the active management strategy and one managed using the passive management strategy. The investment alpha recorded by each portfolio will be used as a measure of performance. An analysis of the key factors relating to each portfolio management model and how they may impact on the performance of the portfolio will be conducted. Hypothesis The hypothesis to be tested will relate to the difference in financial performance between an actively managed and a passively managed portfolio. The null and alternative hypotheses have been identified as follows: H0: There is no significant difference between the performance of investment portfolios managed using active and passive management strategies as measured by the portfolio alpha. H1: There is a significant 2019-05-16T08:47:32.057-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Active-vs_-Passive-Management-Does-Alpha-Exist-45488.aspx Introduction Business investments are affected by a wide range of factors. Before a company undertakes any investment activity, it must first understand the prevailing environment. In this case, it must comprehend the demography, politics, climate, and social and cultural dynamics. The aim of analyzing the environment is to ensure that business decisions are uniquely tailored for that type of an environment (Kular, 2017). Every market has unique characteristics and a business which is able to recognize these traits and utilize them in operations is likely to compete effectively. Developed markets and emerging markets exhibit different traits. Companies in emerging markets may not compete at the same level with those in developed economies following the traditional investment models (Authers, 2018). Thus, the adoption of the ESG (environmental, social, and governance) model gives businesses in the emerging markets a somewhat similar competitive platform with those in developed markets. Today emerging economies offer multiple business investment opportunities. The adoption of the environmental, social, and governance (ESG) approach is particularly a superior approach embraced by businesses to boost their sustainability. ESG refers to the three core factors in the measurement of sustainability and ethical impact of business investments (Authers, 2018). In recent years, emerging economies have been hit by market volatility and political disruptions as well as unstable interest rates in developed countries like the U.S., thus, with some much uncertainty in the traditional markets, companies in the emerging markets have opted to invest in ethical, social, and corporate governance. ESG investing is also viewed as a parameter to encourage cultural shift towards corporate governance transparency. Businesses in emerging markets are trying to attract potential investors using openness and transparency. Similarly, environmental sustainability is a trending issue that has attracted the adoption of ESG investing. Investors are looking for sustainable businesses, hence the significance of ESG investing. Organizations with poor environmental management policies may be fined for regulatory breaches, those with poor social practices may experience high staff turnover and labor-related problems, and entities with poor governance framework may not attract potential investors (Msci.com, n.d.). Basically, ESG is a modern day model for business operations in emerging markets. Background The predominant aspect considered in making decisions related to financial assets was the financial returns. However, there were other criteria such as political, social, and environmental elements considered. In the 1950s and 60s, there was an opportunity for trade unions to consider social environments in their capital 2019-05-16T04:39:45.247-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/123456789-45487.aspx RESEARCH METHODS (BASED ON SAUNDERS ET AL. (2016) By Name Name of Class Professor University City Date Research Methods (Based on Saunders et al. (2016) Researchers face many challenges while trying to gain access to organizational data. These challenges depend on whether the scholar is an internal researcher or an external researcher. Therefore, it is important to understand ways through which various researchers may overcome the challenges they face. This paper discusses research scenarios that various research may encounter while looking for data. Part One: Strategies to Gain Access Based on Given Scenarios a) An external researcher seeking direct access to managers who will be the research participants: The external researcher will need to ensure that he or she is familiar with the organization. Besides, Saunders, Thornhill, and Lewis (2016, 229) note that external researchers may use suitable language and facilitate replies to gain access to managers as participants. Therefore, an external researcher will have to familiarize with the organization and use appropriate language as well as facilitate replies to access organizational managers as participants. b) An external researcher seeking access through an organizational gatekeeper/broker to their intended participants or respondents: The researcher may consider developing access incrementally, establishing credibility, and overcoming organizational concerns to gain access to organizational gatekeepers. Besides, it would be appropriate for the researcher to provide a clear account of purpose (Saunders et al., 2016, 229). Therefore, external researchers have huge responsibilities while seeking access to organizational gatekeepers. c) An internal researcher planning to undertake a research project within their employing organization: An internal researcher may use existing contacts to gain access to information within an organization. Besides, the researcher may find it necessary to establish credibility when dealing with unfamiliar individuals (Saunders et al., 2016, 271). Luckily, internal researchers have a significant advantage over external researchers due to prior knowledge and familiarity with the organization. What Strategy I Will Need I will need to employ a variety of strategies to gain access in my research. Since I will be investigating whether alpha exists for either active or passive management, my research will be carried out externally. Therefore, I will need to use suitable language, overcome organizational concerns, provide a clear account of the purpose of the research, and develop new contacts while seeking access to organizational information. Part Two: Strategies for Collecting Primary and Secondary Data Various techniques can be employed to collect primary and secondary data. The main techniques for collecting primary data include observation, administration of questionnaires, and group interviews. On the other hand, 2019-05-16T02:15:32.97-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/RESEARCH-METHODS-BASED-ON-SAUNDERS-ET-AL_-2016-45486.aspx Student’s Name Professor’s Name Course Title Date The Effects of Unemployment Rate and Inflation on Economic Growth Introduction The economic growth of a country is desirable since it leads to improved standards of livings. The Gross Domestic Product (GDP) indicates a countries economic growth. A higher GDP indicates higher economic growth. Several factors affect the GDP of a country. Some of the factors that influence the growth of the economy include inflation and the unemployment rate (Alisa 90). Inflation is the increase in the prices of goods and services of a country. Inflation is as a result of the decrease in the value of the currency hence an increase in inflation leads to a decrease in the economic growth. An increase in the unemployment rate leads to a decrease in the economic growth of a country. The unemployment rate decreases the purchasing power of individuals hence shrink the economy. This paper investigates the correlation between economic growth and inflation and the unemployment rate of the United States. A linear regression analysis will be used to analyze the data with GDP as the response variable and unemployment rate and inflation as the explanatory variables. Method of Data Collection The data used in the analysis involves the GDP, the unemployment rate, and the inflation of the population of interest which is the United States from the year 1985 to 2018 (Amadeo para 3). The data was obtained from the website The Balance. The website provides reliable data concerning the economic status of the United States. It provides the economic statistics and analyzes the performance with respect to the previous status. Data Analysis Scatter plot diagrams were used to show the graphical representation of the relationship between the response variable and the explanatory variables. The scatter plot diagram of GDP against unemployment shows a negative relationship between the variables. The scatterplot indicates a decrease in economic growth with the increase in the unemployment rate. The StatKey analysis also indicates the coefficient of correlation between the two variables. The coefficient of correlation indicates the direction and strength of the relationship. The coefficient of correlation of the relation between GDP and inflation is -0.576. The negative sign indicates a negative direction of the relationship. The figure also indicates a relationship of moderate strength. The coefficient of determination can be obtained by finding the square of the coefficient of correlation. The coefficient of determination is 0.332. This means that the regression model represents 33.2% 2019-05-10T01:59:11.01-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Statistics-project-45485.aspx This paper is a proposal and justification of an appropriate inferential statistical technique in an attempt to solve a business problem faced by a moving company. The project analyzes two states based in the US. The moving company has been established in the US and is trying to find the best business potential state in which to move its headquarters. The analysis covers the current company’s state of residence Mississippi and the California State where it intends to shift its headquarters. The paper identifies the migration, years and population estimates from the economic research service to facilitate the research. Additionally, prediction and test inferential statistical techniques are preferred to address the business problem. Thus, simple linear regression is proposed for the prediction. Linear regression is distinguished from the t-test hypothesis testing due to its outstanding match for the business problem. Moreover, the tool has been supported by experiences and examples that prove its reliability. Keywords: inferential statistical techniques, moving company, headquarters, states, linear regression, t-test hypothesis, and proposal. Analytic Methods Proposal: Case of Moving Company An inferential statistical technique is one of the two branches of statistics. The technique uses a random sample of the population to make predictions of its properties. According to Lowry (2014), the use of inferential statistics is valuable when examination of the properties of every member of an entire population is impractical. This paper aims to select the appropriate inferential technique by proposition and support to recommend the U.S founded company to move its headquarters to the best state with significant business opportunities. The most appropriate inferential technique to address the problem of moving the company’s headquarters is a simple linear regression. Business Problem The executive leadership of a newly opened moving company in the US is faced with the challenge of deciding the best state that has significant potential business in which to move their headquarters. Therefore, the manager has asked the analyst to conduct a research process by comparing the current state of residence, Mississippi, to another state of choice, California, and make recommendations based on the findings. Data Used The data used for the research will include the population estimates for Mississippi and California states for the years between 2010 and 2017 (Economic Research Service, 2017). The data related to the Mississippi State is identified by labeling all the state’s records as ‘MR’ while those relating to California are identified by labeling the state as ‘CR.’ It 2019-02-28T05:37:08.81-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analytic-Methods-Proposal-Case-of-Moving-Company-45480.aspx Reporting on Results of Analysis Name Institutional Affiliation Reporting on Results of Analysis Statistics are divided into inferential and descriptive statistical techniques. The two branches attain different objectives, and each serves a specific purpose. However, the two analytical techniques are used concurrently for proper data understanding and interpretation. Descriptive statistical method deals with how data is presented and collected while the inferential statistical technique involves making appropriate conclusions based on statistical analysis of descriptive statistics. Therefore, one statistical technique cannot exist without the other. The concept of inferential and descriptive statistical techniques is highly applied in businesses for problem-solving and decision making. For instance, companies apply statistical techniques when they face situations that require the selection of the best solution among alternatives. Additionally, statistical methods are used to identify and compare relationships among variables that influence decision making. This paper intends to report the results of descriptive and inferential statistical techniques. The paper examines migration data of Mississippi and California states to find where the headquarters of a moving company will be located. The descriptive technique has analyzed the two states using mean, percent, variance, percentile ranks, and standard deviation while the inferential technique has done it using simple linear regression. Also, the paper has identified the cautions, limitations, and generalizations experienced during the analysis. Additionally, the paper has come up with a conclusion based on the results of analyzing the two states. The results reveal that the moving company should locate its headquarters in California. An Analysis of the Business Question The executive leaders of a U.S founded company are trying to determine a state that has significant business potential in which to locate its headquarters. The major income for a moving company is transportation fees charged from customers. Thus, a change in migration rate impacts the bottom line. However, high migration rate can affect the revenue either favorably or adversely. The current state of residence for the moving company, Mississippi, has been adversely affecting incomes due to limited movement of residents. If the company was operating in a state with a large population where people constantly move in and out of surrounding towns, it would thrive. As a result, the company would generate more income and mitigate the vulnerability to the going concern. The company’s executives are concerned about the performance of the company and have addressed the issue of establishing the headquarters of the company to another state. Thus, inferential and descriptive 2019-02-28T05:22:34.43-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Reporting-on-Results-of-Analysis-45479.aspx Personal Qualities that Ensure Success in the Current Job Market Student’s Name Institutional Affiliations A Description of Today’s Job Market The modern job market is correctly described by competition. This is because the world has become a global village of qualified experts and to survive the cutthroat competition, a job seeker needs to stand out and make a lasting impression to increasingly choosy employers. An individual should possess personal qualities as well as intrapersonal competencies and thus making them an attractive employee (Jobs & Pylayev, 2014). The focus of this paper is to describe the qualities that make an individual successful in today’s competitive job market. The Qualities To be successful in today’s job market requires hard skills which are in essence the academic qualifications for the career or profession of choice. The educational system offers the right training and knowledge in a particular discipline. The attainment of a certain level of education such as Diploma qualifies an individual for a specific position. The accumulation of hard skills opens an individual to more chances in the job market and also improves their competitiveness (Jobs & Pylayev, 2014). Today’s job market is savage for the inexperienced but for the well trained, savvy individuals it is a smooth ride. Besides the academic qualifications, the job market demands a specific set of behavioral and attitudinal competencies. These qualities are necessary for an individual to remain relevant in the job market. These include a basic understanding and know-how of technology. The incorporation of technology and the internet in the modern corporate and public space has led to an increase in productivity for employees as well as companies (Half, 2018). For example, computer literacy is an added advantage for modern job seekers since most communication in the workplace is technology enabled. Technology tools such as cloud storage services are used in information storage and sharing within an organization. Another set of interpersonal skills crucial for the workplace include problem-solving skills which are a means to prepare the individual for the unexpected issues within the organization. The world is rapidly globalized and so is the workplace and for the firm to succeed the competition in the market place, the employees should be prepared to solve any unexpected contingencies (Jobs & Pylayev, 2014). Thus, to be successful, an individual should offer practical solutions to problems which are likely to be encountered in the workplace. Also, the modern workplace 2019-02-05T02:27:39.423-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/-Personal-Qualities-that-Ensure-Success-in-the-Current-Job-Market-45474.aspx Trump’s Trade Policies and Global Markets Since becoming the 45th president of the United States on January 20, 2017, Donald Trump has been very aggressive in his policies regarding trade, terrorism, economic cooperation, conflict resolution, and climate change. Trump’s aggressive approach has been criticized both by national and international analysts. Specifically, the decision of cancellation of nuclear deal with Iran and imposition of tough trade sanctions by the United States was heavily condemned by the European Union and America’s allies. The central focus on Trump’s trade policy is to decrease imports and increase the U.S exports to benefit the local industries and advantage the American business community. For this purpose, the United States has posed heavy tariffs on steel and Aluminum imports from the European Union, China, Canada, and Mexico. Similarly, several news steps have been taken to shield the domestic market from financial crisis and create employment opportunities for the U.S citizens. However, analysts believe that Trump's tariffs have echoed the trade policy of the United States and resulted to the great economic depression. This article presents a comprehensive analysis of Trump’s trade policies and their impact on global markets, and offers useful investment suggestions based on numerical analysis of information collected from the most credible resources. Historical Background Donald Trump was elected as the 45th president of the United States on in U.S presidential elections 2016 and assumed his office on January 20, 2017. The central agenda of his election campaign was based on two words: “America First.” Trump believed that all his efforts and life struggle primarily focused on the progress and development of the United States and its people. In his opinion, most of the previous American presidents preferred personal and global interests to those of the United States. For instance, he repeatedly emphasized on renegotiating the America’s relations with China, Mexico, and Pakistan in his campaign. Moreover, he often criticized the U.S free trade and strategic agreements with other nations, such as Trans-Pacific Partnership trade negotiations, NAFTA, the Iran nuclear deal, and the Paris Agreement on climate change. Similarly, Trump’s economic strategy was based on reducing income taxes, declining imports, and increasing the U.S exports to benefit American businessmen and workers. To implement his financial plans, Trump has taken several aggressive steps against the U.S ally and rival countries regarding trade, fiscal cooperation, and economic development. The possible outcomes of an antagonistic trade policy include global loneliness, loss 2019-01-31T09:10:52.163-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Trump’s-Trade-Policies-and-Global-Markets-45471.aspx 2019-01-31T09:03:24.893-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/This-article-presents-a-comprehensive-analysis-of-Trump’s-trade-policies-and-their-impact-on-global-markets,-and-offers-useful-investment-suggestions-based-on-numerical-analysis-of-information-collected-from-the-most-credible-resources_-45470.aspx Leadership Challenges Facing the Army Name Institutional Affiliation Leadership Challenges Facing the Army Over the past decades, the United States Army, the most instrumental and vital branch of our military has seen a robust growth in terms of capacity and strength. The army has been actively engaged in missions all over the world especially in volatile regions in Africa, the Middle East, and East Asia where the United States has strategic interests. Training is a core pillar in the United Army an aspect that has enabled it to operate in almost every region in the world without being limited by cultural challenges. The United States has been allocating sizable investments to offer the best training to its personnel in uniforms to maintain units that can operate in dynamic theatres involving local politics, urban warfare among others (US Department of Defense, 2014). However, over the recent past, the United States army has faced a significant challenge in leadership development. This is a current challenge facing the US army. This paper sets to discuss the challenge of leadership development currently affecting the United States Army. Leadership Development as a Challenge The United States Army Press released a statement of the current challenges facing the army and which have the potential to affect its operations in missions worldwide. Among the several challenges listed was that of developing army leadership (Bradshaw, 2018). The military and the army differ from all other institutions in the United States in many ways but most importantly its highly dynamic form of personnel management. As expected with all the branches of the military, service men and women are categorized depending on their experience in the army, accomplishments, and level of training. These ranks in the army establish what is referred to as the chain of command that allows operational efficiency through a code of discipline. The ranks allow communication to flow from senior commanders to low-level officers such as platoon members in the infantry. Although decisions are open to negotiation in most cases, orders from a senior commander are not questioned. Military ranks keep on changing at a significant rate for the army personnel. For both commissioned and noncommissioned officers, experience, for instance, results to rise in the rank of an army personnel. As an officer crosses the threshold of one rank to the next, their scope in terms of expertise, skills and responsibility increase too. Additional training and mentorship, in this case, 2018-11-12T10:12:06.79-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leadership-45457.aspx Inventory Management An Inventory is an organized list that contains all the tangible and intangible properties of a company. Materials, work in progress or assets meant to enhance the operations of the firm can make up the inventory. Correct valuation of a company’s assets is very important in making crucial managerial decisions. The paper discusses inventory management based on methods used by Apple and Nordstrom companies. Types of Inventories and their Characteristics Companies can manage four types of inventories. These include Work in Process, Finished goods, Maintenance, Repair and Operating Supplies (MRO) and Raw material inventory (Nemtajela & Mbohwa, 2017). Nordstrom company is distinguished because of the way it handles its finished goods that are ready for the customer. The type of inventory dealing with manufactured goods and services is called the Finished Goods inventory. A characteristic of this is keeping a record of goods that are ready for the consumers. Apple deals mainly with its supply chain inventory. An important feature of this type of inventory is that it is responsible for the supply a company receives as raw materials to the final products ready for consumers. Goods and Services Design Concept Integration The Nordstrom integrates several concepts in the design of its goods and services. The company carries out market research to determine the goods and services needed by customers and the general quantities required. The company thus ensures that enough goods and services are produced without shortage or excessive production, which increases production costs. The Apple Company mainly controls its supply chain. The firm reduces the number of suppliers. Only very effective suppliers, both by cost and quality supplies obtain tenders. Quality raw materials are thus supplied at competitive prices. In the end, the company will be able to produce very quality products at fair prices. Role of Inventories in the Companies Good inventory management will ensure that a firm has enough stock to cater for the needs of the customers while not producing too much as to increase costs. The inventory may include common databases with suppliers to enable them quickly recognize the organizations' needs and make supplies at the right time. Inventory management incorporates methods that ensure there are very high turnovers. Goods and services in such cases are bought while still at very high market values creating room for new production. Inventories can promote mass productions in an organization. They enable timely orders and sales, therefore, providing capital to 2018-08-05T03:17:32.573-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Inventory-Management-45446.aspx Challenges in the Business Environment Name Institutional Affiliation Challenges in the Business Environment Most businesses are conducted within the bounds of law but most important ethical considerations. The sustainability of any business or corporate depends on its approach to ethical issues. Ethical considerations related to the impact of business operations on the environment, society practices, compliance with regulatory agencies, taxation requirements, and employee welfare. However, over the past years, the ethical responsibility has expanded beyond the operations of any corporation to the mandate of its suppliers. Companies have the values and beliefs that they hold dear. These values are the basic frameworks upon which a company’s rules are founded on. Integrity and transparency among others are some of the most important values to any corporate. The supplier code of conduct is a policy document that outlines requirements to be met by all companies wishing to engage in business practices with a particular firm. Companies have incorporated changes into their supplier code of document in a bid to promote the values that are most important to them such as the employee’s welfare. As a company, I believe that one of the key factors to our enlisting in the fortune 500 is our commitment to our supplier code of conduct. Our current supplier code of conduct is the result periodic changes to accommodate emerging issues in business operations. This paper will discuss changes in the Supplier Code of conduct of Apple International Corporation and how it has changed over time drawing appropriate examples. The purpose of Apple’s supplier code of conduct is to guide our partners in their activities. As a company, we hold our suppliers and ourselves to the highest standards in regard to human rights, responsible business practices, and the safeguarding of the environment. This means going far beyond the common industry practices all in a bid to improve the lives of our suppliers’ employees. Our supplier code stipulates the protection standards for the employees which are fair working hours, nice living conditions, and safety at the workplace. Changes in Apple Supplier Code of Conduct The supplier code of conduct of Apple has and often undergoes a lot of changes and revision to cater for the most recent emerging issues in business operations. The supplier code has five essential sections which include human rights and labor, employee safety and health, the environment, and ethics (Apple Inc., 2018). The Code of Conduct is taken seriously 2018-08-05T02:38:15.61-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Challenges-in-the-Business-Environment-45445.aspx Name Instructor Course Date Analysis of Beating the Street and Rich Dad, Poor Dad Peter Lynch’s Beating the Street Summary of the Book To every sane individual, the family is the most important part of their life. Unfortunately, many professionals are often too engrossed in growing own careers but at the expense of own families. In the book, Lynch acknowledges that he did not spend as much quality time as is desirable but is working on it after retirement (12). He uses the analogy of seventh grade students to underscore that anyone can make it big in financial investments but the key is keeping it simple by investing in companies that one understands how they work (Lynch 25). In the second chapter, the book cautions readers against listening too keenly on market analysts who are always pessimistic. He acknowledges that, “Even after good news is made public, Wall Street can be slow to react” (Lynch 252). Financial markets suffer crashes when stocks are valued too high but understanding the dynamics of a specific set of firms can present the perfect opportunity for an investor to buy even when it appears as the best moment to sell. There are some financial investment options that seem popular with many American investors. Lynch cautions against following such trails by pointing out that bond funds do not offer as much returns as some readily available direct investment tools such as stocks (46-47). He points out that, “The reason that stocks do better than bonds is not hard to fathom” (Lynch 42). These ensure a definite ROI and do not require one to research or manage to profit from them. There are many mutual funds in operations across the U.S. though, many of them are duds. Lynch points out that getting a good mutual fund demands as much research as that which is necessary to ascertain a good stock option (51). However, finding a good firm is not always hard as admirable management operations are thrifty and are careful not to use resources in conducting glamorous campaigns. This implies that while stocks are better than bond funds, a knowledgeable investor will opt for shares as opposed to bonds. Big firms were once small companies. Lynch advises readers to focus more on understanding the opportunities presented to small companies in future as they avail massive avenues for high returns as opposed to large firms with very limited chances for expansion 2018-06-02T01:18:51.05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-of-Beating-the-Street-and-Rich-Dad,-Poor-Dad-45442.aspx Greendale Stadium Student’s Name Instructor Institution Date Part B The critical path refers to the order a network of activities in a project. It is a sequential series of activities which shows the longest time the completion will take. The longest duration the Greendale stadium would take to complete is 2 years and 8 months. The project has also provided time allowances to accommodate for delays various tasks may have. The time allowance for 2017-11-21T04:01:55.39-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Greendale-Stadium-45398.aspx The Reasons Underlying Failed States Name of Student: Name of Institution: Date of Submission: The Reasons Underlying Failed States Introduction Governance refers to the act of exercising administrative, political and economic authority in managing the affairs of a nation. Therefore the success or failure of a state lies squarely on its governance. The failure of states is attributed to the loss of credibility of their governments. The failure is also as a result of the nature of the state continually becoming illegitimate and questionable in the eyes and hearts of a large portion of its citizens. This research paper examines the reasons underlying the failure of Haiti, why specific actions taken by the leadership of Haiti as a country have failed and also discusses the prospects of success of Haiti. a) Factors That Contribute to the Failure of the Haiti Government Haiti is regarded as a failed state because of poor public health and sanitation, little public order and poor transport and education facilities in the country. It is also among the lowest ranking states globally in terms of life expectancy and per capita income. This was the condition of the country even before the 2010 earthquake which killed thousands of its citizens and destroyed its infrastructure. Corruption in Haiti Haiti has a legacy of corruption. The country is ranked fourth globally with regard to corruption. In the aftermath of the 2010 earthquake, the country received massive foreign aid for reconstruction. However, the massive aid does not profit its citizens as a result of the many corruption cases in the country. The country’s law is deficient in dealing with corruption cases (Pike, 2017). This is because the vice has a negative influence on the operations of the judicial system and the executive. Land tenure, real property procedures, insurance, and pension regulation procedures, as well as foreign investment regime, are also corruption infested. Therefore nearly all activities in the country have been undermined by the vice. Corruption has undermined institutions in the country. This is because of the poor utilization of resources that are meant to develop institutions. The leadership utilizes the resources for their own personal gain at the expense of the institution. This results in the complete closure or bankruptcy of these institutions. The law requires that corrupt government officials be arrested and charged but that has not been implemented. Top government officers have a series of corruption scandals raising questions about their ability to lead. The 2017-11-21T03:39:53.413-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Reasons-Underlying-Failed-States-45397.aspx To Build or Buy Name Institution Affiliation Date To Build or Buy A small business like a cafeteria is the most suitable option one can engage on because no matter how human beings get satisfied with other basic necessities, food remains to be the major requirement one cannot do without. For this reason, this business will attract more customers and eventually it will result in more returns on sales. A cafeteria needs a little amount of capital and it is easy to set it up and operate. Strategy for a Business Concept The best business concept strategy that will enable a cafeteria to compete directly in the market is a business plan which will confirm if the business idea is feasible or not. Therefore, a cafeteria business may consider the following business plan as a strategy after research and development before predicting the long-lasting outcomes. Defining the business and vision. To start up a cafeteria, the first step is to define the business and its vision for the sake of making a driving force of the business and clarify the aim. In order to clarify the vision, the business owner should be aware of the customer, the kind of business he or she is in, products and services to provide to customers, plans that are in place for the purpose of growth and he or she should consider the primary advantage in the existing market. Goal setting. To set up a cafeteria, one should list down goals while providing a brief description of their actions. In this step, the business should undergo a period of research and development before predicting long-lasting outcomes. The owner should specifically explain the possible achievements of the business by starting with personal goals then business goals. For instance, what does he or she want to achieve as a person, the size of the business he or she would wish the business to be, whether there is a need to include the family in the business, if he or she desires to recruit a staff to run the business and describe the quality of goods and services to provide to customers for the sake of satisfaction. Further, the goal of the business should admire types of foods and drinks to provide to customers while considering customers’ needs and preferences of foods to provide so that customers’ needs are met (Kumar and Reinartz, 2012). Understanding the customer. The cafeteria should consider meeting customers’ needs while 2017-11-21T03:32:35.647-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/To-Build-or-Buy-A-small-business-like-a-cafeteria-45396.aspx Project Schedule Name Institution Authors Note PART A: Project Schedule Project: Network Improvement Effort Estimate in days Planned start date Planned End date Resources 1 Plan Project 1.1 Development of a Work Plan 1.1.1 Developing a work breakdown structure 1 09/11/2017 09/11/2017 Project Manager 1.1.2 Development of the staffing plan 1 09/12/2017 09/12/2017 Project Manager 1.1.3 Developing project schedule 2 09/13/2017 09/14/2017 Project Manager 1.1.4 Development of the project budget 1 09/14/2017 09/14/2017 Project manager, Core team 1.2 Development of the project control plan 1 09/15/2017 09/15/2017 Core team 2.0 Execution and Control of the project 2.1 Design Framework 2.1.1 Describing the framework stages and activities 3 09/18/2017 09/20/2017 Core Team 2.1.2 Acquisition of the network devices 1 09/21/2017 09/21/2017 Core team leader 2.1.3 Designing the web delivery tool 3 09/22/2017 09/26/2017 Core team developers 2.2 Creation of the framework 2.2.1 Installation of the network devices 3 09/27/2017 09/29/2017 Core team 2.2.2 Review the network devices for quality 1 10/02/2017 10/02/2017 Core team, review team 2.2.3 Building the web tool prototype 3 10/03/2017 10/05/2017 Web developer 2.3 Testing the framework 1 10/06/2017 10/06/2017 2.3.1 Test the usability of the network devices 1 10/09/2017 10/09/2017 Core team, review team 2.3.2 Testing the usability of the web tool 1 10/10/2017 10/10/2017 Core team, review team 2.3.3 Adjustment of the framework basing on the feedback 2 10/11/2017 10/13/2017 Core team 2.4 Implementation of the Project 1 10/13/2017 10/13/2017 2.5 Closing the project 1 10/14/2017 10/14/2017 Project manager 2.5.1 Conduction of post-project review 1 10/15/2017 10/15/2017 Core team, review team 2.5.2 Celebration 1 10/15/2017 10/15/2017 Core team, review team PART B: Written Response Introduction The paper is written basing on the project schedule created in the first section of the assignment. From the beginning while the project schedule was developed it was considered that the work in the entire project will be done on the normal working days which falls within the week under normal working condition and a single working day will compose of a maximum of 8 hours. While developing the schedule of the project all the holidays that are applicable have been put into consideration. Project Analysis From the plan, it can be clearly seen that the project is scheduled to begin on 11th September 2017 and end on 15th October 2017. Furthermore, the critical path is the time as well as the cluster of activities to be carried out from the begging to the end of the scheduled project. Normally, there is always one significant path but basing on the nature of this project there is a likelihood of having more than one path for this specific project (Flyvbjerg, 2013). Similarly, basing on the nature of the projects as well as all other dependencies the calculated crucial path of the project was 35 days. Recommendations Various factors were considered to influence the project negatively as a result affecting the date of completion. Three primary activities were identified, and they could affect the project in a negative way. The activities included the unforeseen delays, lack of funds, and unavailability of the necessary resources. However, the most recommended way of eradicating the negative impact to the project schedule is to 2017-11-21T03:21:04.003-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Project-Schedule-45395.aspx Evergreen Enhancement Case Analysis Name Institution Affiliation Date Evergreen Enhancement Case Analysis Problem Statement Richard Alpert must show great leadership as well as make a bold decision and choose Faraday for the promotion as head of the managing VP despite his slightly low 2017-10-10T03:05:13.78-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Evergreen-Enhancement-Case-Analysis-Paper-45382.aspx Evergreen Enhancement Case Analysis Name Institution Affiliation Date Evergreen Enhancement Case Analysis Problem Statement Richard Alpert must show great leadership as well as make a bold decision and choose Faraday for the promotion as head of the managing VP despite his slightly low 2017-10-10T01:45:16.197-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Evergreen-Enhancement-Case-Analysis-45381.aspx IMPACTS OF SMEs ON AFRICA Student: Course: Professor: University: City: Date: Impacts of SMEs on Africa 1.1 Research Background According to the IMF growth outlook of the Africa, the sub-Saharan Africa which for the last decade has maintained robust growth rates seems to be slowing down. The IMF notes that apart from Kenya and Senegal that are experiencing the growth rates above 5%, the majority of other countries in the sub-Saharan Africa are experiencing a depressed growth rate. The group trimmed the initial focus for the economic growth rate in Africa of 2.9% to 2.6% (Aboah, White, and Meuwissen, 2015; pp.7). Some of the major causes of the downward review of the economic performance of the continent are the low-performance rates in the Africa two biggest economies. In 2016 for example, the Nigeria economy which is classified as the largest in the Africa continent in terms of the GDP slipped into recession. The situation has not been any different in Africa second major economy, South Africa which is also in recession. Therefore, without the robust economic performance of these major economies, the contributions by others such as Rwanda, Ethiopia (which have experienced incredible growth rates in the past decade) is small. However, what plagues Nigeria and South Africa economy is what essentially inflicts several other African economies. Notably, except for the South Africa, investments in basic infrastructure in Africa is poor. Much of the continent's population lives in the rural areas (Aboah, White, and Meuwissen, 2015; pp.9). However, the basic infrastructure such as roads and electricity in the countryside of Africa is lacking. Much of the investments in infrastructure is made in the major cities. Even then, much of the infrastructure is put in areas that are in rich suburbs. Lack of these basic infrastructures particularly when the majority of the population is located has been the Achilles hill in the Africa battle of modernization. Moreover, it makes the trade in Africa expensive. For example, it takes close to a week to transport a container cargo from Kenyan port of Mombasa to the Uganda capital city, Kampala. Therefore, goods will reach the port from China much faster, but it will take days before the products reach the owner in Nairobi or Kampala (Aboah, White, and Meuwissen, 2015; pp.13). The lack of the investments in infrastructure of the rural areas has also dwindled the global multinationals from doing business in Africa. Another factor that has also been slowing down the 2017-10-03T05:54:07.837-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/IMPACTS-OF-SMEs-ON-AFRICA-45379.aspx INTRODUCTION Small businesses are the backbone of many economies across the globe. The major challenge is, however, to lure the investors among these small businesses (Buckley 1998:87; Kinunda-Rutashobya & Olomi 1999:7).furthermore small businesses are failed to survive as a backbone of the economic within our country because the absence of investors to inject their capital within these small entities in Zimbabwe because of other reasons including political, economic situation of Zimbabwe, cash flow management , poor planning and management education (training), dominance of management by family members and imperfect and incomplete information about small firms background. These reasons justify why these investors from both local and abroad decided to invest in large firms within our country or outside therefore that’s why some of the businesses that were started in the early 1990s are no longer in existence and also that are not growing beyond the survivalist stage. The high failure rate can be partially attributed to the lack of investors that the small, Medium and micro-enterprises (SMMEs) experience. Cash flow management There has been some research into the matter of why small businesses fail. Dickey (1994: 197) reports that small businesses fail because more often than not cash flow is not properly managed. The point is made that when a business starts or expands; more money needs to be invested for a while and gives the business owner very little in return, therefore some investors they take how the owners of small business manage cash flow into consideration before they take a wise decision to invest their money. According to Hall (1995: 19) van Aardt et al. (2002: 252-3) argue that making and receiving payments is at the heart of a business, so it is essential to have a system that is optimised to maximise cash flow and manage information accurately. There are various reasons why businesses experience cash-flow problems. The above authors mention four factors that affect small businesses to have external sources of finance that are investors: slow-moving or excessive stock (which gives rise to poor stock or inventory management); too generous credit terms; cash wasted on unprofitable products and services; and unnecessary expenditure (money spent on buildings, houses, machines, luxury cars or their salaries). According to Longenecker et al. (2003: 298), cash-flow problems are a frequently expressed concern of small business owners. They believe that if a small business owner does not understand how decisions impact cash 2017-09-18T15:07:53.107-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/WHY-INVESTORS-SHUN-SMALL-FIRMS-AND-INVEST-SOMEWHERE-45374.aspx Student’s Name Professor’s Name Course Date Reasons for an Appeal for more Financial Aid I am writing to appeal against the current bar from financial aid I receive to support my education. I understand that changing my major from communication design to general study by transferring to VCU dental hygienist program has led to the cancellation of the financial aid. 2017-09-09T02:46:51.183-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Reasons-for-an-Appeal-for-more-Financial-Aid-45369.aspx STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT IN ACTION Contents 1.0 Introduction 3 2.0 Case study 1 – Hewlett Packard – Strategy development process 3 2.1 Strategy development process – Intended Strategy – Strengths and Weaknesses 4 2.2 Strategy development process – Emergent Strategy – Strengths and Weakness 4 2.3 Proposed strategy development process – HP 5 3.0 Case study 2 – One Sony? 6 3.1 Organisation's configuration – Structure, Systems and Strategy 6 3.2 7S McKinsey's model – One Sony? 7 3.4 Configuration dilemma – One Sony? 8 4.0 Case Study 3 Leadership and Change Management – Fiat and Chrysler 9 4.1 Change Management and its Challenges – Force Field Analysis 10 4.2 Types of Change by Sergio Machionne 10 4.3 Levers of Change 11 5.0 Conclusion 12 References List 14 1.0 Introduction The management of every company is responsible for its performance and this makes it important to strategize the management systems and to ensure that they all aim at improving the performance of the organisation. Organisations create strategy maps to help them analyse their plan for success. According to Johnston and Marshall (2016), there are many factors that are involved in the policy map whose main goal is to achieve the ultimate business goal. For instance, leadership strategies, marketing strategy and corporate social responsibility (CSR) are factors that helps the business in achieving is ultimate goals. The paper views several strategic management processes and their effects on the respective businesses in the case studies. This includes strategy development process, a configuration of management processes and the leadership management strategies. The paper observes implication of the processes in strategic management and offers the best strategy developed to each case. 2.0 Case study 1 – Hewlett Packard – Strategy development process In 2012, Hewlett Packard's (HP's) profits were declining and it was losing its market share despite having a high turnover of $120 billion. The main reason that attributed the decline could be traced back to the aggravated disagreement within the board. They failed to agree on a coherent strategy that would be used to ensure that the business was run smoothly. Since 2002, the board was having disagreements with the CEOs, and they mostly leaked their discussions to the public, thus creating a perfect opportunity for competitors to outdo them. They used their political position to fire the CEOs if they failed to agree with their opinions. The board had used the company as a way to create an avenue for their recognition by reaching out to the press and this adversely affected the performance of the organisations. 2.1 Strategy development process – Intended Strategy – Strengths 2017-06-26T02:45:11.417-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Strategic-Management-in-Action-2-45356.aspx The 2001 Argentine Economic Crisis Argentina was once one of the largest economies in Latin America during the early 1990s till the early 2000 when she experienced an immense economic crisis. The nation witnessed rapid growth, but rising national debt coupled with inflation resulted in stagnation of economic growth. To minimize inflation, the central bank placed a peg on the Argentinean Peso against the dollar (a Peso to a dollar). The country's strict currency peg to the American dollar, pro-cyclical monetary policies, and excessive global borrowing made Argentina unable to tackle different fiscal shocks (Morales & Clavijo, 2015). Due to concerns about deposit freeze and the peso’s depreciation, interest rates rose abruptly, which ultimately resulted in the 2001 currency and banking crisis. Many factors were responsible for the mentioned crisis. These include government debt, austerity measures, fixed exchange rate, and the devaluation of the local currency. Amid 1999 and 2002, the Argentinean national debt was out of control. This was influenced by inheritance of debt from the 1980s, corruption and poor tax management, reduction in duty incomes from depression, and rise in federal spending (Dellepiane Avellaneda, 2014). Owing to this, global investors lost trust in Argentinean securities and loan fees increased by more than 30%. This forced Argentina to rely on loans from the International Monetary Fund to meet its shortfalls. While reacting to the emergency, the Argentinean government adopted various austerity measures, for example, cutting wages and spending to attempt and achieve IMF deficit reduction objectives. The actions prompted a greater fall in GDP, failed to resolve the crisis, and lowered economic growth, which led to the emergency. Additionally, Argentina avoided the fixed exchange rate and quit attempting to keep the peso pegged to the dollar. The legislature likewise tried to minimize capital outflows by freezing various bank accounts for a year. Leaving the peg prompted an immense downgrading in the peso cash making the inflation at 80%. Notably, leaving the fixed exchange rate coupled with devaluation resulted in low consumer spending in the country (Morales & Clavijo, 2015). The crisis in Argentina made its exports competitive but imports from South American nations such as Brazil uncompetitive. This prompted a significant increment in export demand while the devaluation forced Argentineans to purchase few imports from neighboring countries and more local products. Besides, Argentina was negatively influenced when the dollar increased against the Brazilian Real in 1999. This implied that the Argentinean currency encountered 2017-06-11T05:13:05.937-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-2001-2002-Argentine-Economic-Crisis-45341.aspx Strategic Management in Action Table of Contents 1.0 Introduction 3 2.0 Case Study 1 – Hewlett Packard – Strategy development process 3 2.1 Development of strategies in organizations 4 2.2 Strategy development process – Intended Strategy – Pros and Cons 5 2.3 Strategy development process – Emergent Strategy – Pros and Cons 6 2.4 Proposed policy development process - HP 7 3.0 Case Study 2 – One Sony 8 3.1 Organisation’s configuration – Structure, Systems, and Strategy 8 3.2 7S McKinsey’s model – One Sony? 10 3.3 Configuration dilemma – One Sony 11 4.0 Leadership and change management – Fiat and Chrysler 12 4.1 Change management and its challenges – forcefield analysis 13 4.2 Types of change by Sergio Marchionne 14 4.3 Levers of change that were implemented by Sergio 16 5.0 Conclusion 18 1.0 Introduction The management theories have been changing since the nineteenth century. New management methods are released whenever they have been proven to work. It is important that an organization develops the best management strategy and uses it. The paper discusses three case studies on different scenarios of management to determine effectiveness of management techniques on the business success. The case studies are the Organising for Success- One Sony?, Boardroom Battles at Hewlett Packard and Leadership and Strategic Change: Leading Change in Fiat and Chrysler. 2.0 Case Study 1 – Hewlett Packard – Strategy development process According to the Case Study, the profits made by HP kept reducing despite their high sales. Besides, there were false accusations in that the members of the board were leaking information on each other to the media so that the other members could be viewed as the source of the problem. The board members did not trust themselves and campaigned against the other.. The problems of the company started in 2002 during Carly Fiona’s tenure as the CEO. According to the case study, she publicly condemned one of the board members for opposing the acquisition of Compaq. Issues then started when the members of the board started propagating lies on one another. The case study indicates that the next CEO, Mark Hurd changed the strategy to cutting of costs. However, he failed and again, there was public criticism from the board members. The Case study states that Apokether was the next CEO and he too developed strategies that did not work. The board turned against him and did not want to associate themselves with the strategies which he had implemented that failed. According to the Case Study, Meg Whitman was appointed CEO and initially her strategy to tackle the problems of the organization seemed to be working. However, they 2017-05-23T01:59:00.127-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Strategic-Management-in-Action-45332.aspx Cost Accounting Student’s Name Institution’s Name Cost Accounting a) Primary accounting information needed by each manager Jason Dennis is the Sales Manager, is responsible for supervising all the sales representatives. The primary accounting information that a Sales Manager should know is the customer base for the organization (Jiambalvo, 2010). Since the company is involved in the trading of tennis related products, Jason Dennis would instruct his sales representatives to concentrate their efforts on the people who play tennis for either recreational or for professional reasons. Besides, Jason Denis would require the information of each of the products that they offer at the company. This information includes the cost of each product. The Sales Manager do not just require the cost of a product at the final stage but the cost from the manufacturing stage to the point where it is ready to be sold. Being the Sales Manager, Jason Dennis is also supposed to be familiar with the salary paid to each of his sales representatives (Gregoriou & Finch, 2012). Furthermore, he should know the rate of commission that they are given on successful sales. This information is important because it would enable the company to determine the number of profits made on successful sales. Dave Marley is Cost Accounting Manager and is responsible for supervising the cost accounts. He would be required to know the cost associated with the each product that the company manufactures. These costs fall into two categories (Gregoriou & Finch, 2012). The first type is the period cost category while second is the product price category. Period costs comprise mainly of the expenses incurred in the selling of the goods and the administrative costs while the product costs include the manufacturing overhead cost, the cost of labor and the raw material costs. Manufacturing overhead costs are costs which are related to indirect expenses such as indirect labor and indirect cost of raw materials. Kevin Carson is the Production Supervisor. The Production Supervisor would need information similar to that required by the cost accounting manager (Weygandt, Kieso & Kimmel, 2012). There are only a few differences like information that the two should have. Such a difference in the information required by the two would occur. For instance, the cost accounting manager is required to know both the information on the period cost and the production cost whereas the production need only know the cost of production. Sally Renner, the Engineer, is responsible 2017-05-23T01:48:16.47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cost-Accounting-45331.aspx Demographic Shifts dominating the Real Estate Market due to the Millennial and Baby Boomers Name Institutional Affiliations Demographic Shifts dominating the Real Estate Market due to the Millennial and Baby Boomers Introduction Real estate is one of world’s oldest and significantly dynamic industries as it adjusts to the present needs of the consumers. Considering that the market is highly dependent on the needs of the clients, then it must be connected to any demographic shifts. In this regard, it is important to consider the effect of baby boomers and the millennial in the changes occurring in the real estate industry. Baby boomers, born between 1946 and 1964, and millennial, 1981-1997, are two of the largest cohorts in the economy that tend to affect the performance of each industry, including real estate (Fry, 2016). Considering that real estate market is greatly defined by the existing laws and regulations, the demographical changes in the population will be reviewed from a legal perspective. This essay will argue that legal policies targeting the baby boomers and millennial have significantly influenced the performance of the real estate industry. Demographical Analysis and Industrial Trends To better understand the demographic shifts in the population and their impact on the real estate market, it will be critical to understand the population and present situation in the market. A recent study by the Pew Research Center shows that there are around 75.4 million millennial aged around between 18 and 34 years (Fry, 2016). On the other hand, the baby boomer population was approximated to be around 74.9 million with the age gap of 51-69 (Fry, 2016). Generation X, those born after the boomers but before the millennial, had the least population and were projected to surpass the boomers in the next ten years. Considering that the legal age of owning land or property in the U.S. is 18, then it is prudent to argue that boomers and millennial should be the primary target for real estate merchants (Miroff, Seidelman, Swanstrom, & DeLuca, 2014). While a majority of the millennial population is waiting to own a house or property, a significant number of baby boomers already own property are reluctant on selling it as they expect to recover the value lost after the economic meltdown in the previous decade. Some of the legal issues that may affect the populations are considered in the subsequent sections. Student Loan Burdens The American education system is 2017-05-19T11:53:25.85-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Demographic-Shifts-dominating-the-Real-Estate-Market-due-to-the-Millennial-and-Baby-Boomers-45328.aspx Green Marketing Name Institution Green Marketing Introduction Green marketing is the process of selling products and services that are deemed environmentally friendly. The strategy takes into account various consumer concerns of environmental conservation. It involves highlighting the unique aspects of the company’s products and services that support the preservation of the natural environment (Paillé, Chen, Boiral & Jin, 2014). The products may be environmental friendly in their nature or may be produced in a way that is environmentally friendly (Brindley & Oxborrow, 2014). It includes products that; • Are generated in a sustainable way • Do not contain deadly components such as greenhouse gasses • Can be recycled or mass-produced from other recycled materials • Are produced from renewable resources • Are packaged using low quantity of material • Can be refurbished rather than being thrown away A number issues have caused organizations in various sectors to integrate environmental ethics into their practices. The central issue includes the increasing awareness among consumers of the degradation of the natural environment, which has some detrimental impacts (Brindley & Oxborrow, 2014). The awareness of environmental problems has impacted customers significantly, and it is reflected in their choice of products and services. Companies have responded to this awareness through green consumerism and novel marketing approaches to adhere to changes in consumer preferences. Green marketing enhances the brand image of a business and secures its market share among the increasing number of consumers who are concerned about the protection of the natural environment. Characteristics of Green Marketing Green marketing focuses on environmental friendliness, sustainability, and social responsibility. As stated previously, it involves commercialization of products that are believed to support environmental conservation. It makes sure that the interests of both the consumers and the company are protected through mutual benefit (Polonsky, 2015). Green marketing ensures that the natural environment is protected through reduction of the detrimental impacts the production and consumption of goods and services have on the natural environment. As stated by Brindley and Oxborrow (2014) “the use of goods and services by humans is by nature damaging to the natural environment.” Thus, through green marketing, the key goal of businesses is to reduce the detrimental effects but not to completely eradicate them. The Use of Sustainable Materials The production of different products involves the use of various materials and consumption of energy. Every company has the potential to take part in green improvement and marketing. The constant use of non-renewable materials in the production of goods hinders the goal of environmental protection, 2017-04-22T09:51:45.69-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Green-Marketing-45312.aspx Student Instructor Course Date Moral Versus Legal Rights and Restorative Versus Retributive Justice Question One: Human Rights: Moral or Legal Rights? Introduction. By definition, human rights are privileges that are believed to belong justifiably to every human being; fundamentally, they apply to all human beings, regardless of their culture, race, ethnicity, religion, or sexual orientation — everybody is entitled to them by virtue of being human. Correspondingly, legal rights are claims that are recognized and delimited by the law with the aim of securing them; they are all the rights that are traceable in existing local codes. Essentially, legal positives assert that only the rights that can be alleged to exist legitimately are legal. Contrarily, moral rights are more of moral claims that may or may not be assimilated within international or national law; they propose what society thinks is the ethically right way to treat all people due to the fact that they are human. Over the years, a discourse has emerged on whether human rights should be categorized as legal or moral rights, as they fit various criteria of each of the two groups (Steiner, Alston, and Goodman 78). Nevertheless, prevailing studies as well as logical thinking demonstrate that human rights are more of moral rights than they are legal rights and should be classified as such. Essentially, this paper will defend this stand by demonstrating that both moral and human rights apply equality, and are inalienable, universal, and natural. Equality. First both human rights and moral rights are equal; it is impossible for them to be distributed unjustly. Contrarily, it is possible for legal rights to be unequal; for instance, it is not rare for murderers to walk free after convincing a court of law after exploiting certain legal loopholes, consequently leading to injustice on the part of the victim and his/her family. As mentioned earlier, human rights automatically apply to everyone by virtue of them being human; there is no basis for discrimination, whether race, religion, or sexuality among others, meaning that they apply equally (Wellman 76). On this basis, human rights are moral rights due to the fact that they apply equally to all human beings. Concept of Inalienability. Moreover, human rights, similar to moral rights are inalienable, whereas legal rights are alienable. Essentially, moral rights cannot be taken from a person without his/her consent, unless the person voluntarily surrenders them (Shortall 112). In a similar manner, human rights apply to every human 2017-01-16T01:04:43.733-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/International-Relations-Questions-35267.aspx DESCRIPTION OF OPPORTUNITY Pizza is an Italian delicacy which has won for itself the admiration of Ghanaians both young and old alike. Although the desire for pizza is increasingly rampant, it is also not against the facts to say that pizza has become like an occasional delicacy- taken only on special days such as Christmas, holidays, birthdays celebrations and among others just to mention a few. Fortunately for some and unfortunately for others, the average price of the smallest sized pizza is as worthy as a bag of Ghacem cement. Hence, the pizza that people would have loved to eat more often has become like a ceremonial something because of its price and even those who can afford it stand the risk of being more prone to certain health conditions which accompany excessive intake of chunk foods. It is quite amazing to know that some gentlemen have lost their relationship partners because they could not afford pizza- don’t doubt the power of pizza. Everybody in general ranging from the old, the youth and even some children are all in a constant demand to satisfy the urge of the prestigious feeling that comes with eating pizza. It is due to the magnitude of this need that we deem it fit to venture into this opportunity of pizza production. DESCRIPTION OF THE PRODUCT Our pizza will be made from typical healthy Ghanaian ingredients which are readily available in our local markets across the country. We do not aim to take away the Italian concept of a pizza, that is the crust, the sauce spread and the toppings however we would rebrand the existing pizza format into a more decentralized piece. A crucial change would be the choice of toppings, the regular Italian toppings such as cheese, pepperoni, and sausages will be substituted for local Ghanaian toppings such as boiled beans, roasted groundnuts, honey, coconut and many others. Special flavours will be provided for people such as vegetarians as well as those with health conditions such as diabetes and high blood pressure. The pizza will be in various sizes such as; family size, lovers’ size, hungry man size and kiddie size, each at a defined cost. The pizza will be well packaged in attractive pizza boxes on which the health benefits of ingredients used would be inscribed. The nutritional value, the unique look and taste, the feeling of Ghanaian belongingness as well as the affordable price 2016-12-02T09:54:35.17-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Concept-35254.aspx Engagement Concept: Empathy Student’s Name Institution Affiliation Engagement Concept: Empathy Introduction When a person perceives, understands, experiences and responds to other people’s emotional state and ideas, it is said that such a person is empathetic. Empathy is an essential condition in the establishment of relationships in the society. Being able to put one in the shoes of others and take steps to experience the challenges that they face can prove to be the most worthwhile effort undertaken in trying to understand what other people go through. While it is possible to understand the feelings of other people, a true empathic skill takes into perspective the capacity for an emotional attachment (Birkenmaier et al., 2014). Empathy has a sense of incorporation of a client’s inner perspectives but at the same time retaining personal emotions in a bid to enhance decision making. This illustrates that though a social worker strives to travel through a client’s world, he or she does not lose his or her own objectivity. Empathy has also been described as vicarious introspection to mean that a social worker penetrates the inner world of the clients and at the same time reflects on the feelings invoked. Empathy has also been established as an essential ingredient and dispositional trait in the facilitation of communication skills. The two basic components associated with empathy include affective matching and cognitive component that is concerned with the ability to adopt other people’s perspective. Summary and Application Affective and cognitive are the two primary domains that enhance understanding of empathy in social work practice. The two domains lead to behavioral expressions. Affective includes the constructs of care to the target and congruence. Professional care is a specific form of interpersonal communication whereby one party applies the principles of a specific set of knowledge and skills; for example counseling with a goal of improving human condition. Congruence was a dimension proposed by Rogers and connotes being open, honest and non judgmental in helping a person. The cognitive dimension takes into perspective such factors as flexibility in decision making and intellectuality, openness in understanding and taking the perspectives of other people. Cognition also inculcates the ability to take another point of view regardless of the initial perception. It is paramount for a social worker to try and interpret and understand another person’s mental and emotional state if a fruitful conclusion was to be attained in the long run. Altruism and therapeutic 2016-11-13T04:31:01.707-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Engagement-Concept-Empathy-35247.aspx Financial Analysis JPMorgan Chase Name Institution Financial Analysis JPMorgan Chase In the income statement of the major items for the financial analysis are the net revenues, operating expenses and the net income. The net revenues connote the sales volume for the company that would help in understanding the wholesome growth of the company economically (JPMorgan Chase & Co., 2015). The net operating expenses provides the information of how the management has been controlling the cost to enhance economic growth for JPMorgan chase. The net income reveals how the JPMorgan chase management maximizes the wealth of the shareholder each year. The statistics on these three performance since 2011 to 2015 has been summarized on the below graph. Graph 1.0: Performance Metrics from Income Statement. From the above graph, there has been a steady flow in net revenues which ranges from $80 billion to $ 100 billion. This means the management has been on the forefront in ensuring stability in the sales volume. The operating expenses have been on the decline since year 2011. The net income on the other, has been increasing since 2011. From this analysis, it is evident that JPMorgan chase has had higher economic growth over the years which has culminated into the growth in its net profits (Beutler, 2014). On the balance sheet, the three main items used in this analysis are the total assets, long term debt and common shareholders’ capital. These three items are quite vital in understanding the net worth of the company. The long terms debt shows leverage that the company has and how best the investors can rely on it for more profitability (Healy, & Palepu, 2012). The shareholder equity shows how their wealth has grown over the years and the control the shareholders have on the firm’s management for Chase Company. The following chart provide an insightful information about the trends brought on board by the company through three performance metrics (JPMorgan Chase & Co., 2015). From the above chart, it is evident that the firm has high amounts of assets from the year 2011 which has been increasing until the year 2014. The firm has also increased in terms of the shareholders’ equity. The debts have been reducing since the year 2011 but at a slow rate. So far there are no fluctuation in the amounts of debt of the company meaning the firm management is conservative in terms of 2016-10-23T09:54:28.54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-Analysis-JPMorgan-Chase-35237.aspx Law Enforcement Management Student’s Name Institutional Affiliation Introduction The police service has been subjected to a series of continual change over the last few decades. These changes have been stimulated by the introduction of new policies such as new public management initiative (NPM). The main tenet of the NPM is the promotion of new managerial and professional subjectivities while utilizing a wide range of managerial tools and techniques that are aimed at reconfiguring the professional attitude, priorities, values, and self-understanding. The central elements in the police service have been the re-branding from ‘force’ to ‘service’ and the promotion of feminized professional norm, increased tolerance and creation of equal and unbiased opportunity for all (Deljkic, Lucic-CatiC, 2011). The success of such models requires a reorientation of the policing performance from a system that legitimizes a competitive masculine subjectivity while emphasizing crime fighting and reduction to a more ethical and professional model that is based on the community and its occupants while adopting a problem-solving orientation and equality principles. In the light of poor public image and discrimination, the police service has been compelled to abandon the traditional culture where harassment and macho masculinity are prominent. At the start of the new millennium, police officers around the world are witnessing a gradual change in the ways their leadership is structured and in their professional roles and identities. Implementation of Community Policing To ensure that community policing is successful, there should exist a permanent change in the organizational culture and the orientation of the individual police officers and their senior leadership. However, many scholars have highlighted policing culture as the main hindrance to this new philosophy. The traditional policing is comprised of a formalized bureaucratic and standardized set of working conditions and systems with a profoundly entrenched and pervasive professional culture. The identity of the traditional policing is constructed as a mechanism of fighting crime. The traditional policing emphasize on reactive and incident driven policing which squarely fits into the masculine domain with the societal stereotypes of manliness mapping on the requirements to be a good cop. The cop culture that has mainly developed due to traditional policing has three main qualities; informality, solidarity, and masculinity (Bain, Robinson, Conser, 2014). This form of policing is endemic and enduring in the police services and towards the values of machismo, action, sexism, political and social conservatism and in extreme cases racism. Research has revealed a substantial amount 2016-10-19T22:58:16.66-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Law-Enforcement-Management-35235.aspx Center of Excellence Introduction Innovation is the most vital element in any business venture. With the ever growing business rivalries, companies have been forced to rely on creative aspects to maintain their competitiveness. In that regard, companies invest substantial amounts in the Research and Development (R&D) docket to ascertain the available opportunities. However, some frequently stagnate due to the lack of sufficient grounds to expand. Others just fear failure. Some entrepreneurs are afraid to venture in novel projects owing to the intricacy involved. Whereas, others are always willing to try something new. Nestle is one such company that was established from novel opportunities. Presently, it is the largest food company across the globe as determined by its revenues. Back in 2014, it was ranked number 72 out of 500 on the Fortune Global. It has a wide variety of products including; bottled water, frozen food, snacks, pet foods, ice cream, baby food, breakfast cereals, dairy products, confectionery, coffee, and tea among others. The company is a practical example of how simple innovation can lead to greater things. Based in Switzerland, the company began with the creation of powder that mixed in with milk to help mothers who could not breastfeed their infants (Monk, 2016). Another aspect related to innovation is the target market. In other words, once the innovator realized some mothers could not breastfeed their children, a solution was developed to alleviate the issue (Monk, 2016). In that regard, innovation is more effective when it targets a particular issue. Such was the exactness of the innovation that resulted to the current expansions in chocolate, coffee and so on (Nestle, 2016). A standard feature in big brands is the ability to monitor the “weak signals.” These are untapped ideas that probably have not hit the market. They can be common in one state yet not popular in another (Monk, 2016). In that respect, companies must have the ability to monitor the ideas and join them together to form a working product or service for the consumers. The companies listen to the trends through platforms such as social media and figure out how improvements can be made. In that regard, consumer insight is one of the key elements of innovation. Relationships are also critical when it comes to innovation. As exemplified at the center of excellence, the marketing and R&D team must have an idea of how a particular product will impact on the 2016-10-04T00:36:21.587-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Center-of-Excellence-35231.aspx PepsiCo Sustainable Strategies Name Instructor Institution Course Date PepsiCo Sustainable Strategies According to Rosenberg (2015), the concept of sustainable development is a well-acknowledged business principle. Amid the intensifying consciousness of the potential impressions of organizations on the environment, companies of all types and sizes have begun instigating environmental sustainability initiatives into their structural frameworks. As such, firms seeking sustainability have introduced programs that are bent on mitigating the adverse effects of their business processes on the environment. PepsiCo is one of the enterprises that have sustainable management practices that enable its executives to effectively drive a sustainable culture. Undoubtedly, PepsiCo cultivates sustainability right from its employee culture. PepsiCo is using its human resource department as a tool to integrate the concept of sustainability into the firm’s culture (PEPSICO, 2015). The establishment inspires sustainability from the procedures of hiring employees, training them, and providing employee welfare packages. PepsiCo hires only qualified candidates, who are then trained on sustainable business practices (PEPSICO, 2015). This creates a sense of belonging, which is further cemented by the presence of an employee welfare package. As a result, PepsiCo’s employees are always motivated to work harder; mirrored in the high quality of the company’s products. In addition to a sustainable employee culture, PepsiCo also engages in ecological manufacturing practices like (but not limited to): diverting its waste from landfills, reducing its greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and organic packaging. Additionally, PepsiCo’s executives efficaciously drive a sustainable culture by the reduction of water usage per unit of beverage production, climate protection, empowering women, and sustainable farming initiatives (SFIs) (PEPSICO, 2015). In this regard, PepsiCo can be referred to as a “sustainable company” because it engages in organizational practices that are characteristic of an ecologically conscious company. Above and beyond the sustainable management initiatives that PepsiCo has in play, there are other feasible strategies it can successfully employ. It is important to take note of the fact that PepsiCo is majorly engaged in a sustainable “resource management” type of strategy because its good manufacturing practices (GMPs) are aimed at saving natural resources like water, food (SFIs), and energy. Nonetheless, PepsiCo can also engage in sustainable stakeholder management as a strategy. Using this management approach, PepsiCo can review the feasible option of adding value 2016-09-26T23:19:37.79-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/PepsiCo-Sustainable-Strategies-35229.aspx Effects of Music on Video Production Music has been part of man since time immemorial. Music has many impacts on human nature and defines man in different ways. Movies and music have been working together for a long time and the latter plays a significant role in filmmaking. It has prominently featured in movies because it affects our emotions; it can make one cry, laugh or can even scare. Scientific findings show that music affects the auditory cortex which handles sound in the brain and the emotion center (Boltz 116). Therefore, music improves memory and accelerates brain function and in return, helps the audience to memorize the film for a long time. It also enables the audience to absorb more from the movie. The research conducted from the drama “The Memory Dealer,” shows that music in the film has so many effects. The study showed that music played a fantastic role in enabling the subjects to be absorbed into the action movie. It also indicated that the music helped the actors to become more confident and therefore, making them hold on to a certain amount of self-reflection and get engaged fully into the action by understanding their roles. The music helped create a particular atmosphere that made the actors move quickly and understand who they were in the movie. It is believed that music works upon our unconscious mind and therefore, the listener does not need to understand the meaning of the music, but rather, pay attention to how the music makes them feel. The music helps one create their thoughts; evoke memories, and feelings while watching the movie. Music helps us get involved with the movie and affects our behavior and our moral attitudes while watching the film. It also helps us reflect on the actions in the movie from our sitting comfort or even in our sleep. The interrelation between the visual and auditory aspects of the movie makes it fascinating and adds heightened realism. The aspect of music in advertisements to influence the customer’s feeling and association with the product is likened to how music in movies, 2016-09-22T11:50:02.903-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/-Effects-of-Music-on-Video-Production-35227.aspx Enrique’s Journey Enrique’s Journey portrays the story of a Honduran boy as he travels in search of his mother, who had earlier migrated to the U.S. During his treacherous journey, Enrique faces many heartbreaking challenges. Notably, his attempts to cross into American territory are frequently denied. While at Nuevo Laredo, Enrique’s experiences prove that people are basically evil. The evil in humanity refers to both the perpetration of criminal activities and the unwillingness to help others in need. Enrique had lost his mother’s cell phone number while on a freight train. Consequently, he gets stuck at the border for several days. Despite failing to reach El Norte on seven previous attempts, Enrique remains determined to cross the border. He is primarily concerned that his mother would worry when she calls Honduras and fails to find him. Furthermore, Enrique’s mother could have found a smuggler to take him to his destination. Consequently, he sees the urgent need to obtain her number and telephone her. In this regard, Enrique would need at least 100 pesos to make two calls. However, the evil nature of the people at the border is manifested through the fact that they cannot lend him any money. Besides, the Mexicans in Nuevo Laredo felt entitled to migrate into the U.S. However, most people could neither provide jobs nor food. Hence, Enrique was forced to earn a living by offering to wash cars. Although he approached several people, only a couple of drivers agreed to let him clean the vehicle. The intense competition for clients heightened the difficulty of finding work. In addition, the encampment is populated with hardened criminals and drug users. Nuevo Laredo has immigration agents who customarily use physical violence on the migrants. Some civilians also brandish machetes as they seek out illegal migrants. The corrupt nature of immigration authorities hinders victims of assault from seeking justice. Therefore, the people in Nuevo Laredo are evil due to their vices and lack of compassion. Moreover, El Tirindaro serves as the leader of the encampment. He was highly respected since he customarily smuggled people across the river. Nevertheless, his evil traits were displayed in his addiction to heroin. Furthermore, El Tirindaro demanded beer and drugs from any immigrant that wished to live in peace and security. He also tattooed people and sold immigrants’ clothes to finance his evil habits. The extent of evil is seen in that the majority of the 2016-08-08T00:39:05.72-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Enrique’s-Journey-35209.aspx Management structures BP (British Petroleum) is one of the largest and most dominant oil and gas companies in the world by market capitalization and revenue. Its business in the energy industry included exploration of fossil fuels, production, and refining, petrochemicals, distribution and marketing. Although its primary dealings are in the fossil fuels sector, the company has recently developed interests in renewable sources of energy such as wind power and biofuels. The corporation, whose headquarters are located in London, is rated among the ‘supermajor’ in the global energy sector (Hilyard 2012). BP was founded in the early 20th century as the Anglo Persian Oil Company. It underwent several challenges in the first half of the century before it was acquired by the United Kingdom government, which led to a change of name to British Petroleum (BP). Today, it has a presence throughout the world. BP is mainly present in geographical locations where fossil fuels exist as well as the strategic location for refining, transporting and marketing its products (Bamberg 2009). The most important resource in any organization is the human capital. The success of a business is dependent on the ability of the corporate structures to bring people with shared values together to work towards a common goal. The structure defines how the individuals are built up into a working group. BP is a huge corporation with complex and diverse activities. The management structures are essential in ensuring that the massive workforce, distributed throughout the world, works towards a common objective. In the management structure, people are grouped into layers. Each stratum in the corporate hierarchy has a different level of roles and responsibilities (Albrechtsen & Besnard 2013). The central decision-making organ in BP operations is the board. According to the company website, the board has the responsibility of proving direction as well as oversight over all activities of the organization on behalf of the shareholders. The board represents the owners of the company and, therefore, is accountable to them. It is composed of thirteen members, which includes the chairman (Carl Henric Svanberg), two executive members, nine non-executive members and one independent director. The executive, through the chief operating officer and the chief financial officer, reports directly to the board. To achieve its mandate, it has established principles and values that guide the organization. The foundation of the principles governing its operations is the importance of “clarity of roles 2016-08-02T22:51:28.447-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/BP-35208.aspx Dear Sir/ Madam, I would like to express my interest in an Administrative Assistant Position for your organization. I believe I am a strong and potential candidate for a position at you organization. I graduated from Science Faculty, Kabul University, currently I am doing diploma in English language in Kardan University also I have attended number of trainings and workshops. I have more than a year of experience in Administrative and Program in Education department. I have ability to work fast, communicate well and to solve problems. I believe that my strengths and abilities are exactly what you are looking for to fill the position and would be the best candidate. I look forward to speak with you. Thank you for your consideration. Best Regards Parisa Sabbar Parisa Sabbar Parisa.sabbar@akdn.org Parisasabbar33@gmail.com 0790172042 Macroreyan, Kabul, Afghanistan PROFILE A BSc in physics, having more than a year of Experience in administration and Monitoring and evaluation in an international non-governmental organization, excellent computer and English skills I feel myself very suitable for your organization, where I could increase my experience and would bring positive changes to your organization. KEY SKILLS Computer Skills ? Operating System (Dos & Windows) ? MS Office (Word, Excel, Access and Power point) ? Internet Browsing and emailing ? Out look Language Skills Languages Reading Writing Understanding Speaking Dari Native Native Native Native Pashto Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent English Excellent Very Good Excellent Very Good Urdu Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent EDUCATION ? 2015- kardan University, Diploma in English Language ? 2013- Kabul University, BSc in Physics ? 2009- Abul Qaseem Firdausi High School, High School Graduate ? 2013- Rahnamoon English Language & Computer Center, Completed MS. Office Package ? 2015- CW4W, Certificate of 5 days training on Librarianship And Reading Promotion ? 2014- WSI, Certificate of 3 days training on Monitoring and Evaluation WORK EXPERIENCE Education Program Assistant AKF-A| Kabul, Afghanistan May2015 - Till Now Key Responsibilities ? Responsible for taking notes of Education weekly, monthly and quarterly meeting and workshops. ? Responsible for short translations. (English to Dari and Dari to English). ? Responsible for collecting and reviewing monthly timesheets of Education Department. ? Responsible for liaising with procurement department for full range of logistical and procurement needs in NPO Education Office. ? Responsible to assist 2016-07-03T00:11:09.34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/four-paragraph-eassay-on-accounting-35205.aspx I intend to concentrate on the issues of stress inside organizational behavior. How it is 2016-01-18T11:37:13.737-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Stress-In-the-Workplace-35163.aspx Analysis of Apple Inc.'s financial statements for the period from 2013 to 2014 using finstanon.com This report analyzes the balance sheets and income statements of APPLE INC.. Trends for the major balance sheet and income statement items and ratio analysis are used to understand the financial position and financial effectiveness of the company. The report studied the 2013 - 2014 period. 1. The Common-Size Analysis of the Assets, Liabilities and Shareholders' Equity Table 1. Assets Trend Analysis, in million USD Indicators 2013 2014 Absolute change, +/- Percentage change, % Cash, cash equivalents 14259 13844 -415 -2.91 Marketable securities (short-term investments) 26287 11233 -15054 -57.27 Receivables, net, current 20641 27219 6578 31.87 Inventory, net 1764 2111 347 19.67 Other assets, current 10335 14124 3789 36.66 CURRENT ASSETS (TOTAL) 73286 68531 -4755 -6.49 Property, plant and equipment, net 16597 20624 4027 24.26 Long-term investments, net 106215 130162 23947 22.55 Goodwill 1577 4616 3039 192.71 Intangible assets, net (excluding goodwill) 4179 4142 -37 -0.89 Other assets, noncurrent 5146 3764 -1382 -26.86 NONCURRENT ASSETS (TOTAL) 133714 163308 29594 22.13 ASSETS (TOTAL) 207000 231839 24839 12 It can be noticed from Table 1 that there was a tendency to increase in the total value of the assets. The percentage change was equal 12% in 2014. The value of the assets totalled USD 231,839 million at the end of 2014. The overall increase of the assets reflects a growth in the noncurrent assets by 22.13%, while the value of the current assets dropped by 6.49%. The change of the noncurrent assets value in 2013-2014 was connected with the growth of the following assets: - Property, plant and equipment (24.26%) - Long-term investments (22.55%) - Goodwill (192.71%) The change of the current assets value in 2013-2014 was connected with a negative change of the following assets: - Cash, cash equivalents (-2.91%) - Marketable securities (short-term investments) (-57.27%) Table 2. Sources of Finance (Equity and Liabilities) Trend Analysis, in million USD Indicators 2013 2014 Absolute change, +/- Percentage change, % Accounts payable, current 22367 30196 7829 35 Accrued liabilities, current 4782 7689 2907 60.79 Debt, current 0 6308 6308 division by 0 Other liabilities, current 16509 19255 2746 16.63 CURRENT LIABILITIES 43658 63448 19790 45.33 Long-term debt and capital lease obligations 16960 28987 12027 70.91 Long-term tax liability 16489 20259 3770 22.86 Other liabilities, noncurrent 6344 2015-12-10T09:06:54.107-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-of-Apple-Inc_-s-financial-statements-for-the-period-from-2013-to-2014-using-finstanon_com-35157.aspx Virginia Brazilian Jiu Jitsu Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu is a highly effective and comprehensive system of standing and ground defense techniques utilizing rules of leverage. Many real life examples show most street attacks will end up on the ground. This makes BJJ (Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu) an ideal martial art for theses situations which demand simple and effective responses. Individuals will be able to train realistically in a safe environment. Notwithstanding it’s selfdefense potential, BJJ offers a tremendous workout emphasizing aerobic and anaerobic conditioning, making it an enjoyable workout for women, men, and children regardless of athletic ability. The greatest advantage Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu offers is the ability for a smaller person to learn principles of leverage that will assist them in defending against or defeating a larger opponent. Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu techniques were refined and innovated by the late Grand Master Helio Gracie who weighed no more that 145 pounds. Master Gracie focused on using only techniques that involved the use of very little strength but emphasized leveraging and positioning the body to defend attacks and control a harmful situation. We are proud and most fortunate to have Master Pedro Sauer, a red-black belt directly under Helio and Rickson Gracie as the main instructor for our Gracie Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu program. Master Sauer was voted the “Best of the Best Brazilian Jiu-Jitsu Instructor” in a worldwide poll. Adult and Children’s classes are offered. Muay Thai Boxing Muay Thai is the national sport of Thailand. Muay Thai is a style of kick boxing where participants fight in the ring using their fists, feet, elbows and knees in a style that has become world renowned for its simplicity and effectiveness. The term “kickboxing” originally referred to a sport which paired International Rules Boxing with Kicks allowed above the waist. Over the last 30 years, the term “Kickboxing” has now come to encompass all manner of full contact striking sports, including Shoot fighting, San Shou, San Da, Savate, and Muay Thai. Muay Thai is, in fact, considered the original sport of Kickboxing, having adapted international-style rules to compete in a boxing ring during the late 1920’s and 1930’s. The Muay Thai program offered at Pedro Sauer Total Self-Defense Academy is based upon the teachings and philosophy of Ajam Chai Sirisute, the founder and President of the Muay Thai Boxing Association of the United States. The programs offered are taught by Khru Bryan Mossey. Khru Mossey has studied Western Boxing, Filipino Panatukan Boxing, and Thai Boxing for a combined 27 years. Khru Mossey is a certified instructor under Ajam Chai Sirsute and continues to support Thai boxing Association worldwide. Krav Maga Krav Maga is the official hand to hand combat system of the Israeli Defense 2015-11-05T05:53:35.63-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Virginia-Brazilian-Jiu-Jitsu-35147.aspx Star Automobiles Ltd. Pimpary is in the field of manufacturing of two wheelers. They manufacture and market mopeds. These are available in the brand names ‘arrow’ and ‘double arrow’ where ‘arrow’ is their traditional product and ‘double arrow’ is the improved version. The company was started about 20 yrs ago. Their product ‘arrow’ enjoys a reasonably good reputation and they were comfortable in the market. However, with the entry of the new generation of fuel-efficient mopeds the company started loosing its market. They immediately started developing the improved ‘double arrow’ but by the time they came out with this new model the competitors had already strengthened their position in the market. The arrow model was still acceptable by a segment of the market as it was cheapest vehicle. ‘Double arrow’ is new generation vehicle. It was costlier than Jet but its performance was much superior. It is compared favorably with the competitors’ products; however it was yet to gain a foot hold in the market. The company had to refurbish the marketing activities in order to get back their market share. They employed young sales engineer to launch a strong sales drive. Mr. Ramesh Tiwari, Btech and a diploma holder in marketing got selected and was put on the job. Mr. Ramesh Tiwari started well in his new job. He was given a territory to contact the prospective customers’ and to book the orders. The company had introduced a new financial assistance scheme. Under this scheme, buyers were given easy loans. It was particularly advantageous for group booking by employees working in an organization. Mr. Ramesh Tiwari was able to contact people in different organization, arrange for group bookings and facilitate the loans. His performance was good in the first year and in the second year of his service. The company had its own system of rewarding those whose performance happened to be good. They usually arranged a paid holiday trip for the good performer along with his wife. Mr. Ramesh Tiwari was accordingly informed by the marketing manager to go to Chennai with his wife on company expenses. Mr. Ramesh Tiwari asked him as to how much it would cost to the company. The marketing manager calculated and told him that it would cost about 8000/-. He quickly asked him whether he could get that 8000/- in cash instead of the trip as he had better plans. The marketing manager countered this saying that it might not be possible to doso. It was not the trading of the company, however he would check with the 2015-05-09T22:57:59.343-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/wage-policy-in-india-35111.aspx ABC1-Set1 Marks: 86 Number of Questions: 86 ABC1 ABC1-Set1 1. Item code: 964.1.1-01.1 One employee in a company always seems willing to help other employees with aspects of their own jobs. This employee is a positive force and a "team player" within the organization. Which dimension of organizational citizenship behavior does this employee demonstrate? Choose 1 answer a) Altruism b) Courtesy c) Civic virtue d) Sportsmanship e) Conscientiousness Answer: Altruism, ________________________________________ 2. Item code: 964.1.1-02.3 A manager rates one of his/her employees very highly on all dimensions of job performance, including some dimensions (such as creativity) for which there was no observed behavior. These ratings most likely reflect what type of rating error? Choose 1 answer a) Halo b) Logical c) Central tendency d) Positive leniency e) Negative leniency Answer: Halo, ________________________________________ 3. Item code: 964.1.1-03.3 A company requires job applicants to lift 50 pounds over their head as part of the selection process. While most jobs do not require any lifting, the company wants all its employees to be "physically fit." This selection procedure results in a greater percentage of females than males failing the selection test. Which type of employment discrimination is this? Choose 1 answer a) Quid pro quo b) Adverse impact c) Adverse treatment d) Disparate treatment e) Hostile work environment Answer: Adverse impact, ________________________________________ 4. Item code: 964.1.1-04.3 An employee reports losing motivation on the job because other employees with lesser qualifications are getting promoted ahead of him. What is this loss in motivation is an example of? Choose 1 answer a) Force b) Valence c) Inequity d) Expectancy e) Instrumentality Answer: Inequity, ________________________________________ 5. Item code: 964.1.1-06.1 Groupthink is a phenomenon observed in some teams that are characterized by very high levels of _____. Choose 1 answer a) Trust b) Cohesion c) Conflict d) Diversity e) Communication Answer: Cohesion, ________________________________________ 6. Item code: 964.1.1-07.2 A company's workday ends at 5:00 p.m. However, the employees in the marketing department do not leave for home until their work is completed for the day, which is often around 5:30. What concept differentiates the employees in the marketing department from the other employees of this company? Choose 1 answer a) Roles b) Norms c) Cultures d) Formal rules Answer: Norms, ________________________________________ 7. Item code: 964.1.1-08.1 Consultation, reasoning, friendliness, and inspirational appeals among people at work are examples of _____. Choose 1 answer a) Influence tactics b) Transactional costs c) Transformational factors d) Leadership characteristics Answer: Influence tactics, ________________________________________ 8. Item code: 964.1.1-09.1 What is the personality of an individual analogous to in an organization? Choose 1 answer a) Role b) Norm c) Culture d) Demeanor e) Function Answer: Culture, ________________________________________ 9. Item code: 964.1.1-10.3 What is the production department in a manufacturing organization known as? Choose 1 answer a) The line function b) The staff function c) Centralized structure d) The span of control e) Decentralized structure Answer: The line function, ________________________________________ 10. Item code: 964.1.1-11.3 What 2015-05-07T18:42:22.633-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/WGU-ABC1-Exam-35110.aspx Personality Impact Tricia Pawlowski MGT/312 01/26/2015 Mohammad Yunus Personality Impact Within every growing organization lies people, people’s individual cognitive abilities, and their many different personality types. When one realizes that there is a cornucopia of diversity and culture that makes up most of our world’s workforce, and also understands the many different personality types and cognitive abilities of said people, it gives us the competency to maintain and grow an efficient place to work; not only for us managers, but for all employees. It was because of this simple premise that caused me to take a closer look into my own personality traits and cognitive abilities. I did this by using the Big 5 Personality Traits profile to analyze my own personality traits (of the five there are: agreeableness, extroversion, conscientiousness, neuroticism, and openness to experiences). Along with my personality profile, I also was able to ascertain the many cognitive abilities that I possess and that of which would be best fit for my organization. My Big 5 Personality Traits Profile EXAMPLE 1.1 The chart above (EXAMPLE 1.1) represents my Big 5 Personality Traits Profile and its findings there in. From the information I have gathered, I was able to conclude that I tend to affect many situations in the workplace in a positive way (extraversion). However, it also indicated that opposite of extraversion, introversion and neuroticism, I have a tendency to affect the workplace in a negative way, but I’d like to think that I do that within myself and not upon other people (J Gerontol (1981) pg. 78-81). The trait that I score average on is that I am very organized and like to do each task well (conscientious). Even though this one it middle ground, I would like to think that this is my most prominent attribute personality wise (JDR (1984) 63 (10): 1182-1185). I scored quite low on openness to experiences and even lower on agreeableness, which suggests that I have a lot of work to do on my part as far as being a great manager. Cognitive Abilities Profile You cannot complete a profile for workplace personality traits and not begin to identify what cognitive abilities you possess that would benefit your organization to the fullest, so I did just that. My Cognitive Abilities Profile suggests that my top three cognitive abilities are listed as follows: I am able to understand and use written and spoken language strongly (verbal ability); a great trait 2015-01-29T07:22:00.28-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Personality-Impact-35081.aspx Sliding Shower Enclosures Cardinal Shower Enclosures is a full service domestic manufacturer of shower enclosures, offering an extremely wide selection of models, finishes and glass options, from patterned to cast glass. Our enclosures are engineered to the highest possible standards for maximum reliability, and carry a lifetime guarantee against defects in craftsmanship and materials on extruded aluminum parts. We also produce all of our stunning cast glass in-house, ensuring the best quality for your enclosures and architectural glass applications. Cast Glass Cardinal would like to introduce you to our new line of ultra premium art glass shower enclosures. The three dimensional character of art glass provides a beautifully stunning alternative to the premium heavy glass units more commonly available. Now, for the first time, your shower enclosure can be the gem of your bathroom. Cardinal offers many stock patterns from which to choose, but there is no limit to the design opportunities. You can give us a drawing of your own design or offer your ideas and have our artists design a custom pattern for you. Let your imagination run wild. Do you want your shower enclosure to reflect your hobby, your family, your favorite place in the world? All these are possible with Cardinal Art Glass. Possibly you are looking to buy premium shower enclosures for a hotel. Why not let us put your logo in each door? The glass is fabricated to accommodate Cardinal heavy glass hinges, clips, pulls and towel bars. Sliding Door Enclosures Cardinal Shower Enclosures offers several trim levels of sliding door enclosures, from the basic Cardinal Builder series up to the luxurious Heavy Euro and Apollo series. Framed sliders have metal all the way around the glass while frameless sliders have clips holding the top of the glass. Be sure to check out the Cardinal S-Curve option. It can dramatically change the look of a basic shower enclosure. Cardinal Builder Series Available as the "Trojan Series" on the West Coast The Cardinal Builder series enclosures are our base line of sliders Solidly built and designed to last for years Several stock sizes are available to match most fiberglass tub inserts and basic tub and shower enclosures Available with our standard double-towel bar Euro Series The Euro series are available in FIVE trim levels: Light Euro Series - Featuring Light Euro header, 3/16" glass and clamp-on single towel bar Traditional Euro Series - Upgrades with 1/4" Clear glass and through-the-glass towel bars Euro Series - Upgrades to our heavy duty header suitable for taller and wider units Platinum Riviera Euro Series - Upgrades to the Platinum header & rollers (see below) and 5/16" slider glass Heavy Euro Series - Upgrades with the 2014-12-11T06:40:17.57-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Sliding-Shower-Enclosures-35071.aspx Describe the Business I am a small business owner. In fact, the business is a service-disabled veteran-owned business. I qualify as a service-disabled veteran-owned business as the Department of Veteran Affairs has determined that I have a service-connected disability after my six years of service, and I own over 51% of my business. My business produces prosthetic limbs for amputees. The prosthetic limbs are made specifically to fit the veteran. The recent Iraq and Afghanistan wars have left many service members in need of prostheses. Additionally, the aging veteran population is also in need of prostheses due to diabetes and other long-term diseases. Federal Government Procurement Opportunity The Department of Veteranss Affairs develops medical contracts to supply prosthetics to veterans. The Department of Veterans Affairs has contracts with various companies, such as Morfey Limbs and Braces, to provide prosthetic limbs. Many of these companies are large and are not certified with the Small Business Administration, but the Department of Veteran Affairs is charged, nationally, with having 10% of their contracts be with service-disabled veteran-owned businesses My business can help the Department of Veterans Affairs meet their goal of 10%. The Department of Veterans Affairs contract for prosthetic limb with vendors at the Veterans Integrated Service Network (VISN) and their acquisition centers. My business is located in VISN 12 and their Great Lakes Acquisition Center area More specifically, my business is located in Chicago, IL. Veterans often have local vendors to design and create their limbs. Many veterans live within the Chicagoland area, and being a service-disabled veteran-owned business, I am more likely to earn the business of the veterans in need of prosthetics because I am just like them: a veteran. Current Strategies and Strategic Success Strategic business planning is essential for company wishing to contract with the government. To plan strategically, the contractor must answer three questions: “Where does the organization want to go?; What is the environment in which the organization operates and competes?; How will the organization get to where it wants to go (i.e., what actions are required)?” My company wants to win a prosthetic contract from the GLAC. It is one thing to be a one-off sole source purchase due to the veteran’s choice, but it is another to have the company on a contract with the government. That is where we want to go with the business. The company operates in a competitive environment. While there are few companies that make prosthetic 2014-10-13T04:25:36.753-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-Small-Business-35055.aspx T h e r e a r e c o u n t l e s s t y p e s o f o r g a n i z a t i o n s , w i t h d o z e n s o f d e p a r t m e n t s w i t h i n , i n t h e w o r l d a n d t h e y n e e d t o b e r u n e f f i c i e n t l y s o t h e y c a n u l t i m a t e l y f u l f i l l t h e i r m i s s i o n w i t h t h e i r i n t e n d e d s t r a t e g y a n d b e c o m e p r o f i t a b l e . M a n y o f t h e s e h a v e b e e n s a v e d b y a s w i t c h i n m a n a g e m e n t s t y l e b o r n o u t o f n e c e s s i t y . M a n a g e r s a r e t h e k e y b e h i n 2014-05-04T23:25:23.11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/How-Big-Tasks-Are-Managed-and-Accomplished-35029.aspx 2014-04-23T11:53:14.79-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Rules-and-Regulations-35018.aspx Brazil Apparel And Footwear Market to Reach USD 154,251.6 million by 2017: Ken Research Women 2013-10-30T04:14:58.787-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Brazil-Apparel-And-Footwear-Market-to-Reach-USD-154,251_6-million-by-2017-Ken-Research-34981.aspx Court Management Pilot Project Executive summary The greatest problem of district courts is that of huge backlog of cases leading to undue delay in deciding cases. Shifting the blame on judicial system only will not cure such problem. Now recently the Hon'ble Chief Justice of India has launched a National Court Management Program. New Methods and New Roles are necessary in the Justice Delivery System which was pleased to addressed by Hon'ble Shri. Justice Mohit S.Shah, Chief Justice of the Bombay High Court at the inauguration of the conference of the Judicial officer on “Enhancing Quality of Adjudication” at Judicial Academy Uttan, Thane. At District & Sessions Court, Thane , formulated a mission to develop “ Best Practices Guide” for improving Judicial Quality, Enhancing court management and reduce pendency. The Hon'ble Shri. K.K. Sonawane, Principal District Judge, Thane who is also the Patron-In-Chief of this mission pleased to establish to develop Best Practices Guide at Thane Court with a series of administrative stages to facilitate continuous monitoring , mentoring and , if necessary to to guide to ensure cases are disposed at the earliest opportunity at Civil Judge Junior Division and J.M.F.C. Courts. This pilot project is for the one of the object from the mission to develop Best Practices Guide , to decrease old pendency and Increase rate of disposal in Civil Judge Junior Division and J.M.F.C. Courts Bhiwandi District Thane. The period of Pilot project was from December 2012 to February 2013. It is an Executive Mentoring program. There are Eight Courts of Civil Judge Jr. Dn. & J.M.F.C at Bhiwandi Thane. Physical verification of cases by qualitative and quantitative manner is like a health check of the the court. Unless physically fit , the surgery can not be carried out. So, unless cases are physically verified by qualitative and quantitative way , the result for new method can not be Calculated /evaluated. At four courts , physical verification by quantitative method was carried out , therefore those courts are selected and taken as Pilot courts. Other Four courts where balance sheet and physical verification was not carried out , those are considered as Nonpiloting courts. Some Pilot courts are concentrating over criminal cases though civil cases are vested to them. Mentoring sessions were held for all courts. This pilot project shows effect over piloting and non piloting area. In this pilot project, the disposal from previous three months from September 2012 to November 2012 was compared with the disposal during the pilot project period . The aspects are researched , for pilot courts , increasing percentage rate of disposal per 2013-09-29T03:30:34.27-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/court-management-mentor-judge-District-Court-Thane-Maharashtra-India-34970.aspx Court Management Pilot Project Executive summary The greatest problem of district courts is that of huge backlog of cases leading to undue delay in deciding cases. Shifting the blame on judicial system only will not cure such problem. Now recently the Hon'ble Chief Justice of India has launched a National Court Management Program. New Methods and New Roles are necessary in the Justice Delivery System which was pleased to addressed by Hon'ble Shri. Justice Mohit S.Shah, Chief Justice of the Bombay High Court at the inauguration of the conference of the Judicial officer on “Enhancing Quality of Adjudication” at Judicial Academy Uttan, Thane. At District & Sessions Court, Thane , formulated a mission to develop “ Best Practices Guide” for improving Judicial Quality, Enhancing court management and reduce pendency. The Hon'ble Shri. K.K. Sonawane, Principal District Judge, Thane who is also the Patron-In-Chief of this mission pleased to establish to develop Best Practices Guide at Thane Court with a series of administrative stages to facilitate continuous monitoring , mentoring and , if necessary to to guide to ensure cases are disposed at the earliest opportunity at Civil Judge Junior Division and J.M.F.C. Courts. This pilot project is for the one of the object from the mission to develop Best Practices Guide , to decrease old pendency and Increase rate of disposal in Civil Judge Junior Division and J.M.F.C. Courts Bhiwandi District Thane. The period of Pilot project was from December 2012 to February 2013. It is an Executive Mentoring program. There are Eight Courts of Civil Judge Jr. Dn. & J.M.F.C at Bhiwandi Thane. Physical verification of cases by qualitative and quantitative manner is like a health check of the the court. Unless physically fit , the surgery can not be carried out. So, unless cases are physically verified by qualitative and quantitative way , the result for new method can not be Calculated /evaluated. At four courts , physical verification by quantitative method was carried out , therefore those courts are selected and taken as Pilot courts. Other Four courts where balance sheet and physical verification was not carried out , those are considered as Nonpiloting courts. Some Pilot courts are concentrating over criminal cases though civil cases are vested to them. Mentoring sessions were held for all courts. This pilot project shows effect over piloting and non piloting area. In this pilot project, the disposal from previous three months from September 2012 to November 2012 was compared with the disposal during the pilot project period . The aspects are researched , for pilot courts , increasing percentage rate of disposal per 2013-09-29T02:48:25.63-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/court-management-mentor-judge-34969.aspx Effects of the Financial Crisis on Lehman brothers Introduction In 2008, the entire world witnessed a major financial catastrophe brought by the sub-prime mortgage crisis affected the U.S at the time. The measure taken by the U.S right after the September 11-terror attacks aimed at stimulating the economy, were cited as the major culprits affecting this crisis. According Taylor (2009) the financial crisis happened when the economy underwent a period of over prosperity due to a sudden economic boom. (p. 1) History of Lehman brother’s Lehman brothers surely come a long way from its origins in 1844 when two brothers, Emanuel and Hendry Lehman created the company as a general store. Lehman brother started to grow through the capitalization of high cotton prices, which saw its growth explode tremendously. Through strategic partnership, the business survived and was able to endure the turmoil that rocked America during the 18 century. Lehman was also able to join the financial advisory business. Later in the year 1883, Lehman become a member of the coffee exchange. Finally, 1887 Lehman headed to the New York stock exchange where he began the work of underwriting; Lehman’s first client was the “international steam pump company” and from then on, grew to bigger clients such as Woolworth s and sears roebuck and company. It also had partnership with Goldman Sach’s at the time. Lehman brothers in the 20th century Lehman brothers had offices in the world trade center in America. On the September 11, 2001, the building got a direct hit from a terror ploy that destroyed it substantially leaving Lehman brother without a head office and one employee dead. Lehman brothers endeavored to quickly recover from the loss and set up an improvised trading floor in a hotel in New Jersey in record time of under fifty hours after the terror attack. In addition, after a week when market opened, it was business as usual for Lehman brothers operations. A month later, they acquired a brand new 32-story building for a whopping 700 million dollars. Criticisms surmounted as to why Lehman brothers never returned to their former building in lower Manhattan. Lehman’s collapse In 2008, Lehman brother got a sire of reprieve when the Federal Reserve scheduled a meeting to discuss the liquidation of Lehman’s assets. Top of the agenda was the possible sale of Lehman’s to either Barclay's bank or bank of America. According to reports, an outright sale of Lehman brothers was 2013-08-28T06:03:07.187-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Effects-of-the-Financial-Crisis-on-Lehman-brothers-34952.aspx TRADITIONAL MEDIA Mass media plays a crucial role in connecting the world of individuals. It has the ability to reach wide audiences with strong and influential messages which impact upon society. Traditional media is nothing but the tool of communication having special characteristics to express socio-cultural, religious, moral and emotional needs of the people of society to which they belong. Television and Radio have been influential on people’s daily lives and routines, affecting the content and times that audiences watch and listen. The mass media has at least three important roles to play: • to inform • to educate and • To influence opinion. It has remained a significant tool in the process of motivating people in the desired direction. It is the most appropriate medium for bringing about changes in attitude as it is informal and unscripted in nature. This in turn helps the rural masses to accept social changes. Characteristics of traditional media: • Centralized, top-down hierarchy • Cost is high • Communication is one-way with limited feedback channels. • Effective tool in rural and tribal areas among illiterates. • Audience can easily identify with this tool of communication. • Special training is not required • Feedback is immediate and known • Local and live medium • Flexible to accommodate new things • Traditional media has served as a companion as well as an important source of information for the audience. • Very easy to remember and can quickly attract the masses. • Most intimate with the masses in all the regions of the country. • Primary appeal is to the emotions rather than the intellect. • Easily available to their audience. • Flexible to accommodate new themes. • Enjoyed and approved by all the people from different age groups, and they are low-cost media as compared to the sophisticated electronic media. • Very much a part of our lives. Disadvantages of traditional media: • Restricted to place of performance • Can cater only to a limited audience • Reach is limited. • Limited scope for archiving the performance. • Can cater only to a limited audience. These distinctive features of traditional media have been challenged by new media, which is changing the participation habits of the audiences. Characteristics of modern media: • Widespread broadband • Cheap/free • Easy to use online publishing tools • More and new distribution channels • New advertising channels • The electronic media has a pivotal role to play in information transfer, education, culture, health, politics etc. • With the advance in technology, it has become very easy and economical to cover vast geographical areas through the electronic media. Social networking sites and blogs: All these comes in social media marketing whose aim is to bring up with such content that attracts the customers and they wish to share it in their 2013-07-05T08:43:39.327-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/traditional-media-v-s-modern-media-34905.aspx Malcolm X His Life and Legacy by Kevin Brown 1) A dramatic event that greatly impacted Malcolm’s life was when Elijah Muhammad came to the realization that Malcolm X was becoming too powerful in the Nation of Islam. The reader could have foreseen this happening when Malcolm established guardians for himself, named the Fruit of Islam (65). Muhammad didn’t often left Malcolm express what he really felt and Malcolm X would always have to restrain himself, but once President Kennedy was assassinated he spoke the words he truly felt towards people with racist actions, like killing the President for allowing certain black rights. Upon releasing his temper with his words, Malcolm X was silenced from making public statements for ninety days by Elijah (77). Finally in early March of 1963 Malcolm separated himself from Elijah Muhammad and the Nation of Islam, taking two former secretaries with him (79). Not long afterward Malcolm had heard the threats made to him that indirectly came from Elijah Muhammad himself, hence the reward of $10,000 for his assassination (80) during the 60’s. Malcolm X knew that he would soon be killed and upon his pilgrimage from Mecca, he came back different and during one Sunday meetings he was shot multiple times and killed in New York City February 21, 1965 (92). 3) Many people influenced Malcolm throughout his life including his brother, and mother, but he was most influenced by his father, Marcus Garvey, Elijah Muhammad, and Mohandas Gandhi. His father kept him interested in religion and politics and showed him the path into getting blacks their rights. His father helped Garvey towards the improvement of life for blacks (13-15). Malcolm X was intrigued By Gandhi’s peaceful ways of protest for the right of equality (55). During his six years spent in prison he was impressed and influenced by the teachings of Elijah Muhammad and the Nation of Islam, much of his time was spent reading his teachings from his brother’s letters and learning history in the prison library (28-31). Later Malcolm X once said “I was his most faithful servant, and I know today that I did believe in him more firmly than he believed in himself.” Malcolm X looked up to Muhammad more than he did anyone else (79). 5) Malcolm X wanted to eliminate racism and be able give blacks the same rights as whites were enabled just like his father once tried during 2013-04-28T15:31:33.347-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Malcolm-X-34873.aspx Social psychology and cultural psychology has been around for thousands of years since the ancient Greece. Social psychology is the study of human behaviors and interactions with other people, and how we are affected by thoughts, feelings, beliefs, and behaviors. Social cognition is a major part of social psychology and its studies shows how people retain information about others and what their view is. Social psychologists study people and how they perceive occurrences, either alone or with a group. People perceive other individuals differently and social psychology tries to explain how and why. The most popular experiment of social psychology would be Asch’s conformity experiment, and it dealt with how people conformed with other people in the experiment in order to avoid social rejection. Many people consider Karl Marx the father of social psychology due to his theory of how society consists of a dominant group and a subordinate group underneath, and other contributions For example the government has total control and everyone else under the power of the government. But in our world today every society can’t fall under this categorization. That is why I believe the true father of social psychology in actuality Kurt Lewin, he pioneered the use of theory in social psychology. His most known theory that was actually tested was the theory of change (freeze, change, and refreeze). Where freeze is when people are getting ready to something new, then change is the transition of getting used to it, and refreeze is the beginning of the foundation of accustoming this new transition. This is a theory where I believe truly explains the relationships observed in social psychology. Social psychology was first looked into by psychologists in the late 1800’s with the study of social facilitation, which is how people perform in the presence of other certain people. Social psychology was put into use during the war by studying persuasion and propaganda in order to recruit Americans to join the army. Social psychologists usually base the research on behaviors observed in individuals or groups in different situations. Studying an individual’s attitude or even a group’s attitude gives social psychologist information to conclude behaviors, thoughts, and feelings; but attitudes aren’t always affirmative predictors of a specific behavior. Social influence is how people affect other people’s behaviors, thoughts, and feelings. In today’s society social influence is a big factor of how we act. Teenagers especially are found to 2013-04-28T15:10:27.1-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Psychology-34872.aspx 2013-04-28T14:54:11.957-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Aphasia-34871.aspx Financial Statement Differentiation Paper Jasmine Unger ACC/561 April 8, 2013 Professor Timothy Jared Financial Statement Differentiation Paper Financial statements provide documentation of a company’s financial history for a set timeframe. One of the financial statement used by investors, creditors, and mangers is the balance sheet. The second statement used by accountant’s income statement, which is also important to shareholders. The third statement is the retained earnings statement, and the fourth financial statement is the statement of cash flows. Each financial statement has a different purpose and shows different aspects of the company’s finances. However, these financial statements are integrated and work together to provide shareholders financial information. This paper will defines the four financial statements while explaining the financial statement most suitable for either an investor, creditor, or management. The Four Financial Statements The first financial statement is the balance sheet. The balance sheet provides a portrait of the company’s assets and liabilities. The balance sheet is the statement of financial position at a given point (Quick MBA, 2010). The second financial statement, the income statement, reports the revenues, and expenses during the same timeframe as the balance sheet. Revenue is the monies the company is gaining after expenses. The third statement is called the retained earnings statement, which explains changed in retained earnings. The retained earnings are changed by the company’s income and dividends. The retained earnings statement uses information form the income statement, which changes the financial information on the balance sheet. The final financial statement is the statement of cash flows. The statement of cash flows shows where the business obtained cash during a period of time and how that cash was used (Kimmel, Accounting, 3/e). Financial Statement for Investors Investors rely on more than one financial statement but the first financial statement is the statement of cash flows. The statement of cash flows is very important to investors because the amount of cash generated by the company is shown on this statement (Stocks 100, 2010). This is different from the income statement because the statement of cash flows does not include other types of revenues or company expenses. An investor wants to see the organization’s cash flows from different aspects of the company. Some of these areas include the compay’s operating activities, investing activities, and financing activities. Operating activities should show a positive cash flow because this cash flow benefits shareholders. Investing activities can fall into different categories like capital expenditures or monetary 2013-04-15T23:44:50.753-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/ACC-561-Financial-Statements-Differential-34858.aspx How To Grind Like Diddy Learn How To Sell Anything Anthony Frasier, James Lopez Built On Wax, Inc. New York, NY How To Grind Like Diddy Copyright © 2013 by Built On Wax, Inc.. This book was produced using PressBooks.com, and PDF rendering was done by PrinceXML. Dedicated to anyone trying to be filthy rich with a clean heart. Contents Disclaimer vi Introduction 1 The Experience 4 The Legacy 7 The Quality 10 Make Everything Big 12 Gratitude 16 Inspire 20 Laws Of Success aka Diddyisms 24 About the Publisher 28 v Disclaimer Anthony Frasier, James Lopez, and Built On Wax, Inc. are in no way affiliated with Sean “Diddy” Combs or his entities. This is not a parody, it is a work inspired by one of our favorite people in the world and our own research. Email: Hello@ThePhatStartup.com Twitter: @thephatstartup vi - How To Grind Like Diddy vi Introduction Sean Combs aka Diddy was everything kids from any innercity neighborhood wanted to be: successful, having fun, driving the latest whips, and making hit records. Knowing how he became who he is today takes more than what you see on the outside. We had to dig in and see what else was making the gears turn. We always admired Diddy and the way he handled his business. Today he is the richest man in the Hip Hop entertainment industry with an estimated net worth of $550 million. A big part of his success is his ability to make himself a brand. Diddy has mastered the art of selling and can virtually place himself next to any product. We all have heard the popular quote “be true to yourself” when it comes to success. Diddy is one of the figures that provided many the visuals to what that quote means. Diddy is the same person wherever he goes. That may not play so well as he attempts his acting career, but in business it is his strongest asset. On reality shows, hosting gigs, behind the scenes clips, studio footage, interviews, marathon tracks, commercials and more. He never breaks out of a fictional character because it is real, he is being true to himself. So how do you hustle like Diddy? That’s what this guide is all about. We wanted to explore how Diddy sells, then apply those lessons to our business. They say to be great, study greatness. We put together this short, straight to the point fluff free guide so you can grind and sell like Diddy. 1 Who is this guide for? This guide is for anyone looking for a beginners guide to selling. We wanted to create something Hip Hop lovers could relate to and bring a fresh perspective on how to be a great salesman. We intend for this 2013-03-28T00:13:41.643-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advertising-and-Marketing-like-Diddy-34839.aspx Basic Economic Concepts WK1 – A2 ECO2072 South University Katie L. Williams March 6, 2013 Economic Concepts Both absolute and comparative advantages produce various costs and benefits for international trade. The economic system is complex, however, in many cases various decisions need made how these decision-making processes are affected depends upon the invisible hand mechanism. However, the circular flow diagram helps the economy see what government sectors are involved in the economy, and what roles these participants’ plays in the economy as a whole, and how these sectors interact in various markets. The production possibilities model is complex, when using an example to show this production model, individuals are easily shown how this model illustrates various sections in the economy that may affect or influence the economy itself. In addition, individuals who understand the differences between both microeconomics and macroeconomics will have a better understanding of why these subdivisions of economics exist. Understanding these basic economic concepts will help individuals understand the basic fundamentals of international trade. Absolute & Comparative Advantage With absolute advantage the country has the ability to produce goods or services at a lower input than any other producers of that product, good, or service. For example, South Africa has the resources to produce rice, and Japan has the ability to produce electronics. However, if both countries try to produce both these products they will use up all their resources, and take away from the product or resources they could of used to produce a product, good, or service they have a higher resource for, it makes since for this country to trade their rice for electronics with another country, so they can go on to produce wheat at a lower input. Comparative advantage allows the countries who trade internationally to produce a good, service, or product at a lower opportunity cost than another country. For instance, since South Africa has the ability to produce a high volume of rice they will pay a lower opportunity cost to produce this product than what it would cost for Japan to produce rice for their country. Comparative advantage tends to look at a countries overall production of any good, service, or product with a specific time frame, unlike absolute advantage. Absolute advantage tends to focus on how the country can produce a high volume of this produce, service, or good in an efficient way, looking at various cost factors. However, comparative advantage tends to 2013-03-21T21:12:45.64-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Basic-Economic-Concepts-34834.aspx 1) Ideally, which of the following type of assets should be financed with long-term financing? A. 2013-02-22T15:51:07.9-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-8-CheckPoint-Week-Eight-Quiz-34817.aspx FIN200 Week 8 CheckPoint Time Value of Money • Write a 200- to 300-word description of the four time value of money concepts: present value, present value of an annuity, future value, and future value of annuity. Describe the characteristics of each concept and provide 2013-02-22T15:28:46.617-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/CheckPoint-Time-Value-of-Money-34816.aspx SHORT TERM FINANCING Short term financing helps to increase the inventory and many of short term financing ends below 180 days. The cycle of cash is begins with purchase of inventory, manufacturing process, production of goods, sale of goods for cash or credit so that increase of debtors or cash will be available. The organization assets are formed with fixed assets and current assets whereas the fixed assets are financed by the long term financing. In case of current assets, short term financing is most suitable. The capital equipments or fixed assets are met by the long term finance i.e. may be more than one year. Therefore most of the business transactions for day to day depends upon the short term needs. It is more important that short term cash invested in inventory must be realized to cash through sale of products without delay and the faster rate should be more than accounts receivables. Short term financing can also get through bank loans, working capital loans, certificate of deposits etc. In case of higher short term financing, the organization can issue higher denomination of certificate of deposits. Short term bank loans may offer higher rate of rate of interest and certificate of deposit scheme involves providing mortgaged guarantee by the organization. Therefore most of the organizations show interest to get Working capital through banks as short term finance. Getting of the working capital as short term finance depends upon the eligibility norms of the organization. The calculation of working capital is a difference between the current assets and current liabilities. If the current liabilities exceed the current assets, it will be problem for the organization to get the Working Capital as Short term financing. Even there is much difference exists over current liabilities, still MPWC i.e. maximum permissible working capital is allowed 75% of excess of current assets over current liabilities. While searching for short-term financing alternatives, Factoring is an option to consider as short term financing. The factoring allows selling the accounts receivables or invoices at a discount known as factor. For example if the organization has an amount of $500,000 as Accounts receivable, can sell at 15% discount so that factor agency can pay the 85% of $500,000. In such case there will be no risk of bad debts and immediate cash available without waiting. Hence it is one type of short term financing which most advantage and advanced short 2013-02-22T15:20:04.947-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SHORT-TERM-FINANCING-34815.aspx FIN200 Week 7 Assignment Loan Scenarios Midland Chemical Co. is negotiating a loan from Manhattan Bank and Trust. The small chemical company needs to borrow $500,000. The bank offers a rate of 8 ¼ percent with a 20 percent compensating balance requirement, or as an alternative, 9 ¾ percent with additional fees of $5,500 to cover services the bank is providing. In either case the rate on the loan is floating (changes as the prime interest rate changes). The loan would be for one year. a. Which loan carries the lower effective rate? Consider fees to be the equivalent of other interest. b. If the loan with a 20 percent compensating balance requirement were to be paid off in 12 monthly payments, what would the effective rate be? (Principal equals amount borrowed minus the compensating balance.) c. Assume the proceeds from the loan with the compensating balance requirement will be used to take cash discounts. Disregard part b about installment payments and use the loan cost from part a. If the terms of the cash discount are 1.5/10, net 50, should the firm borrow the funds to take the discount? d. Assume the firm actually takes 80 days to pay its bills and would continued to do so in the future if it did not take the cash discount. Should the company take the cash discount? e. Because the interest rate on the loans is floating, it can go up as interest rates go up. Assume that the prime rate goes up by 2 percent and the quoted rate on the loan goes up the same amount. What would then be the effective rate on the loan with compensating balances? Convert the interest to dollars as the first step in your calculation. f. In order to hedge against the possible rate increase described in part e, the Midland Chemical Co. decides to hedge its position in the futures market. Assume it sells $500,000 worth of 12-month futures contracts on Treasury bonds. One year later, interest rates go up 2 percent across the board and the Treasury bond futures have gone down to $488,000. Has the firm effectively hedged the 2 percent increase in interest rates on the bank loan as described in part e? Determine the answer in dollar amounts. SOLUTION Midland Chemical Co. a. Compensating Balance Loan $500,000 8.25% $ 41,250 Interest $500,000 Loan 100,000 20% compensating balance requirement $400,000 Available funds Fee-added Loan $500,000 9.75% $ 48,750 Interest Interest plus fees $48,750 Interest 5,500 Fees $54,250 The loan with the 2013-02-22T15:06:22.47-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN200-Week-7-Assignment-Loan-Scenarios-34814.aspx 1) Ideally, which of the following type of assets should be financed with long-term financing? WriteLetter('1');A. Fixed assets only WriteLetter('2');B. Temporary and permanent current assets WriteLetter('3');C. Fixed assets and permanent current assets WriteLetter('4');D. Fixed assets and temporary current assets 2) When the yield curve is downward sloping, generally a financial manager should WriteLetter('1');A. expect an economic boom WriteLetter('2');B. utilize long-term financing WriteLetter('3');C. utilize short-term financing WriteLetter('4');D. increase investment and level of financing overall 3) Frisch Fish Corp expects net income next year to be $600,000. Inventory and accounts receivable will have to be increased by $300,000 to accommodate this sales level. Frisch will pay dividends of $400,000. How much external financing will Frisch Fish need assuming no organically generated increase in liabilities? WriteLetter('1');A. No external financing 2013-02-22T14:57:53.853-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-6-CheckPoint-Quiz-34813.aspx FIN 200 Week 5 CheckPoint Long-Term and Short-Term Financing Both new and established businesses will find it necessary to incur debts during the course of business operations. Financing may be sought for a multitude of reasons – like smoothing cash flow, purchasing equipment, or expanding operations. The choice between short- and long-term financing options should be determined based on each business’ individual needs. 2013-02-22T14:43:30.987-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-5-CheckPoint-Long-Term-and-Short-Term-Financing-34812.aspx FIN 200 Week 5 Assignment Alternative Financing Plans Need a financial expert for this example. Show Calculations Lear, Inc., has $800,000 in current assets, $350,000 of which are considered permanent current assets. In addition, the firm has $600,000 invested in fixed assets. a. Lear wishes to finance all fixed assets and half of its permanent current assets with long-term financing costing 10 percent. Short-term financing currently costs 5 percent. Lear’s earnings before interest and taxes are $200,000. Determine Lear’s earnings after taxes under this financing plan. The tax rate is 30 percent. a) Fixed Asset = $600,000 Permanent Current Asset= $350,000 Non-Permanent current Asset= $450,000 Total Asset financed through long term debt = $600,000+350,000*50% = $775,000 Interest on Long term debt= $775,000*10%= $77,500 Total Asset financed through short term debt =$450,000+350,000*50%= $625,000 Interest on short term debt= $625,000*5%=$31,250 Earning Before Interest and Tax.....................$200,000 Less: Interest on Long term debt.....................(77,500) Less: Interest on Short term debt....................($31,250) Profit Before Tax...........................................$91,250 Less: Taxes..................................................($27375) Profit after tax..............................................$63,875 b. As an alternative, Lear might wish to finance all fixed assets and permanent current assets plus half of its temporary current assets with long-term financing. The same interest rates apply as in part a. Earnings before interest and taxes will be $200,000. What will be Lear’s earnings after taxes? The tax rate is 30 percent. a) Fixed Asset = $600,000 Permanent Current Asset= $350,000 Non-Permanent current Asset= $450,000 Total Asset financed through long term debt = $600,000+350,000+450000*50% = $1,175,000 Interest on Long term debt= $1,175,000*10%= $117,500 Total Asset financed through short term debt =$450,000*50%= $225,000 Interest on short term debt= $225,000*5%=$11,250 Earning Before Interest and Tax.....................$200,000 Less: Interest on Long term debt.....................(117,500) Less: Interest on Short term debt....................($11,250) Profit Before Tax...........................................$71,250 Less: Taxes..................................................($21,375) Profit after tax..............................................$49,875 c. What are some of the risks and cost considerations associated with each of these alternative financing strategies? Although alternative (a) looks cheaper that alternative (b) by $14000 and presents a better net income but following should be taken into consideration. In alternative (a) we are financing the long term assets with short term liabilities, which is not a stable source of finance. Short term finance is taken for maximum of 1 year and after that it must be renewed. One problem that can be faced is the difficulty in renewing the short-term loans when they are due. Other risk to be considered is short rate can increase in future hence company may have to spend more in interest. Since the short term borrowing cost are currently less so funding through short term borrowing would be advantageous to the company.(Although short term 2013-02-22T14:21:15.91-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-5-Assignment-Alternative-Financing-Plans-34811.aspx 1) A rapid rate of growth in sales may require A. increased borrowing by the firm to support the sales increase. B. higher dividend payments to shareholders. C. the firm to be more lenient with credit customers. D. sales forecasts 2013-02-22T14:15:52.137-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-4-CheckPoint-Week-Four-Quiz-34810.aspx FIN 200 Week 2 Discussion Question 1 • You are considering investing in a company. Which financial ratios would you find most useful? The significance of all financial ratios is vital in determining which company to invest it. There are, however, certain financial ratios that are more relevant than others. In order to determine which ratios are most important, it is important to investigate the company’s market as a whole. As an example, ratios dealing with inventory and inventory turnover will be more significant in the manufacturing sector. 2013-02-22T14:08:58.29-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-2-Financial-Ratios-34809.aspx Crosby Corporation Statement of Cash Flows For the Year Ended December 31, 2008 Operating activities: Net Income 160 000 Add items not requiring an outlay of cash: Depreciation 150 000 150 000 Cash flow from operations 310 000 Increase in accounts receivable (50 000) Increase in inventory 2013-02-22T14:02:31.597-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/FIN-200-Week-1-Assignment-Cash-Flow-Preparation-34808.aspx Summary While reading the case study, “Wal-Mart: The Future Is Sustainability” (Ferrell, 2011), I learned that Wal-Mart has had a turbulent history spanning the last 49 years. They have been accused of putting smaller companies out of business. In fact, this is one of the biggest complaints against them. According to the text, small businesses cannot compete with Wal-Mart’s low prices (Ferrell, 2011). Many have tried filing lawsuits but Wal-Mart claims they are just providing a good quality product for a low price. This strategy eventually causes small, local stores to go out of business. They have had issues with suppliers. Because of Wal-Mart’s size and power, they can influence how a supplier runs their business. Some see this as good and bad. The good, being that a company would have to become more streamlined and efficient for Wal-Mart. The bad, would have to be that a lot of companies are forced to move production overseas to help meet Wal-Mart’s demand for lower prices. This wasn’t Sam Walton’s intention. In fact, during the 1980’s, he started a “Buy American” campaign to help keep American companies from going out of business. It didn’t seem to work out in the end. More than 80 percent of Wal-Mart’s products come from overseas (Ferrell, 2011). One of the more public ethical dilemmas that Wal-Mart faced was the ones involving employees. Discrimination issues involving pay differences and leadership positions between men and women. In 2001 an internal study showed that female store managers were paid less than men in the same position. In 2004, a judge granted class action status to current and former Wal-Mart employees for sex-discrimination. So far, Wal-Mart hasn’t been able to appeal the case (Ferrell, 2011). On the flip side, Wal-Mart has been commended for its treatment of female employees. The National Association for Female Executives has recognized Wal-Mart 3 years in a row as a “Top Company for Executive Women” (Ferrell, 2011). They have also had leadership issues. The most famous, was the one involving former board vice chair Thomas Coughlin. He was a good friend of Sam Walton and a candidate for CEO. Thomas Coughlin was caught stealing about $500,000 in the form of bogus expenses, reimbursements, and the unauthorized use of gift cards (Ferrell, 20011). 2013-02-16T18:08:21.343-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Wal-Mart-Case-Study-34797.aspx WHAT THEY DO: Accountants and auditors examine financial statements for accuracy and conformance with laws. Accountants and auditors prepare and examine financial records. They ensure that financial records are accurate and that taxes are paid properly and on time. Accountants and auditors assess financial operations and work to help ensure that organizations run efficiently. Duties Accountants and auditors typically do the following: • Examine financial statements to be sure that they are accurate and comply with laws and regulations • Compute taxes owed, prepare tax returns, and ensure that taxes are paid properly and on time • Inspect account books and accounting systems for efficiency and use of accepted accounting procedures • Organize and maintain financial records • Assess financial operations and make best-practices recommendations to management • Suggest ways to reduce costs, enhance revenues, and improve profits In addition to examining and preparing financial documentation, accountants and auditors must explain their findings. This includes face-to-face meetings with organization managers and individual clients, and preparing written reports. Many accountants and auditors specialize, depending on the particular organization that they work for. Some organizations specialize in assurance services (improving the quality or context of information for decision makers) or risk management (determining the probability of a misstatement on financial documentation). Other organizations specialize in specific industries, such as healthcare. Some workers with a background in accounting and auditing teach in colleges and universities. For more information, see the profile on postsecondary teachers. The four main types of accountants and auditors are the following: Public accountants do a broad range of accounting, auditing, tax, and consulting tasks. Their clients include corporations, governments, and individuals. They work with financial documents that clients are required by law to disclose. These include tax forms and balance sheet statements that corporations must provide potential investors. For example, some public accountants concentrate on tax matters, advising corporations about the tax advantages of certain business decisions or preparing individual income tax returns. External auditors review clients' financial statements and inform investors and authorities that the statements have been correctly prepared and reported. Public accountants, many of whom are Certified Public Accountants (CPAs), generally have their own businesses or work for public accounting firms. Some public accountants specialize in forensic accounting, investigating financial crimes, such as securities fraud and embezzlement, bankruptcies and contract disputes, and other complex and possibly criminal financial transactions. Forensic accountants combine their knowledge of accounting and finance with law and investigative techniques to determine if an activity is illegal. Many forensic accountants work closely with law enforcement personnel and 2013-01-13T20:05:44.92-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Accounting-34774.aspx The financial statements for a firm are required as it has a number of stakeholders who depend upon its financial information in order to make economic decisions. However, the major corporate finance scandals often shake the confidence of investors and raise questions about the reliability of financial statements prepared by companies and audited by independent auditors. This essay discusses whether corporate financial statements are management representations of the financial position and the performance of a company. It also analyses whether or not accounting standards and practises contribute to ensuring the confidence of investors in the integrity of financial statements. A firm has a number of external and internal stakeholders. The investors and creditors need financial information to make investment or lending decisions based on the net worth and profitability of a firm (Benedict and Elliot, 2001). Financial statements are also used by employees and government agencies for monitoring and decision making. Given the importance and usefulness of financial statements, national accounting bodies issue financial reporting guidelines that companies are required to follow when preparing and presenting their financial statements for promoting high quality corporate governance and foster investment (“About the FRC”, 2012). However, in spite of the widespread knowledge of accounting standards and also the high economic costs associated with the violation of regulations, some companies still tend to commit financial reporting frauds. Large companies like Computer Associates and Tyco International have falsified revenues by manipulating accounting policies in order to show higher than actual earnings (Marshall, 2004). Satyam Computer Limited was one of the largest IT firms in India before it revealed that it had been overstating its earnings for a number of years. This implies that the management of a company can manipulate its corporate financial statements to represent an incorrect view of the financial performance and position of the company. The possibility of corporate financial statements being management representations of the financial position and performance of a company arises because of subjectivity in the implementation of reporting standards. Revenue recognition is one of the main accounting areas where subjectivity can have a significant impact on the operating results of a company. Issues in revenue recognition arise from the differences in purposes and accounting rules for tax and financial reporting (Stolowy and Lebas, 2006). A company’s interpretation of an accounting policy may not match that of the regulatory authorities and therefore, it could lead to reinstatement of its earnings. 2012-11-21T16:59:11.46-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Corporate-Financial-Statements-34747.aspx 1. Location based digital marketing- Also called proximity marketing has been one of the huge trends in Digi-marketing in 2010. Foursquare, Gowalla. Facebook places, twitter locations are few of the major examples. And then there is Google latitude. “Social location-based marketing is where social media tools give users the option of sharing their location, and hence give businesses the opportunity to use proximity or location-based marketing to deliver targeted offers and messages to consumers and collect data about their preferences and behaviour.”- says Dave Chaffey 2. Videos- It’s the trend you can’t afford to ignore: by 2014, it is estimated that 90% of all Internet traffic will be video. And that means marketers and communicators will need to stop producing ad-hoc videos and get a strategy together for maximum impact and maximum cost-effectiveness. It’s no longer about one or two videos a year – you’ll need to be creating many more! Invest half a day and get a valuable overview of what the video marketing trend means for companies like your own. 3. Gamification: it is the use of game design technique like rewarding points to people who share experiences on location-based platforms such as Face book's "Place" feature, Foursquare, and Gowalla. Some of the techniques include achievement badges, achievement levels, challenge between users etc. It is interesting to see users indulging themselves in Gamification. 4. Security and privacy Customer privacy and security is one of the top issues that marketers and business owners should give special attention to. No matter what kind of business you are, keeping customers informed of how you manage and handle their personal information is essential to their trust with your brand. If you are able to provide them with superior knowledge and control of their data, they will in turn trust in your business more. 5. Influence Marketing- We are talking about a new kind of celebrity, ever heard of “influence” score to web users? Ever seen the top influencers list at the page? That is what we are talking about here. It is the specific community experts who are the true celebrities today. They influence the consumer’s decision like anything. Expect companies in 2012 to focus marketing on those customers most likely to be influencers or brand ambassadors. With all the emerging marketing strategies, Digi-marketing has proved 2012-11-07T03:31:38.027-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/digital-marketing-trends-34736.aspx Introduction Globalization of business in general and manufacturing in particular has increased greatly during the last decades as companies have internationalized their value-chains in a search of competitive advantage through scale and/or scope throughout the world. Combined with other developments, such as increased deregulation, technological change, privatization and corporate restructuring, globalization has spurred not only increased international orientation, but also an unprecedented surge in cross-border mergers and acquisitions (Aswathappa and Dash 2011). A merger is the result of an agreement between two companies to join their operations together. Partners are often equals. An acquisition, on the other hand, occurs when one company buys another company with the interest of controlling the activities of the combined operations. Within the context of this international volume, the focus of this essay will be on cross-border mergers and acquisitions (M&As). Many of HRM challenges faced in mergers and in acquisitions are similar, and for this reason in the further discussion we will not differentiate between these two entities, but summarize them and use the abbreviation M&A. Cross border M&As involve partial or full takeover or the merging of capital, assets and liabilities of existing enterprises in a country by transnational corporations form other countries (Aguilera and Dencker 2005). M&A generally involve the purchase of existing assets and companies. One major reason to engage in mergers or acquisitions is often to facilitate the rapid entry into new markets. Thus mergers and acquisitions are a predominant feature of the international business system as companies attempt to strengthen their market positions and exploit new market opportunities. The issues, challenges and opportunities related with human resource in case of mergers and acquisitions have been discussed in the following sections of this essay. Role of Human Resource Management Human resource management (HRM) refers to all of the activities that are dedicated towards affecting the behaviors of people working for it. As the employee behaviour have a profound impact on profitability, satisfaction of customers and a variety of other important measures of effectiveness of the organization, it is a key strategic challenge for all companies to manage human resources and particularly those that are engaged in cross border alliances (Faulkner and Joseph 2012). All organizations are engaged with activities associated with human resource management. Such activities involve formal policies and everyday practices to manage people in the organization. HRM practices then play a significant role by providing specific statements on the 2012-10-05T22:51:17.87-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Human-Resource-management-in-Cross-Border-Mergers-34662.aspx GOVERNMENTS’ BAD EFFECTS TO THE BUSINESSES Business is an organization which sells or buys goods and services to consumers. Most of businesses have private ownership and their aim is to earn profit and wealth. Non-profit and state-owned businesses are other types of businesses. Their aim is giving services to the consumers. In most capitalist economies, all businesses have a voice in the country until nowadays. Today, all around the world, governments are trying to show their power to businesses. For this reason, all types of businesses are suffering from governments. Hence, governments should decrease their political power over businesses. First of all, because of governments, entrepreneurs create fewer new businesses. In most businesses, they have many start-up regulations to create their business. Their most common obstacle type is licenses. Anyone who wants to build an organization has to get some licenses. For example, according to Liebert (2008), in 2007, Texas decided that anyone who wants to be computer repairman, should get a private investigator license (par. 1). For getting private investigator license, people must complete three year apprenticeship with a licensed private investigator. Also foreign competition is a problem for entrepreneurs. Governments do not provide protection in small businesses for foreign competition. There aren’t any quotas for many goods for foreign companies. For example, in China, they have low priced workers. This makes their products low priced. On the other hand, domestic companies do not have those low priced workers. For this reason, domestic companies’ prices are higher than foreign companies’. Moreover, start-up companies can’t stand against their low priced products and go bankruptcy. Another problem for entrepreneurs is new regulations. Many of entrepreneurs are trying to start their first business. For this reason, they have a challenge to predict those new regulations’ impacts. If they could not predict properly, they have to solve many organizational problems. If not, company goes bankruptcy. Also governments regulate new taxes for companies. For example, if new health care law comes, this gives to company more economical charge. Companies make their economic plans before the new fiscal year. If new taxes come, they have to remake their economic plans. Without adjustment, they can’t hold a position in market. Secondly, free market system is better than government monopolistic system. If we compare them with each other, government monopoly is non-responsive. In this system, governments do not care about their customers. If customers stop using their services, 2012-07-25T13:02:27.013-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Argumentative-essay-on-GOVERNMENTS’-BAD-EFFECTS-TO-THE-BUSINESSES-34608.aspx The game was released in 2004 in the hands of developers XXV Productions - a company that merged with a number of darkling creation studio. In 2009 it is an improved version of Cut the director of various cosmetic changes to the site - added an interview 2012-07-25T03:18:25.437-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Swtor-comes-in-four-dimensions-of-time-34605.aspx Measurement of citizens' attitude toward the government and administrative system is regarded as the main element relative to the new public management (Shlomo Mizrahi , et al, 2010). The operationalization of democracy is based on the public accountability. Public accountability presents a picture of loyalty, dutifulness, justice, clearness, try for improvement, and moral competence of governmental managers, and its promotion makes the managers secure against the criticisms. It also displays some democratic manifestations. Governmental managers should be accountable in the fields of strategy, program (effectiveness), performance (competence and economy), planning process, allocation and legitimacy (rules obedience). Increase of level of need to accountability and information in the society improve the expectations for available services and hence Public department could be developed (Del pino, 2007). Public trust refers to when individuals expect the governmental officials provide their needs by interacting with them during which there is a kind of distrust. In other words, public trust means the expectations of all people toward the positive response from behalf of their governmental officials. In added, by public trust we mean the degree of individuals' belief toward the public organizations which act based on their expectations. They are also truthful, have various capabilities and do suitable works (Sosuke Iwae , 2009). From the viewpoint of managers, staffs and employers, public trust is very important because it plays a main role in the enforcement of public policies and cooperation’s. Citizens affect on the enforcement of government's programs by public trust and public trust is achieved in lieu of suitable response of governmental institutions (Gordon, 2000). 2. Review of literature A) Accountability The word "accountability" has been differently used in public management: Firstly, it refers to the political accountability idea in the democratic liberal system and secondly, it refers to the managerial accountability in governmental systems (Romzek and Ingraham, 2000). With regard to the development of new public management by which the balance between political accountability and managerial accountability has been changed, the governance has became more complex (Anders Hanberger, 2009). Farazmand believes that "the managers of public services are the guards of people's trust. Therefore, accountability toward the people's needs is a main issue in public organizations, because there are many aspects of activities by which many corruptions are created" (Farazmand, 2000). The basic criterion of "public" is related to the public trust to the leader and the being responsiveness of public services toward the people. The 2012-05-26T18:08:39.78-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Relationship-between-accountability-and-public-trust-from-the-view-point-of-staffs-and-clients-34575.aspx In the UK, the average age for a woman to reach the menopause is 52. In this article: What is the menopause? Diagnosis Advice & Support Symptoms Treatment Causes How Chemist Online can help What is the menopause? A natural part of the ageing process, the menopause is a phase which indicates the end of your reproductive years. Think of it as your last menstrual period, where your periods gradually become less frequent until they stop altogether. If you reach the menopause stage before the age of 45, this is known as early menopause. However, this is relatively uncommon. Symptoms Symptoms of the menopause include: Periods becoming less frequent until complete cessation of them Changes to the vagina and genital skin, where these areas become drier and thinner Aches and pains in joints Hot flushes Sweats Headaches Weight gain Disturbed sleep Reduced libido Irritability Depression Anxiety Also, during or as a result of the menopause, many women develop depressive illness, as well as the aforementioned mood disorders. Please see contact details for the Depression Alliance at the Advice & Support section at the foot of this article. Causes As we have seen, the menopause is a natural stage in the ageing process. However, some things can cause an early menopause, such as: Having a genetic predisposition (i.e. there is a history of early menopause in your family – the propensity to you having an early menopause is passed down from a previous generation, therefore) Surgery to the ovaries (note: with age, your ovaries produce less oestrogen and stop producing eggs. Early menopause can occur as a result of your ovaries having been removed for some reason) Radiotherapy or chemotherapy – as part of treatment for cancer (particularly if the radiotherapy has been used in the pelvic area) Hysterectomy – removal of the uterus Diagnosis Most women are able to ‘self-diagnose’ there menopause by being aware of their symptoms and what this indicates as they reach their early 50s. However, if you would prefer a confirmed diagnosis (or suspect that you may be going through an early menopause), make an appointment with your GP. After taking your medical history, he or she will ask you about your symptoms, and may carry out some hormone blood tests to establish whether your menopause is early or whether you are going through the menopause as a natural stage of the ageing process. Treatment As you reach the menopause, one treatment option is Hormone Replacement Therapy (HRT). This actively boosts hormone levels (i.e. the hormones that are reduced as a result of the onset of the 2012-05-14T09:52:05.86-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Menopause-34563.aspx Glandular fever is most common in adolescents and young adults. In this article: What is glandular fever? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is glandular fever? Glandular fever is a viral infection. Although it is not a particularly serious condition, glandular fever can be difficult to accurately diagnose due its symptoms being extremely similar to several other fever-like health conditions. If you become infected with glandular fever it is rare that you will suffer a second bout of the illness in your lifetime. This is because your body’s immune system will have developed antibodies which will protect you from becoming re-infected. The virus that causes glandular fever is called the Epstein-Barr virus. Although the symptoms of glandular fever can make you feel rather unwell, it is a self-limiting illness. This means that the symptoms ease and clear up altogether after about a week. Symptoms Symptoms of glandular fever include: Swollen lymph nodes in the neck Sore throat Headache Muscular and skeletal aches and pains Fever Tiredness (this can sometimes be overwhelming fatigue) Weight-loss (due to a lack of appetite) Puffy eyes Other associated symptoms which sometimes occur include a widespread rash over the body, jaundice and depressive illness (please see contact details for the Depression Alliance in the Advice & Support section at the foot of this article). Causes Glandular fever is usually passed on from one person to another through close contact, such as kissing (the virus is passed on through saliva), or through the sharing of things such as cups, glasses and/or food containers that have been used first by an infected person, then by others. The Epstein-Barr virus is highly contagious and it is not uncommon for an entire family to develop glandular fever after a family gathering, such as a birthday party, wedding or christening where relatives greet each other and part by kissing. It only takes one person infected with the Epstein-Barr virus to be in amongst the group for the virus to spread. This is why, if you do have glandular fever, it is best to avoid all close contact with others unless your symptoms have completely cleared up. Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms and think that you may be suffering from glandular fever, arrange an appointment with your GP. After taking your medical history, asking you some questions about your symptoms, and then carrying out a short examination of your neck to feel for swollen glands, you will then be asked to have a blood test. The purpose 2012-04-18T07:04:21.587-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Glandular-Fever-34540.aspx Alzheimer’s disease is a form of dementia that affects over half a million people in the UK. In this article: What is Alzheimer’s disease? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Treatment Advice & Support What is Alzheimer’s disease? If you are suffering from Alzheimer’s disease it means that you are experiencing the gradual loss of your cognitive abilities. You will find that your memory becomes poorer as the condition progresses. Your ability to reason and make sense of things will not be as good as it used to be. As yet, and despite in-depth research worldwide, there is no cure for Alzheimer’s disease. Also, it is a chronic (long-lasting) condition where symptoms gradually become more severe as the years pass. Symptoms Symptoms of Alzheimer’s disease include: Memory loss Confusion Difficulty in saying the right words Loss of interest in activities you would normally enjoy Difficulty concentrating Difficulty recognising people and places that used to be familiar to you Frustration Mood swings Depression Anxiety Causes Although the precise cause of Alzheimer’s disease is still unknown, it is thought that for many sufferers the onset of the condition is simply part of the ageing process. Also, for some people, genetic factors may play a part in them developing the disease. That is, they may have genetic predisposition to having Alzheimer’s disease because it is already in the family and has been passed down from a previous generation. In fact, almost 50 per cent of people with Alzheimer’s disease have a relative with the condition. Other causes of Alzheimer’s disease may include: Head injuries (which may have resulted in some kind of damage or disturbance to the brain) High blood pressure High cholesterol levels Diagnosis There is no basic diagnostic test for Alzheimer’s disease. Also, establishing a confirmed diagnosis is often made difficult due to many of the symptoms and associated symptoms being similar to those which can occur as a result of the development of other conditions, such as brain tumour and thyroid problems. If you think you may be suffering from the Alzheimer’s disease, arrange to see your GP. After taking your medical history and asking you some questions about your symptoms (and how often they occur) your GP will make a decision on whether to arrange a referral appointment for you with a specialist. Specialists in Alzheimer’s generally use diagnostic tests such as memory tests and/or a brain scan when attempting to confirm diagnosis. Treatment Although there is no cure for Alzheimer’s disease, some medications are prescribed to help delay the condition’s development. These may be prescribed by your GP, and include: Memantine Donepezil, and 2012-03-21T11:44:08.74-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Alzheimer’s-disease-34518.aspx Most small or superficial burns can be treated at home. In this article: What are different types of burns? When to go to your GP Symptoms When to go to hospital (A&E) Common causes How Chemist Online can help Treating burns at home (what to do) Advice & Support What are different types of burns? Burns can generally be categorised into three types: Small burns (or superficial burns or scalds, where only the top layer of the skin is affected) – these are usually caused by small incidents such as a spilt hot drink, or kettle steam, and can be treated with basic first aid at home Partial thickness burns – more severe than small burns because the damage is deeper and blistering tends to occur in tandem with the loss of skin and the redness and pain in the affected area Full thickness burns – this is where the entire thickness of the skin is affected to the point that the skin becomes blackened (these types of severe ‘charring’ burns as also known as ‘third degree burns’ and can leave considerable scarring) Symptoms Symptoms of burns include: discoloured skin peeled skin blistered skin pain around the affected area (ranging from mild to severe) swelling charred skin damage to muscle, bone and body tissue Other symptoms which can occur as a result of sustaining burns can include: shock, increased heart rate, headache, fever and faintness. Common causes Common causes of burns include: Hot water and/or steam (e.g., baths where the water is at a scalding temperature, accidentally knocked over cups of tea…) Cooking fluids Contact with fire The skin touching extremely hot surfaces, such as an open oven door scalding the backs of a child’s legs, or a metallic burns sustained from absentmindedly sitting upon a car bonnet on a boiling hot day… Accidents with inflammable liquids and gases – usually sustained in the workplace Chemical burns – also usually sustained in the workplace Electrical burns (also known as electricity burns) – these can be sustained at home or in the workplace Laser burns (e.g., where an operation that involves laser surgery may go wrong for some reason) Sunburns Note: The severity of a person’s pain from a burn may not necessarily correspond with the severity or classification of the burn itself. In fact, some small burns can be significantly more painful than a partial thickness burn. Treating burns at home (what to do) What to do: Immediately use cool (but not very cold) water to cool the burnt area. Keep the affected area under this stream of tepid water for not less than twenty minutes, even 2012-03-20T10:22:32.433-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Burns-34517.aspx Meningitis is a serious condition for which immediate medical attention must be sought. In this article: What is meningitis? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Effect on your life Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is meningitis? When the lining that covers the brain and spinal chord becomes inflamed, meningitis is diagnosed, the cause usually being established as being a viral or bacterial infection. Meningitis is a serious condition (particularly in children). The difficulty with spotting meningitis is that the symptoms can be very similar to those associated with cold or flu. However, if your baby has a bulge in his or her fontanelle (the soft area at the top of the head) then this can be a strong indication of meningitis and you should seek immediate medical assistance. Symptoms As well as the aforementioned symptoms/indicators, other symptoms of meningitis in babies and small children can include: Shrill crying Unusual moaning Refusal of food Lethargy Fever and chills Rejection of adults when being held or handled Fast breathing patterns Irritability An unnatural stiffness of body or an unusual floppiness Sleepiness which is a deeper sleep than normal, making the infant more difficult than usual to wake up Cold hands and feet Pain in the hands, legs and feet Blue lips Pale complexion Causes Babies and small children are much more susceptible to being infected with viruses and bacteria (than adults) due to their immune systems not being as strong or as fully developed yet. That said, the exact cause of why the particular meningitis virus and bacteria affects infants is as yet unknown. (Note: In adults, the infection/bacteria is spread through coughing, sneezing, and sharing personal possessions such as toothbrushes and/or gargle cups in the bathroom.) Diagnosis If your child is suffering from the aforementioned symptoms, seek immediate medical help. Do not wait for an appointment with your GP to become available, go immediately to the A&E department of your local (or nearest) hospital. Awaiting the results of diagnostic tests can take several hours, so it is important that your child is examined by trained medical professionals as soon as possible. Once a confirmed diagnosis of meningitis has been established, an appropriate treatment will be recommended for your child. Effect on your life Obviously, it can be extremely upsetting and worrying for any parent to receive a confirmed diagnosis of meningitis in their child. And also to witness their child struggling to cope with the symptoms of meningitis can also be hugely upsetting. The good news is that most cases of meningitis pass with appropriate treatment and leave no lasting affect. 2012-03-19T11:56:01.19-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Meningitis-in-babies-and-small-children-34515.aspx Guillain Barré syndrome can be a fatal condition as the muscles which control breathing can be affected. In this article: What is Guillain Barré syndrome? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is Guillain Barré syndrome? Guillain Barré syndrome is a disease of the body’s nervous system (where the affected nerves of the limbs cause muscle weakness to develop). Guillain Barré syndrome can affect people of any age. It is more common in women. Symptoms Symptoms of Guillain Barré syndrome include: Progressive muscle weakness in the arms and legs Paralysis in the legs (not in all cases, but often) Tingling or numbness in the fingers and toes Difficulty swallowing Breathing problems (a feeling of restricted breathing and/or breathlessness) Blood pressure problems Digestive problems Lack of sweating Vision problems Note: Some people who develop Guillain Barré syndrome also develop deep vein thrombosis, due to becoming immobile. Causes Despite worldwide medical research, as yet the exact cause of Guillain Barré syndrome is unknown. However, analysis of patients has brought to light that the vast majority of sufferers who develop Guillain Barré syndrome do so after having a viral or bacterial infection which has then triggered an autoimmune reaction (where the body attacks itself). Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms (particularly a tingling sensation or numbness in the fingers and toes, and progressive muscle weakness in the arms and legs) then arrange an appointment with your GP. Your medical history will be taken, and you will be asked some questions about your symptoms. A confirmed diagnosis of Guillain Barré syndrome is usually confirmed after a lumbar puncture and electrodiagnostic tests (where electrical activity in the brain is analysed). After confirmed diagnosis, an appropriate course of treatment will be recommended to you. Treatment After confirmed diagnosis, your GP will send you to hospital for the following treatment(s): Immunoglobulin infusion – these injections accelerate recovery through the clearing of abnormal antibodies in your blood Blood plasma exchange therapy (for a fresh supply of plasma). The official name of this therapy is plasmapheresis. Physiotherapy – to relieve discomfort and improve mobility Prescribed medication for nerve-related pain relief How Chemist Online can help Through this website we have a range of treatments available to buy which can help promote better blood circulation. www.chemistonline.co.uk Advice & Support Guillain Barré Syndrome Support Group Tel: 0800 374 803 Website: www.gbs.org.uk The Circulation Foundation Tel: 020 7304 4779 Website: www.circulationfoundation.org.uk Lifeblood – The Thrombosis Charity Tel: 020 633 9937 Website: www.thrombosis-charity.org.uk This information and advice is not intended to replace the advice of your GP or chemist. Chemist Online is also not responsible or liable for any diagnosis made 2012-03-16T10:10:47.723-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Guillain-Barré-Syndrome-34513.aspx Tooth decay generally develops as a result of a bacterial infection of your teeth. This is usually caused by poor oral hygiene. In this article: What is tooth decay? Diagnosis Advice & Support Symptoms Treatment Causes How Chemist Online can help What is tooth decay? Tooth decay is common throughout the UK with over half the population developing the condition at some point in their lives. People of all ages can suffer from tooth decay, with signs of childhood decay being evident as people visit their dentist in adulthood. With the increasing popularity of fizzy drinks and other sugar-based products among Britain’s youth, it is perhaps not surprising that the vast majority of tooth decay sufferers are children or teenagers. Symptoms Symptoms of tooth decay include: Toothache Tooth sensitivity that makes you wince whenever you eat or drink something cold or hot Holes and crevices in your teeth Discoloured teeth, where tiny spots have developed as a result of the decay Tooth abscesses Mouth infection Gum pain Jaw ache A build up of plaque or tartar around the upper and lower teeth bad breath (halitosis) Causes Causes of tooth decay can include: Poor oral hygiene Smoking A high carbohydrate diet Eating too many sweet things Drinking too many fizzy drinks Passive smoking (the involuntary inhalation of smoke, when tobacco smoke permeates your environment) – this is often a cause of tooth decay in children and teenagers Abnormally low production of saliva (usually due to taking prescribed medications) GORD (gastroesophageal reflux disease) Diagnosis A confirmed diagnosis of tooth decay will be made by your dentist through a physical examination of your mouth. Treatment Treatments for tooth decay can include: Good oral hygiene advice with an emphasis on regular brushing of teeth with fluoride toothpaste, mouthwashing as part of your everyday routine, and flossing – to prevent a build-up of tartar and plaque and to flush out any trapped tiny morsels of food around your teeth and gums Special fluoride treatments, such as: gels, foam or liquid solutions – to clean up the affected area(s) Reparation of the damaged teeth through fillings and crowns Root canal treatment – now a relatively painless procedure for getting to the core area of the tooth decay and replacing the pulp there with an artificial option Tooth extraction – surgical removal of the offending tooth or teeth, and then the replacement of these with artificial implants How Chemist Online can help Through this website we have a range of dental care products available to buy, such as Sensodyne ProNamel Daily Toothpaste which is specially formulated for people with sensitive teeth to help protect against acid wear 2012-03-15T08:55:41.607-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Tooth-Decay-34509.aspx Botulism is a paralytic illness. It is serious but rare. In this article: What is botulism? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is botulism? Botulism causes flaccid paralysis of the muscles. There are three types of botulism: Food-borne botulism: This is botulism caused by bacteria contaminating food (i.e. food kept in cans, tins, jars and also foods preserved in oil). The contamination is usually due to a fault or improper practice in the canning or preservation process. The onset of symptoms occurs when you digest the food as your body reacts to the spores of the organism Clostridium Botulinum – the bacteria that is at the core of botulism. Wound botulism: Where the spores of the Clostridium Botulinum organism infects an open wound and then multiplies (massively reproduces within the wound and, to a certain degree, beneath the skin in the wound’s surrounding area). This can often occur to drug users injecting Class A drugs (e.g., heroin) into muscle tissue. Infant botulism: This is rare, but occurs where an infant (usually before they have reached 12 months) somehow consumes the spores of the Clostridium Botulinum bacteria/organism. Once the child reaches its first birthday, its body will then develop a defence mechanism against the spores. Symptoms Symptoms of botulism in adults include: Muscle paralysis Dry mouth and throat Droopy eyelids Headache, blurred vision and double vision Speech and breathing difficulties Weak muscles (resulting in poor grip, for example) Constipation Nausea and vomiting Abdominal pain Symptoms in botulism in children include: Constipation A flat facial expression Irritability Lethargy Floppiness Breathing problems Muscle weakness Weak sucking Feeble crying Reduced movement Swallowing problems Excessive drooling Causes The Clostridium Botulinum bacteria can be found in soil and foods, such as honey and corn. Diagnosis If you (or your baby) are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms and think that you may have developed botulism, seek immediate medical treatment. Also call 999 and ask for an ambulance if you suspect that someone you know may be suffering from botulism. At your local (or nearest) hospital: After taking your medical history, asking you some questions about your symptoms and carrying out a physical examination, you will be asked to undergo either an MRI scan or a CT scan. Based upon the results, a confirmed diagnosis will/may be made. These tests (as well as a possible spinal tap test where a sample of cerebrospinal fluid is taken from your lower back) will also help to rule out other possible health conditions, such as Guillian-Barre Syndrome, mild heart attack or stroke – all of which have similar 2012-03-14T12:01:59.533-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Botulism-34508.aspx Male infertility can have many possible underlying causes, but is most commonly caused by semen abnormalities. In this article: What is male infertility? Effect on your life Advice & Support Causes Treatment Diagnosis How Chemist Online can help What is male infertility? Male infertility is where a man is unable to produce offspring, usually as result of an inability to produce a sufficient amount of healthy sperm. The good news is that, although there are no guarantees, there are treatments that can help a number of people with male infertility. Causes The most common causes of male infertility are low sperm counts, sperm abnormalities, and recurrent impotence. However, other causes can include lifestyle issues, such as: being overweight smoking recreational drug use excessive alcohol consumption stress poor diet some herbal supplements, such as: St John’s Wort, cotton and androstenedione (a natural steroid) lack of exercise, and environmental factors, such as working for long periods with particular types of solvents and pesticides Fertility problems can also be the result of sexual problems, side-effects of medication, the type(s) of contraception you and your partner were using prior to trying to conceive, and also if you have undergone a course of chemotherapy treatment (which can affect sperm counts and, in some cases, create sperm abnormalities). Diagnosis If you are a man and have been experiencing fertility problems for up to a year, then consider making an appointment with your GP. He or she will take your medical history (and social history) and ask you some questions, such as: for how long you and your partner have been trying to conceive, and if your partner is also experiencing fertility problems (due to things such as her medical history, lifestyle or previous pregnancy complications). Your GP may then carry out a physical examination of your testicles and penis, to check for things such as lumps, deformities and/or structure abnormalities. You may also be asked to provide a semen sample for analysis of your sperm count, and also a Chlamydia test (a Chlamydia infection can cause swelling and tenderness in the scrotum, impacting negatively upon ejaculation and overall healthy sperm production). Effect on your life For most couples, male infertility can be extremely stressful, emotionally draining and physically taxing – putting their relationships under enormous strain. Many men find that counselling and joining a support group helps. Treatment Male infertility treatments include: Erectile dysfunction therapy Hormonal treatments for low sperm counts A procedure called Testicular Sperm Extraction (TESE) where a needle is used to release trapped sperm in the testicles Assisted conception techniques, such as: donor insemination and IUI 2012-03-13T11:22:59.457-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Male-Infertility-34507.aspx ADHD is the most common behavioural disorder in the UK and tends to start at an early age. In this article: What is ADHD? Diagnosis Advice & Support Symptoms Effect on your life Causes Treatment What is ADHD? ADHD mainly affects children (3–9 per cent of school-aged children and young people in the UK) and consists of a combination of hyperactivity and an inability to concentrate on anything for more than a very short period of time. Boys are more commonly diagnosed with ADHD than girls. However, behavioural psychologists suggest that this may be because of some differences in behaviour between genders (see Symptoms section below). Symptoms The symptoms of ADHD can range from mild to severe, and include: persistent restlessness excessive impulsiveness excessive inattention being easily distracted constant fidgeting an inability to ‘wait your turn’ in situations where this is required, and a tendency to become withdrawn and ‘dreamy’ (behaviour usually displayed by girls with ADHD, rather than boys, whose overall behaviour is livelier) Other problems children with ADHD may have to cope with include: sleep disorders low self-esteem learning difficulties, and a tendency towards anxiety and depression Symptoms usually become apparent at around the age of five. Causes The exact cause of ADHD is as yet unknown. However, in-depth research consisting of clinical interviews, trials and observational psychological studies into ADHD have led to the following suggestions as being possible causes as to why some children develop the condition: Genetics – an inherited imbalance of neurotransmitters (chemicals that transmit nerve signals to the brain). Usually a parent or a close relative also has the condition. Diet – some food additives can aggravate hyperactive behaviour (these can be found in foods like ice cream and confectionery). Antenatal and Obstetric problems – premature babies and babies with a low birth weight can be prone to developing ADHD, as can babies of mothers who smoke, drink alcohol and use recreational drugs during pregnancy. Severe deprivation – where maternal deprivation occurs in the child’s early ‘mother–infant’ attachment stage. Diagnosis If your child is displaying the aforementioned symptoms and you suspect that they may have ADHD then make an appointment with your GP to confirm an accurate diagnosis. (Please note: it may be that your child’s school will first raise the issue regarding your child’s hyperactive behaviour and inability to concentrate.) Your GP will make a diagnostic assessment which may include: a discussion with your child a physical examination (to rule out other possible cause such as thyroid problems) memory tests, and problem-solving skills If your GP diagnoses ADHD, your child will be referred to a specialist who will be able 2012-02-29T09:18:26.8-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Attention-Deficit-Hyperactivity-Disorder-ADHD-in-Children-34496.aspx Cushing’s syndrome is named after Dr Cushing, an American physician who first described the disease in 1932. In this article: What is Cushing’s syndrome? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is Cushing’s syndrome? Cushing’s syndrome is essentially a group of changes to the body caused by a hormone disorder – your body producing excessive amounts of Cortisol. About cortisol: Cortisol is a vital hormone in the human body. It is made by the adrenal glands. You have two adrenal glands. They are positioned above each of your kidneys. The reason cortisol must remain at an appropriate level is because it helps to regulate your blood pressure, blood sugar level, and immune system. Also, a sufficient level of cortisol in your bloodstream can help to guard against Stress. Symptoms Many people with Cushing’s syndrome develop a ‘hump’ between their shoulders – something they can feel self-conscious of. The increased deposits of fat in this area of the body are caused by cortisol being redistributed there. Through the redistribution, a hump-like mound develops. Other symptoms of Cushing’s syndrome include: Rapid weight-gain and fat deposits to the face (which also becomes rounded and reddened), stomach and chest Fat deposits on the back of the neck Skin changes (spots, stretch marks, changes in skin colour…) Excessive facial and body hair (women are particularly affected by this) Fluid retention in the legs Excessive sweating The arms and legs being noticeably disproportionate in size (i.e. smaller than normal) to the rest of your body Being easily bruised Weakened bones and muscles Interruption to menstrual periods Diminished libido Erectile dysfunction in men Fatigue Associated symptoms include: Mood disorders, such as: anxiety, irritability and panic attacks High blood pressure High blood glucose Baldness in women (in rare cases) Headaches and migraines Raging thirst An increased need to urinate (this can be mild or an urgent need, depending upon the severity of your condition) Causes As we have seen, Cushing’s syndrome is caused by excessive amounts of the cortisol hormone. Your metabolism is affected by this excess, resulting in the onset of the aforementioned symptoms. Most cases of Cushing’s syndrome develop as a result of taking long-term medical steroids. Also, people with rheumatoid arthritis and other inflammatory conditions can develop Cushing’s syndrome. In many cases, Cushing’s syndrome can occur naturally, due to their being a small, cancerous tumour in the pituitary gland (this lies just below the brain). Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms, make an appointment to see your GP. After taking your medical history and asking you some questions about your symptoms, you will 2012-02-27T11:17:49.65-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cushing’s-Syndrome-34495.aspx Prostate cancer is the most common cancer among men in the UK. In this article: What is prostate cancer? Causes Treatments Symptoms Diagnosis Advice & Support What is prostate cancer? Prostate cancer usually develops in older men. The prostate gland (which only men have) lies just beneath the bladder. It is approximately the size of a chestnut and its primary function is to produce fluid which enriches and protects sperm, and also helps with the carriage of sperm out of the penis during ejaculation. Cancer is a disease where abnormal cells in the body begin to grow, divide and reproduce in an uncontrollable way. These abnormal cells then invade and destroy healthy tissue, including organs and glands. Prostate cancer develops when some of the cells in your prostate gland start to grow out of control in this way, invading and destroying healthy cells. Symptoms Symptoms of prostate cancer include: Occasionally passing of blood when urinating Painful and problematic urinating Pain and stiffness in your lower back, thigh bones and hips Pain at the base of the penis Painful orgasms Tiredness and loss of appetite Most, if not all, of these symptoms are common among older men. However, if you are experiencing these symptoms, please arrange an appointment with your GP. Causes As with other cancers, the exact reason as to why prostate cancer develops is unknown. However, risk factors may include things like: a poor diet (that is high in fat and low in fruit and vegetables), ageing, genetics, and also your ethnic group (prostate cancer is most common in African-Caribbean men). Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms, then it is important to arrange an appointment with your GP as soon as possible. He or she will carry out two simple tests that can help diagnose prostate cancer: A PSA test – a blood test to measure levels of prostate specific antigen (PSA) in the blood A Digital Rectal Examination to check your prostate’s size and shape and whether any lumps can be detected Note: PSA is a protein produced exclusively by your prostate gland. If your PSA level rises, this may be an indication of prostate cancer, and your GP may wish to refer you to an urologist for further tests. Treatments Treatment options for prostate cancer include: Hormone therapy – where the prostate is ‘starved’ of testosterone in order to try to slow down the spread of cancerous cells from your prostate Surgery – where the prostate is removed Brachytherapy – where radioactive seeds are implanted in the prostate www.chemistonline.co.uk Advice & Support The Prostate Cancer 2012-02-13T11:57:45.743-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Prostate-Cancer-34475.aspx Cervical dystonia is thought to be a neurological condition. In this article: What is cervical dystonia? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Effect on your life Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is cervical dystonia? Cervical dystonia is a condition which affects the behaviour of the neck muscles. It is the most common form of dystonia and affects over 35,000 people in the UK. Symptoms The main symptoms of cervical dystonia are neck muscle contractions and spasms. This can lead to your head and neck: twisting shaking, and being pulled backward, forward and/or side-to-side in an involuntary fashion An associated symptom of cervical dystonia is neck pain. Note: Some people with cervical dystonia develop depressive illness as a result of struggling to cope/come to terms with their condition, and also after surgery (if their condition is particularly severe and all other treatments proves unsuccessful, brain surgery may be recommended as a final option). Please see contact details for the Depression Alliance in the Advice & Support section at the foot of this article. Causes The involuntary and sustained muscle contractions and spasms which characterise cervical dystonia are thought to be caused by a problem with the sending of signals to muscles from the brain (the area of the brain involved in controlling movement is called the basal ganglia). The behaviour is thought to occur as a result of the following causes: A previous course of medicine An imbalance of a neurochemical called Dopamine Trauma (both neurological and psychological/emotional) Having a genetic predisposition to developing cervical dystonia. That is, you have a family history of it and the propensity to developing it is passed down. This is thought to occur only in rare cases. Note: Cervical dystonia can often result from an underling health problem, such as: a brain injury, stroke or having tuberculosis. Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms, make an appointment to see your GP. After taking your medical history and asking you some questions about your symptoms, you will then be asked to have a urine or blood test (to check for the presence of toxins). You may also be referred to your local hospital for an MRI scan – to check for evidence of a stroke. Where these tests prove inconclusive, you will be referred to a neurologist specialising in movement disorders. Effect on your life Many people with cervical dystonia feel self-conscious and also embarrassed about their symptoms when in the company of others. This is because the abnormal movements the muscle contractions and spasms cause. Treatment Despite worldwide medical 2012-02-08T08:01:20.977-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Dystonia-Cervical-34468.aspx Insomnia (poor sleep) affects about 1 in 5 people in the UK. In this article: What is insomnia? Diagnosis How Chemist Online can help Symptoms Effect on your life Advice & Support Causes Treatment What is insomnia? People with insomnia are unable to enjoy a restful night’s sleep. Due to a number of possible causes, insomnia sufferers find it extremely difficult to get off to sleep and, as a result, this can affect them during the daytime. Insomnia can be categorised into two types: Primary insomnia (where there is no obvious underlying cause), and Secondary insomnia (sleep problems due to a medical condition) Symptoms Symptoms of insomnia include: an inability to fall asleep periods of wakefulness throughout the night waking up earlier than planned in the morning, and feeling unnaturally tired upon waking Causes As well as things such as caffeine and alcohol consumption, nicotine, and medication side-effects, causes of insomnia can include: stress worry and anxiety turmoil due to relationship problems and parenting issues depression dementia illness being too hot or too cold in bed an uncomfortable bed pain & discomfort (e.g., asthma) environmental noise shift work, and jet lag Insomnia can also be caused by eating late at night. Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms, and techniques to combat insomnia have all proved unsuccessful, then make an appointment with your GP. He or she may refer you to a psychologist trained in assessing your condition and able to recommend a range of therapeutic treatments (such as Cognitive Behavioural Therapy) which may help. Effect on your life If you suffer from insomnia you may find that you do not function as well in the daytime as someone who benefits from a restful night’s sleep. For example, you may become irritable, find it difficult to concentrate when doing things such as reading, driving, participating in conversations and focusing upon your work. Unsurprisingly, people with insomnia often complain of feeling chronically tired during the daytime and of being in an unbreakable cycle of lost days due to sleepless nights. Treatment Treatments for insomnia can include: vitamins such as melatonin (which should only be taken with medical supervision) the amino acid L-tryptophan herbal remedies, and acupuncture Note: Sleeping tablets are not commonly prescribed for insomnia, except as a short course to help someone sleep after a period of recent trauma. Although there is no cure for insomnia as such, as well as the above treatments there are lots of things you can do to promote better sleep and overcome insomnia. For example: Reduce caffeine (not just in the hours prior to bedtime, but also throughout the day) Avoid eating a heavy meal, drinking 2012-02-07T12:11:32.843-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Insomnia-34467.aspx An episode of shingles can last for up to a month. In this article: What is shingles? Symptoms Causes Diagnosis Effect on your life Treatment How Chemist Online can help Advice & Support What is shingles? Shingles can be a very painful health condition. It usually affects people over 50 years of age. If you have had chickenpox in childhood, it is possible that the chickenpox virus has ‘stayed in your system’ lying dormant for years, but has then been reactivated in later life – causing shingles to develop (please see Symptoms section below). About chickenpox: Chickenpox is a red rash which can appear on most areas of the body – after infection. It is uncommon for an adult or child to have chickenpox more than once. Once infected by the chickenpox virus – the varicella-zoster virus – a nasty rash develops which may leave scabs. As well as chickenpox, other health conditions/diseases which weaken the immune system (e.g., HIV/AIDS) can cause shingles to develop. Symptoms Symptoms of shingles include: A tingling, burning sensation to the skin – usually down one side of the body (the chest, abdomen, trunk…) A nasty, painful red rash in the form of a band (this develops after a few days and affects the aforementioned skin areas where the burning sensation has developed). Nerve pain in the face Arm and leg pains Feverish symptoms Headache A general feeling of being unwell and having aches and pains Swollen lymph nodes (these can feel tender as they become enlarged) Causes Shingles is caused by a virus called the varicella-zoster virus – the same virus that causes chickenpox. Once your childhood episode of chickenpox has passed, the varicella-zoster virus remains in your system, ‘sitting’ in the nerve cells of your spinal chord for the rest of your life until, for some reason, your immune system becomes weakened, and shingles develops. You are at greater risk of having shingles if you are elderly, have had cancer treatment, drink alcohol excessively, smoke, or are under extreme stress for some reason (due to problems at home, or through being under constant pressure to achieve a sales target at work, for example). Diagnosis If you are suffering from the aforementioned symptoms, arrange an appointment with your GP immediately. They will take your medical history, ask you some questions about your symptoms, and then carry out a short physical examination (inspection of your rash). It is highly unlikely that any kind of test will need to be made. However, if attaining a confirmed diagnosis proves difficult, then the shingles virus 2012-02-06T10:24:16.383-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Shingles-34466.aspx Cataracts are a major cause of blindness and can be common in older people. In this article: What are cataracts? Diagnosis Advice & Support Symptoms Treatment Causes How Chemist Online can help What are cataracts? If you have a cataract you have a cloudy spot in the lens of your eye(s) which makes things appear blurred. This ‘mistiness’ in your vision can become progressively worse if you do not seek treatment (surgery) as early as possible, or if treatment proves unsuccessful – this can occur in rare cases where an operation to remove a cataract goes wrong or can not ultimately be performed for some other reason. Symptoms Symptoms of cataracts include: seeing a spot in the centre of your vision, rather than a sharp picture overall a progressive blurring of vision over time double vision abnormally reduced vision at night or in a dark environment seeing a ring of light (like a halo) around lights experiencing a stronger, almost blinding glare from both sunlight and powered lights (e.g., lamps, headlights) difficulty in distinguishing some colours from others, and the sense that colours seem faded Also, if you are suffering from cataracts you will probably find that you have to keep changing your glasses to a different prescription (i.e. more often than normal). Causes A cataract develops in the eye when the protein in the lens forms into clumps. This prevents enough light from reaching the back of the eye where the retina sits ready to form a clear picture. Blurring occurs as a result. This clumping of protein usually occurs as part of the ageing process – about a third of all sufferers are of pensionable age. However, younger people can also develop the condition. Cataracts can occur due to: being diabetic having high blood pressure having a cardiovascular disease having a genetic predisposition (i.e. cataracts are in the family and this predisposition is passed down) smoking overexposure to the sun experiencing an episode of extreme dehydration at some time in your life (this may be through a particularly severe bout of diarrhoea when travelling abroad, for example, or as a result of developing a viral infection or other condition) prolonged use of steroids Diagnosis A confirmed diagnosis of cataracts is usually made through an eye test. Treatment Cataracts are treated through a delicate but surprisingly quick surgical procedure where the cataract is removed and replaced with a new artificial lens. How Chemist Online can help Many people suffer from severe headaches after cataract surgery. Through this website we have a range of treatments available to buy which can help, such as: 2012-01-23T11:16:53.333-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cataracts-34443.aspx Line extensions are a type of branding strategy in which businesses come up with new and innovative ways to introduce new products to the world. In this strategy, owners of a particular brand decide to use their brand name to sell other products. In most cases well known brands venture off into completely different products than the ones they originally sell, or they decide to keep the product and make minimal but effective changes. This strategy serves as a means to get the community to fulfill various needs, but still have a sense of stability and trust in the brand that they are familiar with. Numerous companies embark on this branding strategy, one of which being the Coca- Cola Company. The Coca Cola Company has been around since 1890 and still continues to grow strong. Coca –Cola first appeared in bottles in 1895 and has been evolving its image ever since. The company understands that society is always changing and always in demand for new products, and they keep up with it. In the turn of the twenty-first century, it was and now continues to be all the rage to be fit and live a healthier lifestyle. The Coca-Cola Company saw this change and decided to expand its brand and create a Diet Coke that was artificially sweetened and contained no sugar, fat, or cholesterol. This beverage later led to the development of Coke Zero, one of Coca Colas biggest successes. The company makes other beverages such as sparkling waters, and even alcoholic beverage mixers. The popularity of the brand has allowed Coca Cola to be one of the most successful beverage companies in the world. People trust its name, and have no problem purchasing any product the Coca- Cola Company endorses or creates. Dove care products are another excellent example of line extension. The dove company has gone from making standard body bars, to making body bars in a variety of scents and uses. The company’s success has allowed them to venture in to a new line of skin care products. Dove now houses a variety of lotions, shampoos, conditioners, and deodorant. Although usually associated with woman products, Dove has tried to further expand their company by creating a line of male body washes and face bars. The male products that dove created were smart in the sense that they were able to appeal to an entirely new group of 2011-12-25T14:45:08.58-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Line-Extensions-AKA-a-Type-of-Branding-Strategy-34405.aspx Music is the important art of human being; it has the power to change our mindset, to affect every aspect of our lives and our culture. Yet music is also a large global business towards our economy. One of business segment of music is the Hi-Fi sector, Hi Fi system included music player, amplifiers and speaker. Nowadays, accordingly to enhancing computer technology, Hi-Fi is more and more getting into cyber field such as computer installation Hi-Fi systems, digital music players etc. Hi-Fi sector experienced ups and downs from 1970s to nowadays. By PETSEL analysis, it is an external analysis tool for analysis of macro-environment. PESTEL is stand for Political factor(s), Economic factor(s), Social factor(s), Technological factor(s), Environmental factor(s) and Legal factor(s). For PESTEL analysis, political factor(s) are about tax policy, employment laws, environmental regulations, trade restrictions and tariffs, political stability. Government can create trade barrier by legislation. These refer to government policy such as the degree of intervention in the economy. What goods and services does a government want to provide? To what extent does it believe in subsidising firms? What are its priorities in terms of business support? Political decisions can impact on many vital areas for business such as the education of the workforce, the health of the nation and the quality of the infrastructure of the economy. As per political factor(s), it seems no direct political factor(s) are contributed to Hi-Fi industry; the significant of this factor seems not obvious. For Economic factor(s) are included interest rates, taxation changes, economic growth, inflation and exchange rates. As you will see throughout the "Foundations of Economics" book economic change can have a major impact on a firm's behaviour. For example: Higher interest rates may deter investment because it costs more to borrow. A strong currency may make exporting more difficult because it may raise the price in terms of foreign currency. Inflation may provoke higher wage demands from employees and raise costs. Higher national income growth may boost demand for a firm's products. The market of Hi-Fi is broad and growing, as the figure 154,004 in 2003 but in 2008, it is increasing to be 165164. According to the increasing sales of Apple Ipod in 2001, there is also increasing the demand of Hi-Fi system which is outfitted to Apple Ipod. So the company should aware the macroeconomic situation to try to 2011-12-13T09:18:45.5-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Environmental-Analysis-PETSEL-of-the-Music-Industry-34388.aspx What activities should an entrepreneur perform prior to the start up of the enterprises 21st century - a highly dynamic and uncertain business environment, globalization, hyper-competition and new technologies that change existing market into a brand new form – shorter product life cycle, advanced communication model, transparent market information, rivalry between SME and corporation, online marketing channel, etc. These make the entrepreneur could not survive easily without a thoughtful strategic plan, strategic management provide them a systematic and comprehensive means for analyzing the environment, and identifying opportunities that could allow them develop and exploit competitive advantages. From previous research, we could understand that three group of main factors that affect the survivability of new business: (1) individual characteristics of the founder (2) attributes, structural characteristics and strategies of the new business itself (3) business and economic environment (Josef et al. 1992; Oliver Falck 2007), so we could see that these factors are related to the how you lead the organization, plan and understand the highly dynamic business environment, how you manage your cost and plan for your internal organization structure and human resources management. Down to earth, an entrepreneur should do following activities in order to avoid failure when start their business: to analysis external and internal business environment (SWOT analysis), to analysis competitive rivalry (Porter’s competitive strategy), to hire valuable employee (human resources management), to control cash flow and re-allocate investment capital to achieve cost effective (cost management), to maintain high team-spirit and operational efficiency (organizational structure strategy). These strategies could be applied to enhance the survivability of the new venture. For analysis external and internal business environment, entrepreneur should adopt SWOT analysis. SWOT analysis summaries the key issues from the business environment and the strategy development. This can be useful as a basis against which it judge future strategic choices. SWOT is divided into 4 approaches - Strengths (S), Weakness (W), Opportunity (O) and Threats (T). For evaluation of internal factor, entrepreneur could think about what is the advantage of her enterprise by comparison of her main competitor into several approaches: cost control, resources availability, organizational structure. For example: Patents, Strong brand names, Good reputation among customers, Cost advantages from proprietary know-how, exclusive access to high grade natural resources, favorable access to distribution networks. For evaluation of weakness that entrepreneur can conclude internal disadvantage so as to implement certain measure to fix the problem or at least use alternative method 2011-12-13T09:07:10.85-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Steps-in-Setting-up-a-New-Business-34387.aspx India is the world's favorite outsourcing destination although there are other countries from the developing nations who are also on the outsourcing radar. However, if a comparative study were to be made between India on one side and countries like China, Philippines and Vietnam on the other, some revealing facts come to light. India alone commands 65% of 2011-11-30T03:14:09.98-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Outsourcing-Destination-India-Vs_-World-34366.aspx Introduction Mirco and marco-economic is the study of different kinds of economic. Mirco deal with the little man and how he decide how he is going to conduct business and marco is how our government decide to do business. When studying the economic, it is best to study everything about how our economic is formed to get a real understanding of it. Every time we made a decision when purchasing anything that decision affects the economic. When businesses have to lower their overhead and lay people off, it affects the economy. The difference between Microeconomics and Macroeconomics is that microeconomics is basically the study of people and their business choices that they make and macroeconomics is the decisions the country and government decides. There have been a lot of studies done on microeconomics and macroeconomics (Investopedia.com, n.d.). The decision that people make in businesses concerning the share of their capital and prices of goods and services is called microeconomics; they also have to consider the taxes and regulations that the government creates. Supply and demand and prices in the economy is the main thing that microeconomics deals with; for instant, it would look at a company and try and figure out how the company could product more and lower their cost and still do as well as other companies in the industries (Investopeida.com, n.d.). Macroeconomics deals with the whole economy and not just one industry. The Gross National Product and what affected it has on unemployment, national income, rate of growth, and price levels are some of the things that are studied in macroeconomics. The raising and lower of net export influences the countries funds account or how GDP would have an effect on the unemployment rate (Investopeida.com, n.d.). Even though they are different, they are inter-reliant and balance each other because they have areas in which they overlie each other on some of the issues. Microeconomics goes from the little person up to figure out the economy while macroeconomics look at the most senior level in management to figure out the economy. We should study microeconomics and macroeconomics to get a good understanding of how businesses function and receive profits and how the economy is directed and suspected (Investopeida.com, n.d.). Example of each phenomenon that we see every day would be that micro lowers or raises assessment and supply and demand causes the prices to 2011-11-26T13:49:03.723-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marco-Econmics-and-Cultural-Factors-34359.aspx Dell Computer Corporation Strategy and Challenges You don’t ever really know whether you’ve come up with the right plan until much later—when it either works or it doesn’t. What is the right plan? It’s the one that helps you identify what you need to do to ensure success. It’s the one that rallies your employees around a few common goals—and motivates them to achieve them. It’s one that involves your customers’ goals and your suppliers’ goals and brings them altogether in a unified focus. —Michael Dell In 1984, at the age of 19, Michael Dell founded Dell Computer with a simple vision and business concept—that personal computers could be built to order and sold directly to customers. Michael Dell believed his approach to the PC business had two advantages: (1) Bypassing distributors and retail dealers eliminated the markups of resellers, and (2) building to order greatly reduced the costs and risks associated with carrying large stocks of parts, components, and finished goods. While the company sometimes struggled during its early years trying to refine its strategy, build an adequate infrastructure, and establish market credibility against better-known rivals, Dell’s build-to-order, sell-direct approach proved appealing to growing numbers of customers worldwide during the 1990s as global PC sales rose to record levels. And, as Michael Dell had envisioned, the direct-to-the-customer strategy gave the company a substantial cost and profit margin advantage over rivals that manufactured various PC models in volume and kept their distributors and retailers stocked with ample inventories. Dell Computer’s Market Position in Early 2000 Going into 2000, Dell Computer was the U.S. leader in PC sales, with nearly a 17 percent market share, about 1 percentage point ahead of second-place Compaq. Gateway was third with 8.9 percent, followed by Hewlett-Packard with 8.8 percent and IBM with 7.2 percent. Dell overtook Compaq as the U.S. sales leader in the third quarter of 1999, and it had moved ahead of IBM into second place during 1998 (see Exhibit 1). Worldwide, Dell Computer ranked second in market share (10.5 percent) behind Compaq (14.0 percent). IBM ranked third worldwide, with an 8.2 percent share, but this share was eroding. Since 1996, Dell had been gaining market share quickly in all of the world’s markets, growing at a rate more than triple the 18 percent average annual increase in global PC sales. Even though Asia’s economic woes in 1997–98 and part of 1999 dampened the 2011-11-24T05:22:35.15-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Dell-Computer-Corporation-Strategy-and-Challenges-34355.aspx Assignment 1 – Theme Parks Contents 1.0 Introduction 3 2.0 An Overview of the Market 3 2.1 The main players in the market 3 2.2 Recent Trends 4 2.3 Environmental Influence 6 2.4 Expenditure on marketing communications and share of voice (SOV) 7 2.5 Customers and how do they buy – Consumers and their Expenditure 9 3.0 A Comparison between two brands within the theme park market 11 3.1 Objectives 11 3.1.1 Disneyland’s Objectives 11 3.1.2 Pleasure Beach’s Objectives 11 3.2 Main Message 12 3.2.1 Disneyland’s Main Message 12 3.2.2 Pleasure Beach’s Main Message 12 3.3 The Positioning Strategy 12 3.4 Target Audience 12 3.5 How much money are they spending and how 12 3.6 Marketing Communications Tools and Media 12 3.6.1 Disneyland’s Marketing Communications 12 3.6.2 Pleasure Beach’s Marketing Communications 12 3.7 Evidence of IMC 14 4.0 Conclusion 16 5.0 Reference 18 6.0 Bibliography 19 1.0 Introduction In this report, I aim to provide an overview of the theme parks market. Using useful sources such as Keynote and Mintel, the market research will identify who the main players are in the market, recent trends, expenditure within the market, the target market of theme parks and spending trends. With this information, these should allow and help form up a PESTLE analyse on the market as well as on the main players within the market in order to make a conclusion on why the marketing communication strategy within the theme park industry is successful. 2.0 An Overview of the Market 2.1 The main players in the market In the theme parks market,their are many contenders within the industry. As the theme parks market has evoled into a multibillion industry, its entertainment factors has drawn vistors from all around the world in which many themes have generated over the years. Having looked at companies information, annual reports and other theme park resources, they have provided estimates of theme parks attendance to distinguish the main players in the market. Figure 1 (below) shows the top 10 amusement/theme park attraction chains worldwide. Fig. 1 [8] It is clear that the most visited theme park in the world in 2007 was Magic Kingdom at Orlando’s Walt Disney World and has been for the last couple of year. Coming second was Disneyland Tokyo, with an estimate of 15.1 million vistors in 2007. Having looked at the 2007 report on the attendance in amusement/theme parks, it is clear that the dominate players in the theme parks market are DisneyLand, Universal Studios and Everland. Attendance for the top 25 theme parks worldwide increased in 2007 by 0.5 percent to 187.6 million vistors. Vistors to the 20 most popular parks in Europe increased by 2.8% - 41.2 million. 2011-11-21T02:05:42.34-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Communication-Mix-34352.aspx 1) Mountain Man Lager Mountain Man Lager, also known as “West Virginia’s Beer, is a symbol of toughness, authenticity, and uniqueness. Despite the association with taste, the Mountain Man Beer Company (MMBC) was also associated with best-in-class quality. Brand equity, followed with substantially high brand awareness and loyalty, is main factor enabling the company to survive in the face of adverse market trends and increased pressure of major national players. MMBC has strong ties with blue collar, middle to low income men over age 45. These are the core drinker for MMBC, very much loyal over the long period for perceived quality, taste, toughness and availability of the product. In fact, sole brand loyalty of MM Lager is higher than that of Budweiser or Bud Light. MMBC was wise enough to nurture&capitalize on brand equity. It is earlier efforts to get off-premise locations and effective use of grass-roots marketing and resulting m-o-w secured the company a strong enough distribution and large enough market to compete in. MM lager is sold in Illinois, Indiana, Michigan and Ohio: impressive for what amounts to a regional specialty brew. In West Virginia, Mountain Man is the market leader. Their lager is rated as the best-known regional beer, and has won “best beer” awards in both West Virginia and Indiana. Mountain Man is an established, 75+-year-old brand with a loyal, if aging blue-collar clientele. I think main elements of the MMBC brand equity stems from its simplicity; a tough beer for mountain men of East Central America. It has a distinct flavor prepared with a century old recipe. It gives you the taste of interacting with previous generation. One participant says, “My dad drank MM just like my granddad did. They both felt it was as good as you can get anywhere”. As long as this guy remembers his granddad, MM Lager will remain best beer of Virginia for him. 2) Perceptual Map Map 1: Regional Beer Market Map 2: Regional Light Beer Market Full-flavor premium market segment on the other has been witnessing decrease in volume, and facing increased cost/marketing pressure from import and big pocket national companies. Latest trends in beer market have virtually eliminated second quadrant; small regional brewers (except high priced specialty beers). Economies of scale and skimming are only viable strategies. In this regard, two types of producers seem to stay profitable; very small/micro brewers and 2011-11-18T23:07:53.663-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Harvard-Case-Mountain-Man-Lager-Answers-34351.aspx Google's HR Dilemma Google started by 2 Stanford University graduate students Larry Page and Sergey Brin Beginning in 1996, where they built a search engine called “BackRub” that used links to determine the importance of individual web pages. By 1998 they had formalized their work, creating the company you know today as Google. Since then, the company based on a simple approach to search has become a leader in IT and one of the big companies in the world having ranks in top 100 best places to work in and highly profitable IT web based and development companies. Google started with 20 employees in 1988 and since then, the company has grown to more than 20,000 employees worldwide, with a management team that represents some of the most experienced technology professionals in the industry 2000. Google attraction was not just its innovative technology in web browsing or it is lucrative return on employment that engineers and other people sow, it was a culture that the founders has created, embraced and emphasized as a unique way or working and producing efficiently, they have created a new working environment that is now a culture called the Google Culture. What is this culture that is praised by many and citizen by other? Culture refers to an organization's values, beliefs, and behaviours. In general, it is concerned with beliefs and values on the basis of which people interpret experiences and behave, individually and in groups. Usually in most cases, a company is a reflection of its owner and later on its shareholders but in our case it is a pure reflection of Larry Page and Sergey Brin and how they wanted their company to be and their working environment to look like. So, they have both adapted and created a series of steps that eventually create this Google culture that is based on The company is based on core foundation of emotional intelligence & organizational culture where work is not a duty as much as a free space to express your intelligence and a culture that it belongs to you as you belong to it. They created an accommodating culture for engineers “geeks”, an society of creative brains where their behaviours is common among others since they are usually regarded as outcasts and allowed their creativity to run freely with a greet self-esteem. Also, Google concept and vision motivated innovation and this it has to 2011-11-11T07:34:22.143-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Google-s-HR-Dilemma-34337.aspx 2011-11-09T06:21:21.813-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/wqewqe-34328.aspx 2011-11-09T06:19:51.18-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/wqeqw-34325.aspx 2011-11-09T06:17:31.69-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/gfh-34321.aspx 2011-11-09T06:14:07.377-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/_23-34315.aspx 2011-11-09T06:13:59.49-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/_qwe-34314.aspx ABSTRACT The popularity and practicality of people living in and/or commuting to large cities in the 21st century is expected to yield to an increased number of home offices. Feasibility, advantages and disadvantages, for the economy, the environment, quality of life, worker productivity, and social aspects are discussed. An AT&T case analysis is included. INTRODUCTION Information technologies (such as PCs, multiple phone lines, fax machines, internet emails, office network systems, and videoconferencing) are making it possible for an ever increasing number of people to work from their homes. In 1998, the number of home offices was approximately 60 million, and it is predicted that by the year 2020, more than half of all workers in advanced information era societies will work, either out of their homes, or in decentralized corporate offices, i.e., out of the city (The Futurist, p53). Our society is becoming more and more information-based with every passing year. No longer an industrial-based nation, people do not have to go to the manufacturing plant, for instance, in order to perform their jobs. If they have the necessary technological equipment, many people can now perform most, or even all, of their job responsibilities from the comfort of their own homes. Personal Advantages There are many advantages to working “in the comfort of one’s own home,” but, as with everything, there are trade-offs. One personal advantage comes via more flexibility in filing one’s income tax return. Working out of the home makes it possible to deduct various expenses that would otherwise not be deductible. Another tangible personal advantage involves forestalling the wear and tear of one’s automobile, i.e., less mileage truly translates into less upkeep and repair costs. Also, commuting into one’s spare-bedroom-office saves on the daily cost of gasoline typically needed to get oneself “downtown” (or wherever) to the office. Other personal advantages include setting one’s own schedule (to the varying degrees that this is possible); not having to deal with commuter traffic twice a day (actually being able to sleep-in during the typical commute time); being at home to let repair persons in or sign for packages; and being able to take a twenty break and go pick the kids up from school, instead of going to grab a cup of coffee with 2011-10-31T22:27:37.137-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Working-at-Home-on-the-Rise-34272.aspx Amazon.com was founded by Jeff Bezos in 1995. Originally, the company was an online bookseller, but has expanded far beyond its original product line. Consumers can find just about anything at Amazon.com; in fact, the company has trademarked the catchphrase “Earth’s Biggest Selection,” which it uses in promotional materials to describe the dearth of Amazon’s product availability, which includes (besides books) music, DVDs, videos, consumer electronics, toys, software, video games, health and beauty products, tools, kitchen products, and a number of other products through various partners (www.amazon.com, PG). Amazon also offers services, such as film processing. Additionally, individuals and businesses can sell products on Amazon’s website through its Amazon Marketplace, Auctions and zShops services. The company also operates websites in many other countries, including the United Kingdom, Germany, France, and Japan. Strengths Amazon’s business strategy is based on market share growth, not profitability. To accomplish its goal, the company frequently takes advantage of opportunities to form alliances and strategic partnerships, as well to acquire other business operations. For example, when the online retailer Egghead.com went bankrupt in 2001, Amazon purchased the company’s website, intellectual property, and product information. Another strategy involves investing heavily in information technology. Indeed, Amazon’s superior customer service and use of technology – two of the company’s greatest strengths - have made Amazon.com “the best-known brand in e-commerce” (Hof, 2000). The purpose of Amazon.com’s existence is to sell products through the Internet and information technologies. Amazon is successful in the e-commerce industry because it is an innovator. Amazon.com is, perhaps, not so much an e-tailer as a technology company. It was the first online store to effectively utilize site personalization. Once a customer has made his first purchase at Amazon.com, each subsequent time he visits the site, he will be greeted by name and given recommendations for products in which he might be interested. Similarly, Amazon uses e-mail messages to market to its existing customers, by tracking those customers’ purchases and then periodically sending messages with suggestions and promotional information for similar products each individual customer might enjoy based upon his or her interests in books, music, movies, electronics, and other products sold by Amazon.com. Amazon has even launched Amazon Access, an alternative version of its website geared toward visually impaired customers; the site’s functions are compatible with screen access software 2011-10-31T22:18:54.523-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/History-of-Amazon-34267.aspx A discussion of the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats of the athletic footwear and apparel manufacturer Nike. The company’s strategies involving innovation and diversity are mentioned as some of its strengths. Introduction Nike was founded in 1962 as Blue Ribbon Sports by former athlete Phil Knight, who still runs the company today as its Chief Executive Officer. Nike went public in 1980 and is currently the world’s top ranking athletic shoe company. It controls approximately 40% of the United States’ athletic shoe market, and also sells its products in 140 other countries. Nike doesn’t just sell athletic shoes, however footwear does comprise some 60% of the company’s revenues. Nike also designs, manufactures, markets and sells dress shoes and casual shoes under the brand name Cole Haan, as well as a line of athletic clothing, accessories and equipment – including ice skates, skate blades, and hockey sticks. Nike also operates a chain of retail stores called Niketown, and is currently opening a group of stores catering only to women, called Nikegoddess. Strengths Nike’s business strategies involve aggressive advertising, diversification, and innovation, and these components have enabled the company to quickly rebound from a variety of adverse situations, some of which will be discussed later in this paper. Nike, indeed, has remained on top of the athletic footwear market since going public in 1980, and that is a long time to hold the number one position without so much as a falter. Nike spends a lot of money on advertising; the 1992 “Just Do It” campaign featuring Michael Jordan cost $100 million. But it was effective; 10 years later, people still associate that catch-phrase with Nike, and remember the message behind the ads: be bold, believe in yourself, and wear Nikes! As previously mentioned, Nike has diversified into a number of other product lines besides athletic footwear. These include accessories such as sunglasses and watches. Such expansion has significantly contributed to Nike’s ability to sustain earnings growth at a time when competitor sales have been slumping a bit (Nightly Business Report, PG). The company has also diversified geographically, adding 10-20 new countries to its distribution network within the last few years. Approximately one of every five sales of Nike shoes occurs in a country other than the United States. The brand is especially popular in Europe and Asia, most particularly in Japan. As 2011-10-31T22:17:46.43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-of-Nike-34265.aspx An examination of FedEx Corporation’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats, with its position as the original overnight delivery service being discussed as one of the company’s greatest strengths. Introduction FedEx Corporation was created in 1973 as an entirely new concept in package delivery – an overnight air delivery service. While many competitors have sprung up since that time to steal small portions of the market share, FedEx is still undeniably the global leader in its industry. The company also provides e-commerce and supply chain management services to its clients in more than 210 countries. The corporation has some 215,000 employees and contractors and offers a plethora of delivery options including worldwide express delivery, ground small parcel delivery, freight delivery, and customs brokerage. Integrated business solutions are provided through a group of operating companies, of which Federal Express Corporation is the largest. Strengths FedEx has experienced consistent growth in terms of net income in just about every year of its operation, which has meant three decades of growth. One of the company’s greatest strengths is undoubtedly its business concept. No matter what the economy is doing, there will always be a need for package delivery of some sort by companies and individuals involved in nearly every industry. Even when times are tough and companies are seeking to save money, FedEx has less expensive delivery alternatives from which to choose. Of course, being the originator of the express delivery concept is also a key strength. FedEx became a household name before any of its competitors ever arrived on the scene, and thus has become synonymous with the idea of express package delivery in the minds of many, if not most, consumers. Another reason for FedEx’s unparalleled success is the company’s philosophy of “People-Service-Profit,” which dictates that company puts its people first above everything. This way, executives apparently believe, employees will be motivated to provide the best customer service possible, and profitability will follow. The approach appears to be working. The FedEx employee relations program involves recognition for outstanding performance with tickets to special events and paid time off to participate in community volunteer projects. Weaknesses Perhaps FedEx’ greatest weakness is the corporation’s large size. In a large, multinational organization, it is often difficult to maintain tight control over all operations. Indeed, according to respected marketing expert and author Jack Trout, the 2011-10-31T22:16:52.603-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-of-FedEx-34264.aspx An examination of Microsoft’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats, with momentum and persistence being discussed as some of the company’s strengths. Introduction Microsoft Corporation was established in 1975 as a supplier of the DOS operating system and developer of programming languages for the first IBM personal computer. Twenty-six years later, it has literally become the most powerful force in the software industry, earning chairman and co-founder (with Paul Allen) Bill Gates millions of dollars and a significant place in technology history. Today the company is the worldwide leader for software, services and Internet technologies for personal and business computing. Strengths One of Microsoft’s greatest strengths is the company’s sheer momentum. It has never slowed down, and continues to squash competitors left and right by being the first – or at least the most heavily promoted – in every market it conquers. Certainly, Bill Gates doesn’t give up; his products may not be the best upon first release, but he continues to improve on them year after year and push new versions out the door at an almost alarming rate. This persistence has surely paid off, and Microsoft definitely isn’t going anywhere. Microsoft “has created tremendous value for America” with all the innovative software products it has developed, not to mention the thousands of jobs it has directly and indirectly created for Americans (Pohlman and Gardiner, p. 63). Who can remember, anymore, what life was like without Windows? We now have an entire generation of people who have never lived in a time when there was not Windows, and who wouldn’t know what do to if faced with a black AS/400 screen and function key commands as their only mode of computing. Another strength is that Microsoft has a significant degree of employee ownership; in fact, some 10,000 of the company’s regular employees own approximately $1 million in stock (Rosen, PG). Microsoft also employs many contractors, who aren’t offered stock options. The reason this is considered a strength is that the corporation’s undoubtedly employees have a more dedicated sense of loyalty and responsibility to their employer than employees of a company whose financial futures are not dependent on its fate. Weaknesses Historically, Microsoft simply hasn’t had the talent it needs in-house to continually develop and maintain technologies needed in the marketplace. In short, the company has made it big by buying other peoples’ 2011-10-31T22:16:05.633-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-of-Microsoft-34263.aspx An examination of the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats of AOL Time Warner, with rapid growth and brand recognition being discussed as two of the company’s greatest strengths. Introduction AOL Time Warner is a media conglomerate made up of the Internet service provider America Online and veteran film, television and publishing giant Time Warner. Since the two companies’ merger in 2001, the new organization has morphed into a “behemoth…[that is] blasting into the 21st century like no other” (Hoovers, PG). AOL Time Warner owns a number of subsidiaries, each covering a different media, and including America Online, Inc., AOL Time Warner Interactive Video, Columbia House Company, Time Inc., Time Warner Entertainment Company L.P., Time Warner Telecom Inc., Turner Broadcasting System Inc., and Warner Music Group. Strengths AOL Time Warner’s very existence is a testament to its executives’ penchant for risk and opportunity. Surely, two major strengths must be persistence and ambition. It appears as though AOL Time Warner is attempting to control the media in the same way Microsoft Corporation has controlled the software industry for years. Today the company’s contributions include electronic mail, conferencing, software, interactive magazines and newspapers, print magazines and newspapers, online classes, web hosting services, movies, music and a number of other types of media and media services. AOL actually acquired Time Warner; AOL’s rapid growth over the last 10 years have made it a powerful contender in the market for Internet-related services. One of the company’s strengths is customer care, as AOL offers customers a complete package including online features, privacy and security, parental controls, and unrivaled customer service. Certainly, the AOL brand name recognition is quite high; AOL is a household word, which means a lot in terms of customer acceptance and retention for any product or service with the AOL name on it. Finally, another strength must be the combined business savvy of the company’s executives. With years of success and rapid growth already under their belts, AOL Time Warner’s leadership team already has an advantage over many of its competitors. Weaknesses According to marketing expert and consultant Jack Trout, the merger between AOL and Time Warner is based on the mistaken belief held by many corporate leaders today that business categories are combining, not dividing. The current buzzwords in corporate America, says Trout, are “synergy” and “alliance;” but the convergence of different forms of media (computer, television and print) created 2011-10-31T22:15:24.737-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-of-AOL-Time-Warner-34262.aspx An examination of eBay’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats, with a discussion of the company’s position as a middleman, or broker, being one of its greatest strengths due to the fact that it involves much lower costs than a traditional e-commerce business. Introduction Ebay was founded by Pierre Omidyar in 1995 as a marketplace for the sale of goods and services for individuals. Not only was it a novel idea, but it was utilizing an innovative technology – the Internet. E-commerce had not yet been established as an acceptable and understandable method of doing business at that time. Today, one can find more than 18,000 categories of merchandise on ebay, including big-ticket items such as cars and real estate. Ebay is not so much an e-commerce site as it is a trading community, where buyers are sellers find one another and conduct transactions. Browsing and bidding is free, but ebay charges a fee for listing an item for sale as well as a fee for items that are sold. Additional fees are charged for special features in listings, such as bold listings or extra photographs (the first two are free). Ebay currently has approximately 14,000 registered users around the world. Strengths By far, ebay’s greatest strength is that it was first – the first online auction site – an entirely new concept in commerce. Omidyar jumped in with both feet on the new technology bandwagon, opening up the world to the concept of electronic commerce. His decision to hire CEO and President Meg Whitman turned out to be a jewel of a choice, as Whitman herself is another of ebay’s biggest strengths. Building on her experience with Hasbro and Stride Rite, as well as her Harvard business education, Whitman has led ebay through a number of reinventions to the mammoth site it is today. The company earned a net income of more than $90 million in 2001, which was a 73 percent increase from the previous year. Ebay is hot, and its here to stay. Whitman’s strategy has been rapid growth through adding new categories. Yet another strength is that ebay is in the business of connecting people, not selling things. Therefore, it encounters no inventory or distribution costs whatsoever, which is highly unusual for e-commerce businesses. Ebay is only a broker, never actually taking possession of any merchandise, which places the 2011-10-31T22:14:35.9-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-of-eBay-34261.aspx A discussion of the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats facing Subway, with its marketing strategies being examined as one of the chain’s primary strengths. Introduction What started as a single store in Connecticut in 1965 has grown into a multi-billion dollar organization with more than 17,000 locations in 72 countries around the world. Born out of a business partnership between 18-year-old Fred DeLuca and a family friend, Dr. Peter Buck, Subway began as an investment to help DeLuca earn enough money to attend college in hopes of fulfilling his dream to become a physician. Strengths Subway may not have been the first, but it is certainly the best-known subway sandwich chain in the United States. A key component to this success is undoubtedly the company’s name – one can’t help but associate Subway Sandwich Shop with a sub sandwich. But the company’s marketing strategies have propelled its growth to the number one market position in its segment. Subway currently has more stores in the United States than does McDonald’s, and that is a nearly unbelievable accomplishment. The chain received more requests for franchises in 2001 than in any other year of its existence, beating out all other fast food franchise requests. In fact, Subway has been named the number one franchise opportunity by Entrepreneur magazine for the tenth consecutive year. Recent requests could be, in part, a response to 2000’s well-received “Eat Fresh” campaign, for which the company spent $75 million to associate fresh ingredients with Subway sandwiches in the minds of the public. The campaign involved a few changes in ingredient lists as well as sandwich production processes. Weaknesses While Subway sandwiches are certainly popular, the company must be careful not to fall into the trap of believing that it must continually change its offerings in order to remain the market leader. Change is good in moderate amounts; smart executives, indeed, will carefully monitor consumer preferences in order to ensure company strategies are in line with them. However, too much change too soon can cause a company to lose favor with customers, as the reasons for a company’s popularity begin to be erased. Subway has already exhibited signs of too much change, altering its menu multiple times in the last five years or so. Most recently, the company added a line of “Subway Selects,” sandwiches made with more 2011-10-31T22:13:28.06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-of-Subway-Sandwich-Shops-34260.aspx This essay discusses the Thistle Hotel chain of the U.K. I Introduction The Thistle Hotel chain is one of the leading hotel concerns in the U.K. It has over 55 properties, almost half of which are in London. It is (according to its website) the largest hotel group in the capital. This paper will explore the Thistle Hotel chain, with emphasis on its business strategies; the competitive advantages of these hotels; how Thistle differentiates itself from its competitors; what their strategy is now and how that differs (if it does) from past approaches; and their growth and diversification strategies. II History Thistle Hotels began as Mount Charlotte Investments, which entered the hospitality and hotel industry in the 1960’s. At that time, Mount Charlotte bought several hotels, pubs and restaurants; in 1976, Robert Peel became an executive director. In 1977 he became Managing Director and rose to Chief Executive in 1978. Under his guidance, Mount Charlotte sold the restaurants and pubs and concentrated on the hotels. During the decade 1978-1988, Mount Charlotte greatly expanded its holdings by acquiring nearly 50 hotels throughout the U.K., mostly in small groups. In the late 1980’s, Mount Charlotte began to look at acquiring large London properties, and in fact, moved its strategic focus to the capital, where it purchased 15 hotels in city center. These acquisitions included the Mount Royal, which overlooks Oxford Street, and the Barbican Hotel. In 1989, Mount Charlotte made what is probably its most important acquisition: it bought 34 Thistle hotels from Scottish & Newcastle Breweries PLC. This purchase made Mount Charlotte the largest hotel operator in both London and Scotland. Mount Charlotte also bought the “Thistle” brand at this time, and adopted the name as that of the parent company. It also used the newly acquired name as a means to upgrade many of the Mount Charlotte hotels. Mount Charlotte itself was acquired by Brierley Investments, Ltd., in 1990, and in 1991 Brierley sold 20 percent of its investments to Singapore, and another 10 percent to Tamasek Holdings. In 1998, Robert Peel left the company and Ian Burke was appointed Chief Executive. (He comes from Bass PLC, which makes one wonder about the connection between the brewing industry and the hotel business.) He divested Thistle of some of its properties in line with a new strategy: that of making the Thistle 2011-10-31T22:06:15.533-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Thistle-Hotels-34259.aspx This paper discusses two leadership theories and how they can help managers relate to subordinates. I Introduction Organizational leadership is important for many reasons. A company must have someone who takes the ultimate responsibility for the organization’s actions. A company may seem monolithic and unapproachable unless it wears a human “face,” and a leader can supply that. (Think of Ben and Jerry and their ice cream company, or Lee Iococca and Chrysler.) A leader sets the “tone” of the organization as well. For all these reasons and many others, organizational leadership is vital. This paper will examine two types of leadership: trait leadership and contingency leadership. It discusses what they are, who devised the theories, and how a knowledge of them can contribute to effective organizational leadership. II Theory of Trait Leadership As one might expect from the name, trait theory posits that leaders have certain “traits” that make them effective, and that these traits can be recognized. One formal definition is this: “Trait Theory: A type of leadership theory based on the idea that personal characteristics determine leader emergence and leader performance.” (Aamodt, PG). The word “emergence” is interesting, since it indicates that a leader will “emerge” naturally if he or she has the traits of a leader; it implies that a true leader is born, not made. The idea behind the trait theory of leadership was developed by an individual named Bird in 1940; there may have been others. It was his idea that it should be possible to look at leaders and identify the traits that they had in common; he listed approximately 79 characteristics of leaders. (“Theories of Leadership,” PG). Like most leadership theories, this one is susceptible to criticism, and in fact Stogill objected to the theory as early as 1948. (“Management Style,” PG). In this case, the theory doesn’t take into account those people who become effective leaders by experience, study, or other means that have nothing to do with innate qualities. This is the “charismatic” leader, the one people follow because of his “magnetic” personality. III Theory of Contingency Leadership The “contingency theory” was developed by Fred Fiedler, and explains that “group performance is a result of interaction of two factors. These factors are known as leadership style and situational favorableness.” (Antoine, PG). “Leadership style,” according to Fiedler, 2011-10-31T22:05:19.94-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leadership-Theories-Trait-and-Contingency-Leadership-34258.aspx This paper considers the question of women executives and the problems they face, and how they can succeed in business. I Introduction It should come as no surprise that women have proven themselves as capable as men in all fields of endeavor. Women serve in the House and Senate; command the Space Shuttle; practice law and medicine; drive trucks and race Indy cars. Their abilities should not be in doubt, and in fact they are not; what women still lack is opportunity. This seems to be a societal problem, and until both men and women can learn to view women as individuals, not merely as stereotypes defined by their gender, the prospects of women actually achieving the things they are capable of doing is not promising. There has been progress of course, but not as much as we might think. This paper discusses women executives and the problems they face, and how they can become leaders in the future. II The Problems As I said above, women have the talent to lead, but they are rarely given the opportunity to do so. In a very revealing article, Margaret Heffernan recounts the disconnect between what women are being told and what’s actually happening. They are told that things are much better, that women hold senior executive positions and sit on various corporate boards. Investment firms develop portfolios for a target market of women who are substantial investors. One out of every four women out-earns her husband; women “control about 80% of household spending … buy 81% of all products … buy 75% of over-the-counter medications, make 81% of retail purchases, and buy 82% of groceries. … They also head 40% of all U.S. households with incomes over $600,000, and own roughly 66% of all home-based businesses.” (Heffernan, PG). But this is only part of the picture. The foregoing list discusses purchases for the home, such as groceries and medicines, but the downside is that this places women squarely in the traditional role of homemaker and caregiver. Of course they do all the shopping—they’re supposed to! The other side of the coin is bleak: “The wage gap between male and female managers actually widened in the prosperous years between 1995 and 2000. In the communications industry … a woman earns 73 cents for every $1 a man takes home. Five years earlier, 2011-10-31T22:04:17.413-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Are-Women-the-Leaders-of-the-Future-34257.aspx This paper discusses market research and the way in which it might be applied by the management of a country club to find out why their membership is falling and no one new is joining. I Introduction Market research is a vital tool for anyone who is considering developing a new product, repositioning an existing product, starting a business, analyzing business performance (or lack of performance); it applies to many situations. By going directly to the consumer, developers, managers, owners and others can get a more accurate idea of the realities of their situation than can be found by reviewing past performance or previous records. Both are useful, but the past is not always a reliable guide to the future. Something more is needed, and market research provides that dimension. This paper discusses market research for the Horton Country Club, a new golf club that is not attracting the memberships it needs to survive and grow. The paper targets three specific areas that the HCC management should consider with regard to their problems: where they compare unfavorably to similar clubs; how they are perceived; and ways to increase membership applications. This paper further considers the various methods for conducting market research and suggests which is the most appropriate in these situations, and why. Problems inherent in the chosen method are also discussed. Finally, the paper incorporates a literature review. II The Steps in Market Research Two of the sources I found differ on the number of steps in the market research process: one suggests six; the other five. However, the processes are virtually identical. Peter Chisnall lists five steps: research brief; research proposal; data collection; data analysis and evaluation; and preparation and presentation of research report. Churchill’s list is similar: problem formulation (research brief); research design (research proposal); design of data collection (this has no counterpart); sample design and data collection (data collection); analysis and interpretation of data (data analysis and evaluation) and research report (preparation and presentation of research report). It’s apparent that Churchill has broken down the data collection into more detail than Chisnall, but the processes are, to all intents and purposes, identical. I believe it’s fair to take this five-step process as being the structure of any market research project. The first step, then, and one of the most important, is to precisely define the problem to be 2011-10-31T21:59:14.397-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Market-Research-for-Country-Club-34255.aspx This essay discusses market research and the way in which it might be applied by the management of a country club to find out why their membership is falling and no one new is joining. I Introduction Market research is a vital tool for anyone who is considering developing a new product, repositioning an existing product, starting a business, analyzing business performance (or lack of performance); it applies to many situations. In this paper, we will consider the hypothetical case of Horton Country Club, though it will serve merely as a starting point for an illustration of the considerations that go into developing a market research project. Designing and implementing a market research project is extremely complex, but this paper considers only two facets of the process: data collection, and sampling. It describes the difference between qualitative and quantitative research methods and gives examples of each; it evaluates the methods available to the company requesting the research; it determines a particular method to be used, and explains why that type of research was chosen. It also discusses some of the problems of the method selected. II Data Collection - Qualitative and Quantitative Research Methods One way to think of these methods might be as “subjective” (qualitative) and “objective” (quantitative); or as unstructured and structured. As Chisnall puts it: “The essence of qualitative research is that it is diagnostic; it seeks to discover what may account for certain kinds of behavior; for example, brand loyalty. It seeks deeper understand of factors, sometimes covert, which influence buying decisions. It is impressionistic rather than conclusive; it probes rather than counts. … Intrinsically, it is subjective.” (P. 147). It seems then, without giving too much weight to the observation, that the reasons for someone to drop a country club membership might well fall into the category of subjective reasons, and a qualitative method might be the best way to discover those reasons. Depth interviews and focus groups are examples of qualitative research methods. Quantitative methods are much more precise, and as the name implies, seek results that can be quantified (“How many cigarettes do you smoke in a day?” is a question that might be found on a quantitative survey, because the answer is very precise.) Other quantitative tools include personal interviews, telephone surveys, Internet surveys and mail questionnaires, among many others. The ideal project will make use of both quantitative and qualitative 2011-10-31T01:19:27.99-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Market-Research-34252.aspx This essay discusses the problem of Muslim immigrants in Holland. I Introduction Holland, like many European nations, has a large labor force of immigrants. These workers commonly come from Middle Eastern countries like Turkey; they come with the intention of finding well-paying jobs and sending the money home to their families, eventually going home themselves. This phenomenon of international workers has been common since at least the middle of the 20th Century. These workers don’t always find that they receive a warm welcome, however. Since they typically bring their own culture with them, rather than trying to assimilate into the host country’s society, they remain apart. Any time a group can easily be identified as such, the potential exists for difficult relations between members of that group and the host country. This paper examines the ramifications of this situation in Holland. It first explains the split labor market theory, then goes on to discuss issues such as the Dutch working-class fear of losing jobs to the immigrant population, and the resultant discrimination against these immigrants. It also addresses the efforts by the state to force assimilation, and whether or not these social factors could theoretically lead to further Islamic nationalism. II The Split Labor Market Theory Edna Bonacich propounded the split labor market theory in 1972. Her theory, which expands on that of Karl Marx, says that there are “three significant classes in conflict within capitalist labor markets, not just the two that Marx identified.” (Mason, PG). These three conflicting classes are the employers, who want to maximize profits; the well-paid “established” workers who have managed, through negotiation, political struggle, or other means, to gain some degree of economic security, and who want to improve or at least maintain this security and are therefore obviously unwilling to have it put at risk; and the low-priced workers who are “unwilling or unable” to put that security at risk; and who are interested merely in finding a job, rather than building a career or establishing a certain level of economic security. (Mason, PG). It is obvious from studying this theory exactly why, if it is sound, it could explain labor problems in Holland. Obviously, employers want to maximize profits, and one of the commonest ways to do that is to hire workers who will accept lower wages. This puts the immigrant laborers in direct conflict with 2011-10-31T00:35:05.51-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Holland-and-the-Split-Labor-Market-Theory-34234.aspx This paper explores the application of normative issues to globalization, in particular the expansion of American business interests overseas. Outline I Introduction II Argument against Corporate Actions III Argument for Corporate Actions IV Conclusion V Reference Normative Issues I Introduction The term “normative issues” refers to the study of things as they ought to be, rather than as they are. The discussion of the ideal versus the real can apply to many fields, but our focus here is to choose a topic that has moral and ethical implications as well. Give the current climate of fear, apprehension, unrest and violence throughout the world, I’d like to try to come to some conclusions about normative issues with regard to globalization. Admittedly this is a very large topic, but the world is in bad shape, and it’s time we started thinking globally. To narrow it to a manageable size, let’s consider the normative issues in connection with American companies that manufacture their products in other countries. I would argue that the actions of these companies are, in large part, immoral and that they reflect what we call “realpolitik,” or things as they are, not as they should be. II Argument against Corporate Actions If we think about the way things ought to be in connection with American companies moving their manufacturing concerns outside the U.S., then these moves would, at the least: 1) have no negative impact on American workers; 2) have no impact on the environment, either at home or abroad; and 3) enable the native workers hired by the American company to drastically improve their standard of living. However, these things generally do not happen when a company relocates its manufacturing facilities. In the first instance, moving the manufacturing facilities overseas immediately results in the loss of jobs of the firm’s American workers. In fact, the savings in labor costs is often one of the most important reasons for relocating a company’s facilities overseas, and once the decision is made, the American workers have no choice but to look for other positions. This is always difficult and stressful, and with older workers, sometimes impossible. Another factor in relocation is that other countries, particularly developing nations, often have far less stringent environmental protection regulations than the United States. Companies often complain that it is excessively expensive for them to have to comply with these regulations, as it means less profit for them. In find this argument particularly 2011-10-30T20:37:34.827-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Normative-Issues-34217.aspx This essay is a brief SWOT analysis of the retailer. I Introduction Target is America’s second-largest general merchandise retailer, with over 1,100 stores across the country; it employs over 220,000 people. It has recently begun electronic marketing through its Target.com subsidiary. (Pergiovanni, PG). This paper is a SWOT analysis of the corporation. It concentrates on the Target stores themselves. II Strengths I’ve scanned a listing of newspaper articles with “Target Corporation” as the headline, and a pattern has emerged: Target has consistently grown while many other companies are losing ground. To take just three examples: in August 2002, Target sales grew 7.5% (“Target Corporation August Sales Up 7.5 Percent,” PG); In October 2002, they were up 9.8% (“Target Corporation October Sales Up 9.8 Percent,” PG); and the most recent article cites a 7.7 percent increase in January 2003. (“Target Corporation January Sales Up 7.7 Percent,” PG). This is an impressive record for a company in a country mired in a deepening recession. The company has declared dividends for its shareholders every quarter as well, making it a good investment. It’s also begun to sell its goods via the Internet, and its Website is very user friendly and is proving to be a success. The company has chosen its approach to retailing very carefully. It aims for “consistency of experience” for its customers by making all its stores nearly identical. It also has to differentiate itself from Wal-Mart, the market leader. Target executives opined there were three choices open to them: “to specialize, to become the low-cost producer or to differentiate ourselves.” The first would have made them a niche marketer, and Wal-Mart has a lock on the second option. That left differentiation, and Target has succeeded in making themselves distinct from other low-cost retailers. (“A Tale of Two Stories,” PG). We’ve already noted above the success of their strategy. Finally, the corporation gives five percent of its pre-tax profits to philanthropic causes. (“External- Focused Tactics Used by Business,” PG). This policy has made Target a welcome presence in the communities it serves. III Weaknesses Some of Target Corporation’s weaknesses are intrinsic to their business style, but most become apparent only when compared to Wal-Mart. One of Target’s trademarks is its attention to customer service, which takes a long period of training. The emphasis on teamwork, and 2011-10-27T14:52:18.553-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-on-Target-Corporation-34202.aspx This essay is a brief SWOT analysis of the electronics company. I Introduction Hewlett Packard is a technology company that provides IT infrastructure, personal computing and access devices, and other solutions to a global marketplace. This paper is a SWOT analysis of the corporation. It concentrates on the PC business unit of the company. II Strengths An interview with Mary McDowell, a Senior HP vice president, vice president gives us a great look at the strengths of the company. Hewlett Packard and Compaq merged in 2002, with HP taking over the management of Compaq’s assets. According to McDowell, this gives the PC division tremendous strength, particularly because they are introducing a new generation of servers powered by Intel Itanium-2. They have what McDowell describes as “strength” in Windows, Linux, enterprise units, and now the Itanium-2 servers; they are also strong in SAN (networks) and OpenView software. All this, McDowell feels, makes them the most competitive in data centers. (Neel, PG). It is particularly important to note that McDowell believes that HP can continue to hold its position even in times of recession; the products are that good, and the demand, she feels, will remain. Other strengths include the fact that HP has always recognized the need to compete in a global market; its diversity of products; and its fine reputation for printers, particularly the InkJet and LaserJet. (Kosior, PG). III Weaknesses One of the greatest weaknesses is the fact that Compaq and HP “mirror” one another’s PC product lines. In fact, Compaq sells HP printers; the overlap in product lines could mean a “difficult fight.” (Mullins, PG). HP and Compaq also overlap in the area of technology consulting (helping companies with business strategies, including setting up and maintaining computer networks); this field provides a better profit margin than hardware sales. But both companies have focused on low-end services and are “relatively weak in the more lucrative niche of business strategy and systems integration counseling, which refers to setting up and tying computer networks together.” (Mullins, PG). Both these factors could lead to decreased profits and declining market share, particularly as IBM has retained a substantial lead in the consulting field on all levels. IV Opportunities Hewlett Packard is already involved in what it calls the “HP Wireless Mobile Classroom,” which is a “self-contained unit that houses 30 HP Omnibook notebook PCs, an all-in-one printer, scanner, copier and 2011-10-27T14:51:26.713-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/SWOT-Analysis-on-Hewlett-Packard-34201.aspx This essay provides a brief history of MasTec, its current strategies, and a brief SWOT of the company. I Introduction MasTec is one of the largest Hispanic-owned companies in America, and is a builder of infrastructure. They have worked with phone companies, cable companies, transportation departments and many others to provide whatever the customer needs. Their philosophy is “Design. Build. Install. Maintain.” This paper examines MasTec’s current strategies, and assesses the company overall, using the SWOT approach. II Current Strategies MasTec stock slipped significantly last year, along with most of the rest of Wall Street. It posted a 8.10% revenue loss for one year, but a 20.93% gain over a five-year period. (“Mastec, Inc.,” PG). Like most companies that are publicly traded, it simply got caught when the bottom fell out. Overall, it seems to be a strong performer, though it has run into some problems. Its current strategies would seem to include doing more of what it traditionally does; that is, design, build, install and maintain infrastructure of many different types. One area that it is currently investigating is that of “intelligent transportation systems,” which is an unfamiliar concept. “Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) refers to transportation systems which apply emerging hard and soft information systems technologies to address and alleviate transportation congestion problems. For example, using advanced surveillance systems, the early stages of a traffic bottleneck situation can be detected, and traffic can then be directed to other routes to mitigate the congestion and to provide faster and more efficient routes for travelers.” (“Program Background,” PG). MasTec is currently working with various municipalities and departments of transportation around the nation to design, install and maintain the systems that will help alleviate traffic tie-ups. This is one of the newest areas in which MasTec is interested, and it’s cutting edge. III Strengths One of the company’s greatest strengths is its long history and client satisfaction. The company was founded in 1929 by two unemployed carpenters, Russell Burnup and Riley Sims, who dreamed of owning their own construction company. Burnup & Sims soon developed a track record for finishing tough projects; they laid the first underwater telephone cable from Florida to Puerto Rico, for example. (“History,” PG). Another construction firm, Church & Tower, recruited a Cuban immigrant named Jorge Mas Canosa, who immediately recognized that South Florida would experience explosive 2011-10-27T14:40:50.807-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-on-MasTec-34197.aspx This essay examines several aspects of the Walt Disney Company. Disney The Mouse that Roared I Introduction The Walt Disney Company is one of the most famous corporations in the world, thanks to an improbable little rodent with big ears, and an amazing ability to market dreams. This paper analyzes the company with regard to its corporate culture, resources, finances, research and development, and information systems. II Corporate Culture The Walt Disney Company is now a global entertainment empire, employing over 114,000 people in its four “core” business segments: Parks and Resorts; Consumer Products; Media Networks; and Studio Entertainment. It has a two-fold aim: to build the “largest entertainment base” in the world, and to provide the greatest entertainment product in the world. (“The Walt Disney Company,” PG). In terms of revenue, the four in order are Media Networks; Parks and Resorts; Studio Entertainment and Consumer Products. “In 2001, Disney recorded over $25 billion in sales, had a gross profit margin of 18.1%, and has a diluted Earnings Per Share … of 0.72.” (“The Walt Disney Company,” PG). Despite rumors of shake-ups in top management, and the widely held belief that CEO Michael Eisner is no longer effective, the company remains tremendously profitable, showing a profit even in the middle of a long-lasting recession. At the corporate level, Disney’s officers are as follows: Michael Eisner, Chairman and CEO; Robert Iger; President, COO, Director; Roy Disney, Vice Chairman; Thomas Staggs, CFO, Senior Executive VP; Alan Braverman, Executive VP and General Counsel; and Peter Murphy, CSO and Senior Executive VP. (These names are current as of February 14, 2003). (“The Walt Disney Company (NYSE) - Officers and Directors: Individuals,” PG). There is also a 13 member Board of Directors; Eisner, Iger and Roy Disney also have seats on that board. Four of the board members have been appointed since 2000. (“The Walt Disney Company (NYSE),” PG). Michael Eisner is the undoubted power broker at Disney. He meets with the heads of all the divisions regularly, but he is in charge, and his need to retain control appears to be hampering the company somewhat. Most sources paint Eisner as an obsessive: “Eisner meets that criterion: he is driven, obsessive and a micro-managing control freak. Even Rupert Murdoch, something of a serial meddler himself, told the Financial Times last week that Eisner ‘cannot help but 2011-10-27T14:39:33.513-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Walt-Disney-Company-34196.aspx This essay examines the Nike Corporation and what it must do to bring its policies into line with the tenets of human behavior outlined by the Catholic Church. I Introduction Today’s corporations seem to be driven solely by profit, at the expense of job security, pension plans, health benefits and even safe working conditions. Of course it’s not fair to assume that every corporation is an Enron or Worldcom, but there have been enough examples of egregious business practices to make most people aware of the fact that Corporate America can be a vicious place. This paper examines Catholic Social Teaching and then applies it to a corporation, to see what corporate policies should be changed to bring them more in line with the Church’s teachings. Since there is a lot of information available about them, we’ll use Nike as our example. II Catholic Social Teaching I expected some sort of vague statement of purpose, and was surprised to find that “Catholic Social Teaching” is in fact a body of 13 “instructions” handed down by the Popes to believers to help them live a decent life, and most importantly, to define what their duties are to their fellow men. The 13 writings are: the “Rerum Novarum” (On the Condition of Labor); the “Quadragesimo Anno” (After Forty Years); “Mater et Magistra” (Christianity and Social Progress); “Pacem in Terris” (Peace on Earth); “Gaudium et Spes” (Pastoral Constitution on the Church in the Modern World); “Populorum Progressio” (On the Development of Peoples); “Octogesima Adveniens” (A Call to Action); the “Justicia in Mundo” (Justice in the World); “Laborem Exercens” (On Human Work); “Solicitudo Rei Socialis” (On Social Concern); “Centesimus Annus” (The Hundredth Year); “Evangelium Vitae” (The Gospel of Life); and the “Fides et Ratio” (Faith and Reason). (“Catholic Social Teaching,” PG). Looking through the titles of the writings is instructive. They mention the condition of labor, social progress, development of peoples, justice, human work, and social concerns. These issues go beyond religious instruction and impact directly on the social and economic conditions of man; in particular, the laborer. The website that contains these texts is very valuable, since it provides both the full texts of the teachings, and notable quotations from each. A quick scan of the six I’m using reveals that the Church is fully aware of the abuses that the poor suffer at the hands of the wealthy, and it condemns such 2011-10-27T12:47:28.343-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Catholic-Social-Teaching-and-the-Nike-Corporations-34169.aspx This paper discusses how to assess and meet the need for employee training within organizations. (9 pages; 2 sources; MLA citation style) I Introduction Learning theory as applied to organizations is very different from learning theory applied in schools and universities. For one thing, this type of training is undertaken with only one real objective: to help the employee meet certain guidelines that will enhance his performance and contribute to the overall success of the company. This is different from learning how to think abstractly, appreciate fine art, or understand literature. This paper will discuss how to assess training needs in organizations; how to determine appropriate training groups; how to measure the effect of the learning; how to design a learning module; and how to appropriately reward employees who complete their training and become more effective. The paper relies primarily on Training in Organizations by Irwin Goldstein for reference. II Assessing Training Needs The process of assessing training needs has several steps. The first is to perform an analysis of the organization itself to determine what type of training is needed. Goldstein points out that even jobs that appear to be identical may diverge widely; he uses the example of a firefighter battling a blaze in a high-rise as opposed to a firefighter called to the docks. In both cases the idea is to get the fire out, but the circumstances surrounding the event, and the techniques used, are completely different. (Goldstein, p. 31). In order to develop an effective training program, it is necessary that analyses be made of the organization, the tasks, and the people who are performing or will perform them. The three steps are vital if the training is to be effective, and although all involve analysis, they are not identical. An organizational analysis is “an examination of systemwide components of the organization that may affect a training program beyond those ordinarily considered in task and person analyses.” (Goldstein, p. 36). This is a very broad definition, and a rather vague on as well. It simply says that the trainer has to look at those components of the company as a whole that affect the program; these components include such things as the organization’s goals, resources, and the commitment of the organization to a training program. This last factor is extremely important when it comes to implementing the suggestions and methods 2011-10-26T14:52:29.663-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Learning-Theory-in-Organizations,-Part-I-34149.aspx This paper is the second of three discussing learning theory as applied to organizations. In this part, we’ll examine instruction methods including programmed instruction and computer assisted instruction. (8 pages; 3 sources; MLA citation style) I Introduction As we’ve seen, learning that takes place within organizations is very different from formal schooling, because it has only one real goal: to enhance employee performance. Such learning then is really training; training to help employees work more efficiently. We’ve explored the various ways in which companies assess their training needs and how they design training courses. This paper will concentrate on the actual instruction itself: the methods used—particularly computer assisted learning; the topics suitable to be taught by this method, and some of the characteristics of programmed learning methods. II Programmed Instruction and Computer Aided Learning Programmed instruction (PI) is a very old technique that was first developed in the early part of the 20th Century. The Depression interrupted the development of the method; it was also called into question by those who felt it was merely a testing tool, and didn’t actually teach. (Goldstein, p. 235). Interest in the method revived in the 1950’s, when renowned psychologist B.F. Skinner felt that it would be possible to “apply his methods of operant conditioning to the educational process.” (Goldstein, p. 235). With a scientist of Skinner’s reputation behind PI, people took another look. The basic method of programmed instruction (PI) is to break a lesson down into small, easily manageable pieces; and then reward the student for each right answer as he or she works through the set of steps. As Goldstein puts it: “Its essential parameters include the following characteristics … All material is presented in small units called frames… Each frame requires an overt response from the learner… The learner immediately received feedback indicating the correctness of the response … The program is predesigned to provide proper learning sequences … Each trainee proceeds independently through the program at a pace commensurate with his or her own abilities.” (Goldstein, p. 236). Thus the student looks at a frame, answers the question posed at the end of that frame, and immediately receives feedback as to whether the answer was correct or not. The material is further designed so that the student proceeds through it in the proper sequence, and finally, each student proceeds at his or her 2011-10-26T14:46:28.88-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Learning-Theory-in-Organizations,-Part-II-34142.aspx This paper explores leadership style, why it should be learned, the nature of such training, the role of the trainer, and various types of training. (8.5 pages; 2 sources; MLA citation style) I Introduction In this, the third part of our exploration of training programs within organizations, we want to consider why such things are necessary in the first place, specifically with regard to training supervisory personnel. The answer seems obvious, It’s important that supervisors learn how to manage their employees effectively, because a disgruntled employee is more than a nuisance; he or she can cost the company significant amounts of money. Not only will a poor attitude “rub off” on other employees, it will also offend customers and potential customers, in some cases driving them off before anything more than an initial contact has taken place. In this paper, we’ll discuss what leadership style should be learned, and why; how to determine who needs such training; the components of the training group; the nature of interactive learning taking place within the group; the role of the trainer; and National Training Labs (NTL) “sensitivity training” versus “Organization Development (OD) training.” II What Style Should Be Learned and Why Because of the wording of the question, it’s obvious that we’re to consider what sort of leadership style should be learned. That immediately begs the question, why should it be learned at all? The answer is simple: people are often promoted to positions in which they have to supervise others, and yet they don’t have the skills to do so. Very few people are born instinctively knowing how to manage their employees so that they do their jobs efficiently; obey the rules; and still have a reasonably good time doing so. However, supervisors can learn the “people skills” they need to run their departments efficiently, and that’s why companies have training programs to help develop their managers’ competence in these areas. The next question is, what style of training should be used and why? Goldstein doesn’t specify a particular type of training that he feels is better than others, he simply describes the various methods available. There are literally thousands of training manuals available, so the quick answer to this must be to use the training that works best for the company and individuals involved. However, there are specific differences between OD training 2011-10-26T14:45:44.873-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Learning-Theory-in-Organizations,-Part-III-34141.aspx This paper discusses specific issues with regard to Luby’s, a restaurant chain with headquarters in San Antonio, Texas. (10+ pages; 4 sources; MLA citation style) I Introduction Luby’s is a chain of food service outlets (mostly cafeterias) that began in Texas in 1947 and now serves not only that state, but has a presence in ten other states in the south and southeast. This paper explores some of the basic facets of the operation, including marketing, manufacturing and operations, financial matters, personnel matters, research and development, and community relations. Other parts of the operation will be considered separately. The sources of information for this paper are the Luby’s website; other Internet information (if necessary) and an article by Richard Menger. II Marketing In general, there are three or four very broad categories in the food service industry: high-end, upscale dining; good sit-down restaurants; casual dining; and fast food. High-end, upscale restaurants are stand-alone operations, not part of a chain; they have great chefs who prepare delicious food and present it imaginatively, and going to one of them is an event. Le Cirque in New York is an example of this type of establishment. Diners pay hundreds of dollars for meals here: entrees may cost upwards of $50; appetizers $30-$40; and desserts run at $10-11. The wine list has wines that cost $25 to $800 a bottle. Good sit-down restaurants may or may not be part of a chain. They feature good food at much lower prices than places like Le Cirque, but are still expensive when a family eats out. Entrees here run at the $12-25 range; appetizers and desserts $4-8. California’s Panda Inn is such a restaurant. Casual dining restaurants are usually chains or franchise operations. They include Coco’s, Denny’s, Luby’s and similar chains. They have good food, reasonably priced, and a casual atmosphere. They make no claim to rival places like Le Cirque and Maxim’s, or even the better chains (Panda, Brigantine). They are usually priced for a family budget. Fast food restaurants, which do a large drive-thru business, and where entrees may cost less than $1, round out the list. Fast food (McDonald’s, Burger King, Wendy’s) is what it is. Luby’s direct competitors include Darden Restaurants (Olive Garden, Red Lobster), Sizzler, Souplantation and Home Town Buffet, among others. (Menger, p. C305). These restaurants feature freshly cooked foods at 2011-10-26T14:43:59.183-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Luby’s-Cafeterias,-Part-I-34139.aspx This paper continues the examination of Luby’s, with emphasis on the company’s current status, its finances, strengths and weaknesses, and potential future. (19.5 pages; 5 sources; MLA citation style) I Introduction Luby’s is a chain of cafeterias and other types of restaurants with its headquarters in San Antonio. It enjoys a significant presence in Texas, with nearly 200 properties in that state; it has other establishments in other Southern and Southeastern states as well. It has been prosperous for a number of years, but has lately begun to experience significant difficulties and a substantial decline in revenue accompanied by a loss of market share. This paper explores the company’s current status, its financial situation, and its strengths and weaknesses. It also features an external environmental analysis and describes Luby’s strategies for the future. II Current Status Luby’s actually dates back to the early part of the 20th Century, but the organization in which we are interested took shape in 1948 in San Antonio, when the first cafeteria opened. It was Luby’s idea to serve good food at reasonable prices, using the cafeteria concept. (Luby’s, PG). (A cafeteria can obviously serve many more people more quickly than a sit-down restaurant.) Luby’s located their cafeterias close to businesses, residential areas and retail centers, opening them for lunch and dinner only. The food was well-prepared but not exotic; what we might call “good plain cooking.” Luby’s put an emphasis on using fresh ingredients and making many of their dishes from scratch: “Each Luby’s Cafeteria prepares substantially all of he food served, including breads and pastries. … Company policy allows each manager to buy the ingredients for his or her cafeteria from vendors of his or her choosing … Managers supervise the preparation of … entrees … vegetable dishes … salads … and desserts … and decide on each day’s menu which generally differs from cafeteria to cafeteria.” (Menger, p. C307). Although the company uses a standard set of recipes, the fact that managers buy locally and “tailor” the recipes to regional tastes means that each cafeteria is a good “match” for its local customers. At its height, Luby’s operated over 220 locations, mostly cafeterias; according to the 2003 Third Quarter Report, this number has now dropped to 161 locations, of which two are seafood restaurants, one is a steak buffet, 26 are “all you can eat” concepts, and 132 are traditional cafeterias. 2011-10-26T14:05:19.99-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Luby’s-Cafeterias,-Part-II-34137.aspx This brief paper discusses the book by Stephen C. Lundin, which deals largely with motivating workers and developing productive attitudes. (3+ pages; 1 source; MLA citation style) I Introduction Many studies have revealed that a great many people dislike their jobs. Anyone who’s listened to the grumbling that goes on in most offices won’t find that surprising. But what can be done to help people who are in the trap of having a job they dislike but not being able to change it? Stephen C. Lundin’s book Fish! addresses this problem, and the impact of attitude on job performance and satisfaction. II Discussion Fish! takes the form of an imaginary case study of Mary Jane Ramirez, a supervisor, who is transferred from her congenial department to the legendary “Third Floor” of her company, an area Mary Jane describes as a place where “all the oxygen has been sucked right out of the air. I can hardly breathe.” (P. 22). Lundin first describes Mary Jane for us. She’s a good supervisor with a positive work ethic; she is not one of those “first to arrive, last to leave” managers, but she works in such a way that she gets a lot accomplished. She also has a talent for teamwork and is very supportive of her subordinates, who in turn respond to her by working hard and enthusiastically. (Pp. 17-18). She is then offered a promotion if she’ll move to the infamous Third Floor. She has heard about the Third Floor and finds that its reputation is deserved. The people there are sullen, unhelpful, and bored. They are in what Lundin calls a “backroom” of the company (they don’t interact with clients), so although they perform a necessary function, they feel cut off, left out, and unimportant. Over time, their dislike of their invisibility, but most particularly their boredom—they are there merely to collect their paycheck by doing the least amount of work possible—has created a departmental “culture” that immediately squelches and disheartens anyone who transfers into the place. Mary Jane recognizes that she must turn the Third Floor around. She observes the employees of Seattle’s Pike Place Fish Market, who have a wonderful time doing a stinky, unpleasant job, and develops four principles based on their activities. She implements these principles on the Third Floor. The four principles are: “Play”; 2011-10-26T13:56:13.067-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Fish-34130.aspx This essay summarizes the book by Michael Spicer. In his book, Michael Spicer seeks to resolve was he sees as a conflict between the “optimism of public administrators and the view of most economists. His thesis, which he expands later in the book, is that “[M]any, if not most, public administration writers exhibit a rationalist worldview that places great faith in the powers of human reason, the Founders held … a more anti-rationalist worldview that stresses the limits of reason. This conflict in worldviews … makes it difficult for us as public administration writers to argue for the legitimacy of public administration on constitutional grounds. (P. xi). This observation immediately begs the question, “Why should we care about legitimacy in this context?” This is not a trivial question; Americans in general dislike and distrust bureaucracy and to submit to its authority they must believe that public administrators have a right to make a certain number of decisions for them. Spicer points out that as partisan politics have gotten progressively uglier, Americans increasingly tend to view public administration through the prism of their own ideology. Conservatives see public administrators as “obstacles” to their “attempts to increase liberty”; liberals see public administrators is “preserving and reinforcing existing social and economic inequities…” (P. 4). In a climate marred by such hostility it’s no surprise that public administration is no longer regarded as legitimate. Spicer says that this lack of legitimacy can have “real costs.” (P. 4). First, if talented people do not believe government service is legitimate and worthwhile, good candidates will not come forward for possible employment and the overall quality of public administration will suffer. Second, public perception that public administrators are incompetent undermines their morale. Third, if political leaders perceive a lack of legitimacy in public administration, they may “impose overly restrictive controls on public administrators that that damper their flexibility and raise the costs of providing services to taxpayers. (P. 5). Spicer acknowledges that rules are necessary to a functioning bureaucracy; what he objects to is a sort of “micro-management” technique that stifles effective administrative action and is counterproductive. (P. 5). Finally, lack of legitimacy can “contribute to erosion of public regard for the law.” (P. 5). Given that most people’s only point of contact with government is at the local level, this is an important point. Having established 2011-10-26T12:50:09.317-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Summary-of-the-book-The-Founders,-the-Constitution-and-Public-Administration-by-Michael-Spicer-34094.aspx Abstract: This paper is a case study of the two giant delivery companies. It follows the format of a standard written case analysis, beginning with an Executive Summary and following that with a Situation Analysis, Financial Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Strategic Alternatives and Recommendations. (16 pages; 5 sources; MLA citation style. Case Study: UPS vs. Federal Express I Introduction Both United Parcel Service (UPS) and Federal Express (FedEx) are successful package delivery companies. Over the years, they have “see-sawed” back and forth, with first UPS and then FedEx holding the top spot. This paper examines the rivalry between the two, their strategies and policies, and other aspects of their operations. It follows the format of a case study. II Executive Summary This report analyzes the on-going competition between UPS and FedEx. The situation analysis explains the “see saw” battle going on between the two, with first one, then the other, more profitable and popular. The financial analysis reveals that both companies are stable and profitable, though at the present time, surprisingly enough, UPS is out-earning its rival. The SWOT shows that both companies have strong corporate cultures, which have proven to be both strengths and weaknesses. UPS’s rigid structure kept if from developing its IT capabilities until recently, yet allowed it to survive the challenge mounted by FedEx. FedEx, on the other hand, charged ahead with a “can do” entrepreneurial spirit, but entered into several business ventures that ultimately failed. They might have done better to be as cautious as their rival. Both companies are threatened not only by one another but by the possibility of new competitors entering the package delivery arena, which is extremely competitive. They also face threats from such widely divergent factors as the uncertainty of fuel prices caused by the American invasion of Iraq, and their enormous fixed costs. But opportunity certainly exists, particularly in new markets, and in that situation, specifically in China. The strategic alternatives section touches on the problems that FedEx has created for itself by scheduling its flights to the second, literally. A one-minute delay at an airport will throw the entire schedule haywire, which is unacceptable. UPS is also “clock watching” but in a different way: it focuses on telling its employees such things as which foot to use to get into the truck, and how to fill out forms while walking back to the vehicle. 2011-10-26T11:54:03.887-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Case-Study-UPS-vs_-Federal-Express-34063.aspx The Cash Machines By Navirah Zafar Jilani You're short on cash, so you walk over to the automated teller machine (ATM), insert your card into the card reader, respond to the prompts on the screen and within a minute you walk away with your money and a receipt. These were such simpler times when ATM machines processed money with no error. But now as one walks in to withdraw money from the ATM, the user is greeted by the ATM card getting jammed and ‘down link’ on most of the ATM machines, just helping to ignite ones blood pressure to scorching heights. The ATM or cash machine first came into existence (1967) in a branch of Barclays in Enfield, north London, 42 years ago. The inspiration struck Mr Shepard Baron while taking a bath. Mr Shepherd-Barron is very much alive to new ideas and inventions, even though his device that plays killer whale noises still needs a little bit of tuning. These machines now are found at most supermarkets, convenience stores, petrol stations and travel centres. Have you ever wondered about the process that makes your bank funds available to you at an ATM? An ATM is simply a data terminal with two input and four output devices as described by Shah Mahmood, an employee in Bank Alfalah credit banking. Like any other data terminal, the ATM has to connect to and communicate through a host processor. The host processor is analogous to an Internet service provider (ISP) in that it is the gateway through which all the various ATM networks become available to the cardholder (the person wanting the cash).Usually the host processor is owned by a bank or financial institution or it may be owned by an independent service provider. Bank-owned processors normally support only bank-owned machines, whereas the independent processors support merchant-owned machines. A new innovation in ATM cards is debit cards. As briefed by a senior banker Faisal Shah, you can use your ATM card as either a credit card or a debit card; either way it comes out of your account. The only difference is that if you tell the attendant ‘credit card’, you sign a slip and if you tell the attendant ‘debit card’, you enter your PIN number instead of signing. Some banks charge you a fee if you use your check card as a debit card (if it costs them more to process those transactions), but not 2009-03-20T08:28:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Cash-Machines-By-Navirah-Zafar-Jilani-34029.aspx THE CULT OF A.B By Navirah Zafar Lahore is being enchanted by many new local and international brand shops. In this list of designers, Ammar Belal is a prominent name. With two already existing shops Ammar has taken his style a step forward and introduced men's formal wear. His style exudes sexiness and sophistication. Ammar Belal is one of those names that has always made a statement with whatever he does, be it clothing or styling. Famed for his use of bright and strong colors, he has created his signature style which differentiates him from his peers. Now with the opening of Ammar Belal he has awed his critiques and contemporaries equally. For the first time, a local fashion designer house will be bringing their vision to life through foreign expertise. Ammar's outlet offers a wide range of formal suiting, shoes, branded sunglasses and stationary. Ammar's bold mission statement is to bring an international standard product to the Pakistani man, who is not quality conscious but also requires the prestige and image associated with a global brand. "I have spent the past year surveying the best vendors around the world for every product required to complete a full menswear collection. Our manufacturing partners pride themselves over servicing some of the most celebrated brands in the fashion world such as Armani, Zegna, Boss, D & G shoes and Calvin Klein underwear. Every month will bring forth the launch of a new product which adds to the Ammar Belal lifestyle experience." A.B While entering Ammar Belal's shop, one is overwhelmed by a combination of vibrant and bright colours like red, yellow and black that catch your eye when you go through the space. The interior of the shop revolves around sleek and straight cuts which gives a contemporary impression to the overall ambience. Floral patterns seen on the ceiling and backdrop of the shelves add a whole lot character to the attire of the shop. The most appealing piece of art seen in the shop is the pop art of Ammar Belal which truly exemplifies Ammar's personality. 2009-03-20T08:27:38-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/THE-CULT-OF-A_B-By-Navirah-Zafar-34028.aspx DIOR OF PAKISTANI COUTURE –NILOFER SHAHID by Navirah Zafar From her first display of clothing in 1995 of Islamic Calligraphy in New Delhi to her present fashion show in Paris Couture Fashion Week 2007, Nilofer Shahid by far is the ambassadress of her country’s tradition. Meeras is one of the leading haute couture fashion house in Pakistan, it produces bridal, formal, causal and western wear for women along with accessories and its own exclusive men’s wear line. Nilofer Shahid of this renowned fashion house belongs to a prestigious Pathan family of warriors, poets, writers and painters. Her progressive and culturally rich family has endowed her with a sensitive appreciation of the art and rich tradition of an ancient land. Meeras means heritage and her creation capture, in their richness, intricacy and attention to detail, the grandeur of the vast Islamic legacy .Her detailed research into each one of her themes ensures that her creations are true to their origins but also display her magic touch, whether it is her Central Asian line, her Mughal Recreations or her Moroccan inspired ensembles. Equated Dior of Pakistan by ‘Le Figaro’ in Paris, Nilofer’s forte lies in the profound attention she pays to detail; every collection is preceded by intensive sessions of research so that every piece is a depiction of art as it is of history, of couture as it is of culture. All this contributes to her strong signature style, which has managed her to capture clients from all over the world. What inspired you to become a fashion designer? When I started there were no fashion designers in Pakistan. For me it was a series of evolution that aspired me to become a fashion designer. In late 70s this career was quite challenging, as there was no recognition of fashion designers. My interest in couture led to a little workshop in 1978. I started off with block prints and hand painting; to my credit I was the first one to start fashion designing in Lahore. It was my great interest in art related to our culture that inspired me to come into designing. I professionally launched my career in 1991 in the form of couture house known as Meeras. The depiction of the past into the present predominantly inspired me, as I’m passionate about our roots, culture and background. What was personally important and appealing to you about this career? To be very honest I had a 2009-03-20T08:23:58-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/DIOR-OF-PAKISTANI-COUTURE-–NILOFER-SHAHID-34025.aspx From Lunda to Landa By Navirah Zafar The moment one enters Landa Bazaar, mountains of scattered garbage and foul smell emerging from random corners wakes the asleep mind. As one further moves in; one is repulsively engulfed in the odor of used clothes but the urge to discover more about what lies ahead is not hindered. Since its inception, Landa Bazaar originally known as “Lunda” (shelter-less shops or single storey shops), has been working to provide the poor with luxuries they can't afford otherwise. The original Landa Bazaar is located opposite Dehli Gate and has a huge variety of clothing; ranging from used jeans, shirts, evening dresses, saris, blankets, curtains,quilts, shoes and bags. It is from here that other landa markets, seen opposite Mayo Hospital, Anarkali and Ichra Market, are operating. Starting from Dehli Gate this long elaborated lane leads to various houses and shops that make up the structure of Landa Bazaar. As we further enter this huge shopping vicinity, we get to see what makes Landa Bazaar click not only with poor but rich class as well. People come here from all over Punjab and other places, to purchase commodities for their personal use and retail outlets. Various commodities come in big bundles which are traded in from Karachi port. Mr. Naeem Badshah told The Galaxy that garments coming in from foreign countries are divided into various categories. The first three categories are bought by different African countries and those which are left are bought by India, Bangladesh and Pakistan. The main vicinity of Landa Bazaar has many different markets. New Market, Shoe Market, Baboo Market and ready-made clothes market are the most famous among them. At first sight, the narrow galleys and shady basements of the bazaar puts one off at what to find in mountains of used clothes. But as one digs in the mass madhouse of clothing, one gets to find amazing garments which look no less than A-class clothing. Once these garments land in the Landa Bazaar, they are initially bombarded with elite shop owners, who purchase high quality 10-15 pieces out of the 200 garments present in the bundle. Actively known as poor man's paradise by the looks of it, Landa Bazaar is not what it seems. The traders in the Landa Bazaar told that the government has been charging taxes on the trading goods for the last three decades. Naeem Badshah, 2009-03-20T08:18:58-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/From-Lunda-to-Landa-By-Navirah-Zafar-34023.aspx Amende Dinant (fine dining) By Navirah Zafar One is constantly enchanted by the allure of M.M Alam road and the various culinary it offers to food lovers of the city. In this bewilderment of fine cuisine a délicat new restaurant by the name of “Chez’ Nur” has entered to relish the taste buds of food lovers all over Lahore. The name itself personifies the owner’s amour (love) and whole heartedness for the French fare “Chez’ Nur – at the place of Nur”. Nestled in the neighborhood of M.M Alam Road, this French bistro adamantly is doing its part to bring a little of France to this side of the city. This very restaurant is a serene spot you can't help but turn toward for its delicious specials. French Cuisiine at Chez’ Nur is a mix of fine culinary and creativity. Entering the doors of this French restaurant, one is mesmerized by the soothing tones and contemporary art work displayed. Keeping with the whole ambiance the interior does not over power the serenity created by the tone which is amidst of gold, beige, sun yellow and brown. An array of French delicacy are offered which includes soups, salads, starters, pastas, seafood, poultry, meat, mocktails, deserts, hot and cold beverages. The menu is traditional French bistro; Oignon Gratinee (a classic onion soup), Calamari Gruillade (grilled squid in a garlic, sun-dried tomato and herb butter dressing), Wild Mushroom Cappelleti (fresh pasta stuffed with mushroom, minced chicken in creamy and fresh basil pesto) and Cotes d’ Agneau la Moutard (grilled lamb chops with creamy horseradish sauce and mustard relish) are just a few to mention. Starting off with complimentary olive bread with a light garlic herb butter dip was delectable yet impeccable. I as a food enthusiast myself, was enticed by the appetizers which were unique in their presentation and taste; the Caviar Blinis and Asparagus Sauce Maltaise were light and rejuvenating. The use of crème fraiche and caviar on blinis was tantalizing and the combination of steamed asparagus with smoked salmon and hollandaise sauce was eccentric .Poulet a’ la Provencale (escalopes of chicken layered with creamy potatoes with herb, tomato and olive sauce) and Steak Béarnaise (fillet of beef with classic béarnaise enriched with pepper, mint and anchovy butter) were the show stealers for the evening. The combination of creamy potatoes, herbs, tomato and olive sauce renewed the concept poultry. Beef steak with its precise dash of classic 2009-03-20T08:17:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Amende-Dinant-fine-dining-By-Navirah-Zafar-34022.aspx To Rome for everything! By Ayesha Shahid The two eminent designers Honey Waqar and Rizwan Beyg, in a joint venture with Smile Again Foundation, showcased an alluring fashion show in Rome. This endeavor was greatly appreciated but in a different way as it was for a philanthropic cause. Rizwan Beyg showed his Carnival de Couture collection. The motive behind this choice was to make the world recognize that Pakistani fashion is not only about embroidered bridal dresses. His classic white collection 'wowed' the audience in particular and it did portray Pakistan in a different light. Honey Waqar also proved her fashion expertise by stirring a response among the European audience. The collection she demonstrated was designed especially for Rome. The idea behind this creation was to break the negative stereotypes about Pakistani women as oppressed women. Her collection was also greatly appreciated. The Roman holiday proved prolific for both the designers as they returned with an invitation from Firoucci to show at Milan Fashion Week this September. i Pret-a-porter Shalwars Shalwar Kameez is the traditional garment of the sub continent. Its conventional appeal and designs have significantly evolved over the years. "Wearability and comfort" are the factors that do not let this costume diffuse its attraction. To add a new flavor to the fashion savoir-faire of shlawar kameez, some designers have introduced trendy and cool individual shalwars thus providing an opportunity to 'buy, mix and match'. The modern shalwar designs have a more contemporary and fashionable look while preserving its typical traditional tones. So ladies if u want to avoid the otherwise time-intensive tailoring hassles, hunt for these shalwars . If you are looking to buy the shalwar to match with your tunics, tops or kameez, simply glance through the collections at designer stores like Funk Asia and Bias. The cool thing about these shalwars is that you are free to choose any style according to your taste and demand (whether parallel, straight leg, baggy, pants, trousers, traditional, Punjabi etc.) that are tailored and designed according to the prevailing style. You can get to choose from a wide selection and versions of ready-to-wear shalwars, which includes plain, or simple designs, printed, embroidered, block printed or the heavily ornate party wears. The fancy shalwars are widely favored due to their rich and flamboyant appeal. You can choose these traditional lowers in different hues, patterns and designs. This collection features 2009-03-09T13:54:58-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Fashion-Ensemble-by-Ayesha-Shahid-34008.aspx Dine at leisure… By Ayesha Shahid Polo is a particular obsession of the rich and famous in Lahore and food has almost become a passion for Lahorites. No wonder, the Polo Lounge has become a crowd puller in the midst of a foodie boom when people are always in the hunt of good eateries. The restaurant proved to be a pleasant discovery for me though it came into being in 2002. The lounge has become a regular haunt for polo players, socialites and food lovers. As thee name suggests the Polo Lounge is conveniently located near the Polo Ground. One is taken back in time to the world of polo as you enter the restaurant’s premises. The feeling is continued through out the dining experience as the décor is replete with the polo imagery. The décor is elegant yet cozy and makes you feel as comfortable and spoiled as in a lounge with easy listening music and comfy sofas. The mahogany is the color that dominates the ambience and accentuates the otherwise understated lighting and décor. The spacious Polo Ground visible through the French windows serves as a sensuous treat. The refreshing fruit smoothies and iced tea is a sure way to quench your summer thirst before you place the order The enormous menu covers soups, appetizers, salads, beef and chicken entrees, sea food (seasonal), sandwiches, pasta, desserts and beverages. Prawn tempura and sesame chicken serve as tantalizing appetizers. The appetizers lie in the range of Rs. 219 to Rs.239. Beef and chicken entrees set back in between Rs.299 to Rs.629. Beef steak with herb risotto and spinach is a major hit among beef lovers. One of the most popular dishes on the menu is the chef’s special saddle prawns at Rs.699 (stuffed with cheese, onions and mushrooms imported from southern France and served with sautéed vegetables). Other alluring dishes include the stuffed chicken (chicken breast stuffed with mozzarella and mushrooms, served with a creamy jalapeno pepper and mushroom sauce) and the avocado and jocca cottage cheese salad (avocadoes, fresh button mushrooms, tomatoes, cucumber, cottage cheese in Italian vinaigrette on a bed of Iceberg lettuce topped with jocca cottage and parmesan). One of the most expensive dishes served in the lounge is lobsters in oriental sauce at Rs.1299. The palate’s call for the sweet cannot be better answered than by chocolate puddle cake which is a two layer 2009-03-09T13:50:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Dine-at-leisure…By-Ayesha-Shahid-34006.aspx Dior of Pakistani Couture –Nilofer Shahid by Ayesha Shahid From her first display of clothing in 1995 of Islamic Calligraphy in New Delhi to her present fashion show in Paris Couture Fashion Week 2007, Nilofer Shahid by far is the ambassadress of her country’s tradition. Meeras is one of the leading haute couture fashion house in Pakistan, it produces bridal, formal, causal and western wear for women along with accessories and its own exclusive men’s wear line. Nilofer Shahid of this renowned fashion house belongs to a prestigious Pathan family of warriors, poets, writers and painters. Her progressive and culturally rich family has endowed her with a sensitive appreciation of the art and rich tradition of an ancient land. Meeras means heritage and her creation capture, in their richness, intricacy and attention to detail, the grandeur of the vast Islamic legacy .Her detailed research into each one of her themes ensures that her creations are true to their origins but also display her magic touch, whether it is her Central Asian line, her Mughal Recreations or her Moroccan inspired ensembles. Equated Dior of Pakistan by ‘Le Figaro’ in Paris, Nilofer’s forte lies in the profound attention she pays to detail; every collection is preceded by intensive sessions of research so that every piece is a depiction of art as it is of history, of couture as it is of culture. All this contributes to her strong signature style, which has managed her to capture clients from all over the world. What inspired you to become a fashion designer? When I started there were no fashion designers in Pakistan. For me it was a series of evolution that aspired me to become a fashion designer. In late 70s this career was quite challenging, as there was no recognition of fashion designers. My interest in couture led to a little workshop in 1978. I started off with block prints and hand painting; to my credit I was the first one to start fashion designing in Lahore. It was my great interest in art related to our culture that inspired me to come into designing. I professionally launched my career in 1991 in the form of couture house known as Meeras. The depiction of the past into the present predominantly inspired me, as I’m passionate about our roots, culture and background. What was personally important and appealing to you about this career? To be very honest I had a 2009-03-09T13:48:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Dior-of-Pakistani-Couture-–Nilofer-Shahid-by-Ayesha-Shahid-34004.aspx A cute little Italy! by Ayesha Shahid Are you in the mood for some hearty Italian food? You are invited to Masoom’s Little Italy, a wonderful little restaurant to gorge on Italian cuisine! Located at B-1, MM Alam Road, Little Italy offers a world of its own: warm, cute and cozy ambience, reminiscent of an old Italian farmhouse with a contemporary touch. Masoom’s little Italian heaven is decorated in a nice and familiar feel .Sit back and enjoy the traditional Italian decor, soft glowing candlelight and the strains of soft Italian music in the background. The place feels like an extension of a homely dining area. The seating is comfy offering tables and chairs as well as relaxing sofas and low tables adorned with hanging lamps. The interior is not only very comfortable but uniquely laid out as well. The menu is extensive though pizza that is a specialty of the Italian cuisine is missing. The menu is written in the Italian language with English translations, which adds to the Italian touch. It covers soups, appetizers, salads, sandwiches, burgers, pasta, beef and lamb steaks, rice (two dishes), chicken entrees, seafood as well as authentic Italian desserts. The food that really hits the spot involves Tiger Prawns (pan fried in garlic butter and served with plum sauce, Rs.950), Chef’s special (a delectable chicken breast with chef’s secret sauce, Rs. 325), Pollo ale Pesto Penne (homemade pesto sauce made from garden fresh basil with penne pasta) and sizzling Roman steak (marinated grilled steak, the way you like, accompanied by buttered vegetables). The food has that home cooked taste that is a hall mark of the Masoom’s. Little Italy does not disappoint you when it comes to the field of desserts. Pompeii Lava Slide is a must have once you are done with the scrumptious food. It is a warmed chocolate spectacular, cooled with ice cream. Italian Cheesecake and Apple Crumble are also a major hit in the domain of desserts. For the coffee freaks, Espresso-oh (with vanilla) and Banana Express (with coconut) are real delights! Masoom's has already received local and national recognition as a standout café and pancake lounge throughout the county and the management of Little Italy can be seen working hard to ensure the continued success and reputation of Masoom’s. The friendly attitude of the attendants is worth mentioning who can be seen offering personalized services to the customers time and again; making sure 2009-03-09T13:45:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-cute-little-Italy-by-Ayesha-Shahid-34002.aspx PEOPLE ARE TALKING ABOUT IT… by Ayesha Shahid Crossroads has awed Lahorites by launching its flagship outlet at the trendy Xinuah Mall. The store is a spacious, elegant and well-designed facility, offering abundant stocks. This new outlet is special in context to its unveiling the summer 2007 line, titled Glam Summer '07. Cool summer outfits for both the sexes, blending comfort with fashion, occupy a prominent portion of the store. 2009-03-09T13:45:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/PEOPLE-ARE-TALKING-ABOUT-IT…by-Ayesha-Shahid-34001.aspx motives for collaborative arrangements: a. Gain location-specific assets”Cultural, political, competitive, and economic differences among countries create barriers for companies that want to operate abroad. When they feel ill-equipped to handle these differences, they may seek collaboration with local companies who will help local operations. In other countries, foreign companies may team with local companies to gain operational assets. b. Overcome legal constraints”Collaboration can be a means of protecting an asset. Many countries provide little de facto protection for foreign property rights such as trademarks, patents, and copyrights unless authorities are prodded consistently. To prevent pirating of these proprietary assets, companies have sometimes made collaborative agreements with local companies, which then monitor that no one else uses the asset locally. c. Diversify geographically”By operating in a variety of countries, a company can smooth its sales and earnings because business cycles occur at different times within the different countries. Collaborative arrangements offer a faster initial means of entering multiple markets. Moreover, if product conditions favor a diversification rather than a concentration strategy, there are more compelling reasons to establish foreign collaborative arrangement. d. Minimize exposure in risky environments”One way to minimize loss from foreign political occurrences is to minimize the base of assets located abroad”or share them. A government may be less willing to move against a shared operation for fear of encountering opposition from more than one company, especially if they are from different countries and can potentially elicit support from their home governments. Another way to spread risk is to place operations in a number of different countries. Collaborative Processes Working with a group of people allows individuals to come together to express a common interest and strive toward a common goal. Frequently, working in collaborative fashion requires more in-depth and complex social skills than does working individually. Working in a group requires an individual to put aside their single motivations in order to combine together with the rest of the team to reach the demands and expectations of the group. The skills required to be effective team members are evidently instilled in the youth of today at an early age. As early as grade school, students are encouraged to work in teams to learn the necessary tactics of being a cooperative group member. These students are taught a preemptive notion of the definition of teamwork in the old saying, œa chain is only as strong as its weakest length. Society has taught us that working in 2008-12-04T12:33:57-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/motives-for-collaborative-arrangements-33897.aspx The major strains 2008-12-04T12:32:20-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-major-strains-on-collaborative-arrangements-are-due-to-f-33896.aspx Running head: Starbucks Starbucks History and Success Angelo Barbardo Hawaii Pacific University Table of Content Starbucks. 1 Table of Contents 2 Executive Summary 3 Mission Statement of the Company 5 Objectives of my Research 6 Macro-Environmental Analysis of the Company 6 Economics 6 Political/Legal 7 Historical 8 Demographics 12 Social/Cultural 13 Technological 14 Micro-Environmental Analysis 14 Management 14 Marketing 16 Finance 17 Conclusions and Recommendations 21 Source Page 22 Executive Summary Starbucks opened operations in Seattle’s Pike Place Markets in 1971 with the future aim of providing coffee to a number of restaurants and surrounding bars. With the recruitment of Howard Schultz who led the marketing and retail efforts of Starbucks in 1982, the company took a change in direction through the views of Schultz, who after visiting Italy tried to adapt the same principles in order to a strong bar culture. Schultz then utilized Starbucks ability to provide quality coffee beans and opened up a new store called Il Giornale, which brewed coffee from these particular beans. By 1987, Giornale had decided to take over the assets of Starbucks and also, further changed its name to Starbucks Corporation. By the end of the year, Starbucks had increased the number of stores to 17 and furthered its location span by entering Chicago and Vancouver. In 1990, the company took further steps forward with expansion of the Seattle headquarters and an increase in resources with the opening of a new roasting plant. Relationships and other ventures also took off during the early nineties as the company looked to development organizations to further its progress. By 1995, the company really established its name with the opening of the 676th store as well as increasing the products in store with the addition of compact discs a result of a previously popular experiment with ‘in-house’ music. In 1996, the company kept on stretching its reach by entering into the market of Japan, Singapore and Hawaii. This was achieved through joint ventures including the one formed with Sazaby Inc., which pushed through the development of coffee houses in Japan. By the year 2000, things had progressed so far that 3,300 stores were already opened, the company had ventured into countries ranging from England to Australia and a website was created to keep up operations with the latest technology (starbucks.com). The current international situation for Starbucks seems to be an emerging part of their business and the reorganization of this is proved by their aim to become a leading global company through making a difference in people’s lives all around the world (http://www.starbucks.com). This goal is quite close to being achieved as proved the Starbucks current locations 2008-11-16T17:11:26-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Starbucks-History-and-Success-33869.aspx Wal-Mart Corporation Wal-Mart was founded in 1962 by Sam Walton when he and his brother James Walton opened the first Wal-Mart Discount City in Rogers, Arkansas. Since then, Wal-Mart has grown to be the second largest company in the world (Wal-Mart Stores, n.d., p. 1). In the United States, the company includes Wal-Mart discount stores, Supercenters, Neighborhood Markets, and Sam’s Club warehouse membership clubs. The company also has many international operations. Wal-Mart is considered a variety store which focuses on low prices, and has been committed to upholding their basic value of customer service. Wal-Mart employs three basic beliefs which are respect for the individual, service to their customers, and striving for excellence (Hayden, 2002, p. 2). Wal-Mart’s corporate management strategy involves selling high quality and brand name products at the lowest price possible. In order to keep low prices, the company reduces costs by the use of advanced electronic technology and warehousing. It also negotiates deals for merchandise directly from manufacturers, eliminating the middleman. Wal-Mart’s new slogan is “save money, live better” (Wal-Mart Stores, n.d., p. 1). According to the company’s website, “saving money is a means of helping our customers live better. By offering the best possible prices on the products our customers need, we can help them afford a little something extra” (Wal-Mart Stores, n.d., p. 1). For each strategy that Wal-Mart promotes in flyer ads or television commercials, they measure the return on investment from these promotional strategies. If a strategy does not have a return on investment of a certain percentage in sales, those strategies are revamped or discarded. Backward expansion strategy is another key to Wal-Mart’s success. Unlike other retail stores, Wal-Mart opens their stores in a small town first before entering into metropolitan areas. “Wal-Mart spreads out like molasses from its Arkansas base by constructing new stores strategically located near distribution hubs and smaller towns, rather than leapfrogging across the nation like the other retailers” (Harper, 2004, p. 2). The driving force behind every Wal-Mart initiative is the continued growth and profitability of its operations. As Wal-Mart developed over the decades, it continually sought ways to become more efficient and for new avenues in which to pursue profitable growth. One of Wal-Mart’s competitive advantages is their remarkable logistics system. They are able to ship merchandise from any 2008-10-14T00:43:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Wal-Mart-Marketing--33804.aspx Harley Davidson Harley Davidson has been in business since 1903. According to the website, “four young men experimented with internal combustion in a tiny wooden shed. Not only does the shed not burn, but the motorcycle they build goes on to serve for over 100,000 miles” (Harley Davidson, n.d., 1). In 1901, William S. Harley draws a blueprint of a motor to fit a bicycle. Later, he is joined by Arthur Davidson and they build the first Harley Davidson motorcycle. Harley Davidson has excess demand for its products. Its products include motorcycles, accessories, and apparel. It is the only U.S. born motorcycle manufacture. Its website provides the internet user, or motorcycle enthusiast, with interesting, useful, and visual information on its products and services. Harley Davidson’s market niche is a wealthy or above average income individual. Many of their buyers are older adults who like to ride for relaxation. Harley Davidson uses customer surveys and motorcycle rallies to conduct their marketing research. This research has influenced Harley to start to manufacture motorcycles for women. Women riding motorcycles has increase 10% since 1987. On their website, Harley has a separate web page for women riders. On this page, topics include why women ride, learning to ride, women riders making headlines, and the history of female riders (Harley Davidson, n.d.). Harley Davidson appeals to consumers through brand identity. “The value of brands in today’s environment is phenomenal. Brands have the power of instant sales, they convey a message of confidence, quality and reliability to their target market” (Learn Marketing, n.d., 2). Everybody recognizes the bar and shield symbol of a Harley Davidson. Owning a Harley Davidson motorcycle signals American pride, and depending on what type of motorcycle the individual has it could also signal wealth. Harley Davidson’s target market can be subdivided into smaller niches. These niches include the motorcycle itself, fashion, charity runs, the Harley Davidson Owners Group (also known as H.O.G.), and social events. Harley Davidson has chosen the strategic direction of targeting a younger market. With the introduction of the V-Rod motorcycle, Harley Davidson is trying to capture the performance cruiser marketplace. “To target the younger market with the new product line, the company has adopted the following marketing objectives: to expand its current market (market expansion), diversify 2008-10-14T00:40:56-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Harley-Davidson-Marketing-33803.aspx McDonald's Marketing Strategy McDonald’s is the world’s largest fast-food restaurant chain. It has more than 30,000 restaurants in over 100 countries. Over one billion more customers were served in 2007 than in 2006. Although net income was down by $1.1 billion in 2007, McDonald’s sales were up 6.8%, and revenue was a record high of $23 billion. “The unique business relationship among the company, its franchisees and suppliers (collectively referred to as the System) has been key to McDonald’s success over the years. The business model enables McDonald’s to play an integral role in the communities we serve and consistently deliver relevant restaurant experiences to customers.” (McDonald's, 2008, 25). McDonald’s overall strategic plan is called Plan to Win. Their focus is not so much on being the biggest fast-food restaurant chain, rather it is more focused on being the best fast-food restaurant chain. McDonald’s “strategic alignment behind this plan has created better McDonald’s experiences through the execution of multiple initiatives surrounding the five factors of exceptional customer experiences – people, products, place, price and promotion” (McDonald's, 2008, 25). McDonald’s also incorporates geographical strategic plans. In the U.S., McDonald’s strategic plan continues to focus on breakfast, chicken, beverages and convenience. These are the core areas in the United States. McDonald’s has launched the Southern Style Chicken Biscuit for breakfast and the Southern Style Chicken Sandwich for lunch and dinner. In the beverage business, McDonald’s starting introducing new hot specialty coffee offerings on a market-by-market basis. In Europe, McDonald’s uses a tiered menu approach. This menu features premium selections, classic menu, and everyday affordable offerings. They also “complement these with new products and limited-time food promotions” (McDonald's, 26). In the Asia-Pacific, Middle East, and Africa markets, McDonald’s strategic plan is focused around convenience, breakfast, core menu extensions and value. With McDonald’s overall strategic plan and its geographical strategic plan, the company should start to see more positive financial results. McDonald’s incorporates several organizational strategies. Some of the organizational strategies consist of better restaurant operations, placing the customer first, menu variety and beverage choice, convenience and daypart expansion, and ongoing restaurant reinvestment. McDonald’s plans to “continue to drive success in 2008 and beyond by leveraging key consumer insights and our global experience, while relying on our strengths in developing, testing and implementing initiatives surrounding our global business 2008-10-14T00:39:49-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/McDonald-s-Marketing-Strategy-33802.aspx Starbucks Corporation Marketing Headquartered in Seattle Washington, Starbucks Corporation is a premium coffee retailer offering a wide selection of hot and cold beverages, fresh food, premium ice cream, merchandise, and entertainment. Starbucks opened its first location in 1971 at Seattle’s Pike Place Market. Although Starbucks closed approximately 600 underperforming stores this year, it still operates more than 16,000 stores worldwide with over 11,000 stores in the United States. (Herman, 2008). Each store varies its product mix depending upon the size of the store and its location. Larger stores carry a broad selection while smaller stores offer a more limited selection. The product strategy of Starbucks can be summarized by the company’s vision statement. As stated on its website, the company’s vision is to “establish Starbucks as the most recognized and respected brand in the world and to be the premier purveyor of the finest coffee in the world” (Starbucks, n.d., p. 1). Starbucks has strong global brand recognition which is built on a solid reputation for premium products. The company is well known with consumers for making high quality beverages, food and associated goods. Starbucks takes pride as being recognized and respected as the top coffee store in the world (Allison, 2007, p. 2). The atmosphere of its stores is what keeps customers coming back. The stores are designed where customers can get in and out quickly or stay and enjoy the camaraderie. Starbucks does not mass advertise. Most of their marketing is done by word of mouth, and in supporting local events within the communities where their stores are located. As Howard Schultz, the CEO of Starbucks states: At Starbucks, we have integrated ourselves in a way that is very different than selling a cup of coffee. We have an emotional relationship with our customers. It’s not one thing, but a lot of things. It’s not good enough to have a good ad, but everything you do helps complete the circle…the packaging, the community involvement, the service all help build that emotional connection. (Lewis, 2008, p. 3) Starbucks has created very loyal customers who continue to return to Starbucks. These customers are willing to pay four dollars for a cup of coffee. The average Starbucks customers are middle to upper class, working adults. Also, there are a lot of 2008-10-14T00:38:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Starbucks-Case-Study--33801.aspx This girl in hip hop video animated instruments video lesbian kissing video clips download video super mario . Be stocking mature lesbian videos free ametuer porn video clips . smokey the bear matches video tv funhouse videos . 365 video porn jimmey buffet videos . monkey funny video clips elliott eyed missy new teary video , new jamaican dance hall music video paul wall lil keke music video free videos pictutres of nude celebrities playful lesbians videos . dans video free recking videos . dvi video card pn 109-a26000-00 3iv2 video codec . apollo video technology in car system videos of the mother . Be rti education video free internet sex videos . deno spring video on tbn show them to me music video . dance maniax videos rss firme publicitate ro videos . free style rap videos preview porn video milfs . youtube video downloader mac free steaming videos . gas powered remote controlled cars video 50cent video about camron . ufc 81 recap videos dorismar playboy video . clasic videos hatchet vs gentals video . mexican xxx video my video code . free animated fucking video video disc recorder . <QUOTE>Ready to dig our divine uncontrolled streamline porn vids? Then take the place of the 3 frank steps described below. 1. Click on the porn video screenshot that you like most. 2. On the back burner serve for the colloquy window to appear. Click endure button to download and position the codec. 3. Act a stress the hottest HQ streamline videos for uncontrolled!</QUOTE> <a href=http://videomoviex.com/l63246.html><b>ragheb alama video clip how to record on tv videos </b></a> <a href=http://videomoviex.com/h63967.html><img>http://91.121.132.199/gifs/2403.gif</img></a> To evil chill videos gore v bush video testimony toe sucking lesbian video the hanging of sadam video . ovide video cartoon mynet video . imeem videos smoke alarm video . funniest you tube video adult home videoadult home video . At police in car videos free online all male videos . clip health video transfer video to dvd nyc . club upskirt videos earl carter video . sony video camera hasbro toys now video . blake lewis videos from american idol learning linux videos . free teen flashing videos video rental delivery , create live video station ashlynne brooke hardcore videos lez video download eva maria porn video . digital video camera history training exam video , photos videos of dropkick murphys adault video . car video sites fitness exercise video sales 2008-06-25T10:26:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Videos-of-Irish-Bands-the-Drunken-Stoners-Video-33620.aspx Date Address 1. Executive Summary 4 1.1. Objectives 5 1.2. Mission 5 1.3. Keys to Success 5 2. Company Summary 6 2.1. Start-up Summary 6 3. Services 7 4. Market Analysis Summary 8 4.1. Market Segmentation 8 4.2. Service Business Analysis 11 4.2.1. Market Highlights 12 4.2.2. E-marketplaces 12 4.3. Demographics 14 4.4. Competitive Edge 14 4.5. Marketing Strategy 15 4.6. Sales Strategy 15 4.6.1. Sales Forecast 15 5. Management Summary 17 5.1. Personnel Plan 17 6. Financial Plan 18 6.1. Start-up Funding 19 6.2. Important Assumptions 19 6.3. Break-even Analysis 20 6.4. Projected Profit and Loss 21 6.5. Projected Cash Flow 24 6.6. Projected Balance Sheet 26 6.7. Business Ratios 27 7. Products 28 8. Services - Graphic Art Design 29 9. Services - Website Design 29 10. Challenges 29 11. Software Modules 30 12. System Standards and Integration 31 1. Executive Summary PrintingSolutions.com is being designed as a global Internet printing services/print shop who is focused on reducing the overall printing price structure, in addition to enabling business-to-business transactions for printing presses and the graphic art design industry. PrintingSolutions.com will also attain a competitive edge by offering services such as website development and e-commerce, which have become essential for any business presence. PrintingSolutions.com intends to establish and operate an Internet print shop with services costing significantly less than the prices of its competitors, while supplying superior quality. Incorporating its website and graphic art services, Printing Solutions will enable both start-up and existing companies to reduce their printing and e-commerce costs. Highlights of PrintingSolutions.com • Breakthrough products. PrintingSolutions.com will develop a unique website that provides customers various ways to create business stationery, including business cards, envelopes, notepads, and door hangers. A graphic art design center will also be provided, enabling customers to create company logos and other designs essential to their company's identity. • Trademarks. The company plans to register a corporation under the name of PrintingSolutions.com and operate under the same name. • Large markets. Recent studies by Forrester Research Inc. reveal that business-to-business (B2B) commerce will total $2.7 trillion in revenue by the year 2004. The data emphasize that e-marketplaces will be responsible for 53% of all online business trade. • Seasoned management. The company's management is highly experienced and qualified. • Customers. The company will primarily target small and start-up businesses throughout the country. The company will also develop plans to negotiate deals with big businesses. The biggest competitive threat for PrintingSolutions.com will come from iPrint.com. However, we will have a competitive advantage over iPrint.com by offering lower prices on all products and services. Customers in this industry are sensitive to both quality and price, and at PrintingSolutions.com they will benefit from both offerings. PrintingSolutions.com has a world-class management team with direct knowledge of the industry, extensive research experience, and unique administration skills. The team will be led by Mr. Dalton Grant. The company projects that between July 1, 2000 and December 31, 2000 it will generate revenues of $250,000. Projected revenues for 2001 and 2002 2008-06-03T16:43:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Print-shop-Business-Plan-33605.aspx “What is the glass ceiling?” “Is it a ceiling made out of glass?” In business, it is defined as “an upper limit to professional advancement, especially as imposed upon women that is not readily perceived or openly acknowledged.” In 1986, journal reporters used the term “glass ceiling” in the newspapers, and they described it as the barriers that limit the advancement of women and minorities. In other words, it is a ceiling based on attitudes, an organization’s stereotypes, or bias that prevents the advancement of women and minorities (a racial, religious or a political group) to high-level positions. Since the past decade, women and minorities were allowed limited roles in the workplace. Twenty years ago, women made up for 1% of the top management. Twenty-five years ago, women made up for 15% of the management in a company. Now women make up for 45% of the management. Recently, minorities make up for 20% of the senior executives in a company. Only 5% of minorities who are women are senior level managers. Research reveals that women and minorities in various ethnic groups become employed in service industries such as finance, real estate, wholesale, and retail trade. In addition, research also reveals that women and minorities seem to have a greater opportunity for advancement in industries such as telecommunications and businesses. There are more chances of advancement because there is more restructuring and competition in telecommunications and businesses. The management’s perception of men and women (in regular activities) can influence the glass ceiling and create obstacles for women. When a family picture is on a man’s desk, management might believe that he is a responsible family man. If it was on a woman’s desk, management may believe that her family is more important to her than her career. If a man is going to get married or have a baby, management will arrange for a raise. When a woman announces that she is going to have a baby, management might think that the company is going to have more expenses in maternity and benefits. Even when a man talks to his co-workers, management may think that he is talking about how to improve the business. In management’s perspective, if a woman is talks to her co-workers, they assume that she must be gossiping. There are many types of glass ceiling barriers. An example is when management does not create systems, policies, and 2008-05-31T17:35:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Glass-Ceiling-a-Fact-or-Fiction-33604.aspx Executive Summary The existing information system are physical record which are mostly on paper and storing that record itself is a difficult task for the hospitals as well as patient. Most of the patients has to carry their medical history by themselves, sometime certain reports were missing which is waste of time as well as cost. If the patients are in critical condition then the situation is still worse for the doctors to make the decision due to lack of their previous history. An effective Health care decision support system where the patient records are stored in centralised database system, which will help in providing customised information needed by different users of the hospitals to make the effective decision and thus making the hospital perform in efficient way. Introduction Hospital Information System is a system which maintains and retrieves detailed clinical data for a patient. This system stores detailed medical record of a particular patient like height, weight, blood pressure conditions, previous treatments and other medical history of the patient. This system also gives details about their previous laboratory records, their prescribed drug usage based on the patient’s medical condition, billing and takes care of the health insurance claims. All the departments of the hospital are linked to the system like, the blood bank, pharmacy, laboratories, etc so that professionals working in these particular departments may perform a query, extract the data, and upload/download details about the condition of a patient depending on the access privilege of each individual. Existing Hospital Information System When a patient visits the hospital, he goes through diagnosis of a specialist doctor. If further investigation is required, the doctor sends the patient for a laboratory test. The patient, after being tested at the laboratory, has to wait for a couple of hours/days till the reports to be released. Once the reports are released, the patient has to collect the report and hand it over to the specialist doctor, who examines the reports and determines the criticality of the patient’s health condition and treats with necessary therapy. The patient maintains a case file/folder which contains the details of the patient’s medical condition like the laboratory reports, drugs prescribed from time to time, and other remarks by the concerned doctors about his/her day to day health. Currently, Information System is not employed in the hospital as all the records are maintained on paper. The patient’s case file, which is merely a folder 2008-05-23T03:56:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Hospital-Information-System-33601.aspx Executive Summary “You must communicate succinctly yet convincingly just what the business is, who will execute the strategy and how it will change people’s lives.” – Marsha VandeBerg, Entrepreneurial Edge Diversified Industries Inc. manufactures the highest quality of solar powered fans that are of exceptional quality compared to the competition. Currently Diversified Industries Inc. is working to improve the special feature of our product so that we will be the lead innovator in the solar powered fan market. Our strategic plan is to target the upper class of society and provide a product that is not only elegant but environmentally sound. Our product harnesses the power of the sun instead of using electricity which reduces the carbon imprint of the consumer. The management team is currently looking into the expansion of our warehouse in region 1 or building in another region to facilitate the growth of production capacity. Sales have continued to increase over last six quarters and are projected to continue to increase at a 6% increase over the next 6 quarters. Although our sales are not as high as our competitors we are second in net profits and thus producing our product more efficiently and effectively. This allows us to cut our manufacturing cost to include the purchase of raw materials and labor. Our net sales started at 699,376 in quarter 0 and have increased to $1,065,942 dollars over a six quarter period. Diversified Industries Inc’s profit margins have been approximately 6% over the past 6 quarters but the management team is committed to improvement. Diversified Industries Inc.’s has been very competitive in the solar fan market and has enjoyed a significant market share. To maintain this share and increase our holdings the management team has developed a strategic plan that includes the heavy investment in quality and the creation of special features for our product. We also believe that investing in our employees and current manufacturing process we can achieve a better product made for less. In creating a finer product for our customers and selling it at a reasonable price gives Diversified Industries Inc. an edge over our competition. The management team has monitored competitive pricing, quality and special features utilizing market research sources and has determined that our product is above the market standard. The process that is utilized in producing our product reduces cost and increases the 2008-04-21T00:12:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/An-Example-of-an-Executive-Summary-33565.aspx Before there was the Swoosh, before there was Nike, there were two visionary men who pioneered a revolution in athletic footwear that redefined the industry. Bill Bowerman was a nationally respected track and field coach at the University of Oregon, who was constantly seeking ways to give his athletes a competitive advantage. He experimented with different track surfaces, re-hydration drinks and – most importantly – innovations in running shoes. But the established footwear manufacturers of the 1950s ignored the ideas he tried to offer them, so Bowerman began cobbling shoes for his runners. Phil Knight was a talented middle-distance runner from Portland, who enrolled at Oregon in the fall of 1955 and competed for Bowerman’s track program. Upon graduating from Oregon, Knight earned his MBA in finance from Stanford University, where he wrote a paper that proposed quality running shoes could be manufactured in Japan that would compete with more established German brands. But his letters to manufacturers in Japan and Asia went unanswered, so Knight took a chance. He made a cold-call on the Onitsuka Co. in Kobe, Japan, and persuaded the manufacturer of Tiger shoes to make Knight a distributor of Tiger running shoes in the United States. When the first set of sample shoes arrived, Knight sent several pairs to Bowerman, hoping to make a sale. Instead, Bowerman stunned Knight by offering to become his partner, and to provide his footwear design ideas to Tiger. They shook hands to form Blue Ribbon Sports, pledged $500 each and placed their first order of 300 pairs of shoes in January 1964. Knight sold the shoes out of the trunk of his green Plymouth Valiant, while Bowerman began ripping apart Tiger shoes to see how he could make them lighter and better, and enlisted his University of Oregon runners to wear-test his creations. In essence, the foundation for what would become Nike had been established. But Bowerman and Knight each had full-time jobs - Bowerman at Oregon and Knight at a Portland accounting firm - so they needed someone to manage the growing requirements of Blue Ribbon Sports. Enter Jeff Johnson, whom Knight had met at Stanford. A runner himself, Johnson became the first full-time employee of Blue Ribbon Sports in 1965, and quickly became an invaluable utility man for the start-up company. He created the first product brochures, print ads and marketing materials, and even shot the photographs for the company’s catalogues. Johnson established 2008-04-10T23:05:23-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Nike-Bill-Bowerman-33557.aspx There are many different businesses out there in the big old world, from fast-food outlets to solicitors. The similarity that businesses can share even if there as complete opposite as a fast-food outlet to a solicitor is the way they have there legal structure. To create a successful business dependent on the type of work, four different legal structures can help succeed in what you desire. SOLE TRADER – A sole trader is the simplest legal business structure and consists of just one individual trader. This owner can control the business that how they please. Their desires toward the business are final and there working hours are chosen by the individual worker. A sole trader basically means an individual does business in there name and they are the only owner of the business. This legal structure is not a corporation. Castle Hill Music is an example of a sole trader. There many not be the most successful business mostly due to the location. The have a wide range of instrument and music books. Unfortunately not large. Advantages – There are many advantages in being a sole trader that could benefit your business if sole trader is your chosen legal business structure. • Sole traders has the simplest form of starting a business • The owner has complete control or how the business runs • It is less costly to operate • Owner keeps all profit • No tax on profits only personal income Disadvantages – Where there are advantages, disadvantages are also patiently waiting to strike. • Unlimited liability for business debts • Difficult to operate in illness • Carries all loses of the business • Needs to perform a variety of tasks • Difficulty in raising finance for expansion. PARTNERSHIP – A partnership for possible financial troubles is the safest option in establishing a business. This legal structure is shared between partners who own the business. They experience profit and loss of which the business has invested upon. Partnerships are preferred over corporations for financial purposes. The decision decided are both consulted through the owners of the business before the idea is taken into consideration of the business. Lim’s Hot Bread owned by Yen and Hay Lim is located at Eastwood. This business uses the partnership structure. Furthermore the business being a family business each owner has equal share to the profit that the business makes. Advantages – The advantages of partnership are more limited that a sole trader: • Shared responsibility and work load • Pooled funds and talent • Minimal government regulation • No taxes on 2008-04-04T11:22:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Legal-Structures-33556.aspx Topic Question- Was Australia a working man’s paradise during the period 1901-1914? Include in your answer an analysis of the Sunshine Harvester Case 1907 and its significance. Resource Number 1 RESOURCE Where did the resource come from? The resource that I have chosen first is a chapter concerning the Living and Working conditions of Australia between the period 1901-1914 founded in the School History Textbook “Retro Active 2”. RELEVANCE TO TOPIC How closely does your resource relate to the topic question? “Retro Active 2” relates largely towards the topic question. This text book shows detailed information concerning the working conditions of the Australian worker during the time period 1901-1914. This chapter goes into detail about the working conditions supplying information about factory work, wage, child labour, woman servants and unsafe work place for example. USEFULNESS AND/OR RELIABILITY How much information does your resource provide? The text book “Retro Active 2” shows how people were treated in factories. What types of jobs were done and there conditions that they have to go through every work day. The long hours they sent only to receive little pay. The safety of each worker and how dangerous some jobs were when they are simple today. Child labour and how they were treated and payed when they worked. Resource Number 2 RESOURCE Where did the resource come from? My second chosen resource concerning the topic question is an internet web page displaying text about the Sunshine Harvester Case in 1907. RELEVANCE TO TOPIC How closely does your resource relate to the topic question? This website resource relate towards the question with flying colours. This resource displays appropriate information concerning the Sunshine Harvester Case in 1907. The purpose and outcome are clearly displayed throughout the text. Dates are expressed where necessary. USEFULNESS AND/OR RELIABILITY How much information does your resource provide? This website provides information concerning the Sunshine Harvester Case in 1907. The usefulness of this website shows a case where the workers one a right, the right of a fair and reasonable wage. This case was regarded as a benchmark in Australia industrial law. It shows how H. V. McKay was forced to pay all his workers are fair wage enough to support a family. This demand was told by H. B. Higgins. Resource Number 3 RESOURCES Where did the resource come from? This resource has been founded by the internet once again. This informative website consists of information expressing the conditions of Australia’s work place in the period 1901-1914. The website shows information concerning why the 2008-04-04T11:08:39-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Australia-History-Federation-33554.aspx Who are the uninsured? A growing number of uninsured Americans are one of the biggest and most debated troubles we face in our health care system. The actual count of the number of uninsured gets considerable policy use and media interest and an adequate amount of attention that when national estimates of the uninsured differ, it raises doubts about our ability to design solutions or test their impact. This issue brief begins with a comparison of the total number of uninsured from three major national surveys, demonstrating that these estimates are actually more consistent than what is often perceived. In other words, who the uninsured are does not vary much across national surveys. Transversely, of all surveys according to the Keiser commission on Medicaid and the uninsured, better than half of the uninsured are in low-income families and about half are minorities. The majority of uninsured adults are working, but their lack of education makes it more difficult for them to get jobs that offer employer-sponsored coverage. Several surveys are able to provide national health insurance coverage estimates, including how many are uninsured. Different estimates of the number of uninsured released each year are not exactly the same and that has at times created questions about how large the problem really is. Health insurance estimates from national surveys vary depending on how the questions are couched and how long a period people are asked to recall their familiarity. For instance, respondents may be asked what their insurance coverage is in the month they are being interviewed or if they have been without coverage anytime in the past year or two years. Depending on the reference period respondents are asked to recall, national survey estimates of the uninsured have ranged as widely as 20 to 80 million. At one end, different surveys report 20 and 35 million being uninsured over the course of a full year, while as many as 80 to 85 million have been uninsured for at least part of a two year period. Who Are the Uninsured? All three surveys show that about 80% of the uninsured are adults. Adults are more likely to be uninsured than children because most low-income children qualify for either Medicaid or S-CHIP, while low-income adults under age 65 qualify for Medicaid only if they are disabled, pregnant, or have dependent children. Since many entitled children are not enrolled in these public programs—children 2008-03-16T04:37:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Uninsured-33542.aspx 1. Compare and contrast any two definitions of leadership discussed by the text. (20 points) Two main types of leadership are transactional and transformational. Transactional leadership is concerned with the end result and involves a leader providing direction to others. Transformational leadership is concerned with the process and requires participation from all involved. There are advantages and disadvantages to both types of leadership. The circumstances of a given situation may require leaders to use one type of leadership over another. Another way of looking at it, actual - giving guidance or direction, like a teacher being a leader to a student, as in the phrase "the President has provided satisfactory leadership". Potential - the capacity or ability to lead, as in the phrase "she could have exercised effective leadership"; or in the concept "born to lead". Leadership can have a formal aspect (as in most political or business leadership) or an informal one (as in most friendships). Speaking of "leadership" (the abstract term) rather than of "leading" (the action) usually implies that the entities doing the leading have some "leadership skills" or competencies. There is a great deal of talk about loyalty from the bottom to the top. Loyalty from the top down is even more necessary and much less prevalent. George S. Patton, Jr., War As I Knew It, 281 Using examples from the movie Crimson Tide or a current event situation illustrate the interactional framework; its component parts (leader, follower, situation) and give examples of interactions between these three elements. (40 points) Most leadership work customarily has assumed leadership to have a unswerving impact on a principle variable or in its more urbane guise, assumes that the type variable has direct impact on leadership or conceivably that there is reciprocal impact. without a doubt, direct impact is all part of the Lone Ranger white hat syndrome infused much traditional leadership research. And, indeed, there are many instances where leadership can precisely be defined, or described as having a direct impact for good or bad Usually, in addition to face-to-face, such leadership could be by telephone and E-mail. Such effects often accompany more direct leader-follower effects higher in the organization. These indirect effects operate through other variables. 2. Describe aspects of the people you work with that make learning from leadership 2008-03-16T04:09:07-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leadership-and-Socialized-Power-33541.aspx Who are the uninsured? A growing number of uninsured Americans are one of the biggest and most debated troubles we face in our health care system. The actual count of the number of uninsured gets considerable policy use and media interest and an adequate amount of attention that when national estimates of the uninsured differ, it raises doubts about our ability to design solutions or test their impact. This issue brief begins with a comparison of the total number of uninsured from three major national surveys, demonstrating that these estimates are actually more consistent than what is often perceived. In other words, who the uninsured are does not vary much across national surveys. Transversely, of all surveys according to the Keiser commission on Medicaid and the uninsured, better than half of the uninsured are in low-income families and about half are minorities. The majority of uninsured adults are working, but their lack of education makes it more difficult for them to get jobs that offer employer-sponsored coverage. Several surveys are able to provide national health insurance coverage estimates, including how many are uninsured. Different estimates of the number of uninsured released each year are not exactly the same and that has at times created questions about how large the problem really is. Health insurance estimates from national surveys vary depending on how the questions are couched and how long a period people are asked to recall their familiarity. For instance, respondents may be asked what their insurance coverage is in the month they are being interviewed or if they have been without coverage anytime in the past year or two years. Depending on the reference period respondents are asked to recall, national survey estimates of the uninsured have ranged as widely as 20 to 80 million. At one end, different surveys report 20 and 35 million being uninsured over the course of a full year, while as many as 80 to 85 million have been uninsured for at least part of a two year period. Who Are the Uninsured? All three surveys show that about 80% of the uninsured are adults. Adults are more likely to be uninsured than children because most low-income children qualify for either Medicaid or S-CHIP, while low-income adults under age 65 qualify for Medicaid only if they are disabled, pregnant, or have dependent children. Since many entitled children are not enrolled in these public programs—children 2008-03-16T04:00:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/universal-health-care-fallacy-33539.aspx Risk Management Program: Paramount Canada's Wonderland Background Information Tornoto's, Paramount: Canada's Wonderland (PCW) is located just outside the city of Toronto, Ontario. This particular outdoor theme park provides guests with over 200 attractions (Victoria Falls High Divers and Arthur's Baye Stunt Show), wild rides (Shockwave TM and Drop Zone Stunt Tower), a wide selection of roller coasters and a 20-acre water park for the whole family. The park is open starting near the end of May and stays open until the end of September or early October depending on the weather. This theme park would definitely be a time to remember, but before this amusement park lets anyone through the gates, there are many risks that should be dealt with. In order for the PCW to be fully operational, they would need to develop a risk management program. This will ensure safety for both the customer base as well as the people involved with amusement park's daily operations. The individuals that run daily operations would range from the chief executive officer; to the employees working the gates; to the performers in the stunt shows. In order to develop a risk management program, there are six main areas that must be covered in order to avoid, reduce, retain, and insure PCW. These six areas include: determination of objectives, identification of risks, evaluation of risks, consideration of alternatives and selection of the risk treatment device, implementation of the decision, evaluation and review. By going through these areas in detail, PCW will be in a greater position to deal with possible risks. Determination of Objectives There have been an increasing number of accidents occurring throughout the amusement park industry. Risk management should be considered for every amusement park, including Toronto's, Paramount: Canada's Wonderland. Furthermore, not only does risk management help reduce tension in everyday environment, but it also can be considered value-added as patrons will have a renewed feeling of safety when visiting PCW. Since safety for patrons and maintaining a profit are the greatest objectives for PCW, then a properly conducted risk management program will help to achieve this. If the safety of patrons is maintained, PCW will maintain a profit because the public will be satisfied and keep returning. Moreover, this objective of safety is an obligation for PCW to provide society with utmost protection from injury; therefore, legal legislation installs businesses to have a social responsibility. For example, PCW should 2008-03-16T03:56:56-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Canadian-Risk-Management-Program-an-Assesment-33538.aspx 1.0 Introduction 2 2.0 Data Collection 2 2.1 Personal Budget 2 2.2 Car deal 2 2.3 Payment method of Car 3 2.4 Selecting a Credit Card 5 2.5 Employing left over cash 6 2.6 Future Income 6 2.7 Future value of trip 7 2.8 North Beenleigh house 7 2.9 Financing Shailer Park home 9 3.0 Conclusion 9 4.0 Recommendations 10 5.0 References: 11 6.0 Appendixes: …………………………………....………After 11 1.0 Introduction The information below has been specially gathered and designed for Mr. Bernard Fanning who may use the following data to make future decisions. This report contains matters concerning Personal Financing which is the ability of an individual to provide funds in order to achieve personal goals and investing which is defined as the putting out of money into a project which in return you may receive a higher amount. 2.0 Data Collection The information and figures produced on this report was collected and presented by, Salman Clay. The resources and information used to produce this report is recorded on the reference and appendix pages, see table of contents for details. 2.1 Personal Budget Income: Total: Monthly Income 3750 3750 Expense: Food 400 Electricity 100 Phone 140 Clothing 200 Entertainment 600 Car expenses 150 Insurance/Registration 150 Miscellaneous 200 Mortgage 1200 3140 Income – Expense: 610 Saving a Year: 7320 2.2 Car deal It has been stated that Mr. Fanning would like to trade in the Toyota corolla, ascent, lift back, four speed, 2000 model for a better much more luxurious Mazda 6, semi-automatic, five speed, 2008 model. Using the information shown on the appendix A, there is a good chance that you may receive an average price of $7200, if the Toyota corolla is traded in. Because the car is said to be in very good condition the price obtained from appendix A is the highest price for trade in. This price does not include fees which are to be paid when buying or selling a vehicle. Examples of the fees are transfer and registration fees. The car that Mr. Fanning wants to trade in the Toyota Corolla for is a 2008 Mazda 6, with automatic transmission. As Appendix B states, the car is a 2008 Mazda 6, Limited Sedan, four door Semi-Automatic 5 speed 2.5 litre which retails for $31 800. This price does not include fees which are to be paid when buying or selling a vehicle. Please refer to the table below. Price: Difference Toyota Corolla $7200 Mazda 6 $31800 $24600 There is an extra price of $24 600 needing to be paid if Bernard wants to trade in the Toyota corolla for the Mazda 6 assuming that the car dealer is being generous and is paying for the fees. 2.3 Payment method of Car Getting a car loan is the best choice of payment for Mr. Fanning’s situation. There 2008-03-16T03:22:49-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Personal-Financing-and-Investing-33533.aspx 2. Country environments: 2.1. General information: Size/area (in sq. km): 84,412 km² (32,591 sq mi) Capital city: Dublin Climate: Overall, Ireland has a mild, but changeable, Oceanic climate with few extremes Population: slightly under six million (2006/7), with almost 4.25 million in the Republic of Ireland (1.7 million in Greater Dublin) and an estimated 1.75 million in Northern Ireland (0.6 million in Greater Belfast). Racial: Caucasian Ethnic groups: largely homogeneous, Irish, with English minority, Irish, Anglo-Irish, Ulster-Scots, others Location of the country in the world: It lies to the northwest of Continental Europe. It is surrounded by hundreds of islands and islets. To the east of Ireland, separated by the Irish Sea, is the island of Great Britain. 2.2. Cultural environment: Language- Irish (Gaeilge) is a Celtic language of the Goidelic branch spoken in Ireland Religion (s): Roman Catholics (91.6 per cent); Protestants, the only significant religious minority (3 per cent); small communities of Jews (0.04 per cent), and 12,000-15,000 Muslims (0.4 per cent), many of whom are refugees. 2.3. Political environment: Political system: identify and describe the political system and the political conditions in your country. Take place in a framework of a parliamentary representative democratic republic. The Uachtarán (President) is the head of state. The Taoiseach (Prime Minister) is the head of government, and of a pluriform multi-party system. Executive power is exercised by the government. Legislative power is vested in both the government and the Oireachtas the bicameral national parliament, which consists of Dáil Éireann and Seanad Éireann. The Judiciary is independent of the executive and the legislature. While there are a number of important political parties in the state, the political landscape is dominated by Fianna Fáil and Fine Gael, historically opposed and competing entities. The state is a member of the European Union. A number of political parties are represented in the Dáil and coalition governments are common. Neither of the two largest parties, Fianna Fáil and Fine Gael, strongly identifies itself as either a left or right-wing group. The third largest party in the state is the centre-left Labour Party. Labour is joined on the left by the Green Party and on the far-left by Sinn Féin and the Socialist Party. The right is represented by the Progressive Democrats who are classical neo-liberals with regard to economic policy. Independent TDs (MPs) also play an important role in Irish politics. 2.4. Economic environment: Years GDP/GNP Population Per capita income $ Million % growth In million % growth GDP/Pop. % growth 1996 62,150.20 ------------- 3.63 ------------ 17,121.26 --------------- 1997 71,855.29 15.6 3.67 1.1 19,579.09 14.4 1999 85,232.14 18.6 3.70 0.8 23,035.71 17.6 1999 119,405.68 40.0 3.75 1.3 31,841.51 38.2 2000 142,380.21 19.2 3.8 1.3 37,841.51 17.6 2001 159,006.01 11.6 3.86 1.5 41,193.26 9.94 2002 176,970.38 11.2 3.93 0.9 45,030.63 9.31 2003 189,211.68 6.91 3.99 1.5 47,421.47 5.30 2004 200,961.41 6.20 4.07 2.0 49,376.26 4.12 2005 219,473.90 9.2 4.14 1.7 53,013.01 9.31 3. Trade and foreign direct investment 2008-03-09T22:04:49-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ireland-Business-Profile-33531.aspx TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1.0 RCCL CRUISE LINES 1 1.1 MARKET DEFINITION AND ANALYSIS 1 1.2 MARKET SEGMENTATION 2 1.3 INDUSTRY STRUCTURE AND COMPETITION 3 1.4 STRATEGY FOR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE 4 1.5 MARKET TARGETING AND POSITION STRATEGIES 8 2.0 OBJECTIVES AS I SEE IT 9 3.0 NAVIGATION 9 4.0 GRAPHICAL DESIGN 9 5.0 EASE OF FINDING PRODUCT INFORMATION 10 6.0 EASE OF FINDING SUPPORT INFORMATION 10 7.0 EASE OF ORDERING 10 8.0 FEATURES THAT REALLY STAND OUT 10 9.0 BEST ASPECTS OF SITE 10 10.0 BIGGEST IMPROVEMENT OPPORTUNITIES 10 11.0 SITE SUGGESTIONS FOR CHANGE 10 12.0 OVERALL IMPRESSION, IMPROVEMENTS, SUGGESTIONS 10 13.0 URL 10 1.0 Royal Caribbean Cruise Line Royal Caribbean Cruise Line (RCCL) is the world's second largest cruise company (behind top-ranking Carnival), with over 20 cruise ships and a total of 60,590 passenger berths as of August 2005. Founded in 1969, the company has been active in changing the cruise industry from a ocean carrier service into a vacation option in and of itself. RCCL offers a variety of different itineraries and its ships travel to many destinations like the Caribbean, Bahamas, Mexico, Pacific Northwest, Alaska, Asia, Australia, Bermuda, South America, Transatlantic, Europe, Bermuda, Panama Canal, Hawaii, New England, and Canada. The company operates under two separate brands, RCCL International and Celebrity Cruises. A large percentage of its passengers are from North America even though the company operates internationally to their port destinations, itineraries, activities and amenities designed to appeal to every taste, energy level and age group giving our guests the opportunity to create their own adventure. The RCCL vision: “Our vision is to empower and enable our Employees to deliver the best vacation experience to our Guests, thereby generating superior returns to our Stakeholders and enhancing the wellbeing of our Communities.” (“Royal Caribbean International,” n.d.) 1.1 Market Definition and Analysis Successful sales strategy hinges on your ability to identify buyers' needs and wants. Needs are defined as objective requirements. The buyers' wants relate more to a value statement. A want exists when a consumer has an unfulfilled need and determines that a particular good or service will satisfy it. (Lamb, Hair & McDaniel, 2006) When a consumer plans a vacation they are attempting to get away from their everyday life and enjoy themselves. RCCL has identified its buyer’s needs by offering a luxury product with all inclusive services in that effort to get away. Buyers have the ability to force competitors to lower prices. Many vacationers will choose the package that is less expensive, causing others to lower their prices as well. This can affect the profits for the company. For a lot of people the television show "The Love Boat", which was filmed on a 2008-02-10T20:24:18-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Royal-Carribean--33517.aspx Abstract Previous studies have suggested that the eggs were associated with high cholesterol levels, which contributed to heart disease, although this now has been proven to be false. The communication of the cholesterol information is one major reason for the continuing decline in US per capita egg consumption; from 402 in 1945 to 259 in 2003. Results show that cholesterol information is a deterrent in decisions about consumers’ decisions to consume eggs and how much to consume, however, there are also significant demographic variables including income, region, age, education, race/ethnicity, occupation, and education. So, what can we do to make consumers aware of the facts and improve the egg consumption? History and Relevant Facts From 1945 to 1997 the per capita egg consumption dropped from 402 to 236, which is almost half of the consumption. The declining egg consumption was due to many variables such as changes in lifestyle (i.e. less time to prepare breakfast) and eating patterns that has caused a decrease in the “traditional” cooked breakfast for families. (Best, Hawkins, & Mothersbaugh, 2007) Also, there seems to be an increasing trend for consumers to prefer convenience (i.e. fast foods and/or microwavable foods), eggs were simply not the answer to this type of consumers’ food demand. Eggs are not readily microwavable, and they tend to be excluded from microwavable frozen meals, although this market is slowing increasing. Another factor was women working outside of the home (dual-income households) have made it hard for the whole family to sit down together and share a cooked breakfast; cereal and bagels were much faster and more convenient to consumers. Once it was recognized that cereal could cater to these duel income households launched a massive advertising of cereal companies shifted consumers away from eggs for breakfast (with having a budget five times that of the American Egg Board). Additionally, there is also the fact that eggs are not traditionally eaten at any other meal; usually only breakfast. The increasing number of fast food restaurants and the increasing demand for convenient microwavable products also added to the decline in egg consumption. Probably the most significant reason that consumers stopped eating eggs was the perception that cholesterol intake was associated with eggs, this was publicized that eggs contained cholesterol which, in turn, can cause heart disease; this pushed consumers away from eating eggs, especially since 2008-02-10T20:20:27-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Increasing-Egg-Consumption--33516.aspx HISTORY Mc Donald’s is one of the most well known franchisers of fast food restaurants. The first Mc Donald’s restaurant was opened in California by two brothers Dick and Mack Mc Donald’s. The main activity now of this fast food restaurants is the leading global food service retailer with more than 35,000 local restaurants, serving nearly 70 million people in more than 121 countries, including Greece, each day. Mc Donald’s in Greece opened its first restaurant in 1991 at the Centre of Sintagma Square in Athens. The franchises were started in 1954, by Raymond Albert Kroc, a salesman. At the first years of the company,Ray Kroc made very little investments in order to increase the capital of the company for the new future investments. He was more concentrated in making a lot of profits and less investment but today this bussiness has enlarged very much. Today Mc Donald’s is one of the world’s most well known and valuable brands and holds a leading share in the globally branded quick eating- out. Some of favorite foods that Mc Donald’s serves are such as Big Mac, Egg Mc Muffin, Chicken Mc Nuggets, Happy Meal, Hamburgers and Cheeseburgers. Also here in Greece are served some special food for the Greek customers such as Mediterranean Salad, Greek Chicken etc. In order to adapt the Greek culture. Map of Mc Donald’s restaurants PLANNING Planning is crucial for a company since it helps the company to identify or select the goals of the company and the course of action that are needed. Administrative in Greece has set different short and long-term goals and objectives. The goal is not “growth for growth’s sake” but systematic and balanced expansion of McDonald’s based upon the actual requirements of the Greek consumer. So some of the short- term objectives are: *; To reasonably price the excellent food and to serve fresh and hot, quickly and precisely in a clean friendly environment. *; A new eating experience for consumers and their families *; A rise of the total quantity of food served (it increase their income) *; Carefully selected locations upgraded and renovated on a continual basis providing convenience and safety in all restaurants. Some of the long-terms objectives are: *; To increase the number of local suppliers based however upon the their comparative advantages. *; To reduce the amount 2008-01-26T14:12:09-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Mc-Donald’s-History-PEST-analysis-33505.aspx Kleemann Hellas was founded in 1983 based on the know-how and license of the German Kleemann Hubtechnik GMBH. The head office of the company is in the industrial area of Kilkis. There are also offices and show rooms in Athens and Thessaloniki as well. Kleemann’s activities concern both the manufacturing and trading of Complete Lift Systems. It is enlisted among the largest companies of this field in the European and international market (more than 4000 systems or 4% of the world lift market) In Greece, the company holds a leading position in the constantly developing lift market with a 72,5% market share in the installed units and 40,3% in value. Sales outside Greece are equal to 20% in 2001 and 37% in 2002 of the total turnover of the company. They are carried out to over than 25 countries, with England, Germany, Belgium, Ireland, Yugoslavia, Turkey and Cyprus to be its main markets. The Kleemann group includes three subsidiaries • KLEFER, a manufacturing company of automatic lift doors, with head offices at the industrial are of Kilkis • KLEEMANN ASANSOR, a trading lift company actively involved in Turkey’s market • LEISTRITZ HYDRAULIK GMBH, a German lift manufacturing company The project will focus in one of the Kleemann’s product. “Complete lift system” or more specifically “complete passenger lift”, which it will include everything that our lift functions properly. THE PRODUCT Apollo Traction MRL This is one of the most innovative and special product that Kleemann has recently introduced for the European market. The Apollo Traction MRL is a machine room-less lift with a special patented drive mechanism in ant seismic elevator, actually being the first solution of this kind in competitive European market. This perfect solution has already been patented by the Dutch group lift institute, one of the biggest certification agencies in Europe for special and innovative lift. Besides that Apollo is space saving and flexible for the smallest shafts. Apollo is the serious alternative which suits all. Apollo Traction MRL was developed in cooperation with Alpha Getriebe of Geramny, on of the leading European companies in its field. Apollo uses the Alpha planetary gear technology, but what is important to mention here is the fact that what makes this product special it was the Kleemann its own idea. Covering 360 kg and very soon 1000 kg rated load, Apollo is a state of-the-art solution for machine room-less lifts in Europe. The Apollo Concept Drive mechanism: • State-of-the art drive mechanism (only 130 kg weight). Easy to mount 2008-01-26T00:35:15-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Kleemann-Hellas-Promotion-and-Price-PEST-Analysis-33504.aspx Introduction In our society corporate advertising or more accurately labelled, corporate propaganda is delivered through advertising and public relations. Advertising companies are constantly targeting specific audiences and taking advantage of uninformed consumers. Advertising agencies definitely have an idea of the audience who buys their product when they make up their ads. Sometimes these targeted audiences are misled into buying products based upon strategies advertising agencies use to lure customers in Advertising, which is defined as any openly sponsored offering of goods, services or ideas through any medium of communication, has gone through dramatic changes over time. Advertising used to be informational and essentially told you that a product existed, where it could be found, and what it was used for. Today, advertising talks about the product’s status and attributes that have little to do with whether the product functions for its intended purpose. Advertisers now see advertising as a way to generate interest in products, and with the ever-growing Internet, it has grown to a global industry Research about Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy The study of consumers helps firms and organizations improve their marketing strategies by understanding issues such as how • The psychology of how consumers think, feel, reason, and select between different alternatives (e.g., brands, products); • The psychology of how the consumer is influenced by his or her environment (e.g., culture, family, signs, media); • The behaviour of consumers while shopping or making other marketing decisions; • Limitations in consumer knowledge or information processing abilities influence decisions and marketing outcome; • How consumer motivation and decision strategies differ between products that differ in their level of importance or interest that they entail for the consumer; and • How marketers can adapt and improve their marketing campaigns and marketing strategies to more effectively reach the consumer. Understanding these issues helps us adapt our strategies by taking the consumer into consideration. For example, by understanding that a number of different messages compete for our potential customers’ attention, we learn that to be effective, advertisements must usually be repeated extensively. We also learn that consumers will sometimes be persuaded more by logical arguments, but at other times will be persuaded more by emotional or symbolic appeals. By understanding the consumer, we will be able to make a more informed decision as to which strategy to employ. This is what we will embrace as a technique in order to certify that the product we have selected would be influential to 2008-01-26T00:32:56-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Victorinox-a-Marketing-plan-33503.aspx Introduction Adidas is a company that manufactures shoes and sport apparel. The founder is Adolf Dassler who is German. The name created by combination of the name and surname Adi Dassler, who started producing shoes in 1920s with the help of his brother Rudolf Dassler. That make costumer, to recognize Adidas is three parallel stripes of the same color. Slogan: “IMPOSSIBLE IS NOTHING” 1. History 1949-2005 Due to the death of Adolf’s son (Horst Dassler), the Company was bought in 1990 by Bernard Tapie. Back then Tapie was specialist of rescuing bankrupt companies. Next step was to change the place of production to Asia and make a promotion campaign by using a famous person as Madonna (famous singer). In 1992 economical problems lead Tapi to sell Adidas to Lyonnais bank. Lyonnais sold Adidas to Robert Louis-Dreyfus who was also the president of the Olympique de Marseille football team. In 1997, Adidas AG acquired the Salomon Group, and its corporate name was changed to Adidas-Salomon AG. Seven years later, top English fashion designer Stella McCartney launched a joint-venture line with Adidas. This line was a sports performance collection for women called "Adidas by Stella McCartney". After 2 years, Adidas introduced the Adidas 1, the first ever production shoe to utilize a microprocessor. In August 2005, Adidas bought rival Reebok. At the same time sales had been closer to those of Nike in North America. The acquisition of Reebok would also allow Adidas to compete with Nike worldwide as the number two athletic shoemaker in the world. Three months later Adidas released a new version of the Adidas 1, make it better, stronger and faster. On April 11 2006, Adidas announced an 11-year deal to become the official NBA apparel provider. 2. Products Adidas manufactures anything related to sport, like shoes, clothes, watches, balls, Sunglasses, Protective Equipment, etc. You can purchase Adidas almost anywhere. Except original stores that placed in every city in every country; you can find them also in super market as perfume shower gel etc, or in jewel store as watches. The pricing for per of shoe fluctuate 60 to 250 Euros, High price for most people; justifiably for High quality materials that company use. • PLANING Mission Statement “Our mission is to become the best sports brand in the world. To that end, we will never equate quantity with quality. Our founder Adi Dassler was passionate about sports. For Adi, the 2008-01-26T00:30:00-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Addidas-PEST-and-SWOT-Analysis-33502.aspx GDP OPINION PAPER Once upon a time, in a land far, far away, a small island existed. This island was the best place in the world to live in, it was in the Caribbean Sea, great tropical weather, sandy beaches, but most importantly a GDP of two Trillion US dollars. Who can argue that this island is a bad place to live on, who can argue against statistics? Statistically each person was suppose to have two trillion dollars, but realistically there were only two people on the island, one being the richest man in the world, the other was his broke slave. Statistically it was by far the best place to live in but realistically there was 50% unemployment rate, 50% mortal disease rate, etc. Who can now say that GDP is an accurate indicator of a nation’s well being, how can u compare an economically active country with its GDP to an island with one rich person and his slave? The above example is an extreme case but it is an indicator of just one of the issues that GDP poses when it is used to measure a countries’ well being. When the GDP system was invented it was made to measure just the domestic production and nothing more, today it is being used as a means for determining which country is better to live in and I think that this is ludicrous to say the least. There are many things to consider when setting a standard of living or ranking a country, money isn’t the only one and even when it is GDP is not an accurate way of measuring economic growth, on the whole GDP lacks many essential elements, thus making it unfit to measure anything let alone the overall ranking of a country in the world and economic growth. On some level GDP does measure economic growth, but what else is associated with economic growth, is economic growth necessarily good or can it sometimes be bad, what does GDP keep a blind eye on? In today’s society because of globalization and the development of international trade, countries tend to compare themselves on a global scale using GDP measurements. Ideally whoever has more economic growth and GDP is the better place to be a citizen of (World Bank Statistics, 2004) , but where one country could be growing more financially, another one may have better standards of 2008-01-09T02:02:23-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Is-GDP-a-valid-measure-of-economic-prosperity-33493.aspx ________________________________________ The class demonstrates four easy to use management techniques: One Minute Goal Setting, One Minute Praising, One Minute Reprimands and the One Minute Apology. One Minute Goal Setting involves setting clear performance standards and expectations. Most managers use NIHYSOB or "Now I have you - you SOB" These managers don't tell people what they expect of them; they just leave them alone and then "zap" them when they don't perform at the desired level. In One Minute Goal Setting the manager and employee agree on goals or key areas of responsibilities so that the employee knows what they will be accountable for and what performance is expected. The manager and employee agree that the manager will let the employee know when they are performing well and when they are not. After One Minute Goal setting the manager stays in close contact with the employee and gives them a One Minute Praising when they do something right. The most important thing in training someone is to catch them doing something right-in the beginning it may be approximately right and gradually move them towards the desired behaviors. Praise employees for what they do right and encourage them to repeat the behavior. That's why it's important to observe new people in the beginning or when starting a new project. The praise should come immediately after you see them do something right and not just at performance review times. If the employee is not performing as agreed on in the One Minute Goal Setting then the manger may use One Minute Reprimands. The authors state that most managers are "gunnysack discipliners." That is, they store up observations of poor performance and then at performance review time or when they are angry they "open the sack." They tell people all the things they've done wrong for the last weeks or months. The idea behind One Minute Reprimands is that the manager should intervene early and deal with the problem at the time that it happens and not wait till the performance review time. Reprimands should be fair and should focus on behavior and not on the worth of the person. The reprimand should always be followed by a praising -- telling the person what they are doing right and how much they are valued. Destined to join Ken Blanchard’s other groundbreaking classics, The One Minute Apology offers business people–and just about anyone–a cogent and 2007-12-03T03:49:12-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Management-Techniques-33454.aspx Interest rate essay Causes of interest rates can be explained as -deferred consumption. When money is loaned the lender delays spending the money on consumption goods. Since according to time preference theory people prefer goods now to goods later, in a free market there will be a positive interest rate. Inflationary expectations. Most economies generally exhibit inflation, meaning a given amount of money buys fewer goods in the future than it will now. The borrower needs to compensate the lender for this. Alternative investments. The lender has a choice between using his money in different investments. If he chooses one, he forgoes the returns from all the others. Different investments effectively compete for funds. Risks of investment. There is always a risk that the borrower will default on the loan. This means that a lender generally charges a risk premium to ensure that, across his investments, he is compensated for those that fail. Liquidity preference. People prefer to have their resources available in a form that can immediately be exchanged, rather than a form that takes time or money to realize. Taxes. Because some of the gains from interest may be subject to taxes, the lender may insist on a higher rate to make up for this loss. The nominal interest rate is the amount, in money terms, of interest payable. The real interest rate, which measures the purchasing power of interest receipts, is calculated by adjusting the nominal rate charged to take inflation into account. There is a market for investments which ultimately includes the money market, bond market, and stock market and currency market as well as retail financial institutions. The CAPM returns the asset-appropriate required return or discount rate - i.e. the rate at which future cash flows produced by the asset should be discounted given that asset's relative riskiness. Betas exceeding one signify more than average "riskiness"; betas below one indicate lower than average. Thus a more risky stock will have a higher beta and will be discounted at a higher rate; less sensitive stocks will have lower betas and be discounted at a lower rate. The CAPM is consistent with intuition - investors (should) require a higher return for holding a more risky asset. Since beta reflects asset-specific sensitivity to non-diversifiable, i.e. market risk, the market as a whole, by definition, has a beta of one. 2007-12-03T03:44:39-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cause-and-Effects-on-Interest-Rates-33453.aspx As we compare regions of the world in terms of their relative economic and financial power, we can definitely see some fundamental differences in the financial systems between countries that are more developed and those that are less developed. Digging deeper, we observe that countries with more advanced and efficient financial markets have three key features that make them successful. First, a successful system must be highly diversified in its ability to cater to the needs of increasingly complex and sophisticated economies. Secondly, the system must be able to provide financial services efficiently. Finally, the system must be robust enough to withstand a variety of shocks in a rapidly changing globalized economy. Diversification allows financial markets to allocate assets and bear risks more efficiently. A broadly based financial system is likely to be more stable in times of economic downtown. We can see this during the 1997 financial crisis in Asia, where many of the countries that were not widely spread, collapsed because of their inability to manage risk. A highly diversified system involves having a wide portfolio of high-quality financial assets that cater to needs of different agents, such as equity securities, corporate-debt securities, government debt securities and bank deposits. We can see that lesser developed countries in Asia have a significantly higher proportion of bank deposits, where as more developed systems like the US and Europe are relatively spread apart evenly across the four asset groups. A successful financial system must also be innately efficient to provide services that are of good quality, good speeds, and are competitive globally. This in turn will ensure accurate and timely information flow, responsible corporate governance and appropriate risk management. In order to achieve all of this, the financial system must be supported by an effective legal and regulatory framework as well as good accounting and auditing standards that are well-implemented and enforced. In addition, the financial system must have an efficient banking sector that caters to a wider set of consumer needs. In many lower developed countries, a large amount of households and businesses do not yet have bank accounts, and this represents a lack of trust and knowledge of the financial services industry by the general public. In order to improve this as well as improve the efficiencies of other financial assets, the financial system must reside in a place where there is a strong economy, there must also be transparent 2007-11-20T07:30:47-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/What-Features-Should-an-Ideal-Financial-System-have-33431.aspx Executive Summary Vortex will be the premier, high-energy, themed dance and nightclub in Northern Tasmania. Our goal is to remain a step ahead of our competition through excellent service provision. We expect our guests to have more fun while they are at Vortex than any other time of the day. We will provide more video and electronic technology per square metre than anyone else in the region. A simple, yet unique, themed menu and atmosphere will create a sense of 'belonging' for locals and tourists alike. Our operating philosophy is "happy enthusiastic employees create happy enthusiastic guests." This is reflected in everything that we do at Vortex. The main objectives of the development of this new venue are as follows. We want to launch the venue with a highly publicized grand opening event in the summer of 2008. We believe that this will make the business much more successful, as many more people will know of its existence. We feel it is important to maintain tight control of costs, operations, and cash flow through careful management. We also believe that we need to maintain a 33% profit on food and to maintain a 25% profit on beverages. This means that we will make good profits on both our food and beverage sales, as these will be two of our major revenue producers. We feel that our over all goal is to exceed $3 million in annual sales by the third year of plan implementation. The keys to success in achieving our goals are as follows. We need to provide exceptional service that leaves an impression on each an every customer. We believe that this will be one of the defining factors in our success. People will want to come to our nightclub over others because we have the best and friendliest staff. We need to deliver consistent entertainment atmosphere and quality product every time. We must manage our internal finances and cash flow to enable upward capital growth and maintain strict control of all costs, at all times, without exception. This will enable us to make money, and utilize it in the best possible ways, so that our business will be successful. Company Summary The key elements of Vortex's concept are as follows: 1. Entertainment and dance based themes -- The Company will focus on themes that have mass appeal. 2. Distinctive design features -- Vortex will be characterized by the elaborate dance club situated in a 2007-11-11T06:30:34-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Nightclub-Business-Plan--33407.aspx 1. In order to consider how the conversion process in the company would work, let recall the main activity of the company. The company is dealing with providing cars for long and short-term lease. 2007-11-08T08:40:14-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Space-Wheel-33399.aspx The 1880 Republican National Convention convened from June 2 to June 8, 1880, at the Interstate Exposition Building in Chicago, Illinois, United States,[1] and nominated James A. Garfield and Chester A. Arthur as the official candidates of the Republican Party of the United States for President and Vice President, respectively, in the 1880 presidential election. Of the 14 people nominated for the Republican nomination, the three strongest candidates leading up to the convention were Ulysses S. Grant, James G. Blaine, and John Sherman. Grant twice had served as the President of the United States, and was seeking an unprecedented third term in office. He was backed by the Stalwart faction of the Republican Party, which supported political machines and patronage. Blaine was a senator and former representative from Maine who was backed by the Half-Breed faction of the Republican Party.[2] Sherman, the brother of Civil War General William Tecumseh Sherman, was the then Secretary of the Treasury under President Rutherford B. Hayes. He was also a former senator from Ohio and was backed by a delegation that did not support the Stalwarts or Half-Breeds.[2] On the first ballot, Sherman received 93 votes, while Grant and Blaine had 304 and 285, respectively. None of the candidates were close to victory, and the balloting continued to determine a winner. Many more ballots were taken, but no candidate prevailed. After the thirty-fifth ballot, Blaine and Sherman switched their support to the new "dark horse" candidate, James Garfield. On the next ballot, Garfield won the nomination by receiving 399 votes, 93 higher than Grant's total.[3] Garfield's Ohio delegation chose Chester A. Arthur, a Stalwart, as Garfield's vice-presidential running mate. Arthur won the nomination by capturing 468 votes, and the longest-ever Republican National Convention was subsequently adjourned. The Garfield-Arthur Republican ticket later defeated Democrats Winfield Scott Hancock and William Hayden English in the close 1880 presidential election.[4] Contents [hide] 1 Background 1.1 Ulysses S. Grant 1.2 James G. Blaine 1.3 John Sherman 1.4 James Garfield 2 Pre-convention politics 3 The convention 3.1 Presenting the nominees 3.2 Balloting 4 Aftermath 5 See also 6 References [edit] Background As President of the United States, Rutherford B. Hayes had caused heated tensions within the Republican Party. Hayes had moved away from party patronage by offering government jobs to Southern Democrats instead of Northern Republicans.[5] His actions drew heavy criticism from those inside his party, such as Roscoe Conkling of New York and 2007-11-04T19:53:34-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Republican-National-Convention-33387.aspx Objective There are many ways River City Brass Band can acquire funds in order to become more self-sufficient. They can implement numerous marketing strategies, such as, an internship program, changing their name, creating partnerships, etc. Through grants, fundraising, donations, and corporate sponsorships that can increase their revenue by leaps and bounds. There are over 1,000 grant programs offered by all Federal grant making agencies. The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services is managing partner for Grants.gov, an initiative that is having a huge impact on the grant community. Grants.gov allows organizations to electronically find and apply for more than $400 billion in Federal grants. While fundraising often involves the donation of money as an out-right gift, money may also be generated by selling a product of some kind, also known as product fundraising. When goods are donated to an organization rather than cash, this is called an in-kind gift. Girl Scouts are well-known for selling cookies in order to generate funds. It is also common to see on-line impulse sales links to be accompanied by statements that a proportion of proceeds will be directed to a particular charitable foundation. A number of charities and non-profit organizations are increasing using the internet as a means to raise funds; this practice is referred to as online fundraising. Some of the most substantial fundraising efforts in the United States are conducted by colleges and universities. Commonly the fundraising, or 'development,' program makes a distinction between annual fund appeals and major campaigns. Gifts of appreciated property are important components of such efforts because of the tax advantage they confer on the donor encourages larger gifts. Some organized charities have been criticized for the proportion of financial donations which are used for administrative or operational purposes. Donating directly to a charity (rather than through solicitation), or donating to smaller charities, often tends to reduce expenditures. In some places information on charities' expenses is available from government departments or directly from the charity. By implementing these tactics to raise money, RCBB will be able to accomplish more of the ideas in our marketing plan sooner, because they will have more funds in order to ensure these plans come to fruition. Grants Federal Grants What is a federal grant? A federal grant is an award of financial assistance from a Federal agency to a recipient to carry out a public purpose of support or stimulation authorized by a law 2007-10-16T13:05:48-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Grants,-Fundraising,-Donations,-amp-Corporate-Sponsorships-33352.aspx Glass Ceilings Unfortunately, in 2007, women and minorities are still confronted with the idea of the “glass ceiling” or “glass cliff” in corporate America. The term glass ceiling refers to situations where the upward advancement of an individual in the workplace is limited; this is usually based on gender or race . This type of drawback is not immediately apparent and is an unwritten and unofficial “policy.” It is apparent that this type of discriminatory management is in full swing at many companies. For example, a study commissioned by the Federal Glass Ceiling Commission found that 97% of the senior managers of the Fortune 1000 and Fortune 500 are white, and 95-97% are male. This is happening while 57% of the workforce is an ethnic minority, female, or both. Statistics Women on the Board of Directors* • Women hold 11.1% of board member positions in the Fortune 500 companies. 86% of Fortune 500 companies have at least one or more women directors; 14% have no women on their boards. • 188 companies in the Fortune 500 have 2 or more women directors; 34 companies have three or more women directors. • Of Fortune 100 companies, 97% have at least 1 woman on their boards. • Women represent 1.1% of inside directors on the boards of Fortune 500 companies. Out of 1,173 women, only 13 women are inside directors. Women Executives* • 11.2% of corporate officers are women • 75% of Fortune 500 companies have at least 1 women officer • Over half of Fortune 500 companies have more than 1 female corporate officer. • 6% of corporate officers holding line jobs are women, while 94% are men • Savings institutions are the industry with the most women at the top—32% of corporate officers are women. Other top industries include: diversified financials (30%), publishing/printing (26%), and transportation equipment (24%). • 2 industry groups have no women corporate officers: trucking and textiles; others with low representation include electronics, semiconductors (2%), and waste management (3%) • Women make up 2.7% of top earners – the 5 most highly paid officers at Fortune 500 companies, compared to men who make up 97.3% of top earners Women of Color in Corporate Management* • Women of color are much more likely than white women to cite lack of a mentor/sponsor as a barrier to advancement (47% vs. 29%) • 50% of women of color attribute their career success to "access to high-visibility assignments." 2007-10-16T13:03:05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business,-Management,-Glass-Ceiling-33351.aspx English 101 Magazine Ads Analysis September 2007 Magazine advertisements contain various symbolic messages in an attempt to reach their target audience. In this analysis, I will analyze two different full page ads in US News and World Report. I will be using Jib Fowles’ Advertising’s Fifteen Basic Appeals to analyze symbolic construction and basic emotional appeals. Fowles states the goal of advertisers is to tug at our psychological shirtsleeves. Advertisers bombard us with pleasing images to draw us in and get us to pay attention to their ads. Let’s take a deeper look at these two ads and what they are conveying to consumers. The first advertisement is an ad for Philips Brand Computed Tomography scanner, or CT scanner for short. The ad depicts a young boy standing on the beach smiling and holding an umbrella to shade him from the sun. This adorable young boy has been specially selected to stimulate our desires. US News and World Report is a general interest magazine appealing to a broad spectrum of audiences. The ads primary symbol is the young boy. This image calls upon our need to nurture. The umbrella shading the boy from the sun furthers this need. When we look further and read the text we find out that Philips has improved their CT scanner and lowered the dose of radiation when this machine is used. Appealing again to our need to nurture and protect. In the back ground we have the ocean. Though the least effective symbol it appeals to our need to escape. The need to nurture is often aimed at women. More nurturing by nature it is an effective technique when used properly. Had this ad been seen in a magazine such as Contemporary Diagnostic Radiology, I’d wager the ad would have been geared more towards medical professionals, siting the technical aspects and benefits of the product. Changing the appeal to the need to achieve. Using only the X-ray symbol and text, the ad would still convey its’ meaning to the audience. This ad would still be effective to the target audience. Without knowing what a CT scanner is or why we would need to use one, Philips tells us they care for us and are working to better their products for us the consumers. In turn, this may cause people to look at all Philips products in a positive light and possibly purchase them. The second advertisement 2007-09-25T20:38:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Magazine-Ad-analysis-33334.aspx Boo!! I know that you were daydreaming. Today I am going to be talking about just that daydreaming. There are three important reasons why daydreaming is so good. 1. It relaxes you 2. It keeps you from dieing of boredom and 3. It is known to help you to do more work. Like meditation, daydreaming allows your mind to 2007-08-09T05:12:05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Daydreaming--33310.aspx Financial Report Introduction Financial reports convey information which involve with assisting and analyzing and also interpreting the financial position of an organization. This report will examine three areas of analysis which incorporate profitability, effectiveness of management policies and the financial stability of the business. Profitability Profitability ratios are seen as the businesses ability to earn income within the present financial formation of the business. Net Profit Ratio The net profit ratio designates the ability of the business to generate a return on the owners’ investment. For a business to have a high net profit ratio, this means that their operating revenues are high and that their operating expenses are low. If a business has a low net profit ratio, complications arise as it means that they may have higher expenses and that their selling margin is low. Benchmarks for net profit for the three year period were as follows; for 2007 it was 8.5%, for 2006 it was 9.00% and for 2005 this was 8.00%. These benchmarks, when compared to that of Highway Industries are lower which means that Highway Industries is performing at a consistent level. Since 2005, the net profit ratio has risen from 8.44% to 11.88% in 2006. Although it was still above the industry average, the net profit ratio dropped in 2007 by 1.85% to 10.03%. Whilst the business may have dropped in percentage from 2006 to 2007, it rose 1.59% since 2005. This positive net profit indicates that the business has high revenues and low expenses. Rate of Return on Owners Equity Ratio Rate of return on owners’ equity ratio specifies the return to the owner on the amount invested in the business. For a business to have a high return on equity ratio means that the business may indicate management efficiency. For the business to have a low ratio, could mean that their management is inefficient and that it could be beneficial for them to invest elsewhere. The rate of return on owners’ equity ratio is significant for the owner it will be evaluated with other returns on different types of investments to verify if the business is a worthwhile investment opportunity. Highway Industries is impressively above the industry average, and has maintained this over the three year period. As with the net profit, this figure has decreased since 2006, but is still increasingly higher than the set benchmark which is set at 12.00% for 2005, 11.00% for 2006 and 13.00% for 2007-08-05T09:43:40-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-Report-33308.aspx TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 3 PERSONAL BUDGET 3 CREDIT CARD COMPARISON 3 VIRGIN CREDIT CARD 4 MONTHLY EXPENSES 4 TRADE IN 5 TOYOTA COROLLA 5 MAZDA 6 PURCHASE 5 INVESTMENTS 5 SUPERANNUATION 5 OVERSEAS TRIP – 10 YEARS 6 YEPPOON HOME 6 BEENLEIGH HOME 6 BIBLIOGRAPHY 8 INTERNET 8 APPENDIX 10 INTRODUCTION PERSONAL BUDGET CREDIT CARD COMPARISON Mr. Bernard Fanning has many options regarding credit card selections and which credit card would be best for his personal needs. The credit cards that were researched to help Mr. Fanning find the right credit card for him included Commonwealth Bank credit cards, Suncorp Metway credit cards, American Express credit cards and Virgin credit cards. After researching the different types of credit cards that these banks offered, it came down to their standard credit cards which were best suited for Mr. Fanning. Standard credit cards were chosen as Mr. Fanning would only be using his credit card from time to time. Standard credit cards that were offered from the banks mentioned above were all involved with a cheap interest rate deal and all with a 55 day interest free period. Other credit cards that were put on offer by the different banks included platinum and gold credit cards. These cards would not be as virtuous as standard credit cards as they assign higher interest rates. The comparison table below demonstrates the difference between all four of the banks standard credit cards including interest rate, annual fee, and balance transfer. The comparison graph below indicates the difference between interest rates among the four standard credit cards. VIRGIN CREDIT CARD Although all four of the credit cards had reasonably the same interest rates and interest free days, the card that would be ideal for Mr. Fanning is the Virgin credit card which offers him a 0% interest rate for the first six months. Unlike the other researched credit cards, Virgin has no annual fee which would save him on average $50 per year. Mr. Fanning is assured a low ongoing interest rate which at present is 12.99% p.a. Virgin credit cards also offer a low balance transfer which starts of for the first six months as 0%. MONTHLY EXPENSES Monthly expenses that Mr. Fanning is advised to place onto his virgin credit card include his over the phone payments. Over the phone payments include electricity bills and electricity bills. Mr. Fanning may also include other necessities of interest which may include his entertainment costs. Mr. Fanning’s credit card limit is set at $1000 per month. This is due to the fact that Mr. Fanning 2007-08-01T07:51:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Personal-Financing--33307.aspx Violent Affects of Television on Children and Teenagers What has our society come to these days? Violence is present everywhere around us; in the streets, school, and even at home. Violence can now be seen in many people’s living rooms while they are sitting down watching television. Even if one appears to be a pacifist, violence will find its way into our homes through the television. Violence on television proves to be a root of violence in the whole culturally developed countries, but also in Macedonia. There are many examples and proven research that shows how violence viewed on television uproots all over our country. Children and teenagers seem to be the most effected by violence on television. Some children that see violence on television are pulled into its harmful rules of problem solving. Many things should be done to change children’s view on television and how much violence should be on the television. Scientists have tried to explain why children are so entertained by a big glowing box and the action that takes place within it. Research shows that television is a big source of violence for children. This research shows us that violence appeals to every audience, including children. The effects have been seen in a number of cases. Children today act and dress older than they are. The fact remains that they still are children. The children that watch Barney and sing along and have a great time learn to love one another. The children who watch Power Rangers begin to kick each other and fight because that is what they are seeing on television. We should sit down and explain to our kids that the Power Rangers are trained actors and actresses. They are actually not hitting and kicking each other. Watching violence makes children act violently. As long as children see it being done, they are going to do it also. Children imitate everything they see. Some teenagers go to violent movies and listen to heavy metal and rap music. Some teens argue that they have not killed anyone. These teens are missing the point. Television teaches teens to handle their problems in the wrong way. Some ways include arguing, hitting, and initiating other violent behavior-sometimes, even sometimes killing. What we should be concerened about is also the disconnection from the parents and the lack of respect for authority. Parents need to take charge and know 2007-07-08T10:45:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Violent-Affects-of-Television-on-Children-and-Teenagers-33272.aspx Decision making can be simply put as choosing the best option from two or more alternatives. It is, however, much more complicated than this, as Davidson et al. (2006, p. 116) states that making decisions consists of ‘Recognising and defining the nature of a decision situation, identifying alternatives, choosing the ‘best’ alternative and putting it into practice’. This essay will discuss two types of decision making theories, Rational decision making and behavioural decision making. Managers are posed with a question. They need to recognise and give a definition of the situation and what the outcome is that they wish. The rational decision making theory anticipates that all managers will make the best decision that will most benefit the organisation and the organisational goals. The behavioural model, however, proclaims that managers are affected by their own intuition and ethics that will ultimately alter their perspective of the ‘best’ alternative. They also perceive risk from their own viewpoint which is shaped from their own experiences and culture, therefore there should be an emphasis on objective and quantifiable information (Adler 1999). Managers must also evaluate the level of risk and determine how much they are willing to ‘gamble’, in addition to comparing the level of risk associated between each alternative (Kennedy 2005). Once a manager has determined what the desired outcome is, they then identify and evaluate the available alternatives and make a rational and logical decision. Again, the behavioural aspect of decision making poses the question of whether the information that the manager is working with is accurate or the level of relevance it has towards the whole picture, this is echoed by (Fox & Clemen 2005) ‘Human limitations of memory and information processing capacity often lead to subjective probabilities’. The ‘best’ alternative is then selected. Tradeoffs have been evaluated and the most profitable choice that concerns all stakeholders is taken. Rational decision making managers will have made a decision based on only the information provided to them, however a behaviourist will note that a managers intuition (sub-conscious gut feeling) and the escalation of commitment (sticking to a choice even when it isn’t the best) have had an impact on their decision. In conclusion, the major differences between the behavioural aspects and the rational perspective of decision making as Davidson et al. (2006, p. 125) puts adequately is that mangers should be using accurate information, but 2007-05-09T00:26:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Decision-Making-33192.aspx Impact Of Restructuration On Nurses Working Conditions The world health care sector, as the industrialized organizations, has undergone dramatic restructuring and downsizing during the past decades, which incurred serious changes of conditions in which nurses deliver healthcare. As human resources management strategies seemed to have had a positive effect on the similar problems beard by other industries, it appears that the public healthcare sector as failed to endeavor in the same way and is still struggling to design and implement effective schemes. This issue is becoming more and more urgent. Indeed, as governments focus on improving quality and cost effectiveness of patient care, the public healthcare sector has fallen into a vicious circle caused by: "overall workforce shortage, increasingly high and complex workloads, difficult working conditions, a feeling of continuous change and a feeling that the profession is less valued."(Review Body 1999; NHS, 1999, DoH, 1998b; 1999). This paper will resume the major impacts restructuring brought out on nurses working conditions, and thus on quality of care. We will then look at the solutions to take up in order to maintain and improve quality of service. There are two degrees of consequences resulting from the restructuring of hospitals, one leading to the other. As Reeves (1997) says, nursing personnel consist of the largest workforce and the most costly of the NHS, which explains why this group has been most affected by downsizing and reduction of costs leading to a first degree of staff-shortage and mistrust towards the system. This engendered many other problems thrusting the NHS in a vicious circle. Indeed, the staffing shortage increased the workload of nurses and the hiring of unlicensed assistive personnel. This demanded that nurses have a wider range of skills such as supervising the workers and multiplied the amount of paper work. As a result, nurses were faced with heavier responsibilities. In addition, as hospitals tried to increase workforce flexibility, nurses are not as specialized as they were and, thus, are more and more rotated to other unfamiliar areas. Moreover, nurses have less and less time to take care of their patient, which, according to the study led by McNeely (1996), leaves nurses with a feeling of guilt and anxiety having the impression that "they have let their patients down". The changes mentioned above have been proved by the Corey-Lisle et al. (1999) study to be factors of lower job satisfaction 2007-04-25T21:18:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Impact-Of-Restructuration-On-Nurses-Working-Conditions-33164.aspx The Changing Role Of Accountants in the 21st Century A number of reports by academicians and practitioners all over the world have called significant change in the accounting methods and research and their relevance in the 21st century. Many believe that the accounting model is outdated with little relevance to the changes taken place in the wider world. Both the academicians and practitioners agree that if accounting is to serve a useful role in the changing environment, accounting education and accounting research should become more broader, dynamic and not constraint by a single approach. Despite these facts, the academicians and practitioners both stated that the accounting methods taught and practiced have changed significantly. The history of accounts does not begin from the colonial era of the British Empire neither does it begin in the fourteenth century Italy, accounts came from the Mesopotamian region in the 3500 B.C. Five thousand years before the appearance of double-entry, the Assyrian, Chaldaean-Babylonian and Summerain civilizations were flourishing in the Mesopotamian Valley, producing some of the oldest known records of commerce (ACAUS, 1999). As business prospered and industries developed, cities of Babylon and Ninerah became the center for commerce and the language of business and politics. Mesopotamia had more than one bank with a standard measurement in gold and silver. And in some transactions allowing some credit. The accountants in the Mesopotamian times had similar but more extensive duties than the accountants of today. Apart from writing up transactions, he ensured that the agreement complied with detailed code requirements for commercial transactions (ACAUS, 1999). The scribes would record the transaction on specially prepared clay not because clay was available in surplus but because paper also known as papyrus was very expensive and scarce. Between the years 2000 –256 B.C. ancient Egypt, China, Greece and Rome followed a similar accounting methods compared to the Mesopotamian. The use of paper was more than clay tablets as detailed records were made easily on paper. In these early ages, accountants had to be honest and accurate, because irregularities disclosed by audits were punishable by fines, mutilation or even death. Household expenses played an important role in ancient Rome as citizens were required to submit regular statements of assets and liabilities, used in the basis of taxation, and were recorded in an adversary or daybook and monthly posting to a cashbook known as codex accepti et expensi. 2007-04-25T21:02:38-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Changing-Role-Of-Accountants-in-the-21st-Century-33157.aspx Strategy To Reduce Wastage In A Garment Export House “To minimise the loss incurred in a Garment export house due to the wastage and surplus production pieces. Executive Summary: Ready made garments, made of cotton and other natural fibers ,constitutes a major portion of the total Indian Exports. In fact , garments manufactured in India are in good demand in Europe and other developed nations of the world. This is an Organization based project where I have tried to identify the major problem areas in a readymade garments Export house and suggest the organization appropriate methods and means to find a suitable solution to these problems in order to minimize their loss and gain maximum Cost benefit. The aim of this project is to reduce the Fabric and Material wastages along with the loss incurred by the Company due to the surplus production made to complete the total number of pieces in the ‘Export – order’, in case there is some major defect in the final lot of the finished garment, which has to be replaced with the extra pieces produced to meet such contingencies. The Company , Ms. Front Page Exports is engaged in exporting readymade garments to Europe. It has an annual turnover of around Rs.30 million .The Company has its in-house facilities for fabric Cutting, Dyeing, Washing & Pressing and other finishing activities. Fabrication or stitching of the Garments is done outside the Company at various fabrication units , where the garments are stitched at Piece-meal basis. However, minor alterations are made at the export house either by the fabricator’s men or by the tailors hired by the company for Sampling and other in-house stitching jobs. Declaration : This project is wholly my own work except where other sources have been given specific credit. The Proposal for the Project : The main aim is : To minimize the loss in a garment export house by implementing the “optimal utilization of the Wastage and profitable disposal of the surplus production policy”, whereby - 1. Wastage in the form of small usable fabric cuttings can be identified and optimally utilized. 2. Formulating and suggesting alternate ways to utilize the material wastes and reduce the overheads. 3. Utilize the waste material and surplus production to generate additional revenue for the organization by using it in other profitable businesses. 4. Finding 2007-04-25T21:00:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Strategy-To-Reduce-Wastage-In-A-Garment-Export-House-33156.aspx Export Business Marketing Plans Tradeshows are becoming of more importance in many organizational communications mix. Behind advertising, tradeshows account for one fifth of total marketing communications budget in the US and approximately one-fourth of the budget for European firms (Gopalakrishna, Lilien, Williams & Sequeira, 1995 & Jacobson, 1990). This report will analyze why tradeshows are becoming a more utilized marketing tool and how it contributes to achieving organizational objectives. The analysis will be broken up into two major sections, the first will analyze the strategic significance of trade shows for sustainable competitive advantage and the latter half will explore the guidelines to exhibiting a good trade show. There are two main types of trade shows that organizations can participate in, and these are horizontal and vertical. A horizontal trade show exhibits a wide variety of products. An example of this is the Hamburg Fair, which exhibits everything in consumer and industrial goods. The other is vertical trade show, which is product specific; it may be limited; for example, to medical, computer or electronics. Electronica is an example of a vertical trade show held each year in Munich to display the latest electronics (Kane, 1989). According to the Trade Show Bureau (TSB) (1994), the number of tradeshows exhibited in USA and Canada between 1989 and 1994 grew from 3289 – 4316, the number of attendees rose from 60 – 85 million and the number of companies from 1.0 –1.3 million. The TSB projects a 35% growth in trade show activities for the late nineties to the early 2000’s for the US and Canada and 15% for Asia (Chowdhury, 1998). In 1994, the TSB estimated that over USD 53 billions were spent directly on trade shows and this excluded planning costs and overhead allocations. Kerin & Cron (1987) predicts that most corporate firms will allocate up to 25% or more of their average annual advertising and sales promotion budgets to this promotional activity. With these large expenditures, the question that beckons is “ are trade shows budgets accountable?” Bonoma (1983) viewed tradeshow and promotional budgets as a reactive marketing tool representing an inertia habit, that is, using last year’s activities budgets and updating that budget to reflect this year’s activities. The idea being “Our competitor will be there and our image reputation will be damaged if we 2007-04-25T20:46:29-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Export-Business-Marketing-Plans-33151.aspx Resort Management: Sunday River Ski Resort I. Executive Summary The following report summarizes the effect of current macroeconomic situation in the United States on the ski resort industry in general, the findings of market research of the Sunday River Ski Resort, strategic recommendations for implementation the expansion plan, possible risk factors and a feasibility assessment of the strategic plan conducted by the International Consulting Group. SWOT technique is used to analyze the company. Our team evaluates the strength, weaknesses, opportunities and potential threats to the Sunday River Resort. So, we caught the exact environment which faces Sunday-river in relative to other resorts and could established several ways to fit the Sunday-river’s goal, 1 million visitor to Sunday river. Conducting market analysis, we also recognize the segmentation of the client base and identify the most profitable client segments. The highest attention is given to the middle week skiers with low - intermediate skill level from New Hampshire and Massachusetts. Because of higher income and larger population, these areas will give Sunday-river important opportunity to acquire one million skiing customers. Focusing on the middle week skiers will result in immediate increase in revenue and will allow to postpone any significant investment into additional capacity. The recommended action plan outlines the necessary steps and addresses “the four Ps” Product, Price, Place and Promotion. The recommendations are divided into short-term and long- term steps In short term step, we strongly recommend to use geographic location as competitive factor. Within 3 hours, Massachusetts and New Hampshire residents can reach Sunday-river and enjoy their skiing. In order to draw and boost the number of skiers, we suggest to provide them with Night program, Children service, and free ski-keeping service. These services would give benefit to Sunday-river, acquiring skiers with a little investment. Since these services are required a little investment, they will help Sunday-river increase its customers with no difficult. In long term step, we recommend Sunday-river to alliance with amusement companies and big hotel chains. Sunday-river provides these companies only with lending space and focus on expanding lodging construction and lifts for increased customers. These strategies would change Sunday-river to amusement resort company, and help get stable income for all season with least investment. After all, the transition from small ski company to amusement company will make Sunday-river strengthen its firm competitive position in eastern areas. II. Introduction Despite 2007-04-25T20:38:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Resort-Management-Sunday-River-Ski-Resort-33149.aspx Marketing and Popular Media The article, “Analyzing popular media texts in the classroom,” can be best categorized as a qualitative study because of the fact that it consists of human theory and it is objective in nature. It also can be identified as a textual analysis because it describes and interprets the characteristics of a message. Like the title suggests this report was done in many classrooms within the years of kindergarten through twelfth grade and it was conducted by teachers who practice media literacy. The main point they are trying to convey is that by relating daily assignments in the classroom with the use of popular films, magazines, television programs, and music lyrics, teachers are able to spawn deep conversations and remarkable writing from their students. This report is Renee Hobb’s study of using media text in their classroom. She used the television show “The Simpsons” and compared it with some of the works of Mark Twain. She realized that many of her students had a great interest and extensive background knowledge about “The Simpsons,” and that most of them were able to describe the characters, plot lines and other controversies within the show. Taking advantage of this, she used specific areas to relate the two sources. An example of one area she used was social criticism. In many episodes of “The Simpsons” the same targets of humor are used, which she helped her students to understand and analyze them in each instance. Some of these were corporate greed and power, human stupidity and laziness, and hypocritical behavior of government officials. Next, they looked at Mark Twain’s work and how he used targets also to relay his message. Some of his were women’s rights, the jury system, and lobbying and bribery in Washington. Moreover, the students learned that just as “The Simpsons” might be a questionable text in the classrooms of today; some of Mark Twain’s works were regarded as unsuitable material in the schools of his day. By further comparisons of the two materials, the students were able to relate them and gain an understanding of the literature of Mark Twain, which was the teacher’s goal. Overall, Hobb’s was very successful in building the connection between a popular culture source and an important piece of American literature. From reading this article I have 2007-04-25T19:26:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-and-Popular-Media-33124.aspx Starbucks' Global Strategy De Wit and Meyer (1998) refer to market tendency towards homogeneous variety and tighter international linkages as globalization. The need for global strategy is outlined by the fact that companies are subject to global forces and consumer demands. As a consequence, firms are faced with a challenge of modifying their existent strategies to gain and sustain their competitive advantage in a rapidly changing environment. A well-designed global strategy can help a firm to gain a competitive advantage, that as identified by Sumantra Ghoshal of INSEAD can arise from Efficiency, Strategy, Risk, Learning and Reputation (Appendix1). Therefore, to create a successful global strategy, managers first must understand the nature of global industries and the dynamics of global competition. I would like to proceed with my analyses of the global market place, with examination the young but already well recognized brand world wide – Starbucks. In my research I will explore on changes in the product, operations, and strategies at Starbucks influenced by the changes in the global marketplace. Due to word limitation on the essay, please refer to Appendixes for more detailed information. Starbucks Corporation "There is untapped potential to grow our company internationally," Schultz said. Headquarters: Seattle, Washington www.starbucks.com Ownership: Starbucks is publicly traded -- shares are widely held 150 million shares have been authorized, of which 59.6% are on the market. History: Howard Schultz, 42, is the founder of the Company and has been chairman of the board and chief executive officer since its start in 1987. The Company originated with eleven Seattle stores and less than one hundred employees. Since them the company has grown to a half billion-dollar company serving millions of cups of coffee per week in one thousand stores throughout the country, and in 17 countries internationally. Schultz believes his company will succeed well into the twenty-first century. He states, "One of the things that you can't measure on a balance sheet or on a financial statement is the soul of Starbucks." The Company holds approximately 39 federal trademark registrations in the United States. They have approximately 44 additional applications pending in the U.S. The Company currently owns one patent in the U.S. for its coffee on tap system and has several patent applications pending. Starbucks prides itself on being a "good citizen" locally and in the various coffee producing countries. They make significant contributions to local charities that focus 2007-04-25T19:20:09-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Starbucks-Global-Strategy-33119.aspx Challenges of Information Systems When talking about the vast field of Information Systems there is not just one pressing issue, there are three: Accuracy, Usability, and Time. Without the combination of these three factors a business would go under in the matter of months. The first of these three and probably the most important of these is the accuracy of the information. The information that you provide someone with in order to make vital decisions must be precisely accurate. If one piece of data is incorrect it could mean the difference between life and death, literally. For example, if a doctor receives false information about a patient’s allergies he may give that patient medicine that could eventually kill them. Another recent instance where inaccurate information caused a catastrophe is with Enron. They falsified financial information causing the company to collapse. If a news station were to give a report that was invalid, they would lose their credibility and respect from the people. Accuracy is a must when it comes to information that is provided to make decisions of any kind. Another major issue involving information systems is the information’s usability. If the business uses software to access the information it has to be easy to use and understand for the end-user as well as the executives. The information needs to be easily accessible from the hardware where it is stored. Also, if the information is generated into a report form of some kind, the report must be made so that it can be interpreted effortlessly in order to make precise decisions. The information provided should have value to the decisions at hand. The final of the three most significant challenges of the field of Information Systems is the time factor. As time progresses everything is built bigger and faster and people seem to be always operating at a faster pace, therefore information needs to be received at a faster rate. If a person or business does not get the information in time to make a prompt decision they could lose out on many opportunities. This concept all started when the phone was introduced and people could be connected to each other in an instant, instead of waiting a week for a letter in the mail. Now as the internet has 2007-04-23T04:32:53-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Challenges-of-Information-Systems-33113.aspx Market Analysis For DVD Recorders The consumer market is ready for the Pioneer DVD Recorder. It all started whenever the CD player was introduced. After the CD came the DVD, and then finally the CD burner. This just proves that consumers are interested in the ever-fast growing technology. We live in a society that is moving right along with the technological advances. The market potential for this product is great seeing how society has turned over to recording things on disc rather than video or tape. It is just another great innovation in the technology world that makes our lives easier. Now with the Pioneer DVD Recorder, consumers are able make their lives easier by recording all of their music, movies, and home videos onto a tiny disc(pioneerelectronics). Total Potential Market: In deciding the potential size, I found the number of residents with a television set. There are approximately 100,000,000 households that own at least one television(Lexis-Nexis). I feel that these people are potentially in the market for this product. Next, moving onto location, I have found that everywhere across the U.S. would fall under our potential market. Advanced technology is found throughout America, and this is why the whole U.S. is included in this category. Finally, trends must be determined when deciding your total potential market. Today, electronics and technology is growing faster than ever before. The trend in the U.S. seems to want to keep up with what is advanced in the electronic industry. Target Market: I feel that it would be much more successful to market this product to households that already own a VCR or a DVD player. These are the people that would be much more likely to buy this product because it would benefit them the most. Second, you must narrow the location of where you would market this product. In determining this you want to think of where this product is most widely used. While researching the Lexis-Nexis Statistical Universe, I found that people living in urban areas are much more likely to be interested in buying this product. With that information I would first market this product in cities such as New York and Los Angeles. These are both large cities that are of age when 2007-04-23T04:31:57-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Market-Analysis-For-DVD-Recorders-33112.aspx Benefits of Using Accounting Report Accounting Report is the leading provider of competitive intelligence for accounting firms. It is renowned for its straight reporting and analysis of the news, developments, and trends that have defined the profession for over 20 years. Topics covered include breaking news, in-depth firm profiles, mergers and acquisitions, office closings, auditor changes, key personnel moves, legal and regulatory issues, competitive intelligence, niche practices and product launches, and much more. Here are several comments of what some people say about public accounting report: "Insightful information you don't see anywhere else." Says Sean Egan, Managing Partner, KPMG. "I look forward to every issue." Says Robert Leavy, Partner, Grant Thornton. "Superior job of capturing current events." Says Dennis Hanno, Professor, Department of Accounting, University of Massachusetts. An interesting issued that came across the Wall Street Journal the last month was regarding Internet Financial Accounting Reporting. How can companies improve the usefulness of their financial accounting reporting practices? Many companies are using the power and reach of the Internet to provide more useful information to financial statement readers. Recent surveys indicate that over 80% of large companies have Internet sites, and a large proportion of these companies’ Web sites contain links of their financial statements and other disclosures. The increased popularity of such reporting is not surprising, since the costs of printing and dissemination of paper reports could be reduced with the use of Internet reporting. How does Internet financial accounting reporting improve the overall usefulness of a company’s financial reports? First, dissemination of reports via the Web can allow firms to communicate with more users that is possible with traditional paper reports. In addition, Internet reporting allows users to take advantage of tools such as search engines and hyperlinks to quickly find information about the firm and, sometimes, to download the information for analysis, perhaps in computer spreadsheets. Finally, Internet reporting can help make financial reports more relevant by allowing companies to report expanded disaggregated data and more timely data then is possible through paper-based reporting. For example, some companies voluntarily report weekly sales data and segment operating data on their Web sites. Thus, although Internet financial reporting is gaining in popularity, until issues related to differential access to the Internet and the reliability of information disseminated via the Web are addressed, we will continue to see traditional paper-based reported, states Michael Fox, 2007-04-23T04:25:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Benefits-of-Using-Accounting-Report-33108.aspx Weyerhaeuser Company Profile Summary of Management Strategies: After doing extensive research on Weyerhaeuser Co., I have found that this particular world wide fortune 200 firm follows all the rules that I have learned taking this course by the book. I found that they value employees, and place emphasis on maintaining values and ethics. The company is also very strict about meeting certain production quotas. They offer competitive salaries , and extensive employer paid benefits to employees and their families. Employees of the firm have also formed a union, which also offers banking services exclusively to employees of Weyerhaeuser. The firm also offers a variety of programs such as a wellness program which offers employer paid discounts on exercising facilities. These are few of the many benefits of being employed by Weyerhaeuser Company. Summary of Marketing Strategies: Weyerhaeuser Company one of the world’s largest integrated forest product companies which is based out of Canada has been in business for over 100 years. So they have pretty much made a name for themselves in the industry years ago. Weyerhaeuser offers a 100% customer guarantee that if the customer is not satisfied, Weyerhaeuser will replace the product free of charge. And with the 100% customer satisfaction guarantee that they stand by, who wouldn’t choose Weyerhaeuser for any paper or containerboard need. I found out that back in 2000, Weyerhaeuser increased the price of containerboard products even to existing customers. This caused a slight decline in sales for a brief 3 month period. Soon after, all the customers returned to Weyerhaeuser finding that no other company could compete with Weyerhaeuser’s 100% customer satisfaction guarantee. Summary of Financing Strategies: Weyerhaeuser’s goal is to earn a 17% return on net assets over the industry cycle. A goal they say they will achieve by executing their strategies, focusing on customers, and maintaining a disciplined approach to capital spending. Recent News: Federal Way Wash., Nov 14, 2001- Weyerhaeuser Company today announced it plans to close or reposition 3 of its North American Operations during the fourth quarter to maintain the company’s competitive position in the lumber market. This news story relates to the concept that the economy has much to do with a company’s ability to grow 2007-04-23T04:08:56-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Weyerhaeuser-Company-Profile-33099.aspx WTC Retail Recovery Grant Program Helping Affected Businesses Governor George E. Pataki announced that as of today, New York State's WTC Retail Recovery Grant Program has dispersed 1,270 checks totaling $5.4 million to assist small and medium-sized retail businesses affected by the September 11 terrorist attacks. Altogether, 1,573 applications have been approved totaling $6.8 million. "Small and medium-sized retailers have continually played a vital role in the New York success story for generations," Governor Pataki said at an event in Chinatown with U.S. Secretary of Labor Elaine Chao. "Many of these firms are being challenged by the unforeseen circumstances generated by the World Trade Center disaster, but we're committed to helping them survive, recover, and prosper, right here, in New York, for years to come. "Small and medium-sized businesses are an important part of New York's communities, and will play a vital role in the rebuilding of downtown Manhattan," the Governor said. "By providing direct financial assistance to businesses returning downtown, we have sent a loud and clear message to the entire business community that we want them to stay - and to thrive - right here where they belong." Assembly Speaker Sheldon Silver said, "In Chinatown and throughout lower Manhattan, small and medium-sized businesses provide jobs and services that are integral to the economy of the city. Many of these diverse businesses are facing tremendous difficulties following the September 11 terrorist attack. It is my hope that this support will help rebuild and fortify the businesses that have come to symbolize this vibrant community." Charles A. Gargano, Chairman of Empire State Development said, "Governor Pataki's leadership and commitment to the business community is helping our economy through this challenging period in our nation's history. From the very beginning, establishing the Business Resource Center and the Lower Manhattan Redevelopment Corporation, and now these business grants, the Governor's continuous actions on behalf of New York's business community have strengthened ESD's partnership with the city's small and medium-sized businesses, and we look forward to working together in reigniting our economy." The WTC Disaster Retail Recovery Grant Program is a $20 million program administered by Empire State Development (ESD), the State's economic development entity. ESD is providing grants of up to $10,000 to assist a broad range of affected businesses, with the initial focus of the program on small and medium-sized retail businesses selling goods or personal 2007-04-23T03:16:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/WTC-Retail-Recovery-Grant-Program-Helping-Affected-Business-33077.aspx Experience with Bureaucratic Management Since the time I entered the workforce in 1987, I have encountered various forms of management and management styles in the career paths I followed. Now that I am venturing into management myself, I have had time to reflect on those various management techniques in order to develop a management style of my own. My experiences have ranged from Fast Food to Information Technology and small private corporations to global public companies. One particular experience with a lumber company has had a major impact on the way I would like to manage. Not because it was the right way to form management, but rather because it exemplified all the wrong ways of managing a business and people in the modern business world. This particular lumber company is the largest privately held lumber company in the United States. It started like many businesses, as a small “mom and pop” company of the Midwest. Economic growth and the rapid expansion of the 1960’s and 1970’s propelled this company into the realm of big business with multiple locations over a large geographical territory. Stores were opened quickly all across the Midwest and East Coast in order to capitalize on the rapid expansion. In order to keep control of growth, they formed a geographic structure to manage all the new facilities and personnel. Today, over 400 stores strong, the structure still remains a tall, geographic structure as illustrated below. In the case of this company, the tall management structure along with private ownership has put this company into Bureaucratic Management. The organizational chart indicates that there is a defined order of hierarchy and this hierarchy is expressed to you from the day you start to the day you leave or retire, which ever comes first. This hierarchy also defines your authority and decision making capabilities within the company. All decisions are made at the top of the organization. All rules and standard operating procedures are developed at the top of the hierarchy. Within this structure, it is each level of management’s responsibilities to convey the decisions and rules to the level beneath, causing a trickle down effect. The corporate management staff, underwritten by the CEO herself, determines all tasks and responsibilities of each level in the structure. This creates, what 2007-04-19T21:41:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Experience-with-Bureaucratic-Management-33066.aspx Music Televison, MTV, and American Society In today’s society young people have many different role models, some of which are said to be controversial. MTV is one of the leading networks for music television, and some believe that it often portrays negative influences towards today’s youth. MTV videos do not necessarily portray negative social influences towards our young population, the effects of which would be argued to lead to more negative anti social behavior. Critics call Eminem a controversial rapper because of his “crude” lyrics, which portray hateful lyrics [words] towards gays, women, and pretty much anyone and everyone who [he has deemed bad?] has angered him. Music is a form of art and it is a way to express yourself [oneself], and [the rest of this sentence isn’t needed] in the United States we have the freedom of speech. Eminem’s lyrics seem to portray how he feels about certain topics and idea’s [ideas], but I highly doubt that he feels he would carry them [those ideas] out. The song titled “Kim” is about killing his wife, and obviously [however] his wife is still alive. The word “faggot” is tossed around in many songs [such as…], but he hasn’t been arrested for killing anyone because they are gay. Music is a way to express yourself [oneself], and I am sure [get rid of I am sure, say something like, it is certain that…] everyone has thought at one time or another of hurting someone that has pissed them off [upset them]. But each one of us [person] makes a choice to carry out that action or not. Eminem himself states in his song “Criminal” that [“that” not needed] “people think that a lot of the things I say on record, I do in real life, and that I believe in it, if I say that I am going to kill someone, that I will actually do it. Well if you believe that, then I am going to kill you too.” (Mathers) This implies that if believe [who believes?] that he kills people left and right, or thinks it is ok to kill people, then you are pretty ignorant [why ignorant?]. Today’s youth is faced with choices that were unheard of twenty years ago, but that doesn’t change the fact that they still know right from 2007-04-19T21:14:55-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Music-Televison,-MTV,-and-American-Society-33050.aspx Profile of Nike Basketball players “wanna be like Mike”, but shoe companies “wanna be like NIKE.” NIKE is the worlds #1 company and controls more than 40% of the US athletic shoe market. The company designs and sells shoes for just about every sport, including baseball, volleyball, cheerleading, and wrestling. NIKE also sells Cole Haan dress and casual shoes and a line of athletic wear and equipment, such as hockey sticks, skates, and timepieces. In addition, it operates NIKETOWN shoe and sportswear stores and is opening JORDAN in store outlets in suburban markets. NIKE sells its product to about 19,000 US accountants, in about 140 other countries, and online. Chairman, CEO, and co-founder Phil Knight owns. Nike Co. is very interesting, as well is a popular brand. Nike, pronounced NI-KEY, is the winged goddess of victory according to Greek mythology. She sat at the side of Zeus, the ruler of the Olympian pantheon, in Olympia. A mystical presence, symbolizing victorious encounters, NIKE presided over history’s earliest battlefields. A Greek would say, “When we go to battle, and win, we say it is NIKE.” Synonymous with honored conquest; NIKE is the twentieth century footwear that lifts the world’s greatest athletes to new levels of mastery and achievement. The NIKE “swoosh” embodies the spirit of the winged goddess who inspired the most courageous and chivalrous warriors at the dawn of civilization. Among artistic representations of Nike are the sculpture by Paeonius (c. 424 BC) and the “Nike of Samothrace.” Rhodians probably erected the latter, discovered on Samothrace in 1863 and now in the Louvre Museum, Paris, about 203 BC to commemorate a sea battle. Excavations have shown that the sculpture was placed alighting on a flagship, which was set in the ground in such a way that it appeared to float. If you were to break the word NIKE down, you would get Ni-key. The pronunciation for Nike is ‘nI-kE. Its function is noun, and its etymology is Greek NiKE. If you defined the word NIKE, you would find out that it means the Greek goddess of victory. Another meaning and definition of a word is SWOOSHING. Main entry: Swoosh, function is noun, and it is an act or instance of swooshing. The origin of the swoosh dates back as far as 1971. Phil Knight was supplementing his modest income from Blue Ribbon Sports Inc. by teaching an accountant 2007-04-18T22:26:38-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Profile-of-Nike--33022.aspx Competition Among Processor Makers AMD and Intel It is hard to imagine that there is any other processor than Intel. There is a processor called AMD (advanced micro devices) currently leading in the silicon race for the fastest processor at an affordable price. No longer shall Intel lead the market when AMD makes its name superior. A CPU is a microprocessor that is generally constructed with millions of tiny switches called transistors that are imbedded in silicon. The outer shell is ceramic with gold pins protruding out of the processor to make a connection with the motherboard. The function of the processor is to take the data from memory, (a storage device) or an outside controller like a keyboard, joystick, or scanner. This is determined in the program by sending messages to the processor in binary language. Binary language is sent to the processor commanding the transistors to flip on or off, (on equals one and off equals zero). The processor is placed on a motherboard with a bus speed of that to match the processor. This allows the processor to go as fast as the wires making up the bus can handle. This means the less resistance in the wire the faster your system can run. The bus is measured in megahertz (MHz) and is connected to the memory for the processor to store in memory. The faster the operation can occur the better the system operates. The CPU has a clock speed that tells you how many operations can happen in one second. A CPU's clock is found by multiplying the processor megahertz by 1,000,000. If you have a 500 MHz processor then the operations will equal 500,000,000 per second. The operation, is the individual commands sent by the program. The faster the processors bus and clock speed the faster FPU's (floating point units). This is the mathematical part of the processor. This allows the binary to work faster. Now that the processor has been explained. Why is AMD is better? In the beginning, AMD made CPU's (central processing units) in the second IBM compatible desktop systems ever developed. There are now three competitors in the processor race; AMD, Intel, and Transmeta Crusoe (not yet on the market). The relevance of this is that Intel's Processor will still be the most expensive CPU with no extras. Intel has had problems in the past as Kam, 2007-04-18T18:25:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Competition-Among-Processor-Makers-AMD-and-Intel-33004.aspx Company Profile of The Home Depot ANALYSIS #1 1. COMPANY BACKGROUND The Home Depot Inc. was founded in 1978 and is the world’s largest home improvement retailer and the second largest retailer in the United States. The sales for the fiscal year 2000 were $45.7 billion, compared to $38.4 billion in fiscal 1999. As of January 2001, the company was operating 1,134 retail stores in forty-seven states, six Canadian provinces, Puerto Rico, Chile and Argentina. Home Depot stores sell a wide assortment of building materials, home improvement and garden products. Twenty-six EXPO Design Center stores sell products and services primarily for design and renovation projects. Additionally, the company operates four Villager’s Hardware test stores, which offer products for home enhancement and small projects. In mid-year, Home Depot also launched a Home Depot Floor Store, located in Plano, Texas. Home Depot stores serve three primary customer groups: do-it-yourself (D-I-Y) customers, who are typically homeowners that purchase products and complete their own projects and installations; buy-it-yourself (B-I-Y) customers, who are typically homeowners that purchase materials themselves and hire third parties to complete the project and/or installation; and professional customers, who are professional repair re-modelers, general contractors and tradesmen. The Company also offers products through two direct marketing subsidiaries: Maintenance Warehouse and National Blinds and Wallpaper. The Maintenance Warehouse subsidiary is one of the leading mail marketers of maintenance, repair and operations products serving primarily the multi-family housing and lodging facilities management market. The company’s National Blinds and Wallpaper subsidiary is a telephone mail order service for wallpaper and custom window treatments. Home Depot stores average approximately 108,000 square feet of enclosed space, with an additional approximately 24,000 square feet in the outside garden area. The basic EXPO Design center is approximately 90,000 square feet. Newly acquired companies, Georgia Lighting Inc. and Apex Supply Company Inc., are each operated by Home Depot Inc. as a wholly owned subsidiary. Georgia Lighting, a leading specialty lighting designer, distributor and retailer, has six retail locations. Apex Supply Company is a wholesale supplier of plumbing, HVAC and other related professional products, with twenty-one locations in Georgia, Tennessee and South Carolina. The co-founder of Home Depot Inc. retired as co-chairman on May 30, 2001. Arthur Blank, 58 years old, ran Home Depot since its inception in 1978 and was chief executive from May 1997 to December 2000. He will not seek re-election to the board. 2007-04-18T02:54:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Profile-of-The-Home-Depot-32974.aspx True North Communications, Inc. Company Profile The company that our group decided to profile and document is True North Communications Incorporated. True North is a top global advertising agency and communications company with more than 280 offices worldwide. The company is based out of Chicago, Illinois and is found at 101 East Erie Street. It can be reached on the Internet using the web address, www.truenorth.com. In 1994, True North became a holding agency for a company called Foote, Cone, and Belding which was a company started in Chicago, Los Angeles, and New York in 1942 and will be discussed later (www.truenorth.com). David Bell, who became Chief Executive Officer in 1999, heads True North Communications. He runs a company that employs around 13,800 people with a yearly growth rate of 15%, and in the year 2000 earned revenue of $1,557 million (www.wetfeet.com). True North consists of several different subsidiary advertising agencies, all consisting of different sizes. These agencies are FCB Worldwide (Foote, Cone, and Belding Worldwide), Bozell, Temerlin McClain, Marketing Drive Worldwide, and BSMG Worldwide. FCB is a powerful global agency network under True North, with 2000 billings of $9.5 billion and more than 190 offices servicing clients in 102 countries. FCB has key offices in Chicago, New York, San Francisco, Seattle, and Southern California. Also, FCB holds the rank of number ten in the world with a top ten ranking in many major markets. Some of these include Argentina, Brazil, Canada, China/Hong Kong, India, Mexico, New Zealand, Puerto Rico, Spain, South Africa, Taiwan, Thailand, and Venezuela. FCB offers a broad range of integrated services, which consist of Advertising, Field Service Marketing, Events and Sports Marketing. They offer a unique strategy called “Model One”. This offers all clients one management team, one strategy, one broad creative idea, and one bottom line. FBC also offers FCBi, with operations in thirty-eight offices in twenty-eight countries. This gives clients an Interactive Relationship to Management Solutions both online and offline (www.fcb.com). Bozell Group is a full service advertising agency comprised of six independent full-service agencies: Bozell, Bozell Kamstra, Avrett Free & Ginsberg, Berenter Greenhouse &Webster, Stein Rogan + Partners and Howard, and Merrell & Partners. Bozell is one of the leading U.S. agencies and operates under the banner of True North Communications Inc., 2007-04-18T02:39:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/True-North-Communications,-Inc_-Company-Profile-32970.aspx PepsiCo Strategic Positioning Industry Analysis PepsiCo, Inc. is in the Food and Beverage industry. The U.S. food and beverage industry sector (SIC 20) is the nation's largest manufacturing sector at $321 billion and it is mature and developed. Additional growth in the food and beverage industry likely to come from overseas market and factors that will affect industry growth are population growth, economic conditions, and foreign trade patterns. The top competitors within the industry are: - PepsiCo - Coca-Cola - Cadbury Schweppes - Kraft Foods The U.S. population is expanding by less than 1 percent annually, and immigrants constitute about one-fourth of this increase. The population is continuing to age as the size of U.S. households shrinks. Current economic concerns cause spending restraint and prompt greater purchases of less costly private-label products and greater patronage of warehouse-club type operations. The trend toward smaller households with increasing numbers of single-person and one-parent households is expected to continue. The combination of an aging population characterized by decreasing household size and greater numbers of single-person and one-parent households indicate that total spending for food and beverages is likely to increase very slowly. More women work outside the home and a higher number of single-person households cause redistribution of the food and beverage dollar away from home and towards other outlays at the expense of the retail grocery industry where potential profits are higher. In order to combat the aforementioned trends, food and beverage processors will be pressured to provide products tailored to older and single-person households to minimize the natural appeal of away-from-home eateries. As mentioned in the first paragraph, domestic market growth will be limited, thus manufacturers will likely compete very aggressively for market share and intensify export efforts to increase sales and enjoy high profits. Although there are lots of challenges, the food and beverage industry is very attractive industry due to following reason: The size of the industry is about $321 billion. If played smart, it could be very profitable for the companies involved. The industry is Global and opportunities exist throughout the world. There will always be demand for food and beverages. Innovation and other alternatives (i.e., non-carbonated drinks, healthy alternatives). Company Background PepsiCo, Inc., incorporated in 1919, is a world leader in convenient foods and beverages, with revenues of about $27 billion and about 143,000 employees. The company consists 2007-04-18T00:50:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/PepsiCo-Strategic-Positioning-32939.aspx Role of Women in Microfinance by N.Kavitha MBA, M.Phil,(Ph.D) Lecturer- MBA, SSM College of Engineering, Komarapalyam. 638 183 Tamil nadu. India nkavithamba@yahoo.co.in Abstract the 1980s, microfinance programs have improved upon original methodologies and extended beyond conventional thinking. First, microfinance demonstrated that poor people, and especially women, had excellent repayment rates (and often, rates that performed better than those in formal financial sectors). And second, that the poor were willing and able to pay interest rates that would allow the microfinance institutions (MFIs) to cover costs. Introduction To most, microfinance means providing very poor families with very small loans to help them engage in productive activities or grow their very small businesses. Like us, many poor people need and use financial services all the time. They save and borrow, invest in home repairs and improvements and meet occasional and domestic expenses such as food and school fees. However, there are some 500 million low income entrepreneurs in the world and about 5% have access to financial services. Indeed, the financial services available to the poor often have serious limitations in terms of cost, risk and convenience. As a result, over time, microfinance has come to include a broader range of services (credit, savings, insurance, etc.) as the industry has come to realize that the poor and the very poor who lack access to traditional formal financial institutions require a variety of financial products. Meaning A type of banking service that is provided to unemployed or low-income individuals or groups who would otherwise have no other means of gaining financial services. Ultimately, the goal of microfinance is to give low income people an opportunity to become self-sufficient by providing a means of saving money, borrowing money and insurance. Micro financing is not a new concept. Small microcredit operations have existed since the mid 1700s. Although most modern microfinance institutions operate in developing countries, the rate of payment default for loans is surprisingly low - more than 90% of loans are repaid. 1.Like conventional banking operations, microfinance institutions must charge their lenders interests on loans. While these interest rates are generally lower than those offered by normal banks, some opponents of this concept condemn microfinance operations for making profits off of the poor. It is a tool for empowerment of the poorest; the higher the income and better the asset position of the borrower, the lower the incremental benefit from further equal doses of micro-credit is likely to be. 2.Delivery is normally through Self Help Groups (SHGs). 2007-04-17T10:10:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Role-of-Women-in-Microfinance-32926.aspx Understanding of working capital By N.Kavitha MBA,M.Phil,(Ph.D) Lecturer- MBA, SSM College of Engineering, Komarapalyam. 638 183 Tamil nadu. India nkavithamba@yahoo.co.in Working capital : Working capital may be regarded as the life blood of business. Working capital is of major importance to internal and external analysis because of its close relationship with the current day-to-day operations of a business. Every business needs funds for two purposes.  Long term funds are required to create production facilities through purchase of fixed assets such as plants, machineries, lands, buildings & etc  Short term funds are required for the purchase of raw materials, payment of wages, and other day-to-day expenses. . It is other wise known as revolving or circulating capital It is nothing but the difference between current assets and current liabilities. i.e. Working Capital = Current Asset – Current Liability Businesses use capital for construction, renovation, furniture, software, equipment, or machinery. It is also commonly used to purchase inventory, or to make payroll. Capital is also used often by businesses to put a down payment down on a piece of commercial real estate. Working capital is essential for any business to succeed. It is becoming increasingly important to have access to more working capital when we need it. Importance of Adequate Working Capital A business firm must maintain an adequate level of working capital in order to run its business smoothly. It is worthy to note that both excessive and inadequate working capital positions are harmful. Working capital is just like the heart of business. If it becomes weak, the business can hardly prosper and survive. No business can run successfully without an adequate amount of working capital. Danger of inadequate working capital When working capital is inadequate, a firm faces the following problems Fixed Assets cannot efficiently and effectively be utilized on account of lack of sufficient working capital. Low liquidity position may lead to liquidation of firm. When a firm is unable to meets its debts at maturity, there is an unsound position. Credit worthiness of the firm may be damaged because of lack of liquidity. Thus it will lose its reputation. There by, a firm may not be able to get credit facilities. It may not be able to take advantages of cash discount. Concept of working capital 1) Gross Working Capital = Total of Current Asset 2) Net Working Capital = Excess of Current Asset over Current Liability Current Assets Current Liabilities Cash in hand / at bank Bills Receivable Sundry Debtors Short term loans Investors/ stock Temporary investment Prepaid expenses Accrued incomes Bills Payable Sundry 2007-04-16T06:36:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Understanding-of-working-capital-32920.aspx RURAL FINANCE IN WORLD PERSPECTIVE ( A CONTEMPORARY SCENARIO) by N.KAVITHA MBA, M.PhiL, (Ph.D), LECTURER, SSM SCHOOL OF MANAGEMENT, SSM COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, KOMARAPALAYAM-638 183 NAMAKKAL – DIST E-mail : nkavithamba@yahoo.co.in & Dr.A.Ramachandran M.com,M.Phil,Grad.CWA,Ph.D, Reader in Commerce, SNR Sons College (Autonomus), Coimbatore. E-mail: ram1200@rediffmail.com Rural Financial Trends: How Are Lenders and Interest Rates Changing? In recent history, it looked to many as if rural financial markets would become dominated by large banks that offered relatively expensive credit to agricultural firms. However, the 1990's have seen resurgence in smaller banks with a focus on smaller, agricultural producer loans. Moreover, small banks may be more competitive than ever with respect to interest rates. This report outlines some of the important trends in rural credit markets including the types of lenders, volume of loans, interest rate trends and some discussion of specific types and sizes of loans. It is our hope that such information will allow agricultural firms and organizations to make more informed decisions with respect to securing capital, as well as choosing an appropriate lending institution. Introduction Rural Finance Rural finance comprises credit, savings and insurance (or insurance substitutes) in rural areas, whether provided through formal or informal mechanisms. The word ‘credit’ tends to be associated with enterprise development, whereas rural finance also includes savings and insurance mechanisms used by the poor to protect and stabilize their families and livelihoods (not just their businesses). An understanding of rural finance helps explain the livelihood strategies and priorities of the rural poor. Rural finance is important to the poor. The poorest groups spend the highest proportion of their income on food – typically more than 60% and sometimes as much as 90%. Under these circumstances, any drop in earnings, or any additional expenditure (health or funeral costs, for instance) has immediate consequences for family welfare – unless savings or loans can be accessed. Financial transactions are therefore an integral part of the livelihood system of the poor. Rural finance consists of informal and formal sectors. Examples of formal sources of credit include: banks; projects; and contract farmer schemes. Reference is often made to micro-credit. Micro underlines the small loan size normally associated with the borrowing requirements of poor rural populations, and micro-credit schemes use specially developed pro-poor lending methodologies. Rural populations, however, are much more dependent on informal sources of finance (including loans from family 2007-04-13T10:39:09-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Rural-Finance-in-World-Perspective-a-Contemporary-Scenario-32916.aspx RURAL FINANCE FOR RURAL WOMEN AN OVERVIEW By N.Kavitha MBA., M.Phil.,(P.hD) Lecturer in MBA Department, SSM College of Engineering, Komarapalayam – 638 183 Namakkal – Dist. INDIA E.mail: nkavithamba@yahoo.co.in Introduction Poverty hits hardest at the female half of humankind. If woman living in a rural area of a developing country, they are likely to be poorer than a man, more vulnerable, own no land, be less educated and in poorer health. And you are unlikely to live as long. Struggling to combine a ‘double day’ of low-paid work with care for the home, rural women often have to cope with frequent pregnancies and child mortality. For women, perhaps the cruelest reality of all is that they have less chance than men to escape from poverty. A rural woman is likely to have little or no say in the way the family spends its income. Discrimination in education is the start of the vicious spiral of poverty. A girl may be deprived of schooling and literacy for no other reason than that she is female. Seventy per cent of poor women in India cannot read or write. Illiteracy often excludes people from written knowledge and decision-making. Some rural women have been affected by trade liberalization They are unable to participate in the marketing of export crops as they lack land rights and access to essential farm inputs. On the other hand, some women have gained by securing jobs in new export activities. Investment in rural women pays off. •Indian population is 48.1% women and 51.9% men • Female illiteracy is 62% whereas the male illiteracy rate is 34% • The labour force participation rate of women is 22.7%, less than half of the men's rate of 51.6% • In rural India, agriculture and allied industrial sectors employ as much as 89.5% of the total female labour • Women have extensive work loads with dual responsibility for farm and household production • Women's work is getting harder and more time-consuming due to ecological degradation and changing agricultural technologies and practices • Women have an active role and extensive involvement in livestock production, forest resource use and fishery processing • Women contribute considerably to household income through farm and non farm activities as well as through work as landless agricultural labourers • Women's work as family labour is underestimated • There are high degrees of inter-state and intra-state variations in gender roles in agriculture, environment and rural production Rural Women at a glance Rural women comprise 2007-04-13T10:28:21-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/An-Overview-of-Rural-Finance-for-Rural-Women-32915.aspx Women SHGs in India [A Rural View] by N.Kavitha MBA, M.PhiL, (Ph.D) Lecturer in MBA, SSM College of Engineering, Komarapalayam-638 183. Namakkal – Dist. Email:nkavithamba@yahoo.co.in Dr.A.Ramachandran M.Com,M.Phil,Grad WCA, Ph.D, Reader in Commerce, SNR Sons College, Coimbatore. E-mail: ram1200@rediffmail.com Introduction It has been realized in many parts of the world that an effective way to tackle poverty and to enable communities to improve the quality of life is through social mobilization of disadvantaged people, especially into Self Help Groups (SHGs). The concept of Self Help Groups is based on the idea of community participation, as sustainable community development requires the active participation of the entire community. 'Popular participation ensures that the benefits of development are equitably distributed. To further this, proposals are made for the decentralization of the authority so as to ensure redistribution of wealth, improved access to education and other social services. Consequently the focus of self-help groups is to develop the capacity of the disadvantaged, particularly women, and to organize them, so that they can deal with socio-political and socio-economic issues that affect their lives. Self Help Groups have been formed in almost all the villages adopted in the three districts of Uttarkashi, Tehri & Jaunsar. The women have been mobilized to form small groups for savings & credit for improving the economic conditions of the individual women. Inter-loaning for meeting their day-to-day needs has increased their confidence in themselves. Micro-capital assistance has raised their hopes for starting small enterprises for generating more money thus improving their overall economic condition. Apart from IGA the groups have been instrumental in tackling the village issues such as water problem and negotiating with the pradhan for getting the drinking water scheme for the village. The women's collective strength has improved the Public Distribution System as far as dry ration is concerned or the functioning of Anganwari or Balwari's activities are concerned. Claming the Scholarships for the school students from the Pradhan or getting the old age scheme/widow pension scheme for the beneficiaries activated are some of the activities taken on by the SHG's. Anti-liquor movement has strongly taken on in all the three regions initiated by the women in these SHG's. Trainings received in Health & Hygiene thus 2007-04-13T09:19:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Women-Self-Help-Groups-in-India-32914.aspx The purpose of ethics in business is to individuals to abide by a code of conduct that facilitates, if not encourages, public confidence in their products and services. In the accounting field, the AICPA maintains and enforces a code of professional conduct for public accountants. Professional accounting organizations recognize the accounting profession's responsibility to provide ethical guidelines to its members. The AICPA's first principle of professional conduct states: "In carrying out their responsibilities as professionals, members should exercise sensitive professional and moral judgments in all their activities." A profession is formed on the basis of (1) a generally accepted body of knowledge, (2) a widely recognized standard of attainment, and (3) an enforceable code of ethics. A code of ethics is a crucial element in forming a professional. The three major accounting professional organizations have an ethics code. FASB The Financial Accounting Standards Board is a major organization whose primary purpose is to develop Generally Accepted Accounting Principles in the United States (US GAAP), similar to what the Government Accounting Standards Board (GASB) does for local and state governments in the United States. The federal organization is responsible for maintaining independence standards in accounting, the powers of which come from the Congress. The FASB sets out to improve corporate accounting practices by enhancing guidelines set out for accounting reports, identifying and resolving issues in a timely manner and creating a uniform standard across the financial markets. The mission of the Financial Accounting Standards Board is to establish and improve standards of financial accounting and reporting for the guidance and education of the public, including issuers, auditors, and users of financial information. It is a seven-member independent board consisting of accounting professionals who establish and communicate standards of financial accounting and reporting in the United States. FASB standards, known as generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), govern the preparation of corporate financial reports and are recognized as authoritative by the Securities and Exchange Commission. SEC The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission is the United States governing body which has primary responsibility for overseeing the regulation of the securities industry. The SEC has five Commissioners who are appointed by the President of the United States with the advice and consent of the United States Senate. Their terms last five years and are staggered so that one Commissioner's term ends on June 5 of each year. To ensure that the SEC remains non-partisan, no more than three Commissioners may 2007-04-02T15:35:13-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ethics-Accounting--32881.aspx The Importance of Knowledge Management (KM) in Business Starting from the late 90's, enterprises started to talk about "Knowledge Management (KM)" as they have figured out that without proper KM strategies, it will cause problem and inefficiency in the organization. For example, loss of important information when there is someone leaving the company or it takes a long time to retrieve certain piece of data from a large pile of files. Therefore, internal KM budgets increased by folds in recent years. It is expected that spending for KM products will reach $10 billion by 2004. (Greg Dyer, International Data Corp.) Although many company aware of the importance of KM, they faced a big problem when they are implementing KM in their workplace: not all staffs are willing to share the knowledge or information they obtained. Therefore, motivation or incentive scheme becomes a hot topic in KM strategies. The following passage will talk about how to enhance the willingness for staff to share knowledge. First of all, when we talk about incentive scheme, it is certain that monetary reward for the staff sharing useful and important knowledge or information will definitely be one of the best and most welcomed practice, especially in times of the economic downturn. This is because people will prefer keeping money in their pocket rather than any other forms of rewards. This universal principle will always work. At the same time, the above reward can be transform into some other ways like granting extra holidays to the staff providing outstanding knowledge for the company. Or giving a free tour for the staff, if possible with his/her family members to some leisure places like Thailand, Hawaii, etc. These alternative forms of reward are having the same effect as money and they will be more welcomed by staff who do not want everything to be calculated in money. However, not every staff in a company is solely looking for money. Some of them are seeking some other forms of rewards. Some of them may hope themselves to be well known by others within the organization. In other words, they want to be "famous". To deal with this type of staff we should located them out (Expert Locating) after they have shared information and let the company know who they are. With such 2007-03-20T04:17:59-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Importance-of-Knowledge-Management-KM-in-Business-32856.aspx Report on the Music Industry Despite a year of headline-generating turmoil, musicians, techies, media executives and lawmakers gathering for the second Future of Music conference on Monday will find that much remains unresolved on the digital-music landscape. Over the past year, recording companies managed to force the shutdown of the free online song-swapping service Napster and launch services of their own. But they also saw new threats sprout up hydra-like in the form of second-generation free services such as Kazaa and Morpheus. Recording artists won a battle with the industry when they secured the right to be paid directly for Internet-based broadcasts. But they still wield little control over the music they create, advocates say. Tech firms launched a steady stream of digital-music devices and services but saw funding for new ventures dry up in the face of lawsuits and a weakened economy. And players on all sides won the attention of Capitol Hill, only to see the Sept. 11 terror attacks wipe digital-music issues off the congressional agenda. "It's really changed very little, which is unfortunate, because I think change would be very productive," said Eric Schierer, a digital-music analyst with Forrester Research. On their own Despite the presence of Capitol Hill players and music-industry heavyweights, the tone of Monday's conference is expected to be distinctly anti-establishment. Conference organizer Jenny Toomey, an activist and musician with the punk band Tsunami, hopes to shine the spotlight on independent artists who retain control of their music. Panelists will include musician/entrepreneurs such as Ian Mackaye of Fugazi and Dave Fagin of the Rosenbergs, who have found success outside usual music-industry pathways. Napster CEO Konrad Hilbers is scheduled to speak as well. But although the buzz on and off the dais will likely focus on the recording industry's recent moves, 2001 may be remembered as the year the industry finally caught up with the digital revolution that has swept up so many music fans. The industry won a key court battle with Napster, forcing the hugely popular song-swapping service to remove all copyrighted songs from its system. Napster, which shut down in July, is expected to test a new, industry-sanctioned service this week. Recording companies also launched their own digital music services last month, MusicNet and Pressplay, which offer limited access to some music 2007-03-20T04:15:57-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Report-on-the-Music-Industry-32855.aspx Retailer Benefits from Self Check-Out Lines Depending on the time of day and day of week, the abiding time at checkout varies. In order to maintain and manage the variety of store customers and staff availability during this time, a flexible self-checkout line should be considered. To meet this challenge, these self-checkout lines offer a convertible lane. It can function as a self-checkout lane or as a traditional, fully assisted cashier lane. The transformation is done in just a few simple steps, leaving the time to choose the most useful form based on customer population and store labor. With the flexibility to convert a self-checkout lane to a cashier-assisted lane, self-checkout can help manage customer service at any time. This is the benefit of self-service and cashier assistance in one checkout lane. While in self-checkout mode, the terminal helps eliminate long checkout lines by offering the consumer a fast, easy way to check out. For times when business is hectic and another cashier lane is needed, self-checkout can be quickly converted to a traditional cashier-assisted checkout. When the store gets busy, it only takes a matter of minutes to transforms the lane into a traditional checkout line. During the process of changing the lane, the scanner and cashier display rotate to face the cashier, the set-aside shelf rotates to serve as an additional countertop for the customers, the customer interface becomes the customer display, and the cashier switches the software from self-checkout mode to cashier mode. It is just that easy. THE FUTURE OF RETAIL TECHNOLOGY CHECKOUT It is knowledgeable why retailers would be skeptical over self-services in grocery stores, which include lack of floor space, the ability to lower labor cost, and the concerns of consumer acceptance and usage, but this has changed with the future of technology. The permutation of self-checkout technology now gives the retailer opportunities to reduce labor intendment, and it also orchestrates the front-end operations to offer state of the art customer service to the consumer Self- checkout allows retailers to save space and it easily fits into the store's existing layout. Five self-serve lanes can accommodate the floor space of only two conventional lanes. Cash balancing and reporting for each station remains the same as it was before the device was installed. A cashier, just like any other lane in the store, operates the cashier-assisted mode. The terminal runs the same point-of-sale application 2007-03-20T04:14:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Retailer-Benefits-from-Self-Check-Out-Lines-32854.aspx Promotional Activities of a Mountain Resort The breakdown and media mix would have to change. A new partnership could be formed with a local radio station that appeals to the targeted 21 to 40 year old listener. The Local radio station KCHZ commonly referred to as “The Bear” offers the music mix aimed to the 21 to 40 year old market. Their progressive promotional activity would be an excellent vehicle for Camp Fortune to promote its new look and message. The radio station is continually looking for a venue to host it’s various promotional activities such as “freebies”, rock concerts, album introductions and other various functions. Camp Fortune is looking to draw people to the hill not only for skiing and winter activities, but also summer events as well. I would propose that “The Bear” and Camp Fortune form a business partnership. Camp Fortune will spend 60% of the radio budget allowed on KCHZ if “The Bear” uses Camp Fortune for it’s venue. The free advertising given by this partnership will allow more penetration for both “The Bear” and Camp Fortune and would prove to be beneficial to both. Newspaper activities would again be marketed tot his target market group with the majority of the print media being spent on the “tabloid” papers such as the “Sun”. Statistics have shown the target demographic views this paper style as more popular. The use of an Internet site to promote the ski hill and to actually sell the lift tickets / passes would be another option. Offering a discount for “online” booking would ease the line ups at the hill and gives more time for actual customer service at the ski booth. A fast pass system with confirmation number would allow a ’pre-booked” client to ease his way onto the hill. This type of ticketing system has worked well for West Jet and I see no hindrances to this application. Selling advertising space on the Website would also pay for the site and perhaps also pay for the Fast Pass system on the hill as well. The global implications would work well also as various International clients could access this system and have their passes pre-booked and be ready to ski. Plus the number of hits could be charted and measured. The 2007-03-19T13:52:05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Promotional-Activities-of-a-Mountain-Resort-32823.aspx Musical Tuner Business Plan Summary • Extent of the Investment Our organization is designed to enable us to deliver the cost, capability and overall financial performance to be the Benchmark and to meet customers’ needs. In order to accomplish this, there is funding needed in order to mass-produce, advertise, and sell the product. From our initial calculations, our first year needs are $1,985,536. In order to sustain growth in not only the company, but the product as well, an additional $3,000,000 is needed to rent office space, pay employees, produce the product, sell the product, and market ourselves globally. Therefore, the extent of the investment we are looking for is 5 million dollars, either in one lump some, or preferable, over the coarse of 4 or 5 years (SEE financial planning for details). • Principal Milestones to be Achieved Our goal is to become the world’s largest provider in the industry of musical tuners (not only guitar). We have seen an enormous growth in this industry and have found the technology accessible to create a new breed of tuners. • Target Market The target market is not the beginning musician who is only willing to pay $100 for an analog tuner. We intend to capture the advanced/professional musician market. One who is looking for the best, most accurate tuner available. • Summary of Financial Metrics Our goal is to start making a profit in our 3rd year of development of this product. Our market analysts believe that after two years, the market growth and revenue will pick up substantially. Once the new technology is correlated to the product, a new demand will grow for the product’s accuracy. As a newly established corporation, we feel that with the aid from ASC Capital, we will be able to corner the market for digital guitar tuners (SEE Financial Plan Main Points). Once a profit is made from the product there are two options for ASC Capital to receive revenue. Profit Sharing or Stock options are the two choices that can be negotiated between KJESC and ASC Capital (SEE financial Planning). • Why Should ASC Capital Invest KJSEC believes that technology has enabled electronic tuning devices to become more accurate than ever. It is at this point; KJSEC realizes the importance of capturing the market at the beginning stages of this new technology. There is no 2007-03-05T14:18:33-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Musical-Tuner-Business-Plan-Summary-32741.aspx Company Profile of Motorola After years of being the world's leading provider of wireless communications, semi-conductors and advanced electronic systems and services, things have began to slow down for Motorola, Inc. This company was once known for its cutting-edge technology and level of quality. Motorola is now working to revamp its image and catch up with the competition. Motorola has not yet recovered despite restructuring efforts. The company attributes some of its problems to the weak U.S. economy and a slow down in telecommunications spending. Heavy cost-cutting has been done by the company. Since August 2000, 48,000 jobs-nearly a third of its workforce-have been eliminated. Over the next nine to fifteen months, four more semiconductor plants will be shut down. This will result in the loss of 2,500 jobs. Motorola's five-point strategic plan In 1998, Motorola decided to reshape the company's strategy. They decided to go back and seek to change everything at Motorola except their principles, characters, and ethics. This five-point strategic plan is as follows: 1. Revitalize the management team 2. Stabilize the balance sheet and improve financial flexibility 3. Reduce costs and manufacturing capacity 4. Produce new, innovative products and growing customer relationships 5. Evaluate and re-evaluate business plans in order to remain competitive in the ever-changing business climate How has Motorola been doing in following its strategic plan? They are making progress in all areas of their strategic plan. The company realizes they still have a lot of work to do. 1. They have placed new leaders in 70 of Motorola's 100 most important assignments within the last 18 months. They also hired a new president and chief operating officer. 2. They generated more than $1.9 billion in positive operating cash flow in 2001 and reduced the ratio of net debt to net debt plus equity from 27 percent to 18 percent. 3. They reduced their employee population by one-third and closed five manufacturing facilities. In 2001, four additional facilities will be closed. 4. They enhanced their position in telematics by design a platform wireless chipset. 5. They launched a new China growth strategy. Although, Motorola addressed the need to add new innovative products in their five-point strategic plan, they did not address the fact that they need to be more aggressive to get on the 2007-03-04T19:00:47-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Profile-of-Motorola-32722.aspx The Benefits of Flextime Work Schedules Flexible work options represent an important trend in today’s workplace. Businesses are challenging their employees to do more with less and the employees are being pulled in many directions at once. Businesses are operating 24 hours per day, seven days per week. Despite the advancement in technology, people are working longer and longer hours. The high demand by organizations leaves less time for families to share quality time and adds a high amount of stress to individuals who are trying to balance their effectiveness at work, in the home and in the community. Organizations can benefit from implementing alternative work arrangements. Examples of possible circumstances where employees may ask for an alternative work arrangement are: employees returning from maternity, paternity or adoptive leave, employees having to care for elderly relatives, employees who may, due to a disability, now wish to work on a part-time basis, employees returning to school, or employees who may wish to spend more time on leisure interests. Some of the widely used alternative work options that many organizations are engaging in to help employees manage their fast-paced, overloaded lives are: Flex Scheduling, Telecommuting and Job Sharing. Flex scheduling is an alternative work arrangement that allows an employee to work a non-traditional schedule to meet personal needs. The schedule is created and agreed on by an employee and their manager for a period of time. There are several variations of flextime arrangements for employees to participate in. Set starting and quitting times that are determined for a specific period of time. Starting and quitting times that can change on a daily basis. Variations in daily hours (for example, an employee may work a six-hour day and then work a ten-hour day), with required core time.” Variations in the daily hours per day, without required core time.” Flextime arrangements were one of the first alternative work options available to employees. Flextime was first introduced in Germany in 1967. (Olmsted & Smith, 16) “The Hewlett-Packard Company is generally credited with introducing flextime in the United States.” (Olmsted & Smith, 17) There are many pros and cons of flextime. Flextime can have a positive impact on an organization by reducing the number of paid absences improve employee morale and job satisfaction, which leads employees to be 2007-03-04T18:35:12-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Benefits-of-Flextime-Work-Schedules-32711.aspx Fujitsu's Corporate Profile At the heart of Fujitsu’s corporate profile is what is called on their global website, “The Fujitsu Way.” This set of principles relates the company’s mission to its values and codes of conduct. With a mission statement that aims at providing growing value to the company’s shareholders and stakeholder, as well as customers, through product innovation, increased profits and stronger communal relationships worldwide, Fujitsu voices a strong sense of corporate culture and pride. The statement promotes financial goals that are in tune with a growing global marketplace and international success. The philosophy behind the Fujitsu Way is highlighted in the values of the company listed in order of customers, employees, quality, environment and lastly, profits and growth. The employee base being one of the top core values of the company is reflective of the Japanese mentality that promotes loyalty to one’s firm. If the employees are valued, they will, in return, value the company. This fosters strong long-term relationships which their corporate culture seeks to create. The breakdown of the corporate culture also shows a real dedication of the company to self-promote its values and ideals. In this way, the company aims to cultivate strong internal relations as well as those created from business operations. Looking at the language of the website is immediately illustrative of corporate pride. The corporate profile is called The Fujitsu Way. This promotes a strong sense of corporate identity. The values and conduct of the firm seem to convey the message that the people of the firm truly buy into the corporate self as there is even a Fujitsu Way council in place. Multiple pages are dedicated to corporate culture on their site, documenting the business, the corporate history, the management structure and a detailed outline of Fujitsu’s corporate governance. On one level, much of the wording and language on the site seems less traditionally Japanese as we have examined and more pandering to an international market base. The company strongly endeavors to profit and grow. They are aware that business is their primary objective and to meet global demand they must express this interest. Underlying this tone, however, is a strong emphasis on making sure that corporate culture and dedication are adequately expressed. Many American companies offer only one two pages to these subjects, while Fujitsu’s corporate profile has seven primary links including numerous detailed breakdowns and charts of the various topics 2007-02-19T21:59:18-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Fujitsu-s-Corporate-Profile-32658.aspx Carlos Ghosn's Management at Nissan Known as “Le Cost Killer,” Carlos Ghosn’s first step to the turnaround at Nissan was to cut 21,000 jobs worldwide. He then pledged that as CEO he would return Nissan to financial stability by cutting its debt by 50% and increasing its operating margin to 4.5% within three years (xix) or he would resign. He met his goals and greatly surpassed them. Carlos Ghosn has a clear gift for management and excellence, but the 2007-02-19T21:56:53-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Carlos-Ghosn-s-Management-at-Nissan-32656.aspx What is 'macroeconomics'? You may have already studied microeconomics, which looks at supply, demand and prices for individual goods. Macroeconomics looks at the bigger picture and involves the study of the economy as a whole. National income Let us start by looking at a simple example - a 'two sector' economy made up of households (consumers) and firms (producers) -and use this to develop the idea of national income. To start with we will ignore the impact of government policy and overseas sectors. Households ultimately own the factors of production, e.g., labour, materials and capital, and supply these factors to firms who use them to produce goods and services. In return households earn rewards for supplying the firms with the factors of production e.g., wages and interest on capital. These rewards are in turn used to buy the goods that the firms have produced. This process is known as a circular flow- see Figure 1. Figure 1: Simple circular flow From Figure 1 we can see that there are three ways of measuring the amount of economic activity in the economy. These are: (a)National product/output = the flow counted at this point represents the amount received by firms for their total production. (b) National income = the flow counted at this point represents the total income received in return for factors of production. (c) National expenditure = the flow counted at this point represents the total expenditure by households on goods and services. If it is assumed that all income is spent, then whichever method is used the same measure of economic activity must be obtained. Let's look at a numerical illustration. Illustration Assume there are two producers - a lumberjack and a carpenter. The carpenter makes chairs each of which needs £5 worth of wood and which he sells for £20. Total annual sales are 10,000 chairs. The income and expenditure accounts for the lumberjack and carpenter are: Carpenter£000Lumberjack£000 Purchases (wood)50 Wages40Wages10 Interest20Interest5 Rent50Rent20 Profit40Profit15 Sales200Sales50 'National Product' = 200 This is the total value of the production (i.e., chairs) 'National Income' = 40 + 20 + 50 + 40 + 10 + 5 + 20 + 15 = 200 This is the total received for factors of production i.e., wages, interest, rent and profit 'National Expenditure' = 200 This is the total amount spent on production (i.e. chairs). We can see that the three measures of economic activity all give the same value. Now we can start adding to this model to make it more realistic. This model will use the following definitions: Consumption (C) - consumption goods produced and sold to customers i.e., the chairs. Savings (S) - income that is not spent on consumption. Investment (I) - production of, or expenditure on, non-consumption goods (carried out by firms) including expenditure on increasing stocks of consumption goods. Injections - expenditure on domestic 2007-02-17T17:07:36-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Macro-Economics-32641.aspx Introduction The research proposal begins with an overview of Krispy Kreme’s functioning industries as well as current trends within them. The document progresses by describing the corporate structure of Krispy Kreme, specifically outlining company values and philosophies. To help develop the research, various store formats are discussed, followed by an in-depth analysis of Krispy Kreme’s financial situation. The following pages also place Krispy Kreme in the context of today’s market and illustrate the brand image and different products. The document attempts to combine research, analysis and recommendations to determine if a so called cold doughnut will allow Krispy Kreme to expand globally. Industry Information Krispy Creme Doughnuts, Inc. competes with several industries, to include: Ø Baked Goods Industry Ø Food Industry Ø Restaurant (Eating Places) Industry Ø Cakes and Pastries According to the National Restaurant Association, Americans will spend about $354 billion at the nation’s more than 815,000 eating and drinking establishments. “Statistics indicate that restaurants have become an increasingly important part of American lifestyle over the past few decades” (Bread, Cake, and Related Products, 2003, ¶4). When evaluating the restaurant industry, fast-food type restaurants like Krispy Kreme have led way, and the growth of franchising since the 1970s has also propelled the growth (franchises have almost tripled their share of the market). However, starting in the late 1990s, competition decreased in mature markets because they were becoming saturated with fast-food restaurants. During this time, the restaurant industry began to see an influx of themed-eating places trying to redefine their images. For example, T.G.I. Friday’s began mostly as a single’s bar, but evolved to a family-oriented dining place. Another trend in the restaurant industry started in the mid-1990s when restaurants and supermarkets began to prepare foods for carry-out (commonly referred to as “home meal replacements”). Today, restaurants report that over 50 percent of their revenues come from carryout sales (Restaurants, 2003). Despite the economic downturn in 2001 due to September 11th, the restaurant industry recently began to pick up momentum. In Western Europe, the fast food part of the restaurant industry has seen growth as well (Restaurants, 2003). One trend in the restaurant industry is the increased use of computer and telecommunications technology to provide greater convenience and speed. These technologies include vibrating paging systems, wearable computers, and alarms (Restaurants, 2003). The bread, cake, and related products industry also researched new technology 2007-02-17T17:01:19-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Krispy-Kreme-Inc,-proposal--32639.aspx "I do not want to be the angel of any home; I want for myself what I want for other women, absolute equality. After that is secured, then men and women can take turns at being angels." - Agnes Macphail The 20th century has been a period of rapid and far-reaching change for many women, but life for women in some parts of the world still remains harsh. Even where females have experienced great advances like those in Canada, there are still some similarities between their economic role today and the role of women in the 1900s. During the 19th and 20th century, attempts were made to define and extend human rights, but most of these struggles ignored or denied the rights of more than half the human race – women. It was unsurprising that this is the case because at the time, Canada was a patriarchal society, a society in which men have more power than women, readier access than women to what is valued in the society, and, in consequence, are in control over many, if not most aspects of women’s lives. It wasn’t until the women’s movement that has touched the lives of most Canadian women and has transformed the structure of their daily existence; it was this movement that eliminated the fact that Canada was a patriarchal society and improved the economic role of Canadian women. Since the 1960s women have undertaken a strong assault on Canada’s system of power and the nation now claims to be an equal society and emphasizes significantly on equality amongst all but are we all actually equal? Has the glass-ceiling effect been broken at last? That question still remains unclear, but what will remain clear is that once women take up positions where men are unwilling to work, distinguish themselves independent from men in the labor force, and begin to set their desire of exploration for their interest in politics, equilibrium between the two sexes will finally be established. The changing economic roles of women have improved little with regards to the average earnings of women. The average earnings of employed women today are still considerably lower than those of men despite the nation’s declaration that it is an equal country with equal pay amongst all. In 1998, employed women had average earnings of just $23,900, a figure that was only 64% that of all men with jobs. Even 2007-02-17T16:57:49-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Women-Entrepreneurs-32638.aspx RETAILING Introduction: The word retailing is derived from the French word ‘retailer’, meaning ‘to cut a piece off ’ or ‘to break a bulk’. in simple terms, it implies a first-hand transaction with the customer. Retailing involves a direct interface with the customer & the coordination of business activities from end to end- right from the concept or design stage of a product or offerings, to its delivery & post-delivery service to the customer. The industry has contributed to the economic growth of many countries & is undoubtedly one of the fastest changing & dynamic industries in the world today. According to a report by the Center for Monitoring Indian Economy (CMIE) investments in organized retailing – which includes shopping malls, retail chains etc. – doubled from Rs.1, 000 crore in January 2000 to Rs. 2,000 crore in January 2001. YEAR URBAN RURAL TOTAL 1978 0.58 1.76 2.34 1984 0.75 2.02 2.77 1990 0.94 2.42 3.36 1996 1.80 3.33 5.13 1999 2.40 3.60 6.00 Retailing & the marketing mix: Customers are first introduced to the product at the retail store. Organizations sell their products & services through these retail outlets & get feedback on the performance of their products & customers expectations about them. Retail stores serve as communication hubs for customers. Commonly known as the point of sale (POS) or the point of purchase (POP), retail stores transmit information to the customers through advertisement & displays. Hence the role of retailing inh the marketing mix is very significant. Retail Marketing Mix: The retail marketing mix consists of the following elements: PRODUCT OFFERINGS: this refers to the product mix that the store retails for customers after a careful study of what their needs & wants are. By matching customer preferences with an assortment of merchandise offered within the stores categories, the retailer gets an ideal basket size per customer. The basket size contains the mix of items a customer buys during a visit. PLACE: This is the location of the store & its catchments boundaries. The key to optimizing the element of place in the marketing mix is to undertake local marketing efforts besides the national marketing plan. Determining the market share of the store in the catchments area gives an indication of its performance & efficiency. PRICE: Price is an important element in the marketing mix as customers are very price-sensitive. Pricing is of different 2007-02-04T19:28:21-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Retail-Industry-32589.aspx Business Communications 1. Describe the Barriers to Effective Communication that exists in the situation. Communication exists when two parties enact in any behavior, non-verbal or graphic, that is perceived by another argues Dwyer (1999). It does not necessarily mean the presence of dialogue, or even acknowledging body language. “Communication” can occur when as Dwyer (1999) referenced from Watzalawick, et al. (1967) thought that people cannot not communicate. Even when a person ignores another person, something is being communicated. This is one of the barriers to communication in the case study, where Mary Ong is not getting the response or help she requested from Tom Ballard. Mary Ong, Supervisor of in-flight services Kuala Lumpur Division was trying to obtain various statistics and figures from Tom Ballard, Passenger Services Kuala Lumpur Division was met with an “ignore response” from Ballard. This communicates to Ong a sense of disapproval from Ballard and a sense of what she has the initiative of improving is not worthy of Ballard’s time. Ong was met with a degree of unresponsiveness and in-cooperation that held her back from her task. Failure to meet expectations also leads to the disruption in communications in the case study. As Ong grew too frustrated at Ballards lack of response, she had to direct a memo at Harry Lee, the Vice-President of In flight Services for Kuala Lumpur about the behavior of Ballard. Van DerWall (2000) describes a possible loss of morale in cases of non-communication. Ong was trying to make the system more efficient and fluid for personnel and passenger alike. Ballards’ behavior was not fitting to the effective and productive communication aspect of group culture that firms support in their culture. Effective and productive communication occurs as defined by Dwyer (1999) when a party can transmit their ideas/values to another through verbal, non-verbal or graphic means. Communication on the receiver’s part is then defined as the process by which people select, organize and interpret data in order to give a message meaning. Select, Organize and Interpret. In this example, Ballard has received the request, assessed it and then interpreted it to be unimportant. This created intra-organizational conflict by the means of a break in communication between the different divisions of the airline. Intra-organizational conflict occurs whenever people or divisions inside that organization perceive different or even incompatible goals to a given situation. Cyert and March (1963) defined organizations as a series of interdependent units with 2007-02-02T18:06:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Communications--32547.aspx Marketing Strategy And Mix Of Cargo International Target Market As cargo offers homogeneous product, shipping service, the primary target customers thus would be very much approached by the mass marketing approach. Mass marketing is when the needs of an entire market are relatively homogeneous. The marketing mix therefore consists of single product, single price, single promotional program and single distribution system. Cargo will follow this approach with some flexibility in adjusting the theory to its strategy. Cargo’s primary target market are car dealers in West Africa countries (Nigeria, Ghana, and Cameroon), car dealers in the Netherlands, with extended range of customers including exporters from the Netherlands. The mass marketing then is demographically divided into Nigeria, Ghana, Cameroon and The Netherlands. The strategy however should have certain factors that ultimately will benefit Cargo over its competitors. Mass marketing indeed provides only one strategy mix to all target markets, yet it does not necessarily mean the strategy should not be differentiated against competitors and may be against each target market, with Cargo would extensively put efforts to the African markets. Cargo is not the market leader and it should not stay that way. Cargo should conquer the market share by being “different” from its competitors. Cargo could initially start to develop one if its strengths, which in this case is the customer relations. This strength should be developed further more because it differentiates Cargo from its competitors. Main competitors of Cargo are larger enterprises with less interest in taking care of customers customized needs. This is an opportunity for Cargo to jump in. However, as this strength and the whole business (i.e. service) is intangible, Cargo should therefore emphasize and focus on the company’s image that is related with its sustainable competitive advantages (SCAs - e.g. customer relations). The overall marketing strategy then is mass marketing with strong element of customer relationship. Two additional comments to the strategy are; first, whenever Cargo is about to launching the strategy, it should never forget the timeliness and the feasibility (skills, experience, resources, and strengths). Last, the strategy should be financially affordable as having financial resources to make it happen is very crucial. Marketing Mix Product As previously mentioned, Cargo’s product is actually service. The company offers service to ship goods from the Netherlands to West African countries. The real value of a product provides is derived from its ability to deliver benefits that enhance buyer’s situation. Taken from this statement, 2007-02-02T17:55:49-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Strategy-And-Mix-Of-Cargo-International-32542.aspx Critical Analysis of Business Culture and Values on Management Business Management has known a significant evolution. In the past, the management without any staff consideration had imposed employee actions. Since the end of the sixties, it is changing. Members of the staff have a personal role to play in the firm. Nowadays, the understanding of the firm management involves more and more psychological and sociological analysis. This new world of comprehension answers to the managerial question how managers can mobilise all the human resources in order to obtain the higher profitability. Development of the company culture might be an answer. The company culture deals with the whole signs, symbols, social values shared by the company members and this insures the unity of the firm. The culture of the company: 1-Introduction: The company culture can be defined as “A pattern of shared basic assumptions that the group learned as it solved its problem of external adaptation and internal integration, that has worked well enough to be considered valid and, therefore, to be taught to new members as the correct way to perceive, think, and feel in relation to those problems.” (Schein EH, (1997)”Organizational Culture”, Jossey-Bass Inc, P12) Since 1960, such a firm rehabilitation has been noticed indeed, inspired by the Japanese model. The firm is not a productive entity anymore; it is also a central institution of the society. Sociologists studied this phenomenon and have risen the conclusion that firms are influenced and shaped by their environments, the capitalism, and the democratic society. The objectives of this assignment are to show how Business culture and Values cannot follow an ethical view influencing Business Management. Employees are manipulated by the company culture that they even build themselves through the years of work within the company. The company culture is a well build capitalistic way to answer to the capitalism itself. Get a motivated staff management, which can be easily manipulated, through rewards and pressures in order to reach its objectives. 2-Management and organizational behavior impacts: In order to obtain a better analyze of the company culture, this section propose a short understanding of the different culture bodies: Values, Myths, symbols, Heroes, and Network. Values: They are the beliefs and ideas shared by firm members guiding staff behaviours. They are really important for the firm success because they shape the strategy, the style of management and the relationship between services and people are shaped then through the values. Employee may follow them 2007-02-02T17:45:21-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Critical-Analysis-of-Business-Culture,-Values-on-Management-32537.aspx Two Wheeler Market in India INTRODUCTION: The Indian two wheeler market has a size of over Rs 100,000 million. The Indian two wheeler segment contributes the largest volumes amongst all the segments in automobile industry. Though the segment can be broadly categorized into 3 sub-segments viz; scooters, motorcycles and mopeds; some categories introduced in the market are a combination of two or more segments e.g. scooterettes and step thru’s. The market primarily comprises five players in the two wheeler segment with most of the companies having foreign collaborations with well-known Japanese firms earlier. But most of the companies are now planning 100% subsidiaries in India. In the last four to five years, the two-wheeler market has witnessed a marked shift towards motorcycles at the expense of scooters. In the rural areas, consumers have come to prefer sturdier bikes to withstand the bad road conditions. In the process the share of motorcycle segment has grown from 48% to 58%, the share of scooters declined drastically from 33% to 25%, while that of mopeds declined by 2% from 19% to 17% during the year 2000-01. The Euro emission norms led the existing players in the two stroke segment to install catalytic converters. All the new models are now being replaced by 4-stroke motorcycles. Excise duty on motorcycles has been reduced resulting in price reduction, which has aided in propelling the demand for motorcycles. Fierce competition has also forced players to cut prices in certain models. CURRENT SCENARIO: Motorcycle sales grew by an annual average of 27% over f 1995-2002, and constituted nearly 66% of total two wheeler sales in F2002, up from just 24% in F1995. Average monthly motorcycle sales have increased five-fold since F1995 to almost 250,000 units in F2002. The current share of the leading three companies is shown in the pie chart. And this clearly shows that hero Honda is the current market leader with a 49% market share. Hero Honda has been an early entrant in the 4 stroke segment of the two wheeler industry. With a right mix of product styling and pricing the company helped garner a larger market chunk of the 4-stroke market as compared to Bajaj Auto. A shifting consumer preference towards motorcycles also enabled the fast growth of the company in the last few years. Hero Honda motorcycle sales jumped 40.6% in April at 135,961 units from 96,672 units it sold in the corresponding month last year. The 2007-02-02T17:25:53-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Two-Wheeler-Market-in-India-32525.aspx Merrill Lynch - Company And Industry Background Background Merrill Lynch is one of the world's leading financial management and advisory companies, with offices in 38 countries and total client assets of approximately $1.5 trillion. As an investment bank, Merrill Lynch is a leading global underwriter of debt and equity securities and strategic advisor to corporations, governments, institutions and individuals worldwide. Through Merrill Lynch Investment Managers, the firm is one of the world's largest managers of financial assets. (Merrill Lynch, 2002) Merrill Lynch & Co., Inc. is a holding company that, through its subsidiaries and affiliates, provides investment, financing, advisory, insurance and related products and services on a global basis, including securities brokerage, trading and underwriting; investment banking, strategic services, including mergers and acquisitions and other corporate finance advisory activities; asset management; origination, brokerage, dealer and related activities in swaps, options, forwards and exchange-traded futures; other derivatives and foreign exchange products; securities clearance and settlement services; equity, debt, foreign exchange, commodities and economic research; banking, trust and lending services, including mortgage lending and related services; insurance sales and underwriting services, and investment advisory and related recordkeeping services. Merrill Lynch provides these products and services to a wide array of clients, including individual investors, small businesses, corporations, governments, governmental agencies and financial institutions. Merrill Lynch's business has three business segments, the Corporate and Institutional Client Group (CICG), the Private Client Group (PCG) and Merrill Lynch Investment Managers (MLIM). Merrill Lynch provides financial services worldwide through various subsidiaries and affiliates that frequently participate in the facilitation and consummation of a single transaction. This organizational structure is designed to enhance the delivery of services to Merrill Lynch's diverse global client base and position it for worldwide growth. Merrill Lynch has organized its operations outside the United States into five regions, Europe, Middle East, and Africa; Japan; Asia Pacific/Australia; Canada, and Latin America. (Multex, 2002). Business Segments Corporate and Institutional Client Group The CICG businesses provide comprehensive investment banking, financing and related products and services to corporations, institutional clients and sovereign governments throughout the world. These activities are conducted through a network of subsidiaries, including Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated (MLPF&S), Merrill Lynch International (MLI) and a number of other subsidiaries located in and outside the United States. CICG's activities predominately involve providing investment banking and other strategic mergers and acquisition advisory services; underwriting; trading, both as a broker and as a dealer, in equity securities, including common stock, preferred 2007-01-29T05:26:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Merrill-Lynch-Company-And-Industry-Background-32485.aspx Examining the Ideal of Beauty in Print Advertising “Yes! Wow! I can be better starting right from this minute! Look at her! Look at her! But right afterward, I feel like throwing out all of my clothes and everything in my refrigerator and telling my boyfriend never to call me again and blowtorching my whole life” (Wolf 62). Sound familiar? This was just one young woman’s reaction after experiencing a beauty magazine. So, what prompts young women to buy these magazines if the net worth ends up falling on the not so promising side? Well where else is a woman going to find the latest new product or technique for improving her image then from the very source that created her feelings of inadequacy! When examining the factors that contribute to a culturally ideological view of female beauty, it is not difficult to place blame on advertising companies. To obtain a better understanding of this, one must not only look at the model or celebrity endorsing or representing a particular product, but also take into consideration all of the different components that complete this socially unrealistic standard. These components all play a role in designing the notions to which our culture presides. By creating a manufactured image to represent a cultural idea, print advertisements featured in beauty magazines greatly contribute to a fabricated myth of beauty—producing an extremely negative impact on American women. Take a closer look…hence, “beauty” magazine (as if it were only so simple to buy a magazine that would ensure beauty). Unfortunately, women fail to recognize and accept the unrealistic ideals that they are convinced of over and over again. Not very often do women see a magazine on a rack and consider the process taken to create such eye-candy. These are manufactured images! Who wouldn’t look good in a photograph after being captured at the right angle in the right light with the perfect background, only then to be retouched and shaped up with a little airbrushing here and there? Dalma Heyn, editor of two women’s magazines, confirms: “that airbrushing age from a woman’s face is routine” (Wolf 82). An author agrees stating that, “Computer imaging—the controversial new technology that tampers with photographic reality—has been used for years in women’s magazines” (83). How funny it 2007-01-12T04:05:03-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Examining-the-Ideal-of-Beauty-in-Print-Advertising-32406.aspx Case Study of Revised Knowledge Retention System Overview It is becoming more apparent that in the post industrial era, a firm’s success or failure lies in its intellectual assets rather than in its physical assets. The predominance of high skill labour requirements, new computing and telecommunications technologies and an accelerating pace of change have initiated a dramatic shift in the ways companies compete in today’s market place. Firms are now recognising the need to organise and co-ordinate their information and knowledge sources in a way that allows them “corporate agility” to be able to sense and respond to constantly changing trends and markets, to encourage creativity and innovation, and to help their employees continuously learn and improve the productivity of their work. A knowledge-based approach to business will be the key to success in this new environment. Your company's intellectual assets – the proprietary knowledge it has developed and accumulated over time – are of critical value. Protecting those knowledge assets is increasingly difficult as senior expertise retires or moves to competitors. Knowledge Management People often confuse Information Management with Knowledge Management (KM). Often it's an exercise in efficiency, where they try to trim a few people but provide no new economic value. However though, rather than simply use KM to manage information overload and eliminate positions, it should be used to boost revenues by methods such as providing better information for proposals/projects that ultimately result in increased business. Knowledge Management (KM) is not about technology, it is mostly about people, information, and sharing. Knowledge Management offers exciting opportunities for transforming companies, however though it is also much harder than it looks to implement; typically not because of the technology, but because of the people. Current Implementation Issues with Knowledge Management Despite the obvious advantages of embracing a Knowledge Management culture there are still several common issues which can hinder it’s success: 1. Everyone agrees knowledge is key to competitive advantage, but few organisations are effectively managing theirs. 2. Executives believe the greatest pay-off from knowledge management will be in innovation, but their efforts to date seem focused on efficiency. 3. An organisation’s knowledge advantage depends mostly on people, however organisations don’t have their priorities straight. Suggested solutions to this issue could encompass: • mapping sources of internal expertise • establishing new knowledge roles • create networks of knowledge workers. 4. A “Chief Knowledge Officer” might play a valuable role in leading knowledge management efforts, however though this might just contribute to bureaucracy. 5. The 2007-01-11T19:35:14-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Case-Study-of-Revised-Knowledge-Retention-System-32369.aspx Flight Centre Graham Turner structured the company as families, villages and tribes. The creation of this unique system has also worked to the company’s advantage. It provides incentives based on outcomes. The Flight centre’s system is based on the idea that people work best in their preferred environment within the larger organisation rather than trying to fit them into the company’s mould. The employees believe ‘what gets rewarded gets done.’ they are hard workers but also enjoy the many social aspects of the company including buzz nights, award ceremonies and team get-togethers. This essay would focus on how flight centre has structured with the four aspects of the organisation structure. Explains how flight centre has integrated the Mintzberg’s five elements to its structure. This essay would also highlights the roles of functional and social specialization. Finally, the metaphors used by flight centre would be discussed. Structure of Flight Centre The importance of organisational structuring and restructuring to organisational effectiveness cannot be over emphasized. Effective organisational design or organisational structuring pays immense dividends, no matter how large or small the organisation is (HRODC , 2006). The founder of the Flight Centre Ltd, Graham Turner claims that people are hard wired to work in small groups within larger groups. To understand this unique structure the four aspects of organisation structure, complexity, formalization, centralization and coordination, can be used. Complexity refers to the way in which the organization is divided into different divisions, departments, groups, or individual roles, each with its own tasks and responsibilities. Vertical differentiation refers to the number of hierarchical levels in an organization (Robbins & Barnwell, 2006). At the Flight centre, the operation level involves retail shops. Each shop involves three to seven people working on one brand which is called a family. The area or a ‘village’ involves 7 or 10 families within one geographical region. The tribal country is a set of three or four villages. Each tribe is a different brand, brands include corporate traveler, flight centre and student flights (refer appendix 1). In horizontal differentiation, different parts of the organization become specialized in different activities to increase efficiency (Robbins & Barnwell, 2006). All shops of flight centre sell similar services even though the names (corporate traveler, flight centre and student flights) are different which makes it easy to coordinate activities and to communicate among families. Moreover, due to the similarities of jobs within a family, there 2007-01-11T06:41:58-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Flight-Centre-Case-Study-32368.aspx Understanding the External Marketing Environment INTRODUCTION “All businesses operate within an environment, which directly or indirectly affects the way in which they function, just as we as consumers live within a cultural and social environment which to a greater or lesser degree determines the way in which we behave as individuals.” said Elaine O’Brien, University of Strathclyde. Unlike the controllable marketing mix variables, the environmental forces are not controllable by marketers. However, marketers can control how they deal with those uncontrollable forces by identifying and monitoring those forces that are relevant to their firms. They also must forecast changes in these forces if they are to develop effective marketing plans and strategies. All organizations operate within environments. That is, all profit-making and not-for-profit organizations are surrounded by, and must contend with, external forces. Managers cannot govern the nature of these environmental forces. These uncontrollable influences affect consumers’ behaviour and organizations’ development of effective marketing mixes. Conceptually, the forces that comprise the marketing environment are viewed as existing at two levels. They are categorized as micro and macro influences. The microenvironment consists of those forces that directly affect the marketing programs of a particular firm. The activities of marketing intermediaries, company, customers, suppliers, and competitors are all examples of external forces that influence the marketing actions of a specific organization. The macro environment encompasses the broad environmental system within which all organizations must conduct business. In one sense, it defines or creates the structure of the marketplace for all organizations. The particular elements that make up the macro-environment are demographic trends, economic, natural, socio and cultural influences, political and legal issues, and technological advances. In this study, we are going to evaluate the extent to which the macro-environment affects marketing decisions. “Companies and their suppliers, marketing intermediaries, customers, competitors, and publics al operate in a macro environment of forces and trends that shape opportunities and pose threats. These forces represent ‘noncontrollables’, which the company must monitor and respond to”. (Kotler, Millennium Edition) Although these forces are described separately below, marketers must pay attention to their causal interaction, since these sets the stage for new opportunities as well as threats. For example, population growth (demographic) leads to more resource depletion and pollution (natural environment), which leads consumers to call for more laws (political/legal) to reduce environmental damage. The imposed restrictions stimulate new technological solutions and products (technology), which if they are affordable 2007-01-11T05:26:24-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Understanding-the-External-Marketing-Environment-32358.aspx Specifying Management Information Introduction Startle Distribution was originally part of the Telstar Record Label. In 1999, following a management buy out, Startle became independent of the Telstar Group. Startle is a music and video distributor of physical and digital products. Physical product is defined as CD, DVD and VHS, whilst digital distribution is Liquid Audio and MP3 file streaming. Startle Distribution services the middle of the supply chain from record label companies and film studio to independent retailers. Startle has very diverse clients with differing needs e.g. Independent Retail Chains requiring only good discounts and reliable service to small specialist record stores needing marketing and product management support. Startle employs 160 staff over 3 locations: Chelsea, Enfield and Telford. Some of the staff, notably sales, work from home and “on the road”. They will call in to one of the offices monthly. The Business Issue Information sharing is required amongst key departments: marketing, sales, finance and procurement (buying) to maximise sales and improve management of clients. The current situation Clients are not receiving marketing offers and sales information relevant to their business from Startle. Startle’s competitors are presenting lower quality sales offers but winning the business from the Client. Sales representatives, remote from the office, are visiting the clients regularly. When they arrive at the client’s office they have very little prior knowledge of communication between other Startle departments and the client. In some cases they have even visited clients only to discover, from the client, that the client is on credit stop, making it impossible to achieve a sale and set the correct environment for potential negotiations. Sales representatives are constantly being made aware, again by the clients, of the campaigns and support that Startle’s competitors are able to offer such as point of sale and returns allowances. The sales representatives are frustrated by not being able to support the clients desires to grow their market share e.g. into new formats such as DVD. The marketing department has excellent relationships with, and understanding of, the record labels and film studios. Marketing is trying to grow client business with offers based around the record labels and film studios needs that are not necessarily the same as the client’s. Startle has produced some of the most innovative trade and consumer campaigns and these have been recognised with industry awards e.g. the Sisqoo, Thong Song E-Flier. The marketing 2007-01-11T05:01:14-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Specifying-Management-Information-32354.aspx A Future of Marketing without Television Commericials The growth of technology has dramatically changed the way in which marketers deliver their message to our homes. The development of the internet and interactive television has meant that TV commercials and print media are no longer the only main methods of advertising. This has led to the development and consideration of a number of new advertising techniques which perhaps are more suited to modern society. Keeping up to date is important to advertising agencies as it is their job to find the best way to expose the public to brands. This essay will look at whether the new marketing channels available will lead to the demise of TV commercials. Bob Jeffrey, president of J.Walter Thompson has declared that conventional TV advertising is obsolete. He is followed by many others in the opinion that the future of advertising lies in the convergence of TV and computer. This will form a multifaced, interactive medium wherein old fashioned sales pitches simply wont work. Therefore the future of television will become increasingly in the hands of the viewer, allowing them to chose programme schedules and cut out adverts. Nike have taken the first steps towards this merged television and internet approach. They created an advert in which a man is being chased, half way through the chase the advert stops and prompts the viewer to look at the web site for a choice of endings. Television networks feared that the advert would be so successful that viewers would actually leave the programme they are watching to visit the site. This caused many networks to refuse to screen it which in fact hints at the potential for success in this style. Nike are not the only company to use the internet as a way of advertising. Increasingly more television adverts are followed by the companies web address. The theory behind this is that a television advert is the window to look into, whereas a web site allows you through the door. What this says is that the audience can not interact with the TV adverts but the web allows people access to a variety of menus, email the company, and receive specific information. In agreement to this Bob Herbold of Microsoft has stated that in the future “you will see more brands do good things for 2007-01-11T04:54:39-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-Future-of-Marketing-without-Television-Commericials-32352.aspx The Business of TV Guide The weekly periodical TV Guide needs to both create and market two new products, TV Guide On Screen, and TV Guide Online. These two new forms of the periodical should be worked on and made available to the consumer as soon as possible, as there are several companies working to undermine TV Guide’s dominance in the industry and are threatening to beat them to the new and informative mediums. Perhaps the most logical way to have the new products gain recognition is to heavily advertise through various forms, ranging from print, radio, and even on television. To help fund and launch advertising campaign, it would be advisable for the publishers of TV Guide to collaborate with the many other companies that News Corporation owns which could, conceivably, reduce the costs of starting the programs. If TV Guide is able to strike a deal with the New York Post, Boston Globe, or one of the many television stations affiliated with News Corporation, there would be a great number of consumers exposed to the new services offered, therefore helping boost the new TV Guide products. In this document, I will explain how TV Guide can develop new means of communication in the television programming schedules. The new developments carry a huge responsibility because they will decide the fate of TV Guide; if they succeed, TV Guide will remain a high quality, informative product for TV viewers everywhere, if they don’t succeed, TV Guide will surely be phased out by its competitors. Background & History TV Guide, founded by a Walter Annenburg in 1953, is a weekly magazine that informs its readers of television program schedules, cover stories about television shows as well as interviews with television celebrities. TV Guide, over time, became the third largest US magazine, as measured by revenue, and in 1994 was the most circulated weekly periodical. At that time, 14 million copies were in circulation each week, which is considerably fewer than the 1979 peak of 19 million. In 1988, TV Guide was sold to News Corporation (“News Corp.”), a worldwide firm in control of newspapers, publishing companies, television stations and satellite companies, periodicals and the like. TV Guide was reportedly sold for a sum of 2.8 billion dollars. News Corp. wanted more than to merely own TV Guide, they were interested in expanding it, and moving it into new and progressive technologies to increase 2007-01-11T04:41:44-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Business-of-TV-Guide-32347.aspx Distributed Project Management: A Proposal For Change Major changes within this organization over the past few years has lead to significant problems arising from the management of certain information systems development projects. It has been identified that these problems can be directly attributed the dispersion of team members across a number of locations throughout the country. Given that this situation is likely to be compounded with the introduction of vendors in other countries, it is timely that an investigation be conducted to expand on the problems of the past and to collect information on issues related to distributed project management. Amongst some of the findings, it became evident that most problems could be condensed down to three main issues: time, location and cultural differences. Each of these issues makes a significant impact on how a distributed project should be approached. The tactics required to deal with these issues will need to be well understood by all involved in any future projects. The most effective method of ensuring this, is to document how these issues will be addressed within the confines of the project plan. In addition to this, it is expected that a project management software application will assist in minimising the affects of time, location and cultural differences. 1. Introduction In recent times, it has become evident that the traditional approach to project management in the area of information systems has not been entirely successful. It is well documented that certain projects have consistently failed to meet their requirements, are not delivered on time or within budget. This situation has been compounded by the recent shift by this organization in outsourcing major elements of its IT functions to outside vendors. Clearly a change is required in the way this organization undertakes the management of its IT projects. The purpose of this proposal is to outline some of the options that the organization must adopt to better manage future IT projects and to achieve more positive results. However, it has been identified that at the heart of past problems has been a misunderstanding of the current nature of project management efforts in the organization. Recent changes have lead to project teams being more dispersed throughout the country. Future changes will see this dispersion extending to a global level. Therefore, the major issues arising from managing projects in such a dispersed or distributed manner is needed. The final step will be to provide detail on 2007-01-11T03:53:12-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Distributed-Project-Management-A-Proposal-For-Change-32339.aspx The Core Competencies Of Daimler Chrysler INTRODUCTION: Theory and Principles In 2002 companies will continue to grow and become market leaders only if there ability to examine the companies core competencies by identifying, cultivating, and exploiting these competencies continues now and beyond into the future. Failure to do so could be catastrophic for even the most powerful of companies, not in the short run but over time competitors will get ahead and the technology gap is so significant in core competencies that these corporations will never be able to catch up. That is why as we progress into the 21st century core competencies of a company is what is going to keep the company competitive and ahead of the rest, and on the brink of technological breakthroughs in their specified area. In this new-economy world, where companies compete on the basis of core competencies and relationships, human resources (meaning a skilled and knowledgeable workforce) will emerge as a key source of competitive advantage. Core competencies, by definition, are “knowledge sets and technical skill sets,” (Vicere, 2001) which is “the collective learning of the company as a whole” (Prahalad & Hamel, 1990). Thus, core competencies of a company will only get stronger as application or the sharing of ideas and or poaching of personnel enhances them. Just as easily “core competencies can also diminish if they are not being applied or shared within a company relating to Strategic Business Units (SBU)” (Kotler, Armstrong, Brown & Adam, 1998). Strategic alliances between companies is emerging, and this encompasses the merging of two companies core competencies and producing core competence, core products and end products which no other company can rival, thus producing technological breakthroughs which previously seemed impossible. The goal of core competencies is “to build world leadership in design and development of a particular class of product functionality” (Bradmore, Joy, Kimberley, & Walker, 1997). Having advantages and control over core products is critical for several reasons. A dominant position in core competencies and core products enables a company “to shape the evolution of applications and end markets” (Jain, 2000). Strategic core products born from the evolution of core competencies leads companies to economies of scale and scope. It should be noted that cultivating core competencies does not necessarily mean spending millions and millions on research and development, rather “core competency is: co-ordination of production skills, integrating technologies, organisation of work, delivery of value, communication, 2007-01-11T03:48:30-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Core-Competencies-Of-Daimler-Chrysler-32338.aspx Creativity and innovation are the lifeblood of an organization. New ideas can lead to programs that are superior to those that are already going on or planned in the organization. By using brainstorming, a powerful decision making tool, it can effectively generating radical ideas, and help people break out their thinking patterns into new ways of looking at things. The purpose of a brainstorming session is to work as a group to define a problem, and find, through a team member’s intervention, the best group decision for a plan of action to solve it. (Bartle, 2003, p1) We need to understand that we are aiming the success for the team, not for an individual. While utilizing this approach to decision making it is helpful to create some ground rules in order to maximize efficiency. Some ground rules that we can use as following: · Criticism of ideas isn't allowed. · All ideas, no matter how wild, are encouraged. · The more ideas, the better. · Every participant should try to build on or combine the ideas of others. (Bradbury, 2004, p1) Brainstorming involves quickly recording a broad list of ideas, which can then be expanded and evaluated. During a brainstorming session, ideas should be generated as quickly as possible in order to develop the most creative and varied list of alternatives. Participants in the brainstorming process should come from as wide a range of disciplines as possible. This brings a broad range of experience to the session and helps to make it more creative. There are several different brainstorming processes, such as round robin, nominal technique, and Post-It Note brainstorming (DeJanasz, Dowd, and Schneider, 2001, p398). I am working in AR department in a large employment service Company. My manager often use round robin brainstorming process to collect team members’ ideas during meetings. In the last meeting, the topic we discussed was how to save time and space for the back-up copies. Since we are required to keep at lease two copies for every transaction, plus our company is expanding, it became harder and harder to keep up with the filing, storing and research with our current system. After the topic was announced, we think about the question for a few moments, and then one by one, we give some ideas or suggestions. Ideas such as, request additional storage room, buy a scanner, hire some people, and upload files into Internet, etc. After all the ideas have been 2007-01-08T08:35:51-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Tool-and-Techniques-Brainstorming-32271.aspx Advertising and its Appeal to Society Today we live in a society that is being dominated and confounded by commercials and ads. A new age, which could be referred to as the advertising age where commercials and ads tell us what is a necessity and what isn’t. Howard Luck Gossage in his book Is There Any Hope for Advertising? Stated that there are ads and commercials everywhere around us in which there is no escape. “I like to imagine a better world where there will be less, and more stimulating advertising. I suppose all of us would like to see this come to pass, it would certainly clear away some of the confusion from advertising’s murky picture and make it easier to comprehend” (7). Ads and commercials have flourished everywhere like a virus, once it strikes there is no way we can remove the marks it left behind. It creates this blurry, confusing picture, a “murky picture” as Gossage stated, which most people won’t find the genuine truth behind what the product really mean and if its really useful or not. Advertising forces consumers into buying products by manipulation which make the customers buy products they think are good for them when in fact it isn’t and they do this by appealing in their innermost desires. Advertisers are aware of the cultural need of acceptance and people’s insecurities and takes advantage of these desires to persuade people into buying their products. There are three significant aspects for advertising: 1) A persuading selling message, 2) prospects for the products or service, and finally 3) at the lowest possible cost (Jefkins 5). The first aspect deals with how to persuade people in believing that the product that is being advertised is absolutely salutary. The second however identifies which target group the commercial or the ad will be advertised to. Finally the last phase deals with the economical issues like how low the products price has to be in order to grasp the customer’s attention. Presumably the most popular aspect for advertising is the first aspect since advertising is all about using the right statements and pictures that would grasp the customer’s attention. It essentially aims to cause the customer at least look at the article to see a picture or a name of the product, which is being advertised. One way to 2007-01-06T21:20:06-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advertising-and-its-Appeal-to-Society-32260.aspx Union Bank and Trust “Expanding Abroad” 1. What would be UBT’s country risk exposure if it where to establish itself in Chile The political risk of Chile is minimum, which makes a very attractive country to start the Latin America Operations of UBT, since the dictatorial military regime led by Augusto Pinochet ended in 1990. After this period, a free elected president was installed and the economy has stabilized from 1991-1997 and has helped the country to secure the country towards a democratic and representative government. Growth slowed in 1998-99, but recovered strongly in 2000. Chile has a well establish government that also reduces the political risk to enter the country. The government is divided in three branches: Executive, legislative, and judicial. Executive power with president directly elected; successive reelection not allowed. Presidential candidates must win a majority or face a runoff. Under a constitutional reform approved by Congress in February 1994, the presidential term was reduced from eight to six years, the traditional term. In addition, Chile is a perfect country to establish a UBT division since it maintains relations with more than seventy countries. The restoration of democratic government in 1990, has reestablished political and economic ties with other Latin American countries, North America, Europe, and Asia. United States-Chilean relations have improved considerably since return to democracy and progress on issue of 1976 assassination in Washington of former Chilean ambassador to United States Orlando Letelier and United States citizen Ronnie Moffitt. Although shunning multilateral regional integration schemes, entered into bilateral tariff-cutting accords with individual Latin American countries--including Argentina, Bolivia, Colombia, and Mexico--in early 1990s, as well as negotiated framework trade agreement with United States in October 1990. Since joining the Mercosur Group in 1991, has played active role in promoting democracy within inter-American system. Indicators: GDP: purchasing power parity: $ 153.1 billion (2000 estimate) GPD real growth rate: 5.5% (2000 estimate) GPD per capita: purchasing power parity: $10,100 (2000 estimate) GDP composition by sector: Agriculture: 8% Industry: 38% Services: 54% Population below poverty line: 22% Household income or consumption by percentage share lowest 10%: 1.2% Highest 10%: 41.3 Inflation rate (consumer prices): 4.5% Labor force: 5.8 million Labor force by occupation: Agriculture: 14% Industry: 27% Services: 59% Unemployment rate: 9% Budget: Revenues: 16 billion Expenditures: $17 billion Major Industries: Cooper, foodstuffs, fish processing, iron and steel, wood products, transport equipment, cement, textiles. Industrial growth rate: 6% Agriculture: wheat, corn, grapes, beans, sugar beets, potatoes, fruit, beef, poultry, wool, fish, timber. Exports: $ 18 billion (fob 2000) Export commodities: cooper, fish, paper, chemicals. Export partners: EU 27% USA 16% Japan 14% Brazil 6% Argentina 5% Imports: $17 billion (fob 2000) Import commodities: consumer goods, chemicals, motor vehicles, fuels, electrical, machinery, food. Import partners: US 24% EU 23% Argentina 11% Brazil 6% Japan 6% Mexico 5% Debt - external: $39 billion (2000) Economic aid – recipient ODA, $40 2007-01-06T18:25:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Union-Bank-and-Trust-Expanding-Abroad-32248.aspx Comparing the Business Principles of Carnegie and Lloyd “Survival of the fittest”(502 Lloyd): it is the law of businesses from past to present. Within two very interesting excerpts from Andrew Carnegie’s, “Wealth” and William Demarest Lloyd’s, “Wealth Against Commonwealth”, we as the reader get smacked in the face with two very different views. Although both writers have a common ground of money being the main issue, they differ on how it should or should not be administered from the rich to the poor. I believe both writers present us with good points, but the question left unanswered is, where do I position myself between the two? I agree with Carnegie’s beliefs on distributing wealth, but I think most businesses fall under Lloyd’s argument of people not caring about the less fortunate. In the excerpt from “Wealth”, Carnegie’s ideas are that of a kinder solution to aiding the poor. Do not confuse the word kinder with donations, because he completely disagrees with hand out donations. His belief’s involve “ In bestowing charity, the main consideration should be to help those who will help themselves”.(458 Carnegie) Which in general means he will not give out donations to people who, he believes, are lazy. He in effort to help the less fortunate for example: would build a library where the poor could educate themselves. I very much agree with his way of thinking, because this is the only way to ensure his money is actually helping, not going toward a bottle of whiskey. But I believe Carnegie is being naïve in his thinking that most wealthy people will donate their money to the less fortunate. Although it sounds like “the right thing to do”, I just don’t think many businesses in the past or present care about doing “the right thing.” On the other hand I believe “Wealth Against Commonwealth” is a more realistic example of what millionaires do with their money. In this except we read of the harsh reality businesses went through before there were governmental regulations. Lloyd shows us the cruel world that we live in, which we accept without thought. He shows us how businesses as well as wealthy people think. “The principles of business--to get the most and give the least.”(504 Lloyd) This is how I believe not only rich people but all people think, whether they admit 2007-01-04T23:26:36-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comparing-the-Business-Principles-of-Carnegie-and-Lloyd-32231.aspx Standard and Poors 500 Index An Index consisting of 500 stocks chosen for market size, liquidity, and industry group representation. It is a market-value weighted index (stock price times number of shares outstanding), with each stock's weight in the Index proportionate to its market value. Some say, it’s a company that rates stocks and corporate and municipal bonds according to risk profiles and that produces and tracks the S&P indices. S&P also publishes a variety of financial and investment reports. The S&P 500 is considered to be a benchmark of the overall stock market. What is an Index? The first and consequently most widely known index was created back on May 26, 1896 by Mr. Charles Dow. At that time the Dow index contained 12 of the largest public companies in the US. Today, the Dow Jones Industrial Average (DJIA) contains 30 of arguably the largest and most influential companies in the US and World economy. We will discuss the composition of the DJIA later in this tutorial. The basic definition of an index is "a statistical measure of the changes in a portfolio of stocks representing a portion of the overall market". Before the computer age, calculating the price of a stock market index had to be kept as simple as possible. The original DJIA was calculated by adding up the prices of the 12 companies and then dividing that number by 12. These calculations were actually more like an average than an index, but it served its purpose. Today computers do most of the work and the indexes are much more accurate to the market. For example, many of the larger indexes now are based on the market capitalization of a company's stock rather than the stock price alone. Each stock index is slightly different. They include different types and amounts of stock. Some are even calculated in a slightly different manner to portray a different statistical measure. The Standard & Poors 500 Index As we just mentioned, the main problem with the DJIA is that it only contains 30 companies. The S&P 500 attempts to fix that problem by including 500 companies. As a result the index includes over 2/3 (at time of writing) of US market capitalization. More and more, it is being considered to be the benchmark of the US stock markets. Furthermore when mutual funds state that they have outperformed the market they are usually referring to the S&P 500. Created By: Standard and 2007-01-03T21:30:29-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Standard-and-Poors-500-Index-32205.aspx Telecommunication Infrastructure in Malaysia Executive summary The writer of this report is working as the Vice President of Competitive Intelligence (vPCI) on a multi-national and multi-business company. The CEO has asked the vPCI to investigate whether the company should enter the Malaysian market. The company’s product is telecommunication infrastructures. The purpose of the report is to analyze and evaluate a major telecommunication infrastructure development in Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, from January 2003 and for the following five years. Furthermore, the vPCI is supposed to prepare a briefing for the Board of Directors to indicate how a relevant competitive intelligence system might be established. The 3G industry in Malaysia is on its move, the licenses to offer products and services in the 3G infrastructure will be awarded in July, 2002. The government’s will is that, no matter how many licenses, only one infrastructure system should be put up. In the SEPT-analysis, I found that Malaysia is an attractive country to enter since its economy will continue to grow. Furthermore, the government is eager to achieve industrialized nation status, which increases the driving forces for new technology in Malaysia. In Porter’s five-forces-model I found that the telecommunication industry is not that attractive in Malaysia, due to few customers and high competition. I think the only cost for trying to get the infrastructure contract is to set up a CI system and monitor customers, competitors and country issues as government statements and economical changes. Since the costs for setting up the CI system and the annual monitor costs are low compared to the potential, I think we should try to get the contract. Concerning the CI system, I think we have to set up one immediately in order to monitor our customers, competitors, and country issues. The team should consist of managers from every function of the company. The team’s tasks is to identify sources, collect data and information, analyze data and synthesize information, and make strategic proposals to the CEO and Directors of the Board. Table of contents 1 Introduction 1 2 Introduction to the industry 2 2.1 Industry outline 2 2.2 Telecommunication’s relevance 3 3 Analysis 3 3.1 Analysis of country issues 3 3.1.1 Social factors 3 3.1.2 Economic factors 4 3.1.3 Political factors 4 3.1.4 Technological factors 5 3.2 Analysis of city issues 5 3.3 Analysis of industry issues 6 4 Competitive intelligence system 7 4.1 Evaluation of the CI system 8 5 Strategic advises 9 6 References 10 6.1 Authors 10 6.2 Articles on World Wide Web 10 6.3 Articles on World Wide Web (no author) 10 6.4 World Wide Web, organizations 11 6.5 World Wide Web, competitors 11 Appendix A 12 Country outline 12 Appendix B 14 City outline 14 Appendix C 15 Evaluation of the sources 15 Appendix D 16 Setup and annual cost of the CI system 16 1 Introduction The background of this report is that the writer is working as the vice 2007-01-03T21:28:04-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Telecommunication-Infrastructure-in-Malaysia-32204.aspx Retail Ownership and Important Analyses Owning a wine shop, as with any small business, requires a lot of time a dedication. There are many skills required some of which can be learned in a college classroom, others come from personal experience and the advice of others. The most important skills needed for this job are the ability to satisfy customers (knowledge of the product, communications skills, etc.), marketing (Creating desirable image and public awareness), creating customer loyalty (share of customer, creating return business) and the ability to efficiently run your business (Break-even Analysis, making budgets and forecasting, Gross Profit margin). Secondary skills that are needed include delegation, management skills (the ability to surround yourself with the right people to be successful, getting most out of your employees, creating feelings of loyalty and dedication, Inventory control) There are multiple math skills required in owning and operating a wine shop. Most of them revolve around basic math skills but very important to the success of the business. One of the most important is the ability to mentally figure out discounts and markups quickly. This is very important when talking with clients. Another important skill is being able to figure out your gross profit margin, this is done be using the formula: Sale Price minus Cost divided by Sale price. Another important skill is forecasting, this is the prediction of the productivity of the business over a period of time. In order to do this you have to be able to recognize patterns in growth or decline of the business over the past years, and how the economy effects the growth of the business. This is important because it influences the business’s plans for buying, advertising, and expansion. In order to run any business efficiently a proper background is needed. This comes from taking the proper courses in college to prepare yourself. Even though most of what you need to know about particular businesses is learned in the real world, a strong background can prevent you from making many common mistakes and can save you a lot of time and money early. The important courses are as follows. Finance addresses the ways in which individuals, business entities, and other organizations allocate resources over time. Finance is an applied branch of economics, a very important part of this course 2007-01-03T21:17:19-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Retail-Ownership-and-Important-Analyses-32199.aspx Company Description of Dewhirst Group Plc Dewhirst Group Plc manufactures and distributes clothing and toiletries. Operations are carried out in the United Kingdom, Malaysia, Morocco and Indonesia. Manufacture of clothing accounted for 91% of revenues for the year ended 14th Jan 2000 and toiletries accounted for 9%. Competitor Analysis Dewhirst Group Plc operates in the Diversified Apparel Mfrs. sub-industry, which is a sub sector of the Apparel & Textiles industry. They supply clothing to companies such as Marks & Spencer’s and also police uniform. This analysis compares Dewhirst Group Plc with, Worthington Group Plc (2000 sales: £26.47 million of which 100% was Textile Products). Worthington Group Plc manufactures, imports and distributes sewing threads, narrow textile fabrics, pocketing, waistbands, specialist linings, buttons, shoulder pads, interlinings, elastics and other trimmings and accessories. The clothing, home furnishing and industrial markets uses these products. All of the group's subsidiary undertakings are registered and operates in the United Kingdom. Sales Analysis Dewhirst Group Plc reported sales of £380.40 million for the year ending January of 2000. This represents a very small increase of 0.06% versus 1999, when the company's sales were £380.15 million. Sales at Dewhirst Group Plc have increased during each of the previous five years (and since 1994, sales have increased a total of 54%). Recent Sales at Dewhirst Group Plc 247 279 316 364 380 380 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 (Figures in Millions of Pounds Sterling) Just over half of the company's 1999 sales were in its home market of the United Kingdom: in 1999, this region's sales were £198.13 million, which is equivalent to 52.1% of total sales. In 1999, sales in Morocco were up at a rate that was much higher than the company as a whole: in this region, sales increased 35.3% to £88.76 million. Dewhirst Group Plc also experienced significant increases in sales in Malaysia (up 17.4% to £30.89 million). Although the company's overall sales increased, sales were not up in all regions of the world: sales in the company's home market of the United Kingdom were down 16.4% (to £198.13 million) and sales in Rest of Europe fell 18.2% (to £29.10 million) and sales in Rest of World fell 19.4% (to £1.42 million). Dewhirst Group Plc currently has 14,749 employees. With sales of £380.40 million, this equates to sales of £25, 791 per employee. This is lower than the Worthington Group Plc whose sales per employee equated to £29 2007-01-03T21:01:18-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Description-of-Dewhirst-Group-Plc-32191.aspx Honda's American Subsidiary, the American Honda Motor Company The American Honda Motor Company was established as a subsidiary by Honda in 1959. During the 1960's the type of motorcycles brought by Americans underwent a major change. Motorcycle registrations increased by over 800,000 in five years from 1960. In the early 60's the major competitors were Haley - Davidson of U.S.A, BSA, Triumph and Norton of the UK and Motto - Guzzi of Italy. Harley-Davidson had the largest market share with sales in 1959 totaling a6.6 million dollars. Many of the motorcycles produced were large and bulky and this led to the image of the motorcycle rider as being one who wore a leather jacket and went out to cause trouble. The Boston Consulting Group ( BCG ) report was initiated by the British government to study the decline in British motorcycle companies around the world, especially in the USA where sales had dropped from 49% in 1959 to 9% in 1973. The two key factors the report identified was the market share loss and profitability declines an the scale economy disadvantages in technology, distribution, and manufacturing. The BCG report showed that success of the Japanese manufacturers started with the growth of their own domestic markets. The high production for domestic demand led to Honda experiencing economies of scale as the cost of producing motorbikes declined with the level of output. This provided Honda to achieve a highly competitive cost position which they used to penetrate into the US market. " The basic philosophy of the Japanese manufacture is that high volumes per model provide the potential for high productivity as a result of using capital intensive and highly automated techniques. Their marketing strategies are therefore directed towards developing these high model volumes, hence the careful attention that we have observed them giving to growth and market share." (BCG p.59 ). The report goes on to show how Honda built up engineering competencies through the innovation of Mr Honda. The company also moved away from other companies who relied upon distributors to sell their bikes when the company set up its headquarters in the west coast of America. The BCG found that the motorcycles available before Honda entered the market were for limited group of people such as the police, army etc. But Honda had a "policy of selling, not primarily to confirmed motorcyclists but rather to members of the general public 2007-01-03T16:18:45-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Honda-s-American-Subsidiary-the-American-Honda-Motor-Company-32190.aspx Key Differences in British and American Advertising Although Britain and the United States may seem very similar in culture and belief because they share a language, there are many factors that differentiate the two. Both are highly developed technological nations. Also, both countries are leaders in the world’s economy. Because of this, both nations have very diverse markets appealing to many different types of consumers. From an advertising standpoint, companies and strategies may seem similar, but after researching, it is clear to see that there are many differences. American culture is made up of many different cultures. In the U.S., there are numerous nationalities, races, religions, and social classes. The same is true of England. For this reason, advertising must appeal to a large variety of interests. Certain ads for specific products are targeted for specialized consumers. Others are aimed to the general public. An example of a target ad would be for a particular store, while one aimed at the general public would be for a healthcare service. When advertising is done on an international level, it is extremely important to be sensitive of different cultures. This is because something that may be a common phrase in one culture may be offensive in another. This often occurs when advertisements are translated from one language to another. A slogan or word that may be positive, promoting a product in American culture, may mean something obscene when it is translated for the same product in another country. Although English is the language spoken in both the United States and in Britain, words and phrases in ads have different meanings. It is clear to understand the meaning of the advertisements themselves, but certain words may be uncommon to our everyday vocabulary. Product brands are different as well. After researching a number of British fashion magazines, I have selected five print advertisements that have comparable differences to American advertisements. The first ad that I have chosen to interpret is for Virgin Atlantic, a British airline. I found this ad very interesting because the copy is written in a diary form. It begins on Friday August 3, 2001 and ends on the opposite page on Saturday August 4, 2001. The first entry describes the passenger’s thoughts on how the flight will affect her personally. Such things are that she’s not 2007-01-03T15:53:54-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Key-Differences-in-British-and-American-Advertising-32185.aspx Industry Report on Telecommunications Technology Today, telecommunications technology affects lives to a greater degree than ever before. Communication has evolved over many years from the earliest attempts at verbal communication to the use of sophisticated technology to enhance the ability to communicate effectively with others. Every time a telephone call is made, a television is watched, or a personal computer is used, benefits of telecommunication technologies are being received. The concept of telecommunications may be defined as the transmission of information from one location to another by electronic means. Telecommunications is using electronic systems to communicate. Life is changing constantly and has been changing faster since the rapid advancements in telecommunication. Because of continuing attempts to find better and more efficient ways to communicate, the process of communication has steadily improved. Many of these improvements were made without the use of electronic technology. Human beings’ earliest attempts at communication were through nonverbal means such as facial expressions and gesturing. The use of these nonverbal signs, prehistoric people were able to communicate emotions such as fear, anger, and happiness. More specific motions, such as pointing, allowed them to convey more information . Verbal communication probably started with a series of disorganized but meaningful sounds (grunts and snarls). These sounds slowly developed into a system of organized, spoken language that truly allowed humans to share information (Croal 59). Writing, which is the use of symbols to represent language, began with early cave drawings, progressed to picture writings such as hieroglyphics, and finally evolved into the handwritten language we use today (Croal 61). As civilization developed, people found it necessary to communicate their ideas to one another over greater distances. The earliest method of transporting information was to carry it from place to place; but as the development of commerce made speed an essential part, greater effort was expended to increase the rate at which ideas were transmitted (Croal62). The search for rapid transport of information led to the formation of the pony express in 1860 (Cozic 77). Although the pony express required several weeks to carry mail from the East Coast to the West Coast, it was a vast improvement over the earlier methods. The pony express was not the only time humans teamed up with animals to attempt to improve communications. Dogs and pigeons were used to carry messages, especially during wartime . Most, if not all, of the early forms of communication 2007-01-03T15:36:19-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Industry-Report-on-Telecommunications-Technology-32181.aspx Media and Advertising for Clothing Companies “The more controversial our catalog and pictures are the more free press we get, and that leads to more people coming in to our stores buying our clothes." -Stylist @Abercrombie & Fitch At 15 years old I was flown out to Lake Placid, New York along with 50 other models form all around the world to shoot for the winter catalog for Abercrombie & Fitch. In the five days that I was there I learned and observed more about the modeling and advertising industry than during all my experiences up until that point. It was clear to me the second that I stepped off that private jet and into the limo service that I was in the real thing. We met with the other 40 models at a private ranch back in the Adirondack Mountains to be sized for our cloths, and as I found out later, to be sized up by the staff working the job. I feel my view of the job was completely different than that of other models there. I was there for fun, to make some money. I did not really care about the exposure or the thought of hitting it big. To me $1500 a day for 3 days was more than anyone could ask for. It felt like I was in a sort of utopia, 49 of the most gorgeous men, women, girls and boys I have ever seen all in one place. Everyone of the models hoping that they have that one thing that will catch the photographer’s eye and send them to the cover of the next catalog, and possibly to the “top”. We stayed in a huge hotel with a private gym and swimming pool that was only for the models of A&F. This is where their psychology began. They set us up all in private, elegant hotel, and had every meal fully catered to us. They made us feel like we were getting the best deal possible, when I thought all they were asking in return was for us to model and smile for the camera. Little did I know that the work went a little deeper than that. The photographer was taking people aside often to do nude shoots and other things that I only heard bit and pieces about. They asked me to ride on a horse with a naked 2006-12-20T03:01:36-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Media-and-Advertising-for-Clothing-Companies-32117.aspx Mass Media Marketing Research Companionship In The Classifieds: The Adoption of Personal Advertisements by Daily Newspapers. A study by Debra L. Merskin an assistant professor in the school of Journalism and Communication and Mara Huberlie a graduate student at the S.I. Newhouse School at Syracuse University, published in J&MC Quarterly, Vol. 73, No.1, Spring 1996, Pages 219-229. The article deals with the issue of finding a romantic partner, in the modern urbanized society, via personal advertisements in mass mediums. This study investigates the presence of media dependency in every day life, and the adoption of newspapers of the personal advertisements. The research was conducted as follows: A telephone, or fax survey was conducted, in a population of 268 daily newspapers with a circulation of 50,000 or more copies per day. A randomly selected sample of 67 newspapers has been chosen using a systematic skip interval system. The randomly selected sample represents 25% of the population. Newspaper managers have been interviewed during normal circumstances and a 100% response rate was achieved. These managers have been interviewed according to a ten-item questionnaire, and an answer sheet was one to verify the replies. The questionnaire offered a diversity in term of questions, from which, whether the newspaper was running voice personals, year of adoption, the criteria of rejecting ads, the mechanics of the ads, the days of publication for those ads, the method of response to those ads, and the cost of each. The researchers used the content of analysis method for studying and analyzing the issue in a systematic, objective and quantitative way. They have formulated two research questions: 1- To what extent have newspapers actually begun to provide personal advertisements? 2- What pattern did the adoptions follow over time? Then they have defined the population, which is equal to 268 newspaper. The selected sample has been drawn to 67. The categories of content to be analyzed have been chosen and were integrated in the addressed questions. A quantitative system of interpretation of results has been established and reflected the answers to the questions. Table and graphs portrayed the findings. An analyses of the results have been done and conclusions has been drawn as follows: 1- As society continues to become more complex and individuals become more isolated, men and women will turn to the media to find partners. 2- The daily press will respond in 2006-12-19T03:05:59-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Mass-Media-Marketing-Research-32052.aspx General Qualities of Leadership In life some people are cut out to be leaders and some are not. In the books Old Man in the Sea, A Raisin in the Son, and Lord of the Flies, have characters that show leadership qualities. My definition of a good leader is someone who does well for people and guides them in their ways. The characters from Lord of the Flies that I think have leadership qualities are Ralph, and Piggy. I think Ralph is a leader because he makes good decisions, and I feel Piggy would be a good leader because he is so intelligent. Santiago from Old Man in the Sea shows good leadership qualities by always staying positive. And Mama from A Raisin in the Sun is a leader because she is so fearless. The one quality that I think makes me a good leader is that I am outspoken and always listen to what other people have to say. I think that Ralph is a great leader in the novel The Lord of the Flies because he makes good decisions. Ralph is always positive through out the book by believing that someone would come rescue them. He believed in having assemblies and always having control and order over the others. He wanted to set fire to signal help and at the end of the book it did work, and they were rescued. He wanted to be the leader because he knew he would do a good job, and at first he was until jack took over. That was a bad move the island turned to mayhem and they became savages and killed one another. So overall Ralph would have been a great leader if Jack did not take over with the hunters. I think Santiago is a great leader in the novel Old Man in the Sea because he always stays positive throughout the whole book. The old man was still confident that he would catch a fish after 84 days of not catching a fish. And on the 85th day hooked a huge one and was confidant he could take it in. All through the fight for days of tearing up his hands he was still confident of reeling it in. Finally he pulled it up to the boat and speared it till it died. 2006-12-19T02:21:21-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/General-Qualities-of-Leadership-32044.aspx Benefits of TQM And ISO9002 Quality Standards Since the establishment of ISO 9000 international quality management standards in 1987, many companies in the world have implemented the system. The number of ISO 9000 certificates awarded grew by nearly 27% in 1999 compare to 1998, demonstrating the impact of ISO’s quality management standards on business activities worldwide. These are among the findings revealed by the ninth cycle of The ISO Survey, which updates the ISO 9000 certification picture to the end of 1999. The survey shows that twelve years after the ISO 9000 quality management standards were first published, their use is still increasing. Up to the end of 1999, 343,643 ISO 9000 certificates have been awarded worldwide. More than twenty years ago, people working in industries and commerce talked about the concept of TQM and did something for TQM in their companies. Today the competition in business world is extremely fierce. In order to increase market share and maintain business growth, companies are very concerned about the improvement of the quality of their products, services and customer satisfaction. More and more companies are introducing the ISO 9000 quality system all over the world. A company that has been awarded the ISO 9002 quality management standard is the law firm Andreas Neocleous & Co. Andreas Neocleous & Co is among a few law firms in the world to be awarded with the ISO 9002 for all the legal services that it offers. By obtaining the certification of ISO 9002 quality management standard, the firm is merely laying the foundation for the implementation of the Total Quality Management within its operations. Some companies and individuals think that ISO 9000 is just another name for TQM. The aim of this article is to investigate the relationship between ISO 9000 quality management standard and TQM and to provide a clearer picture for companies which are considering implementing these two quality improvement processes. What is Quality Quality can be interpret as “Customer’s expressed and implied requirements are met fully”. This is a core statement from which some eminent definitions of quality have derived. Some of the definitions are: “the totality of features and characteristics of a product or service that bears on its ability to meet a stated or implied need” (ISO standards of 1994), “fitness for 2006-12-18T18:11:50-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Benefits-of-TQM-And-ISO9002-Quality-Standards-32012.aspx This is a overview of the The Asian Financial Crisis 1997 and how it consequentially effected the Asian Market and its surrounding area. The work is done in Spanish. La crisis financiero Asiatic de 1997 - y las consecuencias en Asia y a otra parte Introducción La Crisis Financiera Asiática era una crisis financiera que comenzó en julio de 1997 en Tailandia y afectadas las monedas, mercado de valores, y precios de activo en varios países asiáticos, muchas consideraba East Asian Tigers (tigres asiáticos del este). También se refiere comúnmente como la crisis asiática del este; de la crisis moneda o localmente como la crisis del IMF/FMI (International Monetary Fund - Fondo Monetario Internacional) aunque el último es algo polémico. Indonesia, Sur del Corea y Tailandia eran los países más afectados por la crisis. Hong Kong, Malasia, Laos y las Filipinas, tierra firme China, India, Taiwán, y Singapur eran relativamente inafectados. Japón no fue afectado mucho por esta crisis sino pasaba con sus propias dificultades económicas a largo plazo. La crisis financiera asiática de 1997-99 vino como choque a la profesión de economía y a la comunidad internacional de la política. Pocos dentro o fuera de la región habían previsto la profundidad de los problemas económicos que siguieron, y un cuerpo amplio de escribir rápidamente emergió para ofrecer el poste-mortem competente. Mucho de este análisis, sin embargo, fue limitado a los factores puramente económicos. Las dimensiones políticas de la crisis fueron no hechas caso en gran parte. Todavía, todo los factores políticos ser crucial a entender el curso de la crisis así como las maneras de las cuales los gobiernos respondieron a ella. Aunque estuvo llamado la crisis "al este asiática" porque originó en Asia del este, sus efectos ondulados a través del globo y causó una crisis financiera global, con los efectos principales sentidos tan extensamente como Rusia, el Brasil, y los Estados Unidos. Historia y causas Hasta 1997, Asia casi atrajo mitad de la aportación de capitales total a los países en vías de desarrollo. Las economías de Asia sur oriental, en particular, mantenidos los altos tipos de interés fue atractivos a los inversionistas extranjeros que buscan un alto índice de la vuelta. Pues el resultado las economías de la región recibió una afluencia grande del dinero caliente, (el dinero que se mueve a través de país confina en respuesta a tipos de 2006-12-10T17:11:58-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Asian-Financial-Crisis-of-1997-31968.aspx Company Status of Apple Computers During the time of this case Apple Computer’s status was not looking too good. It was the close of fiscal fourth quarter of 1997 and Apple’s revenues were $1.6 billion, a 30% decrease from the year before. The company’s net loss for the quarter was $161 million compared to a net profit of $25 million the previous year. To get a better understanding of the company’s 1997 financial position with respect to the previous year see Exhibit 1 Apple’s Financial Ratio Analysis. Steven Jobs was once again in charge but only as acting CEO while Apple as in search of a new CEO. Prince Aliweed owned 5% of Apple and they were looking for suitors to by Apple and fix it. The decline in demand, resulting in losses and the combination of intense price competition led the company in it’s decision to continue restructuring it’s business in 1997. Apple Computer focused on reducing it’s core structure, improving its competitiveness, and restoring it’s sustainable profitability. In February 1997, Apple acquired NeXT. The purchase brought Steve Jobs back into the company. To better understand Apples position we need to analyze where they are currently at. The Positives- 1. Brand Recognition- It is no secret Apple has a world renowned brand name and catchy hardware design. Apple’s success was due to marketing and technological innovation in the high growth. 2. User Friendly Architecture- Apple kept the architecture of the Macintosh proprietary, and it could not be cloned like the open system IBM PC. This allowed them to charge a premium for their distinctive user friendly features. This user friendly feature not only helped them to take a large portion of the general market share it helped them to be the dominant player in schools. 3. Purchase of NeXT Software- The Acquisition of NeXT brought a host of talented quality programmers along with Steve Jobs and other executives. They knew Apple, the industry, and were full of vision which is what Apple desperately needed at this time. 4. Good Core Products- Apple had strong core products, the Macintosh still had a strong foot hold in the market. In the early 1990’s Apple sold more personal computers than any other computer company. Net Sales grew to over 7 Billion, net income to over $530 Million, and earnings per share to $4.33. The basis for these products allowed Apple 2006-12-08T03:12:10-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Status-of-Apple-Computers-31949.aspx Nothing inspires me more than a portion the speech by Dr. Martin Luther King Jr., the slain civil right leader “I have a dream of a nation where all our gifts and resources are held not for ourselves alone, but as instruments of service for the rest of humanity.” Since childhood, I dreamed, as did Dr. King who went on to inspire a nation to rethink the struggles of equality. I dream of teaching to inspire people to desire knowledge and enlighten our society that continued education is for, not only the elite, intelligent, and youthful population but for everyone. There are several reasons why this subject is important to me and hence the reason why I am writing for this scholarship. One reason why this issue is so important to me is that as a single parent I want to set an example that no matter where you are in life it is never too late to become more educated. During the last eight years, I have devoted a significant amount of time to my children’s education. Following an industrial injury more than ten years ago, I faced many obstacles of my own such as living with a debilitating disability that modifies my lifestyle. With the desire to administer knowledge, my quest for knowledge has intensified. Whereby discovering many children and young adults who needed my compassion for learning and patience to instruct. In this difficult era of educational standards, I volunteer at schools and libraries helping children become confident to read aloud and with greater comprehension and understand the concepts of math. Moreover, I realize that education in the earliest stages of life is changing with time and we must stay abreast of the changes. “No child left behind.” With the internet, informing and entertaining the young minds of our society through unconventional websites, the educators of today have little chance to set a positive impression. Those who find themselves unacquainted with these changes do not have the courage to become knowledgeable of new innovative ideals and means of learning. However, with the generous endowments made through individuals mindful of the value of higher education, my dreams are becoming real and goals accomplished. My interest in the education of my children and other young minds has driven to help children read more. Educators are unique 2006-12-07T07:13:04-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Martin-Luther-King-I-have-a-dream-31916.aspx Maximizing Visitor/Customer Experience With Reference to a large range of scales and a variety of settings describe ands explain the ways in which the Visitor Experience might be enhanced by different techniques of Visitor Management In order to illustrate the concepts of enhancing visitor experience through different techniques a broad range of settings and scales need to be introduced. With the use of these settings visitor experience can be summarised on a broad scale, and with such scales techniques can be provided that help enhance this experience. In this essay I am going to use three specific examples to provide an outline of the key techniques, which attractions use to promote visitor experience. On a large scale I will outline Wellingtons Westpac Trust Stadium. On a smaller scale I will outline an indoor and outdoor attraction at a local level. The indoor attraction is Zebos Bar and outdoor Miramar Golf Club. To illustrate these techniques I will break down the ‘Application of Principles of Strategic Management to Visitor Attractions’ models and provide information concerning areas and techniques which these attractions use to enhance visitor experience. Indirect controls are the nucleus of visitor management. These controls can be broken down into three subtopics. Legislative, Planning and Tenure. Legislative, controls entry and restrictions of the visitor. With reference to techniques used by visitor management, legislature holds a key step to success. It is used to decrease negative elements and ensure visitors have an enjoyable and memorable experience. Smoke-free legislation has been a key technique used. This ultimately enhances the visitor experience for those who do not smoke. Westpac Trust Stadium uses this technique with all smoking banned inside the ground. Areas have been allotted outside, creating the best of both worlds for the visitor. A technique also employed by Miramar golf course, with smoke-free and smoking areas. Legislature is also used for alcohol. Visitors cannot bring alcohol into the Stadium, and can only be brought by visitors older than 18. Age restrictions concerning alcohol are also incorporated by Zebos and Miramar golf course, to ensure under age drinkers do not effect the visitor experience of others. Legislation also controls visitor flows, with restrictions on crowd capacity. Psychologically, these limits provide peace of mind for the visitor in situations that can be life threatening i.e fires. Once capacities are achieved more visitors cannot enter. Planning is the next 2006-12-05T15:52:46-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Maximizing-Visitor-Customer-Experience-31891.aspx Whoever said men and women are equal must be blind. Women have always taken a back seat to men in American society. This occurrence is not only found in the United States, but in other countries as well. It's safe to say that the Declaration of Independence started it and it has continued to the present. There is one set of standards that apply to men, and another set of standards that apply to women. This is evident in the home, workplace, and society in general. The problem of men and women not being equal can be traced back to the Declaration of Independence. The Declaration of Independence proclaimed that all men are created equal. There was no mention of women being equal, only men. At the time of the drafting of the document, the men had all the power. The document was even drafted by a man. Women were confined to the home to take care of the domestic housekeeping duties. Look no further than the home to see the first sign that men and women are not equal. The traditional role of the man was to work and the money he made would be used by all in the household. The traditional role of the woman was to stay home, take care of the children, clean the house, and cook. Because society has always associated money with power, the person bringing home the money had the power. The man often makes the final decision on all household matters because he has the money. The workplace is another place where men and women are not equal. The most obvious sign starts at the top. Look at the CEO of the corporation. The majority of CEOs are men. Women serving as CEOs are a rare sight. Another sign of the unfairness can also be found in the lower ranks. Men are often applauded for being assertive and giving orders. By giving orders, men are taking a leadership role. Demonstrating leadership ability is a quality that employers often look for. On the other hand, women who are assertive and give orders are not well liked in the work place. They are considered as bitches by men. For women to be well liked in the work place, they have to be subordinate to the men. The salary of men and women who do the exact same work differ. Women often make less than men even 2006-12-05T08:07:03-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Gender--31874.aspx I was walking across the bridge I thought that was a silly name for a bridge. Then all of a sudden I heard a girl say I called it The Bridge. So then she said to that I deserved to jump off the bridge and then we can be friends. I was so scared so I ran away and went to my boyfriend's house. He was drunk I could tell he started to chase me all the way back to the bridge. The worst thing that would ever happen to me was my BOYFRIEND threw me off of the bridge. So now I lie here on the bridge all alone and the worst thing to ever happen to a thirteen year old. I wait every day for my boyfriend so I can throw him off the bridge to so we can be together forever and ever. You look at me and walk away I say "hello" and you say "hi". I turn around and you are gone please stay with me forever our last relationship didn't work out but now were together again so lets try to be with eachother forever. We look at each other all the time and we blaim eahother for silly things what is with this weird thing that happens to us I really don't now. I thought I had a true friend untill she decided to talk to the meanest person to me and then my not so true friend was talking about me behind my back so I don't know what you are now please tell me what you are my true friend or not a true friend. So many girls thinks its ok to talk about people behind their back well theres a girl in my class that some people just love to make fun of her so what is with thoughs girls I dunno all I know is they need major surgery on their life starting with the gossip. Some people are just not nice to others but whatever is wrong with them must need a life trust me on that and also whats with the cheating on test thats what bugs me but oh well life suxs thats all I can say. I woke up it was 7 I waited til 11 Just to figure out that no one would call I think I've got alot of friends But I don't hear from them What's 2006-12-01T21:21:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Bridge-and-sayings-31848.aspx Moving to a foreign country is one of the hardest things to do. People must adapt to the culture, the lifestyle, and make new friends. In Naomi Shihab Nye’s Habibi, Liyana and her family move from the United States to Palestine, where Liyana’s father was born. Liyana tells her story in great detail about adapting, the meaning of family, and making new friends in her new life. Habibi is a wonderful, compelling story about Liyana and her family adjusting to the atmosphere, people, and the conflicts surrounding them in their new home, Palestine. Of the many motifs in this novel, the unavoidable Arab and Israeli conflict of the 1970’s, (most of which still continues today), is the most powerful. Motifs in Habibi are mainly universal; love and family, adjusting to change, etc. However, there are two motifs which stand out: “war and peace,” and “race, ethnicity, and culture.” War and peace is the basis of Nye’s novel. It is the core theme, and propels the story and characters. The ongoing Arab-Israeli conflict galvanizes the characters to stand up and make a change in their lives, and to be compassionate. It also highlights the racial and cultural tensions between Arabs, Armenians, Jews, and Greeks; though the main warring factions are Arabs and Israelis. In Habibi, Naomi Shihab Nye intermingles “American” and ethnic words to make conflicting cultural norms (between America and the Middle East) stand out, and to mark the gradual acceptance of the Abboud family to their new home in Palestine. She also incorporates meaningful words and poetic imagery to add voice to, and animate, Liyana’s thoughts. Liyana’s character, throughout the novel, has a dreamy and dramatic quality, (not unusual in the typical teenager), and her diction is mainly informal. In the beginning, when Liyana is at the airport with her family she notices an “Indian lady in a purple sari crying, [who is] the size of good-bye” (8), and uses the whole idea of the sad Indian woman to make tangible her own sadness at having to say goodbye. As the time nears for the Abboud’s departure, Liyana’s words become heavier and have a bittersweet quality to them. However, the sadness and homesickness soon begin fleeting once Liyana and her family reach Palestine. There, at the Tel Aviv airport, they are greeted by less-than-friendly “Israeli agents … [who] look ready to jump on them” (36). Nye, beginning in 2006-11-29T04:48:33-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Habibi-by-Naomi-Shihab-Nye--31842.aspx Toxic Waste: Who pays to clean up the mess? CERCLA specifically states that those who own or operate a 2006-11-17T02:09:23-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Toxic-Waste-Who-pays-to-clean-up-the-mess-31789.aspx Managing Foreign Currency Risk in Business Real appreciation/depreciation of the Irish Punt, US Dollar, French Franc, Japanese Yen and Deutsche Mark The real exchange rate is the nominal exchange rate adjusted for changes in the relative purchasing power of each currency (Shapiro, 1999). This concept can be linked to the theory of Purchasing Power Parity (PPP), first introduced by Gustav Cassel in 1918 and defined as: e (home)/e (foreign) = p (home)/p (foreign) (formula 1) e = spot rate p = Inflation In absolute terms, it states that currencies should have the same purchasing power all over the world. Transportation costs, tariffs, quotas, restrictions and product differentiation are ignored though. The relative version of PPP states that the exchange rate between home and foreign currency will adjust to reflect changes in price levels of the two countries. So, if inflation in the US is 5% and 3% in the UK, then sterling must rise by 2% in order to equalise the dollar price of goods in the two countries. Vice versa, when calculating real appreciation or depreciation, it is necessary to adjust for inflation rates. Therefore, real appreciation or depreciation of a currency is that adjusted for inflation and is calculated using the following formula: e(real) = e(nominal)*[p(foreign)/p(home)] (formula 2) Similarly, the real interest rate must be adjusted to reflect inflation. The real interest rate, according to the Fisher effect, measures the exchange rate between current and future purchasing power. Together with (expected) inflation, it represents the nominal rate. This can be approximated by the equation r = a + i, where r is the nominal rate, i is the rate of inflation, and a is the real rate of interest. Based on these calculations, it clearly emerges that the US$ is overvalued by about 36% since the exchange rate differential is greater than the relative inflation between the USA and Ireland. We can thus assume that if PPP holds, the controller has a convincing argument with regards to his fears of the US$ weakening against the punt. But it is widely accepted that PPP generally does not hold for major currencies bought for investment purposes such as the US$, and that if it does hold, it will only do so over the long term (Shapiro, 1999). Please see overleaf for calculations. 2006-11-17T01:53:40-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Managing-Foreign-Currency-Risk-in-Business-31782.aspx The Learning Curve of Technology in Business In Learning with Technology the authors say that all learning results from thinking. This seems reasonable. As I recall learning from my own childhood, I remember only those lessons, which interested me. I remember spelling bees and art class and I remember school plays. My best friend who went to school with me from first to twelfth grade remembers her math teachers, collecting milk money and how much she hated to do research papers. She is now an accountant and I am a teacher. I still love school and she still loves using numbers. We took with us only that information, which we thought, was appealing. We were pioneer constructivists! The use of technology does not necessarily promote learning. It is the thought process, the questioning and the thirst for knowledge that results in learning. As a teacher, my responsibility would be to stimulate and support activities that promote self- motivation, investigation and exploration. As Jerome Bruner would say: meaning making. The who, what, where when, why becomes a part of every learning experience as long as the content is initiated by the learner. That is what is so awesome about using multimedia to teach students everything from scientific research to community building to the forms of government. When proper research methods are engaged the student can then use a multimedia project incorporating their own ideas and experience. Many people do not learn from their studies because they spent no time reflecting on or thinking deeply about their subject. When using multimedia it is essential to make decisions about content, composition, evaluation, revision, editing, and finally publishing. This requires higher order thinking. The student’s decisions necessitate assessment. Memorizing historical facts does not always guarantee a person will remember but working over an extended period of time on a single concept using a variety of senses to gain knowledge of the same issue, will be committed to memory long after the project is over. Learning takes place when reflection, experience and exploration is employed. Teachers must be willing to help the student be an active participant in his own learning, develop personal learning strategies and ways to encode his or her own material; make the content personal to each student. Teachers must be able 2006-11-04T19:13:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Learning-Curve-of-Technology-in-Business-31700.aspx Review of the Book "Companies with a Conscience" This book is appropriate for any person related to business. The book deals with environmental issues and it would be great for business owners or people involved in running a business to read the novel. It might give them a sense of environmental awareness and 2006-11-03T01:01:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Review-of-the-Book-quot-Companies-with-a-Conscience-quot-31681.aspx Summary This paper aims at determining the optimum viable solution of an investment on a suburban coastal shipping system in the area of Athens. More specifically it refers to the development of a sea transport system, alternative to the existing road one, that would connect Piraeus with the southern suburban coastal area of Athens. The best viable solution of such an undertaking is considered to be the one, which under the existing constraints maximises the total profit that derives from this investment. The variables used for the formation of the constraints are the number of vessels used, the routing and the price of the services. The article after presenting the methodology of the market analysis, focuses on the financing alternatives of the project and their impact on its economic efficiency and concludes with the best viable scenarios and optimum solution. 1. Introduction The paper’s main objective is to determine the optimum solution of an investment undertaking that includes an alternative transportation system, that is a suburban coastal transport system in the south region of Athens. Such a system is believed that can offer a possible solution to the transport problems of congestion, which characterise the existing overloaded road network of Athens. Suburban coastal shipping has a special character. First there are not many examples of cities that use an analogous transport system. Secondly, the main competitor of sea transport is road transport or fixed track systems (train, tram). It should be mentioned that the current transportation system despite its deficiencies in terms of time, cost as well as externalities remains a strong travel alternative and consequently a constraint for the development of the proposed seaborne transport. This is due to the several advantages it offers to its users like door to door services, flexibility and speed. City of Athens disposes a road system as the main one satisfying the transport demand to and from the suburban areas. The best economic solution for an investment of this kind is determined as the one that maximises the profit of the investor, under the constraints that the current transport system sets. In this context, in order to format the constrains of the system, a market analysis has been conducted taking all the above into consideration in order to examine the possible demand for such a system versus the existing road transport one (Greek Bank of Industrial Development, 1995). However, the question is whether an enterprise in this field would be economically viable and which would be the required demand of that service, in order to be able to equalise the marginal costs with the marginal revenue. 2. A methodology 2006-11-02T22:02:29-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Investment-Evaluation-of-a-Suburban-Coastal-Transport-System-31678.aspx Managing Stress in the Workplace Stress is everywhere—Home, school, and the work place. The sooner you learn how to manage it, the better. However, not everyone is very good at managing stress. To know the best way to manage stress, I have interviewed several businessmen and most of the following ideas of managing stress are based on their experiences. It was Christina Adzima’s senior year, and there was one final academic hurdle before her high school graduation—the 20-page term paper. The Stratford, Connecticut, student had been on schedule with the project all year, meeting each deadline. Then, two weeks before the full draft was due, her dog died. Christina just couldn’t seem to get the paper started, and suddenly it was the night before it was due. “It was the first all-nighter I had ever pulled, and I vowed I’d never do it again,” she says. As a student, stress can affect many areas of your life. Keeping up your grades, writing college essays, struggling with the decision of where to go to college, homework, tests, after-school sports, a part-time job, and your social life may all be making demands on your time. And after graduation, when you’ve left school to enter the work force, will the stress subside? Not likely. While it can be difficult to deal with stress, the sooner you learn how to manage it, the better. The ability to handle stress has almost become a requirement in most jobs today. According to the 1997 National Study of the Changing Work force by the Families and Work Institute in New York City, jobs are the biggest stressor for most Americans. In fact, job and workplace stress are three times more likely to affect a person’s emotional well being than children, again parents, spouses, commuting, housework or any other personal demands. Despite this, employers appear to be doing very little about it. Potter, an expert in workplace behavior and psychology, in her book Overcoming Job Burnout. “Across the board, no matter what profession, no matter what level, virtually everybody says they have too much to do and not enough time to do it.” When something inside tells you that things are not quite “right,” how do you know if it is stress? Look for these telltale signs that stress is building up: lack of concentration, forgetfulness, being disorganized, having trouble doing simple tasks, feeling anxious or depressed, having 2006-11-02T14:55:15-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Managing-Stress-in-the-Workplace-31659.aspx Advertising Techniques Case Studies Through out the history of the world, the societies have constantly tried to influence the people through any means. In our current America, there is no exception. I have taken several advertisements from a few of our nation’s magazines, to analyze. Written in this paper are my results. The first: CLAIROL Herbal Essence ad featuring Britney Spears This ad was featured in the August 2000 edition of Teen People. In it, there is a widely known tactic used to get the readers attention: Visual effects. In this ad particularly, the star, Britney Spears, seems to be in a freeze frame stance. Her hair appears as it would if she were jumping. There is also another visual effect, for, you see, she is not perpendicular, but slightly tilted, giving her a sort of spunk. These are the effects that are used to grab the reader’s attention, but what is used to keep it? Well, here there are several: A) Sex appeal, B) Money Appeal, C) Snob appeal, D) Comedy, E) Star appeal, and finally F) Plays on emotion. The Sex appeal is presented in her seemingly flawless look. She seems to have toned arms, shinny hair, excellent make-up, a very petite body, and perfectly proportioned. The money factor comes in with the fact that she is a well-known star, so “she must have a lot of money”. The snob appeal also comes into play with the fact, plain and simple, that she is a star. This also ties in to the microphone that she is pictured with. The comedy seems to present its self in the visual effects used, and the face she seems to be making. It seems peculiar, and to some extent, humorous, that she is so well proportioned and so seemingly perfect, but she seems to be in a frozen state. Also, she seems to be hanging off of the page. The star appeal is also, the plain and simple fact, that she IS a star. Which also seems to tie into the play on emotion, for "“everybody wants to be a star”. The Second: A Neutrogena make-up advertisement featuring Jennifer Love-Hewitt This ad was taken from the November 2000 issue of Teen People. In it, the eye-catching effect that was probably the most prodomentent again, the visual effects. All of the features, the pictures, the writing, 2006-10-29T22:17:56-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advertising-Techniques-Case-Studies-31618.aspx Industry Analysis Report on E-Commerce Just about everyone in America has at least heard the term E-commerce. However, many people are not familiar with the history of it or the many forms in which it occurs. E-Commerce is defined as the exchange of goods and services over the Internet. According to the 2000 Government Census 1 out of 5 people have purchased something online. However, the U.S. Department of commerce says that only 1% of all retail trade in the U.S. was made over the Internet. There are many different reports available about the growth of E-Commerce, however they pretty much all stick to the same general idea: there has been incredible growth in the past, but it is now starting to slow. E-commerce has been around almost since the inception of the Internet. Yet, It didn’t take off until the release of Mosaic in 1993, the first graphical Web browser. Mosaic allowed users to bring up pictures and other graphical objects on the web. This was not widely used; big corporations and government agencies mostly used it. In 1994, Marc Andreessen, one of the developers of Mosaic, co-founded Netscape Communicator Corp., they released the Netscape Navigator, the second graphical Web browser. The freely distributed Netscape brought worldwide interest to the Internet and web. It marked the beginning of a new business era. In 1995, Microsoft stepped in the web browser market, released the Internet Explorer version 1.0. Newer versions of this have become the prominent web browser out today. E-Commerce grew more and more with each release of the newest browser. In January 1996 there were only 100,000 websites published online, last year there were over 7 million websites online. Nearly 60% of all Americans have access to the net from home. Of all the industries worldwide, it is very rare that we see one grow as fast as the Internet. In just about 10 years, it has grown from being unheard of or used by the public, to one of the most widely used resources for information and advertisement. There are many different forms E-Commerce today. The biggest and best know form of E-Commerce are companies that started as non-Internet companies but now offer their services online. These companies usually allow online ordering and information about their products or services. Some examples of these would be Sears, Dillards or 2006-10-03T20:28:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Industry-Analysis-Report-on-E-Commerce-31493.aspx Report on the Wireless Industry Since 1989, the wireless industry began to explore by adapting digital technology replacing the existing analog network as a means of improving capacity due to the increase of wireless service demands. Digital has a number of advantages over analog transmission: • Economizes on bandwidth • Allows easy integration with personal communication systems (PCS) devices • Maintains superior quality of voice transmission over long distances • Difficult to decode • Can use lower average transmitter power • Enables smaller and less expensive individual receivers and transmitters • Offer voice privacy At that period, Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) was chosen to replace Motorola’s Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) technology which known today as narrowband analog mobile phone service. FDMA allocates a single channel to one user at a time. FDMA is wasteful of bandwidth: the channel is assigned to a single conversation whether or not somebody is speaking. Moreover, it cannot handle alternate forms of data, only voice transmissions. Qualcomm then introduced the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology to compete against TDMA technology to provide digital service. Now the two major competing systems (TDMA and CDMA), have been a topic for debate throughout the wireless community over which technology has the superior quality. WHAT IS TDMA? TDMA is digital transmission technology that allows a number of users to access a single radio-frequency (RF) channel without interference by allocating unique time slots to each user with thin a channel. The digital conversations from a single transmitter occupy different time slots in several bands at the same time In TDMA, the access technique used exercises three users sharing a 30-kHz carrier frequency. TDMA is also the technology used in Europe where Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) is the digital standard used to provide wireless access and in Japan where Personal Digital Cellular (PDC) is used as the standard. TDMA was chosen for these standards due to the reason that it enables some essential features for system operation in an advanced cellular or PCS environment. A single channel can carry all four conversations if each conversation is divided in short fragments, is assigned a time slot, and is transmitted in corresponding time bursts. TDMA also offers the ability to carry data rates of 64kbps to 120 Mbps. This enables service providers to offer short message services as well as bandwidth-intensive applications such as multimedia and videoconferencing. Unlike 2006-09-20T03:46:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Report-on-the-Wireless-Industry-31456.aspx Creating Office Efficiency from Office Design An office which is designed well creates a more efficient working environment. In addition, a well-designed office produces for the company a variety of financial and psychological savings in the form of greater job performance, higher job satisfaction, and increased productivity. For the office 2006-08-31T19:43:48-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Creating-Office-Efficiency-from-Office-Design-31415.aspx Marketing Analysis of Oldsmobile INTRODUCTION/PRODUCT BACKGROUND The automobile’s humble beginnings stemmed from a need for a more practical, safer, and economical device than the horse and carriage. The horse and carriage of yesterday was as common as any family car would be today. The horse and carriage was beginning to lose its usefulness. Another device was required and a “revolution” which affects each one of us ensued. The inventors of the day created many devices including steam and gasoline powered “horseless carriages.” The oldest American car company was created by one of these visionaries. Ransom Eli Olds created one of the most well known American car companies, Oldsmobile, over a hundred years ago. Ransom Eli Olds was born in Ohio on June 3, 1864. Olds is often considered the “Father of the American auto industry” (Rothenberg, 2001). He built and sold his first steam-propelled horseless carriage in 1893 and had constructed his first gas-propelled vehicle in 1896; Ransom Olds sold his first Oldsmobile in 1897. The Olds Motor Works was built in Lansing Michigan and incorporated in 1899. The facility was home to the first assembly line, producing the Curved Dash and allowing Oldsmobile to become the first mass producer of gasoline cars (http://oldsmobile.com, 2001). “In 1900 Olds built 4 units; by 1905 it had made more than 10, 000 cars (McGuire, 2000).” The Curved Dash model was a landmark design in automotive history. The auto weighed only 700 pounds and was more dependable than any of its high priced competition. During the early years, Oldsmobile’s only major competitor was the horse and carriage. “Early ads boasted that the $600 Curved Dash ran 40 miles on 1 gallon of gasoline (http://oldsmobile.com, 2001).” Olds sought to convince people that the Curved Dash was thriftier, safer, faster, more comfortable and more modern than a horse. The Olds Motor Company was a prosperous business; however, Ransom E. Olds resigned from the company in 1904 due to disagreements with his investors. Ransom formed another company named REO (Ransom Eli Olds) which has continued to thrive in modern times as Diamond-REO, building extreme-duty trucks. In 1908 General Motors purchased the Olds Motor Company. Oldsmobile had been a successful subsidiary of General Motors since its purchase. Oldsmobile’s long success stemmed from their ability to create new enhancements for the automobile. For 2006-08-31T17:43:58-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Analysis-of-Oldsmobile-31398.aspx Seven Habits of Effective People Emotional Bank Account We deal with others in a way such as we have our bank account in somebody else heart. If we do something great to the person we add our account to them and if we do something bad to them we withdraw our money from 'our bank account'. The good relationship can be built if you have a sufficient emotional bank account to your friends and relatives. And please, be ensure if you withdraw your account don't forget to add additional 'fund' to replace it. Product and Product Capacity A good product can be deliver continuously if we have a good product capacity. Don't drain your resources by forcing them to deliver a good product without maintaining their capacity. So the idea of maintaining capability by relaxation, learning, and other renewal effort is a 'must do' jobs in order to maintain our product quality. PRIVATE VICTORY Habit 1 : Be Proactive A human was created which such great intention, so that he/she actually can determine 'everything' by their own. Proactively is described as an ability to be independent to any circumstances around you. The independency will create a freedom to choose anything in your life but you have to live with the consequences of your choices. An effective person is that a person which focus on their circle of influence using all of his efforts, and by focusing on it he/she will improve it and make it bigger, Those who are not focusing on their circle of influences will end up having a very big circle of concerns but his/her circle of influence will be very small. Circle of Influence : Consist of things that have impacts to you and you can do something about those things Circle of Concerns : Consist of things that have impacts to you and you can not do anything about those things Focus on your circle of influence ! By doing it you will make it bigger Habit 2 : Begin with The End in Mind To be effective, a person should have a clear destiny to what he/she want to be at the end of his life. He/She must have a clear dreams. By using this dream, a person can drive any activities that he/she will do in his/her life. The book suggest that each person should have a written personal Vision and Mission statement. The Book 2006-08-31T17:21:53-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Seven-Habits-of-Effective-People-31392.aspx Techniques in Supply Chain Management “Warehousing is an integral part of the logistics supply chain and it is important that it is seen as such, and that the planning of warehouse design and operations should be within the overall context and objectives of the total supply chain. Unless this happens, there is the risk of sub-optimizing warehouse operations, at the overall supply chain.” Warehousing is generally defined as “the storage of goods before their use”1. That was just the warehouse’s role up to fifteen years ago when the logistics supply chain philosophies arrived. Since then the warehouse has obtained a strategic role, and has become an integral part of the logistics supply chain. As for the planning of warehouse design and operations they have become one with the overall context and objectives of the total supply chain and the logistic goals. These objectives are: Shorter cycle times Lower costs Better customer services The warehouse today is focused in speed, since a product may be only stored for a few days or even hours. What is also important is that by looking warehousing from a macroeconomic angle it creates time utility for raw materials, industrial goods and finished products. Time availability of goods is broadened and customers receive the goods when and where they need them most. Taking a closer look at the role of warehousing in the logistics system we observe that the warehouse serves certain value adding roles. One of them is the transportation consolidation. This is the moving of small amounts of goods2 to or from a warehouse in order to consolidate these small shipments into a large one, with significant transportation savings that save further cost and don’t add value to the goods. Another warehousing function is the product mixing of the customer. Customers may sometimes order for different amount of goods in type, size e.t.c. . This can be deled with the development of mixing warehouses nearby, so small vehicles can gather the goods and avoid further cost and delay3. A warehouse also provides customer services. Having the goods available when the order is made and shipped directly leads to customer satisfaction. Also warehousing can play the role of protection against contingencies4. This is very important because it is crucial to have a defense to the case of not being able to deliver the raw materials, otherwise there will be a delay in the production of finished goods. Finally warehousing 2006-08-31T17:15:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Techniques-in-Supply-Chain-Management-31389.aspx The Threat of Competition to Nike The athletic shoe industry is slowly becoming a global oligopoly. There are many barriers to entry preventing new entrants from capturing significant market share. Nike can enjoy economies of scale that create cost advantages over any new rival. Today’s athletic shoes are highly technical. An extremely large capital investment is required for new firms to open athletic shoe factories and conduct research and design to create a popular athletic shoe. Nike has incorporated forward vertical integration into their corporate level strategy. Nike opened discount factory outlet stores in rural areas and retail stores in urban shopping Mecca’s. Monolithic athletic manufacturing companies utilise economies of scale by spending millions on product endorsements and advertisements by spreading the high cost over their entire yearly sales. The aggressive marketing campaigns turn their products into household names making it arduous for new firms to compete. Athletic shoe manufacturers greatly attempt to differentiate their products from all shoe manufacturers. For example, Nike aggressively markets their shoes with a visible air chamber in the sole. The capital requirements can be a high entry barrier to a new firm to the industry. However, an existing dress shoe manufacturer may enter the athletic shoe industry simply by re-tooling their manufacturing plant. Access to athletic shoe distribution channels is a moderate barrier to entry. This all depends on the status of the entering firm. If they are a start-up firm, it is extremely difficult to get shelf space at major shoe retailers. If the firm is currently in the dress shoe industry, and is entering the athletic shoe industry, they may use their existing connections to easily access athletic shoe distribution channels. Switching costs are very low for the athletic shoe industry. Shoes are relatively inexpensive personal goods that are frequently replaced. Cost disadvantages independent of scale are moderate. Many athletic shoe customers are brand loyal and are reluctant to try a new athletic shoe. Additionally, previous aggressive marketing campaigns have increased not only brand and individual product name recognition. Government policy is a low entry barrier, as all manufacturers in every industry are subject to factory safety laws. Threat of Retaliation The threat of retaliation is high in the athletic shoe industry. For example, if a small new competitor attempts to gain market share by dumping their products, the much larger computer firms are more capable of absorbing losses associated with driving the new competitor out of business. The threat of new 2006-08-31T17:10:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Threat-of-Competition-to-Nike-31387.aspx Characteristics of "Total Quality Management" “Total Quality Management (TQM) is the integration of all functions and processes within an organization in order to achieve continuous improvement of the quality of goods and services. The goal is customer satisfaction.”(Omachonu, Ross, Swift; 3.) TQM has become the basic practice in businesses though-out the world. “Implementation of TQM in these organizations has been driven by the desire to in crease profits in the highly competitive business world. Total Quality Management techniques are designed to improve performance,”(Raibon, Payne; 963.) and inevitably resulting in increased profits. Introduction During the early 1980’s companies started to adopt the process of TQM. The customers were not satisfied with the quality of the products. Many believed that Total Quality Management was a solution for the company’s problems. Most companies adopted the rules but didn’t apply them; they had lost sight of the larger concerns, for customer value and satisfaction. “As a result many TQM programs begun in the 1980’s failed causing backlash against TQM.” (Kotler, Armstong; 681.) But the principles stayed the same, and the companies knew that these functions were needed for success. Implementation To fully utilize TQM the brainpower of each and every employee must be used. “It is the systematic elimination of waste and rework created by imperfect processes’... ‘It is an understanding that all an organizations efforts are part of a system, and that you cannot change one part of the system without affecting the other part.” (Schultz, Vollum; ix.) In implementing a Total Quality Management system there are many different beliefs, The Fourteen Point way formulated by Dr. Deming is just one of many but it is believed that these fundamental points should not be ignored. 1.) “Create constancy of purpose toward the improvement of product and service, with the aim to become competitive, stay in business, and provide jobs. 2.) Adopt the philosophy. We are in a new economic age. Western management must awaken to the challenge, learn its responsibilities, and take on leadership for change. 3.) Cease dependence on inspection to achieve quality. Eliminate the need for mass inspection by building quality into the product in the first place. 4.) End the practice of awarding business on the basis of price tag alone. Instead, minimize total cost. Move toward a single supplier for any one item, on a long term relationship of loyalty and trust. 5.) Improve constantly and 2006-08-28T00:00:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Total-Quality-Management-TQM-and-it-s-Characteristics-31354.aspx Defining Success Success is many things to many people. Worldbook defines success as a favorable result or wished for ending through the achievement of goals. That is, if one attains a desired goal through achievement, he would be considered a success. However, a successful character, cannot be produced from one successful feat. The true indicator of success is not what is accomplished, but what is felt. In order to be successful, one must be happy. For example, if a person looks back on his career and feels satisfied and happy with his status, he would be considered a success. However, if he looks back and realizes he could've attained much more and feels disappointed, he would not be successful. Success is directly proportionate to happiness. Without it, there cannot be success. Success can also be reached by achievement of goals. In order to accomplish a goal, one must accomplish smaller goals that lead up to the main achievement. For instance, if a football team achieved its aim to win their district and the state championship, they would be successful. On the other hand, if the team set out to have a winning record, and failed, the season would not be considered successful. Success, no matter how big or small the goals are, can only be grasped through the attaining of those goals. Success must also be sought after. For anyone to have success, they must fight and strive for it. If a secretary of a large corporation worked her way up the ladder through hard work and sacrifice, she would be a success. On the other hand, if a secretary had a friend who got her a job at the top, she would not be looked upon as a success. There must be a desire for improvement and a commitment to achieve success. It cannot be handed out or paid for. If a student worked hard on homework, read the material, and did well on the test, they would be successful. The desire to work hard and make a good grade produced his success. If he'd been given the answers before the test, and he scored well, he could not be a success. His lack of willingness to work for the grade led to the lack of success. If a football team beat a superior team and then lost the next week to a lesser opponent, the team would not be 2006-08-27T22:04:44-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Defining-Success-31327.aspx Comsumer Buying Process and the Book Industry “Describe the major stages in the consumer buying decision process, and discuss their importance for purchasing a book. What might be the impact of the Internet on the purchase?” The consumer buying decision process can be explained through six different steps. The different steps overlap frequently and are not isolated. Two or more steps in the process may also take place at the same time. The process of buying a book is what we call a routine purchase or in other words a low-involvement process. Need Recognition The first and most important step in the buying decision process of a book is the recognition of need. These needs are recognized whenever consumers get aware that there exists a disparity between their current situation and some desired goals. The problem recognition motivates the individual to achieve the desired state of affairs. The disparity arises from several different reasons. A book may serve as tool to make a journey “faster” and more pleasant by entertaining you, it may be essential for your current academic situation or it can serve as a supplementary with another product or service. The need for special knowledge in order to satisfy certain needs may recognize the need for a book. This can for example be a book for traveling, food, DIY and other purposes. Internal or personal influences are the unique needs, perceptions, motives, values or characteristics consumers have. External or interpersonal factors that often have a great influence are friends, business associates and magazines. As we will see later when all the steps are individually explained, many of the steps in the “book” buying decision process can take place at the same time. The Search Process Search is the second step in our process. This is the step in which the consumer gathers information related to the product or service that was found needed in our first step. As purchase of a book is a low-involvement purchase, the search step is not as extensive compared to high-involvement purchase decisions. But say someone was about to invest in a dictionary series; this would be a high-involvement decision process. Due to large differences in quality and price, the search process would be much more extensive compared to the purchase of single book. But some form of search will in most cases take place. Before buying a book, one usually ask friends or read book critics in 2006-08-27T14:58:30-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comsumer-Buying-Process-and-the-Book-Industry-31295.aspx Piece-rate System Of Performance The piece-rate system represents the ultimate relationship between pay and performance as a method of 2006-08-12T11:10:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Piece-rate-System-Of-Performance-31231.aspx Consulting Evaluation for the Advising Office Project The current system that we have been working with is Undergraduate Business Advising. After doing some research we have found that there are a number of different problems with the current system. The main problem we have discovered is inconsistent information. One of the proposed solutions is an Undergraduate Business Advising website. The website will provide a way for advisors to communicate information to students more clearly and efficiently. It will also, in the same way, provide a way for students to access the information much quicker and easier. In addition, it will allow students to schedule appointments online. By offering this feature, we hope to increase the number of appointments and in turn decrease the number of walk-ins. Our goal is to decrease the amount of inconsistent information that students are receiving. Absolute Consulting was hired by the Undergraduate Business Advising Office to develop a web page to help enhance the advising process. We were approached by Monica Farrell to update the current process by integrating user-friendly tools on the web. Our role in the project was to gather information from students and faculty to determine what requirements are necessary for the web page. We have accomplished this through extensive interviewing, research, and questionnaires. Our team is comprised of six students from Dr. Sauter’s analysis class. Each member has strengths in different areas of the project, thus increasing our proficiency. The team has an excellent set of checks and balances to ensure that no one part is overshadowed by another. One of our main concerns was keeping within the scope of the project. We had to pay careful attention as to not get outside of our parameters. Through much discussion with Monica Farrell, we determined what would and would not be appropriate for the project. Monica, our contact, took our ideas to the other advisors to get feedback and we were able to adjust accordingly. Also, the process worked in the opposite direction. Some of the adivisors’ ideas were not within the scope of the project, so we had to compromise. The most important part of staying within the scope was the communication line that was established and maintained with Monica Farrell. Through our discussions with her, we were able to arrive at 2006-08-12T10:54:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Consulting-Evaluation-for-the-Advising-Office-Project-31226.aspx Present Day Importance of Strong Communication Skills The two-way process that we call communication, is a natural skill. In life we have grown accustomed to talking; which is why talking is a natural act for people. Even though we all have these natural skills, some people use their communication expertise in an effective way than other individuals. I have taken the liberty of stepping outside of my body and viewing my communication skills as others would have viewed it. I rarely use communication effectively as most people. I lack the amount of vocabulary needed to describe things pragmatically. If I used descriptive words as frequently as other people, I would not have this problem. I realize that I tend to talk about unimportant things. I get off topic when I am in a group discussion. Everyone has to know everything about me, my family and friends, or what I saw the other day. It just does not matter what anyone says to me because my story is better and has to be heard. On the other hand, I do speak of mostly positive subjects. Looking at myself through a stranger’s perspective, I realize that I frown a lot when I am listening. I smile only when I speak of something funny. I make strange faces when I talk of things that make me mad. I have a tendency to not look people directly in the eye when I talk. When people are talking to me I try not to stare at them. I nod my head up and down when I think that I have heard enough of some one talking to me about instructions. Mrs. Cotton has taught me that it is not all about me; listening is also a part of communication. I need to use complicated words instead of simple words. Feedback is a very important part of the communication process. Improving my communication skills will make me a better person. In order to excel in life I will need to improve on my communication skills. The people I talk to will have a better understanding of what I am talking about. I am anxiously awaiting more advice and teachings for the effective art of communication. I hope I will be able to have successful conversations with educated people without fearing my lack of vocabulary words. I plan on being able to give efficient details to anyone that 2006-08-10T13:06:14-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Present-Day-Importance-of-Strong-Communication-Skills-31208.aspx Different Types of Ownership in the Business Sector. Sole tradership is when the business is fully owned and managed by one person, though others can be employed to help run the business. As the sole traders only financial income is from the business and/or bank loan, they do not have the resources to expand and cover regional or national areas. These types of businesses are located in the small business sector and usually cover local areas. Such businesses could be hairdressers, corner shops or market stalls etc. Sole traderships have unlimited liability so if the business fails to pay its debts the financial responsibility falls on the owner/s to pay the debts in full even if they have to sell their business, personal possessions and assets. Another example of business ownership is a partnership. Examples of partnerships used in business are accounting firms and solicitors firms. A partnership has two or more owners. They work, manage and are responsible for the running of the business. Individual partners may concentrate on a certain aspect of the business where they have expert knowledge. As there is more than one owner, larger amounts of capital can be fed into the business via personal funding or bank loans. Partnerships have an unlimited liability. There are two types of limited companies: Private and public. Shareholders own private limited companies. Members of the public cannot buy the shares and the shareholders cannot buy or sell their shares without agreement from the other shareholders. Family owned businesses or larger businesses such as Virgin would fit into this category. Public limited companies have shares on the stock market and can be bought and sold by any member of the public, this way the company can raise further capital and expand their resources. Tesco and British Telecom are such examples. Both these types of limited companies have limited liability, which means the owners of the business are only liable for the amount they invested in the business (unless the debt is so large that the business has to be sold to repay the debt). Co-operatives are companies that are owned by a group of people (members) who have shares in the company. Shares can start as little as £1 and each member has a share in the Co-operative. It is the members (shareholders) who finance the co-operative and they control on how the business and profits are run. They 2006-08-09T15:42:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Different-Types-of-Ownership-in-the-Business-Sector_-31204.aspx Report from the Supply Chain Management Conference The 2001 Supply Chain Management Conference, presented by The Conference Board and sponsored by A.T. Kearney, was held June 25-26 in Chicago, Illinois. Long considered one of the industry’s most important events for senior procurement and supply chain executives, the conference had for its theme this year "Extending the Enterprise — A Practical Approach to Supply Chain Management." Major session topics centered around the concepts of collaborative supply chain management, leveraging the e-Information conduit, managing global supply chains and streamlining material flow. About 30 executives attended representing companies such as Quaker Oats, Starbucks, Georgia-Pacific and EDS. eBreviate's Strategic Alliances Director, Michael Pollard and Account Executive, Eric Lynch provide us with their observations of the event's highlights. Michael reports that Jim Morehouse, a Vice President in A.T. Kearney's Strategic Sourcing practice, gave the opening keynote address in which he made a number of key points. To resolve key business issues in the future, an "intelligent agent" (IA) will be a required tool. IA's will go well beyond our current search engines and will not only describe items but will recommend changes to processes and tools to address specific business requirements. Global competition and advancements in information technology are key factors in business organizations' ability to continue to drive ROI upward. This will inevitably result in "dysfunctional processes" (like the current supply chain process) receiving greater corporate support resources. In the future the supply chain process will require its participants to share data or be given data visibility. Furthermore, the sharing and reuse of information will impact the consumer product development process. Suppliers are presently below capacity on a global basis and this will result in ongoing price reductions. The outlook, on the whole, is for fewer suppliers to thrive but expect those to be bigger and stronger. All supply chain data must be digitized. This will not only accelerate information flow and solutions development throughout the supply chain, but will also impact decision making of all participants resulting, for instance, in materials warehousing and flow being optimized. Morehouse was followed by a presentation by Dr. E. Hermann Krog, Executive Director, Group Logistics at Volkswagen AG. Dr. Krog spoke about VW's successful efforts in attracting and rationalizing its supplier base through the introduction of new processes, emphasizing that it has horizontally and vertically integrated the supply chain. This integrated process provides VW with tremendous insight into its delivery tracking capability, cost management process, 2006-08-09T12:14:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Report-from-the-Supply-Chain-Management-Conference-31183.aspx Unfair Business Ethics for the Employees of Wal-Mart Wal-Mart is a superstore that has facilities all over the world. Wal-Mart is known as the friendly neighbor superstore. But until recently Wal-Mart has found it’s self not so friendly and is battling in unfair labor practices. An employee working for the Wal-Mart in New York has accused the world’s top retailer of unfair labor practices. 2006-08-08T15:07:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Unfair-Business-Ethics-for-the-Employees-of-Wal-Mart-31178.aspx Airline Industry: A History of Southwest Airlines In 1967 Southwest Airlines was a vision by and investment adviser Rollin Kind and his lawyer Herb Kelleher, they wanted to start a different kind of airline. Rollin King already had a small charter that ran between the smaller Texas cities. This new airline at first was to fly between the three largest cities in Texas, Dallas, Houston, and San Antonio. The company was first names Air Southwest Company, it later received its name of Southwest Airlines. The next year in 1968 the Texas Aeronautical Commission approved their planed to fly between the three major cities. In the next couple of years the company went off to a flying start by the next couple of years it had acquired four planes and employed about 200 people. In the first year of operation the company lost over $3.7 million dollars. It wasn’t until the next year and a half that it was able to turn a profit and ever since then has been doing tremendous. Herb Kelleher, who in 1982 took over as President, CEO, and Chairman of the board. He was well respected in his position focusing on employee and customer satisfaction. By 1978 Southwest was the most profitable airline in the industry, and had already carried its 5 millionth passenger. The stock for Southwest was now listed in the New York Stock Exchange as “LUV.” By 1996 the market had added Florida and California to expand in their services. By the year 1999, in the summer Southwest has now acquired 55 cities and 29 states that they operate out of, they fly more than 2400 flight a day. Recently, last year in October Southwest was able to fly into Buffalo-Niagara International Airport, with this, it makes them the 5th largest in the industry. External Threats The greatest potential threats to Southwest, were to be new low-cost entrants to the industry. Some of these start-ups were initiated by major airlines sucha s Delta Express, U.S airway’s Metro Jet and Shuttle by United. These units sought to replicate Southwest’s short-haul routes, low cost practices and fares. Other threats that Southwest faces is that other airlines have the capabilities to fly into and out of more cities and bigger airports. Southwest does not offer frequent flier mile programs that allow their customers to accumulate 2006-08-07T13:08:40-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Airline-Industry-A-History-of-Southwest-Airlines-31127.aspx Understanding the Basics of Picking and Trading Stocks Those who are ignorant in investment history are bound to repeat it. Historical investment returns and risks of various asset classes should be studied. Investment results for an asset over a long enough periods (greater than 20 years) are a good guide to the future returns and risks of that asset. Further, it should be possible to approximate the future long-term return and risk of a portfolio consisting of such assets.” – William Bernstein, the Intelligent Asset Allocator What, Exactly, Are Stocks? Stocks are shares in a company. When you buy shares of a company, you, yourself, become a part owner of that company. As a shareholder, you get the same basic rights and privileges as people who own millions of shares. You can receive quarterly reports and an annual report with information on how the company is doing. If the company makes money, your stock’s value will increase. When the company loses money, your stock’s value will decrease. Quarterly reports tell how much money the company has gained or lost during the reporting period. This will keep you updated on how well, or poorly, your stock is doing. The annual report is a combination of all the quarterly reports. Fancy charts and graphs are usually included. They give detailed financial and business information about the company. There would never be a time when you couldn’t be fully aware about your stocks health. How Do They Work? If a company wants to raise money (capital), one of its options is to distribute stock. Stocks can raise money without making a debt, or to not create a legal obligation to pay back borrowed funds. Most investors are in stocks for the money. They expect to be paid more than they paid themselves. Investors expect their investment to earn more for the company, than any other form of investment. If the return on investment is high, then the price usually increases. So, if the earnings go up, the price goes up. In the long run, stocks have beaten most of the other alternatives to investing. It’s proven that a long-term investment will usually gain more money then any other type of investment will in the same amount of time. In other words, stocks are the way to go. How Do I 2006-08-05T10:12:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Understanding-the-Basics-of-Picking-and-Trading-Stocks-31006.aspx Critical Skills for the Workplace in the 21st Century Skill means the ability to do something well or perform successfully, usually gained through experience and training. We have the opportunity to acquire many skills during our life especially when we are young. There are many critical skills college or university students try to acquire as preparation for a career. In my opinion, communication, personal and technology skills are the three main skills that can help students to build a great career. Communication skills are perhaps the most important skills to get a good job and succeed in that job. For example, a bilingual banker working in an area with a Spanish-speaking minority will be better able to communicate with customers of the bank because he or she can speak Spanish and English. Furthermore, communication skills can help to acquire information management skills, which include collecting and analyzing data. No matter what job one may have, we are constantly exposed to a lot of information via various mediums like lectures, memos, books, the internet etc. It is important for people in the work force to be able to isolate important facts from this vast sea of information. To do so one needs critical reasoning and analytical skills. For example, someone employed by the county for developing real estate will need to refer to county records to determine which properties should be developed further to benefit the county. Such a job would require strong analytical skills and foresight. Public speaking also falls under communication skills and is perhaps the single most important factor in a person’s success in the work force. Human are social animals, we work together and hence it is very important for us to be able to communicate our ideas in a clear and concise manner to others. For example, if a student went for a job interview then it is up to him or her to prove to the employers that he or she has the necessary skills. To do so the student will need to have good speaking skills. Also, once in the work force, a worker will often be expected deliver presentations to fellow employees or simply talk to co-workers regarding company policies, work ethics etc. This in turn needs good Public Speaking skills. Interpersonal skills like teamwork and professionalism help us work better in the work force with our fellow co-workers. Moreover, good interpersonal skills help 2006-08-05T09:59:42-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Critical-Skills-for-the-Workplace-in-the-21st-Century-31000.aspx About Greyhound Bus' Corporate Strategy and Growth Potential What were the critical incidents in Greyhound’s growth and development over time? Greyhound was founded in 1914 and its first business was providing bus transportation for mine workers. After that the company continued to grow and expand its bus routes, by 1930 the name Greyhound Corporation was adopted and the running-dog logo ,its unique brand sign, was introduced. The next 20 years Greyhound continued to acquire bus interests in order to consolidate routes either by purchase, stock swaps or mergers. By 1960 the company had substantially achieved its objective of operating a bus system that could carry passengers to most destinations throughout the States. In 1962, however the company was facing the prospect of increasingly limited opportunities to expand its route systems. Since the successful bus operations were generating excess cash the board of directors to diversify into new operations. Over the year 1962 the company began to acquire other companies which turned the business into a conglomerate of different businesses. Greyhound diversified into transportation manufacturing as well as into equipment leasing and financial services. As a result by the end of 1963 Greyhound was operating in three major businesses: transportation, manufacturing and financial services. In 1966 Gerry Trautman was appointed CEO and he continued the strategy of diversification through expansion and growth. From 1966 till 1970 Greyhound acquired more than thirty widely different companies and formed a new operating division, services: it specialized in managing transportation-related businesses such as duty free operations, building displays for exhibitions, aircraft servicing business, cruise ship lines, furniture moving, limousine service and the like. This diversification strategy was the basis for later on critical incidents which will be shown later. Trautmans aim was to create a company conglomerate, so that each individual business unit was recession proofed and all were enhancing the financial strength of the holding company. The first major critical incident occurred through a big acquisition of Armour&Co in 1970. This company was a large conglomerate holding interests in food and consumer products. Greyhound paid $400 million for a company which was operating primarily in the marginally profitable meat packing business. However, Armour also had interests also had interests in pharmaceuticals, cosmetics, and consumer products. After realizing he had overpaid for Armour Trautman, he sold a large part of the acquisition for $225 million and in 1977 he sold another piece which left over Armour`s 2006-08-01T20:14:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/About-Greyhound-Bus-Corporate-Strategy-and-Growth-Potential-30985.aspx Nestle's Growth Strategy and Business Development 1.) Does it make sense for Nestle to focus its growth on emerging markets? As it can be derived from the text, Nestle generates operates worldwide with a focus on European markets, which make up 70 percent of its sales. These markets are in the mature state of life cycle of that industry and additionally demographic changes such as the stagnation of population growth rates make it very hard companies like Nestle to generate higher profits through higher sales. As a matter of fact the western economies are actually facing a downturn in output and growth, thus influencing the consumption patterns of customers, especially in the retail business. Consumer are becoming more price aware and tend to spend less while demanding at the same time for customisation, product differentiation and specialization. Another trend is the shift away from branded food and beverages towards cheap non-branded foods and beverages. Nevertheless, the introduction of non-brand own labelled products such as Food Lion offers only makes sense in a large scale in order to achieve economies of scale. As a result of increasing non-brand cheap products offered by rivals, Nestle find itself in an even more embattled market and needs to develop a new strategy either away from branding or towards a higher degree of international market penetration. Since Nestle stands for high quality and has distinctive competencies in producing higher quality food, it would not make sense to change the strategic group, because it would most likely get stuck in the middle. The right strategy is to expand into new markets such as Asia, Eastern Europe and South America. Logically, in these markets the consumer behaviour, macroeconomic environment and cultural habits are different in contrast to western economies. Most of these markets are yet in a growth cycle and this clearly generates an opportunity because they are emerging markets and “untouched”. As mentioned in the text book China for instances will inhabit 700 million people by 2010 who will have nearly the same income levels as Spain has today. While income levels in these emerging markets will increase, people will gain a higher purchasing power with unsatisfied demands. Serving this demands is the right opportunity for Nestle to penetrate new markets, build up market share while at the same time using its profits to defend its old markets in the western economies through low prices. Concluding, 2006-08-01T20:02:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Nestle-s-Growth-Strategy-and-Business-Development-30979.aspx Growing Importance of International Accounting 1. In today’s society, business and cultural environment are playing a significant change in the life of many people. More and more businesses are beginning to operate both domestically and internationally. The expansion of business has lead the world into a new era filled with creative technology, making life easier. With the effects of international pressures, businesses sometimes need to adapt to or try to influence culture. Culture is what people value and believe. Trying to change a person’s perspective about one’s culture is not easy. Yet, cultural environment is changing slowly, as people are more concern with what is going on economically, politically, financially, and social and legally. Due to these changes, international factors are becoming more important. Along with that comes for accounting change. Many businesses have to conduct a lot of surveys and advertisements to see what consumers are looking for. Global business has created many jobs, competition, technology, and much more. With these differences in mind every business might have its own accounting system. This is because of cultural, economic, political, and legal system differences. Laws that are convenient and easy to understand in the US might have no meaning at all to another country. Usages of vocabulary can have a great effect in business depending on what the word means. Developing countries might have a much simpler accounting system than those of the developed countries. Every country has its own style of living and working conditions. If one accounting system were use to satisfy everyone country it would be confusing and worthless to certain countries because of differences in things like taxes, sizes of business, compensation plan, or rules and laws. Since the world has a different perspective of how the world should be manage decisions are made very differently. So, it is important for businesses to notice of what is going on around the world to stay competitive and survive. 2. Since the economy is constantly changing and effecting people’s life, stock market is getting more and more important. Stock market is becoming more important because many people are relying on it to earn a savings for the future. People are concern with what is going on in the economy for they are afraid of another 2006-08-01T19:09:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Growing-Importance-of-International-Accounting-30965.aspx Fundamentals to Improving Shareholder Value In this assignment I will be discussing on the fundamental measures in which companies improve corporate strategy in order to improve shareholder value. And whether (advantages and disadvantages) of having a meta-fund manager (company manager) deal with the portfolio investment and divestments or leave this to fund manager (investors) as John Kay puts is. The strategies of enhancing performance of the asset of a company involves; mergers, demergers, organic growth and acquisition. A merger is defined ‘as a 2006-08-01T19:02:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Fundamentals-to-Improving-Shareholder-Value-30960.aspx Harley-Davidson, Inc.: History and General Situation Arthur’s brothers, William Harley and Walter, started Harley-Davidson Motor Company in 1903. They first started the business in the Davidson family’s backyard in Milwaukee, Wisconsin. In 1904, the company then moved into an office. The company was acquired by AMF Inc, which favored short-term profits instead of investing in research and development and retooling. Harley focused solely on sales, while competitors were continuously improving the quality of their motorcycles. This resulted in a downturn of the company with weak profits. In 1981, a new management team joins to buyout the company. Harley-Davidson Inc. acquired the Buell Motorcycle Company during 1993. This investment offers Harley-Davidson the possibility of gradual entry into the sport and performance motorcycles market. In 1995, the company acquired Eaglemark. As a financial service company, Eaglemark provides financial services to leisure product manufacturers and their dealers and customers in the United States and Canada. At the same time, Eaglemark provides motorcycle floor planning to participate North American dealers of the Motor Company because it is a majority-owned subsidiary. They also offer retail-financing to the Motor Company’s domestic customers, and provide insurance for motorcycles as well as service contracts extensions. Eaglemark works complementary for the Motor Company. Harley-Davidson Inc. operates in two business segments: Motorcycles and Related Products and Financial Services. These two segments offer different products and services, and they are managed separately. However, the financial service works as a complementary for the Motor Company. Industry Essentials The motorcycle industry is a consolidated industry. The U.S. and international heavyweight motorcycle markets are highly competitive. The major players, such as Yamaha, Suzuki, and Honda, generally have financial and marketing resources that are substantially greater than the non-major players. Competitions in the heavyweight motorcycle market are based on several factors; price, quality, reliability, styling, product features, customer preference, and warranties. Harley’s first segment is the motorcycle and related products business. It included designing, manufacturing, and selling primarily heavyweight touring and custom motorcycles and offering a broad range of related products that included motorcycle parts and accessories and riding apparel. The custom products charge a higher price because of its features, styling, and high resale value. Their target market is mainly in US. By the end of 1997, they have an approximate 48.3% share in the US market, 6.1% share in European, and 16.5% share in Asia/Pacific. 2006-08-01T18:54:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Harley-Davidson-Inc-The-History-and-General-Situation-30955.aspx Important Decisions in Physical Database Design In most situations, many physical database design decisions are implicit or eliminated when you choose the database management technologies to use with the information system you are designing. Since many organizations have standards for operating systems, database management systems, and data access languages, you must deal only with those choices not implicit in the given technologies. Thus, we will cover only those decisions you will make most frequently, as well as other selected decisions that may be critical for some types of applications, such an on-line data capture and retrieval. The primary goal of physical database design is data processing efficiency. Today, with ever-decreasing costs for computer technology per unit of measure (both speed and space measures), it is typically very important for you to design the physical database to minimize the time required by users to interact with the information system. Thus, we concentrate on how to make processing of physical files and databases efficient, with less attention on efficient use of space. Designing physical files and databases requires certain information that should have been collected and produced during prior system development phases. The information needed for physical file and database design includes these requirements: • Normalized relations, including volume estimates • Definitions of each attribute • Descriptions of where and when data are used: entered, retrieved, deleted, and updated (including frequencies) • Expectations or requirements for response time and data security, backup, recovery, retention, and integrity • Descriptions of the technologies (database management systems) used for implementing the database Physical database design requires several critical decisions that will affect the integrity and performance of the application system. These key decisions include the following: 1. Choosing the storage format (called data type) for each attribute from the logical data model. The format is chosen to minimize storage space and to maximize data integrity. 2. Grouping attributes from the logical data model into physical records. You will discover that although the columns of a relational table are a natural definition for the contents of a physical record, this is not always the most desirable grouping of attributes. 3. Arranging similarly structured records in 2006-08-01T18:34:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Important-Decisions-in-Physical-Database-Design-30943.aspx Carlsberg Brewery Activities and Production Carlsberg Brewery (M) Bhd. is the market leader in the beer market with the share of over 60%. Carlsberg primary activities are production, sales and distribution of beer. Carlsberg emphasizes the importance of quality and strong competitive positioning of brands and 2006-08-01T10:09:49-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Carlsberg-Brewery-Activities-and-Production-30929.aspx Analyzing Business Policies of Safeway Company Safeway Company has policies that require employees to smile at and make eye contacts with customers. Most of the customers would view this kind of facial gestures as a friendly way of doing business, but some customers might misunderstand them as a “flirt”. Twelve employees had filed complaints about this “Superior Service” policy and found it unethical for the company to have undercover shoppers to spot if there is any violator. This led to Union to get involved and suggest the company to modify the policy. However, the headquarters disagreed that the policy was the cause of the misunderstanding. And they think it is necessary to train their employees to be friendly and having the right attitude to serve their customers. Critical Thinking: 1. How, specifically, does this case illustrate the process of attribution? The case illustrates this company enforcing this “Superior Service” policy to their employees, and might somehow attribute the cause of misconception from the customers. Employees were asked to smile and keep eye contact to their customers, but these friendly gestures were considered by some of the customers as flirt. The internal cause would be the smile and eye contact, and the external cause would be the customers’ responses or perception. The correspondent inferences could be the smile and extensive cares of customers might lead to assumption to some customers as flirt. 2. What do you suppose is being done to help train people to be more friendly toward customers? In other words, what do you imagine goes on in Safeway’s “Smile School”? I would imagine students sitting in groups and exchanging ideas on how to serve the customers better. Instructor would also have employees to perform “role-playing”, having one side act as customers and the other side doing their job as clerks. Different scenario would be provided and employees will be asked to solve each case in a polite manner. Instructors would correct their mistakes and provide feedback to each individual. In addition, employees would always be reminded to smile and keep eye contact to their customers. 3. What do you think of sending undercover shoppers into stores to spot violators of the customer service policy? In your opinion, is this ethical? In my opinion, sending undercover shoppers into stores to spot 2006-07-31T15:31:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analyzing-Business-Policies-of-Safeway-Company-30892.aspx Advertising Safer Sex with Condoms An advertisement for Trojan condoms shows a young woman wearing a small lace bra with a Trojan condom sticking out of the bra. The focus of the picture is directly on her breasts. This advertisement is using the female body and the idea of sex to get the image of their product into the reader’s memory. This advertisement implies one main idea: sex. The picture, focusing on the women’s chest area, gives a strong idea of what this advertisement is trying to portray. Breasts are objects of sexual fantasies. The condom is placed in the bra for a specific reason. The advertisers know the first place the eyes will go when they see the ad, is the breasts. That is the reason the product they are trying to sell is placed there. The advertisers are hoping the image of the breast and the Trojan condom package will be transferred to the person’s memory. The text of the advertisement also has strong sexual innuendoes. Shared sensation indicates a situation involving more than one person, as it is shared, and sensation indicates feeling as in a sexual relationship. The next phrase, Why wear anything else? gives the vision of a nude body, again the advertiser has used a sexual image to sell their product. In fact, the advertisement is trying to portray the image of a sexual encounter with the only type of clothing being a Trojan condom. The advertisement appeals to a broad range of people. The advertisement implies sex. The advertisement is selling Trojan condoms and condoms are used for sex. The ad targets people in their teens to mid twenties. It targets men, with the pretty female model, but women are also interested as it implies safe sex, which targets both sexes. When a man sees the advertisement he can get a visual image. He sees a beautiful woman, her breasts covered only by her bra and a condom. She is telling him sex is on her mind and a Trojan condom will make it happen. As sex is an important activity for many men, the advertisers are hoping they will run to the nearest store and purchase Trojan condoms. Another idea the advertiser is trying to 2006-07-31T12:51:24-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advertising-Safer-Sex-with-Condoms-30888.aspx Tomb Raider the Ride at Paramount's Kings Island in 2002 New attraction will change the face of thrill ride history and become one of the world’s greatest adventure rides, inspired by Paramount Pictures’ blockbuster film event, “Lara Croft: Tomb Raider™” starring Academy Award® winner Angelina Jolie Kings Island, Ohio – You’ve played the games. You’ve seen the movie. Soon, you can take the ride. Paramount Parks, a unit of the Viacom Entertainment Group, announced today plans to transform this summer’s epic adventure, Paramount Pictures’ “Lara Croft: Tomb Raider,” into a unique, multi-sensory adventure ride. Tomb Raider: The Ride will open in 2002 at Paramount’s Kings Island in Cincinnati, Ohio. The Paramount Pictures feature film is based on the wildly popular Eidos Interactive, Inc. action games: Tomb Raider, Tomb Raider II, Tomb Raider III: The Adventures of Lara Croft, Tomb Raider: The Last Revelation, and Tomb Raider: Chronicles. Since its debut in 1996, Tomb Raider and its heroine, Lara Croft, have become a worldwide phenomenon. With total sales of the action games reaching 25 million units worldwide, each game has topped the PlayStation game best-seller lists. The recent Paramount Pictures feature film had an explosive $48.2 million mid-June opening-weekend box office gross giving it the title of best debut ever for a film based on a video game property. On Tomb Raider: The Ride, adventuring guests are in for an experience unique to the theme park universe that is filled with all of Lara Croft’s real passions: raiding tombs, besting bad guys and one extreme adventure after another. The excitement begins with a journey into a foreboding ancient temple. As stone walls give way to others, guests will proceed through various mysterious chambers, engraved with strange, runic symbols and the debris of failed expeditions, as a sense of impending doom grows. With only seconds to spare before certain calamity, guests strap in to the only possible vehicle of escape. Playing off scenes from the motion picture filmed in Cambodia and Iceland, the escape will include rocketing upward for a close encounter in an ice cave with menacing, razor-sharp stalactites and a face-first plunge straight down toward a pit of boiling, red-hot lava. “Part of the thrill of the Tomb Raider property is the mystery and intrigue that surrounds each adventure. We want to preserve this mystery 2006-07-31T08:42:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Tomb-Raider-the-Ride-at-Paramount-s-Kings-Island-in-2002-30869.aspx Comparing Brocures: The Club 18-30 and The Leisurely Days Primarily, I will be analyzing the Club Eighteen to Thirties holiday brochure. I will be critical and analytical to the pictures and pages I choose and look in depth at how the brochure appeals to the younger public with different methods from the Leisurely Days brochure, which will be analyzed later on in the essay. The cover of the Club Eighteen to Thirties holiday brochure is bright orange. This use of bright colors is especially eye catching and uses the orange to make their brochure stand out. The bright orange is also used because it is a lively, in your face color and creates a perception that the brochure is critically for young people, which is the audience the brochure is aimed at, which makes it effective. The actual brochure is thin and not as broad as the other brochures that I have seen. This makes it different to the others and gives it a unique quality and young people do generally want to be different and unique so this appeals to them. On the front cover the slogan ‘could you?’ with an arrow pointed to the inside is used. This is a rhetorical question and makes the reader ask… what the question means. Creating interest and is generally used to make the reader look inside. The last aspects on the front cover of the brochure are the pictures. The pictures show young, attractive people enjoying themselves. The pictures have a lot of sexual appeal and show single people flirting and having fun, also the pictures have both male and female people on them with the purpose of making both genders of readers want to view the brochure. I have chose two photos from inside the Eighteen to Thirty brochures, which I think epitomize the general purpose of the brochure. Firstly, I chose a picture of a young group of eight people on a banana boat. The picture shows them all being splashed by water, laughing, screaming and it is an exciting, fast image. The picture creates a stimulating upfront opening for the resort and shows how much fun the resort can be and is used to show the holidays appeal and the fun aspects that there are. I also think that this picture has secret meaning because each woman is sitting 2006-07-30T21:26:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comparing-Brocures-The-Club-18-30-and-The-Leisurely-Days-30847.aspx The Entertainment Industry in America Background The entertainment industry demonstrates a multi channel structure, with companies owning several forms of companies in each link of the value chain. The industry is converging toward a single model, which combines production of content with multichannel distribution. All companies try to sell content in many ways, e.g. movie, TV show, book theme park, etc. All but two of major players in the industry conform to this model. Non-conforming companies have regulatory barriers (foreign owned) or do so out of choice. Some companies (Disney) buy distribution channels, i.e. networks (ABC); others build their own (News Corp., Time Warner) or do both Viacom (WB, CBS). The newest trend is to combine production and distribution with added distribution possibilities of internet (AOL Time Warner, Vivendi Seagram) CONTENT DISTRIBUTION Resources Creation Delivery Retail Actors/Writers Television Production/Movie Production Broadcast Television Networks/Cable television Networks Movie distribution Local Affiliates/Local cable companies/Local theaters In this industry we find vertical integration through direct ownership, as well as commercial transactions via long-term contracts and one-time “spot market” transactions. Ironically, even the resources can be “owned” – as in the case of the old “studio system” which tied actors to studies for a number years. In today’s industry, these arrangements are still in place, with actors signing on for “x number of picture” contracts with various studios. Production companies can either be independent or owned by integrated companies. In either case, production from one company may be sold to a competing network or distributor. Finally, local television affiliates and local movie theaters are sometimes bound by contract, sometimes entirely independent, or sometimes owned by networks. This last situation is usually the case with large metropolitan areas, where the networks want to have a closer link to the customer. Agents and other facilitators play a commercial conduit role of helping to bring together various people and companies along the value chain. The reasons for vertical integration include lowering risk (regardless of where profits are) and locking in distribution for high-risk production. But production companies supply all networks and networks access all suppliers, so motive for consolidation is as much to gain bargaining leverage as to lock in distribution. All companies are 2006-07-30T21:02:59-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Entertainment-Industry-in-America-30839.aspx Lessons Learned from Managing a Personal Stock Portfolio This report is going to talk about every aspect of the stock market game that I recently finished participating in with this Intro to Business class. It will state the good and bad times I experienced doing this project, my most and least successful trades, the challenging and easy activities that went along with this project, improvements, and most importantly, what I learned from taking part in this game. First of all, I would like to talk about the good trades, the bad trades, and the trades that were just a waste of making. The greater part of my stock portfolio was made up of technology stocks, which actually, I regret now. The majority of these stocks went way down towards the end of the game, including Microsoft Corp., AOL Time Warner, and Yahoo Inc. This surprised me, because I believed that these stocks would do the best. Another group of stocks that didn’t do really well for me are the goods-selling companies, including Costco Wholesale, Home Depot Inc. Safeway Inc., and Wal-Mart Stores. On the other hand, my consumer-good type stocks did the best overall. They provided me with a reasonably good profit. One example is Coca Cola Co. which gave me a 21% rate of return. I think that’s pretty darn good! The one stock that I am definitely glad I invested in is Sony Corp. I invested in this stock mainly because it had a steady stock chart, and I figured it would give me a fairly reasonable profit, but boy was I surprised when I found that at the end of the game, I had an 18% profit. This was actually just a lucky trade I made, and the fact that I didn’t sell it when it went down a little bit helped quite a bit Pixar is another example of a lucky trade, which provided me with a 24% rate of return! There were a few stocks that were just a waste of investing in, because they didn’t provide me with neither a high gain, nor loss. An example of this would be Quicksilver, which I held on to for approximately eight days, and in all that time, gave me a five cent profit! The most challenging part of this project was probably all the research that had to be done. I knew that to be 2006-07-30T20:15:35-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Lessons-Learned-from-Managing-a-Personal-Stock-Portfolio-30816.aspx Challenges of the External Environment Imposed on Managers The manager’s job cannot be accomplished in a vacuum within the organization. Many interacting external factors can affect managerial performance. The external environment consists of factors that affect a firm from outside its organizational boundaries. The external factors include the labor force, legal, political, legal considerations, society, unions, the competition, customers/suppliers, and technology. One of the greatest challenges facing all organizations today is managing uncertainty. Managers must do what they can to reduce uncertainty by reading the signals, following the trends, and scanning the external environment. The way in which trends in each of these areas affect the workplace is discussed later in this paper. Labor force The capabilities of a firm’s employees determine to a large extent how well the organization can perform its mission. Since new employees are hired from outside the firm, the labor force is considered an external environment factor. The labor force is always changing. This inevitably causes changes in the workforce of an organization thus affecting the way management must deal with its workforce. (Mondy 1995, p.36) Changes in the country’s labor force create dynamic situations within organization. For example, changing values and laws have contributed to greater participation rates by women in the employment market thus parental leave and child-care facilities provided by employers are becoming more common demands. Legal Considerations Law is important in business transactions. It provided a basic framework within which a business enterprise must operate. It facilitates smooth functioning of business transactions and protects both the businessmen and customers. All business organizations must comply also with the legal constraints of that country. In turn when a firm’s operations extend into other countries, the laws and regulations of those countries must be taken into account. (Mondy 1995, p.36) Society Members of society may also exert pressure on management. The public no longer accepts the actions of business organizations without questions. People learned that voicing out their disagreements in newspapers and other forms of media can produce changes. The large number of laws and policies passed in recent years is the result of the publics¡¦ influence. An organization in order to remain acceptable to the general public must accomplish its mission within the range of societal norms and remain in societal good books. When a firm responds effectively to societal interests, it is said to be socially responsible. Social responsibility is the 2006-07-29T15:47:13-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Challenges-of-the-External-Environment-Imposed-on-Managers-30781.aspx Executive Summary of Business Plan for New Greek Restaurant Alexandria Tavern’s- "a Greek restaurant," unlike a typical restaurant, will provide a unique combination of excellent food at value pricing with a fun and entertaining atmosphere. Alexandria Tavern’s is the answer to an increasing demand. The public wants value for everything that it purchases, is not willing to accept anything that does not meet its expectations, and wants entertainment with its dining experience. In today's highly competitive environment, it is becoming increasingly more difficult to differentiate one restaurant concept from another. Alexandria tavern's does this by being the only Greek restaurant in the area. We will provide our customers with unique Greek food with Greek entertainers every week. This plan is prepared to obtain financing for the initial launch of this concept. The financing is required to begin work on kitchen design, manuals and recipe books, site selection, equipment purchases, and to cover expenses in the first year of business. The financing, in addition to the capital contributions from the owners, will allow Alexandria Tavern’s to successfully open and maintain operations through year one. The initial capital investment will allow Alexandria Tavern’s providing its customers with a value driven, entertaining dining experience. Successful operation through year three will provide enough cash flow to be independent in year four. Objectives Alexandria Tavern’s objectives for the first three years of operation include: -To get a good market share in Jyväskylä restaurant business. -Keeping food cost fewer than 35% of revenue. -Keeping employee labour cost between 16-18% of revenue. -Building a good reputation in business life. Operations Facilities & Offices The restaurant at Kauppakatu 21 is a 400 Square meter space. It was formerly a restaurant and needs on minor structural modifications. The licenses and codes' issues are all in order. New equipment and dining room furnishings will be purchased and installed by the general contractor. Hours of Operation The restaurant will be open for lunch and dinner 7 days a week. Service will begin at 11:00 AM and end at 11:00 PM. The restaurant will be closed Christmas and Midsummer Day. On any other public holiday we might have slightly different opening hours. Employee Training & Education Employees will be trained not only in their specific operational duties but in the philosophy and applications of our concept. They will receive extensive 2006-07-25T20:27:27-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Executive-Summary-of-Business-Plan-for-New-Greek-Restaurant-30666.aspx Strategic Management Techniques of Caterpillar Inc. Introduction Headquartered in Peoria, Ill. Caterpillar Inc. is the world’s largest manufacturer of construction and mining equipment, diesel and natural gas engines and industrial gas turbines. It is a fortune 100 company, ranked number 1 in its industry, with more than $26 billion in assets. It is a U.S. based competitor, recording half to its sales to overseas customers; Caterpillar has maintained its position as a leading U.S. exports in excess of $5.2 billion in 1999. The company directly employees approximately 70, 000 people in the U.S. and abroad. The company is a growth oriented, diversified high technology business. The company is strong, resilient and definitely focused on the future. Glen A. Barton, Chairman and CEO, stated “Caterpillar continues to demonstrate an ability to achieve success and generate reasonable profits even when many of the markets served are at their weakest level in year.” The company remains committed to profitable growth, fully leveraging the benefits of its newly designed e-business and is pursuing improvements in quality through 6 Sigma in an effort strengthen it leading global position. Global Leadership Caterpillar products and components are manufactured in 42 plants in the U.S. and 49 other plants located in Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, England, France, Germany, Hungary, India, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Mexico, The Netherlands, Northern Ireland, China, Poland, Russia, South Africa and Sweden. Marketing operations are headquartered in most of the major cities in these countries. Caterpillar's dealer network is the company's most important competitive edge. They deliver superior customer service through an extensive worldwide network of 220 dealers, which as of June 30, 2001, was composed of 63 dealers inside and 157 outside the United States. Caterpillar dealers operate more than 1,840 branch locations around the world with 643 Cat Dealer Rental Stores. Creating Shareholder Value “Caterpillar is committed to generating attractive returns for its shareholders. Strategic growth initiatives involving its machine, engine, and service businesses are expected to drive these returns over the next several years.” According to a recent article. Since 1993, Caterpillar has increased cash dividends in eight consecutive years, boosting the quarterly dividend to $.35 per share. Since June 1995, they have repurchased approximately 63 million shares, or about 15 percent of all outstanding shares. Financial Data 2000 2006-07-25T20:17:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Strategic-Management-Techniques-of-Caterpillar-Inc_-30661.aspx Introduction to Employee Counseling Human resource management was not a very popular discipline in the earlier part of the last century. Managers at that time viewed labor force as a commodity to be bought or sold like any other commodity. This type of management was probably effective at its time. But it proved to be short lived, which is evident from the ever-increasing importance of what, is now called “Human Resource Management”. Human Resource Management is the part of the organization that is concerned with ‘the people’ dimension, consisting of staff support and function in the organization. Every organization is comprised of people (Hoque, 2000:17) and deals with acquiring their services, developing their skills, motivating them to high levels of performance. Getting and keeping good people is critical to the success of every organization. One important aspect of human resource management is to continuously monitor and maintain employee performance. Improving employee performance is important both to the employee themselves and to the organization. It makes sense to have a healthy high performing work force as not only does it create happier individuals who provide quality service but also their contribution to drive and achieve set organizational objectives. Workplace Counseling may focus on work performance but its emphasis is more on a problem solving approach, which is concerned with the discussion and analysis of problems and issues that affect an employees work performance in an attempt to find solutions. There seems to be an ever-increasing importance could it be because mangers have suddenly woken up to the fact that it helps to retain valuable employees, or because people are more prone to problems than ever before. The correct answer would be a combination of both. In the face of increasing employee turnover and escalating recruitment/training costs, many managers find counseling a better alternative to retain troubled employees by helping them resolve problems. Counseling is also used for other potential problem areas in an organization such as career planning and development or to help employees prepare for implementing changes such as retirement, changes caused by health, stress, conflict etc. Work and careers are important aspects of society and we live in a society where rate of change appears to be accelerating. Career counseling helps people of all ages to make appropriate and realistic career choices. 2006-07-24T19:22:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Introduction-to-Employee-Counseling-30604.aspx Analysis of the Hudson Bay Company The Hudson’s Bay Company is among the oldest, but still active companies in the world. When Canada confederated in 1867, the company was already 200 years old. It was incorporated in England on May 2, 1670, with hopes of seeking a northwest passage to the Pacific, and to generate business with those lands that might prove to be profitable. In 1667, the Royal Navy was ordered by King Charles II to sponsor the Eaglet (ship), while a group of private investors outfitted the other ship called the Nonsuch. On June 3, 1668 the Eaglet, with a man named Pierre-Esprit Radisson (1636-1710) on board and the Nonsuch with Medard Chouart Des Groseilliers (1618-1710), set sail down the Thames River to cross the Atlantic. The Eaglet was captained under William Stannard, and the Nonsuch under Captain Zachariah Gillam. Throughout this voyage the Eaglet was damaged in a storm and had to return to England. The Nonsuch arrived in the southern tip of James Bay on September 29, 1668. After spring break up, the Native people were able to travel down the Rupert River to trade their furs. After the trading ceased, Captain Gillam, Des Groseilliers, and the crew left with a ship full of furs. The success of their voyage prompted England to give right to the charter, and soon after, the Hudson’s Bay Company Charter of Rights (1670) was formed. This occurred when Charles II, king of England, granted the charter to his cousin Prince Rupert and 17 other noblemen, which gave them the rights to trade in any region where waters flowed into Hudson’s Bay. Since 1670 when the company was formed, it has controlled one-third of present day Canadian territory. This widely spread out territory soon became known as Rupert’s Land, however it’s boundaries were never really clearly defined. The general understanding was that the boundaries extended from Labrador to the Rocky Mountains and from the start of the Red River to the Chesterfield Inlet on Hudson Bay. In order to maintain some rules and regulations, the company was allowed to establish its own laws and impose its own penalties within this boundary. For its first two centuries of existence the Hudson’s Bay Company only engaged in the trading of furs. The company appointed 2006-07-24T14:02:43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-of-the-Hudson-Bay-Company-30586.aspx Informational Report on Coca Cola The Coca-Cola Company is one of the reigning soft drink manufacturers in the world. Some analysts contend that Coca-Cola is the most widely used and well-known brand name product in the world. The purpose of this report is to provide Coca-Cola stockholders with an understanding of the product development in the company. Since Coca-Cola began its operations in 1902, it has introduced several distinct products and marketing campaigns that have led to its financial stability and market standing. Some of the facts presented are statements of Coca-Cola head officials; therefore, the report contains a degree of bias. The Coca-Cola Company controls over 45 percent of the global beverage industry. Coca-Cola has been able to maintain this high market share due to innovation in the product development aspect of the company. The income received from product sales has been made Coca-Cola a financially stable company within the industry. Coca-Cola recorded increases in all financial areas in 1994; namely, earnings per share, closing market price of stock, net operating revenue, and income available to stockholders. Coca-Cola will focus on the goal of increasing global market share throughout the 1990s. Coca-Cola producing consists of a soft drink market and a food market. The food market is involved primarily with the producing of fruit juices. The soft drink market is involved with the distribution of soft drink concentrates and syrups. Over the past few years, Coca-Cola has introduced a variety of highly successful products into its soft drink and food markets. The revenue received from the sale of these products has been a source of financial stability for the Coca-Cola company. The Coca-Cola Company focuses the majority of its investment opportunities on the soft drink market because the soft drink market offers a low capital requirement and a high rate of return. Coca-Cola has invested in the development of Diet Coke, Decaffeinated Diet Coke, and Cherry Coke. In 1993, the demand for soft drinks such as these increased to where they account for 27 percent of the soft drink market. By 1996, the diet drink segment is forecast to exceed 30 percent of the soft drink industry. Forecasts such as these reflect the concerns consumers have with health and diet. Coca-Cola recognizes these concerns and has altered its soft drink producing to 2006-07-23T19:50:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Informational-Report-on-Coca-Cola-30557.aspx The Risks of Trading on the Stock Market Every day thousands of people all over the world are aggressively running around in one of the cramped up exchanges, trading stocks for money. Literally billions of dollars in stocks go up and down like a roller coaster. Being a broker or doing your own self-trading takes a lot of education and experience. To gain a significant understanding of how the market works one must work extremely hard. About ten percent of people involved in the stock market know the market well enough to “day trade”. It is the most risky type of trading a broker can do. A “day trader” can loose a million or gain a million in one day. Day trading is uncertain and should not be taken lightly. Along with the big money involved in the stock market comes one of the most stressful jobs established by man. Obviously with putting a lot of money into stocks and not knowing for sure whether your going to gain or loose is something to stress over. Literally you have to trade within minutes or seconds, to get the payoff you are after, timing is critical. As well, being a stockbroker is stressful in itself, trading someone else’s money in order to collect commission is nerve racking. It is an interesting job. It fluctuates like the market itself. There have been many cases of “day traders” who have gained or lost a significant amount of their assets in a day. Few people could look at this, and see it in a positive way, because there is a chance you can gain. The truth of the matter is, even if there is a slight chance you could loose your money it should not be attempted. Unless you have a strong financial base. I was recently reading a book called “the guts and glory of day trading”, statistically it said that 90 percent of people who “day trade” will come out with a significant loss. Further more “day trading” is a form of gambling. If you find yourself waking up every morning consistently thinking about the stock market you are addicted. This is something taken lightly by many people. Many people whom “day trade” have both left their old job and are relying on the earnings from day 2006-07-23T17:18:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Risks-of-Trading-on-the-Stock-Market-30530.aspx Financial Statement Analysis In the healthy and growth inducing economic scenario of the 2000’s, P&G has seen double digit revenues growth to around $56b in 2005. Keeping its costs low has seen it achieve healthy profit margins of around 11% - 12%. Refer Table 1. Table 1 Margins P&G (in %) 2003 2004 2005 Gross Margin 49 51.2 51 Profit Margin 11.96 12.61 12.79 Financial Health: P&G is a stable company operating in a very mature and stable steady growth industry. It has an average Return on Assets of 12.5% and a high average Return on Equity of 43%. It turns its Inventory around 12 times a year, which is also an industry average . One weak aspect of P&G is its relatively poor liquidity position. One reason is the high STD (short term debt). P&G, being a low risk firm is able to get STD at low interest rates and hence uses this instead of LTD. It generates huge positive free cash flows to ensure prompt payment of interest. I feel P&G prefers STD due to its speed and flexibility (no covenants). Another reason for the low liquidity is its almost equal balance between its A/R and A/P. While a firm of its size should be able to work on its supplier’s capital, P&G surprisingly has not been able to that. Unilever has the highest A/P deferral period in the industry, thus leveraging its size to get a better bargain from the suppliers. P&G however, has an industry average A/P deferral period. The only reason I see P&G doing that it believes in treating suppliers better than its competitors by paying them on time as promised. This is part of P&G’s best practices philosophy and also of treating suppliers as partners. Therefore this weak position is not an indication of poor financial management, rather a reflection of good relations with suppliers. P&G finds itself in a commoditized market, with most of its products required for daily use. Growth in this industry depends on demographic factors such as population growth and advertising and marketing strategies more than anything else. Hence it can have leverage itself by issuing long term debt which currently is 14% of its total capitalization. Efficiency Ratios: P&G has an average CCC of around 40 days . A firm like P&G should 2006-07-23T08:42:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-Analysis-on-P-G-UL-and-KMN-30498.aspx The cat went here and there And the moon spun round like a top, And the nearest kin of the moon, The creeping cat, looked up Black Minnaloushe stared at the 2006-07-23T05:03:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cat-Went-Here-and-There-30497.aspx Factors to help Determine Sucsessful Investments When using the term investment it refers directly to the acquisition of new capital such as buildings, machines or offices. Firms will usually make the decision to invest on the expectation to make a gain. Investments made by businesses or firms usually involve millions of dollars, making investment a very big important decision with many different factors to take into account. There are four main factors, which would most likely influence a decision regarding investment, they include the current rate of interest, future expectations, the level of income, the government and the accelerator theory. Interest Rates Interest rates are a variable rate which are manipulated through government policies whenever the economy is not stable. Interest rates have an influence on investment as you can see from the two following figures. Most decisions to invest involve borrowing money, so we can assume that there is an association between the cost of borrowing and the level of investment. Investments usually involve large sums of money. In order to acquire this money firms must take out loans. Interest rates can be defined as the cost of borrowing or the reward for saving. If interest rates are high this will make borrowing more expensive making saving more encouraging. In contrast if interest rates are low this makes borrowing a more attractive offer. Firms are more likely to consider an investment at a low rate of interest. This shows us what kind of impact interest rates has on investment. Future Expectations Another factor that has a significant effect on investment, are a firms future expectations. If investment yielded an 11% increase and the current rate of interest was 10% investment would take place. However the future is unpredictable, because investment decisions take time to accomplish, there is usually a great deal of uncertainty. What businesses expect to happen in the future is very important. If a business’ management is feeling pessimistic about the future, low interest rates will not encourage investment. On the other hand high interest rates will not deter them from making an investment if they are feeling confident and optimistic about the future. This idea in a way contradicts our previous idea; this shows us that there are possibly a lot more 2006-07-22T18:55:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Factors-to-help-Determine-Sucsessful-Investments-30495.aspx History of Google before Going Public Google is a privately held company. The funding partners include Kleiner Perkins Caufield & Byers and Sequoia Capital. In June 1999, Michael Moritz, general partner of Sequoia Capital joined Google’s Board of Directors. Other investors include Stanford University; Andy Bechtolsheim current vice president at Cisco Systems and Ram Shriram. Google Inc. was founded in 1998 by Stanford University Ph.D. candidate Larry Page and Sergey Brin to create a new generation of powerful, scalable search engine services to improve the user experience of searching the web. Based on years of advanced research in computer science, Google is dedicated to providing the best user search experience be delivering a powerful, yet simple to use, format for finding the most relevant answers to search queries. Google offers a search solution though its own website at www.google.com, as well as co-branded web search solution for information content providers. Google’s mission statement is to organize the world’s information, making it universally accessible and useful. Google focuses exclusively on delivering the best search experience on the World Wide Web. Though innovative advances in search technology, Google helps users find information they are looking for quickly and effectively. Google is a privately held company with their equity capital standing at about $25 million in June 1999; no recent equity standing is available at this time. Google’s advanced Web Search technology allows site publishers to offer web search to their own users on their own sites. Google Web Search is used in more than 30 countries by clients including Yahoo! Virgin.net and Netscape’s Netcenter portal. Google’s own web site at www.google.com attracts advertisers who wish to reach users with specific interests. Unlike other search engines, Google advertising is precisely targeted and graphically designed to enhance a user’s overall search experience. Google uses a software robot called Googlebot to identify and evaluate more than a billion pages of content on the web, making it the world’s most comprehensive search engine. Google’s proprietary technology relies on PageRank™, developed by Google founder Sergey Brin and Larry Page, to determine the relative importance of each page Google crawls on the web. Google will continue to be around for years to come because I believe they have assembled an experience and well built team to get the job done and reach the companies goals. They also have the 2006-07-22T18:52:05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/History-of-Google-before-Going-Public-30493.aspx Company Analysis of Whirlpool Corporation Whirlpool Corporation is the world's leading manufacturer and marketer of major home appliances. The company manufactures in 13 countries and markets products in more than 170 countries under major brand names such as Whirlpool, KitchenAid, Roper, Estate, Bauknecht, Ignis, Laden, Inglis, Brastemp and Consul. Whirlpool Corporation is also the principal supplier to Sears, Roebuck and Co. of many major home appliances marketed under the Kenmore brand name. Internal environment is critical: operation and employees management Internal Environment: Strength and Weaknesses Whirlpool Corporation structure is strategic business units. It composed of the microwave oven business unit and the global air treatment. The other one is whirlpool financial corporation. In order to increase their profit, they try to reduce their cost. Some of their actions are they closed several plants and streamlined organization in several group. Though the culture of Whirlpool not mentioned explicitly, we assume that the culture of this company give a positive influence to company performance. The other thing, their future product will be designs as an environmental friendly product in accordance to customer expectations. The marketing strategy of Whirlpool is market driven, and to gain competitive advantage, this company is leveraging a global presence in various regional markets. They also concern market mix of the company that differs of each country. They segmented the market by regional because almost every country has unique preferences that are influenced by environment condition, custom, economic condition, etc. The goal of technology organization was to develop advance, innovative products and move them to market quickly and competitive. Several functions was organized to achieve that goal, such as: -Global Procurement organization: bought and organized the distribution of all materials and components needed by appliance production facilities. -The Corporate Technology Development: develop product and process technology capabilities and provided technical service to Whirlpool business -An Advance Product Concept unit: develop new product concepts that were identified through market research -The Advance Manufacturing Concepts team: bring new manufacture process, identify and develops simulation tools and best practices to be used on global basis -Strategic Assessment and Support organization: identify and evaluated non-traditional new product opportunities In 1988, Whirlpool has eight manufacturing locations and in 1995 they have 12 plants that located in 12 countries. There are some problems occurring in operation and logistic area, such as manufacturing inefficiency and increasing raw materials cost. In term of reducing cost, they closed some 2006-07-22T18:46:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Analysis-of-Whirlpool-Corporation-30490.aspx The Indian Carpet Industry India, like many other countries, has always used wool as the basic material of the carpet. Other materials commonly used are silk and cotton. Silk carpets are particularly high quality pieces. In the beginning of the carpet making century, only natural dyes were used to color the wool. Madder, as well as other wild vegetables, was the most important element of this dying process. "Other natural elements used to make dyes are tumeric root (light yellow), pomegranate skins (darker yellow), rhubarb (dark red and copper red), grass or "kusa (green), and kikar tree leaves (brown). These natural dyes were usually prepared in the carpet maker's own home" (Ruedin 1984). Presently, India and most other countries producing rugs, generally use synthetic dyes (Ruedin 1984). These synthetic dyes come from manufacturers or professional dyers. This is very unfortunate. It is impossible to create carpets that emulate those of yesterday, with the use of synthetic dyes. Patterns to these knotted Indian carpets are essentially the most important aspect of the carpet itself. For 2,500 years the only patterns that were used were floral, arabesques and rhomboids and animal patterns. Although these patterns are still present today, we do see elements of western influence in some designs. However, what seems to be the pattern to follow in India is the traditional Oriental style (Ruedin 1984). India's carpet industry, unlike the past is like any other industry trying to make it in the marketplace. As a result, India has adopted many popular designs that may not be indigenous to India, such as the Chinese patterns as well as Persian designs. "Indian carpet makers have adapted the talim, (a roll of paper marked with a code indicating the number of knots to be woven in their respective colors), as their way to make their products" (Ruedin 1984). The master weaver will read the colors of the talim outloud and the carpet knotters will follow his directions. The talim is made up of the following colors: green, white, pink, yellow and garnet. The number of knots to be woven is then indicated by the sign next to the color (Ruedin 1984). Most Indian carpets are unique to the region from which they come from. The five major carpet producing regions in India are: Kashmir, 2006-07-22T17:49:30-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Indian-Carpet-Industry--30472.aspx Culligan Water Treatment Abstract Culligan Water Treatment, Inc has been serving the public with water softeners and water treatment systems for over sixty years. They have a unique marketing strategy that excels them high above all the competitors, both foreign and domestic. The personal touch and life-long commitment the Culligan Water Treatment, Inc gives each customer leaves them satisfied with their decision to purchase a Culligan water treatment System. Culligan Water Treatment Inc, and How they Market Their Water Softeners After an intense cardiovascular workout, on your treadmill, the first thing you want to do is get an ice-cold drink of water. You go to your kitchen and reach in your cupboard and pull out a tall glass, than you turn on the faucet, put the glass under the faucet and start to fill the glass up with tap water. You now put the glass to your lips and take a big long drink. This scenario would have been common twenty years ago but today you grab that purified bottle water in your refrigerator. The water quality has change tremendously in the past twenty years. With rapidly expanding cities, air pollution, toxic dumping, plus an endless list of reasons that our water isn't as healthy as it was when our parents were our age. Concern about the safety of drinking water is growing. News reports continue to remind people that they cannot take their drinking water for granted. Recent headlines have included: +The outbreak of a waterborne parasite in Milwaukee's waters supply. + Lead contamination caused by old plumbing. +Pesticide and fertilizer run-offs in local water supply. +Radon and arsenic contamination. As public concerns about the environment continue to grow, the need for a constant source of potable water is becoming increasingly apparent. This is where the world's number one water softening company comes into the picture. Culligan Water Technologies, Inc has been in business for over sixty years selling water softeners and treatment systems for the following major markets segments: Household, Commercial, Consumer Retail Point-of-Use, Do-it-Yourself, Industrial, Vending, Bottled Water and Custom. History: It all started in Jack McLachlan's blacksmith shop in NorthBrook, Illinois in 1936. Emmett J. Culligan had the idea to found a water conditioning company, based on a service plan. Right there, with only tools that the little blacksmith shop provided, a business was born. 2006-07-22T13:24:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Culligan-Water-Treatment-Abstract-30457.aspx The Role Of Organizational Culture In Mergers & Acquisitions The articles stressed the important role culture plays in mergers and acquisitions (m&a). Several factors regarding the cultural impact on mergers and acquisitions were evident in the information gathered from the Internet. These factors such as reward systems, operating and decision making styles, organization structure, and company values should be pre-assessed and considered when determining the viability of a m&a. Leaders of today’s global markets should look past financial and strategic synergies and focus more on the cultural impact of changing two previously independent organizations into one integrated solution. There were four main areas of importance regarding organizational culture and mergers and acquisitions: Conduct a cultural self-assessment of potential organizations involved. Determine cultural objectives through due diligence. Integrate the “right” amounts of diversity from both organizations. Actively manage the post-deal culture. At the start of a merger, key cultural characteristics should be assessed in both organizations to choose to 1) keep the two cultures independent (coexist), 2) have one culture dominate and absorb the other, or 3) blend the cultures with surviving aspects of each remaining. The preferred method noted would be to blend the cultures together resulting in a more effective culture than the sum of the two parts. Unfortunately, in many mergers, culture combination and chemistry are mere after-thoughts. Subsequently, the initial objective to acquire the talent and benefits inherent in the “human resource” aspect of a company are lost after integration. Because of the probable culture clashes, employees will have a tendency to fiercely hold on to their cultural norms. Human nature causes clashes to erupt out of noting and evaluating the cultural differences based on “my way” is the superior way and then attacking the other side by identifying inefficiencies. However, a fair amount of cultural debate brings positive outcomes. Cultural due diligence does not suggest elimination of cultural conflict, because diversity, to some degree, is necessary in developing the newly combined corporate culture. After integrating the appropriate amounts of cultural diversity from both organizations, it is also important to actively manage the newly developed post-deal norm. Some suggest that culture has a bottom-line impact on corporate financial performance. By initiating ongoing dialogue and communication, the organization can maintain its cultural objective. In summary, corporations involved in mergers and acquisitions should, 2006-07-19T20:47:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Role-Of-Organizational-Culture-In-Mergers-amp-Acquisit-30402.aspx Intel’s IA-32 Architecture and Sun’s UltraSPARC Architecture The purpose of this paper assignment is to compare the Intel’s IA-32 Architecture with Sun UltraSPARC Architecture at a relatively broad level. First, I will introduce a brief history of each architecture family, and then follow that with a framework for making the comparison. Thereafter I will evaluate one product from each architecture family on the basis of the framework. In the conclusion I will state the preferred product and briefly summarize my reason for the choice. In the late 70's, Intel introduced the Intel 8086 processor, and then quickly introduced the 8088 processor, which was more cost-effective. These were one of the first 16-bit processors. From there on, Intel’s 32-bit version was and still is the most popular because it offers a very wide range of applications. The 8086 processor was selected for IBM’s PC (personal computer), which gave Intel the chance to broaden its horizon to develop a wide range of processors. These processors were based on a range of Complex Instruction Set Computing (CISC). CISC “allows the number of bytes per instruction to vary according to the instruction being processed”. It hardwires a set of instruction into a complex instruction. CISC uses variable length instructions, which increments by the length of the current instruction. This CPU design philosophy is considered to be a poor due to the complexity of the design. The 8086 and 8088 introduced segmentation, which consist of a 16-bit segment register containing a pointer to a memory segment of up to 64Kbytes. They were also able to address up to 256 Kbytes without switching between segments using the four segment registers at a time. This allowed for a wide range of memory. But a 20-bit address that is formed to use a segment register pointer and an additional 16-bit pointer provides a total address range of 1 MByte, which allows for even more memory. Down the IA-32 Architecture family came the Intel 286 or 80286. This processor was significant because it introduced the protected mode. The protected mode uses “segment register content as selectors or pointers into descriptor tables” which provides a 24-bit base address. This allows a maximum physical memory size up to 16 Mbytes for the support of virtual memory management and a variety of protection mechanisms. ] Intel 386 or 80386 processor was the next processor to 2006-07-18T19:33:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Intel’s-IA-32-Architecture-and-Sun’s-UltraSPARC-Architecture-30381.aspx Interview with Trader 2006-07-18T19:30:59-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Interview-with-Trader-from-Chicago-Mercantile-Exchange-30380.aspx Issues with Expanding Ben & Jerry's into Russia Ben & Jerry's Homemade, Inc., the Vermont-based manufacturer of ice cream, frozen yogurt and sorbet, was founded in 1978 by Ben Cohen and Jerry Greenfield. Their first shop was in a renovated gas station in Burlington, Vermont, with a $12,000 investment ($4,000 of which was borrowed). Within a short time, they became popular for their innovative flavors, made from fresh Vermont milk and cream. The main products of Ben & Jerry’s are ice cream, low fat ice cream, frozen yogurt, sorbet and novelty products and are produced in pints, quarts, and 2.5-gallon tubs. Their products are distributed nationwide as well as in selected foreign countries in supermarkets, grocery stores, convenience stores, franchised Ben & Jerry's scoop shops, restaurants and other venues. Ben & Jerry's franchises scoop shops in both the U.S. and Canada. The company also has wholly-owned operations in France, Japan and the United Kingdom, and licensees in the Benelux countries, Israel, Canada, Peru and Lebanon. In 1999, Ben & Jerry's employed 814 people worldwide, primarily covering only the manufacturing, central and distribution facilities in Vermont. Economy Overview in Russia: After the implosion of the Soviet Union in 1991, Russia was struggling to establish a modern market economy and achieve strong economic growth. Russia heavily depended on exports of commodities, particularly oil, natural gas, metals, and timber, which accounted for over 80% of exports. Russia's agricultural sector beset by uncertainty over land ownership rights, which had discouraged needed investment and restructuring. Another threat was negative demographic trends, fueled by low birth rates and a deteriorating health situation - including an alarming rise in AIDS cases. Russia's industrial base was dilapidated. Other problems included widespread corruption, capital flight, and brain drain. Ice Cream Industry in Russia: Russia has always been known for its tasty ice cream—eaten all year-round. Ice cream is one of the few quality food products and so popular that is available even when supermarket shelves were otherwise bare. Russians in Moscow consume 170 tons of ice cream per year, 98 percent of which is Vanilla. Since Russia was the third largest market in the world in the late 1980’s, the ice cream business represented enormous potential. While one can still purchase the Soviet-era standard, the vanilla waffle cone, now Russians can choose from a dizzying array of flavors and ice-cream products. The Russian ice cream industry has also become 2006-07-18T19:24:39-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ben-and-Jerry-s-Expansion-into-Russia-30376.aspx Analysis on the Fur Industry The fur Industry is an area of commerce that encompasses farming or trapping certain furbearing animals, processing their skins for sale to manufacturer’s of fur garments and marketing finished garments to retail outlets. The term fur refers to any animal skin or part that has hair, fleece, or fur fibers attached, either in a raw or processed state. Skins of furbearing animals are also called peltries or pelts. From earliest times, fur has been a prized commodity. Exploration in the New World made furs more readily available, and as early as 1530 regular shipments of beaver pelts were sent to Europe from the colonies. The beaver, trapped by Native Americans, was a main source of barter at trading posts that later grew into such cities as Chicago; St. Louis, Missouri; Saint Paul, Minnesota; Spokane, Washington; and Detroit. II FUR FARMING Fur farming, or raising animals in captivity under controlled conditions, started in Canada in 1887 on Prince Edward Island. Animals with unique characteristics of size, color, or texture can pass those characteristics on to their offspring through controlled breeding. Fur farmers customarily crossbreed animals (mate different varieties from the same species) and inbreed animals (mate close relatives) to produce furs with desirable characteristics. The silver fox, developed from the red fox, was the first fur so produced. Today, so-called mutation minks ranging from white to near black and from bluish to lavender and rosy-tan colors, each with exotic trade names, are raised on thousands of fur farms, as are chinchilla, nutria, and fox. Fur-farmed animals provide a steady supply of fine-quality, well-cared-for peltries. III MARKETING CHANNELS FOR FURS North American fur trappers and farmers have come under increasing pressure from foreign competition. By the late 1980s, the Scandinavian countries produced 45 percent of the world supply of peltries; the USSR supplied 31 percent, the U.S. 10 percent, and Canada only 3 percent. Retail sales of furs in the U.S. grew from less than $400 million in the early 1970s to $1.5 billion by the mid-1980s, then stagnated at between $1.8 billion and $2 billion annually. The fur industry has also been hurt by protests from animal rights activists and the increasing popularity of artificial fur. Trappers send peltries to local collecting stations or to dealers who send them on to receiving houses, where they are prepared for auction. Prime furs, those caught 2006-07-18T19:16:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-on-the-Fur-Industry-30373.aspx Effectiveness of Nautica's Advertising Campaigns I found this print ad on the September issue of Maxim magazine. The reason why it was published in this magazine is because Maxim is a popular Men’s magazine that has a lot of regular subscribers. Maxim is written for young, professional men who are confident, intelligent, everyday people. It serves as both a fun and informative publication, delivering a healthy balance of accessible service with a humorous tone. Editorial features include articles on women, food, work, sports, fashion, and sex. Even women read this magazine so it is unfair to say that only men read it. While browsing through its pages I saw a lot of marketing gimmicks by companies enticing consumers to buy their products. Some border on the outrageous side, while others attempt to attract by evoking images of simple yet powerful images. This is what caught my eye when I saw the ad for Nautica. What do a famous model-actress and a regular looking guy have in common? According to the latest Nautica ad, they prefer the same brand of clothing. In a visually stunning yet simple ad, Nautica combines a beautiful celebrity and an average looking guy in Nautica clothing, creating a very effective, persuasive ad. Not only does the ad imply sensational living through clothing, it appeals to a reader's desire for sex, achievement, autonomy, and prominence, through the picture it uses. From the very first glance at Nautica Jean's ad, the viewer is immediately overcome with a singularity of image placing a celebrity and an average person on the same page as common, everyday citizens. Different styles, colors, and status of people and clothing exist, but the ad encourages people to make no distinction between them because they are side by side. As a result, the consumer is coerced into visualizing themselves in those clothes, wearing the most casual t-shirt and jeans of Shannon Elizabeth. The idea that a celebrity shares the same taste in clothing with you is certainly very attractive and truly, it is implied, Nautica clothes are for anyone, even the rich and famous. Celebrities are used in the ad to create a feeling of prominence, affluence, and achievement. Almost everyone wishes they could look, or at least dress, like someone famous. Nautica advertisers allow readers to think they can. Throwing on a Nautica jeans worn by Shannon Elizabeth makes you feel much more powerful. 2006-07-17T13:08:35-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Effectiveness-of-Nautica-s-Advertising-Campaigns-30295.aspx Analyzing Government Tax Cuts for General Motors Flint, Michigan, the birthplace of General Motors and the United Auto Workers Union (UAW), is facing the devastating affects of the closing of 11 General Motors’ plants which results in approximately 30,000+ jobs lost. The people of Flint made up the largest majority of workers for GM and they enjoyed much prosperity and publicity at the hands of their wealthy employers. General Motors’ chairman, Roger Smith, claims that “this [closing of the plants] is something it has to do to stay competitive in the auto industry”. The plan is for General Motors to close the 11 plants in Flint and to relocate to Mexico where they will build new foreign factories and can pay the workers a lower wage. Michael Moore, the Flint resident/journalist telling us this story, emphasizes that GM will “tell the Union they’re broke and then agree to give back the money from wage cuts, but instead, will use it to build foreign factories, cut more jobs, and take over other companies”. These “other” companies include Hughes Aircraft, on which General Motors spent $5 billion purchasing after the beginning of plant closings in Flint in the late 1970’s. With the closing of these plants, Flint residents are seeing the majority of better paying jobs being replaced with low-wage service sector employment that cannot support their lifestyles. 2] I do not agree with the way General Motors handled the closing of their plants in Flint with respect to the workers laid off and the affects on the community of Flint. General Motors had to recognize the fact that the cutting of 30,000 jobs of loyal Flint workers who relied on their job for security would be devastating. In the community of Flint, where the population was a bit more than 100,000 people, they were cutting 1/3 of the population off from a job where the other 2/3 included the elderly and children that needed to be supported and who could not work. One man alone had been laid off 5 times [too many] and landed himself in a mental health center due to the affects of the stress. Many people had no choice but to move or be evicted like many of the others. Houses were left dilapidated and the rat population grew past the human population as Flint cut back garbage collection due to budget restraints. Being the 2006-07-17T12:54:53-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analyzing-Government-Tax-Cuts-for-General-Motors-30285.aspx Overview of International Business Machines International Business Machines, better known as IBM started out as Computing Tabulating Recording Company in the 1890's. Their corporate name changed to IBM in 1917 and now has become the world's top provider of computer hardware. IBM's long-term success can be attributed to serving many of the world largest, most important firms. In the early 1980's the PC was introduced and made its way into homes, schools and small businesses. However, despite the success of the PC, IBM was experiencing major problems with their new mainframe revolution which was causing annual net losses. When Lou Gerstner joined the company as the new chairman and CEO in 1993 IBM had a remarkable turnaround. Gerstner used his strategic thinking and customer oriented skills that he had brought with him from his CEO position at Nabisco to stabilize the company. Currently some of their main competitors include Microsoft, Compaq and Hewlett-Packard. This Intense competition is the driving force behind IBM that creates the need to lead the computer industry in the creation, development and manufacturing of information technologies. More importantly IBM has taken the information technologies that they have created and translated it into customer value, allowing customers to reap the benefits of their technology they have to offer. The company strives to create the most advanced computer systems, software, networking systems, storage devices and microelectronics. They make and sell a wide array of computers, including PC's, notebooks, mainframes, and network servers, selling more than $10 million of products on average a day. Today the Internet is the most widely used source of transferring information quickly and efficiently and has increased the benefits of information technology. Companies, both big and small are turning to IBM for their expertise in service providing, with the hopes that they can offer assistance in what is needed to stay on top of competition. IBM operates most effectively by leveraging from strategic outsourcing.ss Machines, better known as IBM started out as Computing Tabulating Recording Company in the 1890's. Their corporate name changed to IBM in 1917 and now has become the world's top provider of computer hardware. IBM's long-term success can be attributed to serving many of the world largest, most important firms. In the early 1980's the PC was introduced and made its way into homes, 2006-07-16T22:06:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Overview-of-International-Business-Machines-30271.aspx Advertising: Puffery Vs. Deceptive As I was searching through Bon A petit, a magazine that specializes in cooking, an invigorating ad caught my attention. It was a picture of a young blonde woman, with a look of absolute joy on her face as she is swinging in the park. Next to this picture the ad read, “Feel the freedom at FreeSamples.com. Log on and choose from a bunch of goodies-everything from cappuccino to cosmetics. It’s all free, and it’s yours for the taking. So add a little fun to your day at www.FreeSamples.com.” Next to those words were small pictures of Physique Shampoo, Cascade detergent, Tide, and Mrs. Dash. I logged onto the website and immediately had to register an email address and a password before I could even check out the samples. The ad in the magazine did not state that you needed an email address or even submit one; this would qualify as an omission therefore leading to deceptive advertising. After I hesitatingly gave my email address I had to answer about fifteen questions such as, “What was the combined income for all members of your household in 2000 before tax? What is your marital status?” Had I known that I was going to fill out a survey, submit personal information in order to get the free samples I would have not logged on to the website. After I submitted all of my personal information, I then was taken to another page that had only two products to sample, not a bunch that the ad proclaimed. I thought maybe I was not looking hard enough for the samples so I clicked on an icon that said cosmetics, hoping to find some shampoo samples or make-up, and it said, “ currently there are no products for sample.” So I tried all of the categories: groceries, food and beverage, pets, house ware, and again no products for sample. I felt cheated, after submitting a market research survey of personal information for the website, I anticipated “a bunch” of products like the ad said only to find two offerings. The samples that the ad showed in print were also not any where to be found. The next advertisement was for Aroma Fit, a healthy body treatment fragrance by Lancome. A young female 2006-07-13T19:20:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advertising-Puffery-Vs_-Deceptive-30243.aspx Gillette's Path to Global Success The story of Gillette, one of the most successful global consumer-packaged good companies, well known for product innovation. It offers insights on the innovation, acquisition, and global strategies of Gillette. It is chronologically well organized and is filled with interesting examples and facts, as can be expected from its journalist author Gordon McKibben. This book is aimed at practitioners and students of business. Although it covers consumer-packaged goods, some of the lessons are applicable to all product categories. There are five parts: "The Stage is Set," "The Search for Balance," "Fight for Survival - The Takeover Threats," "Fast Track to Global Leadership," and "Gillette's Global Culture in Practice." The last two chapters are perhaps the most important chapters in the book, considering Gillette is one of the truly global companies: 70% of its sales, 72% of its profits and 80% of its employees are outside the U.S. This book does a good job of highlighting the keys to Gillette's global success. The chapter on the Sensor shaving system (razor and blade) is relevant and interesting. The Sensor shaving system is one of the enduring innovation successes of Gillette. Al Zein, who became the Chairman of Gillette in 1991 and was the head of "Sensor" project, is claimed to have directed his engineering head to first get the product in shape for testing and conduct a broad-scale consumer user test ("CUT" in Gillette jargon). Only later did Gillette figure a way to manufacture it, underscoring the fact that consumers come before manufacturing for Gillette. Gillette's marketing acumen was another driving force behind Sensor's success. The now famous tag line "The Best a Man Can Get" was born in the late 1980s for the brands Atra in the U.S. and Contour in Europe, but was used heavily for promoting Sensor. This advertising blitz was preceded by a teaser ad campaign that announced "Gillette is about to change the way men shave forever." Symons, who then was president of the Shaving Systems Group, was so obsessed with the masculine perception of the product that he wanted a proper masculine sound and feel as the package was ripped open! Gillette also has its own new product organization structure that has contributed to its success. It has a program management system under which all technical activity 2006-07-13T19:12:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Gillette-s-Path-to-Global-Success-30238.aspx Comprehensive Analysis of the Computer Industry COMPETITIVE FORCES The U.S. computer hardware industry is one of the biggest in the world with Compaq, IBM, Dell, Gateway and Hewlett-Packard being the main players. This was one industry that was selling 150 million units in one year, (jpmorgan.com) but with economy not looking so good, things are likely to change for PC makers too. Now more than ever before, the companies in the computer industry are competing as fiercely as possible to make things better for their firms. They are fighting for new customers and are targeting markets they were not willing to exploit before. Traditional approaches and market strategies are giving way to newer ideas and innovative moves. RIVALRY AMONG EXISTING COMPANIES Rivalry among competing firms The competition among the firms fighting for market shares has been intense Just as growth was slowing in the computer industry, Dell launched an all out price war in the fourth quarter of 2000 to gain market share. Hewlett Packard and IBM responded to this by saying the price war was “irrational”, (fortune.com). This helped Dell leap to number one in the worldwide market share and has left its competition scrambling to catch up. The only player to follow Dells lead has been Gateway and they lost 523 million in the first half of this year, laid off 3000 workers and closed 37 stores (Business week online). The implications of this intense competition are that companies have no room for error or inefficiency’s. International Data Corp said that the price war has driven down prices on average 25% this year. This means shrinking profit margins and layoffs at all major companies, (Dell 5700, HP 6500, Compaq8500.) Even though consumers are benefiting from lower prices now, in the long run they may see less technological advancements in their computers and peripherals as companies cut cost to try to earn a profit. IBM: International Business Machine has been in operation since last many decades and offers a whole range of solutions from technologies, systems, products, and services to software and financing. The company has been divided in a three-tier structure of Technology, Personal Systems and Enterprise Systems. Other major services offered by the world leader in technology innovation are divided in segments such as GLOBAL SERVICES SEGMENT, a SOFTEARE SEGMENT, A GLOBAL FINANCING SEGMENT AND AN ENTERPRISE INVESTMENT SEGMENT. The Financial position of the 2006-07-13T13:15:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comprehensive-Analysis-of-the-Computer-Industry-30213.aspx Analyzing Management Incentives and Motivation 1. Introduction Motivating employees is a key issue for most managers. In order to achieve a high level of performance and productivity, managers nowadays are inclined to pay more attention on this issue. Different employees need different motivation. This assignment will first look at the different characteristics of professional workers and lower level contingent workers. It will also address the different motivation approaches which are generally used by managers towards these two different groups. And then, by applying a set of motivation theories, we will explain why managers should use such different methods. 2. Characteristics of professional workers and lower level contingent workers According to Robbins(1998), professional workers are the employees who usually have specialist knowledge, own a permanent working status and tend to be well-paid in an organization, such as software engineers and accountants . On the other hand, lower level contingent workers are usually the people who lack of specialist skills, work part-time involuntarily due to redundancy and tend to be paid at a relatively low level. Professional workers are often placed to important positions and take more responsibility while contingent workers are always working on simple tasks and with less responsibility. 3. Different approaches of motivation applied to professionals and contingent workers in real business world In the real business world, organization managers are usually recommended to take different approaches of motivation towards their professional employees and lower level contingent workers.(www.accel-team.com) Managers tend to motivate professionals by offering challenging projects, giving them autonomy in following interests and structuring work and rewarding with educational opportunities. French computer services company CAP Gemini Sogeti , for example, used to motivate its engineers and technicians by giving them challenging tasks and relevant solution tools (Robbins 1998). To motivate contingent workers, managers use pay increase, opportunity for permanent status and membership of an occupational sickness benefit scheme. Reader’s Digest used to motivate its temporary staff in such a similar way (Syrett, 1983). A set of theories of motivation in the following part may help to explain this difference to a certain extent. 4. Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory and implications Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory is one of the content theories of motivation which attempt to explain motivation in terms of what arouses and energizes behavior (McKenna, 2000). Maslow(1954) identified five human needs that 2006-07-10T13:32:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analyzing-Management-Incentives-and-Motivation-30158.aspx Comprehensive Essay on Ethical Theory in Business From a business perspective, working under government contracts can be a very lucrative proposition. In general, a stream of orders keep coming in, revenue increases and the company grows in the aggregate. The obvious downfalls to working in this manner is both higher quality expected as well as the extensive research and documentation required for government contracts. If a part fails to perform correctly it can cause minor glitches as well as problems that can carry serious repercussions, such as in the National Semiconductor case. When both the culpable component and company are found, the question arises of how extensive these repercussions should be. Is the company as an entity liable or do you look into individual employees within that company? From an ethical perspective one would have to look at the mitigating factors of both the employees and their superiors along with the role of others in the failure of these components. Next you would have to analyze the final ruling from a corporate perspective and then we must examine the macro issue of corporate responsibility in order to attempt to find a resolution for cases like these. The first mitigating factor involved in the National Semiconductor case is the uncertainty, on the part of the employees, on the duties that they were assigned. It is plausible that during the testing procedure, an employee couldn’t distinguish which parts they were to test under government standards and commercial standards. In some cases they might have even been misinformed on the final consumers of the products that they tested. In fact, ignorance on the part of the employees would fully excuse them from any moral responsibility for any damage that may result from their work. Whether it is decided that an employees is fully excused, or is given some moral responsibility, would have to be looked at on an individual basis. The second mitigating factor is the duress or threats that an employee might suffer if they do not follow through with their assignment. After the bogus testing was completed in the National Semiconductor labs, the documentation department also had to falsify documents stating that the parts had surpassed the governmental testing standards. From a legal and ethical standpoint, both the testers and the writers of the reports were merely acting as agents on direct orders from a superior. This was also 2006-07-10T13:24:33-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comprehensive-Essay-on-Ethical-Theory-in-Business-30155.aspx Judging Industry Analysis and Competitive Strategies Judgments about what strategy to pursue should ideally be grounded in a probing assessment of a company's external environment and internal situation. Unless a company's strategy is well-matched to the full range of external and internal situational considerations, its suitability is suspect. This section examines the techniques of industry and competitive analysis, the terms used to refer to external situation analysis of a single-business company. Industry and competitive analysis looks broadly at a company's macroenvironment. The Methods of Industry and Competitive Analysis Industries differ widely in their economic characteristics, competitive situations, and future outlooks. The pace of technological change can range from fast to slow. Capital requirements can be big or small. The market can be worldwide or local. Sellers' products can be standardized or highly differentiated. Competitive forces can be strong or weak and can center on price, quality, service, or other variables. Buyer demand can be rising briskly or declining. Industry conditions differ so much that leading companies in unattractive industries can find it hard to earn respectable profits, while even weak companies in attractive industries can turn in good performances. Industry and competitive analysis utilizes a toolkit of concepts and techniques to get a clear fix on changing industry conditions and on the nature and strength of competitive forces. It is a way of thinking strategically about an industry's overall situation and drawing conclusions about whether the industry is an attractive investment for company funds. The framework for industry and competitive analysis hangs on seven probing questions: 1. What are the chief economic characteristics of the industry? 2. What factors drive change in the industry, and what impact will they have? 3. What competitive forces influence the industry, and how strong are they? 4. Which companies are in the strongest/weakest competitive positions? 5. Who will likely make what competitive moves next? 6. What key factors will determine competitive success or failure? 7. How attractive is the industry in terms of its prospects for profitability? The collective answers to these questions build understanding of a firm's surrounding environment and form the basis for matching strategy to changing industry conditions and to competitive forces. Let's see what each question involves and consider some concepts and techniques that help managers answer them. Identifying the Industry's Dominant Economic Characteristics Because industries differ significantly 2006-07-07T12:25:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Judging-Industry-Analysis-and-Competitive-Strategies-30067.aspx Engineering Genius of Henry Ford Henry was born in July 30,1863 and was the oldest of 6 siblings. Henry grew up on a family farm in Michigan. Henry enjoyed attending school and doing farm chores. But when Henry grew older his interest in doing farm chores disappeared when he was introduced into the world of mechanics. When Henry turned 16 in 1879 he left the farm which he was most ashamed of and left for 2006-07-05T23:43:24-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Engineering-Genius-of-Henry-Ford-30054.aspx Analyzing why Projects can Often Fail in Business This essay will evaluate the reasons why projects fail with some of the factors involves in the failure of a project. This will also include some suggestions to improve the project, as well as different types of tools that can be used to avoid the reasons for failure project. There will be some examples of various types of project that has been carried out in recent years. There are many projects fail to live up to their potential. Some projects fail to gain their schedule or budget goals or fail to deliver everything originally promised. Other projects easily fail altogether. Many of the problems confronted by projects can be eluded or at least accommodated by effective project management practices. Any project does not matter how important it is; there is a possibility that it might be unsuccessful. Perhaps the most dangerous project management attitude would be to deny failure is a possibility. There are some main factors that plays a great role in the failure of a project they are: Political Lack of visionary leadership Lack of resources Organization culture Wrong technology Need and customer focus lost The detail description of the above factors are as follows – usually large projects that are undertaken for example IT projects cut across departments and as a result employees are forced to change the way they work, which affects the culture of the whole organization. This kind of change make employees and middle manager’s scared, consequently can create bureaucratic road locks which affects the project’s chances to succeed. The problem of many businesses that they consider the project such as IT project merely implementation of a technology, that is where they make the mistake every manager needs to see the project as an organization change as a whole. In order to prevent such a problem somebody from the company must make it clear that every department needs to share information that they may have stored in the past. When IT projects fail, it may seem that the IT failed but it is virtually because of the organizational change failed. Lack of user input is the one of the main factor of failing a project like Information Technology. It is necessary to discuss the project with everybody involves in the outcome of a project. 2006-07-05T16:09:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analyzing-why-Projects-can-Often-Fail-in-Business-30023.aspx Understanding the Triangle Shirtwaist Factory Disaster To a large extent, the Triangle Shirtwaist fire brought about many strikes and was a disaster that still lives among us (affecting us nowadays). This disaster then again lives with us for good. It will remind us for whom we have neglected upon. This way we can support the working world, as we will get the same sociability from them and others by cooperating. The fire that occurred in March 25 of 1911 was in many ways a disaster. However many people throughout the world (especially workers), are thankful that it led to realizing the lives of the poor workers throughout the country. The Triangle Shirtwaist factory fire took with it 146 lives and decided to injure many others while at it. Some survivors lived having to recall those painful moments. One has said: “Whatever doesn’t kill you makes you stronger”. This could be considered true in the sense that, nothing similar to this has happen due to change. This change was brought upon bad experience that stays with us till this day. If this didn’t affect us even upon today, then the human labor rights could have been violated again and again. Many people protested after all were clearly identified. The people wanted immediate change in the factories. The workers formed unions in order to protest and demand restitution, justice, and action that would safeguard the vulnerable and the oppressed. The labor unions formed were calling for action to improve the unsafe conditions in workshops. Although disasters similar to the ones above may not have a happened yet there are still black workers having their rights being violated. U.S. Department of Labor found that 67% of Los Angeles garment factories and 63% of New York garment factories violate minimum wage and overtime laws. In many ways nowadays, working conditions are not as bad. We do not have monopolies paying peanuts nowadays but there are some negativities out there . Although many people may be aware of this, they are willing to do anything to gain something in this life. It is very important to fight for your place because U.S. is a capitalist country. You become successful due to work. Strikes such as the one following the shirtwaist factory are not exactly the same. Many of the strikes nowadays do not get as much recognition as they are statewide. They may not 2006-07-04T16:04:43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Understanding-the-Triangle-Shirtwaist-Factory-Disaster-29991.aspx Study of Jack Welch of General Electric For this assignment, we were required to write a paper, which relates our leanings of Organizational Behavior to a current event or business of some form. After doing a wealth of research and reading many of my fortune and business week magazines, I decided that I wanted to incorporate something along the lines of leadership and organizational structure. Due to the current events of September 11, these are very important for all businesses and individuals to take in to consideration. I choose to write about one of our world leaders in the business world with an emphasis on Jack Welch. I plan to discuss how he stresses the importance of Organizational Behavior and how he has used it throughout his career as the CEO of GM, one of our worlds leading industries. Throughout business history, industries have frequently undergone radical change in response to innovation, new thinking, or other dramatic challenges. These challenges have provided the catalyst for leaders to look closely at the ways their businesses have been conducted, the assumptions and beliefs upon which they have based their actions and decisions, and how they lead their organizations. Welch had done a superb job of embracing the challenges that he was faced with. Organizational life cycle models assume that an organization goes through inception to growth, maturity and decline or redevelopment. (Gupta, Yash P; Chin, David CW, Dec 1994) In each stage of the organization life cycle, the strategic leadership would be different because the software and hardware resources inside the organization are different in each stage. I will take three different companies existing in different organization life cycle stages to analyze the implication of organization life cycle for strategic leadership of CEO. When Jack Welch took office in April 1981 as the new chairman and chief executive officer of General Electric, the company had entered the stage between the maturity and decline. In 1980 right before Welch took the position, GE's organizational rigid structure, resistance to change and bureaucratic climate make it impossible to perceive important environmental changes. Moreover, the organizational structure, decision-making process and information management procedures no longer fit the organization's needs. Welch responded to the board's mandate and acted to revive the organization from the decline stage into the earlier stage of the organization life cycle. 2006-07-04T13:28:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Study-of-Jack-Welch-of-General-Electric-29973.aspx Fiscal Update and Analysis for Starbucks Corporation Starbucks Corporation continued its impressive growth after the close of the case, recording fiscal 1999 revenues and earnings of $1.7 billion and $101.7 million, respectively. The company's 1999 revenues represented a 28% increase over fiscal 1998 revenues, while the earnings increase represented a 25% increase over 1998's earnings before expenses related to the 1998 acquisition of the Seattle Coffee Company. The chain's same store sales increased 6% during 1999. During its first 30 weeks of 2000, revenues increased 33% over the same period in 1999 to $1.2 billion. Same store sales increased 9% over the comparable 30-week period in 1999. Starbucks income statements for fiscal 1998 and 1999 and the first six months of fiscal 2000 are presented in Table 1. On April 6, 2000 Starbucks announced that effective June 1, 2000, Howard Schultz would step down as CEO to become the company's new Chief Global Strategist. Schultz would remain the company's chairman and Orin Smith, the current COO and President, would become the new CEO. The transition was said to allow Schultz to focus on global expansion and international brand development. Starbucks undertook a number of initiatives in 1999 and 2000 to maintain its historical revenue and earnings growth. The company continued its domestic and international expansion, announced plans to make its premium home brewing equipment available through traditional retail outlets in addition to its own Starbucks locations, began an office coffee program, entered into a licensing agreement to open over 100 coffee bars in Albertson's supermarkets, and introduced a line of chocolate confections that would be sold in Starbucks' 2,498 locations. Starbucks also added organically grown coffees, extended its line of super-premium ice creams with six new flavors (including four non coffee flavors), introduced two new flavors of Frappuccino blended coffee drinks, and added cool beverages for summer that included iced coffee and blended juiced teas. In addition, Starbucks added 484 coffee shop locations in North America, the United Kingdom, the Pacific Rim, and the Middle East during the first 30 weeks of fiscal 2000. Starbucks' stock experienced mediocre performance for the last half of 1999 and the first quarter of 2000 after the company announced in early June 1999 that its products and an array of non coffee products would be offered over the Internet to 2006-07-03T15:43:08-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Fiscal-Update-and-Analysis-for-Starbucks-Corporation-29942.aspx Stress Management in the International Workplace In the context of a burgeoning economy and the growing influence of "Americanised" work cultures and practices in a number of workplaces, stress at work has increased in Ireland in recent years. The management of workplace stress is thus an important contemporary issue in 2001. Recent research indicates that deficiencies in the management and organization of work are the main causes of stress at work, and that workplace stress may have a number of negative consequences for workers and employers, including: physical and mental illness; chronic absenteeism; increased labor turnover; and reduced morale, motivation and productivity. While Ireland's much-vaunted "Celtic Tiger" economy continues to generate strong economic growth and reductions in unemployment, a number of negative aspects are evident in an increasingly frenetic economic climate. One of these is that there is increased evidence of workplace stress, particularly as the pressures of balancing work and outside responsibilities have intensified in recent times. Significantly, an increasing number of Irish workplaces appear to be following a similar trend to, or are influenced by, US models of workplace employment practice and attitudes to work culture. In certain instances, this has meant longer working hours, a culture of "workaholism", and a lack of "work-life balance" (Managing the work-life balance - IE0009155F); all of which often promote workplace stress. As such, the management of workplace stress is an important contemporary issue. Workplace stress can be defined as being experienced when "the demands from the work environment exceed the employees' ability to cope with them" ("Identifying organizational hazards that cause stress", J Armstrong, Industrial Relations News 33, September 2000). Causes of workplace stress Stress may be related to personal attributes and individual circumstances outside the workplace, such as family and relationship problems. However, three recent studies sponsored respectively by the European Foundation for the Improvement of Living and Working Conditions (Third European survey on working conditions, 2001 - European Foundation survey reveals that working conditions in Europe are deteriorating - EU0101292F), the European Agency for Safety and Health at Work ("Research on work-related stress", T Cox, A Griffiths and E Rial-Gonzalez, April 2000), and the Irish Congress of Trade Unions ("Workplace stress in Ireland", J Armstrong, 2001) conclude that the main causes of workplace stress are related to deficiencies in the design and management of work. Some of the main findings from these three studies are compiled below. With regard 2006-07-03T14:02:43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Stress-Management-in-the-International-Workplace-29936.aspx EXECUTIVE SUMMARY NAME OF THE BUSINESS Queensland and Northern Territory Aerial Services Limited (QANTAS) LOCATION AND DETAILS PRIME FUNCTION OF THE BUSINESS The company's prime function is the transportation of passengers and airfreight. In addition to the core airline, Qantas subsidiaries operate in specialist markets including regional airlines under QantasLink, as well as inflight catering, holiday and travel operations and information technology. BRIEF BACKGROUND OF THE BUSINESS Qantas was founded in the Queensland outback in 1920 registered originally as the Queensland and Northern Territory Aerial Services Limited (QANTAS). Qantas today is the world's eleventh largest airline in terms of revenue passenger kilometres (RPKs) and is Australia's leading domestic airline operating an average of 565 flights a day to 60 destinations in all states and mainland territories. Qantas also operates around 590 international flights every week from Australia, offering services to 130 destinations in 33 other countries. The Qantas Group carried more than 20 million passengers in 1999-2000 and serviced 125 destinations in Australia, Africa, the Americas, Asia, Europe, the Middle East, and the Pacific. Qantas has built a reputation for excellence in safety, operational reliability, engineering and maintenance, and customer service. Today, Qantas is widely regarded as the world's leading long distance airline and one of the strongest brands in Australia. Qantas also operates subsidiary businesses including other airlines, and businesses in specialist markets such as Qantas Holidays and Qantas Flight Catering. LEGAL STRUCTURE OF THE BUSINESS Qantas is an incorporated business enterprise which has gone through the legal process, at the end of which the business is a legal entity separate from its owners. It’s a public company with the company being listed on the Australian Stock Exchange (ASX). Public companies are recognized by the letters ‘Ltd’ after their name. THE PURPOSE OF THIS MARKETING PLAN The purpose of this marketing plan is to provide an outline for what is needed Qantas have ordered 12 A380 aircraft with options for 10 more, with the first aircraft being delivered in April 2007. The purchase of the A380 continues Qantas’s multi-billion dollar program to provide the most up to date and efficient fleet. The aircraft will be operated in a three class, 501 seat configuration on international services between Australia and the United States and on the Kangaroo Route to the United Kingdom. The interior design for the A380 aircraft will provide new levels of comfort for passengers and will feature, among other things new seat designs, special lounge areas, video on demand, internet 2006-06-22T07:08:37-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Executive-Summary-QANTAS-29796.aspx Examining the Motorcycle Industry Today For the last century, motorcycles have been a major influence to international culture. Back in 1885 Gottlieb Daimler created the first gas-powered motorcycle, with the mindset of function over form. It was nothing but a wooden bicycle frame, with a simple four stroke engine attached (Solomn R. Guggenheim Museum). At that point motorcycles were very experimental. While in the beginning they weren’t much to look at, they truly proved their usefulness in both World Wars. For instance, Harley Davidson created motorcycles for the United States in World War I and World War II, BMW for the Axis in World War II and Honda for Japan in World War II (Solomn R. Guggenheim Museum). After playing their parts in the major wars, one at a time each major motorcycle company gradually moved towards racing (that is with the exception of Honda which was originally created with racing in mind) (Solomn R. Guggenheim Museum). They each took their part in different racing categories and were all quite successful. In present day the motorcycle industry is a broad one. Motorcycles satisfy everyone, from people who like to tour, to off-roaders, to those who like to race. They even play a big part in law enforcement. The motorcycle industry can easily be split into two main categories: domestics and imports. The domestic market tends to lean more towards big body style bikes or “hogs”, with a lot of power and size. However, non-US countries lead the biggest portion of the industry. Imports encompass all other styles of bikes but are usually stereotyped by “café racers”; bikes with high power to weight ratios. The domestic market is a small yet powerful portion of the world market for motorcycles. The only well known player in the domestic market is Harley Davidson. The domestic market of motorcycles has become a major part of American culture. It has created a large and very cult-like following with a “ride or die” mentality. Harley Davidson Harley Davidson was started in 1901 by a couple of entrepreneurs named William Harley and Arthur Davidson, who wanted to “take the work out of bicycling.” They started out slow but by 1909 the company produced what later became their trademark engine: a 45degree V-Twin (Bacon 14). This new motorcycle was nearly 800cc, produced 7hp and could reach a 2006-06-20T18:00:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Examining-the-Motorcycle-Industry-Today-29734.aspx Keys to Successful Decision Making in Management The article I am about to present is a good example of decision-making. The reason I chose this article is because it has a good example of a decision making to reach managerial success and it is definitely related with my course objective. From the article, I get that decision-making process is one of the most basic factors that can influence the competence of an organization and it is usually connected with the future prospects of a company. The article also states that decision-making is also a factor that can show the success of a manager or the failure of him. Although the fact that a manager must have many skills in order to succeed in his task, it is important to have good judgment in decision-making since the facts are changing day by day. This is the second reason, which shows the importance of decision-making process as the organizations are facing new challenges. The article also handles the decisions in two categories. Programmed decisions are defined as canned responses to situations and the non-programmed decisions are the ones that are new and need creative program solving. Followings are the stages of rational decision-making model defined by the article and I think it is the strength of that article to understand the idea of decision-making. ü To identify clearly what the problem is. ü Develop a list of the alternatives courses of action. ü Choose a solution from the list ü Implementation ü Evaluation of the choice I learned that at the first stage of decision-making the important fact is how the manager will understand where is the problem and they use some standards in order to analyze the problem. The second stage in a decision-making process is the development of alternatives in relation with the problem that has been nominated. This also requires for the manager to have experience and creative power. According to the article the key is to develop a list with as many choices as possible to improve the quality of the alternatives. When the alternatives are listed, the managers analyses them to choose the best alternative. The article also says that the process of decision-making is not ended after the choice is made. The next stage is implementation to understand the effectiveness of the decision. And the final stage is to monitor the success of chosen alternative, which is called the evaluation stage. The article also suggests 2006-06-20T17:58:33-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Keys-to-Successful-Decision-Making-in-Management-29733.aspx YES Network sues Cablevision The YES Network, frustrated by the fact that it can not be seen in three million metropolitan area households in New York served Cablevision with a suit in federal court in Manhattan yesterday. YES accused Cablevision of violating antitrust laws, by illegally using its power as an owner of both cable systems and sports networks like MSG and Fox Sports New York to deny YES's Yankees games to its subscribers. Leo J. Hindery Jr., YES's chairman, who said he had waited to file suit until he was sure that Cablevision would not agree to terms accepted by any cable systems and DirecTV. Because of this Cablevision subscribers are very upset due to the fact that they have missed 22 Yankees games on YES’s prod casting station so far this season. Cablevision said yesterday that the lawsuit was "without merit." On the other hand from YES's perspective they stated that the "latest ploy is to pressure Cablevision into accepting an expensive `take it or leave it' demand that is not in the best interests of all our customers." “The chance of seeing a game before the All-Star break is not likely," said David Boies, the lawyer representing YES, who was the lead counsel in the federal antitrust case against Microsoft and directed Al Gore's legal strategy in Florida after the 2000 election. Many of the Yankees fans for the past 13 years have been use to watching their team on MSG, which lost the team's TV rights after last season. The lawsuit unfortunately was of no use, because YES failed to persuade Cablevision to pay a monthly fee of $2 a subscriber and to show Yankees games on its expanded basic tier. The lawsuit also said Cablevision used monopoly power and gained through acquiring cable systems with 950,000 subscribers from 1997 to 2001 and through acquiring Madison Square Garden in 1997 - to discriminate against YES for the benefit of MSG, which was weakened by losing rights to the Yankees, and FSNY. YES is seeking unspecified damages, which would be tripled if it prevails in court, as well as an order for Cablevision to divest its interests in regional sports programming and its recent cable acquisitions. On Thursday, Cablevision is expected to disclose how many subscribers it has lost to DirecTV. It the satellite programmer that the figure is 30,000 to 50,000. Cablevision executives say 2006-06-20T16:54:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/YES-Network-sues-Cablevision-29704.aspx Corporate Governance in Minimizing Disasters 1. Introduction This coursework is designed to look at the design and monitoring within organisations to ensure disasters don¡¦t happen. There have been many disasters in recent history such as Three Mile Island, Bhopal, Challenger, Chernobyl and the Herald of Free Enterprise. All calamitous events that represent loss of human lives, damage to the environment and loss in financial terms. Obviously, great care is taken to avoid such occurrences and this essay concentrates on the processes that address these issues. With the natural expansion and development of the global marketplace companies are under increasing competition to perform. Management is subsequently under pressure to introduce enhanced processes and technology to deliver improvements in operational efficiency. From such developments transpire new and unknown human-machine interfaces and the role of humans in operating these systems. This is where the vital role of governance lies, and defines the manner in which design processes and operation are undertaken within an organisation. Governance also looks at understanding of the information contained within their system and the dispersion of this information and knowledge throughout the organisation. Disasters can be caused by a variety of sources such as technical or environmental but this focuses on the human factors, and desired elimination of, in causing such catastrophic system failures. By its very nature human error is impossible to eliminate in totality. It is useless to attempt to change human nature; progress is made in designing the system to safely operate with humans as an integral part of the process. I believe it impossible to ensure no disasters will occur in the future, but this essay will look at the methods used to keep the possibilities of such disasters occurring to a minimum. I will look at the processes and principles applied to design and monitoring within organisations, where appropriate highlighting relevant case studies to illustrate my points. 2. Why disasters happen Disasters are more likely to occur with progression in technology and the complexity of systems. Over the past 30 to 40 years a technological revolution has occurred in the design and control of high-risk systems. This has brought about radical and still little understood changes in the tasks that the human operator is expected to perform. There are several factors affecting human performance in such systems and different types of human error need to be recognised. 2.1 Types of Errors Each disaster has various contributory factors but it is 2006-06-20T15:22:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Corporate-Governance-in-Minimizing-Disasters-29687.aspx Key Components of the UK Travel and Tourism Industry The structure of the travel and tourism industry plays an important part in linking the key components together especially the principles that are organisations that provide the products for a holiday e.g. services such as accommodation, transportation and holiday insurance which makes up the package holiday arranged by the travel agent and tour operator. They can be divided up into three groups, which are… • Transportation Carriers • Accommodation Providers • Ancillary Services Accommodation and Catering Accommodation can be serviced which includes housekeeping and meals or the alternative, which is self-catering. Accommodation has an enormous role in the travel and tourism industry has there are many accommodation providers ranging from small independent out lets to the much larger organisation such as Marriott, Travel Inn and Thistle which are nationally owned. The range of serviced accommodation depends on the size ranging from small which is usually 10 or fewer rooms to a large, which are more than 50 rooms. Facilities that might include a bar, swimming pool, gym, room service, room facilities such as a T.V, minibar and possibly an onsite bathroom. All establishments are classified in award ratings that usually range from 1 to 5 stars. The ETC (English Tourism Council) inspects hotels and self-catering every year. Many B&Bs and guesthouses operate in the summer where there are more tourists although larger ones are also open in off-season. Seaside towns such as Blackpool mostly locate a lot of B&BS and Guesthouses; B&Bs are targeted at short stay visitors while tourists to Guesthouses usually stay at least a week. HOTELS NUMBER OF BEDROOMS Travelodge 7,000 Marriott 5,000 Travel Inn 9,500 Thistle 10,000 Hilton 9,000 Stakis 8,000 Holiday Inn 6,000 Toby Hotels 1,400 Moat House 7,000 Regal Hotel 5,500 Jarvis Hotels 5,500 Friendly Hotels 5,000 Millennium 4,500 Swallow 4,000 The bar chart and table above show the largest UK hotel groups in means of how many there are of each and how many rooms they have. The more rooms in a hotel the higher the ranking e.g. the Thistle have a higher ranking than the Swallow hotels. The major hotels are owned by three large organisations, which are Forte, Whitbread and Bass. TOURIST ATTRACTIONS A tourist attraction is part of an excursion where a tourist will travel to a destination for entertainment, education or for interest. The destination allows public access whether it be day visitors or local residents and they do not book before they go and visit. The attractions are not classed as tourist attraction if 2006-06-20T14:54:14-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Key-Components-of-the-UK-Travel-and-Tourism-Industry-29681.aspx Southwest Airlines Company Profile While flying home to Texas last summer with Southwest Airlines, I had the most fun and unique experience with an airline that I could ever remember. It all started out quite oddly enough in the lobby just before takeoff. As I was checking in at the ticket counter, the representative asked me if I wanted to play a game that could get me free round trip tickets. "Sure, who wouldn't," I exclaimed. As she gave me my boarding pass she said, "Great, how many holes do you have in your socks?" Initially caught off guard, I responded, "Excuse me!" "The free tickets are being given to the customer who has the most holes in their socks," she explained with a perky smile. It was just my luck that I was wearing sandals. I told her, "Too bad your not checking underwear, because I'm sure I could be in the running for some free tickets with that sort of game." The remainder of the flight was filled with jokes and gags yet quality service from the pilot to the flight attendants. I can remember our flight attendant, dressed in a T-shirt, shorts and tennis shoes along with the rest of the staff, enhanced the safety announcements with the remark: "There may be fifty ways to leave your lover, but there are only six ways to leave this aircraft." Having fun is obviously a big part of Southwest Airlines formula to success. It all starts from the top with their childish yet brilliant boss Herb Kelleher. Kelleher, the company's CEO, is the "nut" behind these shenanigans. This chain-smoking, Wild Turkey-drinking Texas transplant from New Jersey has: • Dressed for employee celebrations as Roy Orbison, Elvis, a medieval knight and a teapot; • Passed out the peanuts himself on board his orange and brown 737s • In front of cheering employees, arm-wrestled another CEO for the right to use the slogan "Plane Smart." (He got whipped, but he used the slogan anyway.) This man, once called "The High Priest of Ha Ha" by Fortune Magazine firmly believes: "If you feel real good about coming to work, if you feel real good about what you're doing, if you feel you are doing something for a meaningful cause and you're having fun while you're doing it, then you look forward to coming to work. You don't succumb to stress as easily and 2006-06-20T14:20:30-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Southwest-Airlines-Company-Profile-29667.aspx Analysis of Subway Chains and their Creator Fred Deluca Fred Deluca may not be known to the world, but his restaurant is. Today many people eat at the famous submarine sandwich shop called SUBWAY, now the second largest restaurant chain in the world. It offers a healthy alternative to fast-food. Today, there are more than 15,000 restaurants in 76 different countries. Fred Deluca made the very first SUBWAYÒ Restaurant sandwich in 1965, and, today, he still serves as president. Fred Deluca had just graduated from high school and was looking to get into college. He worked at a job in a hardware store for the minimal hourly wage of $1.25. He wanted to go to college to study to become a medical doctor. Fred Deluca was friends with the Dr. Peter Buck, a crucial part of his success. It was Dr. Buck who suggested the idea. and eventually became a co-partner of SUBWAYÒ. Also, Dr. Buck lent Fred a thousand dollars to start the business. When he first started as an entrepreneur, Fred Deluca was a hard-working, competent and dependable young man at the age of 17. Taking subtle risks and winning, he learned quickly to make his business successful. Struggling just to have food on the table every night, it was difficult to make a lot of money. Fred struggled with his first two restaurants in the first couple of years, but he endured and starting to make money on his third restaurant that he opened. Originally called Pete’s Super Submarines, the name was changed to Subway in order to increase visibility. When he made it past the industry's standard death point, he set his sights higher; he no longer had his dream of becoming a medical doctor. Instead, he set a goal for himself to open 5,000 SUBWAYÒ Restaurants by 1994. Ahead of schedule, Fred Deluca started opening franchises at the rapid pace of almost 100 stores a month. In 1993, Subway was named Entrepreneur magazine's number-one rated franchise for the second time. He even out-ranked McDonalds, Dunkin' Donuts, and 7-Eleven. In 1997, he established MILE (the Micro Investment Lending Enterprise), a nonprofit organization designed to provide micro loans for new entrepreneurs. I believe that Fred was successful as an entrepreneur rather than a manager because Fred was an ambitious person who wanted to do something with his life by going to college. It turned out that he started a 2006-06-15T15:55:40-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-of-Subway-Chains-and-their-Creator-Fred-Deluca-29539.aspx Overview of the Advertising Industry in the UK I. Introduction The UK advertising industry has been at the forefront of the global market for several years now and is set to stay that way. The reason the advertising industry in the U.K has become world leader is due to a number of factors, primarily due to the strong economic structure in the U.K at present, but also a result of a number of political, economic and commercial events that have required active promotion. British advertising has gained a reputation over the past years as being the worlds most creative and effective, with adverts such as the Tango campaign, Hello Boys and Levis pushing the industry to the forefront. II. Market Analysis 2.1 Market Size The UK advertising market is a growing market; between 1992 and 1999 the advertising expenditure rose by 171% to exceed £15 billion in 1999 for the first time. The following graph illustrates the strong growth this market has experienced. Source: Advertising Association Key events that were partly responsible for this development were the Millennium, the Sydney Olympics 2000 and the launch of Digital Television in the UK. The enormous competition in new technology market such as Internet or mobile phones is also a reason why advertising expenditure increased so strongly. Market forecasts predict a further growth; expenditure is prognosticated to increase by 60% by 2004 so that the market value would reach £19 billion. (Euromonitor 2000) 2.2 Market Segmentation In 1999, Newspaper and Television advertisings are with the biggest market segment, they totally account for 58% of the total expenditure. It is followed by Direct mail with 12%. All sectors have grown constantly since 1993 and further increase is expected for the future. The introduction of digital television and the emergence of more private channels could result in a much stronger growth in this sector. Appendix 1 and 2 and 3 illustrate the growth in the different segments with a graph and a table. 2.3 Porter’s Five Forces Rivalry between existing firms There is intensive rivalry in the market because agencies need constantly to win new accounts. The normal procedure is that agencies pitch for new business, but even for existing accounts clients often demand a repitch. Accounts of important clients are worth millions of pounds and agencies compete directly with each other therefore rivalry is an important factor in this market. Threat of new entrants Clients organise pitching and switch agencies regularly to ensure that their 2006-06-15T00:35:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Overview-of-the-Advertising-Industry-in-the-UK-29522.aspx Walt Disney bridging Past and Present “When your heart is in your dreams, no request is too extreme, when you wish upon a star your dreams come true.” Walt Disney is by far one of the influential people of the twentieth century. Try to imagine a world without Walt Disney’s magic, his movies, or even his theme parks. He has signal handedly shaped the entertainment industry in to what we know today. He pioneered the fields of animation, movies, and entertainment. Walt Disney was our bridge from the past to the future. Walt had a very early interest in drawing and art. When he was seven years old, he sold small sketches and drawings to nearby neighbors. Instead of doing his homework, he doodled pictures of animals and nature. He attended McKinley High School in Chicago. There he divided his attention between drawing and photography. At night he attended the academy of fine arts to better his drawing abilities. At his teacher’s invitation, he would tell his classmates stories while illustrating on the chalkboard. At the age of sixteen he began driving an ambulance for the American Red Cross. After a year of driving for the Red Cross, Walt decided to pursue a career in commercial arts, which soon led to his experiments in animation (Walt Disney, Biography, 2002). He began producing short animated films for local businesses. During this period he combined live performers with cartoon figures, made most popular in the movie Mary Poppins. Soon after that he returned to straight cartoon format, he produced twenty-six cartoons in the Oswald the Rabbit cartoon series. After his twenty-sixth cartoon in that series he lost his rights to the Oswald character in a New York contract dispute. He knew he needed a dynamic new character. Referring to a series of sketches he settled on a cartoon mouse as his next star. Originally the mouse’s name was Mortimer, but thankfully his wife suggested the name Mickey. Soon after that he had finished two Mickey Mouse cartoons. However prior to their release he saw his first talkie and realized that the future of films was in sound (Walt’s Story, 2002). Immediately he went to work on a third Mickey Mouse cartoon called Steamboat Willie incorporating sound and therefore revolutionizing the film and 2006-06-13T18:59:30-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Walt-Disney-bridging-Past-and-Present-29458.aspx Company Profile of Executone Information Systems Executone Information Systems, based in Milord, Connecticut, which designed and marketed telecommunications products for small-and medium-sized businesses, has become a major telecommunication company competing with AT&T and Northern Telecom since 1988. Because of economic recession in 1993, many companies had to change their product strategy to overcome this unbreakable situation. Not only the largest company in this business area such as AT&T decided to lower price and revenues, but also Executone reduced its profit margin since it had recently overhauled healthcare communication system that was malfunctioning after installation. With this current situation, even though Executone showed slightly incremental Return On Sale from 0.4% in 1991 to 1.2% in 1992 in its Annual Report, this was not yet its great appreciation. After facing this crisis, Alan Kessman, the president of Executone Information Systems, questions its future business that it would be able to conquer with its rivals in the market. To achieve the highest degree of success in this industry, Kessman wonders whether any mid-course adjustment should be implemented. u Alternatives 1. Continuing every product with more advertisement and introducing promotion campaigns 2. Dropping non-system telephone hardware 3. Dropping healthcare system and making some changes in its organization u Analysis of each option Continuing every product line on the market by putting more advertisement and introducing promotion campaigns is not the best solution in helping Executone to become successful in this situation since there were some flaws from this approach. With adopting its strategy, the company could gain more sales, resulting in increase in return on investors. However, this approach would definitely not only cost the company a huge amount of expense but also impact on its overall profit. Furthermore, by implementing all of current company products, the total expense was about 98.5% of total sales. Then, income before taxes for shareholders was only 1.5%. This number was fairly low (See Appendix A). Therefore, the critical issue at this time was operating decision that could control cost of good sold, sales, general, and administrative expenses (SG&A), as well as other expenses, not promotion strategy. To complicate the matter, the company might not have enough money to invest in any sales or marketing strategies because its income before taxes was practically small. Therefore, in this situation, managing cost would be considered as one of the most important factors that could increase bottom line profit and equity investorsf capital. These 2006-06-13T18:24:49-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Profile-of-Executone-Information-Systems-29437.aspx Advantages of the Corporate Structure A company is a legal entity created separately from those who own and operate it. As a separate entity, the company's debts and taxes are separate from its owners (shareholders), thereby, offering the greatest personal liability protection of all business structures. A company is an artificial "legal" person. It is owned by shareholders who have limited liability (i.e., they are not personally responsible for the company’s debts). A company is run by directors. Because the company continues to exist even after the death of a shareholder, it offers tremendous estate planning advantages. In addition to liability protection, incorporating offers attractive tax advantages, better financing and the ability to raise cash. The main advantage of a Limited Company is to separate business risk from the shareholder's personal assets and a possibility to limit the amount of money that a business proprietor owes personally. A Company allows shareholders to limit their maximum possible liability for the debts of that Company to the amount of the paid capital in the Company. If a shareholder holds hundred $1.00 shares in a Company, that shareholder's liability for the company's debts is limited to $100.00. Shareholders are only liable for any unpaid shares and any debts that have been personally guaranteed. That's in contrast to the position of a sole trader or partner in a firm who is liable for the debts of that business unlimited. Whilst there are still common law grounds for the protection of an unregistered name, forming a Company is a way to formally register a Business name and therefore notifying the world of a name's existence. Once the Registrar of Companies approves the Company name no other Company can be registered with the identical or near identical name. There is no register for unincorporated bodies such as partnerships or sole traders. Additional name protection can be archived through registering a Trademark or Service Mark with the Commissioner of Trademarks. A Company is a separate legal entity from its shareholders. An individual cannot enter into a contract with him but a shareholder can enter into a contract with the Company. Therefore a shareholder may be employed by the Company or may loan money to the Company on the same basis as any other unrelated party. A Company gives different opportunities for raising capital. This may be by issuing of new shares (the purchase of which, by the new shareholders, brings capital into the Company) 2006-06-13T18:15:14-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advantages-of-the-Corporate-Structure-29431.aspx Disney's Attempt at Foreign Corporate Expansion INTRODUCTION Many companies throughout the United States and beyond are resorting to developing their business abroad. This is due to numerous factors such as the ability to cut costs through cheaper building material or labor, which leads to increg their revenues, functioning with more advantageous tax and labor laws, and expanding their market, just to name a few. The Walt Disney Company was one of those many American organizations to expand on foreign soil. Its first foreign venture proved to be so successful that the decision was made to further expand abroad. This next foreign expansion experience, named Euro Disneyland did not prove to be the successful venture that had been anticipated by its creators. Euro Disneyland a theme park comprised of an updated, state of the art Disney's Magic Kingdom, is a subsidiary of the Walt Disney Company located outside Paris, France, and has experienced numerous complications from its inception. Because the Walt Disney Company executives were determined to adhere to American philosophies, they did not thoroughly investigate all aspects of the European environment. This failure to do adequate research caused the Walt Disney Company executives and visionaries to construct their American dream theme park on foreign soil with little if any regard for the practical reality of the physical, financial, and/or cultural environment of their chosen site. More specifically, the Walt Disney Company's "...biggest mistakes were its overambitious plans to develop the site, plus Euro Disneyland's financial structure itself, which depended on a highly optimistic financial scenario with little room for glitches" (Gumbel & Turner, 1994, p. A 12). These massive oversights were contributing factors to the problems faced at Euro Disneyland. As a company planning on expanding abroad, it is helpful to study the history of companies which previously have developed in other countries. For example, studying the Walt Disney Company's venture into France will allow other companies to learn from the Walt Disney Company's experiences. Recognizing, understanding and avoiding their mistakes will allow a company entering a new country increased opportunity to succeed. Reviewing the Euro Disneyland venture from the site research investigation to the present day operation will be beneficial to a company considering expansion abroad. THE HUMAN RESOURCE CONNECTION The human resource professional often is involved in determining the optimum site for a business and is responsible for many other aspects of an international expansion, such as cultural evaluation of 2006-06-13T18:04:07-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Disney-s-Attempt-at-Foreign-Corporate-Expansion-29427.aspx Company Analysis of Coors Brewing Company The brewing industry makes a drink known from the most ancient of times. Through advances in time and technology the brewing industry has changed essentially into one of the largest modern multinational industries that exist today. It was not until the early nineteen hundreds that the beer industry initialized through the creation of lager beers. The technological advances created at the same time were, “Mechanical refrigeration greatly aided in the production as well as the storage of beer. Pasteurization was also adopted during this period, which opened the way for wide-scale bottling and off-premise consumption of beer. In addition, developments in transportation allowed brewers to ship beer long distances in refrigerated rail cars, increasing both marketing volume and area” (Goldhammer, 1). The beer industry has remained generally stable in our economy since the prohibition era. A strong economy, diversity, and foreign trade rates are several factors that maintain the success and growth of such a mature product. The brewing industry is part of the second largest industry in the nation. Beer has given the definition of alcohol seeing that, “The alcoholic beverages industry is a $95 billion dollar a year business in the United States…beer held a 57% market share against other alcohols” (www.activemediaguide.com). The industry requires a continuous update in knowledge of the history and current standings of the beer market, market trends, and competition that exist throughout. The market perspective of the brewing industry is incredible. The wholesale volume in the beer industry approximated $13.7 billion. In domestic brands, from 1983 to 1984 there has been a decline in consumption of -1.2%. In the imported section there has been an increase of 14.3%. The total industry as a whole declined .7% from 1983 to 1984. As a result of the decline in consumption of beer a similar result in production occurred with a decline of 1.2%. The estimated forecast for 1985 will continue along the same trend as did 1984. The long term outlook for the industry is that sales will remain flat for the next 10 to 20 years. (Goldhammer 1-7). Yet, through the development and market of light beer and targeted market segments, the last five years have shown an increase in market awareness and revenue. Within the last several months, the industry has not had the continual success as recent 2006-06-13T17:44:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Company-Analysis-of-Coors-Brewing-Company-29417.aspx A New Era of Graphic Design Paul Rand was one of the most influential designers of this or anytime. His approach to design is considered by most as one of the most modern approaches to design ever. Rand has worked out of his studio in Weston, Connecticut for more than the past thirty years. During those years he was a faculty member of Yale University from 1956 thru 1962, he decided to resign from this position because the University had demanded that contemporary design techniques had to be used. This was completely against Rand’s way of designing. Educated in New York at Pratt Institute from 1929 – 1932, Parson’s School of Design from 1932 – 1933 and the Art Student’s League from 1933 – 1934, Rand was a major influence in editorial design. In 1935 threw 1941, at the age of 23, Rand became the art director of Esquire magazine and then Apparel Arts (also know as GQ magazine), this is where Rand’s career really took off. From that point Rand designed advertisements for El Producto cigars, Ancient Age, Duboneet and Disney hat makers. These early advertisements opened the doors of opportunity for the designs that Rand is most well know for doing. Rand pioneered “corporate design” and “corporate advertising” in the 40’s thru the 60’s. Rand was the first to have the viewer be a part of figuring out what was meant by the advertisement. The viewer was almost forced into using their own intelligence to come to their own conclusion to what exactly the ad or logo’s meaning was. Rand believed that the simplicity of an advertisement or logo lead to freedom and flexibility in design. Rand was also was one of the first designers to try to apply the style of European modernists such as Leger, Picasso and Van Doesburg with the use of collage and color. This let Rand develop a unique and distinct American style of design, which in turn attracted some of the biggest corporations in the United States. Rand worked as a design consultant developing identities for major corporations such as Westinghouse, ABC and IBM threw simple logos. Rand was a trendsetter as well as a groundbreaker for decades. He brought a new prospective to something that seemed as if it could only be done one way, the old way. Rand did not let big corporations push him around, most of the time he 2006-06-12T21:08:58-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-New-Era-of-Graphic-Design-29382.aspx This particular case is centered around the Human Resources strategy that was implemented by Johnson & Johnson in 1997. This strategy includes many key aspects of corporate culture, leadership and global strategy integrated into one single global human resources program. This program allowed Johnson & Johnson to diversify their current employees, raise the standards for future employees, redefine the standards of leadership within J&J and improve global management overall. The first portion of this human resources plan was to redefine the standards of leadership within J&J. This was accomplished by creating a new credo set of company values with over 60 specific behaviors that will dictate how well the company will perform. This new set of credo values serves as the foundation for the new HR plan to build on. There are six essential core credo values that were defined within the new plan, one of which is to behave with honesty and integrity. Integrity is the most important core value within the leadership that is important to employees according to the survey mentioned in lecture. Why is integrity so important? The definition of integrity is adherence to a code of values this means that every employee within J&J must adhere to the credo values; but integrity to me means something a little more than just sticking to a core set of values. Integrity is how a person’s demeanor and actions inspire others to follow in the same footsteps as they have. For example, a manager is not judged by what they say but what they do and how well they adhere to what they have promised. If a manager cannot act with integrity then the employees cannot either; therefore lowering the expectations of employees. No organization can function properly without someone to inspire employees to work towards a common goal and to hold them to a high standard of effort. If a manager does not have integrity then his/her employees will follow therefore breaking down the corporate culture to the minimal requirements. The second credo value is to treat other with dignity and respect; this creates a corporate culture that respects ideas and innovations of others and creates an overall inspiration for innovation within the company. Having a lack of respect for others within an organization discourages employees from trying to work harder 2006-06-12T18:56:09-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Human-Resources-Strategy-of-Johnson-and-Johnson-29351.aspx Marketing and employment relations are equally important aspects to the successful operation of all businesses, through correct marketing businesses can expect to grow and expand, both in size and profitability; Qantas has employed a range of strategies to accomplish its aims and become a more competitive player within the aviation industry. With the development of new domestic airline JetStar by Qantas, individual strategies will need to be used to help the business succeed. Coca-Cola Amatil (CCA) is an Australian non-alcoholic beverage producer, successful employment relations has seen the company become a leader within the hospitality and production industry. Role of Marketing The role of marketing is to connect the business with its target market. Marketing is the major link between the business and its customers. As the market changes and becomes more competitive, the business needs to know and understand its target market so it can provide better service to its customers. Successful marketing will identify customer needs, and then, plan price, promote and distribute the products and services that will satisfy these needs. This way the business goals of increased profit and a greater share of the market can be achieved. But continually researching customers and monitoring the business environment, marketing provides the information the business needs in order to change direction on adjust its tactics by providing new product or changing existing products. The objectives and strategies of the marketing plan are used to determine the plans of the other functions such as operations, employment relations, and accounting and finance. CEO Geoff Dixon has recognised the role of marketing in business success and so continually researches its market and modifies its marketing strategies to meet customer needs and wants. Marketing planning process Planning is essential for successful marketing. In order to carry out the marketing program, a business needs a plan that will help it to achieve its objectives. For each business the marketing plan is going to different depending on the size and nature of the business. The marketing plan involves 5 stages these include: Situational analysis the situational analysis looks at the market n terms of size and growth, needs of the target market and trends in buyer behaviour. The performance of the products or service in terms of sales, profit margins and stage in the product lifecycle are examined. Major competitors are identified and analysed in terms of marketing strategies. A major part of the situation analysis is the prediction 2006-06-12T11:33:40-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Role-of-marketing--29331.aspx Globe International Ltd. 22nd March, 2004 Table of Contents Globes Business and its operations…………………………………..3 Nature of the “Action Sports” Market……………………………….4 Description of Globe Internationals Target Market……………5 Factors that will influence the purchasing decisions………….8 Marketing Strategies used by Globe International………........9 Laws that influence Globe Internationals Marketing………..12 Bibliography…………………………………………………………………13 Globes Business and its Operations Globe International is a multi-brand footwear, apparel and boardsports 'Youth Culture' company. Initiated in 1984, the Company today is consists of its Australasian, International and North American divisions. Globe International designs and develops a product range of proprietary, licensed and distributed brands. Each of these brands is strategically targeted at specific sectors of youth culture in the surf, skate, snowboarding and urban/street fashion markets for both males and females. Globe International aims to offer quality products that integrate style, performance, durability, and comfort. Globe International main operation functions involve the design, development and distribution of youth fashion, footwear and skate equipment. The company does not undertake any manufacturing of its products; rather production is outsourced to third party suppliers. Nature of the “Action Sports” Market Age Group: The problems associated with this market include keeping up with always changing youth fashion trends businesses in this market (Globe International Included) must stay in touch with the “alternative” market and cannot become “mainstream”, in essence they must realise that consumers between the age of 10-24, “generation y”, prefer individualism and independence. Market Forces: Many of these products are sold through independent retailers. They markets globe operates in can be said to be wealthy (market possesses high wealth). Therefore Changes in the economic environment (eg. Interest rates, inflation, consumer sentiment and the unemployment rate) along with government policy (fiscal, monetary and regulatory) may negatively alter the level of disposable income of customers and thus impacting on their enthusiasm to purchase products. Size: The size of the Actions sports market is generally hard to measure as it is relatively new. However it can be said there is a growth trend because: 1. Between, 1994-1999 there was a 43% increase in skateboarding and a 57% increase in snowboarding participation rates (US). 2. 89% of skateboards, 85% of skate shoes and 70% of snowboards are sold to Generation Y (US). 3. Generation Y is the largest teenage population segment in America, and it predicted to overtake the “baby boomers” by 2010. 4. ABS published that over 30% of young Australians are involved in skateboarding related activities Location: All these factors suggest a growing today and an even stronger one in the Future. Many 2006-06-12T11:31:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Globe-International-Ltd_-Marketing-Plan-and-Rresearch-29329.aspx Executive summary Giant soft drink company Coca Cola has come under intense scrutiny by investors due to its inability to effectively carry out its marketing program. Consequently it is seeking the help of Polianitis Marketing Company Pty Ltd to develop a professional marketing plan which will help the business achieve it’s objectives more effectively and efficiently, and inevitably regain there iron fist reign on the soft drink industry. When establishing a re-birthed marketing plan every aspect of the marketing plan must be critically examined and thoroughly researched. This consists of examining market research, auditing business and current situation (situation analysis) and carefully scrutinising the soft drink industry and possibilities for Coca Cola in the market. Once Coca Cola have carefully analysed the internal and external business environment and critically examined the industry in general the most suitable marketing strategies will be selected and these strategies will be administered by effectively and continually monitoring external threats and opportunities and revising internal efficiency procedures. Situation Analysis Market Analysis: The market analysis investigates both the internal and external business environment. It is vital that Coca cola carefully monitor both the internal and external aspects regarding it’s business as both the internal and external environment and their respective influences will be decisive traits in relation to Coke’s success and survival in the soft drink industry. Internal Business Environment The internal business environment and its influence is that which is to some extent within the business’s control. The main attributes in the internal environment include efficiency in the production process, through management skills and effective communication channels. To effectively control and monitor the internal business environment, Coke must conduct continual appraisals of the business’s operations and readily act upon any factors, which cause inefficiencies in any phase of the production and consumer process. External Business Environment The External business environment and its influences are usually powerful forces that can affect a whole industry and, in fact, a whole economy. Changes in the external environment will create opportunities or threats in the market place Coca cola must be aware off. Fluctuations in the economy, changing customer attitudes and values, and demographic patterns heavily influence the success of Coka Cola’s products on the market and the reception they receive from the consumers. SWOT Analysis: SWOT stands for Strengths Weakness Opportunities Threats. SWOT analysis is a technique much used in many general management as well as marketing scenarios. SWOT consists of examining the 2006-06-12T11:29:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-plan-Coco-Cola-29328.aspx Assessment task Marketing Plan Apple Ipod Contents Executive Summary____________________________________________3 Situation Analysis -Market Analysis_______________________________________________3 -Product Analysis_______________________________________________4 -SWOT Analysis_______________________________________________ 4 -Competitor Analysis ___________________________________________ 6 Marketing Objectives__________________________________________ 7 Identifying Target Market -Selecting Target Market_________________________________________7 -Target Market_________________________________________________7 Developing Marketing Strategies Marketing Mix: -Product________________________________________________________8 -Price__________________________________________________________8 -Promotion______________________________________________________9 -Place__________________________________________________________9 Implementing the Marketing Plan__________________________________10 Monitoring and Controlling -Developing a Financial Forecast____________________________________10 -Comparing actual and planned results________________________________11 -Revising the marketing strategies____________________________________11 Appendix ______________________________________________________12 Appendix A_____________________________________________________13 Appendix B_____________________________________________________14 Appendix C_____________________________________________________15 Executive Summary The focus of this report is on new Apple Ipod product that has created increasing demands in various outlets. This product allows consumers to download not only their favourite music but also books and other literature which can be read and listened to. Additionally this Ipod can be used in your car and in other mobile settings. This report is for Apple to give a brief description of this product. Within this marketing report there is an insight of the situation analysis of this product, marketing objectives, the target market, marketing strategies that have been used and the forecasted strategies, monitoring and controlling. Situation Analysis Market Analysis Internal Influences • Management: Effective management is required for the training and development of employees for the continue innovation of Apple Ipod and for retraining sufficient funds during competitor introducing new product. • Capital Availability: Competition may cause mishap in the cash flow. Sufficient funds must be available when competitors unpredictably put forward their product in the market. • Technological Adoption: Technology must be adopted to improve overall efficiency. It must be integrated directly into operations (to increase productivity), as well stay on date with the amounts of Ipod’s ordered, made and delivered. External Influences: • Competitors: Competitors will regulate what, when, how and why strategies will be adopted. The introduction of new products will greatly influence Apple Ipod. • Overseas Influences: The breaking down of barriers between countries can increase the sales of the new Apple Ipod, as more people are made aware of the product. • Demographic Patterns: Males and females from the age of 12years and over will be in favour of this product because of its new innovation to be able to not only play music but also books and other literature which would in fact appeal to them. Product Analysis Product Lifecycle X- The stage that Apple Ipod is currently in. Apple 2006-06-12T11:27:52-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Apple-Ipod-Marketing-Plan-29326.aspx Executive Summary AJ’s Breaky2Brunch Heritage Home is located in the growing suburb of Shell Cove, which gives our customers the perfect view of the ocean and is ideal for watching the sunrise while enjoying a lovely breakfast. We open from 4am every morning and close at 11:30am. This is to ensure our customers have sufficient time on weekdays to enjoy their breakfast before work and on the weekends enjoy a leisurely brunch before their day begins. AJ’s Breaky2Brunch Heritage Home caters for the Upper class, men and women in the Illawarra. We have a full range of coffee’s to suit all tastes, these include; Short Black, Long Black, Latte, Double Espresso, Cappuccino, Macchiato, Flat white and Mocha. Our breakfast and brunch menu’s are specially formulated to cater for our target market and include some favourites like bagels, croissants and fresh fruit just to name a few. Every morning we will get numerous daily papers delivered so our customers can enjoy the pleasures they normally would at home all in the one venue. We also keep a number of both women’s and men’s magazines regularly, to ensure customer satisfaction is achieved. AJ’s Breaky2Brunch Heritage Home is currently looking to cater for corporate meetings, where the emphasis will be on privacy, relaxation, value and personal attentive service. We will have a full boardroom table to seat all participants, which will include a white board, flip charts, video, overhead projector and screen, which will be available for use by our customers. Our aim is on personalised customer service to make each person feel welcome and valued as a customer. All our products are fresh everyday and the fast reliable service that our staff provides, is of the many things that people will grow to love about AJ’s Breaky2Bruch Heritage Home. Situational Analysis SWOT A SWOT analysis evaluates the businesses current position. It allows the business to be sorted into categories in order for the future of the business to improve. The SWOT analysis is comprised of Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. The Strengths in the business should be matched with opportunities found outside the business. Strategies should be set in place in order to eliminate threats and weaknesses. Strengths: Location- Situated in the developing suburb of Shell Cove with amazing ocean views. (See appendix 3) Opening hours- 4am till 11:30am. Select menu- Our menu is directed at an elite class of white collar 2006-06-12T11:26:28-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/AJ’s-Breaky2Brunch-Heritage-Home-Market-research-29325.aspx The strategic role of financial management Financial management refers to how businesses raise, use and monitor funds. It involves the processes of planning, monitoring and controlling the business's financial position and performance. Effective financial management will allow a business to maximise profits, increase the wealth of its owners and expand the business. Its strategic role is to give the business long term, big picture goals to aim for, as well as the specific objectives needed to reach these goals. Financial reports are crucial for effective financial management. There are two main types of financial reports General Purpose Financial Reports (GPFRs) • Specific Purpose. Financial Reports (SPFRs) GPFRs are financial statements that all public companies are required by law to produce. They include the Balance Sheet ('Statement of Financial Position')-, the-Revenue Statement (`Statement of Financial performance) and the Statement of Cash Flows.GPFRs are the greatest insight many stakeholders have into the financial position of a business. These reports allow the business to be analysed over time and against other companies. GPFRs are produced in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting principles. SPFRs are financial statements, created by the business, to-be used by internal stakeholders such as management. They are more detailed than GPFRs and are only created at the instruction of management. They can be created for any purpose are not bound by regulations, determining- how, they should be produced. Typical SPFRs include budgets, break-even, analyses and sales reports. SPFRs allow management to plan for the future, and compare actual and predicted performance. They are strategically designed to give management all the necessary information to maximise efficient decision making. When managing the finances of a business, there are a few key objectives that a business will try to achieve: Liquidity, Profitability, Efficiency, Growth, Return on Capital A business must try to balance each of these independent objectives and find the financial position that best suits its needs. Liquidity- measures the ability of a business to pay its debts as they fall due. It is a useful indicator of the short-term financial stability of a business. Those assets that can be transformed into cash within a year, and thus contribute to the liquidity position of the business, are called `current' assets. Current assets commonly include inventory (stock), accounts receivable (debtors), and cash. Effective liquidity management will ensure that the business has enough current assets to meet its obligations, without having to frequently sacrifice business opportunities. The stability of 2006-06-12T10:37:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Strategic-Role-of-Financial-Management-in-Finance-Market-29299.aspx Essay legal studies! Distinguish between the Aboriginal legal system prior to 1788 and the current Australian legal system, using examples. How has the Australian legal system reformed its ways when relating to Aboriginals? Use case studies, Acts & examples to help answer the question. (minimum 700 words). The Aboriginal legal system prior to 1788 is different to the current legal system in several ways. Prior to 1788 the Aboriginal legal system was different in the sense that different tribes had different laws and spoke different languages, ownership of land was more of a spiritual thing, laws were passed down verbally, some of their law was secret. The laws of the people prior to 1788 were unwritten. The Aboriginals used to follow customary law based upon ritual tradition and sacred law. Prior to 1788 the Aboriginals used to solve disputes by going to family members and small tribunal groups which were usually called elders. They used methods that solved disputes very quickly; the methods that were used were talking, mediation and conciliation etc. The type of punishment also changed dramatically- the laws they had prior to 1788 are revenge, social ridicule, trials by ordeal, and even death. The current legal system has changed dramatically since the 1788 British settlement. The laws are now written down and the law is based on the wider community’s morals and values, which is what they believe is right or what they believe is wrong. The Aboriginals used to solve disputes by taking it to the family members and small tribunal groups which are called elders. In the current laws the courts take care of it according to the law and how harsh the situation was. Prior to 1788 the sanctions (punishments) they had were revenge, social ridicule, trials by ordeal and even death. With the current Australian legal system we do not have that anymore, the sanctions that the courts enforce on the people are fines, community service and imprisonment for a specific amount of time and it could be for life, depending on how severe the crime is. The current Australian legal system makes sure that the laws are written down and are known by everyone. In other words the laws have to be discoverable and clearly understood so it can be known by the whole community and thus the community will follow. Prior to 1788 some laws were kept secret, the Aboriginals hence the community did 2006-06-12T10:34:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Legal--29298.aspx Acheiving Successful Results in the Publishing Industry Ace Publishing, which is based out of New York, recently purchased the publisher of six trade magazines, King Communications. Ace Publishing is well established in the United States and also has established an international presence in several other countries. Ace would like to begin an exchange program that allows U.S. employees to travel aboard, as well as offer individuals from various other countries the opportunity to work in the United States. There are several problems that might occur with the exchange program that Ace is trying to implement. First, cultural differences and adapting to those differences play a large role. It is very difficult to understand a culture without living it first hand. Ace needs to think more clearly about cross-cultural issues and learn to value the benefits of diversity before assembling international teams. Second, some employees might resist change. People tend to become very comfortable with their lives and the positions they hold. If you are dealing with people like this, there will be more reluctance to change. It is quite possible that your initial reaction to life abroad will be euphoria, sparked by a sense of freshness and adventure. It is also quite possible that the euphoria will give way to a less pleasant emotion, as you try to make your way through an unfamiliar culture. You may realize that your old habits do not fit your new circumstances and that you are unable to follow your usual routines. This could cause a big problem when trying to place an individual in a different culture. (PATSY-MAYBE YOU COULD SPEAK ABOUT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES OR WHATEVER THRID PROBLEM YOU WANT) We recommend identifying a clear framework for analyzing and understanding cultural differences. Also, assisting in the transformation to another country could prove to be useful. Ace could possibly send the individual and his family abroad in order to determine if they have what it takes to survive. Lastly, design a general policy that applies to both indigenous and foreign people. By doing this Ace is eliminating any possibility of procedural problems abroad. (PATSY-THIRD RECOMMENDATION IS BASED ON THE POLICIES AND PROCEDURE PROBLEM, SO IF YOU COME UP WITH A NEW PROBLEM, PLEASE CHANGE THIS). We believe the best solution would be to build awareness of your own culture and 2006-06-11T20:20:55-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Acheiving-Successful-Results-in-the-Publishing-Industry-29244.aspx Use of "Suggestive" Words in Today's Advertising Advertising agencies use “suggestive” words in advertising campaigns in order to make consumers remember the product. Yet, what do these ads tell consumers about American culture? To answer this question I will be analyzing one specific billboard ad. The ad contradicts social norms. I want to find out what this ad says about American values in order to identify if this tactic is why some ad campaigns are extremely successful while others are not. During my morning commutes on Interstate 25, I often turn to billboard ads to pass the time. I have been reading billboards since I was little and you may think that by now I would remember some really great ads, and to tell you the truth, I really don’t. There’s only one billboard ad that really sticks in my mind after all these years, and that is an ad for a beer named “Tequiza”. The Tequiza ad is quite simple. It consists of a white background, a picture of a yellow beer bottle, and the simple words “Of course we can’t just be friends, Tequiza beer w/o borders.” Even though the ad appears to be simplistic, it tells consumers a lot about American culture. The ad tells consumers through the phrase “Of course we can’t just be friends” that an American value is freedom of speech. The ad promotes free speech by suggesting that the drinker of Tequiza beer doesn’t want to be friends with their partner anymore and has the courage to say so. Providing the courage to be honest is one of the benefits Tequiza beer offers through its ad. Because of its suggestiveness, the ad allows consumers to relate to it and to dream of applying the benefit of Tequiza to future situations. This ability to speak freely contradicts the American social norm of respecting everyone and being polite to everyone. The phrase “Beer w/o borders” seems to imply the value of individualism in American culture as well. Construing that borders are rules, Tequiza encourages American society to break the rules by living without borders, or in other words, Tequiza encourages society to break social norms. Overall Tequiza is implying that in present day society it is important to go against social norms in order to be an individual. As you can tell from the above example, 2006-06-11T19:51:43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Use-of-Suggestive-Words-in-Today-s-Advertising-29230.aspx Offices Depend on the Work of Talented Secretaries The career that I chose to write about was a secretary. Secretaries are a vital part of any office, whether it be a large corporation or a small business. To be a secretary one must begin in high school by taking any computer , filing, typing, or accounting courses available. The most important skills are good reading comprehension, active learning, good, readable handwriting, and able to speak clearly. Other related education programs and notes are administrative assistant and secretarial science. High school graduates who have basic office skills may qualify for entry-level secretarial position. This is where on-the-job training is valuable. As office automation continues to evolve retraining and continuing education will remain an integral part of secretarial jobs. Certain personal traits are good for making a great secretary. Significant aptitudes include good general learning ability, good verbal aptitude, clerical perception, and good finger dexterity. Also the ability to work quickly and correctly with numbers, or otherwise known as numerical aptitudes, are very significant to becoming a secretary. The best personality types are conventional, enterprising, social, and realistic personalities. One must also be trustworthy and able 2006-06-11T19:32:15-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Offices-Depend-on-the-Work-of-Talented-Secretaries-29219.aspx A Corporate and Financial Analysis of Ebay.Inc Executive Summary Section One - Corporate Level Part 1 - Brief History of the Corporation eBay was founded by Pierre Omidyar's in his San Jose home in September of 1995, under the name AuctionWeb. From its early beginnings it was meant to be a marketplace for the sale of goods and services for a variety of interested individuals. It was incorporated in 1996, and has since grown to become the world’s largest most financially successful online auction company. After realizing the overall potential of his idea, Pierre and his cofounder Jeff Skoll brought on Meg Whitman, as CEO, to efficiently handle the growing popularity, and sustain eBay’s success. Meg earned a MBA at Harvard Business School, and had gained high acclaims and top-shelf experience at the successful company of Hasbro. With the addition of Meg Whitman’s expert experience eBay soon expanded rapidly to service a wide variety of buyers and sellers, and in September of 1998 the company went public. The shares were initially offered at $18 and immediately rose to $47 by the end of the day. The company has not faltered since, rising to revenues exceeding $700 million by 2001. In its short history, eBay has chosen several different paths than traditional companies to get to where it is. Most all of eBay’s advertisement was done through word of mouth and through agreements with a few Internet companies such as AOL and Disney. The large portion of savings from low advertising costs is invested in innovative marketing strategies to keep them ahead of its competitors. I believe that eBay is has achieved such an incredible amount of success in such a relatively short period of time because of its beginning philosophy of giving power to its users. With that foundation of loyal users it is able to expand its name by word of mouth and continue to grow to service a wider variety of users and their products. Also eBay’s ability of provide access to such a broad variety of products at relatively low prices will continue to attract more users and profits in the future. Part 2 - Corporate Level Analysis 1. Does the corporation have a mission statement? Does it define the business, identify the major goals, and articulate the corporate philosophy? Yes, eBay does have a mission statement. I believe that this mission statement defines the business 2006-06-11T19:04:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-Corporate-and-Financial-Analysis-of-Ebay-Inc-29203.aspx Sprite's Use of Advertising in Securing Consumers Advertisements of today are frivolous at best, downright ridiculous at worst. Buy this cream and never age. Wear these jeans and attract beautiful men. Get perfect abs with no effort at all. Today’s market-savvy consumer will not buy into the fraudulent television commercials of yesterday. Ads that center on a product’s powers to transform a person into someone more hip, sexy, and fashionable, have become easily recognizable as ludicrous and false, and have thus lost their effectiveness. In the last few years, however, a new breed of commercial advertising has sprung up: the anti-ad. The Sprite soft drink corporation’s “Image is nothing” ads are a good example of how these ads, though nothing more than television commercials themselves, mock the entire institution of advertising in a ploy to attract ad-weary consumers. Anti-advertising shines a new light on marketing, playing on consumer skepticism while putting a new spin on an old selling technique. The idea is to spoof propaganda, telling the audience that they, the producers of this ad and makers of this product, would never try to con consumers by using dishonest marketing tactics. In all honesty, however, the success of the ad depends entirely on just such a ploy. The Sprite Corporation has repeatedly made connections with anything hip and trendy, using basketball and hip-hop as central themes and Grant Hill as a spokesperson, obviously in hopes of having these adjectives associated with their product in the eye of their public. Sprite has often tried to set itself up as the product that discourages this kind of scheme. Their “Image is nothing” campaign works on the principle that physical attributes like beauty, youth, and sex appeal cannot be transferred or exchanged to people by means of a product. The Sprite ads tell viewers that soda will not improve their looks or give them basketball skills. One such ad shows tough looking, urban athletes using power and force to promote Sprite. The humor comes when the director yells, “Cut,” and the “rough-neck kids from the streets” turn out to be whining thespians, complaining about motivation and trailer space. Another ad shows a young kid drinking Sprite and attempting to dunk a basketball, only to be brutally rejected by the front of the rim. These and other similar ads commend the audience for recognizing that products, particularly soft drinks, do not make them cool or more 2006-06-11T18:54:37-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Sprite-s-Use-of-Advertising-in-Securing-Consumers-29198.aspx Issues in Today's Global Automotive Industry What are the most important characteristics of the global environment in the automobile industry, especially those opportunities and threats faced by the top players in the industry? Why so? If a list was made of the top economic sectors with the greatest influence on the American economy, one could make a strong argument for including the automotive industry. A prime example of the validity of that claim was evinced when “durable goods, such as cars, made up over 90% of the spike in consumption at the end of 2001.“ (Wolkomir 34) Since consumer spending is now the prime indicator of the state of our economy, the success of our auto industry is very important to the future of our economy. In the last few years, many were quick to dismiss stalwarts of the Old Economy. In light of the astronomical growth of the "New Economy" technology sector in the late 1990’s, the auto industry seemed to be filled with lumbering, corporate behemoths. With the recent crash of the technology sector, the automotive industry is again in the spotlight, along with many other manufacturing industries. Even though sales have been up recently, the automotive industry still faces many challenges. These challenges must be overcome in order to ensure the survival of the industry's major players. In this paper I will discuss what GM, Ford, Daimler-Chrysler, Toyota, and the remaining handful of smaller manufacturers must do in order to stay on top in the future. Each one of these companies is faced with its own unique strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats that must be properly addressed. As a whole though, they all face similar issues. I will address those issues in this paper. If any one of these companies is not careful to handle these issues in the coming years, then it stands the chance of being absorbed by another company or going under. I will attempt to outline the future of this industry in general, and what several of the major corporations involved must do to stay on top of the game or survive. There are literally thousands of elements that are involved in shaping the future of an automotive firm. For the sake of simplicity and brevity, I have tried to divide it into four different areas: product, market, 2006-06-11T02:26:59-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Issues-in-Today-s-Global-Automotive-Industry-29177.aspx Benefits of Downsizing for both the Company and Employee Downsizing, �a systematic reduction of a workforce by an employer� (pages.infinit.net/Rodrigo/downsizing.html), is a popular practice in large firms these days, and for good reason. Downsizing can reduce the company�s expenses, increase productivity, free up workers for other industries, speed up the corporate decision making process, raise stock prices, and lower unemployment percentages. For these reasons, companies greatly benefit when they choose to downsize. Downsizing can take many forms. When companies merge together, oftentimes there are many jobs that overlap. In these cases it would be silly to keep two people performing the same tasks, so companies eliminate one of the positions. This enables the company to work more efficiently to achieve the company�s desired results. When organizations are considering filing for bankruptcy, downsizing is often an alternative in order to save money immediately. In addition, downsizing is often used by companies in order to compete with the cheaper labor that South America and Asia can provide by keeping costs to a minimum (pages.infinit.net/Rodrigo/downsizing.html). The benefits of downsizing are numerous. The most obvious benefit is the reduction of expenses that comes after layoffs are made. A survey conducted by the Wall Street Journal found that after downsizing, 46% of the firms interviewed reported reduced expenses (pages.infinit.net/Rodrigo/downsizing.html). It also means lower prices on products for consumers. For instance, General Motors is known for having a very strong loyalty to its employees, therefore layoffs in the organization are rare. The result is that GM has to charge $2000 more for its cars than companies like Ford and Chrysler. If GM would shut down one of its plants, for example its brake parts plant, and buy the brakes from another company, GM could significantly cut its costs (www.startribune.com). As this case indicates, downsizing reduces the company�s costs, which is good for the company as well as the consumer. In addition, the day after downsizing plans are announced, most firms� stock prices rise. For example, IBM�s stock rose 7.7% as a result of announcing its downsizing plans (pages.infinit.net/Rodrigo/downsizing.html). This is definitely a benefit for the company. Downsizing also increases a company�s productivity. Computers have aided this increase tremendously. For example, in 1970 the telephone industry needed 421,000 switchboard operators to aid Americans in making 9.9 billion long-distance calls. In 1994, 2006-06-11T01:16:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Benefits-of-Downsizing-for-both-the-Company-and-Employee-29143.aspx Importance of Forming Strategic Alliances in Business Although some theorists suggest that the resource-based view could be a new theory of the firm, it is still part of a developing paradigm in strategy research (Amit & Schoemaker, 1993; Barney, 1991; Conner, 1991; Conner & Prahalad, 1996; Grant, 1996; Mahoney & Pandian, 1992; Mehra, 1996; Miller & Shamsie, 1996; Roth, 1995). The usefulness and richness of the paradigm need to be demonstrated in a variety of strategy areas. Indeed, researchers are still in the phase of accumulating applications of the resource-based view. For example, Peteraf (1993) shows that sustainable differences in firm profitability that cannot be attributed to industrial differences can be better explained by the resourcebased view. Our understanding of diversification strategy is also enhanced because the resource-based view strongly argues for strategic relatedness within a conglomerate (Chatterjee & Wernerfelt, 1991). Harrison, Hitt, Hoskisson, and Ireland (1991) examined the performance of mergers and acquisitions through a resource -based perspective. Global strategy, technological strategy, and strategic regulation have also been studied by applying the resource-based view (Collis, 1991; Leonard-Barton, 1992; Maijoor & Van Witteloostuijn, 1996). One area that remains under-explored in the literature is the resource-based view of strategic alliances, even though such alliances are rapidly increasing in importance in today's competitive landscape (Das & Teng, in press; Doz & Hamel, 1998; Gomes-Casseres, 1996; Yoshino & Rangan, 1995). A resource-based view seems particularly appropriate for examining strategic alliances because firms essentially use alliances to gain access to other firms' valuable resources. Thus, firm resources provide a relevant basis for studying alliances. The few studies that have applied the resource-based perspective to strategic alliances cover only limited aspects (e.g., Blodgett, 1991; Eisenhardt & Schoonhoven, 1996; Kogut, 1988; Mowery, Oxley, & Silverman, 1998; Rouse & Daellenbach, 1999; Tyler & Steensma, 1995, 1998; Varadarajan & Cunningham, 1995). Focusing exclusively on the resource-based view of strategic alliances, Eisenhardt and Schoonhoven (1996) found essentially that alliances are more likely to be formed when bot h firms are in vulnerable strategic positions (i.e., in need of resources) or when they are in strong social positions (i.e., possess valuable resources to share). Other researchers have tackled only selected aspects of alliances, such as organizational knowledge (Kogut, 1988) and international business (Blodgett, 1991; Lyles & Salk, 1997). Thus, a general resource-based theory of strategic alliances has yet to emerge. Our purpose here is to develop a more encompassing resource-based theory 2006-06-10T19:35:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Importance-of-Forming-Strategic-Alliances-in-Business-29138.aspx A Synopsis of Time Management and Corporate Planning Through the survey on the previous page it is apparent that while I feel that my organization and management of my free time is efficient, I can make effective changes to maximize my output (and give me more time to do the things that I enjoy doing). While I often record long term goals and dates of important events and due dates, I often due not record short term goals for example the daily tasks etc. This prevents me from maximizing the amount of work I get done during my “most alert” (as they say) periods of the day. Planning, more than anything can relieve stress by avoiding procrastination and the ‘last minute’ scrambles to get things done and it can easily be done by setting goals and recording important dates. - My Study Area: This is one of my weaker sections related to ‘time management’. Often when I have a lot of work, the one thing that I tend to neglect is the tidiness of my room and my study area. However, along with planning, a clean work area can save you valuable time by knowing where everything is as well as prevents you from losing papers that you might need. For me, I tend not to care about how my books and sheets are organized which causes me to lose track of where certain things can be found. This results in several things; obviously my work area is untidy, it is hard to find specific items, it is often discouraging to approach my room, and an untidy work area causes me additional stress. In order to better arrange my room, it is not a matter of once in a while organizing it, but rather to keep it clean continuously. Obtained Results: I had mixed results in this section. In terms of setting goals, concentrating my attention on what I am doing and performing long projects in short parts I scored reasonable well and, therefore, I feel that no major improvements are needed in these categories. However, I feel that where one of my major weaknesses is that I often leave most of my work to be done at home, whereas I should take things to do with me when I know that I will be going somewhere that will involve me having free time. Time Savers Involving Myself and Others: Similarly to the previous section, 2006-06-10T19:28:58-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-Synopsis-of-Time-Management-and-Corporate-Planning-29135.aspx An Introduction to skills involving Knowledge Management What if I were to tell you that I could give you a process or methodology that would allow those that don’t know what they don’t know to determine what they really needed? If I had a tool that supported a process of gathering required information, providing information to those that need it, when they need it, and in a form they understood, would people really be interested in such a tool? Well if I had such a tool it would be “priceless!” What I’ve described is exactly the feeling I get when trying to understand the concept of knowledge and how to manage knowledge. There are superficial distinctions between knowledge, data, and information as one person’s data or information could be another person’s knowledge. Therefore, knowledge management sounds like something you can put your arms around (easily described), but in reality, it’s a concept whose definition changes depending on your personal frame of reference. Knowledge management is an important issue in the manufacturing industry. However, the concepts in this paper transcend manufacturing. Therefore, my comments will be presented as if they pertain to many industries, including manufacturing. Knowledge Management Is Very Personal What is done with knowledge is a key concept people at all levels in an organization need to get comfortable with. I could not find a universally accepted definition of knowledge management. For instance some would argue, “the primary focus of knowledge management actions and thoughts should be directed toward accomplishing common goals.” If this is true, then information is generated in a form that enables people to attain a level of understanding. With understanding, people are better able to make sound and timely decisions. A cynical belief is knowledge management is just a euphemistic term that makes it legal to systematically take advantage of employee ideas. Others believe, “knowledge management is luring people together [physically or virtually] to share thoughts and ideas in order to produce a level of understanding needed to make decisions.” Still others believe “knowledge management involves managing cerebral activities (learning) within oneself to get some type of action.” In these examples, knowledge and understanding could be used interchangeably. However, the real concern is not knowledge or understanding, rather, the focus is on what is 2006-06-10T19:21:56-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/An-Introduction-to-skills-involving-Knowledge-Management-29132.aspx Critical Analysis of "The Social Responsibility of Business" from Milton Friedman In this essay I evaluate Milton Friedman’s essay: “The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits” in 1970, on the Social Responsibility of a business and his theory, which is called the “Efficiency Perspective”. In every article and book that I have read about social responsibility, Friedman’s “Efficiency Perspective is placed centrally. During my research I found that Friedman is often criticised for being too classical. Friedman believes that manager’s foremost objective or even moral obligation to the firm should be to maximise profits always. There is however one condition that makes his perspective more complicated, not only for me, but also for several well-known authors. According to Friedman, the managers obligations should be carried out: “…while conforming to the basic rules of the society, both those embodied in law and those embodied in ethical custom”. This leads to one of the main questions of my essay: To what extent does Friedman’s “Efficiency Perspective” give foundation for responsible and moral international management behaviour? And need we any concern if it fails to do so? To fully answer the questions, I first need to explain the two different parts of the first question: responsible international management behaviour and moral international management behaviour. In businesses nowadays they combine these two parts, respectively responsible and moral becomes social responsibility in international management. The second question anticipates the other theories and models we need to consider when Friedman’s efficiency perspective does not give foundation for social responsibility in international management. However before I go in further detail to answer these questions, I first explain more about the concept social responsibility. After this I explain Friedman’s full theory, and how it related to these different models of social responsibility, and finally I will draw a conclusion. “Business ethics compromises moral principles and standards that guide behaviour in the world of business” (Ferrell & Fraedrich). Individuals or groups of individuals evaluate this specific behaviour. The judgement of this evaluation can be right or wrong, ethical or unethical, internal or external from the firm. The outcomes of these judgements influence the society’s acceptance or rejection of activities within the business. “Social responsibility refers to a firm’s obligation to maximise its positive impact on society and to minimise its negative impact” (Ferrell &Fraedrich). As we are talking about ‘international’ management behaviour, A.K. Sundaram and J.S. 2006-06-10T19:20:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Critical-Analysis-quot-The-Social-Responsibility-of-Busine-29131.aspx Corporate Strategy and Direction of The North Face Inc. The North Face, Inc. sneaker industry, is a highly sophisticated designer, distributor, and marketer of technically innovative sneaker products. We have built a strong, widely recognized line of products, and have been established as the world’s premier brand for outdoor apparel. Our sneaker line offers state-of-the-art technology that offers comfort, support, and style, backed by a lifetime manufacturers warranty so that our consumers are provided with all of the luxuries that they deserve. 2.0 Situation Analysis The North Face, Inc., offers a wide variety of specialized sneakers, designed primarily for professional climbers, and outdoor enthusiasts. The North Face, Inc. offers incomparable state-of-the-art technology, which has satisfactorily led to increased levels popularity and customer loyalty. However, currently The North Face sneaker retains less than 5 percent of the market share due to the popularity and general distribution of our top competitors such as: Nike, Adidas, New Balance, and Saucony. Our North Face trail sneakers are primarily sold at specialty/outdoor sporting good stores for between $59.95 and $105.00. Adidas offers sneakers with minimal technology, which are trendy reasonably priced, with high-end retail prices of about $65.00. New Balance offers sneakers with limited technology, which are stylish and competitively priced, with high-end retail prices of about $80.00. Nike offers comparably priced sneakers, however like New Balance and Adidas, Nike’s channel of distribution is primarily centralized around general retail shoe/sneaker stores. Nike’s annual sales for 1999 were $8,776.9 M, approximately 35 times that of North Face which in 1999 had sales of $247.1 M. The North Face, Inc., intends to accrue and retain unprecedented percentages of our customer base over the next decade. We believe that once a consumer purchases one of our products, that they will recognize how far superior we are to our competition and appreciate our intentions of staying there. The North Face, Inc., intends to create a shift in general consumer preferences, leading to an increasing demand for our highly functional products at the expense of fashion-oriented products. We seek to promote a superior acceptance of our outdoor apparel as casual wear, and we intend to encourage an increase in the technical sophistication of the products in this field. 2.1 Market Summary The North Face, Inc. is a highly 2006-06-07T16:51:09-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Corporate-Strategy-and-Direction-of-The-North-Face-Inc_-29111.aspx Proposed Capital Structure for Du Pont Corporation The Du Pont Corporation was founded in 1802 to manufacture gunpowder. After nearly two centuries of operations, the company has greatly diversified its product base through acquisitions and research and development,, and is one of the largest chemical manufacturers in the world. In 1995, Du Pont had revenues of $42.2 billion and net income of $3.3 billion. In this same period, 50 percent of the company's sales were outside the United States. Du Pont operates in approximately 70 countries worldwide, with about 175 manufacturing and processing facilities that include 150 chemicals and specialties plants, five petroleum refineries, and 20 natural gas processing plants. The company has more than 60 research and development labs and customer service centers in the United States, and more than 20 labs in 10 other countries. Currently, Du Pont is the thirteenth largest U.S. industrial/service corporation (Fortune 500). Until the 1960's, the company's capital structure had historically been very conservative, with the corporation carrying little debt (Figure 1). This was possible primarily because of the enormous success of the company. However, in the late 1960's, competition for Du Pont had increased considerably, and the company experienced decreased gross margins and return on capital Figure 1. The capital structure of the Du Pont company from 1965 to 1982. The company had very little debt as late as 1965, but after the acquisition of Conoco, Du Pont changed to a considerably more leveraged capital structure. During the 1970's, three primary variables combined to exert considerable financial pressure on Du Pont: (i) the company embarked on a major capital spending program designed to restore its cost position, (ii) the rise in oil prices increased costs and requirements for working capital, and (iii) the recession in 1975 had a dramatic impact on Du Pont's fiber business. The case analyzed in this report was written in 1982, at which time the company had a capital structure of approximately 36% debt (Figure 1). The company has ambitious research plans in the future, which require a considerable amount of externally generated capital for 1983 through 1987 (Table 1). Therefore, the company is seeking to develop and stick to a capital structure, which will support the company's research and development interests in these years and the decades to come. Table 1. Financial Projections for 1983-1987, in millions of dollars. An obvious solution for the company would be to reduce or eliminate dividend payments. 2006-06-07T16:44:13-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Proposed-Capital-Structure-for-Du-Pont-Corporation-29109.aspx The Importance of Picking the Right Career Path We seem to think that choosing the right career is an easy task. I too felt the same way until I found myself stuck in a dead end job. As a elementary student we are taught to set goals that predefine what we 2006-06-07T16:14:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Importance-of-Picking-the-Right-Career-Path-29096.aspx TABLE OF CONTENTS SOUTH AFRICA – CULTURAL DIVERSITY 2 UNDERSTANDING CULTURE 4 2.1 Cultural Dimensions Model 4 2.2 Cross-Cultural Communication Challenges – case: eye contact 5 2.3 Cultural Shock - Respecting Differences and Working Together 6 2.4 Building Trust across Cultural Boundaries 2006-06-06T13:42:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cultural-Intelligence-29053.aspx 1. INTRODUCTION Teams are a part of everyone's life. You're a member of a family team, an extension staff team, and church, school, and community teams. As a result, there is a need for teamwork; organizations are confronted with increasingly complex problems with many dimensions. For example, the energy problem has implications for extension programming in agriculture, family living, community development and youth development programs for both rural and urban people. (Dyer, 1997 p. 139) So it's appropriate that people try to understand how to function effectively as team members. 2. WHAT CONSTITUTES TEAM WORK? 2.1 Teamwork … Merriam Webster dictionary (2005) describes teamwork as work done by several associates with each doing a part but all subordinating personal prominence to the efficiency of the whole. Nevertheless greater interpersonal skills are necessary if teams work together effectively at more complex levels. (Belbin, 1981) 2.2 Characteristics needed for team work Douglas McGregor's (cited in Heil, 2000) list of the unique characteristics of an effective management team include 1)Understanding, mutual agreement, and identification with respect to the primary task 2)Open communications 3)Mutual trust 4)Mutual support 5)Management of human differences leading to group synergy 6)Selective use of the team 7)Appropriate member skills 8) Leadership: Managing and integrating the other 7 characteristics A team is only as strong as the individual members. Stronger, more productive teams are comprised of individuals who know how teams work, how to make them work better and how they can best contribute. If individuals don’t have the proper skills to be an effective team member then productivity of the team is compromised. (Katzenbach, 1998) 2.3 Team Building It's important to realize that the development of effective working relationships among staff is a gradual process which requires considerable time and skill, this is not meant to discourage team members, but to help them realize that teams aren't created overnight (Francis, 1979 p.261) a certain amount of frustration and conflict are normal. The Myers-Briggs Type Indicator (MBTI) (Myers, 1962) is a self-report instrument that establishes individual preferences based on the theory of C.S. Jung, (Hyde, 1992) a well- known Swiss psychiatrist. The idea behind the MBTI is that human behavior is actually logical and orderly, and this assessment tool establishes a framework for individual differences between people. Because it 2006-06-06T13:37:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Teamwork-29052.aspx Management Seminar on Managed Health Care and Technology Of the approximately 260 million people currently living in the United States of America, every one of them has a need for effective, affordable and accessible health care coverage and services. Within the past thirty to forty years, the scope and cost of health care coverage and services has drastically changed, Altering the manner in which health care was previously managed.There are several factors that have affected the cost of healthcare coverage over the past two to three decades.One of these factors is the introduction and rapidly increasing enrollment by people in managed health care insurance plans. Managed health care insurance plans cans help to alleviate the rising costs of effective medical coverage. Another important factor that has affected health care costs is the invention and use of new medical technologies. As leading researchers and economic analysts have discovered there is a distinct and direct correlatin between advancing medical technologies and rising health care costs. Medical innovation has been proven time and again to be an important determation of health care cost . It would appear that managed care health insurance plans which attempt to lower health care costs, and highly expensive new medical innovations and procedures are at cross road pulling against one another in very different directions. Market-level studies have had found the cost growth of health care in markets with greater managed care access to be generally slower than that of non-managed care health insurance markets. However, managed care is unlikely to prevent the share of gross domestic product spent on healthcare from rising unless the cost-increasing nature of new medical technologies changes.Managed care health insurance plans differ greatly from indemnity fee-for-service, or FFS insurance plans. Since the early 1970's, rapidly growing enrollment in managed care health insurance plans has transformed the health insurance market in the United States. Virtually nonexistent in most markets three decades ago managed care health plans covered 63 percent of t he nation's employees by 1994. Managed care incorporates a range of features that allow the insurer greater influence in the process of medical care . Managed care plans aggressively bid for lower prices from physicians and hospitals in an attempt to minimize the use of health care services by monitoring providers and changing provider incentives. Health insurance providers 2006-06-02T15:32:08-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Management-Seminar-on-Managed-Health-Care-and-Technology-29025.aspx Managing your Most Important Resource; Human Resources In the business world today there is a constant pressure to achieve ever-higher standards of performance. There is little or no room for complacency in the global market. Companies are always in search of getting more for less. As a result of this the stress factor has gone up in many companies. “Downsizing” and “restructuring” is just a couple of expressions that employees and their representatives have come up with as the employees try to improve the company by reducing staff costs. (Mabey 1998) Yet we have seen the development of a management philosophy that can be summarized in the phrase “our people are our greatest advantage”. Human resource management is an example of that philosophy. And arguably, human resource management has become the leading theory to people management in English-speaking countries. But it is important to state that human resource management has not come out of nowhere, it has taken ideas from many areas. And a lot of literature has been written about the topic, showing how you best can manage your employees. But throughout the twentieth century, practitioners and academics have searched for theories that can help them manage people at work. A lot of things happen in a business that both influence the employees and the employer alike for instance: new equipment must be bought, old procedures are replaced with new, staff must be reorganised, retained or dismissed. And this shows that workers and managers must deal with events that need fresh thinking. (Price 1997) Many sociologists, psychologists and management practitioners have tried to work out theories that can help companies in developing their human resource management. They have given ideas in areas like people management such as recruitment and selection, team building and organizational design. These theories have been a part of the development of human resource management. The most significant theories are: • Scientific management: detailed task specifications and selection of the 'best man' for the job. It was the function of managers to think - workers were expected to do exactly as they were told. • Fordism: a philosophy of production based on the continuous assembly line. • Human relations: In the 1920s and 30s researchers in the USA demonstrated that work performance and motivation did not depend simply on pay and discipline. People worked for many other reasons. • Management by objectives: The workers could clarify and set their own targets. • Strategic management: This is 2006-06-02T02:07:18-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Human-Resources-Managing-your-Most-Important-Resource-29006.aspx Bailey's Irish Cream and International Market Demand of Alcohol The global liquor market has changed immensely in the last 20 years. Since the early eighties, people have discovered that it is better for their health if they drink in moderation, as opposed to heavy drinking. Due to this change in consumers drinking habits, people generally drink less liquor than they used to. According to our text, the per capita consumption of liqueurs (liters per person over 18) dropped from 1 liter in 1986 to 0.90 liters in 1990. In addition to consumers drinking less, liquor makers, like Baileys, were faced with increasing tariffs and taxes. At the time of this case study, the tax margins between retailer and distributor were fairly close in the US: 15-20% for retailers and 10% for distributors. The United States also imposed a $22 per case import duty, and state excise taxes were as high as 20%. If you were a foreign liquor producer at the time and you sold a case of liquor at a price of $150 to a retailer in the US, you would see $128 after the import duty, which forces liquor makers to greatly increase their prices up to $177. For example, the retailer has $177 case of liquor that he has to pay a 20% Paddington tax, which makes the case cost him $212.40. Now the retailer gets to add his or her profit margin to the case of alcohol, lets pretend that the retail price of the case is $250. In this case, when the consumer finally gets to buy this product he or she has to pay for the $62.40 in taxes thus far plus an additional 20% in taxes on the final retail price. Basicly a case of liquor that originally costs retailers $150, now costs consumers about $305. American companies also have all of the taxes, just not the import duties, which can cause enough of a price increase to urge consumers to buy American. For Baileys Irish Cream, the problem was not just the US but every country in Europe had similar taxes and tariffs; in the international market it is just something that must be dealt with. Another issue in the global liquor industry is dealing with copycat competition. Due to all of the expenses involved with developing a foreign market, it is easy for other companies to make a similar product within a 2006-06-01T01:45:57-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Bailey-s-Irish-Cream-and-International-Demand-for-Alcohol-28959.aspx Scandal Analysis: Enron, Arthur Andersen and Other Officials Washington, DC --The General Services Administration today suspended Enron Corp., related Enron corporate entities, several former Enron officials, Arthur Andersen, LLP, and a former Andersen official, from conducting new business with the Federal government. The suspension is for a period of 12 months for all parties except for Andersen, whose suspension is for the duration of the indictment. GSA's review of other Enron subsidiaries, and other Enron and Andersen officials continues. Regarding Enron's suspension, GSA took this action based on a finding of adequate evidence that the Enron parties had engaged in misconduct and committed internal control irregularities that seriously affect their suitability to receive Government contracts. Under law and regulation the Government may award contracts only to responsible contractors. To qualify as a responsible contractor, a company or individual must have a satisfactory record of integrity and business ethics and must possess the necessary organization, accounting and operational controls. Regarding Andersen's suspension, GSA took this action based upon an indictment released yesterday. The indictment alleges that Andersen, at numerous locations throughout the world, knowingly, intentionally, and corruptly destroyed documents and other information relating to Andersen's work for Enron, and that these actions were taken to impair official proceedings. Under federal law, an indictment for such a criminal offense is adequate evidence of misconduct to support suspension of a government contractor. The names of the entities and individuals suspended are published in the List of Parties Excluded From Federal Procurement and Non Procurement Programs. This publication contains the names of contractors debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, or declared ineligible by any agency of the Federal Government. The suspension is effective throughout the executive branch of the Federal Government and applies to all new business with the Federal government. The suspended entities and individuals are: Enron Corp. Arthur Andersen, LLP Enron North America Corp. Portland General Electric Company Williard, Inc. Enron Energy Services Operations, Inc. Clinton Energy Management Services, Inc. Enron Energy Services, Inc. The Bentley Company Richard B. Buy, former Enron Senior Vice President and Chief Risk Officer Richard A. Causey, former Enron Senior Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer David B. Duncan, Arthur Andersen's Chief Auditor for the Enron engagement Andrew S. Fastow, former Enron Chief Financial Officer Ben F. Glisan, Jr., former Enron Treasurer Michael J. Kopper, former Managing Director of Enron's Global Equity Markets Group Kenneth L. Lay, former Enron President, Chief Executive Officer, and Chairman of the Board Jeffrey K. Skilling, former Enron President, Chief Executive 2006-06-01T01:41:30-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Scandal-Analysis-Enron,-Arthur-Andersen-and-Other-Officials-28958.aspx Entering Foreign Markets; Research, Marketing and Strategy "Ben And Jerry's" Given Ben & Jerry’s track record in entering foreign markets, does it make good strategic sense for Ben & Jerry to commit to entering the super premium ice cream market in Japan? Why or why not? What prior “mistakes” will it need to avoid? Ben & Jerry’s had been traditionally slow to enter into the foreign market they have lost market share to both Haagen-Dazs and other ice cream suppliers. Ben & Jerry’s had begun to inquire about the Japanese market in the mid 1990s. Japan represents the second largest ice cream market in the world, with annual sales of about $4.5 Billion, but there are high barriers to entry. Ben & Jerry’s would be a late entrant, more than 10 years behind Haagen-Dazs initial entry, and there are at least 6 Japanese ice cream manufactures selling super premium products. Ben Cohen, one of the founders of Ben & Jerry’s, was opposed to growth, so the company had limited adventures overseas therefore had limited opportunities. Haagen-Dazs had no hesitation and by 1997 it was in 28 countries with 850 dipping shops around the world. Haagen-Dazs non-U.S. sales were about $700 million, compared to Ben & Jerry’s sales of $6 million. Haagen-Dazs had completely taken over the international market by entering when the barriers to entry were low and now they are high. It makes sense for Ben & Jerry’s to enter the market in order to gain whatever market share that is possible, but since barriers to entry are so high they have to find a way to enter the market and get recognized whether it is through Seven-Eleven or by using Mr. Yamada. Entering is also a great idea if they proceed with the Seven-Eleven marketing plan. This plan allows Ben & Jerry’s to enter into 7,000 Seven-Eleven store shelve, but still competing with other brands. Also Ben & Jerry’s would not have to promote its super premium ice cream is since it is already part of the ice cream market(for example Haagen-Dazs) and Japanese people are aware of it. A plus for this is that convenience stores appeared to account for about 40% of super premium ice cream sales in Japan, and Seven-Eleven was Japan’s largest chain. What resource strengths/ competitive assets does Ben & Jerry’s have to support entry into Japan? What resources weaknesses/ competitive liabilities does Ben 2006-05-31T17:48:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Entering-Foreign-Markets-Research,-Marketing-and-Strategy-28915.aspx I would like to thank the admission committee for considering my application. It is my sincere hope that you will grant me the opportunity to attend in your fine school. Let me highlight briefly the background that would help why I would be the best candidate for your school. My name is unknown who was born and raised in Ethiopia. I left my country, and fled to Kenya interrupting my University education in 1993 due to worsen political turmoil in Ethiopia. I was granted asylum and considered political refugee and taken to refugee camp in Kenya. It was unbearable to live in loathsome and dreadful Kakuma Refugee camp for three years especially for ex-university student who had no prior experience in terrible and insecure environment eating malnourished food and spent the night in Tent .It was only for tough minded individuals that can survive and fit in the cursed land. In spite of the fact that it was unthinkable for refugee to plan for tertiary level of education living in that condition, I kept on searching a way out realize the dream .Three years later I managed to secure the scholarship through Windle Charitable Trust in Daystar University. Even if one assured scholarship and admission, it was hard to compete and graduate from the progaramme given the insecurity, home sickness, cultural differences, and so forth. Nonetheless, I was able to manage to be one of the top students in the first and second year. I was honored to be in dean’s list two times. I was encouraged and promised to maintain my success. Two years later, unfortunately I was depressed and adversely affected by bad news happened on family members back at home in the middle of 1998.Thus, I felt much insecure and failed to proceed my education effectively. Though I was advised a number of times to withdraw by my professors, I decided otherwise. Thus, My GPA was terribly affected and had shown sharp a downward trend. I was hospitalized two times and counseled for longer period of time and later recovered .As it is indicated on my transcript, later my GPA substantially improved and reached where it was before. After the completion of the undergraduate programme, I joined masters’ programme in one of the best university in southern and east Africa, University of Nairobi, in Economics .I had special gratitude for German government who offered me the full 2006-05-30T00:07:36-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Admissions-Essay-from-an-Ethiopian-Student-28896.aspx Media Watch Segment – Spoken Task Expansion of the Japanese Whaling Industry (Name) 710 words Presenter: Welcome to Media Watch, I’m Ben Ison. Tonight we investigate the controversial and diplomatic issue of the whaling industry. As the Japanese fishing industry attempts to expand the whaling trade in Australian territorial waters, they have been engaged by the Australian government in a heated argument. While Japan claims the intended expansion of an additional 400 whales slaughtered annually, as “scientific research”, Australia is fighting hard diplomatically to protect the gentle species. The issue has been closely pursued by the media, but we are often subject to predisposed information. How can we understand the issue without extracting the biased perceptions from the media and separating the facts from the fiction? It seems that each commentary is subject to a different perspective of the argument. In an article presented by NEWS.com.au on May 18th, 2005 titled: Voice-over: “PM slams Japan whaling plan” Presenter: we are exposed to biased reporting in favour of whale support by the Australian government. The Prime Minister, John Howard is quoted: Voice-over: “It is not science to harvest 400 whales” Presenter: As Japanese whalers are now determined to hunt humpback whales, along with minke and fin whales, Australia is working alongside the American, British and New Zealand governments to put forth a joint proposal to the Japanese government, in a bid to convince Japan to reconsider the proposed expansion. The majority of the article is quotes by the Australian PM as he expresses his frustration and the stand he will take in relation to the controversy, preferring to go down the “diplomatic path”. By giving only the opinion and assumed perspective of the Australian population, this silences the Japanese government and its population. It positions readers to side with the anti-whaling agreement and shatters the grounds of Japan’s argument of harvesting whales for “scientific research”. The article is constructed for the readers to believe expansion of the industry to be unreasonable and environmentally destructive, leaving no justification for the expansion. Yet, in another article, also by NEWS.com.au, printed: June 4th, 2005 titled: Voice-over: “Whale eaters cook up a storm” Presenter: the writer gives a new perspective to 2006-05-28T03:05:37-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Expansion-of-the-Japanese-Whaling-Industry-28894.aspx Statistic 24,000 people in the world die of starvation every day, approximately one in every four seconds. Good morning/afternoon …… As a member of ………….., I was asked to explore the necessity of animal confinement in intensive production systems. Intensive farming began in the 1920’s at the discovery of vitamins A and D as food supplements. Adding these vitamins to feed mixtures meant that the animals no longer required exercise or sunlight for growth. Confinement may be feedlots, piggeries or poultry sheds. Animal confinement has become critical because: 1. Without it, food can not be distributed appropriately throughout the world, 2. Extensive grazing is ecologically unsustainable, 3. Farmers are forced to produce as efficiently as possible to compensate for an ageing industry, urbanisation and the cost-price squeeze; and 4. In many areas, the housing of animals is essential to their survival In the article “Africa is starving as the world feeds on Iraq” by Daphnee Dion-viens, Jean Zigler, the food rights assessor of the United States is documented as believing that with current technology and available resources, the world should be able to supply enough food for 12 billion people, twice the current population of the world. This will be achieved through intensive farming and its ability to supply a reliable resource of animal protein that can be grown regardless of the quality of the environment and produce a higher yield per area than conventional methods. Zigler sees the reason for starvation as being linked to the restriction of food distribution because of political tension and market forces rather than the ability to produce the food. While 34% of the African population is malnourished, America, Australia and many other countries alike suffer severely from obesity. By comparing the two groups of children in these pictures, each from extremely diverse countries and cultures, it is obvious that there is enough food but current distribution methods mean that both groups will suffer, through the extremes of obesity and starvation. Intensive farming improves the distribution of food by creating a reliable and safe food source where it is needed. Instead of shipping supplies across vast oceans, people in starving countries can build their own resources, producing enough food for themselves in their own country on land that was once deemed too infertile for production. Humans are said to require three main things; food, 2006-05-28T03:02:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Importance-of-Animal-Confinement-28893.aspx I. Introduction Wal-Mart Corporation, a private company based in the United States, has been famous all over the world due to its low price retailing business despite numerous competitors such as Kmart, Sears and Target among others. In the United States alone, it has an employment of almost one million workers, aside from the over 300,000 employees worldwide. With this, it can be concluded that Wal-Mart has created more jobs than any other companies globally. Having the largest population in the world, India’s total labor force, comprised of self-employed, wage and salary earning, casual and unemployed, was estimated at around 407 million in 1999 to 2000. The organized labor force of hired, regular and contractual employment is comprised only of 14% the total labor force in which: 60.4% comes from agriculture; 22.3% provide services in trade, hotels, business services and social and personal services; while the remaining 17.3% goes to the industry consisting of manufacturing, mining and quarrying, construction, electricity gas and water (National Sample Survey Organization, 2001). Unlike China who also relies on its labor force, India’s labor market and competitive-edge is underrated and yet to be fully-tapped as most of manufacturing industries and services are being done in the former. With this, the paper aims to analyze the potential of India’s market sector and provide necessary recommendations for the Wal-Mart prospective expansion operations. II. Analysis of India’s Market Status – Using the SWOT Analysis (Strength, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats) Factors Strengths Weaknesses Economic § Large human capital, as the services sector rapidly increases.§ From a state-run economy, it has now ventured into free-market.§ Rapid increase in the services sector.§ Vast agricultural resources, especially the agro-processing industry.§ As compared to Latin America, India does not have considerable economic crisis.§ Highest personal income tax rate was brought down from 56% to 30% while corporate tax rates for public companies were lowered from 51.75% to a fixed 46% or less. § Lower rate of labor absorption.§ Earnings are shifted from labor to capital income.§ Compared to developed countries, people have lower buying power. Political § More liberal policy reforms. § Clear-cut policy framework to protect the resource-poor from economic development is yet to be developed. Socio-cultural § Greater labor force, particularly for men. § Gender-bias, especially for married women who have less chance of being hired. Marriage increases a woman’s responsibility for care-giving and domestic work. § Less education provided for most of Indian women. Opportunities and Threats Human capital. Despite its growing population, India’s human capital can be favorable for Wal-Mart due to its cheaper labor cost. With more 2006-05-09T02:23:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Walmart-Takes-the-World-Minicase-28817.aspx Synopsis This report will provide information of an interview with a restaurant manager conducted by our group members. The report covers the planning and process of our group¡¦s interview, the role and responsibility of the interviewed manager, the key areas to be covered of the business such as its environment (Jonas), communication (Able), groups (Jack) and management (Loon) and our group¡¦s findings of the business. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION 2 1.1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 2 1.2 PURPOSE 2 1.3 SCOPE 2 1.4 RESEARCH METHODS 2 2. ENVIRONMENT 2 2.1 TYPE OF BUSINESS 2 2.2 SIZE 2 2.3 STRUCTURE 2 3. COMMUNICATION 2 3.1 FORMAL VS. INFORMAL COMMUNICATION 2 3.2 ANALYSIS OF THE EFFECTIVENESS OF COMMUNICATION 2 3.3 DIFFERENCES IN CULTURAL BACKGROUND; DIFFERENCES IN PERCEPTION 2 3.4 COMMUNICATION ENHANCEMENT 2 4. GROUPS 2 4.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE FORMAL AND INFORMAL GROUP 2 4.2 PARTICIPATION IN GROUPS 2 4.3 ANALYSIS OF GROUP EFFECTIVENESS 2 5. MANAGEMENT 2 5.1 MANAGEMENT STYLE 2 5.2 MANAGEMENT METHOD 2 5.3 MANAGEMENT EFFECTIVENESS 2 5.4 DIFFICULTIES IN BOTH BEING A MANAGER AND WORKING WITH OTHER MANAGERS 2 5.5 ASSESSMENT OF MANAGEMENT SKILLS 2 6. CONCLUSION 2 7. RECOMMENDATIONS 2 8. APPENDIX 2 9. BIBLIOGRAPHY 2 1. Introduction 1.1 General Background The topic discussed in this report is ¡¥Being a Manager in an Organization¡¦. Our group consisting of four members, Loon Luong, Able (Sai Kit) Koo, Jonas (Lam) Ng and Jack (Wai Kei) Yip conducted an interview with a restaurant manager (Nancy Choi) in a small organization (Restaurant - Singapore Hut). The report will be based on our group¡¦s knowledge, findings, insights and understanding of what actually happens in an organization. 1.2 Purpose The purpose of this report is to investigate the manager¡¦s role within an organization, how he/she operated the organization, his/her responsibilities, his/her relationship and things he/she takes into account. Further, it will make recommendations to specific reader¡¦s who would like to be managers, with possible information on the manager¡¦s management techniques and how he/she solved problems. 1.3 Scope This report will be looking at the particular manager interviewed and his/her skills involved in the organization. However this report will not cover other positions irrelevant to the manager position. The report has the limitations such as researching participants that are managers, the short period of time to write this report, our group only consisting of four members have to summarize everything with the word limit of 3000 words in this report. 1.4 Research Methods Information to this report was obtained from a conducted interview with a Restaurant manager Nancy Choi. Our group faced difficulties finding a manager in the engineering area, we tried contacting three managers, but two of the three managers gave us negative response. Luckily the 3rd manager made time for our interview, our group then travelled to the 2006-05-06T08:06:15-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Engineering-Management-Report-on-Communication-28807.aspx Business is responsible by leader with a successful leadership. Responsible leadership is important as almost every aspect of work influenced by leadership in a business (Overton, 2002:2). According to Rodney Overton, the definition of leadership is ¡¥the ability to get work done with and through others while gaining their confidence and cooperation¡¦ (2002:2). It is intent, in this brief essay, to discuss further about the important in being a responsible leader in business, the involvement and the examples. Discussion of business students learning to be a leader and also the perspective of responsible leadership also provided. There are several of writers that discuss differently about the leadership in business. All companies are still acting like traditional approach in making profit but with a different way, according to Tim Ooi (Cheh, 2004). We cannot just making profit without taking care of the environment because if they do so, people will not consume from them (Cheh, 2004). In this case, that company will lose business or even newspaper or Current Affair will publish a scandal about their company (Cheh, 2004). In his point of view, we must socially responsibility to be a successful leader in a business (Cheh, 2004). Fujio Cho, president of Toyota Corporation state that ¡¥Toyota and the other automakers will not survive the 21st Century unless we pull together now and find ways to limit the car¡¦s impact on our earth¡¦ (Hermance, 2001). Phil Crosby states that leader ought to have a clear schema, in being consistent and needs to be patience (1996:ix). He also said that leadership is not a ¡¥system¡¦ because there is nothing that called ¡¥system¡¦ to be installed to conquest the job of management (Crosby, 1996:2). Leadership is the result of actions that taken by an individual and leader attract their followers for pragmatic reasons with offering something that the followers whish to have (Crosby, 1996:2). People will unable to do anything if they or others cannot understand the definition of leadership (Crosby, 1996:2). There are five components that written by Rodney Overton in term of the productivity of the leadership lineup in any company (2002). These include: individual job actions of a manager, individuality in work that associated situations of the manager, power base of the manager, outline of the company¡¦s raw material, tasks, capital investment and related factors, and the company¡¦s background (Rodney Overton, 2002). In Overton¡¦s view, ¡¥no one is a born leader¡¦ or 2006-05-06T08:04:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leadership-in-Literature-28806.aspx Management and change --Bill Gates (The richest man in the world) Bibliography William (Bill) H. Gates is chairman and chief software architect of Microsoft Corporation, the worldwide leader in software, services and Internet technologies for personal and business computing. Microsoft had revenues of US$32.19 billion for the fiscal year ending June 2002, and employs more than 50,000 people in 72 countries and regions. Born on Oct. 28, 1955, Gates grew up in Seattle with his two sisters. Their father, William H. Gates II, is a Seattle attorney. Their late mother, Mary Gates, was a schoolteacher, University of Washington regent, and chairwoman of United Way International. The birth of Microsoft A. The idea During December of 1974, his partner Allen was on his way to visit Gates when along the way he stopped to browse a magazine. After he saw that, it changed his and Bill Gates's lives forever. On the cover of Popular Electronics was a picture of the Altair 8080 and the headline "World's First Microcomputer Kit to Rival Commercial Models." He bought the issue and rushed to Gates's room. They both recognized it was a great opportunity for business and their business brain started to work. They knew that the home computer market was about to explode and that someone would need to make software for the new machines. Within a few days, Gates had called MITS (Micro Instrumentation and Telemetry Systems), the makers of the Altair. He told the company that he and Allen had developed a BASIC that could be used on the Altair [Teamgates.com, 9/29/96]. They had not even written a line of code. They had neither an Altair nor the chip that ran the computer. The MITS company was very interested in seeing their BASIC since they never seen such thing before. Gates and Allen began to work feverishly on the BASIC they had promised. The code for the program was left mostly up to Bill Gates while Paul Allen began working on a way to simulate the Altair with the schools PDP-10. When they both felt their program was ready. Allen was to fly to MITS and show off their creation. The day after Allen arrived at MITS, it was time to test their BASIC. Entering the program into the company's Altair was the first time Allen had ever touched one. If the Altair simulation he designed or any of Gates's code was faulty, the demonstration would most 2006-05-06T08:03:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Management-and-Change,-Essay-on-Bill-Gates-Management-Style-28805.aspx Summary In this report an analysis was undertaken to investigate managing in an organisation. Using group contacts we were able to come into contact with Dr Smith, a manager at Telstra. After comparing textbook management techniques we discovered that the interviewee alternated between several of these with giving staff incentives to be independent in their work a major factor of his management. We also concluded that diversity makes management more flexible and allows creativity to flourish in the workplace. Table of Contents: SUMMARY II 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 BACKGROUND INFORMATION AND AIM 1 1.2 SOURCES AND METHODOLOGY 1 2.0 BODY OF REPORT 2 2.1 DR. SMITH 2 2.2 COMMUNICATION STRUCTURE 3 2.3 STAFF MOTIVATION 4 2.4 DR SMITHS PERSONAL MOTIVATION 5 2.5 MANAGEMENT PHILOSOPHY 6 2.6 DR SMITHS¡¦ MANAGEMENT STYLES 7 2.7 COMPANY MANAGEMENT STYLE 9 3.0 CONCLUSION AND INSIGHTS 9 4.0 REFERENCE LIST 10 5.0 APPENDIXES 11 5.1 APPENDIX ONE: INTERVIEW TRANSCRIPT 12 5.2 APPENDIX TWO: INTERVIEW PROMPT SHEET 18 1.0 Introduction 1.1 Background information and Aim This is a report on the interview that was conducted with Dr. Bernard Smith of Telstra on Friday, 30th August. The interview was aimed to find out various details about being a manager. These included, management styles, models and philosophies used, what a manager does and problems that arise as a manager. Dr. Smith is the section head of the Access Networks section of Telstra, Australia¡¦s largest telecommunications provider. There are four or five levels of management above Dr. Smith who is at the lowest level of formal management [1]. His section contains about 25 people under him. Access Networks is part of the Telstra Research Laboratories in Clayton and conducts research on the access part of the telecommunications network. This mainly deals with the part of the network between the customer and the nearest exchange [1]. Including transmission line and interference research for cable and ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line) [2]. He manages a range of people. Some have similar skills who he can work closely with such and electronics and protocols people. And some work in areas he knows very little about such as metallurgists and chemists who test corrosion of cables. He also manages workers who test the application of the research findings to see what the customer will experience. 1.2 Sources and Methodology The interview was organised through a contact at Telstra, Phil Potter, who was the father of one of the group members. Dr. Potter talked to Dr. Smith who we intended to interview and found if he was willing to be interviewed and what 2006-05-06T08:02:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Engineering-Management-28804.aspx [size=9:7bd2b9354c]EXECUTIVE SUMMARY This report contains the study of the Australian market prior to the launch of the Perdana V6 in Brisbane, Melbourne and Sydney. Thorough research regarding the Australian culture in part 1, indicates opportunity for PROTON to enter the sedan-market with the 2-litre V6 Perdana. The information we have gathered helps us make market planning decisions and interpret the entwined meaning of cultural information. Part 2 is constructed from more straightforward and relatively easier to decypher than that of the cultural analysis. The economic data that serves as a basis for an evaluation of the economic soundness of a country, information on the channels of distribution and media availability are also highlighted and disscussed. Factors like Australia’s Economic Statistic and Activity, population, and trade restrictions can affect the price, subsequently the demand of the of the Perdana in Australia. A competitive market analysis is also carried out to study and gather a clearer vision of what lies ahead. Studying our competitors and how they have flourished in this foreign land is useful to the survivalablity of PROTON; especially in a foreign market. However the study also reveals how the PROTON brand re-established itself after the acquisition of Lotus (British Supercar Makers) in 1996. The preliminary marketing plan then describes all the necessary steps needed, to successfully launch the Perdana V6 in Australia. Part 1: CULTURAL ANALYSIS 1.1 AUTOMOTIVE HISTORY IN AUSTRALIA. Australia became a commonwealth of the British Empire in 1901. It was able to take advantage of its natural resources to rapidly develop its agricultural and manufacturing industries. Through the years, this has attracted much foreign interest in investing and taking advantage of the abundance of resources of the country. There is a long history of automobile production in Australia. Foreign companies such as Ford Motor Company, General Motors (Holden), International Harvester, Chrysler, Nissan, Toyota, Mitsubishi, Volkswagen and Leyland Motors played an important role in the formation of the industry. In the 1960’s, the Australian government tried to protect local automotive manufacturers and component makers by introducing protectionist policies. However, it became apparent that local producers could not compete with the imports even with the protectionism offered and policies needed to change to ensure the survival of the industry in Australia. The new policy was aimed towards global integration of the Australian automotive industry. This was achieved through a gradual lowering of tariffs which provides the industry with an opportunity to adjust while maintaining 2006-04-19T05:11:08-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/International-Marketing-PROTON-goes-to-Australia-28730.aspx 0.1 Background and Framework for Analysis In early 2002 the Institute for Retail Studies at the University of Stirling was commissioned to carry out a 'Competitive Analysis of the Retail Sector in the UK' (tender CGS/1239) based on secondary sources and restricted to the UK rather than international comparisons. The project had three objectives: to define and map the sector in terms of size and composition of the businesses which operate within it; to analyse the competitiveness of the sector now through SWOT, PEST and Porter's 5 forces and any other appropriate means and summarise the key issues facing the sector as a whole, and also sub-sector specific issues; to provide recommendations for industry and government. The report is divided into four parts. In Part I we provide a background to the sector and explain the framework for analysis used in the study. Part II provides the competitive analysis of the whole (generic) retail sector based upon the three components of the framework: drivers for change; sector structure; and internal characteristics and competencies. Part III summarises the report and provides recommendations based upon our interpretation of the analysis. Part IV, presented as an appendix, provides a series of sub-sector analyses for the nine retail sub-sectors identified by the DTI. Retailing is one of the major economic sectors of the country, with retail sales of £221 billion, employing around 3 million people and operating over 300,000 shops. Within the sector there is a scale polarisation at both the business and the store level. The leading retailers are huge, multinational businesses which dominate the sector. They operate a range of stores from major hypermarkets and supercentres through to small convenience stores. Retailing is also significant it its social dimension as well. Whilst economically retailing bridges production and consumption, in social terms it effects most of the population every day. It is the rare person who does not go shopping, or indeed has not worked in retailing or been involved in it in some way. For some, retailers offer their major social intercourse of the day or week and act as a social network, setting or centre. The quality of UK retailing and its locations thus has both an economic and a social bearing on the perceptions of the country. What we term retailing is however changing, both in horizontal and vertical terms. Traditional product boundaries have altered and strict lines of business have dissolved. Retailers have also extended their tasks 2006-04-09T06:56:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Competitive-Analysis-of-the-Retail-Sector-in-the-UK-28672.aspx Introduction: In the UK today, only 15% of the labour force are in manufacturing; this will go down to about 10% by the year 2010. In Pakistan, approximately 15% to 25% accounting students are increasing every year. The number of professional commerce institutions has increased from 36 to 100 since 1992. (Source: Central bureau of education, Pakistan) What does this means? More and more people are directing towards non-manufacturing environments which makes them more conscious about social and environmental factors than those technical. The decline of manufacturing has been changing the skills and competencies that accountants need in the 21st century to satisfy the needs and requirements of stakeholders. Result is the division of accountants into those who can coop up with changing world and those who can’t i.e. entrepreneurs and number crunchers. Because of the unawareness of the subject matter in general public, little use of available information technology by accountants and ignoring social & environmental factors to report with mere numbers, a common perception is developed that accountants are dull, conservative and preoccupied with numbers. Yet all is not lost. Change is afoot! Do accountants have strength just in numbers? Undoubtedly, accountants are more —much more than number crunchers. Accountants are concerned about how the collected data should be used whereas number crunchers are busy thinking how data should be collected. If number crunching was what was required, then artificial intelligence of computers was sufficient; employers won’t look for accountants who are ‘Emotionally intelligent’ ‘Team worker’ and a lot. In fact, accountants are key strategists who help both individuals and organisations to improve their financial practices and systems. They have an ability to anticipate the client’s needs and position organisation’s capabilities to the best advantage. Depending on their chosen area of specialisation, there is a wide range of duties that accountants perform. Accountants, for instance, help businesses with problems like: • Audit the business for compliance with legislation • How to start a business and when to expand • How much the business is worth • How to make the most out of the corporate wealth • Developing a tax & legal strategy • Managing insolvency, bankruptcy and receivership Forensic accounting, an emerging branch of accountancy, has helped in investigating and detecting frauds but above all, ‘using’ numbers instead of ‘crunching’ had added to the decision making capability of modern accountants. Would that accountants are number crunchers, who would find the right numbers at right times to make use of, for the critics? One who draws a map 2006-04-05T19:04:13-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Are-Accountants-Number-Crunchers-Only-28666.aspx "Xerox: The Copier Company" epitomizes one of the greatest strategic blunders in the history of high technology corporations. The legacy of C. Peter McColough's tenure as CEO at Xerox was that he gave away the future of the company while he was at the helm. When McColough took over the reins of Xerox in 1968, Xerox was fully enjoying the 40-45% growth in their 80% copier dominated market share. McColough had the vision to see that in the office of the future, information would be stored electronically and he wanted Xerox to dominate the storing and reproduction of digital information just as it had dominated that on paper. To this end, Xerox developed the first personal computer three years before the first Apple computer and more than eight years before the appearance of the IBM PC. Having the computer and networking businesses firmly hooked, McColough failed to reel them in. At the outset, McColough appeared to be the champion of his company and perhaps the entire business era. For example, to ensure Xerox's presence as a leader in the "architecture of information," McColough established the Palo Alto Research Center (PARC) to develop digital office technologies. After all, he reasoned, the best way to predict the future was to invent it. In the early 1970's, many corporations were cutting their R&D budgets while Xerox, on the other hand, provided unlimited funding to PARC who gathered together a team of world-class researchers in information sciences and physical sciences. This team invented virtually every aspect of today's personal computer, including the graphical user interface, on which Windows and Apple are based, along with the mouse, the laser printer, computer networking, internet protocol, bitmapped graphics and e-mail. Despite these profound achievements in computer technology, Xerox is still known as the copier company because McColough failed to commercialize or protect this new technology. Nature and Cause of the Error At the root of McColough's strategic error was his failure to support his predictions for the future of Xerox with corporate action. McColough touted PARC as the future of the company, yet he neither protected the stunning technological developments from PARC nor evolved Xerox from the service company that it was, to the technology provider that it could have easily become. The error comprised two main shortfalls: failure to commercialize the technology; 2006-03-19T22:04:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Strategic-Mistakes-by-Xerox-CEO-28596.aspx Buisness Plan Outline The Executive Summary The executive summary is arguably the most important section of the business plan. It must be concise, specific, and well-written. It summarizes the highlights of the completed business plan and provides a brief snapshot of the plan, with sales, spending, and profit summary figures. The summary emphasizes those factors that will make the business a success. It must contain sound numbers for market size, trends, company goals, spending, return on investment, capital expenditures, and funding required. For new businesses or businesses seeking funding, credibility and excitement are key elements of the executive summary. Venture capitalists receive hundreds of plans each month, and just a few are actually being read from cover to cover. A quick 20-second scan of the executive summary is the basis for screening which plans to read and which companies to interview for investment. When the plan is the vehicle used to attract financing or investment, the executive summary should make it clear to the reader who is a potential source of funds why this is a sound investment. Business Background The business background section of your business plan generally consists of two to four sections that present information that is specific to your business. You may have gathered substantial information about competitors and the industry in general in the course of considering your business plans. This is not the place for that information. Instead, concentrate solely on those characteristics of your business that are specific to your particular business. The business background generally includes the following: a document describing the business entity and its general operation a document describing the product or service that your business will provide a document describing your facilities, if appropriate a document describing the people in your organization, if appropriate The Business Entity The business entity portion of the plan provides information that is specific to your business. This document sets forth the current status of operations, the management structure and organization, and the identification of key personnel. If the plan is being created for an existing business, historical information is also included. The business background provides the reader with information regarding: the type of business (e.g., wholesale, retail, manufacturing, service, etc.) type of legal entity (e.g., corporation, partnership, sole proprietorship, etc.) when the business was established where it is located the type of facilities, if any (e.g., retail establishment, manufacturing plant, etc.), although you may 2006-03-17T09:39:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Writing-a-Business-Plan--28562.aspx Telephone Company Management Problems Industry Leaders Total Industry Earnings for 2004: 6.8 Billion Dollars MCI Chief Operating Officer: Michael D. Cappellas 2003 Sales (mil.) $27,315.0 1-Year Sales Growth (15.2%) 2003 Net Income (mil.) $22,211.0 2003 Employees 56,600 1-Year Employee Growth (9.7%) Total Market Share 18.6% AT&T Chief Operating Officer: David W. Dorman Vice President: Thomas W. Thorton 2004 Sales (mil.) $30,537.0 1-Year Sales Growth (11.6%) 2004 Net Income (mil.) ($6,469.0) 2004 Employees 47,600 1-Year Employee Growth (22.7%) Total Market Share 19.5% Sprint Chief Operating Officer: Gary D. Forsee 2004 Sales (mil.) $27,428.0 1-Year Sales Growth 4.7% 2004 Net Income (mil.) ($1,012.0) 2004 Employees 59,900 1-Year Employee Growth (10.5%) Total Market Share 13.5% * Information from CNN.money.com History Alexander Graham Bell patented the telephone in 1876, and formed Bell Telephone which licensed local telephone exchanges in major US cities. AT&T was formed in 1885 to connect the local Bell companies. Their logo read "The Bell System: AT&T and Associated Companies." The network grew rapidly with the slogan "one system, one policy, and universal service." In 1913 AT&T agreed to become a regulated monopoly. Their monopoly would be allowed, but they had to connect competing local companies and let the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) approve their prices and policies Competition began creeping in 1956, when the courts overruled an FCC ban on Tom Carter's Hush-a- Phone, a device which snapped on to a telephone and made it possible for the user to speak in a whisper. That was perhaps the first step in the dissolution of telephone monopoly. The Hush-a-Phone decision paved the way for 110 and 300 bit per second acoustically-coupled computer terminals, like the one shown here. Mr. Carter returned to court with his Carterphone, a device for patching radio calls into the telephone network. The 1968 Carterphone decision allowed the direct connection of devices to the AT&T network, creating an opportunity for many competitors. Where do you think we would be today, if all telephones, modems, FAX machines and answering machines were sold by one company? The FCC also decided to 2006-03-16T02:53:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-of-Telephone-Company-Management-Problems-28559.aspx California School System Textbook Replacement: Analysis California schools to teach fiction as history? School history textbooks in California are sought to be revised by pressure groups to accommodate and extol the “hindutva” view of Indian history, says Romila Thaper, Professor of History of Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi and Michael Witzel Professor of Sanskrit of Harvard University, in an article published in today’s (March 9, 2006) edition of the Times of India, New Delhi.. The California State Board of Education (CSBE) is currently seeking community suggestions in regard to the updating of school textbooks. This has been seized by the American Hindutva lobby, the American arm of the rabidly Hindu communal organization, the RSS, as an opportunity to propagate and inculcate its distorted views about ancient India as history. When the Hindu communal Party, the BJP, was in power in India, the history textbooks in the schools were rewritten to suit their views; but these are being set right now. The RSS and the BJP, under the Hindutuva theology, have claimed (with no evidence at all) that “the first Indian civilization is 1900 million years old, the Ramayana and Mahabharata are historical texts to be understood literally, and ancient Hindu scriptures contain precise calculations of the speed of light and exact distances planets in the solar system”. These, undoubtedly would be some of the gems of ancient Indian history, along with a dose of Vedic mathematics, that would be in the revised textbooks in California, if the Hindutuva lobby has its say accepted The authors say that “California has a large Indian American population and one of the largest school systems in the country. Changes made there have immediate repercussions for school systems across the whole country”. The authors go on to narrate how the Hindutva lobby gained such a strategic position in the CSEB revision program. “When the California textbooks came up for review, a former (largely unknown) California Professor of history and Hindutva sympathizer was approached by a Hindutva foundation and later was appointed to an expert advisory panel serving CSBE.” He did not disclose his Hindutva relationship. When word leaked out about the proposed revision of ancient Indian history, many scholars, both in India and America were shocked and objected to the many historical inaccuracies. This strong objection made CSBE to pause to reconsider their course of action. Professor Michael Witzel, one of the authors of the article was invited in 2006-03-10T12:04:32-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/California-School-System-Textbook-Replacement-28541.aspx A Report into Organisational Culture and the Professional Kitchen Name: Marie Martin Course: FT408/1F Date: 09/01/06 Lecturer: Mark Gallagher Abstract It is common knowledge that the role a head chef plays in a professional kitchen is a vital one and that the culture of a kitchen is a unique one. The common person views a kitchen as a manic, hectic place where the head chef shouts and roars in order to assert authority and get the job done. The likes of Gordon Ramsey have gone a long way to fuel this image. But just how accurate is this? Surely no one would become a chef if this was so, why put oneself through such an ordeal to cook others their dinner? This paper sets out to establish the culture of the professional kitchen, identify the role the head chef plays within this culture and establish who wants to be a chef and why? Table of Contents 1. Introduction 4 2. Culture is: 5 3. Organizational culture 5 4. The Kitchen 7 4.1. The Head Chef. 8 5. Levels of Culture 9 5.1. Artifacts 9 5.2. Espoused Values 10 5.3. Underlying Basic Assumptions 10 6. Change in the Kitchen 12 7. Conclusion 13 8. Bibliography: 14 1. Introduction The role of the head chef has changed over the years being a leader in the kitchen is no longer enough. The Head Chef is among those professions that people dream about, leading a platoon of sous chefs in a glamorous, stainless steel kitchen and presenting fabulous meals to hundreds of people. Parts of this description are true, and those who become chefs have very high levels of satisfaction with their professions. One chef said his career “is only for the very crazy. It is hard work, it is gruelling work, it is important work, and still, I would do nothing else.” The long hours, the painstaking attention to detail, and being constantly surrounded by food are part of a job they love. The profession rewards the talented and the daring, which can see opportunity and grab it. The first few years are an education. Few chefs survive cooking school who don’t understand the physical and mental requirements of the profession: Lifting heavy pots, being on your feet for eight hours, stirring vats of sauces, rolling pounds of dough, having to deal with the stress of working in a confined space, and having to obey the head chef. The organisational culture of the kitchen is that of teamwork and balance, (Carberry, 2004). The head chef is the leader and it is his job to guide his cooks to daily success. And so 2006-03-09T17:30:25-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-Report-into-Organisational-Culture-and-the-Professional-Ki-28539.aspx The Marketing Plan Part A: Product Concept and Packaging Decisions: The product that we have created is a body wash that comes together in two separate bottles for “him” and “her”. Each package comes with a “poof” for the female and a wash cloth with the same properties of the poof for the male. The target market for our product is females and males aged 17-25. Obviously it is for males and females as the product has the body wash for each gender. But also the target age is that because 17 could be as young as people are that would maybe be living with a member of the opposite sex, and we felt that much older than 25, people may not feel connected to that sort of product. There are many unique selling points linked to our product. The matching his and her wash where the bottles come connected together, or can also be sold separately. The male bottle comes with a free wash cloth and the female with a free poof, the colour of the soap is blue for His and pink for Hers, we made it that way because pink and blue are the well-known colours for males and females. Unlike most other bodywashes, this one foams either pink or blue and stays that colour until washed off. The generic name for the product is body wash. The brand name of this body wash is called “Excess”. We chose this because we felt it was a quick attention grabber name that would attract people to the product. Our company name is MK2. The bottles fit together to create a triangular shape. This way they can be sold together in a matching set, or as singles. They are in a clear, easily squeezable container so that you can see the colours of the liquid through the bottle. The male body wash is called HIS, and the female is called HERS. We did it like this because it is catchy and straight to the point. The brand symbol/logo is the male and female “signs”. The shape of the bottle is unique and easily catches your attention. Sold separately, the shape is a tilted triangle, but put together it forms a big equilateral triangle. The size of the bottle is small big enough to hold a fair amount if the body wash, but isn’t too big so that it is bulky 2006-02-16T03:30:33-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Marketing-Plan-Product-Concept-and-Packaging-Decisions-28498.aspx Project Title ''Which sales strategy could Microsoft employ to its sales to improve its disappointing market share on the European game console markets? To Managing Director,Microsoft Xbox promotion team.(Steven Balmer and Bill Gates) Microsoft's European Xbox boss Chris Lewis Author I.B. Candidate # Date Word Count Research Proposal: 300 words Acknowledgement: Introduction: Acknowledgments In the process of compiling the data for this research project, I was fortunate to be guided by helpful souls. I wish to express my gratitude to those who have enabled me to complete this project and also to learn new skills and techniques in working on an individual basis. First to mention is my internal assessment guide Mr. Maguire, head of the business department study at the International School of Stuttgart. He was willing to give me useful advice iand his personal time n improving my thesis and focusing my research. His council was indispensable. I came to terms with the evident fact that microsoft or any other of the large companies under observation were not able to spend their time on helping me however that was not a problem which endangered the success of my research. I found plenty of other data from secondary sources. Interviews with sales agents and the results of my questionnaire provided me with suffiveint insight. 1. Research Proposal I) Action Plan __________________________________________________________________________________________ 2. Introduction I) Company Background II) Services Offered by Microsoft III) Xbox Background IV) Present Situation V) [Research Question] _______________________________________________________________________________________ 3. Procedure and Methods I) Primary Research II) Secondary research, desk research III)Methods and techniques for obtaining information IV)validity assesment of data 4. Main results and findings I) Xbox Sales Worldwide II) 1) Research Proposal Research Proposal Internal Assesment, B&M HL 27th June 2005 Supervisor: Mr. Maguire Research question: ''Which sales strategy could Microsofts employ to improve its market share on the European game console market? From which mistakes could Microsoft learn from (Xbox) considering the launche of their next generation game console Xbox 360. Background: I mean to investigate the causes of Microsofts failure to meet expectaions on its entry into the game console markets since 2003, Primary Research: Secondary Research: I assume it will be my most important source of information in the making of this project as their is only little insider knowledge I expect 2006-02-15T18:44:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business--28492.aspx Arguably the most important aspect of an organization is its emphasis on ethical behavior. The key premise was that by ‘doing the right thing’ internally and externally, businesses created a good working atmosphere, while also benefiting society and the environment. The problem is that many ethical issues are subjective and based on one’s values and beliefs. As a result, they are often difficult to enforce and easy to neglect. The result of this is that ‘when the costs are added up, the social balance sheet contains enormous debts to society’ (McEwan, 2001). It is the notion of an organization’s ‘debts to society’, which led to the branch of ethics known as ‘corporate social responsibility’. This refers to ‘the economic, legal, ethical, and philanthropic expectations placed on organizations by society at a given point in time’ (Carroll and Buchholtz, 2000). This theory of responsibility to society is based around two headings, stated by Wells (1998). Social Responsibility deals with ‘the purposes for which companies should act’ (Wells, 1998), and Corporate Responsibility is the ‘liability attached to a company for actions done in its name’ (Wells, 1998). Corporate Social Responsibility has increased in importance over the last 15 years, as globalization has led to increased pressure to meet society’s ethical demands and expectations. This pressure is a result of an increased number of stakeholders who ‘can affect or are affected by, the achievement of the organization’s objectives’ (Beauchamp, 2004), as well as the increasing influence and power of the mass media, which is able to pick up on even the smallest issues and re-present them globally. As a result, ‘in a technological age, where news spreads fast and everyone is expected to do his/her part to take care of the world, Corporate Responsibility is a business necessity’ (Allen, 2004). One example of this is McDonald’s, which published its first Corporate Responsibility Report in 2002 and this was followed up with an updated version in 2004. Yet despite this move, many critics of McDonald’s still believe that this, like many Corporate Responsibility Reports, is simply a medley of generalities and assumptions, that do not provide hard metrics of the company, its activities or its impacts on society and the environment’ (Hawken, 2002), and is ‘peripheral to the core interests of an organization’ (Strategic Direction, 2002). As a result, there is a need 2006-02-06T17:51:00-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ethical-Criticism-of-McDonalds-28470.aspx Case Analysis on Wal-Mart using the IE Matrix, SWOT Analysis and more Overview When Sam Walton founded the first Wal-Mart in 1962, the idea of bringing in a discount-shopping store into rural America was almost unheard of, except for the local five and dime stores. When Walton noticed that he had a lot of competition from regional discount chains, him and his wife Helen traveled the country to study other new retailing concepts, and were convinced that it was the wave of the future. With Walton's vision, Wal-Mart grew to be a multi-billion dollar, international company, operating about 4,600 stores around the world. Wal-Mart competes in many industries that include: 5331- Retail-Variety stores, 5411-Grocery stores, 5311-Department stores, 5812-Eating Places, 5399-Miscellaneous General Merchandise store, and 5912-Drug stores and Proprietary stores. Since there are several industries to choose from, our group chose to go with retail-variety stores, SIC code 5331. These establishments are primarily engaged in the retail sale of a variety of merchandise in the low and popular price ranges. Sales are made on a cash and carry basis, with the open-selling method of display and customer selection of merchandise. Wal-Mart's milestones began in 1962 when the first Wal-Mart was opened in Rogers, Arkansas. Seven years later the company incorporated as Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Then a year later they opened the first distribution center and home office in Bentonville, Arkansas, and also went public on the New York Stock Exchange. Several years later, in 1988, the first super center was opened. Then in 1991, the first international unit was opened in Mexico City. By the turn of the century, Discount Store News had named Wal-Mart "Retailer of the Century" and made Fortune magazine's lists of the "Most Admired Companies in America" and the "100 Best Companies to Work For." They were also ranked on Financial Times' "Most Respected in the World" list. In 2002, Wal-Mart became number one on the Fortune 500 list and was presented with the Ron Brown Award for Corporate Leadership, a presidential award that recognizes companies for outstanding achievement in employee and community relations. Mission Statement Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. does not have a formal mission statement. This is because Kim Ellis, the Public Relations Coordinator, said that they believe the customers are more interested in other aspects of the business, and they, the company, are focused on meeting their basic consumer needs. Since Wal-Mart does not have a mission statement our group has created a 2006-01-30T08:18:31-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Extensive-Case-Analysis-on-Wal-Mart-28463.aspx Causes Of High Bank Teller Job Retention There are multiple causes behind the problem the bank is experiencing with a high turnover rate among tellers. One primary cause is an inadequate hiring process. The current hiring process is focused on filling open positions and not on hiring qualified individuals who represent the aspects necessary to succeed as a teller. While the bank has standards for hiring tellers, the standards are not high enough to insure only qualified candidates obtain the open positions. Further, the hiring process overlooks the necessity of defining and analyzing candidates’ personalities during the hiring process. A teller position is a position that interacts with the banks most valuable asset, customers, on a daily basis. A teller represents the bank to its customers and has opportunities to sell the customers on additional bank services. A good candidate should be very people friendly and have basic sales skills. Not all applicants will have these characteristics but by analyzing applicants’ personalities during the hiring process, the bank can improve the odds of successfully filling the open teller positions and retaining more tellers. The bank cannot control the factors that make up individuals’ personalities such as hereditary forces, family relationship forces, social class and other group membership forces and cultural forces (126 Text) but it can find candidates whose personalities will better mesh with the teller position. The bank needs a specific individual who represents a specific mix of the Big Five Personality model. The ideal candidate will be very extroverted and like situations with a good deal of social interaction. They will also have high emotional stability that will help them deal reduce the stress levels associated with the teller position. They will be very agreeable so they can develop and maintain good interpersonal relationships. They must be rather conscientious because of the level of organization required with the positions and finally they do not need to be highly open to experience in the stringent well-defined position of a teller (127 text). Currently the bank is not analyzing any of these factors and hiring candidates who vary significantly from this ideal personality mix which causes the poor retention and high job turnover among tellers. Another cause of high turnover among tellers is the teller supervisor methodology. The teller supervisors do not properly evaluate their employees. 2006-01-29T05:54:46-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Causes-Of-High-Bank-Teller-Job-Retention-28461.aspx Magna Versus Royal Laser Society has become very cynical regarding business ethics. With liberalization and globalization becoming increasingly more important in the 21st century, it has become more difficult to evaluate and validate the goals of a business while fulfilling the demands that ethics put on government, business and consumers. Clearly, the purpose of a business can take two opposing views. From a business standpoint, an organization's primary goal is to offer quality to its customers, efficiency from its employees and competitiveness amongst businesses. However, from an ethical standpoint, a business should act "religiously" towards all stakeholders of a company by taking account of the extent of human suffering that their actions might cause in society. Multinational corporations are increasingly being faced with lawsuits, which tend to accentuate the importance that policy planners in government and industry should allocate to ethical issues. For instance, Microsoft has faced numerous lawsuits for monopolizing the market in an unethical manner. These ordeals have cost the company millions of dollars in the past five years or so. Not only do these lawsuits ruin the image of the company but, from an economic perspective, these lawsuits hurt the company's profits, directly and indirectly. In essence, conflict of interest exists between all members involved when dealing with business ethics. This paper will attempt to examine the ethical issues of non-competing clause, the fiduciary obligation of a manager and senior officer, theft of trademark secrets, and employer-employee obligations to one another. These topics will be discussed through the case of Magna International versus Royal Laser Tech Corporation. Magna International Inc. versus Royal Laser Tech Corporation involves four parties-Mister Fred Jaekel, Royal's current Chief Executive Officer, Mister Nick Orlando, who had been formerly employed at Cosma International Inc., a Magna Unit, as the Executive Vice-President of Finance, the Magna International Corporation and its competitor Royal Laser Tech Corporation, a metal molding company. There are two lawsuits at hand that need to be discussed. First of all, Fred Jaekel, as of August 2001, filed a lawsuit against his ex-employer Magna International Inc. because of his wrongful dismissal for $70 million dollars. Mister Jaekel claims that Magna owes him bonuses, shares and other payments. In response to the accusation, as of October 15, 2001, Magna launched a $50 million lawsuit against Mister Fred Jaekel's employer. Also, 2006-01-15T19:09:25-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Magna-Versus-Royal-Laser-28422.aspx Integrating the Voice of the Consumer Any organization that desires to remain in business has as an objective to be “customer focused.” It is an admirable objective but vision is much easier than executing on the vision. Product companies, especially in information technology, realize that placing the product manager of an application in front of clients or prospects assists in integrating the voice of the consumer (VOC) into future products. The product manager in front of the customer is not an automatic guarantee of success of a product. Certainly, the other “P’s” of marketing such as price, promotion, etc. enter into success of a product. However, the core product meeting a customer’s needs is key to the value equation. The client may buy the product once but if there is limited value equation then the probably of renewal or repurchase is minimal. Product manager’s in front a client or prospect has risks which can be managed. A group from an organization may go in front of a client and return to the office only to retrench to preconceived ideas and bias. Further, the voice of the consumer may be twisted to justify a product with which the team maybe heavily emotionally and economically invested. “We went to the clients, listened to them and are going to what we think we heard” only to pursue a path which was never stated by the client. The best method to prevent such a bias is to encourage tape recording and direct transcription of the voice of the customer. This has the potential if not properly positioned, of intimidating the client. Why would a client want to disclose their confidential business issues without some legal guarantee? Positioning recordings, either audio or video with a client, involves the upfront discussion that one is attempting to capture and meet the business requirements of the client. To assure confidentiality of the information, a nondisclosure agreement may be prudent. There are also many ways to query many clients at one regarding application enhancements in a “secure” environment without going onsite which significantly decreases the costs. Most the of the long distance carriers and many net companies offer service to have multiple clients on a call at once where the clients do not know who the other parties are and the parties are able to ask confidential business questions in a secure environment. Thus, 2006-01-15T19:05:39-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Integrating-the-Voice-of-the-Consumer-28420.aspx Quanitative Methods To make a more accurate forecast, one should look beyond the data that is easy to find and search for the underlying factors that are also relevant to the future outcomes. A team who was studying demand growth for copy paper faced this challenge. When demand for copy paper was growing at a rate faster than the economy, they had to find other factors that could be causing the growth. They tested the relationship between reductions in cost and number of tons produced. The resulting demand curve proved that cost reductions played an important role in past demand growth. The team concluded that because declines in the price of copy paper were not likely, future increases in demand would rely mainly on economic growth. They used this newfound information in creating their next forecasts. In another example, a team forecasting demand for maritime satellite terminals exceeded their penetration curves for each of the five types of ships. The team recreated forecasts by taking into effect other factors. They added the depressing effect of the growing oil glut and took out the historical trends the unnatural demand growth that had been a result of the Falklands war. Three years later, these new forecasts were within 1% of the forecast. In the early 1980s, an electric company’s management team tried to study end-user demand in a less traditional way by dividing electricity demand into three categories: residential, commercial, and industrial. Each category was studied separately by changes within that category (ex. changes in home size of residential users). After accounting for these factors, the company’s new forecasts were much smaller than the previous forecasts. The company then cancelled two $700 million generating plants in the planning stage. In 1983, a computer industry company did a study to refute beliefs that the computer industry would keep rising rapidly because of the amount of white-collared workers. Its forecasts took for account that more than two-thirds of white-collared workers (such as actors and elevator operators) do not require a PC. Sure enough, the market began to flatten the following year. In the last example, a company was thinking about buying a maker of video games because the overall market penetration for video games was only 10% of U.S. households. This meant there was a lot of room for 2006-01-07T07:20:58-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Quanitative-Methods-28407.aspx STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Starbucks Coffee Company is North America's leading roaster and retailer of specialty coffees. Headquartered in Seattle, WA, Starbucks has 931 retails stores and 75 major airport locations. The Company's objective is to establish Starbucks as the most recognized and respected brand of coffee in the world. To achieve this goal, the Company will continue to rapidly expand its retail operations, grow its mail order and specialty sales operations, and selectively pursue other opportunities to leverage and grow the Starbucks brand through the introduction of new products and the development of new distribution channels. Employees are one of the most important resources to Starbucks. If the company is to prosper, the employees must be treated well. All employees are eligible for Starbucks' health care and benefits package, as well as a starting wage above the minimum. Starbucks' strong commitment to the environment is guided by an environment committee. The Company endeavors to offer an environmentally safe product, as it believes that the welfare of people, plant and product are linked. Starbucks prides itself on being a "good citizen" locally and in the various coffee producing countries. They make significant contributions to local charities that focus on children, the environment, the homeless, and AIDS research/support. Financially, Starbucks has had solid earnings and returns. While still in the fast-growth stage, the Company has managed to continue healthy operations while generating enough public funds to finance store expansion. The company is expanding its empire overseas. Japan was Starbucks' first expansion outside of North America. Starbucks also plans to open coffee bars in Singapore. Although Starbucks expects same-store sales, which showed 20% increases in the past five years, to fall, overseas expansion and joint ventures promise to be major growth areas for Starbucks. Despite this potential problem, Starbucks remains excited about future growth and continues to be hopeful about the future. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY Starbucks and its subsidiaries ("Starbucks" or the "Company") include Starbucks Corporation and its wholly owned subsidiaries: The Coffee Connection, Inc. ("The Coffee Connection"), Starbucks New Venture Company ("Starbucks New Venture"), Starbucks Coffee International, Inc. ("SBI"), and Starbucks Holding Company. In 1994, Starbucks acquired all of the capital stock of The Coffee Connection, a roaster/retailer of specialty coffee. Starbucks New Venture was created in fiscal 1994 to develop ready-to-drink coffee-based beverages in partnership with the Pepsi-Cola Company. In October 1995, SBI was created to pursue development of Starbucks stores outside of North 2006-01-05T06:46:50-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Starbucks-Coffee-Executive-Summary-28401.aspx Microsoft Antitrust Introduction: An accurate understanding of the economics of the computer and Internet industry is a crucial foundation for following the logic of the Microsoft Anti Trust Case. Microsoft’s attempts to avoid competition by suppressing new technologies were based on the particular way in which competition works in the computer industry. The harm to consumers and society flows from the consumers’ choice lost as a result of the suppression. With powerful forces for both competition and monopoly in place, it is no surprise that many observers are drawn to one of the two false extreme positions. Some think that the industry is already at perfect competition that even a product at the center of network effects like windows would be quickly replaced if a superior alternative come along. Others think that the user’s and the developer’s sunk cost and network effects surrounding windows are so strong that it could not be displaced. The truth lies somewhere in between. Network effects do indeed allow monopolies like windows to have high entry barriers, but these barriers can fall under the right circumstances such as when specialized firms advance key, complementary technologies, used by the same applications, disruptive technical and market change. This creates a powerful incentive for incumbent monopolists to block focus, which might lower entry barriers. The relationship between positive economics and the antitrust is direct. If either extreme position had been true, the basis for antitrust case would have vanished. If windows were not a monopoly, Microsoft’s efforts to suppress innovation by other firms could not have harmed competition, since operating system competition would not have existed either way. As in any monopolization case, the government needed to show that there was a monopoly but that it could have ended, was it not for abuse of monopoly power via anticompetitive actions. The government met this burden in Microsoft’s case by showing that widespread distribution of internet-based technologies outside Microsoft’s control such as Netscape’s browser or Sun’s Java, would have established Divided Technical Leadership and thereby lowered the entry barrier were it not for Microsoft’s anticompetitive behavior. Microsoft is a very effective marketer of software, and the antitrust case is overwhelmingly about marketing practices. Any new technology in the computer business needs the collaboration of dozens if not hundreds of third party complements. Microsoft sought, by bullying where they had the bargaining power and by bribes where they did not, to prevent third 2006-01-03T05:22:26-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Microsoft-Antitrust-28386.aspx Organizational Change And Resistance To Change Future generations, looking back on the last years of the twentieth century, will see a contradictory picture of great promise and equally at great uncertainty. The 1990's have all the symptoms of a "turning point" in world history, a moment when many of the structural "givens" of social development themselves become problematic and world society undergoes profound reorganization. These developments occur within a frame work of rapidly expanding social and economic interdependence on a global scale. Organizations evolve through periods of incremental or evolutionary change. The major work changes happening today are changes in organizational strategy, organizational structure and design, technology and human resources. A change in organizational strategy is an attempt to alter the organization's alignment with it's environment. Mercedes, for example, is going to introduce this year the new Classe A, which is more oriented to the new young generation who wants to own a Mercedes. Though Mercedes wants to keep its image of a high class car producer, it overtook this new strategy to reinforce its presence in the market. Organization change might also focus on any of the basic components of organization structure or on the organization whole design. Nobuhiko Kawamoto, president of Honda, recently reorganized the Japanese automaker's management hierarchy. He drew up a new organization chart, he created a planning board and he has taken steps to empower lower-level workers. All this in order to adapt better to the fierce market of car making. Because of the rapid rate of all technological innovation, technological changes are becoming increasingly important to many organizations. One major area of change involves equipment, thus a change in work processes or work activities maybe necessary. Timex, for example, 3-D design software from Toronto based software Alias Research Inc. to be able to turn out watches faster. Organization control systems may also be targets of such a change. Another area of organization change has to do with human resources. An organization might decide to change the skill-level of its work force and the level of performance of its workers. Perceptions and expectations, attitudes and values are also a common focus on organizational change. Organizational change is anticipated or triggered because of different changing circumstances, an organization might incur a change because of forces bending its environment. These forces might be either 2006-01-03T04:57:48-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Organizational-Change-And-Resistance-To-Change-28382.aspx SWISHER MOWER AND MACHINE COMPANY (SMC) Introduction Wayne Swisher, CEO of SMC, is concerned with the company’s future prospects. The unit volume sales of the SMC riding mower, which constituted 64% of the total sales of SMC, had plateaued in recent years. He is presented with an attractive private-brand arrangement that can impact SMC’s prospects and has to decide whether to accept it. Alternatively, or additionally, he can decide to have more aggressive advertising and sales effort to recruit new dealers and assist current dealers. SMC is also preparing for the introduction of a new Trim-Max product. Wayne’s ability to make the right strategic marketing decisions now will decide the destiny of SMC in the future. Product Line Swisher Mower Company (SMC), established in 1945, has a current portfolio of three products – push mower kits, trailmowers and riding mowers. It is also in the process of developing a new product – all-in-one trimmer, edger and mower. Chart 1 shows the percentage contribution of each of these products to SMC’s total sales and Chart 2 shows the percentage contribution of each of these products to SMC’s total gross profit in 1995. Assuming that 80% of the parts business is generated from the sales of the riding mowers, we can infer that 80% of SMC’s profit arises from the sales of riding mowers or their spare parts. We can therefore observe that SMC’s company’s performance is largely dictated by riding mower sales. Riding Mower Referring to the material, we observe in Exhibit 7 that there is a rising trend in the unit sales of riding lawn mowers and lawn tractors in the 1990s for the mower and tractor industry. However, Exhibit 1 shows that the sales trend of SMC’s riding mowers for the same period is constant. Compared to the 1970s and 1980s, the market share of SMC has also fallen in the 1990s. In terms of unit volumes, the SMC’s sales peaked at a volume of 10,000 riding mowers almost 30 years ago i.e. 1966. They were able to generate sales near this level till 1973 (nine years). Unit sales declined to about 4200 riding mowers in the year 1974. They have been selling at this level for approximately 21 years now. However, during these 21 years, industry sales for riding mowers and lawn tractors have gone up from 640,000 units to about 2006-01-01T21:24:59-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Swisher-Mower-and-Machine-Company-SMC-28366.aspx Should The Acquisition Of Bass By Interbrew Be Allowed? The purpose of this investigation is to establish whether the acquisition of Bass by Interbrew should be allowed. There will be many elements to look at in order to reach a final conclusion but in the first light, it seems that the takeover is a good idea. Interbrew is one of the largest brewers in the world and I think that the acquisition should go ahead because the merger would make interbrew one of the largest brewer in Great Britain with an overall market share of approximately 33% to 38%. The merger would lead to the creation of a duopoly between Interbrew and Scottish & Newcastle plc. The merger would also result in synergy benefits and cost savings. This suggests that while benefits may accrue to Interbrew as a result of the merger; there are practical concerns that the merger may not be in the public interest because of the creation of a duopoly. It is this issue that I intend to investigate. Background Interbrew can trace its origins back to 1366 to a brewery called Den Hoorn, located in Leuven, a city just outside of Brussels. In 1717, Sebastien Artois, the master brewer, purchased the brewery and changed its name to Artois. Interbrew was formed in 1987 from the merger of Brasseries Artois, then the second largest brewer in Belgium, and Brasseries Piedboeuf, then the largest brewer in Belgium and the brewer of Jupiler. Interbrew soon acquired other Belgian speciality brewers, including Hoegaarden in 1989 and Belle-Vue in 1990. In 1991, Interbrew entered a phase of rapid expansion, and have since completed 30 acquisitions and strategic joint ventures, the largest of which were Labatt (Canada), Oriental Breweries (South-Korea), SUN Interbrew (Russia), Bass Brewers and Whitbread Beer Company (United Kingdom). This helped the company gain recognition and have an increase in market share in order to try to become the “kings of the brewing industry” Interbrew acquired Labatt Brewing Company Limited, the second largest Canadian brewer, in 1995. With Labatt, they also acquired Rolling Rock in the United States and a 22% stake in the second largest brewer in Mexico, FEMSA Cerveza. At the time, the acquisition of Labatt nearly doubled their turnover. Last year, Interbrew acquired Bass Brewers and Whitbread Beer Company, excluding Whitbread Beer Company's production of Heineken and Murphy's Irish Stout brewed under licence. Respectively, these two businesses represent the second and fourth 2006-01-01T21:07:19-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Should-The-Acquisition-Of-Bass-By-Interbrew-Be-Allowed-28363.aspx Affirmative Action: UNJUST Or UNWARRANTED? Affirmative Action: Justified or Unwarranted? Abstract Jack and Diane are both applying for a job in the advertising division of a leading national magazine. Both of these applicants graduated from very reputable colleges. Diane achieved a solid B average while Jack was rated slightly higher. Both ranked in the top one-third of their graduating class. Jack worked for a relative in a family owned advertising agency over the summer. Diane, who had to help out with her younger sisters and brothers, took some required classes over the summer so she would have more free time during the school year. She has no advertising experience. Jack and Diane are both called in for an interview. The personnel officer notes that both seem intelligent, hard working, and in need of the job. Because of Jack’s experience in advertising and higher grade point average, he ranks slightly higher than Diane. Who gets the job? That depends on the company they are interviewing with. In the past Jack would have received the job right away, regardless of rating. Two main reasons being because Diane is a woman, and because she is black. Until recently the firm wouldn’t have even considered hiring her, except possibly for a clerical position. Today the situation is much different. Diane may be hired for the very same reasons she was rejected in the past even though Jack’s application looked better. This reason is to make up for past discrimination. To address this, the company has implemented a plan to increase its number of minorities in its advertising division. Through the plan, “no prospective employee may be discriminated against because of their race or sex.” This plan is also used when firing, giving promotions, and when layoffs take place (Woods 6). Jack and Diane are fictional, but the plan used to help them get their job is not. This plan is known as affirmative action. One source explains that affirmative action is “any steps taken by a company to increase the number or improve its ranks of minorities workers”(Woods 8). There are no easy answers to affirmative action; however, by learning about it, you will better understand the complex issues and the difficult decisions that have been made in the past and that will be made in the future. 2006-01-01T01:26:18-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Affirmative-Action-UNJUST-Or-UNWARRANTED-28357.aspx The Role Of Conciliation In Industrial Relations Traditionally, Industrial relations in Australia has been governed by the process of arbitration. Dispute resolution and collective bargaining arrangements were all determined by the courts and/or Industrial Relations Tribunal. However, throughout the last three decades, the process of conciliation (mediation) has gained greater favour as a mechanism to maintain industrial harmony. This essay will be structured in 6 main divisions. Firstly, the introduction will provide a background to the evolution of conciliation, and definitions of both conciliation and its counterpart, arbitration. The second section of the essay will discuss the major differences between conciliation and arbitration that has resulted in the former playing a more influential role in industrial relations. The third part of the essay will discuss the various functions mediation plays within industrial relations. The fourth section of the report will discuss how collective agreements can be best interpreted through conciliation. Finally, the conclusion will weigh up the arguments and determine the role that conciliation plays in Australian industrial relations. According to Vessenes (1996) “mediation is one of the techniques that have come to be known as Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR), designed to avoid costly litigation. It is a voluntary process where a neutral third-party mediator helps the parties find common ground and negotiate a final settlement agreement”. On the other hand, arbitration is best described by Beach (1980) as a process where “the arbitrator (or arbitration panel) conducts a formal quasijudicial hearing at which the union and employer negotiators present testimony of witnesses, arguments, and documentary evidence in support of their respective positions. Sometime later, the arbitrator (or the panel) issues a legally binded ruling” Differences Between Conciliation and Arbitration Meyer (1979) argues that “Mediation and arbitration have conceptually nothing in common. The one [mediation] involves helping people to decide for themselves, the other involves helping people by deciding for them”. The integrative nature of mediation, in comparison with arbitration, has provided the former with a greater exposure as a means to resolve disputes in Australian Industrial Relations. Placement Of Blame The placement of blame on an entity regarding an industrial dispute is a significant distinction between conciliation and arbitration. Fulton (1989) advocates that “the mediator’s endeavours are not aimed at identifying which disputant is right and which is wrong. The mediator’s aim is rather to disperse any private antagonism which may exist between the parties and to gain a solution.” On 2006-01-01T00:48:51-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Role-Of-Conciliation-In-Industrial-28351.aspx My Venture Plan The venture I would like to start is a home-based accounting business. My business would be called McCounting. McCounting will analyze and interpret the financial and economic activities of a business as well as home owners personal activities. McCounting would solve many other entrepreneur's problems by eliminating the stress of the financial aspects of their business. My business would also solve regular home owners the headaches and hassles they may have come income tax time. My business would also take advantage of people's actual wants and needs because people want convenience and simplicity rather than endless hours of number crunching. McCounting will fit almost everyone's financial budget and let's you relax because you know your financial's are in good, reliable hands. Guaranteed. The entrepreneurial characteristics I poses include the following: perceptive, imaginative, very persistent, hard working, goal setting, self confident, very flexible, and extremely independent. I am perceptive because when I am faced with problems I love the challenges and opportunities that arise from them. I am imaginative because I get visions of what I want the outcome of the problem to look like, and then I create it or produce new ideas to improve it. I am persistent because I never give up on things, no matter what the circumstances were. I stick with my ideas until I have tried everything to make the problem better. If I have come to a dead end with my idea, I change my idea and start again until it does work. I am a goal setter because once I have completed or on the verge of completing my first goal I create another one and challenge myself even harder than the first time. I am hard working because being perceptive, persistent, and goal setting do not come with little or not work, they come with the hardest, most complex work, this to me is hark working. I am self confident because I believe in myself, and I believe I can do anything I put my mind to no matter how hard it is or how much work it will take, I believe I can do it. I am flexible because I can adapt to changes rather quickly, and I look at them as a challenge to overcome. I am independent because I don't like to have to rely on other people to get things done, I like to have 2006-01-01T00:34:47-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/My-Venture-Plan--28345.aspx Business Project - Executive summary Biometry is a technology based on identifying people by every individual’s unique fingerprints. In Sweden a young security company by the name of Precise Biometrics started in 1997 has gone into a new area on the market of fingerprint readers. From the maturity phase to the penetration phase (see appendix 1.0) and this means that the firm must establish itself on the market to successfully sell the products, which have been developed. Firstly we will see how the company will be analyzed. Shortly after this we find the three different areas, which the products they have are specialized in: 1) IT- security 2) Passage system 3) Built-in systems Then we will see how the symbiosis of certain areas of the company can achieve progress. Towards the end of the analysis we can find the company must redirect into a more market friendly way to achieve a strong grip on the market. “How should the company Precise Biometrics prepare for the future market?” 1.0 Introduction The need of security has always been a very fundamental and important issue among human beings. 1954 the famous psychologist Abraham Maslow synthesized a hierarchy of needs (appendix 2.0), which has been vital to the business world. On the most fundamental level of needs we can find that after the need of survival we find that security is next. Especially in the year of 2002, where the business world is greatly affected and it is more significant than ever! The company Precise Biometrics was born in 1997. This company took a patent of a certain way of reading the fingerprints of a human, a revolutionary step in biometrics. Students from the Lund University in Sweden started the company, which last January had a total turn over of 500 000. The rapid growth of technology in the last couple of years has created a need for more security. In today’s IT society we can find that there is a craving for private businesses wanting to be sure that authorized personnel must only see their confidential information. One of the factors that affect every business in the developed countries today has something to do with information technology i.e.: Internet, mobile phones or simply a bank machine. Perhaps some sensitive material about the annual profits of company XYZ is sent through e-mail one needs to appreciate the type of security it requires. Due to the vast majority of businesses being flexible and mobile in today’s 2005-12-30T19:25:26-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Project-Executive-summary-28329.aspx Ethical Behavior in Managemment and Business Ethics is the term we give to our concern for good behavior. Its human nature to not only is concerned with our own personal well being, but also that of others and of human society as a whole. It is stated that ethics is a way of being human and if men and women had not identified their own welfare with that of others, then they probably would not have survived and developed (Ethics 5). Business ethics is very similar to normal every day ethics in that it involves being fully aware of what we’re doing including the complications and consequences of our actions. Being aware of ethics in business requires us to be aware of two things. First, we have to have a need with complying with rules, such as laws, customs and expectations of the community, the principles of morality and the policies of the organization and such general concerns as the needs of others and fairness. Second, we should know how the products and services of the business, the actions of its members, could affect its employees, the community and the society as a whole, either positively or negatively (Ethics 5). Good ethics means good business is the viewpoint of many businesses. Businesses and their managers take ethics seriously. They reason their way through ethical problems and acceptable solutions. Although there is always the reverse, where businesses give the appearance of success for long periods of time in spite of unethical practices. The news today is overloaded with stories of the fallen heroes and devastated businesses that ultimately result from deception and unethical solutions to the business’s problems (5). Many managers say that they run into ethical dilemmas because they are involved in relationships with people being employees, peers, and bosses with whom they have to work with and on whom they are dependent. The problem is complicated because these people have needs that are contrary to a business’s goals and competing needs. The manager is forced to either chose between the business or the person, being a peer or employee, and an unethical choice will affect the relationship of the other for years to come (Ethics 6). Businesses themselves have several responsibilities many of them being ethical. First, they have the priority of making jobs (106). Once they 2005-12-30T19:02:49-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ethical-Behavior-in-Managemment-and-Business-28318.aspx Stocking and Zoning - Wal-Mart When working for a large company such as Wal-Mart, you must understand that it takes hard work and dedication to make sure the store is presentable. Wal-Mart believes there are two main parts to maintaining a presentable appearance: keeping the merchan- dise well stocked and then making sure each isle is properly “zoned” With Wal-Mart being the well-known company it is, stocker personnel are scheduled covering all hours of the day. There are grocery stockers, 10:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. stockers (which I was for six months), and then overnight stockers. There are grocery stockers during all hours of the day, but most of the grocery section is stocked during the night. This makes it easier for the associates to stay out of the customer’s way. Pallets full of grocery merchandise come in to the store on a daily basis. The overnight stockers will then unload these pallets to the salesfloor and re-fill the shelves. The 10-7 stockers mostly work in what is called the “consumable” areas. These areas consist of paper goods, chemicals, pets, houseware, and furniture. When I would stock the pet section I would pull pallets full of dog food, cat food, and bird food to the floor and fill the empty spots where customers had purchased merchandise. Heavier bags are stocked on the bottom while lighter bags and cans are stacked on shelves and “risers”. Risers are additional shelves at the top of the isles where extra merchandise is placed until it is able to go on the shelf. The same is done for paper goods (toilet paper, napkins, paper plates, etc.) and chemicals (laundry detergent, bug spray, cleaning supplies, etc.). After stocking for six months, I transferred over to what is called “Area D”. Area D consists of electronics, sporting goods, hardware, toys, health and beauty aids, and garden center. While working in this area, you must always make sure the merchandise is properly “zoned”. When zoning, you must first see if there is any merchandise on the risers that can be brought down to fill the shelf. After the shelves have been filled, you must make sure that everything is pulled to the front of the shelf and properly placed. To properly face an item, such as a spray paint can, you must make sure the name of the product is 2005-12-26T06:35:03-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Stocking-and-Zoning-Wal-Mart-28261.aspx Consumer Behavior In Asia Introduction In recent decades, Asia has been home to many of the World¡¦s most dynamic markets. The region now represents 25 per cent of the world economy and about 50 per cent of the world¡¦s population. It is for this reason that few international companies can afford to ignore Asia as a marker to primary importance, despite the crisis that hit parts of the region in 1997/98. Western firm s without a presence in the region often fail to perceive the opportunities they miss in Asia to generate sales and profits of acquire experience, although their very absence represents the most substantial competitive threat to their future in the long run. In light of the importance of Asia as a market, there is a surprising paucity of work that establishes a marking theory specific to Asia. In the case of consumer behavior, few would argue with the view that Asian consumers do appear to be distinctively different form Western consumers. Thus far, however, very little thought has been given to rethinking the theories, underlying models, concepts and views of Asian consumer segmentation, the motives of Asian consumers and how they behave. Consumer behavior in Asia: premises Cross-cultural perspectives in consumer behavior theory Our first task is to make the case that a separate consumer behavior theory is necessary accurately to describe the behavior of Asian consumer. To do so, we must first establish the following two premises: 1. Consumer behavior is strongly influenced by culture 2. Asian culture is distinctly different from Western culture. We can then conclude that a consumer behavior theory specific to Asian consumers is a necessity for any firm seeking to market products successfully to Asian consumers. To argue for a distinct consumer behavior theory to explain the behavior fo Asian consumers puts us in the camp of the ¡¥cultural meaning¡¦ theorists. There are, in fact, a variety of perspectives concerning cross-cultural consumer behavior theory. Currently, the four main approaches to cross-cultural consumer behavior theory are (1) the global perspective, (2) the ¡¥imported¡¦ perspective, (3) the ethnic consumption perspective, and (4) the cultural meaning perspective (table 1.1) Table 1.1 cross-cultural perspectives in consumer behavior theory Consumer Behavior Theories Consumers Universal Specific UNIVERSAL 1. Global Perspective ƒÜ Consumers are global in preferences and behavior CB theories are globally applicable 3. Ethnic Consumption perspective ƒÜ Although consumers are global in preferences for certain products, they differ in behavior CB theories are not globally 2005-12-25T04:59:02-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Consumer-Behavior-In-Asia-28245.aspx The Impact Of The Balance Of Payments And Financial Crises On Indonesia's Foreign Trade And Economic Performance Introduction The purpose of this study is to examine the impact of the currency and financial crisis on Indonesia’s international trade and trade-related economic performance. The focus is on trade-related economic activity and indicators, particularly on non-oil/gas exports and imports in the period of 1997, 1998 and early 1999. A summary of Indonesia’s balance of payments in recent years, including the first three quarters of 1998, reveals the severity of the adjustment that has taken place in shifting from a deficit on current account to a surplus (Table 1). Within a period of one year, Indonesia went from a current account deficit of nearly $5 billion (1997) to a surplus of an estimated $3 billion (1998). The depreciation of the Indonesian rupiah in 1997 and 1998 went further than did that of the other Asian countries. Taking June 1997 as a benchmark, the nominal depreciation of the rupiah against the US dollar reached 80% in mid-1998 (Toida 1999, Bank Indonesia 1999). Although recovering somewhat over the remaining months of 1998 and again in mid-1999, the rupiah was still down nearly 70% from the benchmark in May 1999. In countries experiencing a twin currency and financial crisis, it is noted that the combination of massive currency depreciation and high domestic interest rates may lead to a vicious cycle that aggravates the severity of the banking sector’s woes (Kamininsky and Reinhart 1999). This appears to be taking place in Indonesia and this has implications for the analysis of the impact of the crisis on international trade and trade-related economic activity. The massive currency depreciation and continued large fluctuations in the rupiah-US dollar exchange rate (the rupiah fell by 10% against the dollar during one week in August 1999) defy conventional economic models of exchange rate behavior. The volatility in the exchange rate and the massive depreciation are far beyond what any reasonable model would have predicted, even allowing for “overshooting” of the equilibrium. The assumptions made in standard models that purport to explain the response of the real economy to changes in the relative price of tradable and non-tradable goods and services do not apply to present circumstances in Indonesia or the other crisis-ridden Asian economies. The depreciation of the rupiah also undoubtedly contributed 2005-12-25T04:52:11-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Impact-of-Balance-of-Payents-amp-Financial-Crices-in-Indon-28244.aspx LEADERSHIP Introduction Good leaders are made not born. If a person has the desire and willpower, he can become an effective leader. Good leaders develop through a never ending process of self-study, education, training, and experience. To inspire workers into higher levels of teamwork, there are certain things a leader must be, know, and, do. These do not come naturally, but are acquired through continual work and study. Good leaders are continually working and studying to improve 2005-12-12T23:52:38-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leadership--28179.aspx Definition of Market Research Market Research is a systematic, objective collection and analysis of data about a particular target market, competition, and/or environment. It always incorporates some form of data collection whether it be secondary research (often referred to as desk research) or primary research which is collected direct from a respondent. The purpose of any market research project is to achieve an increased understanding of the subject matter. With markets throughout the world becoming increasingly more competitive, market research is now on the agenda of many organisations, whether they be large or small. The Market Research Process To conduct market research, organisations may decide to undertake the project themselves (some through a marketing research department) or they might choose to commission it via a market research agency or consultancy. Whichever, before undertaking any research project, it is crucial to define the research objectives i.e. what are you trying to achieve from the research? and what do you need to know? After considering the objectives, Market Researchers can utilise many types of research techniques and methodologies to capture the data that they require. All of the available methodologies either collect quantitative or qualitative information. The use of each very much depends on the research objectives but many believe that results are most useful when the two methods are combined. Quantitative Research Quantitative research is numerically oriented, requires significant attention to the measurement of market phenomena and often involves statistical analysis. For example, a bank might ask its customers to rate its overall service as either excellent, good, poor or very poor. This will provide quantitative information that can be analysed statistically. The main rule with quantitative research is that every respondent is asked the same series of questions. The approach is very structured and normally involves large numbers of interviews/questionnaires. Perhaps the most common quantitative technique is the ‘market research survey’. These are basically projects that involve the collection of data from multiple cases – such as consumers or a set of products. Quantitative surveys can be conducted by using post (self-completion), face-to-face (in-street or in-home), telephone, email or web techniques. The questionnaire is one of the more common tools for collecting data from a survey, but it is only one of a wide ranging set of data collection aids. For further detailed information about quantitative research please click here: quantitative market research. Qualitative Research Qualitative research provides an understanding of how or why things are as they are. For 2005-12-12T23:45:36-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-research--28178.aspx IKEA the Leader in home furnishings sales. By PR .december.02.2005 Denmark is where the Swedish company IKEA was first found in 1943, and it operators a multinational chain of stores for furniture. It is the world's largest furniture retailer, which specializes, in stylish but inexpensive designed furniture. At the end of 2002 (1 September 2001 - 31 August 2002), the IKEA Group of Companies had a total of 175 stores in 31 countries. In addition, there were 19 IKEA stores owned and run by franchisees, outside the IKEA Group, in 12 countries including the one in Newhaven Connecticut which was opened in 2004. During the IKEA financial year 2003-2004, 323 million people visited IKEA . The IKEA logo is blue and yellow and that’s because these are the colors of the Swedish flag. In Sweden, nature and the home both play a big part in people's lives. In fact, one of the best ways to describe the Swedish home furnishing style is to describe nature -- full of light and fresh air, yet restrained and unpretentious. In the late 1800s, the artists Carl and Karin Larsson combined classical influences with warmer Swedish folk styles. They created a model of Swedish home furnishing design that today enjoys world-wide renown. In the 1950s the styles of modernism and functionalism developed at the same time as Sweden established a society founded on social equality. The IKEA product range -- modern but not trendy, functional yet attractive, human-centered and child-friendly -- carries on these various Swedish home furnishing traditions. Many people associate Sweden with a fresh, healthy way of life. This Swedish lifestyle is reflected in the IKEA product range. The freshness of the open air is reflected in the colors and materials used and the sense of space they create: blond woods, natural textiles and untreated surfaces. In a climate that is cold and dark for much of the year, these light, bright living spaces create the sensation of summer sunshine indoors all year round. The IKEA Concept, like its founder, was born in Småland. This is a part of southern Sweden where the soil is thin and poor. The people are famous for working hard, living on small means and using their heads to make the best possible use of the limited resources they have. This way of doing things is at the heart of the IKEA approach to keeping prices low. But quality is not 2005-12-08T15:30:05-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/IKEA-the-Leader-in-home-furnishings-sales-28170.aspx The main question facing managers in an organization is motivation, how does it work, when to apply and to whom they should apply on. In today’s organization, motivation plays an important role in determining whether a company will succeed or not. What is motivation? Motivation is the set of attitudes and values that predispose a person to act in a specific goal directed manner. It is an invisible inner state that energizes the human goal-directed behavior, which can be divided into two components which is the direction of a behavior working to reach a goal and the strength of the behavior. Within an organization the desired goals are often clearly defined. In motivation a manager normally seeks to change or maintain certain environmental factors so as to influence the inner drives which may change or sustain the behaviors of his subordinates. Motivation is different things to different people. It does not need to be a 'thing' that you do. And if you see it as a culture rather than, 'We're doing Motivation today', it becomes a whole lot easier. In today’s business environment, managers must employ an organizational culture, where motivation is the key to their mission as leaders. When studying motivation, the classic motivational theories of McGregor, Herzberg, and Maslow must not be forgotten, since they gives us a model to follow, that can be used in any situation. Either in the workplace or in our personal lives. For example, McGregor characterized people into two groups, labeled X and Y. Herzberg identified a two-factor theory regarding the motivation of employees. The motivation factors, when present, tend to create satisfaction or motivation in the minds of employees. The hygiene factors, when absent or perceived as inadequate, can create dissatisfied employees; yet, when present, do not add to satisfaction or serve to motivate. Maslow suggested people are motivated by a set of internal needs. They range from the lowest-order needs of physiological to the highest-order need of Self-actualization. Individuals are motivated at their level of need, and once a lower-order need is satisfied, the next higher-order need becomes the individual’s motivational drive. In an organization, different employees have different needs, therefore managers must be able to establish their needs and be able to apply different motivational tools to satisfy different needs. At the core of motivation is human needs satisfaction. The inner drives within an individual are believed 2005-12-05T01:18:38-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Motivation-in-the-Workforce-28166.aspx Marketing Essay: How To Do a SWOT Analysis SWOT stands for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. It's a four-part approach to analyzing a company's overall strategy or the strategy of its business units. All four aspects must be considered to implement a long-range plan of action. In order to swat the competition you need to understand SWOT. SWOT stands for Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats. It's a way to analyze a company's or a department's position in the market in relation to its competitors. The goal is to identify all the major factors affecting competitiveness before crafting a business strategy. SWOT Breakdown SWOT identifies the internal and external factors that affect an organization. Here’s the breakdown of SWOT by internal and external variables: Internal factors (Strengths and weaknesses) • A corporate structure, culture and resources • Shareholders • Customers • Competitors External factors (Opportunities threats) • Politics • Technology • Society • Economics SWOT comes from an old term from the strategic planning field. Marketing gurus have taken familiar terms from old "situation analysis" principles -- like core competencies (your company's main business), liabilities (weak points that need improvement), customers and competitors -- and simply given them a catchy new acronym. "The purpose of strategy is to be really clear before you take the direction. The point of a SWOT analysis is to have the best shot at a grounded plan," says Rashi Glazer, co-director of the Center for Marketing and Technology at the University of California at Berkeley. For example, an information technology department needs to determine the strengths and weaknesses of its people and its technology. It also needs to make sure the IT strategy complements the company's business goals. The department head needs to ask: What is each staff member good at? What are they not good at? Project leaders also must consider opportunities and threats -- or customers and competitors. How attractive is the market or direction they're considering? What's their market share and cost structure? Delta Air Lines Inc., for example, chose to invest in a multibillion-dollar customer service system that addresses the flight delay problems experienced by 20% of its passengers. Although some companies might think the move was excessive considering 80% of customers have no problems, Delta believed customer service was an important area for increasing market share and that competitors could pose a threat if Delta didn't address 2005-12-04T02:07:08-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/How-To-Do-a-SWOT-Analysis-Marketing-Essay-28164.aspx Group Oral Presentation: the drivers and conditions for the survival and success of an Australian business enterprise Qantas Airways Limited ABN 16 009 661 901 October 2005 Fact File QANTAS AT A GLANCE HISTORY Qantas is the world's second oldest airline. It was founded in the Queensland outback in 1920 and is Australia’s largest domestic and international airline. Qantas is also recognised as one of the world's leading long distance airlines, having pioneered services from Australia to North America and Europe. The Qantas Group employs approximately 38,000 staff across a network that spans 145 destinations (including codeshare services) in Australia, Asia-Pacific, Americas, Europe and Africa. BUSINESS & INVESTMENTS The company's main business is the transportation of passengers. In addition to the Flying Businesses, the Qantas Group operates a diverse portfolio of airline-related businesses. These include Engineering Technical Operations and Maintenance Services (ETOMS), Airports and Catering, Qantas Freight, Qantas Holidays, Qantas Defence Services and Qantas Consulting. Qantas Airways Limited owns 44.5 per cent of Orange Star, which owns and operates the value-based intra-Asia airlines Jetstar Asia and Valuair, based in Singapore. Qantas also holds a 46.3 per cent shareholding in Air Pacific. ROUTES The Qantas Group’s Flying Businesses are Qantas, Regional Airlines (QantasLink and Jetconnect), Australian Airlines and Jetstar. Domestically, Qantas, QantasLink and Jetstar operate over 5,000 flights a week serving 62 city and regional destinations in all states and mainland territories. Jetconnect also operates more than 250 domestic flights a week for Qantas within New Zealand. Internationally, Qantas and Australian Airlines operate nearly 700 flights a week, offering services to 83 international destinations (including codeshare services) in nearly 40 countries in Asia-Pacific, Americas, Europe and Africa. AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS The Qantas Group operates a fleet of 201 aircraft, comprising Boeing 747s, 767s, 737s and 717s, Airbus A330s and A320s, Bombardier Dash 8s and British Aerospace 146s. OPERATIONAL STATISTICS QANTAS GROUP Passengers carried: Year ended 30 June 2005 Year ended 30 June 2004 Domestic: 23,257,000 (incl Jetstar) 20,965,000 (incl Jetstar) International: 9,401,000 (incl Australian Airlines) 9,111,000 (incl Australian Airlines) Total: 32,658,000 30,076,000 RPKs*: 86,986,000 81,276,000 ASKs**: 114,003,000 104,200,000 Average Aircraft utilisation: 10.3 hrs per day 9.9 hrs per day * Revenue Passenger Kilometres (RPKs - the number of paying passengers carried, multiplied by the number of kilometres flown) ** Available Seat Kilometres (ASKs - the number of seats available for passengers, multiplied by the number of kilometres flown) FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE QANTAS GROUP In the year ended 30 June 2005, Qantas recorded a profit before tax of A$1,027.2 million, up A$62.6 million or 6.5 per cent on the previous year. Net profit after tax of A$763.6 million was 17.8 per cent up 2005-12-03T02:07:20-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Australian-Company-Report-28150.aspx Made In China In the Article Made In China, John S. McClenahen it is made apparent that much of international business will pass through the People's Republic at one point or another. Many of the world's premier corporations and manufacturing have invested in the People's Republic at some level. By producing a year-to-year gross domestic product that exceeds 8% increases, the People's Republic is able to boast and show, they will have positive economic growth in years to come. While North America copes with the aftermath of terroristic attacks, the economy has declined into a recession forcing many investors elsewhere; such as China. McClenahen refers to China as the "Best Business Climate," for the simple reason of China becoming a web of strategic mutually beneficial relationships. Many businesses are feeding off each other which has lead to be extremely attractive to additional manufacturers who are interested in generating import and export revenues. China's solid increase in economic growth has over the years and years to come has laid the foreground for an exceptional manufacturing site. Already producing a majority of the world's cellular phones and accessories, web development equipment, and electronic devices the People's Republic has no choice but to explode into a manufacturing icon. Many US based organizations have become upset with the current volatile economic status that has come to be, in the wake of the September 11th tragedy, as well as the Enron scandal that has now out in the open. A majority of investors have become wary of their investments due to the instability of September 11th and the trustworthiness of accounting methods used in larger corporations. Investors have backed out, and stocks some stocks have plummeted leaving others to find new sources of investment. This is where the People's Republic fits tremendously with "The Perfect Business Climate." The People's Republic is considered to be the "The Perfect Business Climate" for more than just one reason. A coastal arc of enterprises has developed from Shanghai extending to the Guandong province with companies that manufacture high quality products to be sold globally. Another reason for all of this industrialization of China is the constant supply of entrepreneurial and technical talents that are produced in the surrounding universities. It becomes very easy for larger more successful companies to attract new levels of engineering and technical coming directly out of schooling. This also makes for an efficient work force, students who 2005-10-02T17:38:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Made-In-China-28038.aspx Product Launch Introduction: The basic tools of marketing assist in the success of any company. The use of marketing audits and SWOT analysis allows the company to segment and target consumers on the grounds of age, gender, religion, taste etc. Marketing research enables a company to gather, record and analyse information about these consumers. Ultimately a company must understand the needs and wants of their target audience to ensure customer satisfaction and expectation is met or exceeded. Through the use of marketing objectives and tactics employed through the generation of a solid marketing mix customer satisfaction should be achieved. Company Objectives: To cover start up costs sales of $540,000 in the first operating year need to be achieved. This involves having a minimum of 25 customers per hour spending a minimum of $5 dollars per visit. The outlet will open from 10:30am to 10:30pm. The product, price, promotion and place will all reflect this objective. The frequency of customer visits will be high, particular attention being paid to customer loyalty. This will be achieved through impeccable customer service, product/brand identity, and a suitable promotional mix - offering frequent visit discounts and sales promotions. Market research and PEST analysis will be conducted and information gathered. Being a “first of a kind” outlet will influence the company into researching the local Singaporeans reaction and ability to relate to the Turkish perception. Product and brand names would have to be modern and suggest a modern image. The main products will be traditional Turkish Cakes and pastries; however, there would be a number of additional products sold to cater for different ages and tastes. Marketing Audit During the initial phases it is critical to conduct a market audit. We have to consider consumers competitors, suppliers and distributors. The best way to analyse a market is through marketing research. The systematic gathering, recording and analyzing of data about a market problem is the best way to get in touch with the needs and wants of the consumer. The marketing research conducted by our company will be simplistic and low cost and would be used as an effective target audience tool. The main objectives would be to establish; who is my customer? What are my customers purchasing habits? What does the customer think of my products? Who are my competitors and is my product priced correctly? The use of primary and secondary data will be 2005-09-25T04:57:35-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Product-Launch--28023.aspx Definition: The purchase by a listed company of its own shares either in the open market or by tender offers. Sometimes a company has surplus funds that it does not need for its operations. It can use those funds to expand its operations (e.g. buy new businesses) or it can distribute them to stockholders. One-way of distributing funds to shareholders is to have a share buy back, wherein the company buys back some of its shares from existing stockholders. COMPANIES DO IT FOR FIVE REASONS: • To increase the share price • To rationalise the capital structure - the company believes it can sustain a higher debt-equity ratio • To substitute the dividend payouts with share repurchases (because capital gains may be taxed at lower rate than dividend income) • To prevent the dilution of earnings caused, for example, by the issue of new shares to meet the exercise of stock option grants • To deploy excess cash flow and return it to shareholders • A company normally buys back shares when it feels the stock is undervalued, or when it has enough cash to reward investors by purchasing the shares at a price higher than the market value. EXAMPLE OF A SHARE BUY-BACK Company A has 100 shares issued and makes a profit of $50. This means a shareholder is getting a return of 50 cents a share ($50/100). This is the Earnings per Share or EPS. If the share sells on the stock exchange for 15 times its EPS, a share has a value of $7.50. Suppose that the company buy back 25 shares. A shareholder who retains their shares now earns 67 cents ($50/75) on each share held. If the share sells on the stock exchange for 15 times its EPS, a share has a value of $10. WHEN A COMPANY SHOULD BUY BACK SHARES So a company can add value to its shares by buying some of them back: a. Where it has surplus funds; b. Where it can buy them back at a price below intrinsic value. DON'T BUY BUYBACKS BLINDLY: FOR INVESTORS • Often there is at least a short-term up tick in the stock price after a buyback announcement, and certainly there is often a bounce up after the buyback itself is actually accomplished. So, some companies might like to divert attention away from a revenue problem by being able to show an increase in the stock price. Why would there be such an increase? Because a company usually 2005-09-20T05:59:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Share-Buy-Backs-28006.aspx Statistics: It is said that black money in India accounts for 20 % of GDP. If this is true, then black money generated every year must be around Rs 400,000 crore or $ 80 billion. This is a huge amount, more than the entire budget of the government at the Centre. We have a government that spends about Rs 350,000 crore a year, most of it on itself, and asks for accounts of every paisa. On the other side, we have black money worth Rs 400,000 crore every year, which is just guesswork, and there are no accounts. This money goes into property, which is why real estate prices are so high, and of course five-star hotels. If the government could have all this money, or even a small fraction, there would be no need for revenue or fiscal deficits, and no need for huge borrowings to make two ends meet. How big is $ 100 billion? It is bigger than you think. It is worth Rs 500,000 crore, which makes it bigger than the central budget. It is more than twice our annual exports. It is equivalent to 30 times what Enron is supposed to have invested on its Dabhol project. It is more than what the US government is expected to pay those who have suffered from the September 11th smash. And, if you must know, it is a fifth of our annual GDP, which is itself a big figure. Introduction: The CBDT is hopeful of collecting more than Rs 7,000 crore (Rs 70 billion) as income tax area, the target indicated by Finance Minister P Chidambaram for the current financial year. The board has already collected Rs 3,400 crore (Rs 34 billion) during the first six months of the current fiscal year, compared to Rs 2,700 crore (Rs 27 billion) in the same period a year earlier. Finance Minister P Chidambaram's Budget speech for 2004-05 shows there were only 27 million taxpayers in the country on the date of the presentation of the Budget. This indicates the tax evasion rampant in the country. The economy keeps growing and so does the deficit, while the revenues do not increase in the same proportion as the economy grows. There could be a number of reasons for the shortfall, which may vary from year to year like recession in the industrial sector or shortfall in agricultural production. But one factor that has been constant 2005-09-20T05:52:55-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Black-Market-and-The-Indian-Economy-28005.aspx WHAT IS OUTSOURCING? The idea of outsourcing has its roots in the 'competitive advantage' theory propagated by Adam Smith in his book 'The Wealth of Nations' which was published in 1776. Over the years, the meaning of the term 'outsourcing' has undergone a sea change. What started off as the shifting of manufacturing to countries providing cheap labour during the Industrial Revolution, has taken on a new connotation in today's scenario. In a world where IT has become the backbone of businesses worldwide, 'outsourcing' is the process through which one company hands over part of its work to another company, making it responsible for the design and implementation of the business process under strict guidelines regarding requirements and specifications from the outsourcing company. The key to this definition is the aspect of transfer of control. This definition differentiates outsourcing from business relationships in which the buyer retains control of the process or, in other words, tells the supplier how to do the work. It is the transfer of ownership that defines outsourcing and often makes it such a challenging, painful process. In outsourcing, the buyer does not instruct the supplier how to perform its task but, instead, focuses on communicating what results it wants to buy; it leaves the process of accomplishing those results to the supplier. There are two principal types of outsourcing:  Traditional outsourcing: - In "traditional" outsourcing, employees of an enterprise cease to perform the same jobs to the enterprise. Rather, tasks are identified that need to be performed, and the employees are normally hired by the service provider. For example, an information technology outsourcing may include a transfer of responsibility for management of data centers and networks (LAN, WAN, and telecommunications). In the field of facilities management, individuals acting as property managers might become employees of a facilities management company.  Greenfield outsourcing: - In "greenfield" outsourcing, the enterprise changes its business processes without any hiring of personnel by the service provider. For example, the enterprise might hire a startup company to provide a new service, such as wireless remote computing, that was not previously managed internally. This brings us to the areas of outsourcing. Outsourcing takes place in the following three main fields:  Business Process Outsourcing: - It aims at providing optimal performance in critical enterprise processes. It provides industry-specific as well as cross-industry solutions, enabling clients to focus on core competencies and move to a higher level 2005-09-20T05:49:29-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Outsourcing-28004.aspx Introduction: History of Coca-Cola (Coke): Coca-Cola was formulated by John S.Pemberton, originally as a cocawine called Pemberton’s French Wine Coca, and originally sold as a patent medicine for five cents a glass at soda fountains, which were popular in America due to a contemporary view that soda water was good for your health. Coca-Cola is the trademarked name, registered in 1893, for a popular soft drink sold in stores, restaurants and vending machines around the world. History of Pepsi: Caleb Bradham, a New Bern, North Carolina pharmacist, renamed "Brad's Drink," a carbonated soft drink he had created to serve his drugstore's fountain customers. The new name, Pepsi-Cola, was first used on August 28, 13 years after Coca-Cola. In 1902 Bradham applied for a trademark to the U.S. Patent Office, issued stock and began selling Pepsi syrup. By 1923, Pepsi-Cola Company was declared bankrupt and its assets were sold to a North Carolina concern, Craven Holding Corporation, for $30,000. Roy C. Megargel, a Wall Street broker, bought the Pepsi trademark, business and goodwill from Craven Holding Corporation for $35,000, forming the Pepsi-Cola Corporation and in 1932 the trademark was registered in Argentina. The beginning of the Cola war: 1975 heralded the ‘Pepsi Challenge’, a landmark marketing strategy, which convinced millions of consumers that the taste of Pepsi was superior to Coke. Simultaneously, Pepsi Light, with a distinctive lemon taste, was introduced as an alternative to traditional diet colas. In 1983 Coke launched aspartame/saccharin blend Diet Coke. In response in 1989 Pepsi-Cola introduced an exciting new flavor, Wild Cherry Pepsi. Thus Diet Pepsi's 'The Other Challenge' campaign was based around a 54-46% lead over Diet Coke in independently researched taste tests in Australia. It was only in 1996 that Pepsi unveiled a revolutionary 'blue' look worldwide 'to transform the image and attitude' of one of the world's best-known brands. 'Pepsi Blue represents a quantum leap into the future and redefines how the Cola Wars will be fought and won in the 21st Century.' Purpose of the case study: Control of market share is the key issue in this case study. The situation is both Coke and Pepsi are trying to gain market share in this beverage market, which is valued at over $30 billion a year. Just how is this done in such a competitive market is the underlying issue. The facts are that each company is coming up with new products and ideas in order to increase their 2005-09-20T05:45:27-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Pepsi-Vs-Coke-Saga-28003.aspx Introduction: This case talks about the latest trend of mergers and acquisitions and the ensuing fallout. The concern here is about the $14 billion merger of PepsiCo and Quaker Oats. After a long delay with regards to granting permission for this merger, the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) finally gave the go ahead after it realized that there was a split in the opinion of its members. 50 percent of the members voted in favour and the rest against the decision for the merger. This committee was set up to investigate the fairness of the deal with respect to the marketing principles commonly followed. Due to the split in decision, the entire investigation was called off, allowing the deal to proceed. FTC staff had objected to this merger since they believed that this kind of merger would kill competition in the sports drink market segment. This would lead to an almost monopolistic scenario and give PepsiCo the overriding authority in cutting deals with convenience stores. This deal, under the able leadership of Steve Reinemund, will create a formidable position of PepsiCo in the drinks and fast food segment. This would push the limit of the revenues to over $25 billions. This merger would mean that Gatorade, one of the leading sports drink, would come under the PepsiCo banner and thus give PepsiCo the leading edge especially over Coco-Cola, in the non carbonated drink segment. This is because Coco-Cola’s PowerAde, a non-carbonated drink aimed at the sports segment has only 15% of the market share while Gatorade has over 80% of the share. The deal would also consolidate PepsiCo’s position in the ready-to-eat food segment. Quaker’s grain-based snacks and cereals like ‘Life’ and ‘Cap’n Crunch’ will now come under the Frito-Lay banner thus introducing more variety. Analysis: The case is definitely one of acquisitions and mergers. This case highlights the business strategies and tactics employed by big corporate houses to kill competition. This case also depicts the importance antitrust laws and focuses on their role in protecting consumer rights. The main reason as to the emergence of these laws is the existence of monopolies and their harmful effects on the society as a whole. Before we proceed with the analysis of the case we need to know what monopoly is all about. Monopoly: It can be defined as any condition which gives individual sellers, or groups of sellers acting as a unit; some measure of direct control over 2005-09-20T05:40:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Pepsico-Quaker-Merger-28002.aspx Campbell Soup Company 1. Describe Campbell Soup's corporate strategy under Gordon McGovern's tenure. What key changes did David Johnson make? What about Dale Morrison? Joseph Campbell founded Campbell Soup Company in 1869. They are considered a leader in their industry. They employ over 24,500 people and have revenues around 6 billion. Currently they have over 2000 products on the market. Over the years they have diversified into a number of businesses, however soup has been its core business. Since 1980, Campbell Soup Company has undergone three different strategies under three different CEOs who brought their own agenda in order to build value for the company and its shareholders. Gordon McGovern took over as CEO in 1980. Immediately upon assuming his new position he began initiating changes in the century-old company. Under McGovern, Campbell's strategic focus was on developing and introducing new products, and expansion of the business portfolio through acquisitions. He wanted his employees to be creative and have a willingness to experiment. He encouraged entrepreneurial risk, by decentralizing Campbell's management and rewarding employees who showed these traits. He also had a strong focus on the consumer. He expected his employees be knowledgeable in the areas that were important to the consumer. McGovern organized the business into six different divisions. They were Campbell U.S., Pepperidge Farm, Vlasic Foods, Mrs. Paul's Kitchens, Other United States, and International. He set 4 specific key performance targets that he wanted to reach - a 15 percent annual increase in earnings, a 5 percent increase in volume, a 5 percent increase in sales revenue, and a 18 percent return on equity. Unfortunately for McGovern his strategy had flaws, and he did not met his performance targets. McGovern was experiencing a lot of pressure to resign and eventually did in 1989. Campbell's new CEO was David Johnson. He took office in January of 1990 and took a different approach then Gordon McGovern. "His first priority was crafting a new strategy for Campbell that would grow earnings and win the confidence of the Dorrance heirs" (436). He wanted to boost the company's performance quickly to discourage a takeover. He set new key performance targets - 20 percent earnings growth, 20 percent return on investments, and 20 percent return on assets. "Johnson disagreed with McGovern's view that Campbell's growth should come primarily from the acquisitions of small, 2005-09-11T06:24:35-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Campbell-Soup-Company-27953.aspx A New Mandate For Human Resources Human Resources have never been more necessary. The competitive forces that we face today and will continue to face in the future demand organizational excellence. To achieve this excellence by focusing on learning, quality, teamwork, and reengineering are driven by the way organizations get things done and how employees are treated. To achieve this excellence we look at the work of Human Resources. By designing an entirely new role and agenda that results in enriching the organization’s value to customers, investors and employees, HR can help deliver organizational excellence by helping line managers and seniors move planning from the conference room to the market place, by becoming an expert in the way work is organized and executed, they should be a representative for the employees and finally by helping the organization improve their capacity for change. The responsibility for transforming the role of HR belongs to the CEO and to every line manager. HR will help organizations meet competitive challenges such as globalization, profitability through growth, technology, intellectual capital, and the greatest competitive challenge companies face, adjusting to nonstop change. HR’s new role would be able to quickly turn strategy into action; to manage processes intelligently and efficiently; to maximize employee contribution and commitment; and to create the conditions for seamless change. HR should also become a partner in strategy executions by impelling and guiding serious discussions of how the company should be organized to carry out its strategy. Creating the conditions for this discussion involves four steps. First HR would define an organizational architecture by identifying the company’s way of doing business. Next HR must be accountable for conducting an organizational audit. The third role for HR as a strategic partner is to identify methods for renovating the parts of the organizational architecture that need it. Fourth and finally, HR must take stock of its own work and set clear priorities. In their new role as administrative experts they will need to shed their traditional image and still make sure all routine work for the company is done well. HR must be held accountable for ensuring that employees feel committed to the organization and contribute fully. They must take responsibility for orienting and training line management about the importance of 2005-09-09T09:46:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-New-Mandate-For-Human-Resources-27947.aspx Why is organizational diversity important? Historically, diversity in the workplace has been recognized as an employment equity issue. Now, however, diversity in the workplace is being recognized as a benefit that will contribute to an organization’s bottom line. Increased employee and customer satisfaction end up as increased productivity, all of which are measurable outcomes (Goff, 1998). Diversity goes beyond employment equity to nurturing an environment that values the differences and maximizes the potential of all employees, one that stimulates employee creativity and innovativeness (U.S. Merit Systems Protection Board (U.S. MSPB), 1993). To create an organizational culture that supports workforce diversity involves several important elements. These elements include a needs analysis, administrative and management support and commitment, education and training, culture and management systems changes and continuous follow-up and evaluation. Needs Analysis In many of my resources, a needs analysis was the second crucial element after senior management support and commitment. I feel a needs analysis should be prepared first to provide information to senior management in sequestering their support as well as to adequately determine workforce and organizational needs for creating a diverse workplace. First, find out what employees are concerned about. Most often used for this are focus groups and surveys. The needs and expectations of a diverse workforce can vary by organizational and functional levels, location, ethnicity, and gender (Baytos and Delatte, 1993). Second, determine the needs of the organization. By asking certain questions, an organization can determine its needs based on its culture and resources (U.S. MSPB, 1993). Does the organization have trouble retaining employees who would add to its diversity? In an organization with diversity, which, if any, areas of the workforce are being treated inappropriately? Has the organization impressed upon its leaders and managers the benefits that come from managing diversity appropriately? By using a survey that focuses on these questions you can ascertain where administration and management feel the organization presently is regarding diversity. Administrative and Management Commitment and Support Administrative and management support is critical for diversity change efforts. An important role for senior management is to provide leadership through development of a vision and goals for a diverse workplace (Lapid-Bogda, 1992). To gain support from administration you need to directly link diversity to the business. Be specific as to where the diversity issues lie. Are they employee or customer issues? Or both? Provide data regarding the diversity opportunities in the marketplace, workforce and 2005-09-09T09:46:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Why-is-organizational-diversity-important-27946.aspx Jones Blair - Central Problem as Regional Paint Manufacturer Jones Blair is a regional paint manufacturer that has to compete in a mature market (sales growth are expected to be the general rate of inflation) and also very concentrated, since the seven major producers account for upwards of 60 percent of sales. Therefore, in this market context, Jones Blair will need to increase its sales in volume, but keep its profit margin. The strategies to be considered in this case can be based on: consumer segmentation, targeting and managing marketing mix. Key Issues Recent research indicated that do-it-yourself painters do not care much about the brand and, consequently, about the quality of the paint (brand reputation was the 4th key criteria mentioned by the buyers to choose a covering) and it has become a commodity for this kind of consumers. Also, the company has been facing strong environmental pressure due to new regulations about the emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). It is necessary for the company to invest in R&D and it is also likely that the company will not see its costs of production decrease due to the activities of R&D. Alternative Courses of Action The market for do-it-yourself consumers is forecasted to reach US$ 5.74 billion by the year 2003 (see appendix 2) and it seems to be the best segment for Jones Blair to focus its resources on, since it represents 90 percent of non-contractor-related volume outside DFW area and 70 percent in DFW. The company’s most important market is Dallas-Fort Worth, which reaches 60-67 percent of total sales in USD within the years 1992-1996 (Appendix 1). Nevertheless, this percentage has been declining throughout the years, on a decreasing average basis of 1.43 percent per year (Appendix 1). The market in DFW is getting more competitive and in Jones Blair’s outlets there has been a decline in gallonage volume. Nevertheless, non-DFW outlets historically have grown in gallonage volume sales, which means that consumers in DFW area seem to be more price sensitive than outside this area. Recommendations Jones Blair will need to play up strength on distribution. This also means that they could expand their business into other areas. It is likely to be more profitable and successful to the company to sell to consumers located outside DFW area in this case. As the Vice President of Sales figured, it will cost $60,000 per year 2005-09-03T05:50:56-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Jones-Blair-Central-Problem-as-Regional-Paint-Manufacturer-27873.aspx Ethics And Its Applicability Roots of Public Relations Contemporary public relations is a twentieth-century phenomenon that evolved from the press gentry of the 1800s. These old-time press agents played upon the credulity of the public in its desire to be entertained, whether or not they were deceived. Advertisements and press releases were often exaggerated to the point of being complete falsifications. In promoting an attraction, press agents dropped multitudes of tickets on the newspaper editors desk along with the releases. Voluminous publicity for the attraction usually resulted, and reporters, editors, and their families flocked to the free entertainment with scant regard for any ethical constraints (Wilcox, Ault, & Agee 37). One man, Phineas T. Barnum, exemplified such a press agent to the extreme. Barnum is considered the master of the pseudoevent, the planned event that occurs primarily for the purpose of being reportedsimilar to the special events held by public relations practitioners of today. However, modern-day practitioners like to draw the line of comparison between Barnum and themselves at this point. This hardheaded businessman used deception and hoax in his operations and in his publicity and advertising. Nevertheless, a public thirsting for entertainment permitted his exaggerations and people were amazed by the wonders he produced (Wilcox, Ault, & Agee 38). For example, Joice Heath was a slave who claimed to be 161 years old and said she had been George Washingtons nurse. Barnum produced a stained birth certificate as evidence for the public, but after she died, her autopsy disclosed that she was far younger. On the same note, Jumbo, the worlds largest elephant, was brought by Barnum from England with enormous publicity. Posters and pamphlets featuring inflated prose exaggerated the animals size (Wilcox, Ault, & Agee 38). Roots such as these have created the skepticism with which the public views the field of public relations. Furthermore, it is the duty of practitioners to create positive images for businesses and organizations. Therefore, other, more recent issues have augmented Americans mistrust in the business world in general, including the Watergate Affair and the business-and-government-related scandals of the 1980s, such as the near collapse of the savings and loan industry. The American public is demanding higher ethical practices from business firms and organizations than it did in the past (Wilcox, Ault, & Agee 116). How Public Relations Practitioners are Perceived Despite pressure from the public, very little empirical evidence on 2005-08-31T22:15:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ethics-And-Its-Applicability-27856.aspx "Pricing" - The element taken for granted in Marketing Despite the importance of effective pricing for marketing success, many organisations only pay lip service to same. The reasons could be, (a) A lack of understanding, of the true strategic value of sound pricing strategy. (b) The overreliance on finance personnel, to independently formulate pricing policy and strategies. (c) The lack of financial/costing knowledge on the part of marketers. Whatever the reasons may be, it is time that a professional integrated approach be taken towards pricing policy and strategy. Basically, pricing decisions should not be left to finance personnel alone. Marketing personnel should be actively involved in the process as well. Pricing in a Sri Lankan context Sri Lankans are very price sensitive, in most purchases. The reason are obvious, considering the fact that the country is very much in need of development. The most important facet in Sri Lanka, is the investment required in purchasing products and services. In other words, how many rupees need to be tendered. As against the investment required, Sri Lankans in a majority of instances do not compare the product volume purchased. (Ex. litres, grammage). This is an important aspect for Sri Lankan marketers to note. Always consider the price point, from an investment perspective, not from a volume/content perspective alone. Try and marry these two aspects, as closely as possible. Another aspect is that Sri Lankans, are extremely "value conscious". (Value for money). They demand greater value, for every rupee spent! As such, providing value through astute pricing, is a major ingredient for success. Of course in inflationary environments, it is not an easy task. A careful balance between the value proposition and investment, has to be met. Pricing strategies in Sri Lanka, are based mainly on cost/mark-up considerations. There are inward factors and do not reflect the realities of the marketplace. As such, the need in Sri Lanka, is for market focused pricing strategies, given the competitive intensities prevailing in the global environment. Why is it important to "integrate" pricing decisions, together with other elements of the marketing mix? Pricing decisions cannot be taken in isolation. They need to be integrated with the other elements of the marketing mix. Not to do so, could lead to ineffective marketing and a wastage of resources. Take for example, a brand such 2005-08-31T22:10:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/-quot-Pricing-quot-The-element-taken-for-granted-in-Marke-27855.aspx The Glory of being a Cashier I. Nature of the work: Basically any place that sells things needs someone to make the exchange of goods or services for cash. A cashier is this person. It is the cashier’s job to make sure the consumer gets the product or service they wish to purchase. It is also the cashier’s job to ensure that the correct amount of tender is supplied and stored safely in a cash register. The cash register is a tool used by most cashiers to help them keep the incoming cash organized. Most larger operations now use scanners, which allow merchandise to be rung up by a cashier much quicker than other manual methods. Many work sites use one or more cashiers. Some examples of places where a cashier might be found are; fast food restaurants, grocery stores, gas stations, department stores, and many other locations you visit regularly. The basic exchange between consumer and cashier usually follows the subsequent format; v All items, which the customer wishes to purchase, are presented to the cashier. v The customer and cashier then exchange pleasantries as the cashier proceeds to, either scan or manually enter identification into the cash register. v Next if necessary a bagger or the cashier themselves bags the customers merchandise in either paper or plastic. v The cashier to the customer then relates the total due for the goods. v Hopefully, the customer then renders the cash due, either by credit card, cheque, or good old dollars. v The cashier then returns to the customer any change due. v The cashier is usually also responsible for supplying the customer a record of the sale, called a receipt. v Finally in parting the cashier and customer say the “Have a nice day’s.” As it can plainly be seen cashiers are a vital link in America’s capitalistic economy. II. Qualifications: Generally speaking Cashier is a job not controlled by age or gender restrictions. For example at my particular place of employment the ages of the cashiers range from 16 to 68. To be a cashier a person must simply have some human relation skills. If someone has a temper control problem this may not be the job for him or her, as it deals with people on a pretty one 2005-08-31T20:03:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Glory-of-being-a-Cashier-27836.aspx Self Image in a Business Realm Significance is something of importance to a person. The most significant event of my life was moving out of my parents’ house into my own apartment, because the move has taught me responsibility, how to deal with uncertainty, and how to find work in a new place. These are all very important things in life that a person should learn. I am glad that I got to learn them early so that I would not be so dependent on my parents. Responsibility is one of the most important lessons to learn in life. Since July, when I moved out of my parents’ home, I have learned a little about responsibility. One responsibility I have learned is how to manage my own money. When I lived at home, I went shopping every weekend. I had a job, but I didn’t have anything to pay for. Once I moved into my apartment, I had to stop shopping every weekend, and learn how to save my money for the bills that I had to pay. I had rent, phone bills, utility bills, cable bills, and washer and dryer rental, not to mention all of the deposits and new things I had to buy for my new home. I also had to learn how to take care of a pet. My roommate and I have a Rottwieller named Kita. She weighs 110 pounds. So her food is very expensive. We also have to take her walking, and outside to use the bathroom, so we’ve really learned that taking care of a pet is like having a child. We have to take her t0p the vet when she gets sick; we have to bathe her when she gets dirt, and we have to clean up after her. It’s a job all by itself, but these responsibilities aren’t as hard as taking care of myself. This is difficult also. By now I have learned not to wash colors with whites! It’s also a job to get myself up in the morning to go to school, or to work. I guess I have learned a little about how the real world works. There were also uncertainties to moving out. For the first week I was somewhat homesick. 2005-08-31T07:51:01-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Self-Image-in-a-Business-Realm-27825.aspx Donovan Glass - Unions Relevancy in Todays Society and Their History Following the lead of Britain from where many of the original settlers came, workers in various occupations banded together to form unions. Shipwriters, boatbuilders, tailors, bakers and carpeteners were among the first craft unions form in Australia before 1848. By forming an association workers could obtain better wages and working conditions. However the employers wanted the highest profit margins so wished to keep wages low and spend little money on the working environment. The law of supply and demand in the labour market often determined which group was dominant. A third factor in the balance in Australia was the government. A successful strike by newspaper workers in 1829 for better wages and conditions resulted in the Masters and Servants Act being implemented which discriminated against the workers, who could be gaoled for minor revolts. Early in the colony, skilled labours were in short supply but in the 1840's after active promotion of emigrants by Britain this improved and a depression forced wages down and jobs were lost. With the discovery of gold, prices and wages rose, labour was scare and licenses imposed on miners and the Eureka incident occurred. Bust and boom economic conditions parolled surges recessions for unionism over the next few decades. The industrial union formed in the 1880's as a grouping of workers within an industry and across colonial and the Shearers Union and small bush wokrers unions becme the Australian Workers Union. Unions then looked to represent workers in Governments and the 1890's major strikes were held and the Labour Party was formed. With coming of Federation compulsory arbitration - settling of disputes between employer and employee by a third party - encouraged unionism, with unions representing the workers. The labour market and demand for goods has been influenced by workd wars, depressions and recessions. In the 1980's 'national reconciliation' initiated by the Government, aimed at resolving some of the conflict between workers and employers. Strong leaders among workers of various occupations over the last two centuries, have been gaoled, sometimes killed, starved, abused, seen their families suffer for better working conditions. At the beginning of the industrial revolution, employers knew their workers and felt responsible for them. After the industrial revolution gained momentum they employed more people and lost empathy for their staff. Working conditions were 12 - 14 hours, without breaks, child labour was employed, accidents were rife and wages were 2005-08-28T09:13:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Donovan-Glass-Unions-Relevancy-in-Todays-Society-27807.aspx Competition in the U.S. Automotive Retailing Industry Retail establishments in the automotive industry primarily engage in the retail sales of new or used automobiles. These establishments often maintain repair departments, and carry stocks of replacement parts, including tires, batteries, and automotive accessories. The economic and business characteristics of the automotive retail industry starts with their marketing and distribution channels. Nationwide, the auto industry retailers generate around 533 billion dollars each year. Developed largely before World War II, the current automotive industry was structured when demand was well above supply. Presently, over capacity in combination with demands for an innovative blend of products and services is swaying the industry into consolidation. For example, the purchasing alliance between Ford, GM, and DaimlerChrysler has formed the world’s leading business-to-business Internet company in terms of scale of operation and revenue. This online enterprise brings together all of their suppliers, streamlining their entire chain supply. These types of activities represent a significant percent of the value of a new vehicle and are an important potential source of cost savings. The changes in this area reflect a shift from capital-intensive-operations (involving inventory investment) to information-intensive-operations (providing the right vehicle at the right time). This shift is leading to the development of the flexible and highly entrepreneurial structures as mentioned above. The U.S. is a highly diverse market consisting of regional sub markets. Local environments, regional characteristics, economics, and lifestyle all come into play. In the past, mass produced vehicles was an accepted practice in the automotive retail industry. Today, however, mass produced automotive models are not working in the American market. In response to the shift in consumer preferences, the variety of products supplied by the automotive industry has risen dramatically. For example, in one target market, lifestyle changes shifted from a one person per family wage earner 2005-08-28T08:59:39-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Competition-in-the-U_S_-Automotive-Retailing-Industry-27802.aspx Business Time From a business perspective, working under government contracts can be a very lucrative proposition. In general, a stream of orders keep coming in, revenue increases and the company grows in the aggregate. The obvious downfalls to working in this manner is both higher quality expected as well as the extensive research and documentation required for government contracts. If a part fails to perform correctly it can cause minor glitches as well as problems that can carry serious repercussions, such as in the National Semiconductor case. When both the culpable component and company are found, the question arises of how extensive these repercussions should be. Is the company as an entity liable or do you look into individual employees within that company? From an ethical perspective one would have to look at the mitigating factors of both the employees and their superiors along with the role of others in the failure of these components. Next you would have to analyze the final ruling from a corporate perspective and then we must examine the macro issue of corporate responsibility in order to attempt to find a resolution for cases like these. The first mitigating factor involved in the National Semiconductor case is the uncertainty, on the part of the employees, on the duties that they were assigned. It is plausible that during the testing procedure, an employee couldnt distinguish which parts they were to test under government standards and commercial standards. In some cases they might have even been misinformed on the final consumers of the products that they tested. In fact, ignorance on the part of the employees would fully excuse them from any moral responsibility for any damage that may result from their work. Whether it is decided that an employees is fully excused, or is given some moral responsibility, would have to be looked at on an individual basis. The second mitigating factor is the duress or threats that an employee might suffer if they do not follow through with their assignment. After the bogus testing was completed in the National Semiconductor labs, the documentation department also had to falsify documents stating that the parts had surpassed the governmental testing standards. From a legal and ethical standpoint, both the testers and the writers of the reports were merely acting as agents on direct orders from a superior. This was also the case when the plant in Singapore refused 2005-08-25T06:35:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Time-27776.aspx INDEX 1- INTRODUCTION 1 Task 1 2- WHY AUCTION ON LINE 2 3- TRADITIONAL AUCTION VS ON-LINE AUCTION 3 3.1 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES 4 3.1.1 TRUST SECURITY QUALITY 3.1.2 SOLUTION TO THE PROBLEMS 3.1.3 ADVANTGES 4. INTERNET SEGMENTATION (EBAY) 5 4.1 FROM SEGMENTATION TO COMUNITIES 5 Task 2 5-BUILDING BRANDS IN THE INTERNET 6 5.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN REAL AND VIRTUAL BRANDING 6 5.2 C.R.M. 9 5.3 LINKS 9 Task 3 6- RESULTS ES TEST 10 6.1 EBAY STRATEGY 10 6.1.1 HOW SUCCESFULL IT HAS BEEN 6.2 TEN STEPS IN THE NEW MARKETING 11 6.3 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR IMPROVEMENTS 11 6.3.1 DIFFERENTS BRANDS NAMES FOR LUXURY 6.3.2 LINKS WITH AUCTION HOUSES 6.3.3 NETWORK FOCUSED ORIENTATION 6.3.4 MARKET DEVELOPMENT INTO AFRICAN PRODUCTS 6.4 FUTURE OF THE COMPANY 14 7-APPENDIX 12 8- REFERENCES & BIBLIOGRAPHY 23 1-INTRODUCTION The company that I’ve chosen is Ebay .com, this company is the biggest auction company on line in the world, recently its trying to expand to Europe; with the take over of Ibazar (the bigest auction business in Europe), and to south America with the co-operation with Mercadolibre.com Despite of its only six years of live, Ebay is the biggest auction business in the world. But why? Which are the factors that have helped this enterprise to be the number one? What is its strategy? What are their expectations for the future? These are some of the question that I expect to answer in the next pages. TASK 1 2- WHY AUCTION ON-LINE There are many different profits brought by being on the line, this is well known for the company and each year more and more companies, start their business in the net. The nature of the business is very different, in the net we can find insurance companies, banks, travel agencies, book shops etc… But what is the reason for being on line? First of all the Internet allows the penetration in the market, that means that with the same product the enterprises can increase their customers in their current market. By the publicity customers services, marketing communications etc. Secondly we can see how the Internet allows the enterprise to go abroad, thanks to the Internet, the enterprises can commerce everywhere in the world. Thirdly we find the product development, Internet is helping the creation of new products and services, most of them concentrated in the information industry, as Tom Knight states in Virtual Business magazine “enterprises have to move from selling products to selling know how”. And the Internet is one of the best media to sell knowledge. Fourthly, the Internet allows the diversification; the enterprises can move to new markets and new products. These are the reasons that explain why most 2005-08-23T08:10:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Why-Ebay-is-Successful-27767.aspx Human Resource Management MODULE 1 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT DISCUSSION QUESTION 2 Staffing, training, compensation and performance management are important HRM functions. How can each of these functions help companies deal with meeting stakeholders’ needs? High-performance work system challenges? Global challenges? An important aspect of an organization’s business focus and direction towards achieving high levels of competency and competitiveness would depend very much upon their human resource management practices to contribute effectively towards profitability, quality, and other goals in line with the mission and vision of the company. Staffing, training, compensation and performance management are basically important tools in the human resources practices that shape the organization’s role in satisfying the needs of its stakeholders. Stakeholders of an organization comprise mainly of stockholders who will want to reap on their investments, customers whose wants and desires for high quality products or services are met, employees who want their jobs in the organization to be interesting with reasonable compensation and reward system and lastly, the community who would want the company to contribute and participate in activities and projects relating to the environmental issues. Common rules and procedures of human resource management must be adhered to by the organization which forms basic guidelines on its practices. Teamwork among lower levels of staff and the management should be created and maintained to assist in various angles that would deem necessary in eliminating communication breakdowns and foster better relationship among workers. The management should emphasize on good corporate culture in order to develop employees and create a positive and conducive work environment. High performance work systems are integrating employees’ talents and skills and technology in order to maximize them together to achieve the desired results. In order for an organization to achieve high competency levels and a competitive advantage through high performance work systems, the organization must first of all, invest in sufficient hands-on training to equip their staff force. In doing so, they would be able to identify the talents of their workforce and the areas of strength to later fit them into suitable roles. The organization must also maintain this through constant improvement process through incorporating technological standards. Continuous improvement in culture must be constantly maintained. As stated by Deming, people need to feel comfortable discussing problems and suggesting solutions. Managers need to work at breaking down barriers between departments so that interactive discussions can take place. 2005-08-23T07:56:37-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Human-Resource-Management-27763.aspx Origins Of Enterprise: Business Leadership In The Industrial Revolution Katrina Honeyman’s book is an impressive source of information about the rise of the entrepreneur in England at the beginning of the Industrial Revolution. Her main objective is to test the commonly-held view that was fueled by Samuel Smiles in his popular book, Self-Help, published in 1859, which held that men of humble means had “unprecedented opportunities. . . to attain the role of entrepreneur” (p. 10). She does not begin by outwardly denying this hypothesis or accepting it, but rather sets up a complex cross-section study of three industries -- lead mining, cotton, and lace – in order to test whether Samuel Smiles’ view holds true or not. Honeyman finds similar results in the origins of the entrepreneurs of the three industries studied. Although there were many opportunities to invest minimal capital in order to begin a business venture, especially in the lace industry, success was often short-lived if there were any profits made at all. Lead mining appears to have been the most difficult industry to enter as it was unpredictable and risky, thus making it difficult for the small man to gain the credit needed to purchase or even to rent the initial equipment required which was very costly. Also, the risky nature of lead mining caused a lag time between initial investment and eventual profits, therefore making a small investment less likely to sustain itself in the short term. Only the larger investors, Honeyman reports, were likely to achieve success because their large initial capital could sustain them through the lag time and into long-term financial gain. And indeed this is what her research shows. She also found that because the lead mining industry was so uncertain, many men used it as a “potentially lucrative ‘hobby’ rather than a means of subsistence” (p.51). In contrast with the expensive costs of beginning a lead mining business was the lace industry. Honeyman reports that there was a “fever” of investment in the industry from 1823-1826. However this “fever” eventually collapsed due to overproduction, and in the end the small man could not afford to stay in the business, some even regressing back the their initial position or worse depending on their losses. Investigation into the cotton industry provided similar results. Honeyman’s investigation in the three industries studied in her book included extensive research on the lives of the entrepreneurs, numbering 2005-08-21T07:41:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Origins-Of-Enterprise-Business-Leadership-In-The-Industrial-27755.aspx Sony Corporation Company Profile, History and Culture, and SWOT Executive Summery Sony's current financial difficulties are tied into its corporate culture which were stated over 30 years ago. With such a large multinational corporation, greater planning and more use of strategies should be pursued. Sony could start with the implementation of a new mission statement, with profit and benefits of the company tied more closely to everyday operations. Internally, the four forces, the management, the designers, the production and the marketing should achieve better communication and cooperation. Alliance and cooperation between competitors should also be actively sort after in order to create standards in new fields. Sony should aim at being the leader instead of being the maverick. As for cost cutting, Sony should seriously consider setting up operations in other Asian countries in order to take advantage of the cheap labour and the budding markets. Finally, diversification, instead of pursuing the fast changing and easily imitated consumer goods market, Sony should use its technological know-how for high-end business and office equipment. With SWOT analysis and Porter's competitive forces model, we can view that the market is much more competitive with less profit margins and lead-time for product innovation. The conclusion is that change is needed in Sony. However,even with strategirial and structure change, the Sony spirit of innovation should remain intact because that is what made Sony grow and would make it stay strong. Introduction The first thing that comes to peoples minds of the company and products of Sony is its high-technology-filled-with-gadgets electronic goods and innovation. It was also this innovation that make Sony the greatest company that started in post-war Japan. Sony has used its innovation in building markets out of thin air, created a multibillion, multinational electronic empire with products such as the transistor radio, the Trinitron, the Walk-in and the VTR. that changed everyday household lives forever. However, this consumer targeted quest for excellence and constant innovation instead of targeting mainly at profit also has a lot to do with current crisis Sony is facing - sales and profits are down or are slowing down, capital investment cost and R&D are climbing, competitors are moving in with copycats, the battle between VHS and Beta and the search for a smash hit product such as the Trinitron or the Walk-in. This volatility and emphasis (or gambling) on new products instead of concentrating on profit and loss statements have always 2005-08-15T08:12:24-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Sony-Company-Profile-History-and-Culture-and-SWOT-27662.aspx The Hospitality Industry The Food and Hospitality Industry has become one of the biggest employers in our state. It now has attained a much higher status in society and demands high standards of work from its employees. Employment opportunities are many, but eagerly sought by a vast majority of people. For this reason as in any other established business, interviews are conducted. Through these interviews, the interviewer looks for personal qualities and interpersonal skills in a prospective employee to fulfill the job requirements. One of the most important things that an employer looks for are personal qualities. These consist of: a keen attitude, a friendly disposition, neat appearance, a willingness to work, confidence, cleanliness, personal hygiene, deportment (efficient) and honesty, among the many others. Interpersonal skills basically include the ability to interact with people and using initiative to deal with problems which may arise if the customer is not satisfied. If interpersonal and personal skills are exercised then they will greatly contribute to a happy and successfully working environment. This can be accomplished by remembering to keep in mind the fundamental aspect of any catering establishment which is to "Always acknowledge that the customers are the most important people in the business, and nothing is more important than serving them." - An introduction to catering. Due to the fact that a large amount of job satisfaction can be found in the food and hospitality industry, jobs are very often sought after. Many who wish to enter the industry usually do so by gaining a apprenticeship . Apprenticeships in the hospitality industry usually last between 2.5 years to 4 years. These apprenticeships mainly consist of 'on the job training', combined with full time practical work experience, along with future training at TAFE. Apprenticeships are usually categorized into : bread making and baking, butchering and small goods making, cooking , pastry cooking and waiting. To gain a apprenticeship today in South Australia a person needs to be at least 15 years old. Also the applicant is required to have at least reached year 10, and to have a good grounding in basic mathematics. Apprenticeships are administered by the state government and before applying for one it is recommended that one registers their interest with a job centre. When a employer takes on a apprentice, there is a probationary period of three months before the contract is signed, this ensures that the employer will 2005-08-15T01:12:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Food-and-Hospitality-Industry-27651.aspx The S.E.C. - Protector of Honest Marketing The Securities and Exchange Commission’s, or commonly know as the S.E.C., primary objective is to try and protect all investors in the market of securities that may or not be as secure as say the type of investments that may be made through a bank; i.e. bonds, stocks, and other various securities investments. They develop, process, amend and enforce laws that keep companies, and the people that manage them, in line so that they are able to give clear and honest information to investors 2005-08-15T00:22:19-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-S_E_C_-Protector-of-Honest-Marketing-27635.aspx Motivating Employees in the Workplace Motivation is the willingness to exert high levels of effort toward organizational goals, conditioned by the effort's ability to satisfy some individual needs (Robbins, 168). For some business analysts, employee motivation is a good way to increase productivity in an organization. When people get motivated, they will have a reason to put more efforts on what they are doing. Motivation is a crucial management tool in lifting the organization's work force's ability. There are many different ways to motivate employees. Employers can motivate their workers as individuals, groups, teams, or the organization as a whole. Motivation takes forms like offering rewards, improving working conditions, or employee recognition. However, which approach should employers try? Team-based reward systems have been raised as an issue in work management areas. Many people prefer team-based reward systems to an individual approach. San Diego Business Journal, issued on Oct. 6, 1997, published an article titled "Team-Based Productivity Incentive System." This article summarized the ideas that supported the team-based approach. The author, Bob Harrington, opposed the individual reward system. As he stated, individual reward systems create unnecessary competition and reduce cooperation between employees. It also reduces creativity because employees will only do what is necessary to get rewarded. Moreover, Harrington said team-based incentives influence individuals to work well together and cooperate with one another. No longer are employees and management measured purely against financial information. Instead, outstanding performance is based on a combination of items that measure the strategic objectives of the corporation. This paper will see if the team-based incentive systems are the best approach for business environments as Harrington discussed. Medical insurance and educational opportunities, among others are all common benefits in compensation programs for many manufacturers. Many people argued that these benefits attract and retain employees, but have little to do with work performance. Some also believe that if these benefits are spread out among workers in general, these kinds of work incentives will not guarantee good performance. Well Pay vs. Sick Pay is an example of how an incentive program reinforces wrong behavior and reduces productivity. Manufacturers with incentive systems that reward employees for achievements and growth can increase their competitiveness and profitability in today's global market. Yes, it is true that organizations need to have incentive systems to satisfy their work force. Team-based incentive systems such as gain sharing, profit sharing, etc., become increasingly popular in work environments. 2005-08-15T00:12:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Essay-on-Motivating-Employees-in-the-Workplace-27630.aspx Analysis of marketing strategy of Suzuki Motor Company, Ltd. (Suzuki) Company Background: Michio Suzuki founded Suzuki Loom Works, a privately owned loom manufacturing company, in 1909 in Hamamatsu, Japan. In 1952, the company began manufacturing and marketing a 2-cycle, 36 cubic centimeter (cc) motorcycle, which became so popular that in 1954 the company introduced a second motorcycle and changed its name to Suzuki Motor Company, Ltd. (Suzuki).In 1985, American Suzuki opened its automotive division and was the first manufacturer in the United States compact utility Vehicle. SUZUKI'S MARKETING STRATEGY IN THE U.S. MARKET ENTRY STATEGY: Suzuki changes its policy many times according to the market requirements. At first they entered in the US market as exporter of a single product (only motor cycle) with pure vertical integration. In 1964 Suzuki began exporting motorcycles to the United States. It established a wholly owned subsidiary, U.S Suzuki Motor Company, Ltd., to serve as the exclusive importer and distributor of Suzuki motorcycles. Then it began to export multi products and out sources its one brand: In 1983, General Motors (GM) purchase 5% of Suzuki hand helped the company a subcompact car for the US market. The car name was Chevrolet Sprint, it was the first entry into the continental US automobile market. And it was introduced regional basis only in the West Coast. At last they decide to go for manufacturing in foreign land: GM's success with Sprint showed Suzuki that a market existed for its cars in the continental of United States. So the company planned to introduce several unique vehicles into the U.S market over time. Suzuki had no guarantee, how ever, the GM would be willing to market the vehicles. Therefore, Suzuki decided to establish its own presence in the US automobile industry. Japan's voluntary restrain agreement (VRA) quotas made it impossible for Suzuki to export any cars other than the Sprint to USA in future. So in 1985, Suzuki and GM began negotiations with the Canadian government to build a plant in Ontario that could produce approximately 200,000 subcompact cars per year. Suzuki management expected the plant to be on line by early 1989, and the company could then begin selling cars in the USA under its own name. But the US market was growing market and was very lubricated for both Japanese and other foreign competitors, and Suzuki managers believed that clutter might limit their success if they waited until 1989, they were convince that 2005-08-14T00:31:51-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Suzuki-Motor-Company-Market-Strategy-Analysis-27613.aspx Adolph Coors in the Brewing Industry The brewing industry in 1985 can be analyzed using Porter's five competitive forces: threat of new entrants, bargaining power of suppliers, bargaining power of buyers, substitutes and rivalry among existing competitors. All five competitive forces jointly determine the intensity of industry competition and profitability. Furthermore, the five forces narrow in on why the brewing industry became more concentrated and key features defining industry success. In the brewing industry, barriers to entry were high. Fixed costs increased as a percentage of revenue necessitating brewers to have higher production capacities/minimal efficient production scale to achieve economies of scale. This could be achieved by doubling brewery production, which decreased unit capital costs by 25 percent. In addition, high capital requirements existed since $35-$45 million was required in launch costs and advertising for a new brand. These financial requirements implied a competitive advantage for large brewing companies who were spending approximately $1200 million (about 10 percent of sales) in advertising in 1985. An entering firm had limited access to distribution channels as the wholesalers who served the largest brewers did not carry other brewer's beer. The bargaining power of suppliers is medium since the removal of price controls for aluminum led to sharp increase in can prices and therefore raised cost of packaging materials and for the brewers. Some companies, like Coors, reduced these costs by starting can recycling programs to decrease their dependence on new raw materials. Bargaining power of buyers was high as the independent wholesalers who purchased the beer, and sold and delivered to retail accounts earned low profits. The average return on sales for wholesalers had fallen from 3 percent in 1981 to 2.1 percent in 1984. In addition, the increasing production capacity, desire for companies to enter new markets and promote new products and cost reductions led to a 30 percent decrease in beer prices between 1960 and 1980. Pressures from substitute products was minimal as advertising affected consumers willingness to substitute among beers. Finally, the rivalry among existing competitors was high as the number of brewers making less than one million barrels per year decreased from 90 percent in 1959 to 45 percent in 1983. Furthermore, since the domestic beer consumption was flat, rivalry among brewers was intensified because any gains in sales by one brewer resulted at the expense of its competitor rather than through growth of the overall market. Hence, the industry 2005-08-14T00:27:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Adolph-Coors-in-the-Brewing-Industry-27612.aspx Yahoo Manages Its Human Resources Case: Yahoo Manages Its Human Resources I. Problem: How to Yahoo could select the right person for the right job? What kind of employees does Yahoo want to hire? II. Point of View: Consultant III. Objectives: 1. To be able to help Yahoo in managing its human resources in selecting the right person for the appropriate position. 2. To be able to assist and eliminate human resource problems at Yahoo especially in job descriptions/hiring and job discrepancies. IV. Areas of Consideration "h Internal Factors 1. The company lacks human resource management efficiency. Doesn't have the right time to do their jobs (proper working hours). 2. The company is too flat and there are job discrepancies within the organization. "h External Factors 1. Societal Trends 2. Local Laws and Regulations 3. Investors/Customers V. Alternative Courses of Actions: 1. Give the right and proper job description for the applicant of the company. Interview the applicant personally by the management (checking its records like medical, scholastics, academic and historical backgrounds). If ever hire Yahoo management should give the new employee the right job he applied for. Thus by doing this method the company eliminates job discrepancies 2. Give proper attention in the HR department; know more about the situation of every employee. In order for the management to know their problems and eliminate them. Then making the employees more effective and efficient. 3. Management must impose a working hours period for all the employees and initiate disciplinary actions for the ones who didn't follow the rules of the management. 4. Company must conduct training, seminars, employee get together with the management (Christmas party, beach party and acquaintance party for all both customers and employees). This actions results to better management employee relationships. 5. Company must increase its human resource management team. To have a more accurate decisions. VI. Recommendations: I highly recommend that the alternative courses of actions number 1 and 2 greatly benefits the company in assessing its Human Resource problems. By implementing the 1 and 4 the company has an increase chance to grow to even a bigger company. Satisfying not only customers needs but also employees. With training and seminars making the employees more equip in doing their jobs more efficiently and effectively. Giving the company profits and a good name, as good employee management company as a perception on both external and internal factors. VII. Conclusions: I therefore conclude that being a young company needs more 2005-08-14T00:25:59-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ho-w-Yahoo-Manages-Human-Resources-27611.aspx Globalization of Culture: Diversity or homogenizization? The relation between the transnational and domestic politics have always been a very important issue. According to Joseph S. Nye and Robert O. Keohane the attention was traditionally concentrated on relations between states. State were regarded as an basic units of action, as actors with purposes and power. But it is obvious that interactions among them do not take place in 'environmental vacuum'. They are effected by geography, the nature of the domestic politics, characteristic for every country and the technology. Now those well-known forces are seem to be not the only ones which have an influence on the relationship. The situation has changed with the consequences in appearing new factors, which often work without a governmental control. I am talking about for example the trade, personal contacts and communication. Non-state entities have become new actors in the international arena. They behavior have tangible and intangible effects on the domestic politics. There is no doubt that the world politics is changing. That is why the classic paradigm which assumes that the states are the only actors in world politics and that they act as units, require transformation. The reality is not corresponding to this model anymore. Firstly, in direct confrontation with transnational actors, national governments not always prevail. If they can do it, costs are often higher than benefits. Secondly, the impact of transnational politics significantly effects the 'high politics' of security or war. Finally, the influence of transnational relations has been always existed. 'Globalization' - a new buzz word come into being with incredible strength. "Globalization" is nowadays one of the most popular words. It is present everywhere in public discourse. We can hear it on TV news, in parliament' s debates, we can read it in journals. Amazingly far so widely use of this key-term, there is not appear to be any precise, widely-agreed definition of it. In every single instance the world "globalization" seems to have a different meaning in a different situation. I think, that everyone will agree with the claim that globalization is a huge, complex process that changes world in front of our eyes. It effects every sphere of our life- economical, political and social one. In this essay I would like to focus on one of the many dimensions of globalization, that is the globalization of culture. In my opinion it is one of the most important issues, that has 2005-08-14T00:09:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Globalization-of-Culture-Diversity-or-homogenizization-27609.aspx Short explanation of why brands have become a critical issue in product marketing Brand is defined as a "name, term, sign, symbol or design, or a combination of them intended to identify the goods and services of one seller or group of sellers. Therefore it makes sense to understand that branding is not about getting your target market to choose you over the competition, but it is about getting your prospects to see you as the only one that provides a solution to their problem. Branding is important because it builds relationships with consumers and is a guarantee that what they like about a product will be there every time Brands have become a critical issue in the marketing of products because it is everything you do to get your business known and to enhance its reputation. It's advertising. It putting your business name on your vehicle. It's sending out your invoice on an attractive letterhead or invoice form. It's an attractive logo. It's telling the guy in line at the supermarket what business your in. It's passing out your business card. If you do you branding right you will get referrals. People will look for you on the Internet. People will recognize your site when they find it. They will look in the phone book for you.They will trust you. They will buy from you. When you are marketing your site, business, product, service, you must be seen, heard and remembered by your audience. Consumers are bombarded with messages all day every where they travel. You must stand out and the most cost effective way to do this is logical domain branding. Today, we live in a society of overwhelming choice, which basically translates to relationships of convenience with the brands we choose. Today's "wired" become tomorrows "tired" often in the course of a week, no matter what the emotional connection was when it was "in". Brand loyalty is an illusion for marketers for the most part, and those that focus on innovation of their brand offerings with emerging trends are poised to fare better than those who still believe their customers will remain loyal to them. If brands create emotional relevance with customers over time, then they can potentially win them over for life. There are Coke drinkers who've never tried Pepsi, Nike owners who've never tried on a pair of Adidas, Starbucks customers who won't ever get their latte from 2005-08-14T00:05:07-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Branding-in-Product-Marketing-27608.aspx [b]Business Studies Marketing Report[/b] URBAN HYPE URABN HYPE INC. Phone 123 456 789012345 Main Street Fax 123 098 7654Southridge, WA 12345 Proposal on Marketing research URBAN HYPE ideal proposal on market research. Chapter 1 PROPOSAL ON MARKET RESEARCH Proposal Marketing, the all-embracing function that links the company with customer tastes to get the right product to the right place at the right time. Marketing decisions are made through the marketing model , based on findings of market research, and carried out through the marketing mix. At all stages in the marketing process, the firm needs to work closely with the production department and research and development, to ensure that what is promised is delivered. Market research is the main process of gathering primary and secondary data on the buying habits, lifestyle, usage and attitudes of actual and potential customers. The intension is to gather evidence that can enable marketing and production decisions to be made in a more scientific way than would otherwise be possible. Most large consumer goods firms agree on one phrase used by Sherlock Holmes “It’s a capital mistake to theorise before one has data”. Market research can be subdivided as follows: Desk research Quantitative Qualitative 2005-08-12T04:00:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Studies-Marketing-Report-27594.aspx What is Marketing? Marketing consists of individual and organizational activities that facilitate and expedite satisfying exchange relationships in a dynamic environment through the creation, distribution, promotion, and pricing of goods, services, and ideas. An understanding of marketing is important for success in all business fields and occupations. Rapid technological innovations continue to change human needs and provide goods and services to consumers at an affordable price. Marketers are instrumental in achieving such tasks. Career opportunities in marketing are virtually unlimited. Marketing is critical for the survival of any business because it is the major revenue-generating function in the firm. All organizations — from regular businesses to nonprofit organizations such as churches or charities — must engage in marketing activities and need highly qualified marketing professionals. That need is reflected in the high starting salaries and opportunities for rapid career advancement available to marketing graduates. Advertising is one of the career areas open to you as a marketing professional Many organizations employ advertising specialists. Advertising agencies are the largest employers; however, manufacturers, retailers, banks, radio and television stations, hospitals, and insurance agencies all have advertising departments. Creativity, artistic talent, and good communication skills (written and verbal) are a few of the attributes needed for a successful career in advertising. Because the industry is so competitive, it is very difficult to enter. Compensation for entry-level positions in advertising is generally lower than other entry-level positions, but increases substantially as one moves into management. In addition to experience, account manager positions will generally require a MBA degree. Interactive marketing is another career area open to you as a marketing professional. As a result of technological capabilities and lifestyle market opportunities, interactive marketing has enjoyed substantial expansion. Although precise figures are difficult to pinpoint, interactive marketing has grown at a rate of at least 10% annually in recent years. The marketing positions in interactive marketing generally involve three facets: planning marketing activities, marketing research, and market analysis. Underlying most interactive marketing programs is the use of a computerized database containing data related to customer/prospect information, transaction records, and media tracking information. Graduating students with skills and interest in both marketing and data processing are likely to find excellent career opportunities in interactive marketing. Another area open is sales. There are more opportunities in sales than in any other area of marketing. Sales positions vary greatly among companies. Some selling positions focus more on providing 2005-08-10T04:42:36-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/What-is-Marketing--27587.aspx Accounting Case Study on General Mills General Mills, Inc. Financial Accounting Case Study Module 1: A. General Mills Consolidated Statements of Earnings: 1. The recorded sale amount of almost $8 billion is not the actual amount of cash collected. The amount of $8 billion includes cash and credit sales. 2. Sales increased each year from 2000 to 2002. The difference between the year 2000 and 2001 was a 5.35% increase (5,450-5,173/5,173 = .0535). The difference between the year 2001 and 2002 was a 45.85% increase (7,949-5,450/5,450 = .4585). 3. The largest expense for General Mills for the years 2000, 2001, and 2002 was the same; over 50% of the revenue each year went towards the cost of sales. Sales in 2002 were the largest, about 7% more than the two previous years. 2000: (2,698/5,173) = .522 = 52.2% 2001: (2,841/5,450 = .521 = 52.1% 2002: (4,767/7,949) = .599 = 59.9% 4. Net Income: 2000: $614 million 2001: $665 million 2002: $458 million When comparing the net income figures for the past three years, it is seen that between 2000 and 2001, the net income increased by $51 million, but between 2001 and 2002, the net income decreased by $207 million. 5. A company's stock price is usually influenced by the amount of net income because when finding the price of the stock, you must divide the number of stocks by the net income. So, the higher the net income, the lower the price of stocks, which is what buyers look for (means better profit). 6. Even though General Mills paid dividends in 2000, 2001 and 2002, the corresponding total dividend payments did not appear as an expense on the income statement because dividends are not an expense; they are a financing activity that is reported on the statement of stockholder's equity. They are payments that are made to only the owners of the company. B. General Mills Consolidated Balance Sheets: 7. A company has assets so that they have a location and equipment to operate/create a business. Assets are resources that are controlled by a business. Without assets, one cannot produce and/or run a company. The purpose of assets are to keep track of expenses, what a company owns, like equipment, inventory, cash etc., and creates value for the company. 8. The total amount of assets at the end of 2002 was $16,540 million. 9. When comparing the assets from the beginning of 2002 to the end, we found that 2005-08-07T03:40:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Accounting-Case-Study-on-General-Mills-27571.aspx 3G Mobile Telecoms Marketing Study What is 3G? 3G - or 3rd generation - technology supports the broadband, packet-based transmission of text, multimedia data - such as audio, video and digitized voice - at a high data rate. It will greatly enhance the next generation of mobile communication services, providing always-on connectivity to phones and other wireless communications, regardless of time and place. 3G has been endorsed by major standards bodies and manufacturers. WCDMA is the leading 3G standard. It has been endorsed by all major OEMS and operators. What does 3G mean for developers? 3G is another network pipe, so in most cases developers do not need to explicitly program for it any more than they program for a GSM or GPRS network. However, the enhanced bandwidth and the always-on nature of 3G removes some practical limitations on the types of services that developers can deliver. What services will 3G enable? No single 3G application will dominate the market. High-speed content like video-on-demand, multimedia and always-on Internet access are just a few possibilities. Nokia believes Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) will be one of the first successful services on the market. Is 3G too far out to make application development profitable? The 3G network roll-out is in process, but the applications that will work best over 3G already work on today's networks. MMS, OTA download of Java applications, and browsing applications are already in use today. As 3G bandwidth becomes more widely available, developers can enhance existing applications with richer graphics and other data-intensive services. When will WCDMA 3G networks be available? Nokia is already rolling out its 3G network solutions. The first Nokia WCDMA and EDGE networks will be launched commercially during the second half of 2002. Current Market Situation The current market share held by the 4 major producers of mobile communications in the 3rd quarter of 2002 was as follows: 1. Nokia ¡V 35.9% 2. Motorola- 14.4% 3. Samsung- 10.6% 4. Sony-Ericsson- 4.8% For the past 3 years, the mobile communications industry has taken a significant downturn. The value of the market has decreased in the region of billions of euro. The downturn of the industry can be attributed to three main causes: 1. Investors have somewhat lost confidence in the hi-tech industries and hence now the trailing mobile communications industry 2. Market Saturation experienced by the mobile industry 3. The product life cycle of the 2G mobile phone has progressed to the decline 2005-08-07T03:40:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/3G-Mobile-Telcoms-Marketing-Study,-Industry-Overview-27570.aspx Harvard Business School Case: Smithkline Beecham Corporate strategy. Scope, Scale,5 forces, SWOT, Direction, long term, Competitive advantages, Stakeholders 1.Direction The first key concept of strategy is the direction the company wants to follow. The direction of SmithKline Beecham clearly adjusts in order to cope with the increasing competition in the pharmaceutical industry. In 1989, SmithKline Beecham was formed out of a merger of SmithKline Beckman and the Beecham Group. Five years later, the Annual Report Chief Executive Leschly wrote: "Through a series of strategic acquisitions and disposals, SB made progress in its transformation from a company made up of four successful, but separate, businesses into a unified organisation focused on human healthcare." To reach SB's philosophy several actions were taken by management: •they were the second firm that integrated vertically (with DPS); •DPS was sold in 1999 because of failed efforts to control distribution channels; •It divided its operations into four and later in three businesses: SB Pharmaceuticals, SB Healthcare Services and SB Consumer Healthcare. The direction of the management can best be seen as 'vision' because of their philosophy. They have a vision and want to achieve it, no matter what road they take. The figure below represents this approach. 2.Long term The most eye-catching trait of the current global pharmaceutical industry is that the largest pharmaceutical companies consolidate to become the number one in the industry. For example the merger between Zeneca and Astra, which became AstraZeneca, which is now the world leading pharmaceutical company. These facts were all to the detriment of SmithKline Beecham, which became smaller in comparison with its giant competitors . SB slipped from the 4th position in rank to the 9th player in the market in eight years, since 1989. Therefore it focused on a merger strategy and went into merger talks with AHP and later with Glaxo Wellcome. A merger with Glaxo would make the new combination a number one, with around 8% market share. Currently the merger talks with Glaxo Wellcome seem to be failed, but if the goal is to be a giant, this is the road to become one. 3.Environment (STEP, Porter, SWOT) STEP Socio-cultural factors The demand for medicines changed in the last 20-30 years. There is a clear shift from antibiotics towards more complex drugs for cancer, heart diseases and more. The effectiveness of these drugs is more difficult to test and requires a longer R&D process. A trend of increasing use of drugs 2005-08-07T03:36:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Harvard-Business-School-Case-Smithkline-Beecham-27568.aspx Target Corporation: Analysis of Job Interview Process, How to Conduct a Job Interview Target Corporation is a growth company focused exclusively on general merchandise retail. Target Corporation states that there are four main reasons why people should work for them: the culture, the diversity, the benefits, and industry leaders. Every employee at Target is an important part of the culture at Target Corporation. Employees like the challenging work tasks, the motivation, and the feedback, which helps personal and professional growth. Target Corporation is dedicated to allowing their team members to show their individuality. Diversity at Target Corporation goes beyond age, race, or gender to include sexual orientation, language, physical ability, family, religion, socioeconomic circumstances, education, and life experience. There are many employee benefits to working for this company. The benefits include discount on merchandise, 401 k plan, savings on prescriptions, flexible work schedules and many more. Employees of the Target Corporation are industrial leaders because Target Corporation is one of the nation's top retailers and companies. Target Corporation ranked 25th on the Fortune 500 list in 2003 and consistently receives national recognition for its comprehensive team member benefits, training and education, productive work environment and community giving. Those are the main reasons to work at Target but how can a person go about getting a job there. The parts of the selection process for getting a new job are completing an application, the preliminary interview, employment testing, the diagnostic interview, reference checking, and then the human resources final decision. The major part of this selection process is the job interview. The typical interview process for Target Corporation begins with an initial human resources screening, followed by 2 or more interviews with potential managers. Interviews also involve a programming test, but job offers are not based on the scores of the test. Target Corporation's interviews are structured interviews, which are interviews conducted according to a predetermined outline. In the interviews the human resource manager asks the same basic questions that most retail stores ask. Suggestions for Target Corporation are not many. One suggestion is doing a stress interview. A stress interview is an interview method that puts the applicant under pressure, to determine whether he or she is highly emotional. This method would be good for Target Corporation because working in retail can become very stressful especially during the Christmas season, the managers should know if the potential employee can handle the pressure and 2005-08-05T03:34:19-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Target-Corporation-Analysis-of-Job-Interview-Process-27563.aspx Enron, a history and how the company imploded Abstract "Son, your ego is writing checks your body can't cash." (Paramount, 1986) The famous words of Admiral T.J. Cassidy in the high-flying action thriller Top Gun (Paramount, 1986) describe what occurred with Enron. Enron was a giant corporation (some say the largest energy company in the world), who depended on outside credit sources to finance its daily operations. In turn its credit-worthiness depended on its performance as reflected in the Enron's share prices. When the price of Enron's shares collapsed, so did its' credit rating. Consequently cash credit to the company became either prohibitively expensive or outright unavailable. Without ready infusions of cash, Enron became unable to meet its earlier credit obligations. This depressed Enron's stock even deeper, which in turn let to the further decline in already low share prices. Being unable to pay its' creditors, with no forthcoming offers of merger from its competitors, and with no foreseeable rescue attempt by the government, Enron was forced into bankruptcy. In the purely abstract form, merely for illustrative purposes, we can compare Enron's debacle with an imaginary individual whose life or at least lifestyle depended much on borrowing - let's say, it became dependant on loans from credit card companies. Without sufficient income to repay interest on these loans, this hypothetical individual is forced to apply for new credit cards, with which he is paying off his creditors. At some point, when the individual's credit rating worsens and he or she is no longer able to get more financing from the credit card issuers, the finale becomes inevitable, and usually it is the bankruptcy. We can also compare Enron's disaster to a pyramid scheme. In the classic pyramid scheme, fraudsters (here Enron's executives, accounting firms, corporate lawyers and their clique in the government) have to keep their victims happy (in the case of Enron the victims were investors, shareholders, suppliers and the general public) by paying off unrealistic rates of return on victims' investments (inflated price of Enron's shares). Pyramid schemes go always bust when a crisis of trust suddenly erupts among creditors or when there are no more victims left to be duped in forking out more money for running the pyramidal operation (i.e., source of credit dries up and the scheme inevitably collapses). We can also liken the Enron's experience to a market bubble, similar to the spectacular crash of 2005-08-05T03:29:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Enron-Scandal-Explanation,-Analysis,-and-History-27561.aspx Case Study of Automobile Industry Research on General Motors Description of Automobile Industry: Automobile industry is the modern manufacturing industry including commercial vehicles (CVs), cars, three-wheelers and two-wheelers segments. The automotive industry has been playing a leading role in spurring growth in economies throughout the world since the industrial revolution. It is a sector characterized by not only tremendous potential growth, but also very high profile trade disputes, and intense competition. In the 21st century, the automotive industry confronts greater challenges as the industry undergoes fundamental changes. Research on GM: General Motors is the world's largest automotive corporation operating in over 70 countries with a presence in more than 200 countries, more than 260 major subsidiaries, and a total of 395,000 employees worldwide which translate into global opportunities that span the planet. Founded in 1908, GM has been the global automotive sales leader since 1931. GM today has manufacturing operations in 32 countries and its vehicles are sold in more than 190 countries. General Motors is involved in Telecommunications, Aerospace, Defense, Financial and Insurance Services, Locomotives, Automotive Systems and Heavy Duty Automatic Transmissions. In all GM does, their philanthropy and commitment to the environment in which they live, is unsurpassed in the industry. GM Brands: GM's automotive brands are Buick, Cadillac, Chevrolet, GMC, Holden, HUMMER, Oldsmobile, Opel, Pontiac, Saab, Saturn and Vauxhall. In some countries, the GM distribution network also markets vehicles manufactured by GM Daewoo, Isuzu, Subaru and Suzuki. GM Vision: To be the world leader in transportation products and related services. Will earn customers' enthusiasm through continuous improvement driven by integrity, teamwork and the innovation of GM people. In 2002, GM sold more than 8.5 million cars and trucks, nearly 15 percent of the global vehicle market. GM's global headquarters is at the GM Renaissance Center in Detroit. GM set industry sales records in the United States, its largest market, for total trucks and sport utility vehicles. GM became the first manufacturer to sell more than 2.7 million trucks in a calendar year and the first to sell more than 1.2 million SUVs. GM also increased its market share in the North America, Asia Pacific and Latin America/Africa/Mid-East regions. Company Culture of GM GM has defined six core values for the conduct of its business The 6 core values define what GM wants to achieve and what GM wants to stand for as a company. They are not only the road map for corporate social responsibility: they are 2005-08-05T03:28:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Case-Study-of-Automobile-Industry,-General-Motors-GM-Focus-27560.aspx Walmart Marketing Case Study Question # 1 In Customer Intimacy and Other Value Disciplines, Treacy and Wiersema highlight three distinct "paths" or strategies to market leadership. They include operational excellence, customer intimacy, and product leadership. This paper will highlight how Wal-Mart has successfully implemented the operational excellence strategy, as well as consider future initiatives within this strategy that Wal-Mart can still incorporate. The discussion will than focus on the customer intimacy strategy and explain how Wal-mart has also incorporated this strategy in a variety of its operations. The product leadership strategy will also be briefly discussed, however, due to its limited scope in this particular environment, it will not be emphasized. Wal-Mart has effectively implemented an operational excellence strategy in its quest to continually lower costs and deliver products and services with minimal difficulty or inconvenience. Whether it be through reducing costs, through its various relationships and practices with suppliers or controlling energy consumption by monitoring and controlling lights, heat, A/C, etc from their head office or even managing inventory efficiently, Wal-Mart has effectively minimized both variable and fixed costs while also ensuring stock outs are minimized. Wal-Mart has also effectively eliminated (non-value) added production steps as it successfully re-defined the integrated retailers relationships with its manufacturers. Wal-Mart has also been successful in implementing a variety of IT systems that have also facilitated this strategy. Whether it's through their own private satellite networks, or their EDI systems with suppliers or even the implementation of UPC scanners at the registers, Wal-Mart has been an industry leader in using technology to facilitate this strategy. Wal-Mart has also successfully incorporated convenience in their strategy, as some stores are open 24-7, and if one was to look at the multiple services offered, whether it be the automotive garage, pharmacy, restaurant, photo lab, they are effectively becoming a one stop shop. (A friend has even joked, that in the future, they will have a day surgery department.) Has Wal-Mart reached the limits of lowering costs? Absolutely not. As indicated, they have a variety of initiatives that are being examined. The first initiative involves using Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) with their top 100 suppliers. This will further improve their distribution efficiency, as it will reduce the need for unloading to check products, as well as, serve as an internal control function in dealing with shrinkage. It's been estimated that such technology could unlock supply chain cost savings of 2005-08-05T03:22:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Walmart-Marketing-History-and-Marketing-Case-Study-27556.aspx Sharper Image Corp SWOT Analysis and Stock Evaluation SHARPER IMAGE CORPORATION Introduction Sharper Image Corporation is a San Francisco-based specialty retailing company. They are known for their original, innovative, high-quality gizmos and gadgets that no one really needs, but would like to have. They produce products in the categories of electronics, recreation, fitness, personal care, house ware, travel, and toys. Sharper Image sells products from three sources: Sharper Image Design propriety products, private label products, and branded products. The propriety products are researched and designed by Sharper Image. Private label products are produced by other manufactures, but features and functions are changed so they will be unique to Sharper Image. Branded products are distinctive products sold only in Sharper Image stores. Sharper Image was founded in 1977 and went public in 1987. It started as a mail-order company, but later opened its first store in 1984. Sharper Image also expanded to the Internet market by opening its site in 1999. It now has a total of 1,400 employees and about 100 stores throughout the United States (Sharper Image 2001). Strengths Diversity One of Sharper Images' strongest strength is its diverse methods of selling their products. Sharper Image owns and operates 97 stores thought the United States. Usually located in malls, Sharper Image stores generates a lot of traffic, resulting in a lot of business. Their stores are their largest source of income, accounting for roughly 60% of their total sales. The famous Sharper Image Catalog is their next highest source of revenue, bringing in 20% of sales. The catalog is sent monthly to over 7.9 million people. Their most recent sales channel is their Internet web site, which opened in July of 1999. Their Internet revenues are increasing rapidly, they make up 14% of total sales (SHRP Reports Increase 2001). Sharper Image Propriety Products The primary driver of Sharper Image's sales is their Sharper Image Design products such as the Ionic Breeze Air Purifier, their hands-free Car Cell Phone System, and their CD Shower Companion (Materna 2000). These products are among their top sellers. A big advantage of these products is that they are not sold in any other stores. So if customers want these items, they must order from Sharper Image. Sharper Image hopes that this will bring in more customers who will buy other merchandise as well. Fiscally Strong Financially, Sharper Image Corp. is doing very well. Sales from every channel are increasing. 2005-08-05T03:21:07-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Sharper-Image-Corp-SWOT-Analysis-and-Stock-Evaluation-27555.aspx Soft Drink Worldwide Industry The soft-drink battleground has now turned toward new overseas markets. While once the United States, Australia, Japan, and Western Europe were the dominant soft-drink markets, the growth has slowed down dramatically, but they are still important markets for Coca-Cola and Pepsi. However, Eastern Europe, Mexico, China, Saudi Arabia, and India have become the new "hot spots." Both Coca-Cola and Pepsi are forming joint bottling ventures in these nations and in other areas where they see growth potential. As we have seen, international marketing can be very complex. Many issues have to be resolved before a company can even consider entering uncharted foreign waters. This becomes very evident as one begins to study the international cola wars. The domestic cola war between Coca-Cola and Pepsi is still raging. However, the two soft-drink giants also recognize that opportunities for growth in many of the mature markets have slowed. Both Coca-Cola, which sold 10 billion cases of soft-drinks in 1992, and Pepsi now find themselves asking, "Where will sales of the next 10 billion cases come from?" The answer lies in the developing world, where income levels and appetites for Western products are at an all time high. Often, the company that gets into a foreign market first usually dominates that country's market. Coke patriarch Robert Woodruff realized this 50 years ago and unleashed a brilliant ploy to make Coke the early bird in many of the major foreign markets. At the height of World War II, Woodruff proclaimed that Awherever American boys were fighting, they'd be able to get a Coke.@ By the time Pepsi tried to make its first international pitch in the 50s, Coke had already established its brand name and a powerful distribution network. In the intervening 40 years, many new markets have emerged. In order to profit from these markets, both Coke and Pepsi need to find ways to cut through all of the red tape that initially prevents them from conducting business in these markets. This paper seeks to examine these markets and the opportunities and roadblocks that lie within each. Coke and Pepsi in Russia: In 1972, Pepsi signed an agreement with the Soviet Union which made it the first Western product to be sold to consumers in Russia. This was a landmark agreement and gave Pepsi the first-mover advantage. Presently, Pepsi has 23 plants in the former Soviet Union and is the 2005-08-04T07:05:14-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Soft-Drink-Worldwide-Industry-27549.aspx South West Airlines Case Study Executive Summary Thousands of people travel by air; Southwest Airlines provides low-fare air transportation service among 58 cities in the United States. Although the industry suffered a major blow from the terrorist attack of September 11th, the company is still holding strong; while other airline companies are in debt. The information was majority gathered and analyzed from the internet; sources such as "News Week," and "Wall Street Journal." According to the acquired knowledge of Southwest, the company maintains steady sales. The major success to their continued success is due to their low-cost model and competitors are aware that they cannot match Southwest Airlines low prices therefore, by dropping the price even lower; Southwest Airlines can force a company to go bankrupt. Introduction In 1971, Rollin King and Herb Kelleher started an airline service with one simple notion: "If you get your passengers to their destinations when they want to get there, on time, at the lowest possible fares, and make darn sure they have a good time doing it, people will fly your airline." They were right about that. Southwest Airline is now a major airline, in fact, the fourth largest airliner in the United States that is trading under the Symbol LUV on NYSE. The mission of Southwest Airlines is dedication to the highest quality of customer service delivered with a sense of warmth, friendliness, individual pride, and company spirit. It primarily provides short haul, high-frequency, point-to-point, low-fare air transportation service among 58 cities (59 airports) in the United States. Here are some numbers that will give a brief idea how the company is operating: Net income: $241 million Total passengers carried: 63 million Total RPMs: 45.4 billion Passenger load factor: 65.9 percent Total operating revenue: $5.5 billion The airline industry has been hit hard by the terrorist attack of September 11th. There is a 13% insurance raise for the airlines and the government is enforcing fees regarding security problems. The operation cost increases dramatically and there are less people traveling by air. Most of the airliners are losing money expect a few. Southwest is one of those airlines which have remained profitable. Organization of Southwest Airlines is described as an upside-down pyramid. The upper management is at the bottom and supports the front line employees (~35000), who are the experts. This is Herb Kelleher's unorthodox leadership style, in which management decisions are made by everyone in the organization, 2005-08-04T05:44:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/South-West-Airlines-Case-Study-History-and-Analysis-27535.aspx One of the aims of HRM is to give an organization a competitive edge. 1.0 INTRODUCTION As we enter the new millennium more and more companies are recognizing the importance of managing their human resources as effectively as possible. They are also recognizing that doing so, however, cannot be done without recognition and incorporation of the global context. It is virtually impossible to read a business periodical or newspaper anywhere in the world without seeing stories detailing the success of a company due to how effectively it manages its people. As the environment becomes more global, managing people also becomes more challenging, more unpredictable and uncertain and more subject to rapid change and surprise. The importance of managing people effectively, many companies are devoting a great deal more time, attention, skill and effort to have a competitive edge. Researchers indicate that the competency levels of HR managers in high performing firms are significantly higher than those of HR managers in low performing firms. (Stone 2005 pp 9-10). Within the context of the business, this report will discuss the three areas of study regarding managing human resource in a competitive environment: Strategic human resource management; Recruitment and selection and motivation. 1.1 STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT Business strategy is concerned with achieving competitive advantage. The effective development and implementation of strategy depend on the strategic capability of the organization, which will include the ability not only to formulate strategic goals, but also to develop and implement strategic plans through the process of strategic management. (Sparrow 1994) 1.1.2 Strategic HRM models Strategy is about implementation, which includes the management of change, as well as planning. (Sizani 2000). Three models are used in this process. Firstly, high performance management (high performance working), this is achieved by 'enhancing the skills and engaging the enthusiasm of employees'. High commitment management aims at eliciting a commitment so that behaviour is primarily self-regulated rather than controlled by sanctions and pressures external to the individual, and relations within the organization are based on high levels of trust! In addition, high involvement management creates a climate in which there is a continuing dialogue between managers and the members of their teams in order to define expectations and share information on the organization's mission, values and objectives. Within the framework of the concept of strategic HRM, these describe various approaches to its development and implementation. (Storey 1989) 1.1.3 Implementing HR Strategies Strategies tend to be expressed 2005-08-03T15:04:55-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/One-of-the-aims-of-HRM-is-to-give-an-org_-a-competitive-edge-27534.aspx Advanced Marketing Management Marketing plan for United Parcel Service [i:8e65ab47a8]Mission Statement: “End-to-end global supply chain provider.”[/i:8e65ab47a8] Executive Summary: The company analysis shows that UPS is actually positioned as a domestic (U.S.) ground shipping company, instead of being the primary coordinator of the flow of goods, information and funds throughout the entire supply chain on an international basis, as UPS perceives themselves. UPS is the follower in the overnight (express) deliveries segment. Therefore the marketing plan recommends gaining market share in that segment by withdrawing market share from FedEx, which is the market leader in that segment. Therefore, UPS should target companies (such as hospitals, finance companies etc.) and households who are currently using FedEx for urgent freight. In addition, UPS should also position themselves in the international shipping market. Therefore, they should target global manufacturing companies where UPS can handle storage, tracking and shipping on a worldwide base. The major strength of UPS is its ubiquitous US ground network, which was built more than 90 years ago and is six times bigger than that of FedEx’s. UPS can reach virtually every address in the U.S. In addition, UPS figured out how to under-take quick mid-distance deliveries - as far as 500 miles in one night - by truck, which is much less expensive than by air. One should also consider that UPS has much better operating margins in air deliveries than FedEx. Therefore, is it absolute feasible to gain market share in the overnight (express) segment. To push this idea UPS should establish an alliance with Wal-Mart in order to set up Drop Boxes in their stores, offer night and Saturday delivery, corporate rates, coupon for frequent household users, and implement appropriate media advertisement according to the target customer group. UPS has a weak international position, since none of the US freight transpor-tation companies has a dominant global position there is a huge potential that UPS could be the leader. In addition, UPS has just received the rights for six direct flights to China. This is just one of further steps UPS should undertake in order to conquer the Asian market. UPS should build up an Asian network by setting up an Asian hub, buying air routes, and establishing relationships to Asian governments. In addition, UPS should increase key-account (sales force) to address global manufacturing companies in order to undertake their global shipping and by showing presence at international trade events. As shown, UPS 2005-08-02T06:25:53-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/UPS-Marketing-Plan--27525.aspx key to effective human resource management is human resource planning 1.0 Introduction Human Resources (HR) Management is a multifaceted function. This entity has an important place within companies in helping key personnel decide on the best staff for their needs, among other things. Sometimes, the employees chosen are full-time employees already working for the company or they could be contractors. Regardless, the goal of HR Management is to choose the most qualified person for the job. Again, HR Management is a group of professionals that wear many hats, some of which include employee benefits and compensation, hiring and terminating employees, and managing personnel policies and employee records. While smaller companies will often perform the tasks of HR Management on their own, most, larger corporations choose to hire professionals to oversee the entire HR department so we can say that the key to effective human resource management is human resource planning, as it is stated by Mark and Cynthia, it involves strategic plans, then devising ways to meet these objectives . In this essay I will try to focus on strategic planning which is a major factor of planning. 2.0 Aims of strategic plans The history of strategic planning begins in the military. According to Webster's New World Dictionary, strategy is "the science of planning and directing large-scale military operations, of maneuvering forces into the most advantageous position prior to actual engagement with the enemy" (Guralnic, 1986). In an address to the strategic planning workshop director-general of kwazulu-Netal RK Sizani said “employees must be able to advise, facilitate, support, consult, guide, monitor, resolve disputes and recommend strategic interventions to government and departments. They must be capable of producing rules, procedures, norms, frameworks, standards, draw common plans and goals which will enhance co-ordination. They require people who are experienced and somewhat capacitated and not junior entry level officers.” As organizations vary in size, aims, functions, complexity, construction, the physical nature of their product, and appeal as employers, so do the contributions of human resource management. But, in most the ultimate aim of the function is to: "ensure that at all times the business is correctly staffed by the right number of people with the skills relevant to the business needs", that is, neither overstaffed. The second area should be about identifying which of these plans and strategies are so fundamental that there must be clear plans to address them before 2005-08-01T16:26:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Key-to-Effective-HRM-is-Human-Resource-Planning-27516.aspx Motivation Techniques at Microsoft With more than 4,000 of its 27,000 employees already millionaires, Microsoft faces the challenge of figuring out how to motivating its employees though means other than pay raises. While this problem is not unique to Microsoft, the circumstances under which this problem evolved however, are. As a company that must caters to the needs of the 'professional' worker, Microsoft's motivational strategy should center around recognition of individual employee achievements, the work itself, responsibility, growth, and other characteristics that people find intrinsically rewarding. By simple virtue of its position as a high-tech company - where highly trained, highly skilled 'professional' workers account for the vast majority of its employees - under normal circumstances money factors would play only limited role in actually motivating employees. As a company composed of 'paper millionaires,' Microsoft is in a unique position - while many Microsoft employees may be labeled 'professional' employees, the company's financial position will play a special interest to many of its employees. As Microsoft stock-holders, the average Microsoft millionaire (the so called paper millionaire') has a vested interest in helping the company succeed and advance its financial position. This is true because the stockholder will directly correlate the amount of money they earn with the perceived worth to the organization. Driven by the idea that their financial success or failures are directly related to the performance (as well as public image) of the company, these employees will work with great vigor to maintain the success of their company. Until their financial position no longer depends on the company's stock performance - that is, until theses employees sell their stock and secure their fortunes - the Microsoft millionaires will likely view themselves as masters of their own destiny. Hard work, they are likely to reason, will translate into better company performance which in turn, will translate into steady (if not increasing) stock performance. Clearly, money plays an important role in motivating job performance. But as mentioned earlier, money has its limitations as a motivator, especially in the world of the 'professional' worker. In the work of management theorist Frederick Herzberg, a fair salary is considered a "hygiene" factor - something people need as an incentive to do the jobs they are hired to do. Hygiene factors include adequate workspace, light and heat, and the necessary tools such as a computer or telephone. Without any of these items, employees will be demotivated and 2005-08-01T07:36:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Motivation-Techniques-at-Microsoft-27506.aspx Boom and Bust: Financial Deregulation and the East Asian Financial Crisis of 1997/1998 East Asia's attraction to foreign savers was a direct result of genuine growth in that region. This required productive investment in the construction of physical and human capital to increase the future productivity of workers. In turn, workers engaged in capital construction required food, clothing and shelter etc. (consumption), which was generally provided by the savings of other people. Because human capital are qualities such as education and knowledge, only physical capital contributes to the genuine growth of GDP per capita also seen as living standards. To understand why there is so much attraction to foreign savers, we need to see what the region in question can offer investors. Investors have a choice of how to finance their investment: using their own saving from wages/salaries, from business profit, or by borrowing or 'drawing' on the saving of other persons. Although using personal saving or business profit for investment may be simpler, it is not always the most cost-effective since the priority of nearly all firms is to profit maximize. In order to do so, drawing on the savings of others allows access to a greater pool of saving and rate of investment, despite the downside regulations to protect the interests of savers and dependence on a continued flow of other persons' savings. In the case of East Asian economies, decades of uninterrupted growth in living standards were partly based on high domestic saving (what is left after consumption spending on living expenses). In comparison, foreign investors' living standards were higher and so an investing economy (such as the US) would likely choose to supplement its domestic saving with foreign saving. Foreign saving is made through the current account of the balance of international payments; when this account is in deficit, the country is drawing on foreign saving each year by the extent of the deficit. This therefore provides a surplus for the East Asian economies. Allocation of savings is rationally decided by a person's expectations of return and risk and hence a greater risk of loss requires a greater expected future return. However since the future is unknown and therefore inherently risky, the assessment of return and risk are mostly affected by the emotional state of the decision maker. When prices accelerate or plunge to unsustainable heights or depths respectively, it could be said that greed and fear are dominating rational 2005-08-01T07:31:15-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-Deregulation-and-the-East-Asian-Financial-Crisis-27505.aspx Cutting Through The Competition - Cruise Companies The cruise companies targeting Indian customers feel that the cruise market segment in India is now coming of age. Not yet into the number game in terms of passengers, cruise liners have demarcated their market segments and clientele. Realising the competition and the objective, these companies have set their targets towards capturing their own market share in the future The Indian travel industry can be virtually described as a melting pot of possibilities. Modern lifestyle, enhanced economic standards, competitive work culture and the globe conjoining at the click of a mouse, has led to the travel bug afflicting people all over the world. Jyoti Koul finds out how people are now geared to exploring corners of the world they had never conceived to venture into before. The ever-lasting golden triangle of tourism universally would thus be land, sea and space and would that probably be the limit of this fast expanding industry ? In the current tourism scenario, however, it is the cruise industry that is creating waves, not only in the country but the world over. Cruising is fast gaining popularity as a vacation option. Some of the best international cruise companies are ambitiously eyeing the Indian market. Most of them have already established a presence to embark on these virgin waters. To lure the market, cruise companies are offering designer packages for their target audience. The promotional and marketing strategies are meticulously designed to suit the Indian consumer. Although the cruise liners had made their entry in the Indian market a few years ago, their growth targets seem to be slated very optimistically. These companies are very focussed on creating awareness about the entire experience of cruising as they realise that as a product, cruising is fairly new to the Indian travellers. Cruising as a vacation option According to Nishit Saxena, country head, Princess Cruises, “ The level of awareness with regards to cruising as a vacation option has increased considerably over the last few years. Earlier, cruising was considered to be either for the retired and the elderly or the rich and famous, but today, honeymooners, entrepreneurs, senior corporate executives, adventure traffic and families are all part of our clientele. A great deal of time is wasted in activities like checking-in and out of hotels, making flight connections packing & unpacking of baggage etc in a land based vacation as against a cruise wherein all 2005-08-01T06:17:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cutting-Through-The-Competition-Cruise-Companies-27494.aspx Financial report analysis of Hershey Foods Corporation, Hershey Foods History INTRODUCTION Hershey Foods Corporation is engaged, with its subsidiaries, in the manufacture, distribution and sale of confectionery and grocery products. The Company's principal product groups include confectionery products sold in the form of bar goods, bagged items and boxed items, as well as grocery products in the form of baking ingredients, chocolate drink mixes, peanut butter, dessert toppings and beverages. Hershey Foods manufactures confectionery products in a variety of packaged forms and markets them under more than 50 brands. The different packaged forms include various arrangements of the same bar products, such as boxes, trays and bags, as well as a variety of different sizes and weights of the same bar products, such as snack size, standard, king size, large and giant bars.. The Company also manufactures and/or markets grocery products in the baking, beverage, peanut butter and toppings categories. Principal products in the United States include Hershey's, Reese's and Heath baking pieces, Hershey's chocolate milk mix, Hershey's cocoa, Hershey's Chocolate Shoppe ice cream toppings, Hershey's Hot Cocoa Collection hot cocoa mix, Hershey's syrup and Reese's peanut butter. Hershey's chocolate- and strawberry-flavored milks are produced and sold under license by various dairies throughout the United States, using milk mixes manufactured by the Company. The Company's products are sold primarily to grocery wholesalers, chain grocery stores, candy distributors, mass merchandisers, chain drug stores, vending companies, wholesale clubs, convenience stores, concessionaires and food distributors by full-time sales representatives, food brokers and part-time retail sales merchandisers throughout the United States, Canada and Mexico. In 2002, sales to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. and subsidiaries amounted to approximately 21% of Hershey Foods' total net sales. Hershey Foods manufactures, imports, markets, sells and distributes chocolate products in Brazil under the Hershey's brand name. Additional products in Brazil include IO-IO hazelnut creme items and chocolate and confectionery products sold under the Visconti brand name. In China, Japan, Korea and the Philippines, the Company imports and/or markets selected confectionery and grocery products. It also markets confectionery and grocery products in over 90 countries worldwide. ANALYSIS OF BALANCE SHEET ASSETS Total assets increased $233.1 million, or 7%, as of December 31, 2002, primarily as a result of higher cash and cash equivalents, prepaid expenses and other current assets, and other non-current assets, partially offset by lower deferred income taxes, inventories, property, plant, and equipment, and goodwill. Current assets increased by $96.1 million, or 8%, principally reflecting increased cash and 2005-08-01T03:35:18-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Hershey-History-Financial-Report-Analysis-Company-Profile-27490.aspx Home Depot Business Case Analysis Letter to CEO To: Robert L. Nardelli, - President and CEO of Home Depot, Inc. Date: March, 04, 2004 First of all, I would like to thank you for giving me the honor to analyze your well organized and developed company. In this memo, I am going to discuss the strategic factors facing Home Depot, the strategies that the company has been following for the past years, and the distinctive competency Home Depot attain. Also, I am going to give my recommendations and opinion. Some of the strategic factors that Home Depot faces are related to product quality, price, advertising, store capacity, competitors, and customer's independency and satisfaction. Most of these strategic factors helped in the growth and popularity of Home Depot. Home Depot offers good quality products such as home improvement products, lawn and garden supplies. Installation services for these products are offered too. Home Depot like Wal-Mart Company offers low prices everyday. Operational efficiency had been a crucial part of achieving these low prices while still offering a high level of customer service. The company assesses and upgrades its information to support its growth, reduce and control costs and enable better decision-making. From the installation of computerized checkout systems, to the implementation of satellite communications systems in most of the stores, the company had shown that it has been and would continue to be innovative in its operating strategy. In year 1994 Home Depot introduced a prototype store format that offered about 32,000 more square feet of selling space and a significantly broader and deeper selection of products and services, as well as a more convenient layout than the traditional stores. These Type (V) stores were designed around a design center, which grouped complementary product categories. Therefore, this wide store capacity enabled Home Depot to stock like 40,0000 to 50,000 products in each store. I think that this is a very good strategic factor that enables the store to offer a wide variety of products. Lowes is the main competitor against Home Depot. Both companies have big stores, and many products. But Home Depot is still number one. Mike Brune from the Rainforest Action Network declared that " It's been a busy month for us all as we attempt to find out the implications of the Home Depot victory on the entire DIY (do-it-yourself) industry, get the all important details of Home Depot's new policy, and actually determine to 2005-08-01T03:34:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Home-Depot-History-and-Business-Case-Analysis-27489.aspx Can Target Surpass Walmart in Market Share? TARGET STORES, the crown jewel of the Target Corporation, would appear to have everything: zippy ads, fast-growing sales and exclusive merchandise that people rave about. But inside the headquarters tower here, where Target's decisions are made, no one is about to relax. With Kmart hobbled by bankruptcy, it is Target that now gets the attention of Wal-Mart Stores, the biggest retailer in the land and the biggest company, too. Every successful step that Target takes -- signing designers to make baby bottles and little black dresses, moving deeper into the grocery business, persuading more and more upper-middle-class shoppers to become upper-middle-class bargain hunters -- brings it into closer confrontation with the $218 billion behemoth that is Wal-Mart. At stake are the wallets of the growing number of consumers who shop discount stores by choice. In most respects, the Target Corporation -- which also owns the Marshall Field's and Mervyn's department stores -- is performing spectacularly well. It reported sales of $39.9 billion for the most recent fiscal year, mostly from its 1,100 Target stores, pushing it ahead of the beleaguered Kmart to make Target the nation's second-biggest discounter. Analysts are impressed with its earnings, which soared 36 percent, to $345 million, in the most recent quarter as revenue increased 15 percent, to $9.59 billion. Their enthusiasm is reflected in Target's share price, which rose 27 percent last year, although it is off around 6 percent this year. By comparison, Wal-Mart's sales in the first quarter rose 14.4 percent, to $55 billion. Its net income in that period jumped 19.7 percent, to $1.7 billion. Shoppers go to Target for a selection that includes detergent and batteries, in the tradition of all discount stores, but also for designs from Philippe Starck, Stephen Sprouse, Sonia Kashuk and Todd Oldham that can be found only at Target. (Executives say good design should be democratized.) ''I like the idea of having good design at affordable prices,'' said Sarah Ettenberg, a decorative-arts expert in Manhattan who shops for Michael Graves and Philippe Starck housewares but also pairs Target blouses with more expensive slacks she buys elsewhere. WITH an image perpetuated with distinctive, arty ads -- and lots of them -- the Target chain is by far the best-performing unit of the parent corporation. In the first quarter, Target stores provided 89 percent of the company's pretax profit, up from 82 percent last year. In 2001, 92 2005-08-01T03:32:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Target-versus-Walmart,-Walmart-Competitive-Analysis-27488.aspx A strategic management paper on Wal-mart Abstract Sam Walton, a leader with an innovative vision, started his own company and made it into the leader in discount retailing that it is today. Through his savvy, and sometimes unusual, business practices, he and his associates led the company forward for thirty years. Today, four years after his death, the company is still growing steadily. Wal-Mart executives continue to rely on many of the traditional goals and philosophies that Sam's legacy left behind, while simultaneously keeping one step ahead of the ever-changing technology and methods of today's fast-paced business environment. The organization has faced, and is still facing, a significant amount of controversy over several different issues; however, none of these have done much more than scrape the exterior of this gigantic operation. The future also looks bright for Wal-Mart, especially if it is able to strike a comfortable balance between increasing its profits and recognizing its social and ethical responsibilities. Why is Wal-Mart so Successful? Is it Good Strategy or Good Strategy Implementation? -- In 1962, when Sam Walton opened the first Wal-Mart store in Rogers, Arkansas, no one could have ever predicted the enormous success this small-town merchant would have. Sam Walton's talent for discount retailing not only made Wal-Mart the world's largest retailer, but also the world's number one retailer in sales. Indeed, Wal-Mart was named 'Retailer of the Decade' by Discount Store News in 1989, and on several occasions has been included in Fortune's list of the '10 most admired corporations.' Even with Walton's death (after a two-year battle with bone cancer) in 1992, Wal-Mart's sales continue to grow significantly. The Wal-Mart Philosophy -- Wal-Mart is successful not only because it makes sound strategic management decisions, but also for its innovative implementation of those strategic decisions. Regarded by many as the entrepreneur of the century, Walton had a reputation for caring about his customers, his employees (or 'associates' as he referred to them), and the community. In order to maintain its market position in the discount retail business, Wal-Mart executives continue to adhere to the management guidelines Sam developed. Walton was a man of simple tastes and took a keen interest in people. He believed in three guiding principles: 1. Customer value and service; 2. Partnership with its associates; 3. Community involvement (The Story of Wal-Mart, 1995). The Customer -- The word 'always' can be 2005-08-01T03:30:57-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/A-Strategic-Management-Paper-on-Walmart-27487.aspx Wal-Mart - A Case Study in Managing Technical Transitions WAL-MART - A Case Study in Managing Technical Transitions Managing Technical Transitions Prof. Michael Lawless February 24, 2001 Prepared by: Andrew Bender Ann Howell Amy Lavin David Torgerson Founded in 1962 by Sam Walton, Wal-Mart followed an amazing pattern of success and growth, eclipsing all other U.S. department store retailers by the early 1990's. In early spring 2001, Wal-Mart enjoyed a huge market capitalization of over $230B, which was down from highs of nearly $300B in early 2000. Over the last year, however, Wal-Mart had suffered a number of failures in its Internet-based operations, as it tried feverishly, along with many other traditionally "bricks-and-mortar" companies, to make a transition to the Internet. As much of the commotion in the markets relative to the Internet subsided due to a slowing economy and a number of high-profile "dot-com" failures, Wal-Mart continued to experiment with it's Internet presence and corporate strategy. In this paper, we discuss Wal-Mart and its technical transition to the Internet. First, we examine the company from a value chain and core competency perspective, to gain insight on what value the company brings to the table, both in its traditional and Internet operations. We give a synopsis of Wal-Mart's recent and current online philosophies, and then turn to Wal-Mart's strategy as it relates to the transition. Finally, we provide an analysis of Wal-Mart's prospects and recommendations for the future. Sources of Value Wal-Mart had always invested heavily in infrastructure. They were among the first to use point-of-sale Uniform Product Codes (UPC) scanning, and intra-store radio frequency (RF) transmission of product UPC and pricing information between central store inventory systems and personnel with scanners on the store shelves. However, their most valuable infrastructure investments were made at a significantly higher level. A satellite system connecting all stores was initially installed in 1983, and grew into a complex communication network that included all stores, headquarters, and distribution centers, as well suppliers. This system facilitated a modified just-in-time process of inventory control, a feat virtually unheard of in general merchandise retailing. Put simply, as each store sells an item, a message is automatically sent to the supplier of that item, who then knows to include a replacement in the next shipment (usually that day) to the nearest distribution hub. This degree of connectivity allows rapid response to inventory needs, and reduces dramatically the amount of inventory 2005-08-01T03:30:27-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Wal-Mart-History-Study-in-Managing-Technical-Transitions-27486.aspx As an Intern for SMEI (Sony Music Entertainment Inc., ) there were many aspects of the Recording industry savored first hand. Those experiences, combined with Sony 's ingenious qualifications allowed an opportunity to understand what it takes to remain at the top of the recording industry, not as an individual artist but as a recording conglomerate. In 1988 Sony acquired CBS Records, one of the most successful record empires thus Sony Music Entertainment Incorporated was borne. Sony took over Columbia and Epic record labels and founded new labels such as Chaos Recordings and Tristar Music Group. SMEI has gained a lush list of artist to include The King of Pop Michael Jackson, the sultry Sade, Pearl jam and the Spin Doctors. To be on top and remain there as an industry giant, stamina is required. If your artist does not have staying power, then even the most touted diva is just whistling Dixie where it counts, in sales. Barbara Streisand needed a hit, though world renown she was sorely lacking in the hit department. Executives at Sony decided to pair the divine diva with new song stress Celine Dion the dynamic duo produced a hit which is featured on Streisands CD entitled " Higher Ground ". Streisand is the comeback kid, her new CD has sold 2.5 million copies in the US, and it is her fastest selling CD to date. The decision to pair the youthful but soulful sound of Dion with the ageless vocal enchantress Streisand was no chance mishap. Sony considered Dions audience and appeal then paired her with Streisand in an effort to introduce a new audience to Streisand within Dion's core audience. The two fold tactic was a success. Founding a new audience for Streisand and establishing legendary status for Dion. Another one of Sonys' prodigious stars Bob Dylan recently experienced a comeback of his own with "Time Out Of Mind ". This masterpiece is Dylan's first original work in the last 8 years. "Time Out Of Mind" has sold more than 523,000 in the U.S. Sony took a chance on Dylan, a consummated artist who was thought of by his rivals as a thundercloud of declination. Sony's savvy and calculated risk, was an example of top executive Tommy Mottola's shrewd management. " It doesn't matter 2005-07-31T05:33:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Follow-The-Leader-My-Internship-for-Sony-27456.aspx Coke Vs Pepsi: Selling Spur-of-the-moment Thrills Ever wondered why Pepsi and Coke have been at each other’s throat for years? Most of the writing about the fighting misses the real reason. The battle is not in continuance of old rivalry, it is really about the category in which the two brands exist: impulse-purchased products. Companies working in this category need to understand it thoroughly, and use this knowledge intelligently. In many countries, agencies are organised by categories. Account planners, creative and servicing people specialise in categories and tend to move from agency to agency along category-lines. In fact, recruitment of advertisements specify the kind of category experience required for the job. Brand managers too move along similar lines. This leads to in-depth understanding of category consumer behaviour and competitive forces, which in turn sparks better marketing strategies and impactful communication. In comparison, Indian advertisements is full of generalists. It is common to have one account team handling products as diverse as tractors, ice-cream, suitings and computers simultaneously. Impulse purchases are products or services bought on the spur of the moment. Typically, these products are low-priced, frequently bought and quickly consumed. Ready availability is very important in this category which includes goods like soft drinks, sweets and candies, ice-cream, minor items of clothing like ties, ribbons and head bands, magazines, greeting cards, and gifts. Often, we buy them simply because we feel like a treat or they take our fancy. Hence, the criticality of distribution in this category. If these products are not seen, they are not bought. To understand the category further, let’s look at it from an economist perspective. In almost all such cases, the markets are oligopolistic, with a maximum of two to four players dominating the market. In most cases, the oligopolies are the result of takeovers and consolidation. In the Indian context, the soft drink market is essentially a duopoly - Coke and Pepsi. And, it will essentially remain that way. No matter how hard Cadbury Schweppes tries, it will remain a niche brand. This also implies that the primary battle is for market share and hence intensity of competition is high. Each and every move by a player attracts retaliation. So, what is needed to be successful marketer in this category? Three things, really: High awareness Easy availability High emotions HIGH AWARENESS: This has two components- one is media awareness the other relates to point of consumption. The first one means large advertising spends, 2005-07-29T06:55:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Coke-Vs-Pepsi-Selling-Spur-of-the-moment-Thrills-27441.aspx Amazon.com Situation Analysis Jeffrey Bezos started Amazon.com in 1994, after recognizing that Internet usage was growing at a rate of 2,300 percent a year. Operating from a 400-square foot office in Seattle, Jeffrey launched Amazon.com on the Internet in July 1995. Amazon.com mission is to use the Internet to transform book buying into the fastest, easiest, and most enjoyable shopping experience possible. By the end of 1996, his firm was one of the most successful Web retailers, with revenues reaching $15.6 million. Almost overnight Amzon.com quickly became the world’s largest e-tail bookstore in the world. Amazon has continued to expand its customer base, and sales revenues have increased every year. The firm’s revenues increased from $15.7 million in 1996 to $2.76 billion in 2000 (Table 1). Today, Amazon.com is the place to find and discover anything you want to buy online. Amazon offers the Earth’s Biggest Selection of products to 29 million people in more than 160 countries across the world making them the leading online shopping site accessed via the World Wide Web. Over past several years Amazon.com has grown and developed very rapidly. The key core processes that have lead to Amazon’s success are convenience, selection, service, and price. Convenience can best be described when Bill Gates stated that, “I buy all my books at Amazon.com because I’m busy and it’s convenient. They have a big selection, and they’ve been reliable.” With over 106 million adults purchasing books every quarter, Amazon has capitalized on the convenience of on-line ordering. The next key process for Amazon is selection. Amazon is able to offer the world’s largest selection because they are an e-tailer with virtual directories. Amazon only keeps recent publications in stock for quick order fill, but directly orders any other requested books from the publisher. This business practice allows Amazon to have low warehouse cost, and offer the largest selection of books at the same time. The third key process for Amazon is service. Amazon offers customers everything from email notifications when their orders are filled, to chat rooms so customers can discuss and recommend books. Amazon also allows customers to search for books with similar titles or subject matters. Currently about 63% of Amazon’s business comes from repeat customers. The last key process for Amazon is price. 2005-07-24T05:20:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Amazon_com-Situation-Analysis-27362.aspx (TQM) Total Quality Management Implemented in LL Bean Co. Introduction: After much debate on a topic for this paper, it became quite clear that I would be taking from this course a newfound Love of (TQM) Total Quality Management. While we have covered many aspects of production management over this semester, I have become a huge advocate of this management philosophy. I find my self-using the principle of TQM in my daily life at work. I have even taken out my textbook in meetings several times. As for a case I had another dilemma and I was struggling a lot with my choice of a case, and than it happened, right before my eyes on CNBC was the President & CEO (Chris McCormick) of L.L Bean Co. After watching the interview with Mr. McCormick and seeing video footage from inside of their production facility it was a sign that this should be my case study. Mr. McCormick spoke of all three elements of TQM in the interview. After visiting their web site and reading about the company and their history I believe that this company is the textbook image of a company that lives and breaths TQM. This Company possesses all three major components that embody the essence of TQM, Continuous improvement, involvement of every one in the organization, and a goal and guarantee of total customer satisfaction. What is (TQM) Total Quality Management? TQM Can is classified as a management philosophy where the needs of the customer are not only met but also exceeded, where there is a culture or an environment created that encourages all employees to pursue never-ending improvement in the quality and productivity of products and services of the company. “TQM expands the traditional view of quality (which looks only at the quality of the final product or service) -to a level of quality that encompasses every aspect of the process that produces the product or service. TQM is a system that is intended to keep poor quality from happening in the first place.”(1) Implementing TQM results in greater customer satisfaction, reducing operating costs, and enhancing the company’s bottom line. The concept behind the philosophy is that in most companies the cost of doing business has large potential for waste. If we think about how much time is spent on customer problems, re-doing work, tracking down information, or waiting on other people or suppliers we can 2005-07-24T05:05:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/-TQM-Total-Quality-Management-Implemented-in-LL-Bean-Co_-27360.aspx Everything Related to the Coca-Cola Company Founded in 1886 in Atlanta, Coca-Cola Company is the world’s leading manufacturer, marketer and distributor of nonalcoholic beverage concentrates and syrups, used to produce more than 230 beverage brands. It is also the world’s most inclusive brand and company. It has already ventured regionally out of Atlanta to other states of United States since the late 19th century and its signature contour bottle was first manufactured in the early 20th century to distinguish themselves and assuring the genuine Coca-Cola. Though the company grew rapidly and roared into some European countries during the 1900s, its presence worldwide grew swiftly only after World War II. Year after year, the company has been discovering new foreign markets to bring higher profits as to fulfill its ultimate obligation to provide consistently attractive returns to the owners of the company and to enlarge its customer base in order to achieve economics of scale. Due to strong competition with Pepsi-Cola, Coca-Cola wants to reduce its dependence on United States market, which is their similar domestic market, as to reduce its risk and increase its global market share by going international. Presently, the company has already reached six billion consumers in nearly two hundred countries. Coca-Cola Company has been very successful in international marketing effort. Aggressive advertising, branding and market segmentation have played an important part in the success. It has portrayed itself as fun, playfulness, freedom, lifestyle and the international appeal of Coca-Cola was embodied by a 1971 commercial, where a group of young people from all over the world to a hilltop in Italy to sing “I’ll like to buy the world a Coke”. The company has been sponsoring big events, like Olympics, Sea Games, FIFA Cup, International Film Festivals all over the world to create awareness, credibility and to brand itself as world-class company. It also makes big donations to organizations, charities and involvement in the communities. These activities have aided Coca-Cola in creating a positive image and consumers’ perception toward the company. Though the company makes the world its target market, segmenting by diverse consumer preferences would still required to help Coca-Cola to serve the consumers better. As different segments of different countries have various preferences or cultures, Coca-Cola tried to expand with new flavors, brands and even reduced the sugar contents in its Coke, to suit all the different segments. This 2005-07-24T04:47:29-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Everything-Related-to-the-Coca-Cola-Company-27357.aspx Wireless Technology Industry Report (2005-06) •The forecast where a technology will be on the future of wireless LAN •The current level of wireless technology •The development of wireless networking •The influence on the future of wireless LAN •The trend of the time of wireless networking Background In June, 1997 the IEEE, the body that defined the dominant 802.3 Ethernet standard, released the 802.11 standard for wireless local area networking. IEEE 802.11 standard supports transmission in infrared light and two types of radio transmission within the unlicensed 2.4GHz frequency band: Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) and Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS). The followings are development of wireless standards: Local Area Networks (IEEE 802) Wired Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) Wireless Ethernet (IEEE 802.11) High Rate Wireless Ethernet (IEEE 802.11b) Mode 2.4 GHz/54 Mbps Wireless Ethernet (IEEE 802.11g) 5 GHz Wireless LAN/WAN (IEEE 802.11a) Wireless Personal Area Network (IEEE 802.15) Fixed Broadband Wireless Access (IEEE 802.16) European 5 GHz/54 Mbps WAN (HiperLAN2) Short Distance Device Interconnectivity (Bluetooth); HomeRF Wireless LAN Wide Band Frequency Hopping (WBFH) Current Technology The most sparkling stars of wireless networking technology today is IEEE 802.11b.The 802.11b wireless networking has enjoyed a rapid increase in adoption in enterprise settings and in educational and institutional networks. More recently, particularly in the past year as adapter and access point prices have lowered dramatically, 802.11b wireless network products have been making inroads into home and SOHO applications. Initially, the demand for 802.11b in the home was driven by people who used a wireless-equipped notebook computer at work, and then took it home and wanted the same freedom from wired connection there too. As prices for wireless components came down, and as home networking to share broadband Internet connections increased, 802.11b was and still is the go-to choice, even in households to which no one comes home with a wireless-enabled notebook from work. Development of wireless technology The interference and performance issues at 2.4-GHz have the wireless LAN industry headed for the open 5-GHz frequency band, where the opportunity exists for a much cleaner wireless networking environment. Similar to the 2.4-GHz band, the 5-GHz spectrum does not require a license for use throughout much of the world. In addition, 5-GHz is void of interference from microwaves and has more than twice the available bandwidth of 2.4-GHz, thereby allowing for higher data throughput and multimedia application support. The open 5-GHz spectrum offers an opportunity for the industry to create a unified wireless network for a broad range of devices and applications. IEEE 802.11a 2005-07-19T05:24:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Wireless-Technology-Industry-Report-27335.aspx Research Paper on Outsourcing in the United States Outsourcing is defined as "the process of purchasing goods and services from outside vendors rather than producing the same goods or providing the same services within the organization." Outsourcing does not come without risks, but it also has its benefits as well. Gaining services or products from outside sources can be very beneficial, considering the alternative that the firm will have to produce them themselves. However, on main risk that is incurred when outsourcing is that when a firm does outsource, they leave the supply of that product or service in the hands of someone of whom they cannot control, contrary to controlling their own supply. Ethical issues are at hand here, as well as trust issues. As you will see in this paper, many different opinions about outsourcing are present among different financial investors and financial officers. Management teams and management leaders are the head personnel that weigh the pro's and con's of outsourcing, and this paper will briefly summarize the various opinions, pro's, con's, large benefits, and ethical issues dealing with outsourcing. Popularity among small businesses has grown in the past years, according to the Journal of Accountancy. "Outsourcing is becoming popular even in small and midsize companies. Nowadays, a small business may not have staff members such as a Human Resources recruiter or a 401(k) specialist in house. As the Internet transforms the way businesses communicate with their clients, vendors, and employees, many of these functions are being handled by outsourcers." They provide many solutions and guidelines in which to follow. Here is a small sample of them:  Decide what's important. If a function is not strategic to your business--for instance, payroll services or health insurance needs in a recruiting agency with only ten employees--consider outsourcing it to an expert provider.  Don't go halfway. Don't settle for half-hearted measures or intermediaries who manage only some aspects of your business when the more efficient solution is to outsource the entire process. For example, if the telemarketing employees of a credit collection company only make calls on your behalf but do not follow up with any necessary customer visits, the collection function may be incomplete.  Beware of regulations. Make sure your outsourcing partner understands and complies with all the rules and regulations governing your industry and the workplace. This popularity is not just among small or medium sized businesses. Large corporations are using outsourcing 2005-07-18T05:54:36-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Research-Paper-on-Outsourcing-in-the-United-States-27318.aspx Building Employee Enthusiasm: Quality Management and Productivity Building Employee Enthusiasm In the article, "Building Employee Enthusiasm", the author, Peter Staack, demonstrates the importance for organizations to increase their awareness of safety through the use of incentive promotional products. There is no substitute for a safety program that will save needed revenue normally utilized for workers compensation. Lowered worker's compensation claims are one of the most significant benefits that safety awareness brings to a company by promoting higher levels of employee involvement in a safety program (Building Employee Enthusiasm, July 28, 2002). The article suggests that organizations use many forms of incentive products in an effort to achieve increased safety goals and standards. These programs are shown to be effective in top pharmaceutical manufacturers, auto plants, retail stores, corporations, and companies of all sizes. The incentive programs identify and give rewards to those employees who are committed to the practice of safety. Some examples include shirts, coffee mugs, hats, and employee products, among many others. Organizations will be the benefactor of increased employee attitude, morale, unity, teamwork, productivity, and an improved work environment. However, the incentive programs will not only benefit the employees, but the quality improvement will show-up in other areas as well. Educating and promoting proper use of equipment can extend the life of your investments, lessen the chance of downtime due to breakdowns, reduce the need for repairs, and also reduce the chances of injuries (Building Employee Enthusiasm, July 28, 2002). Not only will equipment benefit from safety improvements, the article addresses decreases in recruiting costs, insurance and legal expenditures, intrusions from government and insurance inspectors and a reduction in the load of bureaucratic paperwork. The best answer to a company's safety problem might not be associated with a person, team, department, or agency but might best be demonstrated through a safety incentive program through utilization of promotional products. After thorough analysis of "Building Employee Enthusiasm", it is clear that the author has found a direct correlation between the execution of a promotional incentive programs and the decrease in safety issues. There is a need for organizations to continue to demonstrate creativity in their safety programs. Organizations should not rely solely on incentive programs for safety assurance, but should look for and institute a diverse array of programs geared at increasing the safety standards and decreasing the revenue lost when safety policies are not being followed. Safety incentive promotional products address those individuals who 2005-07-04T06:08:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Building-Employee-Enthusiasm-Quality-Management-and-_______-27246.aspx Gender Differences: Perceptions of Sexual Harassment As Americans we tend to have a conditioned view toward sexuality as a normal, healthy part of life. However, it seems that one may underestimate the power sex has on culture, which is evident in many areas. Most recently discussions on a sexual nature received extreme national prominence with the public events surrounding the Kenneth Starr investigation and report, which focuses on the sexual aspects of the relationship between President Bill Clinton and a former intern, Monica Lewinsky. The result was a war of beliefs, morals and differences of cultures mixed with political manipulations. With the increase of sexual presence in our society, it is often wondered how this increase has affected morals and values of those who live it. Sex is everywhere--not just limited to the bedroom, but to the television, movies, billboards, office buildings and almost every fragment of modern culture. Around the turn of the twentieth century, open discussion and study of sex was well on its way. Sexual/cultural pioneer, Sigmund Freud believed that sexuality was tightly woven in all persons, present from birth. His breakthrough thinking affected social practices and was instrumental in breaking the ""moral fog that had enshrouded sexuality for most of the nineteenth century did not begin to lift until after the First World War"" (Janus 1993). By analyzing modern culture, a person can accurately determine the effects of the sexual revolution and how it has led to the alterations or evolution of personal, moral and ethical principals. They may be neurosurgeons or typists, police officers or telephone operators, construction workers or even members of Congress - more than half of working women have faced the problem of sexual harassment at some point in their careers. The situation tends to be worse in male dominated workplaces; in a l997 Defense Department study, 4 percent of military women have reported enduring such abuse. Although the severity may vary from patterns of obscene joking to outright assault, the emotional damage is often profound and long lasting. Up until just a few years ago, women had no recourse when confronted with such harassment by a boss or co-worker. However, the problem continues to thrive among the female work force reminding women of their vulnerability and creating tensions that make their jobs more difficult. Defining sexual harassment is one of the law's newest frontiers, since it covers such a wide range conduct. In essence, 2005-07-04T04:36:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Gender-Differences-Perceptions-of-Sexual-Harassment-27245.aspx Business Ethics, An Office Wide Ethics System Ethics and Human Resources Ethics commonly refer to the rules or principles that define right and wrong conduct. In the United States, many believe we are currently suffering from an ethics crisis (Reder 85). Behaviors that were once thought unacceptable --lying, cheating, misrepresenting, and covering up mistakes -- have become in many people's eyes acceptable or necessary practices. Managers profit from illegal use of insider stock information, and members of Congress write hundreds of bad checks. Even college students seem to have become caught up in the wave where studies show significant increases in cheating on tests (Braybrooke 27). Concern over this perceived decline in ethical standards is being addressed by organizations, while companies rely on their Human Resource (HR) department to build an ethical culture. Why is ethics important to Human Resources? When employees in organizations make decisions to act unethically, they affect not only the company itself, but also its shareholders, employees and customers. Employees make a myriad of choices every day in businesses -- if unethical, they can damage a company's productivity, profits and reputation. Unethical decisions can come in many forms: the employee who conducts personal business on company time to the line worker who fails to report a product flaw just to meet a deadline, and even more serious, the manager who profits from illegal use of insider stock information. All these incidents lack ethics. In most companies today, the competitive advantage rests on the shoulders of its employees. These employees must be trusted to "do the right thing", especially when no one is looking. It is up to HR to train, educate and communicate with employees on what is considered to be right and wrong in the workplace. After all, ethics is one topic that begins and ends with people. The standards of behavior from HR cannot be separated. Human Resources and ethics are linked and must be integrated. In today's high-pressured environment, HR must make it clear for employees that ethics come before deadlines or bottom lines. It's a message that can easily be overlooked in the work place especially if employees feel pressured to violate company policies in order to achieve business objectives. In an April 1997 study, the Chartered Financial Consultants and the Ethics Officers Association, found that 56% of all workers feel some pressure to act unethically or illegally. The study also revealed that 48% of 2005-07-04T04:30:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Ethics,-An-Office-Wide-Ethics-System-27244.aspx Uniqueness and Strength in Dell Computer Corporation Supply THE SUPPLY CHAIN OF DELL COMPUTER INTRODUCTION Appealing to exactly what the customer wants would ultimately be an ideal organisational objective for a business entity if it is aiming for profits. And being able to do it without an additional cost to the customer, would be too good to be true! This however, is actually the edge for Dell Computer when it took the computer industry by storm with its direct model distribution and build-to-order manufacturing. And amazingly, Dell's prices are very competitive, in fact, cheaper than most of its competitiors' off-the shelf models! Not surprisingly in 2001, Dell emerged as the number 1 computer systems company in the world and earned the number 7 spot on the Fortune magazine list of the world's most admired companies (ZDNet India,2002). So, what can the secret be for this infant computer company to be able to offer such 'ideals' to customers? To a large extent, Dell's supply chain configuration and operations has a major role to contribute to this capability. Dell's supply chain is chosen to discuss the issue in this assignment because of its compelling role in contributing to Dell's outstanding performance in a highly competitive industry. This essay will examine the unconventional structure and design of Dell's supply chain as influenced by the nature of products and services offered by Dell. In addition, the measurability of the performances of these supply chain design will also be addressed. DELL'S PRODUCTS AND THE BUSINESS ORIENTATION Having positioned itself as one of the leading world-class computer corporation over a relatively short period, Dell's main product categories are typically: • servers, storage and networking • notebooks and desktops • printers • handheld products • software and peripherals, and • related services. This product range serves virtually any computing need of the industry and home customers globally. Dell builds customised systems as ordered by customers and delivers them in a few days - to their doors, across the globe, and in the way they wanted it. To do this, there is a critical link all the way from its materials and component suppliers extended to the customer. Dell has manufacturing facilities in each of its four worldwide operational regions: the Americas region, the Europe, Middle East and Africa region, the Asia -Pacific and Japan region, and the China region. The advent and proliferation of the internet made Dell's business model a perfect fit. Customers make their queries, selection and orders online. And 2005-07-04T04:28:27-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Uniqueness-and-Strength-in-Dell-Computer-Corporation-Supply-27243.aspx Oil Crisis Oil is the major source of energy worldwide and it is expected to remain so over the next few decades. As the technology is changing our environment nowadays, oil has done it in the 20's and 30's. Ever since, then crude oil has become the main "raw" material in every economy no matter it is a developed one or it is in the developing process. The changes in the prices of the crude oil are making positive and negative implications on every economy. When these changes of prices are severe ones, one might easily conclude that an economy is going to face problems such as unfavorable supply shocks, or according to the theory adverse supply shocks. When these kinds of problem arise in the world oil market, it is usually described as a world oil crisis. The world has witnessed 2 major oil crises and it is facing another one at the moment. In order to discuss the recent oil crisis and its economic implications I am going to refer to the appropriated economic theory and I will also examine the two previous oil shocks in the world. As I mentioned previously the major problem that an economy is facing during every oil crisis is the adverse supply shock. Adverse supply shocks are unexpected events that reduce aggregate supply and therefore the output decreases and prices increase. In the language of economy we call this stagflation . Furthermore, I will refer to the organization that has caused the three supply shocks so far. OPEC, the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries, has the power to control the world oil prices by its reduction in the world oil supply. That's what has done in the oil crisis that had happened in the early 70's(Mankiw 252). OPEC's reduction in the supply of oil had doubled the world oil price instantly. As I said previously this had caused stagflation in every oil importing country. In addition I will refer to the US statistic about the oil crisis that took place in the early 70's. In the year of 1974 the change of the oil price was 68% and therefore there has been inflation in the area of 11% and negative change in the unemployment rate from 4.9% to 5.6%. (Mankiw 253) For instance we had the same impact on the economy in the crisis that took place in the 80's, such as double-digit 2005-07-04T04:25:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Oil-Crisis--27242.aspx Personal Financial Success: The Six-Level Pyramid Using the six-level pyramid to help explain the various building blocks to financial success helps to reveal the development of financial planning and indications, at each level, if instruments that might be considered. At the first level of the pyramid, there are four stages that need to be considered. Before any phase of an action plan can be implemented, an individual's current situation must be determined. One must evaluate their personal income because the amount of money a makes directly affects the amount that person can save. After all debts and living expenses are subtracted form income, one can know how much to put in savings every week, month or year. The amount one puts in savings is very important. This will have bearing on a spouse, children, and retirement life. Saving money should become a top priority in the financial planning realm of life. Goals are another important factor in financial planning. Without goals, a person has nothing to strive for, nothing to look forward to. This should come with ease during the implementation of a financial action plan. Career choice plays a major role in one's ability to live at a certain level in society. There are many factors to consider when making a career choice. They include personal factors, social influences, economic conditions, and trends in the industry. A person must consider these things when deciding on a career if they want to have long-term success in any given profession or calling. Keeping good records and being organized is a necessity for a person with a successful financial action plan. After receipts have been found, invoices filed, and check numbers recorded, one can develop a budget. A budget simply allocates income to different areas of spending. For example, one family may spend two hundred and fifty dollars per week on groceries, while another only spends one hundred per week. A budget can be done on a weekly, bi-weekly , or monthly time frame basis. An important part of an overall budget is taxes. Taxes, in general, include federal and state, occasionally county expenses on land ownings and other purchases. A person should be fully aware of how to calculate their taxable income and on how to get help with taxes. The second level of the pyramid involves managing. The absolute first way to begin with money management is to get the money out of a pocket 2005-07-04T04:11:39-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Personal-Financial-Success-The-Six-Level-Pyramid-27241.aspx Motivation at Hitachi Automotive Products, Organizational Behavior Analysis Motivation at Hitachi Automotive Products Hitachi Automotive Products, Los Angeles (HAP-LA) is a major manufacturer of automotive electromechanical parts, including alternators, starters, mass airflow sensors and distributors. HAP-LA follows in the steps of many Japanese-based companies in providing above-average motivational packages through excellent benefits packages, incentive programs, and retention incentives. Through these different motivational packages, HAP-LA is able to meet the needs of the employees based on those established by Clayton Alderfer in the ERG Theory. Hitachi Motivation Process Immediately upon employment at HAP-LA, team members are eligible for enrollment in the 401k plan and the medical, dental and vision care programs. Additionally, new team members are eligible for the Hitachi Cash Balance Plan, which is a compensation package with input solely from Hitachi based on years of service and salary. New managers are also offered a company vehicle from an impressive line that includes Lexus, Acura, Honda, Nissan, Toyota and Oldsmobile. Managers are also provided with a company credit card for business expenses during trips to Kentucky, Detroit or Japan. Finally, all new employees are eligible for the starting base of seventeen Paid Time Off (PTO) days. PTO days are a combination of vacation, sick time and personal days. After six months of employment, employees are eligible for the Hitachi Tuition Reimbursement Program, safety and quality incentives and the semiannual bonus. The bonus is based on incoming revenue against the budgeted revenue, with additional added bonus for increased efficiency, production or new customers. The safety incentive program is based on a quarterly system that takes into account the lost time days resulting from a safety violation for each department with awards that are issued such as hats, t-shirts, coffee mugs and pens. Throughout the employment at HAP-LA, team members are also eligible for the thirteen holidays observed, including a paid eight-day plant shutdown during the Christmas holiday season. Employees are also offered such services as Employee Assistance Program (EAP), training seminars for employee development, discount promotions for amusement parks, vehicle purchases, Hitachi electronics and restaurants, and Flexible Spending Accounts (FSA's) for medical and dependent care. Other motivational programs include Pie Day twice a year, a potluck lunch, Christmas caroling from the sponsored elementary school and other assemblies that recognize time of service or outstanding performance in production and efficiency. HAP-LA is currently registered as an ISO-9002 and QS-9000 certified Tier I and Tier II supplier to several major 2005-07-04T03:59:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Motivation-at-Hitachi-Automotive-Products,-Organizational-27240.aspx Discuss the effect that an increasingly global economy may have on your future responsibilities as a manager, both generally and as regards your chosen field The globalization of the 1990s has had a profound impact on every facet of the business world. Companies in every nation can now reach customers around the world and cut operation costs through global scales of production and distribution. Today, Gillette Co. is manufacturing razors in Russia, Fidelity Investment is selling its funds in Germany, and Citicorp is serving millions of customers from Asia to America. Meanwhile, international markets undergo constant change, intense competition, and heightened customer expectation, which makes it increasingly difficult for a company to gain and maintain its competitive edge. Managers must therefore take on a broader range of responsibilities. A successful manager will monitor the competitive landscape and decide if his organization has the strategies, structures, and personnel to be viable on a global level. In spite of the different approaches he may take, one thing remains constant--a manager must instill a commitment to globalization throughout his company. Simple exposure to an expanded economy does not make a corporation "international." Rather, there needs to be a widespread adjustment of attitude, as well as sweeping changes in operation, to ensure the company's profitability. The initial steps a manager must take are twofold: to clearly outline the challenges and opportunities of an international market and to address the individual talents of each employee. A successful manager will tailor his company's global strategies to suit its resources and capacities. This involves setting realistic goals without losing sight of more elevated ones. Not every corporation, for instance, has the size and reach of Citicorp, which will have one billion customers by the year 2010. While a manager should take the limitations of his corporation into account, he must also remember that quality of products and services can achieve goals that mere size cannot. Instead of being "all things to all people," a smaller company can take a more specialized approach to the global market by focusing on a certain sector in which it can excel. To achieve this, it is critical to match the talents and experience of each employee to the task best suited to him. For instance, a salesman who excels in the United States may not possess the cultural knowledge needed to succeed in China or Brazil. Different cultures, laws, and market conditions make international operation 2005-07-04T03:58:51-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Effect-that-an-Increasingly-Global-Economy-has-on___-27239.aspx Team Dynamics and Leading the Team Good leaders are made not born. If you have the desire and will power, you can become an effective leader. Good leaders develop through an ever-constant process of self study, education, training, and experience. This comes in very handy when dealing with teams due to the fact that the leadership hat is going to change according to each member's region of proficiency. The leader isn't necessarily going to issue instructions, procedures, goals, or monitor achievement levels, but to insure that the team has the assets it needs and to remove or limit any barriers that may appear (Thompson, et al. 8). Leadership is crucial when it comes to forming teams. You can not expect a team to function just because you put some individuals in a group. The team has to build a working relationship, a trust in one another's skills, and the confidence that when it comes their turn to lead, they can succeed. A team's success is going to come from its members having trust in the leader, the team mission, and the significance of the team itself (Dept. of the Army 3-2). A key point is whether or not the team members will follow the team leader. A confidence will have to be built within the team in order to establish any member as an effective leader of the team. This team confidence will only be formed from a mutual respect of each other and of the abilities that each member brings to the team. It will not be formed because one member is a stronger leader than another. In fact, just because the leader of the team is strong, doesn't mean the team will be a success. It also goes to say that if the team leader is weak that the team will be a failure. It all depends on the structure of the team and how the team operates as a whole. If you have a strong leader who has alienated the rest of the team members, more than likely the team members are not going to be supportive and the team is going to fail. If a team leader is somewhat weak, but well liked, his teammates might rally and reinforce his weaknesses with their own strengths to ensure the team succeeds. The success of the leader will also be based on other factors. One factor that is very important is whether 2005-07-04T03:53:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Team-Dynamics-and-Leading-the-Team-27238.aspx Leadership: Creativity and Innovation Leaders know in their gut that creativity and innovation are the life blood of their organization. New ideas can lead to programs that are superior to those that are already going on or planned in the organization and which would have been divested or never initiated had a better idea or program come along. So, the mission of every leader should be to search continually for ideas and programs that are superior to the ones the organization is currently committed to. In a word, it's called PROGRESS. But what can the leaders do to promote creativity and innovation? The most obvious answer, short of hiring a new work force, is to use management initiatives that create a work environment that stimulates the existing staff to be more creative and innovative. Creativity CAN Be Stimulated by Leaders There are many who would challenge the implicit assumption that leaders can do anything to foster creativity. They would argue that creative people, like baseball hitters, are born, not made. Indeed, much of the anecdotal literature about creativity would suggest that creativity is some mystical power that only a chosen few possess. But, then, why are all children creative? Common Anecdotes about Creativity Are Wrong People who have looked carefully at the creative process have learned that everyone of ordinary intelligence has latent creative abilities that can be enhanced by training and by a favorable environment. One recent book that is dedicated to defending this proposition is by D. N. Perkins, The Mind's Best Work.[1] He finds that after-the-fact anecdotes about well-known examples of great leaps of creative thought have generally received little or no close scrutiny of the mental processes that led to them. There are too many opportunities for the real mental correlates of creativity to be lost through excitement and distraction (as part of the "eureka" phenomenon), lack of need or desire to reconstruct the thought processes, and faulty skill and memory in reconstructing the process. Experiments where people have been asked to think aloud or report their thoughts during an episode of invention led Perkins to conclude that creativity arises naturally and comprehensibly from certain everyday abilities of perception, understanding, logic, memory, and thinking style. The Unconscious Is Not Magic Some people believe that creativity emerges from unconscious thinking. Even if that were true, it would not necessarily impart any special mystery to creativity, compared to other aspects of thought and behavior. Unconscious thought 2005-07-04T03:45:18-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leadership-Creativity-and-Innovation-27237.aspx Comparing the financial performance of Qantas and Woolworths. Discuss the aspects of the financial information that may be insufficient or misleading I have chosen Qantas Airways Limited & Woolworths Limited to be examined in this literature. Qantas is Australia's leading domestic carrier and one of the world's premier long haul airlines. Qantas is also one of Australia's most recognized brand names, with a reputation for excellence in safety, operational reliability, engineering and maintenance, and customer service. Woolworths' Supermarket is Australia's leading food retailer which provides customers with the best-priced and widest range of fresh produce, dry groceries and other merchandise, underpinned by its quality assurance commitment. However, from January 2003 onwards, due to the tumultuous events of 9/11, the bombings in Bali, the war in Iraq and the devastating outbreak of Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome, all areas of Qantas were affected, including the profitability of the company throughout the year. Qantas recorded an EBIT of $567 million, down from $112.3 million last year after being severely impacted by the effects of the SARS virus on international air travel. (www.qantas.com.au) Contrasting with Woolworths, it achieved an EBIT with increase of 13.7% to $945.7 million, reflecting the excellent sales and profit growth accomplished in the market with further reductions in the operation costs. (www.woolworthslimited.com.au) In comparing the financial performance of both the companies, Qantas and Woolworths generated a return of 2% and 8.15% on total assets respectively and a return of 6.5% and 49.34% on owners' equity respectively. This shows that Woolworths performs better in terms of both the return on total assets and return on owners' equity than Qantas, allowing us to say that Woolworths appears to be performing significantly better in the efficiency of the use of assets and in making returns for the shareholders. There is a large contrast between the financial performance of Qantas and Woolworths. According to the annual report, all key performance measures, such as EPS before goodwill, dividend and free cash flow of Woolworths improved substantially. Their strong performance in the year was supported by excellent progress in managing the key variables of their balance sheet. A significant reduction in inventory of 3.2 days compared with last year was a key factor which contributed $170 million to free cash flow. (www.woolworthslimited.com.au) In opposite, Qantas's performance was affected negatively and led to deterioration in all the key performance measures for this year. This is due to the fact that 2005-07-03T21:12:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comparing-the-financial-performance-of-Qantas-and-Woolworths-27235.aspx Auditing - The Risk-Based Approach Auditing - The Risk-Based Approach Introduction Risk, plays a large part in the world of Auditing. Audit risk, represents risk to an auditor or an audit firm, as the risk of paying damages to a client may arise out of negligent work when trying to show a true and fair view of a set of company accounts. All audit work involves some level of risk; this may be because a set of company accounts have been misstated due to error or fraud, or the auditor failed to detect the errors or fraud. In addition, these problems may have occurred due to inadequate sample sizes when determining the level of risk or the auditor failed to use proper auditing policies. To evaluate the level of risk related to specific areas of the audit, three components can help. The first is Inherent risk were environmental factors, (background knowledge of the client and were past audits indicate no difficulties) are concidered against whether or not they would lead to a material error, before considering the 'function of internal controls'. Next is Control risks were the 'system of internal controls' is assessed against the possability of preventing material error, or detecting it in time using internal controls. Last is Detection risk were the auditors procedures may fail to detect a material error not picked up by the internal controls. This report explains why the risk-based approach has become popular with external auditors and how it has been linked to materiality and sampling levels. Findings Risk Based Approach The role of an external audit, no matter what type of organisation it is, is to show a true and fair view of the company accounts and to abide by the auditing standards. Recently the risk-based approach has become as valued as auditing standards and adopted by most. The reason for it becoming so popular is that this audit approach helps the auditor to evaluate the level of risk to a particular area of the audit, i.e. specific accounts and transactions. Consequently, auditors can '...avoid both overauditing and underauditing and can distribute work more evenly throughout the year.' Grobstein and others (1985 p29). Besides, focusing on the level of risk the risk-based method helps to evaluate and build value into the financial reporting process and the clients company. In order to do this the auditor must have an up to date insight of the clients business and activities. 2005-07-03T21:10:57-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Auditing-The-Risk-Based-Approach-27234.aspx Financial vs. Managerial Accounting, short paper about financial and managerial accounting also includes rules/regulations, CPA and CMA Financial Accounting Financial accounting involves the preparation of a business's financial statements, mainly for users outside the business. These reports are used by owners, potential owners of a business, and by people who have loaned a company money. Some government agencies that regulate business and the stock market require companies to submit financial statements to them. Additionally, stockholders, suppliers, and banks also benefit from the financial reports that are generated. (Horngreen, Stratton, & Sundem, p. 5) Managerial Accounting Managerial accounting helps managers plan and control a company's operations. Accountants prepare budgets to express management's goals in financial terms by identifying, measuring, accumulating, analyzing, interpreting, and communicating information. After a budget has been adopted, performance reports compare actual results with the budget. Cost accountants help management keep track of how much it costs a company to make the product, or provide the service, it sells. (Horngreen, Stratton, & Sundem, p. 5) Rules and Regulations In financial accounting, it is limited by a widely accepted set of rules, standards, and procedures for reporting financial information known as the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), as established by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). This standard requires that a company "account for all of their assets or economic resources according to their historical cost." (Horngreen, Stratton, & Sundem, p. 6) Managerial accounting does not require the implementation of the rules and procedures of the GAAP. Management of an organization can create any type of internal accounting system that will work best for their company. However, they need to be aware of the costs that the implementation of such a system. (Horngreen, Stratton, & Sundem, p. 6) They also need to take into account the information that needs to be kept. More than one set of records is usually the norm. Both financial and managerial accounting must abide by the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act. This act is a "U.S. law forbidding bribery and other corrupt practices, and requiring that accounting records be maintained in reasonable detail and accuracy, and that an appropriate system of internal accounting be maintained." (Horngreen, Stratton, & Sundem, p. 7) Reporting Requirements Financial accounting usually utilizes summary reports that are concerned primarily with the company as a whole. To contrast, managerial accounting uses more detailed reports which itemize parts of the company such as products, departments, 2005-07-03T21:09:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-vs_-Managerial-Accounting-27233.aspx Managerial and Financial Accounting Managerial and Financial Accounting Accounting can be broken down into many different categories and areas. Managerial and financial accounting is only two parts of the cost accounting system. With in these two different aspects of accounting there are many similarities and differences not only between these categories but also in their rules and regulations, management information and reporting requirements as well. The certifications of accountants are also differentiated in these two categories, CMA and CPA. No matter what category you place an accountant in; the job is crucial in the business world. Managerial vs. Financial Managerial accounting is part of a company's management-information system, which provides accounting and other quantitative data to managers at all levels inside the organization. The preparation of information is used for decision making, planning, directing and controlling a company's operations. Financial accounting is the use of accounting information for reporting to parties outside the company. The preparation of information is used for published financial statements and other financial reports. The focus of managerial accounting is on the needs of managers within the company rather than the interested parties outside the company. Some of the users of financial accounting information are current and prospective stockholders, lenders and investment analysts. The main similarity between the both is that they both draw upon data from an organizations basic accounting system, mainly the cost accounting system. Rules and Regulations Managerial accounting does not require regulations and is unregulated because it is intended only for management within the company. Financial accounting requires regulation and must conform to widely accepted set of rules, standards and procedures known as the general accepted accounting principles (GAAP). They are regulated by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) as well as the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). The rules of accountants also depend on their own professional standards as well as their professional ethical standards. Management and Reporting Both managerial and financial accountants have responsibility to management in competence, confidentiality, integrity and objectivity. Managerial accounting's reports often focus on subunits within the organization, such as departments, divisions, geographical regions or product lines. These reports are based on combined historical data, estimates and projections of future events and "may be very detailed" (2004). Financial accounting reports focus on the enterprise in its entirety. These reports are based almost exclusively on historical transaction data. CMA and CPA Managerial accounts can earn a professional certification. A Certified 2005-07-03T21:08:42-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Managerial-and-Financial-Accounting-27232.aspx Lucent Technologies Company Profile Introduction Lucent Technologies Lucent Technology is North America's leading maker of telecom equipment and software, including switching and transmission equipment and business communications systems. Lucent Technologies, started trading publicly in 1996 with an initial public offering that was, at the time, the largest in domestic history (Hayes). In December 1999, Lucent's stock reached a high of $77.78 and was the nation's fourth most widely held stock (Romero and Atlas). But by July 2001, Lucent's stock was trading at $6.43, the SEC was investigating its accounting practices, and several former, high-level managers had been sanctioned by the SEC or were under criminal indictment for wrong-doing while at Lucent (Romero and Atlas). The plunge in stock value (exhibit 1) was primarily the result of a November 21, 2000, announcement in which Lucent said it had to restate its financial statements as a result of an internal investigation revealing accounting irregularities. Lucent's restatement reduced revenues by $679 million (McGough, Bloomberg). As early as June 2000, media attention had begun to be directed towards Lucent's aggressive accounting policies. A Wall Street Journal article in June, 2000 suggested that Lucent Technologies might be engaging in creative accounting practices, noting that Lucent's receivables were rising at 49% while revenues were rising at only 20% (Wall Street Journal). Accounting Policy Reporting objectives Lucent's chief executive Richard McGinn had turned Lucent into a Wall Street star by increasing sales at a double digit pace and was determined to maintain Lucent's growth. Many observers believed that Lucent's sales projections were imposed on sales executives by the chief executive who was intent on maintaining a 20 percent growth rate (Berman and Blumenstein). Don Peterson was appointed the executive vice president and CFO; he reported to CEO Richard McGinn and was accountable for the Corporate Finance Organization. Peterson explained in a 1999 article that revenue targets were attained because stock options were used as motivational tools (William, Hart). Motivation to manage earnings was based on executive compensation for performing well on the stock market. One of Lucent's revenue growth tactics included offering deep product discounts to induce customers to purchase products now instead of delaying these purchases. The short term result of increased current period sales came at the expense of not realizing those sales in successive years. Other tactics designed to increase current period revenues and meet stated sales targets included the extension of generous credit terms to customers. 2005-07-03T21:07:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Lucent-Technologies-Company-Profile-27231.aspx Critically evaluate marginal and absorption costing 3.1 Introduction The key issue between absorption costing and marginal costing is how the costs of a business's input resources are best organised and presented so as to identify individual product/service and total business profit. The choice of costing system may be influenced by the costing method. Specific order costing methods will frequently deploy full absorption costing. One reason for this is that the pricing of each unique piece of work will invariably make reference to the total costs incurred. Continuous operation costing methods are more likely to deploy marginal costing (although this may be in addition to absorption costing) because of the opportunities in such an environment to use cost-volume-profit analysis. 3.2 Marginal and absorption costing Marginal costing is a method of inventory costing in which all variable manufacturing costs are included as inventoriable costs. All fixed manufacturing costs are excluded from inventoriable costs. They are instead treated as costs of the period in which they are incurred. Inventoriable costs are all costs of a product that are regarded as an asset when they are incurred and then become costs of goods sold when the product is sold. In product/service costing, a marginal costing system emphasises the behavioural, rather than the functional, characteristics of cost. The focus is on separating costs into variable elements (where the cost per unit remains the same with total cost varying in proportion to activity) and fixed elements (where the total cost remains the same in each period regardless of the level of activity). Whilst this is not easily achieved with accuracy, and is an oversimplification of reality, marginal costing information can be very useful for short-term planning, control and decision-making, especially in a multi-product business. In a marginal costing system, sales less variable costs measures the contribution that individual products/services make towards the total fixed costs incurred by the business. The fixed costs are treated as period costs and, as such, are simply deducted from contribution in the period incurred to arrive at net profit. Absorption costing is a method of inventory costing in which all variable manufacturing costs and all fixed manufacturing costs are included as inventoriable costs. In product/service costing an absorption costing system allocates or apportions a share of all costs incurred by a business to each of its products/services. In this way, it can be established whether, in the long run, each product/service makes a profit. Arbitrary assumptions have to be made 2005-07-03T21:07:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Critically-evaluate-marginal-and-absorption-costing-27230.aspx Financial Case Study on The Quality Furniture Company Introduction The Quality Furniture Company was a high-quality home furniture manufacturer. Its headquarters was in Scranton and distribution depends on the department stores, independent home furnishing retailers and regional chains. The Lloyd's, Inc and the Emporium department store were two of them. The Lloyd's, Inc had been a customer of Quality Furniture for over 30 years. It always kept the good relationship and credit with Quality Furniture Company. The Lloyd's Inc sold quality home furnishings from three locations and its sales had the seasonal feature, with a slight downturn in the midsummer months and slight upturn during the December holiday season. Its income came from 75% cash or credit card and 25% six-month instalment terms. The Emporium was a new customer of Quality Furniture's. It was a medium-sized department store, which was well-known for its extensive lines of home furnishings. The Emporium built the partner relationship with Quality Furniture Company in 1983. It also had a good credit to Quality Furniture Company. Quality Furniture Company gave them the same accounts that were on terms of 2%, 10, net 30. Since the beginning of 2001, the competition in the furniture market had intensified, especially in the aspect of quality of product and service. The situation continued in for three years and looked like worse. So Quality Furniture Company thought credit terms and financing of dealers became equally important and was "backed into the position of supporting numerous customers in order to maintain adequate distribution for its products." On the other hand, Quality Furniture Company reinforced its supervision to the financial status of customers. Ralphson had previously a $50,000 limit on the Lloyd's Inc and an $85,000 limit on the Emporium. He adhered strictly to obtaining current reports of the retails quarterly and at times monthly in order to keep a good credit situation. With relaxing demand and decreasing the sale volume, the Lloyd's Inc and the Emporium faced more and more difficult phases. The following is an analysis to the current finial positions of these two companies. Analysis 1. The Lloyd's Inc. Performance measure The Lloyd's Inc showed negative in the return on investment. According the exhibit 1, the Lloyd's Inc even had no return on its total assets during the last two years. And to the return on invested capital and return on owners' equity, the situations were the same. It meant the Lloyd's Inc had not eared on the investment 2005-07-03T21:05:00-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-Case-Study-on-The-Quality-Furniture-Company-27229.aspx The multi-billion dollar business of athletic footwear has become a grueling marketing battleground, with Madison Avenue taking center stage over the usual spotlight hog, Wall Street. Everyone is familiar with the pseudo art-house images and the emotive quality of the commercial spots, but perhaps very few know the business models that make these companies grow. What could be better than athletic shoes for building a brand name presence? The business has barriers to entry that can be characterized as a virtual "moat," rather than the medieval moat of Warren Buffet fame. In theory, anyone could start making shoes, but the brand awareness generated by star power and the distribution arrangements needed to become successful make start-ups a virtual impossibility. Hence, the athletic shoe arena is populated by only a few players, and even the most beaten down participants have substantial brand awareness that can be used to foster shareholder value. As far as demographics, kids around the world wear athletic shoes and constantly outgrow them, teens make them a fashion statement, and older consumers develop brand loyalties that are not easily changed. For the front runners, it is truly a magical business. Certainly the bellwether of the industry is Nike. From rather inauspicious beginnings selling running shoes out of the trunk of his car, Phil Knight fashioned Nike into an international titan (to mix mythology rather than metaphors). Indeed, the story of Nike over the last twenty years is as much about building its brand name as it is the exigencies surrounding the building of a business, such as the actual product characteristics, manufacturing, and distribution. Ironically, though, the company whose brand name Nike did the most damage to in the 1970s and '80s might now be its most threatening global competitor. On the Playing Field Where Fila has been tripped up in the key basketball shoe market in the U.S. by misfires with its Grant Hill IV shoe, Adidas North American sales rose 51% to about $390 million in its most recent quarter. Nike's footwear sales growth in the U.S. for fiscal 1997 lagged both of these companies, but was still strong at 36%, off a much larger sales base. Adding to growth for Nike, 1997 athletic apparel revenues grew 70%, which points to a key difference between Nike and the rest of the industry at the moment. One key element of the equation came about as a result 2005-07-03T01:45:49-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Athletic-Footwear-Industy-Snapshot-27211.aspx Lessons Learned from the Collapse of the Enron, the Giant o It must be very significant for a company the size of Enron to lose $50 billion in market capital over a period of ten months. It is also significant that a company of this stature can get away from their auditors and shareholders without anyone noticing that there is something seriously wrong. How is it possible that bankers, stock analysts, auditors and Enrons own board failed to comprehend the risks involved in this trading giant's methods. To blame Skelling; the president and COO of Enron since 1997, is also surprisingly. Why will a person build a company to a $50 billion giant based on lies and betrayal? If it was not significant enough to be America's seventh-largest corporation, Enron has ties to both the ruling and opposing political parties in America. The involvement of senators from the Republican and Democratic Party plays a role in Enrons failure. They were the people that turned a blind eye on Enrons troubles before the firm's bankruptcy. If they have spoken out sooner about what they knew, some investors could have been more careful. Enrons financial contributions to the Bush campaign and the Republican Party kept them from protecting Enron's employees and investors. If you look at the top management of Enron it looks like they were hiding their ideas and risks from each other without noticing that the company was on a downward path. Enron failure came as a surprise to everyone. If a company of this stature can fail to be successful how transparent were they actually. It is important that the rest of the world take notice of these happenings. No company can be cheating at the top, and get away with it forever. If any company do not make use of proper market research, you and bound to fail. Enron failed for a number of reasons. Enron's top management was in competition with each other, keeping everything secret. Arrogant is the word associated with Enron if you look at there web-page (enron.com). In Enron's lobby a banner with attitude spells out "the worlds leading company": Greed was evident from the start of the company, and the culture were talked about how much money they would make. Compensation plans were used to enrich the executives rather to generate profits for shareholders. In Enrons energy services division, which managed the energy needs of the large 2005-06-29T04:41:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Lessons-Learned-from-the-Collapse-of-the-Enron,-the-Giant-27185.aspx Marketing Mix of Nokia 7210: Why it Reaches the Young Demographic The product, which I have chosen for this assignment, is the mobile phone Nokia 7210. The Nokia 7210 phone has a new keypad layout and a versatile four-way scroll that makes it easy to navigate the high-resolution colour display. (Http1) Polyphonic sounds played through a speaker give improved sound quality for ringing tones and message alerts. The Nokia 7210 tri-band phone operates in three networks - EGSM 900 and GSM 1800/1900 - providing coverage on five continents. The Nokia 7210 phone is one of the first to have a Pop-Port interface connector. It supports advanced functionalities, such as digital enhancement identification, stereo audio, and fast data connectivity. Target Market: Teenagers/Young Adults (15 – 27yrs) Students Product: Anatomy: Core – Mobile Phone Actual – Nokia 7210 Augment – FM Radio, WAP, Games Classification: Speciality/Shopping Range: Nokia 7250 (enhancement/updated version of 7210) Networks (i.e. Orange, O2, T-mobile, Vodaphone) Brand: Nokia, Connecting People Nokia 7210, "A sign of Attitude" Product Life Cycle: early Growth/ late introduction Price: £299.95 - £219.99 (Argos, Carphone warehouse, Index) A Description Of the Criteria Used by the Company to Target the Selected Market The company Nokia have promoted the Nokia 7210 in a certain way to target the selected market. I will be looking at this in a bit more detail: - Age The age that Nokia has targeted for the selected target market is teenagers and young adults. The way the phone has been designed confirms this. The design of the Nokia 7210 and the way this targets the selected market is explained below. The Design The new Nokia 7210 has been designed so that it appeals to younger people mainly teenagers and young adults as it can be seen from the picture. It is small, colourful and trendy looking. Which what a lot of young people want in a mobile. It has a light blue front cover and a blue LCD screen. The phone has a new keypad layout and a versatile four-way scroll that makes it easy to navigate the high-resolution colour display. It has been given a urban image says Http1. This type of image is very popular among the younger generation as many clothes shops such as Top Shop/Top Man, New Look, Envy and River Island all have also adopted this image in the new range of clothes that they are providing as it can be seen in their 2005-06-26T21:11:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Mix-of-Nokia-Why-it-Reaches-the-Young-Demographic-27174.aspx The Importance and Future of Internet Marketing "Internet marketing is nothing more than another aspect of channel promotion management within the marketing mix." In the early 90's, Tim Berners-Lees developed an Internet based global information initiative and released it to the Internet Community. It didn't take long and the World Wide Web (WWW) began to bloom. Companies were being told incessantly that they needed to be on the web. So companies soon began to create a web presence by using some clipart graphics, a couple of construction signs, and some contact information and then said, "Hey look, we're on the World Wide Web." Since this introduction, technology has rapidly expanded and more and more people have adopted technology in their everyday lives. Thanks to the development of browsers such as Netscape and Explorer, and to their multimedia characteristics, the WWW has become extremely popular for commercial and personal publishing and has expanded the potential of the WWW and the Internet as a medium for marketing. Increasingly businesses are using the Web and e-commerce to gain a competitive advantage over real world businesses. Statistics show that in Australia 25% of households have Internet access and that 44% of adults accessed the Internet in 2000 . In today's fiercely competitive business environment, there is a strong need for an organisation to become globally competitive. E-Marketing provides us with a means of doing this. It is clear that there are fundamental differences between the operation of business on the Internet and in the real world. Indeed it would be surprising if this were not the case. Still there is widespread expectation that business will operate on the Internet in much the same way it operates in the real world. Unlike the real world the Internet is not based on scarcity but on abundance, there is an abundance of information and anyone can trade in it. Traditionally marketing has been defined as 'the process of planning and executing the conception, distribution, promotion and pricing of ideas, goods, and services to create exchanges that satisfy individual and organisational objectives.' using mass communication, a one to many process, using mediums such as billboards, television and newspapers. The introduction of the Internet offers many new and unique opportunities and challenges to marketers. Internet marketing has not completely revolutionised the concept of Marketing, but has incorporated it and expanded the opportunities available to marketers. Internet Marketing still uses the traditional concepts 2005-06-26T21:09:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Kristina--27173.aspx Love, Hate, and Target Audiences: Cosmopolitan Magazine vs Playboy Cosmopolitan is a magazine directed toward a twenty-something, female crowd who care about their appearance, health, and recreation. On the other end of the spectrum is Playboy, a magazine targeted at a primarily male audience. I am a subscriber to Cosmopolitan magazine, and would recommend it to other young female readers. However, because Playboy is not targeted toward my specifics, I am not and most likely never will be a subscriber. The covers of these two magazines are actually quite similar. They both depict an appealing female. They are portrayed, however, in an entirely different manner. The Cosmopolitan graces Cameron Diaz, an icon that women see as a sexy, independent, and successful woman. Women look to buy Cosmopolitan in stores because Cameron Diaz is someone who they admire; someone they subconsciously want to be like. Playboy has also presented its audience with a sexy female, but the sexuality behind the cover picture is a bit more explicit. This appeals to men readers because the cover serves as somewhat of a tease to what they might find inside the magazine after purchasing. The reasons that I am so much more prone to buy Cosmopolitan rather than Playboy is because Cosmopolitan does a much better job of depicting what I think a sexy female should look and act like. Playboy creates false images of women to appease the typical male fantasy. When reviewing the content of both magazines, it is obvious whom the magazine has attempted to target. Cosmopolitan has a considerable amount more copy than Playboy. Playboy contains mainly pictorials accompanied by captions or maybe a small article (if she’s the centerfold). The point is, Playboy writes just enough to get the point across. There are several cartoons throughout the magazine, mostly containing one- sentence punch lines. This magazine also contains fashion advice, quotes from how women feel on certain issues, and other manly issues. The advertising in this magazine is also focused on the male population with spots on thinks like: different alcohols, cigarettes, electronic devices, and sexual products. In Cosmopolitan, there is a lot more explanation on things. For example, the article in Cosmopolitan that is called “His Secret After-Sex List.” After reading the issue of Playboy I know that men probably do have after-sex lists. However, they don’t want to talk about it. There is no such thing in man-world as “making 2005-06-26T21:07:42-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Target-Audiences-Cosmopolitan-Magazine-vs-Playboy-27171.aspx How Harley-Davidson's Marketing strategy has Overcome Fierce Competition from Foreign Companies As many enthusiasts may describe it, the pride of owning a Harley-Davidson is the pride of owning an 'American Icon'. Harley-Davidson's (HD) positioning strategy can best be defined by its mission statement: "We fulfill dreams through the experience of motorcycling- by providing to motorcyclists and to the general public an expanding line of motorcycles, and branded products and services in selected market segments." Now in its 100th year, however, the ideal of owning an 'American Icon' has slowly dwindled out of the public's mind, due mostly to the competition from Japanese manufacturers like Honda and Yamaha. HD's strength's of its powerful brand image, maintaining good customer relationships, strong financial position, and superiority of technology and design are hindered by its weaknesses related to product capacity and unfulfilled demand for their products2. Strategic Direction and Marketing Objectives HD has chosen the strategic direction of targeting a younger market that is technologically conscious in order to increase its share in the performance cruiser market space. With the introduction of the new V-Rod motorcycle, HD is in a position of attaining a sizeable share in the performance cruiser marketplace. To target the younger market with the new product line, the company has adopted the following marketing objectives: to expand its current market (market expansion), diversify its product line (product diversification), and modify its marketing mix to target a younger demographic. During the 1970's, HD was facing a decline in market share due to increased competition with Japanese companies. By phasing out weak models, becoming more selective, and limiting sales and promotions, HD was able to carve out a niche in the marketplace which it enjoys today3. Now again faced with a period of decline, HD is relying on its newly adopted marketing objectives. First, HD needs to expand its potential customer base to include enthusiasts and non-enthusiasts males in the 35-44 age group. (INSERT MEDIAMARK DATA HERE) This is accomplished through the introduction of the V-Rod and positioning it in the market to a younger demographic. Secondly, HD needs to position the V-Rod to also appeal to first time buyers of motorcycles. HD's strong brand identity can help pull in new clients. Third, HD has to set an appropriate marketing mix that will help attract a younger consumer base. By using the low-end approach, which involves attracting a young audience to a brand name product with 2005-06-26T21:05:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Harley-Davidson-s-Marketing-Strategy-Overcame-Competition-27170.aspx "The Trendy Green Drink,” Marketing Techniques of Arizona Green Tea and Audience Appeal Having seen the packaging, the consumer picks up the drink out of curiosity, while other iced tea drinks have flashy fonts or colors for packaging, 'Arizona' Green Tea maintains its oriental look, providing a contrast that attracts the eye of the consumer and sells itself. The tea comes in a bottle with a light green opaque film around it. The film is illustrated and the top to the bottle is secured with a paper seal colored with an intricate and geometric design. The two other main ingredients follow the Green Tea wording on the label. The wording Green Tea itself is written in both English and Chinese. The target consumers are people still in or just out of college, therefore in their late teens to their late twenties. With a pale green background the bottle's illustrations are of a tree growing small pink flowers, as well as a golden sculpture and a blue river flowing in the back. The seal is around two inches in height and reaches the neck of the bottle. The 'Arizona' label itself is white and placed at a right angle, the rest of the wording is a dark green or black and a relatively smaller font. The illustrations on the film are simple and not intrusive, they provide the bottle with a calm look that high to mid-class college or recently graduated student might enjoy. By having not cluttered the bottle with very colorful or flashy images and given it, a simple, delicate design, the bottle seems calm. In a college or graduate student's life many things are changing and the students often try experiencing new non-traditional things, and the "packages record changing hairstyles and changing lifestyles" (Hine p.71). These new experiences may include less western ideas or products. 'Arizona' Green Tea does not thrust itself upon you but provokes a curious person to try it because it appears different. The tree illustrated on the bottle has tranquility provided by the simple curves with which it was draw and the limitation to two colors, brown for the branches and pink for the flowers. The paper seal is intricate; contradicting with the rest of the bottle, keeping it from being too simple and therefore bland. In a way it is similar to many other products that have a tendency to "sell their bottle rather than the drink." 2005-06-26T21:03:24-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/-quot-The-Trendy-Green-Drink,”-Marketing-Techniques-of-Arizo-27169.aspx Business Transactions Log, Satisfied vs. Dissatisfied Customers 1 (Satisfying, Paintball Junkies) My friend Rey De Vera, a new paintball supply retailer and proprietor of 511 Paintball in Montclair, didn't have enough capital to make huge investment in buying large amounts of product to stuff his shelves to sell. In particular he was looking for a paintball equipment manufacturer who can make paintball products easily available and at the lowest cost. He made contracts with Paintball Junkie's to be the manufacturer's retailer. In his contract with Paintball Junkie's the condition of selling their brand of products was that he sell a quota or minimum number of their product a week to maintain their business relationship as supplier and retailer. This saved him money and also gave him the flexibility of having not to be financially tied down to any one manufacturer's product made him as a new retailer focus on the business of selling. Paintball Junkies, a manufacturer of high quality paintball storage pods that held the paintballs like a cartridge does bullets and also of the 12x12 storage pod holders that professional tournament players around the world used for their ability to hold significantly more pods than their competitors. This is an example of trying to affect the marketing mix by effecting the distribution by obtaining shelf space for new products; gaining the cooperation of retailers and also effecting seeking distribution outlets in new markets; finding distribution partners. 2(Dissatisfying, National Paintball Supply) Rey De Vera also looked to National Paintball Supply to be his paintball supply wholesaler. National Paintball Supply's Marketing strategy was to target the new and up and coming paintball supply retailers who had little cash to spend on high priced equipment to stuff their shelves. This is evidenced by the fact that in most paintball publications like Splat, Paintball2Xtreme, and Action Sports Games that their advertisements readily show a supply of their products they sell with a number encouraging entrepreneurs to call them. Their advertisements are meant to entice entrepreneurs into thinking how easy it could be to own a large amount of equipment. But it lacks the clarity with regard to the name brands they do sell. In the printed ads in the magazines they should the logos blurred, out of focus, or so panoramic that it's only intended effect was to show the large amounts of equipment to be had a small price. Only after my friends initial order 2005-06-26T21:02:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Transactions-Log,-Satisfied-vs_-Dissatisfied-Customers-27168.aspx “News is not simply reported by the media, it is created by the media.” Discuss. "The 'content' of the newspapers is not fact about the world, but in a very general sense 'ideas'." Fowler (Roger Folwer - Language in the News - Routledge - 1991 - Pg.1) In today's society it would be naïve to assume that the news we receive is unbiased. It is safe to say the facts are reported if someone is murdered, the story maybe covered in the news, but the placement of the piece, emotive language used, duration or any other factors involved would immediately inform the audience to the merit of the story. In effect dictating to the viewer the version of reality 'they.,' the media/government want us, the audience to see. The factors that govern what is reported are news valves and as it is recognised that this code of conduct exists we can, I personally feel, say that the media can, and does, reflect the political agenda or climate. The question of the news being created has been a topic of discussion since the dawn of media studies. There are several different political theories or traditions of thought. The three I have chosen to concentrate on are the liberal, Marxist and pluralist theories. All to some extent see society as maintainable, they agree that the structure of society can be altered not by personal level events but by major structures, such as legalisation and reform. To understand each theory better we must first look at how each theory or idea is applied to our society and in this case the construction of the news, starting first with liberalism. This body of thought was established by the end of the eighteenth-century. It's economic theories favour the development of capitalism, seeing society as a group of 'rational individuals in pursuit of their self-interest.' Direction from the state is not needed, it's job is merely to provide 'external defence and internal order'. James Curran wrote: "A view of society as a system of class exploitation gave way to a new definition of reality in which different sections of the community were portrayed as being independent, with shared interest in common. The portrayal of labour as the source of wealth was replaced by the portrayal; of 'profit' as the mainspring of the economy." ( Ed. James Curran - Mass Communication as a social force, in the media: Context of Study - Open 2005-06-26T20:56:29-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Is-News-Created-or-Reported-by-the-Media-27167.aspx Marketing Concept and Marketing Segmentation in Practice: Haagen-Daaz INTRODUCTION Haagen-Dazs were the pioneers in the market for creating distinctive and indulgent taste experiences by marketing to an untapped segment - the adult ice cream lovers. The Haagen-Dazs brand quickly developed a loyal following. Its early success was created by word of mouth and praise. Without the benefit of advertising the story of an incredibly rich and creamy confection spread rapidly. At first, it was only available at gourmet shops but soon distribution expanded In 1983 Haagen-Dazs was sold to The Pillsbury Company , which remained committed to the tradition of superior quality and innovation on which Haagen-Dazs was founded. Since then, it has become a global phenomenon. Ice Cream lovers the world over now recognize the unique Haagen-Dazs logo as synonymous with the ultimate super-premium ice cream. However, for the company to reach where it is today, a sincere marketing effort was undertaken from its early days to understand customers and their needs. Since the beginning, Haagen-Dazs has kept a keen focus on developing an internal & external marketing orientation. They obtained their current competitive strengths to establish premium pricing from: *Developing the brand with an attached history of perfection and luxury *Using the finest ingredients to deliver product excellence *Invested in consumer research to understand tastes and preferences of customers *Used selective distribution and did not mass market until the minimum critical mass of opinion leaders were established *Did not change their objectives in between *Used creativity and innovativeness to support brand identity This report will discuss in detail the evidence that Haagen-Dazs does, indeed, practise the marketing concept of keeping customers needs as a priority for the rest of the business to follow. COMPETITOR ANALYSIS Year by year, new products and their competing items have entered into the field and have successfully created a slot for themselves. This phenomenon is greatly supported by the open down policy of the local government to the people coming from other lands for settlement and tourism. Ice creams are a product that has not seen their prime in the U.A.E. Its potential is tapped in a meagre form. Not that the commodity is in short supply. There is ample ice-cream available even at the moment. But, there is great scope of habitualizing the inhabitants of this place to consume more of the product, by exploiting the U.A.E. climate to its best potential. The United Arab 2005-06-26T20:54:36-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Concept-and-Marketing-Segmentation-Haagen-Daaz-27166.aspx Benefits of Integrated Marketing Communications to Organizations Integration of PR and Marketing The main benefits to using integrated marketing communications or IMC is that it is essential and cost effective to an organization. In addition, IMC addresses the issue of the four different messages that an organization needs to be aware of so it can control or at least influence. Also, there are six steps that if followed will effectively integrate public relations and marketing in order to meet an organizations goals. Public relations practitioners are often asked to do many other duties in coordination with marketing and advertising in order to achieve the organizations goals. If public relations is integrated with the total communication program, it will save time and money, but also improve the organization's ability to protect the integrity of the product or service (Miller & Rose, 1994). Everyday, public relations practitioners are asked to develop programs that support marketing and advertising strategies precisely and cost effectively. Public relations can play a strategic role in achieving marketing objectives, most importantly raising awareness (Miller & Rose, 1994). Also, public relations is expected to inform and/or influence behavior, build trust and create a climate for customer acceptance. These activities can best be done by working with marketing and advertising functions in the organization (Miller & Rose, 1994). In order for public relations, advertising and marketing to work more efficiently the three functions need to be more closely aligned. One approach to IMC was developed by program director, Tom Duncan and his faculty at the University of Colorado. Duncan's IMC Message Typology explains the four messages that an organization needs to be aware of so it can "control, or if not control, then perhaps influence." The four types of messages are; planned, inferred, maintenance and unplanned. The first message is a planned message, which is a deliberate communication activity such as: advertising, public relations and sales promotion. A planned message is the primary tool used in an organizations communication program. The second message is an inferred message, which are the "ones sent through the impressions the company or brand makes on the people." For example if a car is a Mercedes or a Ford, each brand has a different impression in the minds of consumers. These messages are controlled, but are often overlooked as being a part of the communication plan. The third type of message is a maintenance message. These are "communicated primarily through service- how 2005-06-26T20:53:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Benefits-of-Integrated-Marketing-Communications-27165.aspx E-business Marketing Plan of Oxygen and iVillage.com E-business Marketing Plan of Oxygen and iVillage.com Introduction The Internet has become increasingly popular. The number of Internet users is estimated to reach approximately 300 million by the end of 2002. (http:// www.sohu.com) With widespread acceptance and low-cost entrance, it is changing the world's economy. Developing business opportunities in the Internet has grown considerably. "The impact of the Internet on business is akin to previous innovations that transformed not only one business sector but every business sector."(Jaworski and Rayport, 2001) These significant changes in the environment require new approaches to think about business strategies. The Internet greatly impacts on the media industry in recent years. In the wake of Internet environment, traditional media are going through a shakedown. The Internet can combine all the functions of traditional media such as newspaper, magazine, radio and television, as well as offer new functions of e-commerce, distribution and interactivity. "There are strong grounds for believing that contemporary media are undergoing particularly dramatic technologically driven change, ...... This will be an era characterized by media interactivity, accessibility and diversity, with new freedoms for the customer."(Briggs and Cobley, 1998) The rules of competition have changed in the new economy. Therefore, it is necessary to explore the business strategies of media companies on the Internet. In this essay, iVillage.com and Oxygen.com are chosen to analyze their e-strategies from a customer's point of view. Backgrounds of iVillage and Oxygen iVillage Inc., established in 1995, is recognized as a leading women media company and the number one source for women's information online. iVillage.com is organized into branded communities across multiple topics of high importance to women and offers interactive services, peer support, content and online access to experts and tailored shopping opportunities. Content areas include Astrology, Babies, Beauty, Diet & Fitness, Entertainment, Food, Health, Home & Garden, Lamaze, Money, Parenting, Pets, Pregnancy, Relationships, Shopping, and Work. (http:// www.ivillage.com) Oxygen Media is an integrated media brand that combines the best qualities of cable television and the Internet to serve women. Founded in 1998 by Geraldine Laybourne, Marcy Carsey, Tom Werner, Caryn Mandabach and Oprah Winfrey, Oxygen consists of web sites including oxygen.com and Oprah.com, and a 24-hour cable network, available in 42 million homes, featuring music, talk, comedy, movies and sports. (http:// www.oxygen.com) Target market: Women Both iVillage.com and Oxygen.com focus on a specific niche market - women aged 25 to 49. According to the Women's 2005-06-26T20:49:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/E-business-Marketing-Plan-of-Oxygen-and-iVillage_com-27163.aspx Marketing Analysis – KFC Introduction KFC operates in 74 countries and territories throughout the world. It was founded in Corbin, Kentucky by Colonel Harland D. Sanders. y 1964, the Colonel decided to sell the business to two Louisville businessmen. In 1966 they took KFC public and the company was listed on the New York Stock Exchange. In 1971, Heublein, Inc. acquired KFC, soon after, conflicts erupted between the Colonel (which was working as a public relations and goodwill ambassador) and Heublein management over quality control issues and restaurant cleanliness. In 1977 a "back-to-the-basics" strategy was successfully implemented. By the time KFC was acquired by PepsiCo in 1986, it had grown to approximately 6,600 units in 55 countries and territories. Due to strategic reasons, in 1997 PepsiCo spun off its restaurant businesses (Pizza Hut, Taco Bell and KFC) into a new company called Tricon Global Restaurants, Inc. Reasons for going overseas Companies moves beyond domestic markets into international markets for the following reasons: *Potential demand in foreign market *Saturation of domestic markets *Follow domestic customers that go abroad *Bandwagon effect *Comparative advantage - some countries possess unique natural or human resources that give them an edge when it comes to producing particular products. This factor, for example, explains South Africa's dominance in diamonds, and the ability of developing countries in Asia with low wage rates to compete successfully in products assembled by hand. *Technological advantage - In one country a particular industry, often encouraged by government and spurred by the efforts of a few firms, develops a technological advantage over the rest of the world. For example, the United Sates dominated the computer industry for many years because of technology developed by companies such as IBM, Hewlett-Packard and Intel Organization structures for International Markets (Modes of Entry) *The mode of entry affects a company's entire marketing mix Exporting *Export merchant (Indirect) *Export agent (Direct) *Company sales branches Contracting *Licensing *Franchising *Contract manufacturing Direct Investment *Joint venture *Strategic alliance *Wholly owned subsidiaries Criteria for selecting a mode of entry 1.Company's marketing objectives: - production volume - time scale (long/short term) - coverage of market segaments 2.Company's size 3.Government encouragement or restrictions 4.Product quality requirements 5.Human resources requirements 6.Market information feedback 7.Learning curve requirements 8.Risks: political or economic 9.Control needs Mode(s) of entry for KFC *Franchising/Licensing *wholly owned subsidiary *Joint venture Firstly, KFC's traditional franchising strategy, which is emphasizing standardization and reducing financial risk, on the 2005-06-26T20:47:43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Analysis-–-KFC-27162.aspx The history of pizza hut and existing marketing mix of this company Pizza Hut strategic plan Executive Summary This proposal describes Pizza Hut and the introduction of a new product called "The Extreme." A brief history of Pizza Hut is provided at the beginning of this proposal along with an analysis of the fast food industry. Current trends in demographics and eating habits are included. A SWOT analysis has been done to identify Pizza Hut's strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats so that these factors can be taken into consideration in deciding whether or not to launch the new "Extreme Pizza." Some of the key elements of our marketing plan first describe the "Extreme Pizza." It will be the largest pizza on the market, with double the cheese and double the toppings. We will target the X and Y Generations, which is the fastest growing segment in America. This segment has been successfully targeted before using the "extreme" angle. This segment is has been a segment that hasn't been targeted to the level that they should in this industry and we plan on changing that. We have used past financial data to establish reasonable goals for the product and have set limits on promotional spending. We will be using a high/low pricing strategy, pricing this new pizza at $9.99. Our main sales promotions will be offering the Extreme Pizza bundled with Mountain Dew to target Generation X and Generation Y. We will be using direct channel distribution as well. This pizza will be available through dine-in, carry-out, delivery, and ordering on the Internet. 1)Introduction Pizza Hut was started in 1958, by two brothers in Wichita, Kansas. Frank and Dan Carney had the idea to open a pizza parlor. They borrowed $600 from their mother, and opened the very first Pizza Hut. In 1959, the first franchise unit opened in Topeka, Kansas. Almost ten years later, Pizza Hut would be serving one million customers a week in their 310 locations. In 1970, Pizza Hut was put on the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol PIZ. In 1986, Pizza Hut introduced delivery service, something no other restaurant was doing. By the 1990's Pizza Hut sales had reached $4 billion worldwide. In 1998, Pizza Hut celebrated their 40th anniversary, and launched their famous campaign "The Best Pizzas Under One Roof." In 1996, Pizza Hut sales in the United States were over $5 million. Out of all the 2005-06-26T20:44:46-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Background-on-Pizza-Hut-amp-Existing-Marketing-Mix-of-Comp-27161.aspx Marketing Plan for Amazon.com Executive Summary Amazon.com has a leading edge in the e-commerce world. It has a strong competitive advantage. However, as with many online retailers, there are certain aspects of conducting business over the web that creates difficulties and the need of marketing planning. This marketing plan consists of environmental scan, customer behavioural patterns, current segment market, marketing strategies and recommendations in strategies. 2) Introduction Amazon.com is the largest online retailer. The company opened its virtual doors in July 1995 by Jeff Bezos in Seattle. Since then it has enjoyed rapid expansion in all aspects of its operations, including business turnover, and a spectacular rise in share value since public floatation in 1997. Amazon.com sells only on-line and is essentially an information broker. Amazon.com has constantly growing database of over 12 million customers in more than 160 countries. Amazon.com is the place to find and discover anything customers want to buy online. They have earth's biggest selection of products, including millions of books, free electronic greeting cards, online auctions, videos, CDs, DVDs, toys, games, electronics, kitchenware, computers, and more. 2.1) Competitive position - Amazon.com is the biggest on-line international retail store in the world - Strong in-house internet technology with excellent offline customer services - A huge database of loyal customers - base of over 12 million shoppers - The company has grown to a massive online superstore with recent sales of $1.64 billion in 1999, an increase of 270% from the previous year's sales - Amazon.com has a very powerful position in the media industry. - Amazon.com is use the Internet to transform book buying into the fastest, easiest, and most enjoyable shopping experience possible. Market share of online book business 2.2) Amazon's mission - To become the largest selection of select retail categories Amazon.com seeks to be the world's most customer-centric company, - To provide the best shopping experience and become the place where people come to find and discover. - To convince all online customers to use Amazon as their search platform. - Provides excellent customers personalize services and discount profitable prices. - Let customers can find and discover anything they might want to buy online at Amazon.com 2.3) Corporation objectives 2005-06-26T20:41:01-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-Plan-for-Amazon_com-27159.aspx Critical Examination of Market Research for a Proposed Project 1.Introduction This document is a commentary that critically examines the research proposal for investigating the impact of marketing activity in the recruitment of students from the Republic of Ireland to the University of . This commentary looks at the rationale for carrying out the research and how the research methodology was derived. Before embarking on any research project Zikmund (2000) suggests that a cost-benefit analysis be undertaken. Questions that should be asked include: a) Will the pay off or rate of return be worth the investment? b) Will the information gained by research improve the quality of the decision to an extent sufficient to warrant the expenditure? c) Is the proposed research expenditure the best use of available funds? The cost in this scenario for research is £2,000 plus researcher's time. If the research identifies ways of attracting more students to the University then this should generate more than sufficient funds to justify this expenditure as well as ensuring that the substantial sums invested in normal activity does produce some benefit. 2.Defining the problem As Smith and Fletcher (2001) point out " a problem defined is a problem half solved". The nature of the problem at is multifarious. A lack of evaluation and assessment has not been developed to adequately judge the value of activity and by default does not allow for planning and allocation of resources to increase the impact of marketing activity or decide that resources can be better allocated elsewhere. If the management at the University of can have information on: <sum> How many students come from Ireland? <sum> How were they attracted initially to the University? <sum> What activity conducted does attract students? <sum> What percentage of the market share do we have and is there room for expansion? Market research should clarify whether current perceptions are correct and give them evidence on which to base future decisions. But in order to do this the research objectives will have to be defined. This is important because as Hague and Jackson (1999) state " every research project should have a defined and explicit objective which succinctly states why the research is being carried out" and "all other aspects of planning and carrying out the research flow from this perspective". To define the research objectives and thus get a better understanding of the research problem exploratory research will be used. This will 2005-06-26T20:38:38-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Critical-Examination-of-Market-Research-for-a-Proposed-Proje-27158.aspx The 10 Greatest Marketing Mistakes and How to Avoid Them It’s a certain fact that business these days is more competitive than its ever been. To stay alive these days, you just can’t just offer a quality product at a fair price. These days, you have to know how to market effectively. Unfortunately, most businesses have no idea of how to get the most out of every marketing dollar that they spend. You should demand that ou get the best results from every dime you drop into marketing! Most companies spend more time planning their company Christmas party than they do creating powerful, persuasive, marketing communications. Now this can stop. Herein are the 10 greatest marketing mistakes and how you can avoid them. Before I get into it, let me tell you why I put this together. As I consult with current clients, bring on new clients, and market for more, I am learning more and more. It’s come to my attention time and time again, when I bring on a new client I find that they are making almost the exact same mistakes as another of my clients was, in a totally unrelated field! These marketing mistakes aren’t confined to a singular industry. These mistakes I’ve found across the board. I have worked with computer software companies, food companies, cable sales companies, real estate brokers, financial consultants, and many more. All of these companies had most, if not all of these 10 greatest marketing mistakes present in their operations. If one or two of these mistakes dont apply to you, then you should congratulate yourself! You must already be on the road to marketing success! Here they are in no particular order: Mistake # 1: Your business focuses on itself, and not on your prospects and customers needs. Does this seem too obvious? Look through your yellow pages. Pick them up right now and glance through. Answer this question: Are most of the ads telling you what benefits you get if you if you become a customer? Or are the ads telling you about the vendors, where they are, how wonderful they are, what they do, how great their quality is, how great their service is, and all about them? 95% of the ads are totally focused on the business and not on what the business can do for YOU, the prospect! Take a look at the ads in the 2005-06-26T20:36:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-10-Greatest-Marketing-Mistakes-and-How-to-Avoid-Them-27157.aspx The Effective Leadership of Self-managing Work Teams The main topic of my chosen article is regarding about 'The Effective Leadership of Self-managing Work Teams'. This topic is presented on the week 8 and 10 in our unit guide with the title 'Individuals and Groups' and "Leadership". In the textbook this topic is presented in the chapter 14 and chapter 16 which come from part 5 'Leading'. Referring to the article, the main arguments presented by the authors is that external leader behaviors do support to the self-managing work team success. Their objective is also to increase the understanding of the role of external leader who is the leader to whom a team reports to. Self-managing work team are natural work groups where they work together to perform a task. They take on management into their works where each of them performs as a supervisors and managers. According to the article, leading a team that manages itself will need a distinctive approach of leadership. They carry out more responsible with more complex and demanding roles than the traditional team leadership. For the traditional team leadership they are more expected to lead by monitoring and managing those teams while the external leaders are expected to lead by monitoring and managing back to their teams. Subsequently, boundary spanning activities where external leader need to interact with various organizations who supply the team with resources and support is very essential to determine their success in that role. (Druskat and Wheeler, 2003: 435; Robbins, Bergman, Stagg and Coulter, 2003: 737) In order to be effective leader in the self-managing work teams which is also known as self-directed work teams, they must know how to influence a team and others in an organization. For instance, their ability to persuade their team members to listen, talk and accept advice will be much more advantage to them as a leader. Secondly, they ought to know how and with whom to build relationships which involve networking especially with their subordinates. There are times when self-management team need the leader to seek and scout for information too because when they do not receive the information there are the risk of becoming over bounded. Thus, ability of the leader to scout and share the information is very important as it will facilitate team self-management and the effectiveness. In self-management team they are expected to have their own decisions. Here is when external leaders 2005-06-26T20:31:15-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Effective-Leadership-of-Self-managing-Work-Teams-27156.aspx The Role of Cognitive Development, Logic, and Emotionality in Management Critical Thinking: The Role of Cognitive Development, Logic, and Emotionality Definitions of critical thinking range from simple statements reflecting one's ability to create logical conclusions based on reasoning to more complex definitions which take into consideration a person's emotions, personal feelings, and cultural biases. According to the U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics, "critical thinking is a broader term describing reasoning in an open-ended manner, with an unlimited number of solutions" (Erwin, 2000, p. 11). Critical thinking requires that "the thinker improve the quality of his or her thinking by skillfully taking charge of its very structures and by imposing intellectual standards upon them"(University of Phoenix, 2003). The structures of critical thinking include cognitive skills, emotion, personal feelings, judgments, argument, and logic. Cognitive development plays a significant role in a person's ability to think critically. Jean Piaget "proposed the idea that cognitive development consisted of the development of logical competence, and that the development of this competence consists of four major stages"(University of Alberta, 2003). It is not until early adolescence, around age 11 or 12, that a person enters the Formal Operations Stage and becomes capable of more sophisticated logical thought. This, according to Piaget is the final stage in human cognitive development. Other theorists contend that Piaget's initial theories are either flawed or incomplete. Vygotsky, a Russian psychologist, believes that an individual's higher mental functions develop through social interaction. In others words, humans learn from their interactions with others. "Vygotsky asserted that development is complex and is effected by social and cultural contexts. Biological and cultural development are interrelated and do not develop in isolation" (Emory University, 2003). In contrast to Piaget's four finite stages of development, "Vygotsky believed that intellectual development was continually evolving without an end point (Emory University). Proposing a fifth stage to Piaget's four stages of cognitive development was Klaus Riegel. Riegel suggested that Dialectical Reasoning be considered whereby a person's "mental processes move freely back and forth among all the Piagetian stages"(Hoffman). Not unlike Vygotsky, Riegel did not believe that cognitive development could be defined in finite terms. Emotion and personal feelings are often referred to as barriers to critical thinking. Indeed, emotional influences have the ability to "bury, twist, and fragment the thinking process"(Kirby & Goodpaster, 2002, p. 30). However, these same emotions and feelings are a necessary part of the critical 2005-06-26T20:27:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Role-of-Cognitive-Development,-Logic,-and-Emotionality-27155.aspx Discusses how employees affect consumer behavior and what can be the best ways to improve their effectiveness (personal experience) Summary I am going to discuss how employees affect consumer behavior and what I believe are the best ways to improve their effectiveness. I will be drawing upon my experiences as a consumer and working in a retail environment. Comments No one fulfills your corporate philosophy or promotes your products and services more than your employees. They are like ambassadors representing the United States when the president can not be there in person. You need them to act on your behalf when dealing with customers. If the customers aren't treated well once in your store or business, what good does it do to use marketing to get them into your store or business. You also have the problem of each customer who was treated poorly, telling other people about their bad experience with your company. This might not seem like a big deal, but it is and it's even worse when people are telling others how great your competitor treated them. I've had a few experiences where I have felt that I haven't been treated properly or fairly by store employees. Most of the time I've been able to find another person to help solve my problem and I was able to walk away a satisfied customer. There are some instances when I have consciously gone to a competing business, because of the way I was treated. I know I am not the only person who does this, so I feel it is very important to have a work force that helps market your products, by being friendly and knowledgeable. This will prevent customers from turning away from your products and services. Ask your workers if they would recommend your product or service to their family and friends. If your people lack confidence in your company, you need to find out why and fix it. You want them to be proud to use your product or service so they can convey this feeling to the customers. Some of the things that turn off consumers are long lines and employees who don't pay attention or just go through the motions. Rudeness, impatience, and judgmental 2005-06-26T20:26:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Consumer-Behavior-and-How-Employees-Affect-it-27154.aspx Conflict Management and Resolution for Teams Conflict Management and Resolution for Teams "Conflict is the gadfly of thought. It stirs us to observation and memory. It instigates to invention. It shocks us out of sheep like passivity, and sets us at noting and contriving." -- John Dewey. When a group of individuals with varying experiences, thought processes and expectations work together as a team, conflict is inevitable. While many people see conflict as a sign of failure, teams can potentially use conflict as an asset. Understanding conflict dynamics and cultural approaches to conflict management help teams to distill key points vital to a successful and productive resolution of team conflict. There are four basic types of conflict: emotional, cognitive, constructive and destructive. Emotional and destructive conflicts lead to an inability to resolve issues. Cognitive and constructive conflicts are a necessary part of finding successful solutions as a team. Emotional conflict is "personal, defensive, and resentful" (Thompson, Aranda, and Robbins, 2000) and of is based on anger, personality clashes, ego and tension. Emotional conflict occurs when individual interests trump the interests of the team as a whole. This type of conflict interferes with the effort of a team to resolve a problem. Cognitive conflict occurs when team members voice different ideas and is "largely depersonalized" (Thompson, Aranda, and Robbins, 2000). As opposed to emotional conflict, his type of conflict is based on arguments about the merits of ideas, plans and projects. Because cognitive conflict is not based on personal feelings, it forces team members to rethink problems and arrive at a collective decision. Constructive conflict, as the name suggests, helps teams resolve problems and uncover new solutions to old issues in a productive manner (Thompson, Aranda, and Robbins, 2000). It allows change and growth to occur within a team environment. Destructive conflict, like emotional conflict, causes dysfunction when a "lack of common agreement leads to negativism" (Thompson, Aranda, and Robbins, 2000). This disrupts the progress of all group members. Destructive conflict in teams diminishes the possibility of any problem resolution. Understanding and defining conflict terminology and conflict management is a first and important step in successful conflict management. Since conflict is inevitable in any team or group situation, groups must cooperate to reach a successful resolution of any issues. Western conflict management theory places an emphasis on understanding and cooperation for the successful and permanent resolution of conflict. Since more than one issue, and more than one type of conflict, 2005-06-26T20:24:41-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Conflict-Management-and-Resolution-for-Teams-27153.aspx Total Quality Management: What is Tqm and how can it be implemented in industry today? In society today quality plays an important role in customer satisfaction. A classic example of customer's being discouraged due to poor quality would be the case of Skoda cars. In the 80's and early 90's Skoda was known for it poor quality and this in turn affected both the brand image and also sales of the company. Once the Volkswagen Group overtook it in 1994, strategies have been implemented to put quality back into the product and to put the customer first. However before understanding the concept of "total quality management" (TQM) one must define quality. Quality is said to be "the ability to satisfy, or even exceed, the needs and expectations of the customer" (Mullins 1998). This quote is far more contemporary than some of the older definitions of quality below as there is the broader understanding that quality should exceed the expectations of the customer and also indicates quality is intangible and the level of quality often changes. Other define quality as: "Quality is fitness for use"(Juran 1974) (4) or "Quality is a conformance to requirements or specifications" (Crosby 1979) - (4); however these definition have no inherent aspect on the customer; currently all businesses should be market orientated and hence any notion of quality should be developed for the customers benefit. TQM is a management approach to long-term success, through achieving complete customer satisfaction. TQM is the complete approach to improve organizational performance and effectiveness. There are numerous definitions of TQM, but Mullins 5th edition (1999) says TQM is: "A way of life for an organization as a whole, committed to total customer satisfaction through continuous process of improvement, and the contribution and involvement of people" (3) Laurie J Mullins Management and Organization al Behaviour 5th Edition 1999 One should be aware that it is not a departmental project or quality saving campaign; but TQM is a philosophy that the organization adapts and implements throughout the company for a mutual benefit i.e. the companies and customers. The participation of all members of an organization in improving processes, products, services, and the culture they work in is the basis of TQM. TQM can be viewed as a necessary means to achieve increased sales, reduce costs, and develop a competitive advantage through enhanced product quality (Fig 1 -Deming Chain Reaction) (9). Deming believed that profits are 2005-06-26T20:23:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/What-is-TQM-and-How-Can-it-be-Implemented-in-Industry-Today-27152.aspx The Importance of Organizational Behavior and its Affect on the Company. Discuss how the study and practice of organizational behavior can make a difference, if any, in the operation of a business. We have discussed the implementation of organizational behavior principles in the company for quite some time. Some feel that there is no need to add these principles to the agenda, "that employee benefits are unrelated to both worker performance and perceived organizational support" (Lambert, 2000, p.801). The Board requested that we investigate these principles before adding them. The results of that investigation follow. The core of any organization is its personnel and our success depends on our people. The goal of this company is to increase our profitability, increase growth and innovation, and introduce new values and culture into the organization. In order for us to remain competitive, we need to have "maximum quality, minimum cost, and [maintain peak performance]" (Ahls, 2001, p. 6). I have noticed that the staff operates by a "hard-skills" ethic; they deal with the technical and functional aspects of the job but not the social. "Soft skills" work synergistically with the hard skills. The soft skills like team work, communication, problem solving, and leadership together with the hard skills of computer knowledge, filing, and financial analysis make for a well-rounded employee (South Dakota's Governor's Office of Economic Development, Skills). The technical aspect of our company was top rate. Our employees came here with great talent, however they seem to have stalled and that along with the high absenteeism and increased turnover indicates that they are looking for something more in their jobs. As you are aware, we recently completed an employee survey to understand our employees' perceptions of the organization better since "employee behaviors are based on perceptions, not reality" (Robbins, 2001, p. 94). Though participation in the survey was voluntary, 84% of the employees took part. There has been much research that provides evidence showing that factors in the work environment relate to "outcomes such as employee motivation, job satisfaction, intentions to quit, job performance, and even organizational productivity" (Altmann, 2000, p. 16). That would explain why 77% of employees rated "I would proudly recommend this organization as a good place to work to a friend or relative" as disagree or strongly disagree (HR Solutions, Inc.). The supervisory section of the survey also rated low. The staff would like to see their supervisors and senior management more 2005-06-26T20:22:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Importance-of-Organizational-Behavior,-Affect-on-Company-27151.aspx Statistical Process Control "Properly applied, S.P.C. is virtually foolproof. It is simple to use, involves little or no complicated mathematics, and almost guarantees to pay for itself in saved effort." (Wilson) Definition Outputs from a manufacturing process will vary - perhaps minutely - from the exact specification, and deliveries from a service will differ in quality and substance. These inconsistencies in quality require constant monitoring to see if they are random, regular, haphazard, important, or evidence of a problem. The monitoring and controlling should be applied to the process not the product, and can be greatly facilitated by S.P.C. Process control means controlling production by checking its quality while the work is still in process. Implementing S.P.C. means applying statistical techniques and analysis to that control function. As S.P.C. is about measuring the quality of work in process, its implementation is usually allied to techniques related to quality systems management. Advantages of implementing S.P.C. Chaudhry and Higbie report the following benefits from applying S.P.C. in a chemical plant: •improved production efficiency •a more consistent product •greater reliability - shifting control efforts from product to process •greater ease in pinpointing problem occurrences •provision of a usable measure of performance •clearer communication of objectives •improved customer relations. Disadvantages of implementing S.P.C. S.P.C. can take time to apply rigorously but applications do show that there are few, if any, disadvantages to S.P.C. Its application must remain relevant and useful, rather than becoming a system 'for its own sake.' Action checklist 1. Plan the programme and communicate organization-wide Firstly, you need to get the overall project context right with those over-arching elements essential to all successful change programmes: •securing proactive and continuous top management commitment •appointing the right project leader and obtaining the right expertise •establishing flexible time-frames and broad resource requirements •communicating regularly with the implementation teams and with everyone else who has involvement •preparing an effective and continuous training programme. Secondly, you need to adopt a specific operational plan or process to follow, such as: •locate the process to be tackled •research the extent of the problem to be controlled •specify objectives, and resources, data and training needed •select the appropriate technique(s) to control the problem •plan the equipment, materials and expertise for the technique(s) chosen •ensure the steps of the techniques will be adhered to identify possible causes of the problem test possible solutions. 2. Identify which tools and techniques may be the most appropriate There is a tool 2005-06-26T20:20:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Statistical-Process-Control-27150.aspx Summary of Machiavelli's "The Prince" This paper summarizes the germinal leadership book, The Prince by Machiavelli. After a brief summary, the paper will discuss the importance of the book to leadership and the lessons that can be applied to educational leadership. Summary The Prince begins with an overview of the two types of Princedoms which are, according to Machiavelli (1513/1992), hereditary or new (p. 1). Hereditary Princedoms are those that are passed down through many generations. New Princedoms can be blended into hereditary Princedoms; these are usually geographically close to the hereditary Princedom and its people generally speak the same language. New Princedoms can also be wholly new and are often obtained via a hostile means; in many cases, the new Princedom's people are of a different language and culture. To be successful running and keeping control of a mixed or wholly new Princedom, the leader must consider several factors. The method by which the Prince came into leadership may be cruel or heroic. New laws and institutions may be introduced; for this the Prince must decide whether to live in the new Princedom or set up colonies to maintain rule. A third alternative is destruction, "for in truth, there is no sure way of holding other than by destroying, and whoever becomes master of a City accustomed to live in freedom and does not destroy it, may reckon on being destroyed by it" (Machiavelli, 1513, p. 11). The book presents all three alternatives in the form of examples of leaders both historic and his contemporaries. Next, the book turns to a discussion of potential threats to power. Machiavelli asserts that the Prince must remain powerful and always be wary of powerful outsiders who might try to unseat him. He says, "that some such person will be called in by those of the Province who are discontented either through ambition or fear" (Machiavelli, 1513, p. 5). For this reason, the Prince should act as protector of his weaker neighbors and seek to weaken those who are stronger. Going on, Machiavelli discusses the importance of modeling oneself after those who have been successful. He stresses that "the wise man should always to follow the roads that have been trodden by the great, and imitate those who most excelled, so that if he cannot reach their perfection, he may at least acquire something of its savour" (Machiavelli, 1513, p. 12). In addition to modeling oneself after those 2005-06-26T20:19:31-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Summary-of-Machiavelli-s-quot-The-Prince-quot-27149.aspx Small Business Critical Appraisal: Sun WorldWide Express 1.0 BACKGROUND ON SMALL BUSINESSES Public perceptions of the small business have been influenced by politicians and theorists from the extremes of neglect and ignorance to hype and over-expectation. In the 1950's and 60's small business's were seen as out-of-date. By the 1970's and 80's they were seen as a great contribution towards the economy and by the 1990's, SME's were seen as the post to improving employment. Record numbers of people have launched companies over the past two decades, from 2.4m to 3.7m (Appendix 1(i)) in the UK. A variety of competitive, economic, demographic shifts have accounted for this, "society depends on entrepreneurs to provide the drive and risk-taking necessary for the business system to supply people with the goods and services they need". (Scarborough and Zimmer, 2000, p. 34) On a global comparison, the increase has a common feature across all borders. The UK and Europe have similar profiles. The USA concentrates its workforce in larger companies compared to Europe and Japan. (Appendix 1(ii)) It is worth noting the difficulty to compare as definitions vary. The failure rate for small businesses is high; primary cause is incompetent management. Successful entrepreneurs hold a positive attitude that these are just stepping stones to success. 2.0 BACKGROUND & HISTORY Sun Worldwide Express (SWE) is a courier company founded in 1999, pioneered by Mr. Desai and Mr. Thompson. The partnership emerged when one of the entrepreneurs risked facing job loss from the parent company; United Cargo Handling (UCH). Mr. Desai and Mr Thompson own an equal share of the company of 49% and UCH owns 51%, however, SWE operates independently. Initiation reasoning results from several factors, e.g. redundancy, experience development, customer support and determination. 2.1 SWE OPERATIONS SWE is concerned with business-to-business transactions in the Courier and Despatch sector. Service involves deliveries from small packages at very short distances at very short notice and to despatch or parcel delivery tends to demand speed and reliability, with time constraints usually on a 24-hour, 48-hour and 72-hour basis. The internet revolution has aided SWE for proof of delivery which is invariable required. (Appendix 2(i)) 2.2 COURIER AND DESPATCH INDUSTRY The sector has seen an increase in 1999, from £4.21bn to £4.5bn in 2000. (Mintel International Group Limited, 2000) The reason for such an increase is number of external developments impacting on the market SWE have to adapt to a rapidly changing business 2005-06-26T20:18:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Small-Business-Critical-Appraisal-Sun-WorldWide-Express-27148.aspx Critically evaluation of Porter's five forces, Value Chain Analysis, Balanced Scored Card Given the demands of today's competitive and dynamic environment, it is quite challenging to understand strategic issues facing organizations and develop the capability for long term organizational success. This report aims to present a critically analysis of three frameworks across organizations: Porter's Five Forces, Value Chain and Balanced Scorecard. Such critical evaluation includes identifying the benefits and limitations of three frameworks and considering some implementation issues within organizations. As powerful strategic management tools, Porter's Five Forces, Value Chain and Balanced Scorecard frameworks are linked and interacted each other in a wide circle of business in context. Porter's Five Forces and Value Chain both help strategic managers to make decision on the basis of organizational external environment and internal analysis. The two frameworks are especially valuable for managers to develop and implement long-term strategy for organizations so as to build and maintain competitive advantages in the long run. And Balanced Scorecard can ensure and monitor the executions of strategy made by managers in a set of well-structured measures. However, beyond the linkage between them, these three respective frameworks do have its own particular emphasis which is applied in different directions among organizations. Porter's Five Forces mainly focuses on the industry structure analysis in the organizations external environment. It reveals the source of competition in an industry and external influence including the threats and opportunities of the industry that organization has to face to obtain competitive advantage. Value Chain highlights the explorations of internal analysis of a chain of business activities. It explores the role and contribution of organization's resources corresponding to primary and support activities in a cost-effective way to gain cost advantage. As for the Balanced Scorecard, it emphasizes the evaluation of organizational overall performance by integrating financial measures with other key performance indicators. And measuring overall performance in organization's balanced scorecard is directly linked to its strategy to make profits in the long run. All in all, it is important to be aware of their benefits and weakness as well as the potential problems of three approaches when applying them real business operations, and it largely relies on successful implementation by senior managers in organizations. Introduction In today's dynamic and competitive business environment, survival, growth and profitability are the essence goals of all industries. Nowadays, Porter's Five Forces, Value Chain and Balanced Scorecard frameworks are currently being adopted as the powerful management 2005-06-26T20:17:01-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Porter-s-Five-Forces,-Value-Chain,-Balanced-Score-Card-27147.aspx Decision Making in Action Decision Making Process in Action According to Webster's Dictionary the definition of "decision" is the "1. a: act or process of deciding b: a determination arrived at after consideration: CONCLUSION." (http://www.m-w.com/). Organizations and individuals make decisions every day. Decisions are made by flipping a coin, taking a guess, thinking about the thoughts and feelings of others, considering values and beliefs, complying with a mission statement, or picking a solution with more positive than negative consequences. In order to understand the decision making process, we have to look at exactly what goes in that process and apply it to a real world work situation. According to the Management Mentor there are 5 major steps in the decision-making process. By outlining the steps and applying them to a data capture problem in Safety we can see the process in action and how important critical thinking is to the process. Step One: Identify the problem and the criteria to be met (www.themanagementor.com). Misdiagnosing a problem can result in bad decisions. Evaluating the problem in a new perspective helps decision-makers think out of the box. Another issue in identifying problems is that sometimes symptoms are identified and not the actual cause of the problem. Decisions can end up biased against the wrong aspects of a process. In the Safety redesign, departments were divided by pre-market and post-market trials. Further division occurred by breaking up collection in therapeutic areas. A data capture process is the perfect choice to illustrate step one. In medical trials, if a patient has an "adverse event," which can be anything from a cold to cardiac arrest, it is reported to the company. The number of these events needs to be gathered monthly to report to the Medical Directors in the therapeutic areas. It was a time consuming manual process of hand counting the adverse events that Safety received. On-demand data was impossible to get and the information was inaccurate. The managers blamed the administrative coordinator's skills in the past. What I saw experienced was a process that needed to be developed to accurately capture the information in a timely manner. It was the process not the person that needed to be fixed. Step Two: Develop a list of alternative actions (www.themanagementor.com). Brainstorming a list of possible solutions is the next step. Asking for information on how other groups gather this information helps with coming up with the alternatives. In Safety 2005-06-26T20:14:05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Decision-Making-in-Action-27146.aspx Is Strategic Planning and Information Systems Strategic Planning Relevant to all Organizations? Strategy Strategy is a broad based formula for how business is going to compete, what its goals should be, and what policies will be needed to carry out these goals. The essence of formulating competitive strategy is relating a company to its environment. Porter (1980), Competitive Strategy The definitions of strategy change from scholar to scholar. There is no agreed way to define strategy as the interpretations of each writer are based on methodological preference (Robson, 1997). The above definition is an example of Porters stance on what a strategy is. Strategic planning Strategic management is concerned with deciding on strategy and planning on how that strategy is to be put in to effect via: •Strategic Analysis •Strategic Choice •Strategic execution The above definition of strategic management is by Johnson and Scholes(1993) and essentially outlines that strategies are formulated and concern all organizations, large or small. Strategic planning is a continual process within an organization, the people responsible for the success of strategic planning outline the desired future, then devise a strategy for making it happen. Strategic planning by its very nature is adaptive and the devisor is always developing it to be relevant for the future. Key environmental factors are predicted and their influence on the organization looked at and then optimum measures are taken so the organization can benefit from these environmental factors. Business planning and strategic planning are two different things. Business plans are usually for an outside audience where the strategic plans are developed for internal purposes. Also strategic plans look at the 'bigger picture' where business planning looks at certain elements of an organization. The Composition of a Strategic Plan Strategic plans are generally made up of one or more interconnected elements; Vision, mission, Values, assessment, goals/objectives, strategy and outcomes. They also incorporate strategic management principles and models. A possible example of a strategic plan follows: The Vision shows the dreams of the organization and broadly capture future services, markets and structures but do not go in to great detail. The Mission outlines customers, competitors and markets. It shows "a desired position in a predicted future world" and a "bulls eye or target of the strategy"(Yavitz & Newman, 1982). "A mission should not commit a firm to what it must do in order to survive but what it chooses to do in order to thrive" (Ackoff, 1986). Values 2005-06-26T20:13:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Is-Strategic-Planning-Relevant-to-all-Organizations-27145.aspx Critical thinking and forces of influence. This paper describes the forces of influence surrounding a sexual harassment issue I dealt with. This paper will describe a sexual harassment incident that I dealt with as a store manager for Vans. The paper will be formatted as follows: setting, framing, thinking, other forces of influence, and differences. SETTING A few years ago when I was still working as a store manager, I was approached by one of my part-time salespeople. Michele was a pretty, intelligent, 18-year old senior who worked for me 2-3 nights a week. She visited the store on her day off asking to speak to me. She then relayed to me a series of incidents that occurred between her and my Assistant Manager, Jonathan. Jonathan was 24 years old. He had been working for me for approximately one year. He was a good-looking surfer and skater who lived in Huntington Beach. Jonathan (I later found out) was also a flirt who liked to compliment the girls who worked at Vans, along with making sexual innuendos or light jokes about sex. Michele started to tell me her story. Unbeknownst to me, Jonathan had been flirting with Michele while at work for some time. He had made comments that alluded to his wanting to visit her apartment (Michele did not live at home). In her words, she flirted back at him and gave him permission to come to her apartment, thinking he would never show up. One Saturday, Jonathan and Michele worked an opening shift together. He again made comments that he was going to visit her after work, and she agreed. Later that afternoon, he did show up, much to Michele's surprise. According to Michele, they spent some time giving each other backrubs, which led to kissing. At this point Jonathan started asking her to go further with him physically, stating that he wanted to have sex with her. She then told him that he had to leave and literally pushed him out of the door, as her roommate was supposed to show up. At work, the same thing started to happen. Michele and Jonathan regularly closed together one night per week. After the store would close, Jonathan would approach Michele to kiss her (which was consensual), and than try to pull her into the back room, asking for sexual favors. Michele would decline, but Jonathan would not stop asking or alluding to the physical relationship 2005-06-26T20:11:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Personal-Account-on-Sexual-Harassment-Issue-27144.aspx Experimental Training, a Fundamental Element of a Corporation’s Success Training employees is a fundamental element of a corporation’s success. A company succeeds only as well as the people running it can perform. This training process can cover many skills and go into many areas of expertise. One key element that has only recently come into action is an outdoor- based experiential training program. Commonly called 'ropes courses,' wilderness courses or adventure learning programs have been in use in the USA since the early 1980's, and by organizations in the UK since the early 1970's. Outdoor programs have been most beneficial when used to promote effective work teams and used to enhance leadership and management skills in the participants. Outdoor- based training programs seem to accomplish these objectives by allowing participants to develop a high level of trust in their peers, improve their problem-solving ability, and generally improve the level of interpersonal communications between group members. Companies are looking for leaders that can launch them into a new era. Constant improvement is necessary to meet the growth of challenging competition. So who defines leadership? What is a leader and how would you raise these skills that may be laying dormant in your subordinates? Organizations need great leaders to help them successfully survive the many difficulties of this decade. Yet, the very notion of leadership has rapidly degenerated into a cliché, a buzz word. In many people's minds, leadership has become identified with an overly simplistic conception of vision and empowerment. Although these concepts do play an important role in the leadership process, they only scratch the surface of what an exceptional leader actually does on a day-to-day basis. What do leaders really do to make an organization work well? In my research I found that great leaders exhibit nine different kinds of behaviors that enable them to bring out the best in the people around them. Some of the nine behaviors of leadership listed below involve building participatory teams, some involve using 'situational management strategies,' while others enhance personal resources. Listed separately, the nine behaviors include: Developing people. Being able to influence others. Encouraging teamwork. Empowering people. Using multiple options thinking. Taking intelligent risks. Being passionate about work. Having a strong, clear vision. Stretching one's personal creativity. While many people think leaders are unique, even born to that state of excellence, I have found just the opposite. With 2005-06-26T20:09:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Experimental-Training,-Fundamental-Element-of-a-Corporation-27143.aspx Advertisement essay "The wolves appear on your windshield. Not through it." The DeVille DTS. The worlds first car available with Night Vision. Exclusive technology that allows you to see up to five times as far away as your low-beam headlamps. So you can truly see in the dark. The Cadillac magazine is published for an upper class people, mostly that make about $70.000 a year and more. The magazine is not published for every body you have to order it. Because the magazine is not published for every body you have to have it specially ordered. The ads in the magazine are all targeted toured rich folks and the precise range from about $2.000 and up. The reason the ad is placed in this magazine is because its not a cheap item the car is about 60 to 65 thousands dollars, there for it's published in the magazine that is targeted to people that make that much. The ad is aimed toured people that are over 30 because it is a big car not every young person wants a big car, there for the ad is placed toured the older people. The image and the message they both speak for each other, the image is the wolves, and the message is "the wolves appear on your windshield not through it." First, the image takes up the hole page. The image shoes that its dark outside, the trees are dark and in the corner of the page there is the moon, around it is the dark blue with some light blue coolers of the sky. Its so dark that you cant see the trees but on the top where the dark blue and the light blue colors are you can see the tips of the trees. On the bottom of the page you can see the road dividing line the yellow one. On the center of the page where its pitch dark, there is a rectangular box where it shows the dividing line continues, on the side of the box there is a mounting to the right of the page. It also shoes that there is five wolves on the road. The image is black and white and it really makes it stand out, kind of jumps at your eyes when you look at the hole page. Next, the message is simple it says that "the wolves appear on your windshield not through 2005-06-21T09:25:52-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-of-the-Cadillac-Deville,-Advertising-Efficacy-27082.aspx Workplace Diversity Needs, values and priorities of employees and employers have changed dramatically over the last decade. On all rungs of the corporate ladder, men and women are seeking new ways to manage the time they spend working so they can spend more time living. In the boardrooms, executives are seeking ways to attract - and retain - the best employees so they can continue to survive and thrive in a highly competitive global economy. Interestingly enough, solutions to the changing needs and priorities of both groups are being found in the same place: flexible work arrangements are proving to be a win-win strategy in today's leading-edge organizations. The 1990's have witnessed dramatic change in the attitude of corporate America regarding flexible work arrangements. Once used as an ad hoc response to individual employees' needs, companies have begun to realize they can use flexibility as a cost-effective strategy to accomplish business goals. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, more than half of US workers work other than a 5-day, 40-hour week and nationwide, about 12 million full-time workers have flexible work schedules. In a 1998 Families and Work Institute Business Work/Life Study, most of the 1000 participating companies reported that FWAs had a positive return on investment (46%) or were cost neutral (36%), while only 18% believed the costs of FWAs outweighed the benefits. Many companies are beginning to recognize the value of workplace flexibility, and see it as the way work needs to be done in an information age. A 1991 Catalyst study found that since 1989, most of the 70 participating large companies had expanded the number of employees using flexible work arrangements and had formalized their initiatives. Many organizations have experimented with flexible work arrangements with positive results. There are several aspects of flexible work arrangements: FlexTime: Allows employees to take advantage of a range of starting and ending times for the work day. FlexPlace (or Telecommuting): Enables employees to work from a different location - such as home or another facility. For this arrangement to be successful, the employee must demonstrate an ability to work independently. Job responsibilities must also allow for the employee to spend time away from the office. The amount of time worked off site can vary, from a few hours a week to a full five day work week schedule. Compressed Work Schedule: Enables employees to perform their full-time job in less than a customary work week. Examples of 2005-06-21T01:04:39-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Diversity-in-the-Workplace--27032.aspx Critical Thinking Styles and Forces of Influence Our basic concept of critical thinking is, at root, simple. We could define it as the art of taking charge of your own mind. Its value is also at root simple: "if we can take charge of our own minds, we can take charge of our lives; we can improve them, bringing them under our "self-command" and direction (McCall and Kaplan, 1990)." Of course, this requires that we learn self-discipline and the art of self-examination. This involves becoming interested in how our minds work, how we can monitor, fine tune, and modify their operations for the better. It involves getting into the habit of reflectively examining our impulsive and accustomed ways of thinking and acting in every dimension of our lives and business. Many various "Forms of Thinking" affect the way we rationalize problems and situations. We could approach a problem by utilizing the forms such as in "a logical, scientific, persuasive, or creative fashion (University of Phoenix, 2000)." The way we approach a problem or situation can be and is very important. In addition, all that we do, we do based on some motivations or reasons that are forces which influence our ways of thinking. However, we rarely examine our motivations to see if they make sense. We rarely scrutinize our reasons critically to see if they are rationally justified. "Some of the forces that influence are thinking can be gender, culture, ethnicity, religion, race, economic status, ethics, etc (University of Phoenix, 2000)." As consumers, for example, we sometimes buy things impulsively and uncritically, without stopping to determine whether we really need what we are inclined to buy, whether we can afford it, whether its good for our health, or whether the price is competitive. As parents, we often respond to our children impulsively and uncritically, without stopping to determine whether our actions are consistent with how we want to act as parents, whether we are contributing to their self-esteem, whether we are discouraging them from thinking, or from taking responsibility for their own behavior. The two examples above, illustrate how we could have used a "scientific form of thinking" to come to a conclusion but the "force", whatever it may have been, that influenced that way of thinking, was very strong. The same remains true in business as it pertains to our managerial responsibilities. For example, if one always tends to look 2005-06-21T01:03:27-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Critical-Thinking-Styles-and-Forces-of-Influence-27031.aspx Mercedes Benz : Competitive Forces and Competitive Strategy Mercedez Benz Ayodele Samaiye Hawaii Pacific University Abstract The intensity of competition in an industry is neither a matter of coincidence nor bad luck. Rather, competition in an industry is ill rooted in its underlying economic structure and goes well beyond the behavior of current competitors. The state of competition in an industry depends on five basic competitive forces i.e. entry, threat of substitution, bargaining power of buyers, bargaining power of suppliers, and rivalry among current competitors. (Porter, 1980) Daimler Chrysler's strategy rests on four pillars: global presence, strong brands, broad product range, and technology leadership. The objective of this analysis is to investigate how the organization needs to form its strategy in order to develop opportunities and protect itself against competition and other threats. Company Introduction Mercedes Benz is firmly established as an independent brand within one of the world's leading car companies- DaimlerChrysler AG. DaimlerChrysler is a product of Daimler and Chrysler companies. Daimler motor company however came into existence as a result of the creation of a recognized internal combustion vehicle by Gottlieb Daimler. Daimler Chrysler's strategy rests on four pillars: global presence, strong brands, broad product range, and technology leadership-Daimler being the first man to create a recognized internal combustion vehicle and the first to incorporate a practical transmission system. The company has a super network that ensures the flow and exchange of information from various departments within and between the company and it's strategic partners. Competitive Forces The strength of the competitive forces in an industry determines the degree to which this inflow of investment occurs and drives the return to the free market level, and thus the ability of firms to sustain above-average returnsThe five competitive forces-entry, threat of substitution, bargaining power of buyers, bargaining power of suppliers, and rivalry among current competitors-reflect the fact that competition in an industry goes well beyond the established players. All five competitive forces jointly determine the intensity of industry competition and profitability, and the strongest force or forces are governing and become crucial from the point of view of strategy formulation. The bargaining power rivalry is what keeps Mercedes-Benz on the run, as such that it can keep ahead of BMW and others, who are always there and always threatening their market share. Power of Customers Buyers compete with the industry by forcing down prices, bargaining for higher quality or more services, and 2005-06-19T08:44:23-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Mercedes-Benz-Competitive-Forces,-Competitive-Strategy-26979.aspx Everything you want to know about doing business in China China, with a population of more than one billion people, is a country full of marketing potential. With so many possible consumers, it would seem like any product could reach its target audience. However, with a country so rich in history and culture, there are many factors to be considered by marketers. Some of the most important and influential elements (the monetary policy, currency system, market agreements, and environmental factors of the country) must be further examined. Monetary Policy: A brief history of China's financial system is necessary at this point. In 1949, the Chinese Communist Party (which had been established about thirty years beforehand) overthrew the Kuomintang government and subsequently seized control of the economic and financial markets in China. The first major change made by the CCE, and was a unification of financial and economics affairs. Until 1950, these two sectors were handled individually. For financial purposes, the Chinese central government created two plans. The first of these was a state physical plan, which consisted of the expenditures and budgets of all government departments, state-owned enterprises, cooperatives, and communes. The second was a credit plan, which contained specific blueprints as to how the implementation of certain projects in the physical plan would take place. The People's Bank of China effectively served as a liaison in matters of the credit plan. The Bank distributed funds to economic sectors based on information revealed by the credit plan, and acted as a symbolic auditor to ensure that the budgets matched the amount of funds spent during that time period. The People's Bank also had the responsibility of ensuring that unspent cash was deposited in a state bank, and maintained supervisory status over most financial matters. Although the specific procedures regarding the physical and credit plans changed, most of the principles described above went unchanged until the 1980s. In 1983, the State Council of China issued a resolution, decreeing that the People's Bank of China was to be "a national institution through which the State Council directs and administers financial operations of the whole country, and it is the central bank of China" . The State Council indicated that there were four main functions to be performed by the PBOC. First, the PBOC was to provide money, credit, and other finances for the purposes of macroeconomics. Second, the PBOC was required to enforce any and all 2005-06-19T08:43:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/How-to-Do-Business-in-China,-Outsourcing-to-China-26978.aspx Analysis of Marketing Plan of Nike and Michael Jordan Former University of Oregon track coach and co-founder of Nike Bill Bowerman once said: "If you have a body, you are an athlete!" (NikeBiz) This way of thinking is how Nike conducts every aspect of their business. Every person is a potential athlete or "consumer". This is a common term when used in the realm of athletics but when Bill Bowerman said this it was in direct reference to the shoe industry. From their marketing strategies to their selling philosophies, Nike has developed one of the most recognizable and demanded name and logo tandems ever. Nike, which is the Greek Goddess of Victory, was born in 1972 when BRS, Blue Ribbon Sports, launched its first branded shoe at the U.S. Olympic track and field trials. A former University of Oregon track team member Phil Knight created Blue Ribbon Sports. At Oregon, Knight was coached by the legendary Bill Bowerman and then went on to become and alumni of the Stanford School of Business. BRS was crafted in 1962 when Knight made a deal with Onitsuka Tiger Company, a Japanese shoe company, to import their shoe to the United States. Knight had the idea to sell a low cost shoe with a very high quality. Knight had high aspirations of taking Adidas out the top spot in the athletic shoe market. In 1964, Bill Bowerman decided to join Knight as a partner at BRS to create a joint quest to be number one. Bowerman redesigned the Tiger shoes while Knight acted as the accountant/personal seller and went on the road to sell their newly crafted sneakers at track meets and local shoe stores. By 1966, Blue Ribbon Sports opened their first store in Portland, Oregon. Knight and Bowerman managed the store with the only other employee being a former Stanford runner Jeff Johnson. (story/chrono, 1) Signing First Endorsers During 1971, BRS caught a break when a trading company called Nissho Iwai introduced BRS to important letters of credit. This credit allowed BRS to subcontract its own shoe line and by 1972 it was selling Nike Brand shoes. Over the next decade Nike expanded almost double its size each year from the previous year. Nike is officially called Nike in 1978 and has signed on tennis great John McEnroe, New York City marathon champion Alberto Salazar, women's marathon gold medallist Joan Beniot, and Olympic track 2005-06-19T08:40:24-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Analysis-of-Marketing-Plan-of-Nike-and-Michael-Jordan-26977.aspx Fast Food in America: The cheap but dangerous cost of advertising and the American appetite Americans in general have become one of the biggest groups of consumers on the planet; wanting everything bigger and better than anyone else - apparently including waistlines, with over half of all Americans being overweight. Americans are also working more and on the move more than ever, making our reliance on a quick and cheap meal bigger and bigger - and in turn it has created a huge business for fast food companies. Why are so many people willing to eat this food that they know is bad for them? It could possibly be the marketing; companies spend hundreds of millions of dollars blasting us with advertisements and marketing gimmicks to eat their food. Or do we eat the food simply because we want instant gratification and don't care at what cost it may come? America has become synonymous with fast food, turn on any TV or radio or walk down the street, virtually everywhere advertisements can be seen marketing fast and processed food. One reason Fast Food is wreaking havoc is because food items without any nutritional value are so widely and easily available; there are vending machines in workplaces and schools that dish out high-sugar and high-fat foods; you can even pick up a burger, fried chicken or a piece of pizza along with some sugary soda at a Gas station! This food is also usually considerably cheaper than healthier food, making it that much more attractive. Fast Food companies are even forming contracts with schools so that the school will only carry one brand of food, the school sees an advantage in receiving the much needed funds but apparently don't see the problem of exposing kids to a barrage of junk food and advertising all day long. And for the working class, instead of making breakfast at home, maybe some fruit, milk and cereal or something healthy - people will simply stop at their local McDonalds and order an egg, bacon and cheese 'McMuffin' - more or less a truckload of fat for a breakfast. This is happening because Americans are working far more than they have in the past - longer than 'average' 40 hour work week and also taking their work home with them. Employers want more productivity out of their workers and are even going as far as having kitchens and 2005-06-19T08:39:44-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Fast-Food-in-America-Adveritsing-Costs,-Marketing-Strategy-26976.aspx Advantages and disadvantages of historical cost accounting, alternatives to historical cost accounting 2.1 Introduction Accounting concepts and conventions as used in accountancy are the rules and guidelines by which the accountant lives. The historical cost accounting convention is an accounting technique that values an asset for balance sheet purposes at the price paid for the asset at the time of its acquisition. The historical cost accounting is the situation in which accountants record revenue, expenditure and asset acquisition and disposal at historical cost: that is, the actual amounts of money, or money's worth, received or paid to complete the transaction. Historical costs Historical cost is a generally accepted accounting principle requiring all financial statement items be based upon original cost. Historical cost means what it cost the company for the item. It is not fair market value. This means that if a company purchased a building, it is recorded on the balance sheet at its historical cost. It is not recorded at fair market value, which would be what the company could sell the building for in the open market. Criticisms of the historical costs method Historical cost method, over a period of time has been subject to many criticisms, especially as it considers the acquisition cost of an asset and does not recognise the current market value. Historical costs is only interested in cost allocations and not in the value of an asset. While it tells the user the acquisition cost of an asset and its depreciation in the following years, it ignores the possibility that the current market value of that asset may be higher or lower than it suggests. Another main criticism of historical accounting method is its obvious flaws in times of inflation. The validity of historic accounting rests on the assumption that the currency in which transactions are recorded remains stable, i.e. its purchasing power remains the same over a period of time. Another main point with regards to inflation is rise in prices for an asset. An asset purchased at a point in time may be expensive in future. The traditional accounting principles record all assets at an original cost and continue to use these historic figures throughout the asset's life, while economists make a more intelligible assumption that money has a time-value attached to it. The economist's approach is broadly embraced in the corporate finance model whose objective is centred on value creation for the shareholders. In addition effects of inflation may 2005-06-19T08:38:45-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advantages-and-Disadvantages-of-Hstorical-Cost-Accounting-26975.aspx Are financial accounting statements useful to investors? 1.1 Introduction Financial accounting statements are summaries of monetary data about an enterprise and are used in an attempt to help make informed decisions in the present and future. Financial statements portray the effects of transactions and other events by grouping them into broad classes (or elements) according to their economic characteristics. The three basic financial statements are the balance sheet, the income statement and the cash flow statement. There are many different entities that utilise financial statements. Financial statements may be drawn up for private individuals, non-profit organisations, manufacturers and service industries. Three major groups that take advantage of the usefulness of financial statements are large corporations, investors and the government. Financial statements play a decisive role in each of these entities financial decisions. Corporations decide how much credit to extend to customers and how much should be distributed to investors in dividends. Investors use a company's financial statements to decide whether or not it would prove advantageous to invest their money, and if so, how much. The government uses financial statements to determine how much an entity is required to pay in taxes. Each decision as stated above does not always require the same financial statement, however. A balance sheet would be used in the decision-making process for assessing a competing firm and determining a customer's credit limit. It provides the user with data about available resources as well as the claims to those resources. An income statement would prove useful in determining credit extension to customers, distribution of dividends, taxes and investment opportunities. It provides the user with data about the profitability of the enterprise detailing sources of revenue and the expenses which reduce profit. A cash flow statement would be a useful tool in each instance because it gives a brief description of how much cash is coming in, going out and to where exactly. It reports cash flows from investing, financing, or operating activities. Although each one is unique in its own respect, each financial statement is a necessary tool in making any financial decision. 1.2 Financial reporting, investors, limitations of accounting Investors are generally considered one of the primary users of financial statements. They use the financial statements to determine the current profitability of the firm and attempt to predict its future profitability. Their interest is in the future growth of a company's stock price and/or the likelihood of the company paying dividends to the owner. To 2005-06-19T08:37:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Are-financial-accounting-statements-useful-to-investors-26974.aspx Comparison of United States, United Kingdom, and Chinese Accounting Systems, Accounting Standards, Accounting Practices This report discusses the accounting practices of the following countries U.K, U.S.A and China. An analysis of these different accounting systems will be conducted on issues such as the growth and background, social, economic and fiscal pressures that have led to each nations current characteristics. Concluding on the direction each nations accounting systems and practices seem to be heading towards. Introduction The main characteristics of U.K accounting is that it is highly dominated by organised accounting profession, which only relate to limited liability companies, no other such entity. A separate fiscal accounting has been developed entirely from commercial accounting. Public sector in the U.K follows its own different rules in accounting. U.K was one of the initial and first countries in the world to develop and have Companies acts containing provisions and also one of the first professional accounting bodies was established in the U.K. Professional accountants and company law play a key role in dominating the U.K corporate financial reporting and play a significant influence varying from external and domestic factors. Britain's financial market is structured around a "capital financial market based financial system" where the stock market funds large scale businesses, trading securities and pricing role. The stock exchange and taxation system have very little influence in financial reporting. Having said that, the stock market has involvement in developing financial reporting standards for listed companies. Although U.K seems to have developed its own companies act and regulations, it still has received indirect foreign influence from member states of the European union through EU directives and from U.S.A with their new accounting standards. Financial reporting and accounting in the U.S.A seems to have a large and dominant influence on accounting in the world today with its largely consistent standards promulgated by the international accounting standards committee. However, the U.S.A accounting is very similar to U.K accounting due to the fact that us accounting was initially an export from the U.K, which is often known to be the funding fathers of US accounting. For example many of the largest accounting firms in the US such as Ernst & Young and ICPMG were expatriate Britain. The U.S.A has taken that initial guidance and is becoming the accounting sector leaders in their accounting standards by exploring and developing rapidly in the accounting field. Standards have become largely voluminous and detailed due to the 2005-06-19T08:37:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Comparitive-Term-Paper-on-US,-UK,-and-China-Accounting-26973.aspx Becoming a CPA (Certified Public Accountant), Job Profile What is a CPA? These three letters mean that you have received a broad-based education. They mean you have passed all parts of a very difficult exam. They mean you have the knowledge, skills and abilities to be a trusted business adviser to your clients or employer. They mean you feel comfortable with the latest technology. They mean you are an ethical individual who can provide an independent analysis. CPA's are many things. They are chief financial officers for Fortune 500 companies and advisors to small neighborhood businesses. They work for large and small public accounting firms. They are well-respected strategic business advisors and decision-makers. They act as consultants on many issues, including taxes and accounting. To become a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) you need to meet the requirements of the state or jurisdiction in which you wish to practice. These requirements, which vary from state to state, are established by law and administered by the state boards of accountancy. To qualify for certification, you must: ? Have professional work experience in public accounting. The Uniform CPA Exam is a prerequisite for the CPA certificate because it is the primary way Boards of Accountancy measures the competence of CPA candidates. ? Complete a program of study in accounting at a college/university. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) recommends at least 150 semester hours to obtain the common body of knowledge for becoming a CPA. ? Pass the Uniform CPA Examination, which is developed and graded by the AICPA. Boards of Accountancy also rely on additional means to ensure that a candidate has the necessary technical abilities and character attributes to become a CPA. These may include interviews, letters of reference, investigation of educational background, and affidavits of employment. In addition, some boards of accountancy administer an ethics examination to assess a candidate's knowledge of the rules of professional conduct. The Board of Examiners of the AICPA is responsible for preparing the Uniform CPA Examinations and for operating the Advisory Grading Service, both adopted by the boards of accountancy in all fifty states, the District of Columbia, Guam, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. The Examination is given twice each year, in May and November, and its duration is 15 ½ hours long. The exam is administered over a two-day period within the boundaries of the fifty-four jurisdictions that use the exam. It is given and graded 2005-06-19T08:35:51-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Becoming-a-CPA-Career-Profile-26972.aspx Financial Management as a Career, Financial Advisor Job Profile The nature of the work of a financial manager varies a lot with their specific titles, which include controller, treasurer, credit manager, etc. Controllers direct the establishment of financial reports that sum up and predict the organization's financial position, such as income statements, balance sheets, and analyses of future earnings or expenses. Controllers also are responsible for preparing special reports required by regulatory authorities. Often, controllers superintend the accounting, audit, and budget departments. Treasurers and finance officers oversee the organization's financial goals, objectives, and budgets. They overlook the investment of funds and manage associated risks, supervise cash management activities, execute capital-raising strategies to support a firm's expansion, and deal with mergers and acquisitions. Credit managers manage the firm's publication of credit. They establish credit-rating criteria, determine credit ceilings, and monitor the collections of past-due accounts. Managers specializing in international finance acquire financial and accounting systems for the banking transactions of multinational organizations. In summing up to the general duties described above, all financial managers execute tasks unique to their organization or industry. The role of the financial manager, particularly in business, is changing with these new technological advances that have reduced the amount of time it takes to produce financial reports. They often work on teams, acting as business advisors to top management. Financial managers need to keep abreast of the latest computer technology in order to increase the productivity of their firm's financial operations. The working conditions of financial managers is usually in an office, close to top managers and departments that develop the financial data these managers need. They mainly work long hours like 50 to 60 hours a week. The job outlook for financial managers seems to be very good. It is expected to grow about as fast as the average for all occupations through 2010. Strong computer skills and the knowledge of international finance are very important. Financial managers who are well-acquainted with computer software and applications that can serve this role will be needed. A bachelor's degree in finance, accounting, economics, or business administration is the lowest academic preparation for financial managers. Many employers do seek graduates with a master's degree though. Preferably in business administration, economics, finance, or risk management. Experience may be more important than formal education for some financial manager positions. The median annual earnings for financial managers in 2000 was $67,020. The middle 50 2005-06-19T08:35:05-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Financial-Management-as-a-Career,-Career-Profile-26971.aspx Critically evaluate the role of the accountancy profession in recent corporate scandals such as Enron, Xerox and WorldCom It is expected that the accountancy profession would play quite an important role in scandals such as Enron, Xerox, and Worldcom, as all they all deal with the financial accounts not showing a true and fair view the company. Hence it is the role of accountants to prepare and check the financial statements. Therefore I feel that in the essay it is worth analyzing who exactly in the accountancy profession was responsible for each action in scandals, and show how 'accountants move easily from watchdogs in their capacity as auditors to being the architects of clever deals and frauds as CFO's and CEO's.' (lies damn lies) In the Statement of Auditing Standards 100, published on March 1995, we are told that 'the responsibility for the preparation of the financial statements is that of the directors of the entity'. Therefore the auditor is only responsible to act as a watchdog and make sure that the directors' of the company have prepared the statements in accordance to Auditing and Accounting Standards. Authur Andersen LLP (Enron's auditors) were therefore responsible in providing shareholders with 'reasonable assurance' that the financial statements presented a true and fair view of the company's financial position. Consequently one could argue that because they failed to do this that they were entirely responsible, as far as the public is concerned, in Enron's scandal. The fact that thousands of pages of documents were shredded proves on itself that Andersen was guilty of fraud, as this is a violation of the law and Justice Department. In response to these accusations Andersen stated that their only role in this scandal was to 'express an opinion on the financial statements prepared by the company,' (accountancy age) and therefore will hold themselves responsible for any errors in the auditing. In addition to this it has been 'publicly acknowledged that there was one error of judgment in the treatment of one partnership' (Accountancy Age). Though in another partnership matter, they have defended their case in saying that they were not provided with the necessary information by Enron. According to SAS 600 it was Andersen's role to qualify the financial statement, and thus disclaim it if the effect of this limitation of scope was pervasive enough to make the statements as misleading as they were. However the situation was much more complex than 2005-06-19T08:34:21-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Evaluation-of-Accounting-in-Enron,-Xerox,-Worldcom-Scandals-26970.aspx Need for Harmonization of International Accounting Standards Introduction As there has been a tremendous growth in the market place with the existing accounting practices, this leads us to question why do we need harmonization of International accounting standards, what are its advantages and what are the barriers that hinder harmonization? Although accounting may be the "language of business," a common language has never been necessary -- at least as long as the world economy consisted of a set of more or less distinct national economies. (Mednick 1991) (Cited in: www.wetherhead.cwru.edu) This, however, is no longer true. We now have a global economy and it has affected the entire business world. For instance, today's global corporation may have more than one headquarters, and its production and distribution facilities are probably scattered throughout the world. Commodity prices, interest rates and currency exchange values have become internationally linked -- with the result that governments around the world are increasingly supporting harmonization of accounting practices and national policies. (Walters) (Cited in: Bisgay and Jayson 1989) Harmonization is necessary because standard national financial statements are virtually useless; financial markets in more regulated countries are threatened with a loss of market share; and multinational corporations must prepare multiple reports for different nations they do business in. (Nobes and Parker 1991) (Cited in: http://ecocomm.anu.edu.au) There is a need for harmonization for accounting standards in order to help the foreign investor to understand the financial statements of the foreign companies who's shares they might want to buy.(Iqbal, Melcher and Elmallah 1997) Financial information is a form of a language. And if the language of financial information is to be put to use, so that investment and credit decisions can more readily be taken, it should not only be intelligible, it should also be comparable. (Belkaoui 1994) These new environmental factors of the global economy, the international monetary system, the Multinational Corporation and foreign direct investment create an environment in which business transactions, their conduct, measurement and disclosure, takes new and distinctive form that call for a specific accounting sub discipline or the harmonization of accounting practices. Advantages of Harmonization (Turner 1983) The greatest benefit that would flow from harmonization would be the comparability of international financial information. Such comparability would eliminate the current misunderstandings about the reliability of foreign financial statements and would remove one of the most important impediments to the flow of international investment. (Choi, Frost and Meek 1999) Harmonization would 2005-06-19T08:33:25-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Harmonization-of-International-Accounting-Standards-26969.aspx Janus Capital Group: History of the company, What are the ethical dilemmas that the management has faced? Janus Capital Group is a mutual fund company that specializes in the active management of investor assets. They are responsible for the investment advisory, distribution, and marketing of their various funds throughout the world. The company's asset management disciplines include growth, core, international and value. As of February 29, 2004 total assets under management at Janus was $147.5 billion (Janus.com). Tom Bailey established Janus Mutual Funds in 1970 with only 30 investors and less than $500,000 in initial capital. By 1980, Janus had accumulated $33.5 million in assets and was easily beating the S&P 500 returns by investing in value-oriented stocks. In 1984, Kansas City Southern Railroad executive Landon Rowland decided that the railroad industry was stagnant. Rowland was looking for a way for his company to diversify and approached Tom Bailey with an offer to purchase his fund company. Tom decided he would sell 90% of his company to Kansas City Southern but managed to retain control of the firm through a clause in his contract. By 1990, the Janus family of funds had accumulated over $4 billion in assets and launched one of the first international funds in America, the Janus Worldwide fund. In 1996, Janus begins their first foray into national advertising and a year later become one of the first fund companies to offer a website for investors to research their funds. In 1997, international fund manager Helen Young Hayes is named by Morningstar as fund manager of the year. In 1998, fund manager Scott Schoelzel is named Manager of the Year by Mutual Fund Magazine. Also in 1998, Janus is named "Family of the Year" by Mutual Funds Magazine and Fortune ranks Janus as one of the top 100 companies to work for. By 2000, Janus was managing $250 billion and was the most revered fund company in America easily beating its peers in almost every investment category. In 2002 Janus shareholders were shocked to learn that Tom Bailey, the company's founder, decided to sell his remaining ownership to Kansas City Southern, effectively relinquishing control of the company he founded. 2003 ushered in change for Janus as the company merged with Berger Funds and began trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the tick JNS (Janus.com). Janus' mission statement has always been to "get investors where they want to go." 2005-06-19T08:32:19-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/History-of-Janus-Capital-Group-and-Ethical-Battles-26968.aspx Discussion of Internal Controls that are placed in an Accounting information System In accounting systems, certain controls are needed to ensure that employees are doing their jobs properly and ensure that the system runs properly. These checks are in the best interest of the organization. These controls come in the form of internal and external controls for the system. The internal controls are the checks that are placed in the system my the company's own management and directors. Today more and more companies are moving from the manual accounting systems to computerized accounting information systems. The advantages of a computerized system are increases in the speed and accuracy of processing accounting information. However, as systems become computerized, the internal controls for that system has to be adapted accordingly. This is because computerized systems bring with them certain unique problems that can only be removed or minimized by adapting the present controls and adding new controls. These problems are • In a manual system there is a paper trail for the internal auditor to follow. All records and transactions are kept on paper and so an auditor has clear and documented proof of what has transpired. Computerized systems rarely have a clear paper trail to follow. Since computers do all of the sorting of the information the company rarely sorts the source documents. Also the computer does most of the calculations and processing so there would not be the amount of documentation that there would be in a manual system. • Another problem of computer systems is the fact that there can be difficulty in determining who entered the data. In a manual system the identity of the person entering the data can be identified possibly by the person's handwriting. This cannot be done in a computerized system. This makes it very difficult to determine who is responsible for errors or fraud. • Since the computers do all calculations and processing errors can occur due to bad design of the program. This can be difficult to detect especially if the error does not occur frequently and only does so under particular conditions. • Computer systems also offer new opportunities for fraud. If a computerized system is not set up properly and certain checks not put in then the computer system can be used to defraud the company. The fact that it is difficult to trace who enters the data only adds to the magnitude of this. In order 2005-06-19T08:31:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Internal-Controls-on-an-Accounting-Information-System-26967.aspx Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) A foreign investment (FDI) is a company controlled through ownership by a foreign company of foreign individuals. Control must accompany the investment; otherwise it is a portfolio investment. Companies want to control their foreign operations so that these operations will help achieve their global objectives. Investors who control an organization are more willing to transfer technology and other competitive assets. The idea of denying rivals access to resources is called the appropriability theory. Governmental authorities worry that this control will lead to decisions contrary to their countries' best interests. Direct investments usually, but not always, involve some capital movement. There are two ways companies can invest in a foreign country. They can either acquire an interest in an existing operation or construct new facilities. Buy: Depends on which companies are available for purchase; difficulty to transfer resources or acquire resources for a new facility; the goodwill and brand identification; easier access to local capital; market does not justify added capacity; immediate cash flow. Build: Depends on difficulty to find a company to buy; little or no competition; local governments prevent acquisition; acquisition less likely to succeed (inefficient); local financing easier to obtain for building. Whether a company first transfers capital or some other asset to acquire a foreign direct investment, the asset is a type of production factor. Production factors: capital, technology, trademarks, managers, raw material, .... If trade could not occur and production factors could not move internationally, a country would have to either forgo consuming certain goods or produce them differently, which in either case would usually result in decreased worldwide output and higher prices. In some cases, the inability to use foreign production factors may stimulate efficient methods of substitution. If finished goods and production factors were both free to move internationally, the comparative costs of transferring goods and factors would determine the location of production. However, as is true of trade, there are restrictions on factor movements that make them only partially mobile internationally. Factor movements may substitute for or stimulate trade. World trade (exports) are stimulated by FDI because of the need for components, complementary products and equipment for subsidiaries. The least-cost production location changes because of inflation, regulations, transportation costs, and productivity. Businesses and governments are motivated to engage in FDI in order to expand sales, acquire resources and minimize competitive risk. Governments may additionally be motivated by some desired political advantage. Sales expansion objectives : - Overcome high transportation costs - Lack of domestic capacity - Low 2005-06-19T08:30:10-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/All-About-Foreign-Direct-Investment-FDI-26966.aspx Human Resource Management: Selecting and Appraising Your Future Staff The process of staff recruitment and selection is becoming increasingly complex and its integration into organizational and Human Resource (HR) strategies means that the successful outcome of these processes is vital for job performance and organizational success. The intricacy of matching the right applicant to the right job is a perpetual activity for management and HR practitioners considering the organization's economic, social and political contexts. This paper aims to identify the effect the environmental context has towards organizational strategies and the HR system and the subsequent impact on recruitment procedures and selection. Further, an analysis of the importance of staff recruitment and selection within the organization's changing environment and tools used to facilitate the effectiveness of these functions. This will enable an assessment of any changes or strategies needed to avoid failures associated with poor selection and methods to improve recruitment and selection procedures. Organizations are increasingly becoming focused on being competitive on a national and global level. The importance of the recruitment and selection process is vital for organizational competitiveness and a failure to approach this function effectively will have consequences for future job performance. Numerous authors have emphasised the importance of integrating the recruitment and selection processes into organizational strategies and HR systems as well as the necessity to respond to changes in the organization's environment (e.g. Stone, 2002, p.174, Nankervis, Compton & McCarthy, 1999, p.190, Compton, Morrissey & Nankervis, 2002, pp.16-17). The organization is constantly changing to respond to changes in its environment, for instance, the structure of the organization may change and jobs redesigned to improve efficiency or reduce costs. However, one of the fundamental mistakes made by management is the failure to allocate "the right people to the right jobs" (Stone, 2002, p.124) once these changes occur. Such "economically" inspired" tactics have been criticised as having a detrimental impact towards the productivity of the workforce and this could be related to the failure in acknowledging the job requirements needed after such fundamental organizational changes have occurred (ACIRRT, 1999, pp.16-17). A further impact on organizational performance is the slow response to increased globalisation resulting in "work intensification" which has consequences for the organization (ACIRRT, 1999, pp.31-33). In conjunction with the impact of the global economy, the high demand for skilled labour has meant a world-wide shortage of skilled staff and this trend continues as organizations seek increased competitiveness resulting in 2005-06-19T08:29:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Human-Resource-Management-Staff-Selection-and-Appraisal-26965.aspx Proper motivation: the key to an organization's success. Outline of a sample motivation plan for any organization. Discussion of other motivational theories as well. Proper Motivation: the key to an organization's success Motivation of our employees is one of the most important issues facing companies today. The need to instill our employees with motivation is becoming ever more important especially with the shift towards a more socially and culturally responsive workforce. So how does a company find out what motivates its employees? How do they provide a motivational plan that includes incentives both traditional (money) and nontraditional elements? What will these elements be? How do we keep our managers focused on the plan and give them the tools they need to make the plan successful? What effect will our plan have on the working atmosphere of our organization? It is clear that organizations need motivation plans that motivate, provide desired incentives, keeps our managers involved in the process and results in increased value to the organization. The following plan is what I submit for discussion. History There has been a significant amount of time and energy put into the study of motivational theories. The basis for these studies have been to come up with some working theory that explains what motivates an individual, why, and how this motivation is reliant upon both external and internal factors of the environment in which the individual is immersed. Our text lists several theories on motivation. The ones mentioned are: •The Hierarchy of Needs- this theory is based on Abraham Maslow's needs system, which states that as certain needs are met a shift upwards in the hierarchy occurs. The lower the need on the chain the more important it is to the individual and thus needs to be satisfied before others. •Theory x and Theory y- these two theories are based on a negative (theory x) and a positive (theory y) belief in humans. Theory x states that people dislike work and will avoid it if possible. It also says that safety is the primary concern of the individual. Theory y says that people believe work to be a natural part of life like eating or sleeping. It goes on to say that most people will accept and even seek responsibility. •Two Factory Theory- this theory relies heavily on the belief that the feelings of the individual determine the outcome of the work they are performing. •McClelland's Theory of 2005-06-19T08:25:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Motivational-Theory-and-Plan-Outline-26963.aspx Religious Discrimination in the Workplace "When the Magi came from the East to worship before the baby Jesus, Christianity gave notice that it was destined to become a world religion. And when those same Wise Men chose to disobey King Herod by leaving the country without reporting on the Christ child's whereabouts, they signaled that loyalty to Christ would trump all other authority. Since then, non-Christians have consistently reacted strongly to the Christian doctrine that Christ alone is 'the way, the truth and the life.'" (Ye shall, 40) An employee approached me this past with week with a request to take off an extra hour with her lunch on Friday, April 13, 2001. She explained to me that she planned on attending a religious service and didn't we have a policy that stated that I was required to give her time off for religious reasons. I replied that I thought there was and I could check with HR (Human Resources Department) for the details, or she could just fill out a request for the time off and give it to me. She filled out an Absence Approval form and brought it to me. I signed it and returned it to her. We were short staffed that day, and it was a slight inconvenience. (I ended up working through lunch and didn't get to work on my schoolwork.) The message I was trying to get across to her was that I would make every effort to grant a reasonable request to an employee. An employer who has the best interest of their employee at heart is unlikely to have trouble with equal opportunity regulations. The Statutory Basis for Religious Discrimination is as follows: It shall be an unlawful employment practice for an employer-- (1) to fail or refuse to hire or to discharge any individual, or otherwise to discriminate against any individual with respect to his compensation, terms, conditions, or privileges of employment, because of such individual's . . . religion . . . or (2) to limit, segregate, or classify his employees or applicants for employment in any way which would deprive or tend to deprive any individual of employment opportunities or otherwise adversely affect his status as an employee, because of such individual's religion . . . 42 U.S.C. 20002-2(a). Congress shall make no laws respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof . . . First Amendment to 2005-06-19T08:24:21-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Religious-Discrimination-in-the-Workplace-26962.aspx [i:d517125c6f]What does it take to be a successful manager in modern business?[/i:d517125c6f] Management in the 21st Century As the world moves through the 21st Century, business is becoming more dependent upon professional managers, who can bring success to an organization. Issues such as globalization and decentralization adds to the need for organization's to hire flexible managers capable of leading. A 21st century manager should possess three traits and utilize them to lead organizations: the ability to stimulate change, excellent planning capabilities, and ethics. What a manager does and how it is done can be categorized by Henri Fayol's four functions of management: Planning, Organizing, Leading and Controlling. Through these functions managers can be catalysts for change or by definition change agents - "People who act as catalysts and manage the change process." (Robbins, Bergman, Stagg and Coulter, 2000, p.438) Whether performing the role of the change agent or not, change is an integral part of a manager's job. Change is "An alteration in people, structure or technology." (Robbins et al., 2000, p.437) Change occurs within and around organizations today at an unprecedented speed and complexity. Change poses threats and creates opportunities. The fact that change creates opportunities is reason why managers need to encourage change. What a manager can change falls distinctively into the three categories stated in the definition of change: people, structure, and technology. The manager can make alterations in these areas in an attempt to adapt to or facilitate change. The change of people involves changing attitudes, expectations, perceptions and behavior. These changes are used to help people within organizations to work together more effectively. Changing structure relates to job design, job specialization, hierarchy, formalization and all other organizational structural variables. These changes are ones that need to be flexible and not static to be adaptable to change. Technological change entails modification of work processes and methods and the introduction of new equipment. Changes in this area have been enormous especially in the areas of computing and communications. An organization's environment has both specific and general components, or micro and macro environments. The organization also has its own personality or culture. This environment and culture can be the generator of forces for change. Needs from within the organization can stimulate change; these are internal forces for change. "Of course, the distinction between external and internal forces is blurred because an internally induced change may be prompted by the perception of an external 2005-06-19T08:23:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Successful-Management-in-the-21st-Century-26961.aspx What is Leadership? A Complex In-Depth Analysis Concept of Leadership Leadership - what is it? Many definitions have been offered, cultural stereotypes abound, numerous programs focus on leadership development, but the question remains. In fact, leadership is many different things to different people in different circumstances. When we think of leadership, we often think first of famous individuals. We may think of great political leaders: Washington, Churchill, Roosevelt. We may think of the leaders of social movements: Gandhi, Martin Luther King, Caesar Chavez. We may think of spiritual leaders: Jesus, Mohammed, Mother Theresa. Do we also include in our definition some of the infamous leaders such as Hitler, Stalin, or David Koresh? Obviously, leadership is not always or automatically good in and of itself. We are quickly reminded of the notion that power corrupts and that absolute power corrupts absolutely. An exploration of leadership also quickly takes us beyond the lists of the famous when we consider the examples of leadership in our own lives: family members, friends, teachers, ministers, and others who by their lives and examples have influenced and led us in various ways. When we look at leadership in communities we see many leaders who may never become famous but whose leadership is essential to the life of the community. We begin to see leaders all around us. Leadership Defined Leadership is the ability to influence individuals or groups toward the achievement of goals. Leadership, as a process, shapes the goals of a group or organization, motivates behavior toward the achievement of those goals, and helps define group or organizational culture. It is primarily a process of influence. Leadership is a dynamic or changing process in the sense that, while influence is always present, the persons exercising that influence may change. Possession of influence depends upon the situation and upon the relevancy of the individual's skills and abilities to the situation. For example, if a particular individual has the expertise that is required to solve a problem, then that individual may be assumed to have some degree of influence over others. Although some managers are able to influence followers to work toward the achievement of organizational goals, the conferring of formal authority on a manager does not necessarily make that individual a leader. Yes, that individual has authority, but whether or not they are able to influence their subordinates may depend on more that just that authority. Not all leaders are managers, and 2005-06-19T08:21:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/What-is-Leadership-A-Complex-In-Depth-Analysis-26960.aspx [i:9186974fb6]How do managers decide how and when to deal with poor employee performance?[/i:9186974fb6] It's Much Easier To Polish an Apple Being a manager is simple -- just like losing weight is simple! Of course, anyone who has ever tried either task and done their job well knows that both take hard work. Also (similar to losing weight), managing of people is a skill, one that must be learned. Managers daily face the task of dealing with difficult employees. They must deal with employees who are habitually tardy, absent, unable to perform assigned work, or who display behavioral problems. The Internet article, Problem Employees: How do managers decide how and when to deal with poor employee performance by John Farr, presents problems managers face in the workplace and introduces a six step coaching approach that can eliminate many of these problems. These steps are: 1.Gather and verify performance information, 2.Verify with the employee whether the information gathered is true, 3. Discuss with the employee whether it is a problem caused by the company or himself, 4.Ask the employee for possible solutions, 5.Evaluate these solutions and plan an implementation time schedule, 6.Monitor the employee's progress and give feedback to correct and/or to reinforce the employee's actions. Other things discussed in the article are human nature and its influence on employee behavior, and how behavioral modification can be used in the workplace. This article could be useful in handling some workplace situations; the author, however, failed to mention that the intervention model only works if three key principles are followed: 1) take corrective, not punitive, actions; 2) counsel and coach before using discipline; 3) be firm, be fair, and show that you care. In addition, before exploring how to handle difficult employees, the author should have addressed the key responsibility of a manager. A manager is someone who has to work with others to get the job done and achieve results. In other words, someone who is responsible for the behavior and work produced by each individual employee. Therefore, the first step, before handling any problem employee situation, is to recognize that managers share in the responsibility of each employees' performance. Until this fact recognized, one cannot begin to resolve employee performance problems. It's all about improving performance, working to be firm, to be fair, and to show that you care. Most employees want to know when they are doing something wrong, to see their performance improve. The 2005-06-19T08:18:57-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Dealing-with-Poor-Employee-Performance-26959.aspx Critical Appraisal Of The Main Arguments Of Relevance Lost “Today’s management accountant information, driven by the procedures and cycle of the organisation’s financial reporting system, is too late, too aggregated, and too distorted to be relevant for managers’ planning and control decisions.” (Relevance Lost 1987. Johnson & Kaplan) The above quote is the opening paragraph in Johnson & Kaplan’s book, summarising what they felt was wrong with management accounting, below is a set of bullet points which develop the key arguments made in the book. Main Arguments  Management accounting systems and techniques in the Western World were as they had been since 1920.  Information systems were geared towards financial reporting, as was the decision making process, causing a general drift from cost management to cost accounting.  Existing management accounting could not adapt to new competitive environments, management styles, production techniques and organisational structure.  Management accounting facilitated the growth of large enterprises, throughout in early C20th and was not just a by-product. The first argument that will be analysed is the issue that management accounting techniques had not changed since the 1920’s. On the whole Johnson & Kaplan’s argument was true, from 1920 to the mid 1980’s there were no pioneering new management accounting techniques that were established. The issue raised is why no new management techniques were developed. During the 1920’s and onwards USA firms such as General Motors and Dupont were using to a great extent heavy mass production and Fordist principles. They could out produce and under cut competition while providing a high quality product to a market that was in very high demand. From this point in the 1920’s to the 1970’s these firms could produce huge amounts of products and sell them to an ever-expanding market. Competition was essentially localised, markets were secure and the USA was becoming more consumer society orientated, for reasons such as the introduction of the credit card, baby bust etc. Research revealed that firms did not need to change. The following quote summarises why no key issues techniques developed: “There was little incentive to minimise manufacturing costs, as increased costs could be passed on to the consumer”(Changing Nature Of Issues In Management Accounting. Scrapens, Hopper, Ashton). In a situation where firms did not need to keep or require elaborate costing records, organisations had no real need to invest capital or time developing them. Where existing methods were producing acceptable resultsmeasurement, firms had a “if it 2005-06-19T06:53:23-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cost-amp-Management-Accounting-Relevance-Lost-A-Critique-26955.aspx An assessment of the Telstra Corporation’s profitability, and short-term and long-term Liquidity. 1.Introduction All company accounts are prepared in accordance with the various accounting laws and regulations, and are designed for a wide audience. Therefore, to obtain data for specific purposes it is frequently necessary to submit the numbers to specific analysis. Following is an analysis of the Telstra Corporation's year 2000 and 2001 financial statements. This analysis is intended to, through the calculation of ratios, assess the short-term and long-term liquidity, in addition to the profitability of the Telstra Corporation. 2.Short-term Liquidity Short-term liquidity is the ability of the company to meet its short-term financial commitments. Short-term liquidity ratios measure the relationship between current liabilities and current assets. This helps us measure the Telstra Corporation's ability to sell inventory, to collect receivables and to pay current liabilities. Following is the Current Ratio, the Quick Asset Ratio, the Stock Turnover Rate and the Debtors' Turnover Rate. These measures are concentrated upon the current assets and current liabilities to asses the Telstra Corporation's ability to meet their financial commitments as they become due. 2.1Current Ratio For the 2001 financial year, the Telstra Corporation had $m6253 in total current assets and $m9279 in total current liabilities. This gives the company $0.68 for ever dollar of current liabilities. This could be seen as an unsafe situation, but by looking into the 2000 financial year Statement of Financial Position, it can be ascertained that the company had $0.52 for ever dollar of current liabilities. That is $m4889 in total current assets and $m9421 in total current liabilities. This shows that the Telstra Corporation increased its ability to pay debts as they became due by $0.16. (The Telstra Corporation Limited, 2001) 2.2Quick Asset Ratio The Quick Asset Test is a stringent test that indicates if a firm has enough short-term assets, without selling inventory, to cover its immediate liabilities. It is similar but a more strenuous version of the Current Ratio or "Working Capital", indicating whether the company's liabilities could be paid without selling inventory. Using the same figures as above minus the inventories for both years gives the Telstra Corporation an "acid test ratio' of 0.64:1 for the 2001 financial year and 0.40:1 for the 2000 financial year. These values are derived from subtracting the inventories of $m320 and $m295 for the 2001 and 2000 financial years respectively. This ratio shows a difference of $0.24 between the financial years of 2001 and 2000, again 2005-06-18T05:22:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Telstra-Corporation’s-Profitability-and-Liquidity-26902.aspx Political, Economic & Social effects of Accounting Standard Setters 'The view that accounting standard setters consider the economic, political and social consequences of accounting standards is consistent with the view that accounting reports, if compiled in accordance with accounting standards and other generally accepted principles, will be neutral and objective' SYNOPSIS Objectivity and neutrality are the ultimate goals of general purpose financial reporting. However there are many factors involved that make this goal almost impossible to attain. Economic, political and social issues are huge influences on the Accounting Standard setting process, and these influences spill over into everyday accounting, with personal gain often ahead of reliability and objectivity. Users of financial reports have demands that need to be satisfied, and regulatory boards involved in Standard setting have done their best to ensure that information is clear and reliable. Considering these factors, Accounting does not exist in a vacuum, Accountants are human beings, not robots and the profession has strict guidelines and heavy penalties for unprofessional or fraudulent activity. It is thus clear that every attempt is made to acknowledge the operating societal factors, gauge the impact they have on different industries at different times and move from that point. The result than, has to be, the best attempt at a neutral and objective report by the professional accountant. Economic, political and social issues are powerful driving forces within any society. These issues therefore need to be focused on when major decisions in industries, are being made. One industry that heavily relies on, and incorporates economic, political and social issues in its' decision-making, is that of Accounting. The Accounting profession is made up of many standards and regulatory boards that govern the way in which entities maintain their general-purpose financial reports. Accounting standards set minimum benchmarks of the quality required in financial reporting. They specify that reporting entities shall prepare general-purpose financial reports and that these reports will comply with Statements of Accounting Concepts (SAC's) and Accounting Standards (Accounting Handbook 2001, SAC1, pg. 3). The 'objective of general purpose financial reporting', (Accounting Handbook 2001, SAC2, pg. 13) is that all general purpose financial reports are prepared to provide users with information about the reporting entity, which is useful for making and evaluating decisions about the allocation of scare resources (Accounting Handbook 2001, SAC1, pg. 4). These reports 'should' be neutral and objective, free from bias, allowing users to make informed decisions. Considering that the process of 'setting' 2005-06-18T05:21:04-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Political-Economic-and-Social-Effects-of-Accounting-Standards-26901.aspx Basic History Overview Wal-Mart's history is one of innovation, leadership and success. It started with a single store in Rogers, Arkansas in 1962 and has grown to what is now the world's largest - and arguably, the most emulated - retailer. Some researchers refer to Wal-Mart as the industry trendsetter. Today, this retailing pioneer has annual revenues of over $100 billion, 3,000 stores and more than 750,000 employees worldwide. Wal-Mart operates each store, from the products it stocks, to the front-end equipment that helps speed checkout, with the same philosophy: provide everyday low prices and superior customer service. Lower prices also eliminate the expense of frequent sales promotions and sales are more predictable. Wal-Mart has invested heavily in its unique cross-docking inventory system. Cross docking has enabled Wal-Mart to achieve economies of scale which reduce its costs of sales. With this system, goods are continuously delivered to stores within 48 hours and often without having to inventory them. This allows Wal-Mart to replenish the shelves 4 times faster than its competition. Wal-Mart’s ability to replenish theirs shelves four times faster than its competition is just another advantage they have over competition. Wal-Mart leverages its buying power through purchasing in bulks and distributing the goods on it’s own. Wal-Mart guarantees everyday low prices and considers them the one stop shop. Case Overview The case study starts off with quotes from Wal-Mart executives with their thoughts of how employees/consumers should feel about the arguably most innovative retailer. “Wal-Mart employees who do not think globally are working for the wrong company.” “Wal-Mart must think and act as if it’s a global company. Otherwise, it cannot grow enough in the United States to maintain its stock price. It needs to be in South America. It needs to be in Asia. It needs to be in Europe.” Wal-Mart has taken their mind and cash over the last 20 years to become the world’s largest retailer. Wal-Mart had a base of 2,200 stores in the 80’s, closing out of the 90’s with a bang of 3,600 stores and $4.4 billion in net income. Spurred by NAFTA, Wal-Mart took advantage foreseeing potential growth in the foreign markets. Currently they have stories in the following countries: Mexico, Puerto Rico, Canada, Argentina, Brazil, China, Korea, United Kingdom, and in 1998 a controversial Germany. Most analysts believed Wal-Mart would move into eastern European countries however Wal-Mart confounded the analysts when they 2005-06-05T01:15:13-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Walmart-History-Strategy-and-Corporate-Overview-26824.aspx The Impact of Ethics on Decision-Making If decision-making requires that we employ the basic standards of critical thinking, mainly, perception, assumptions, emotion, language skills, arguments, fallacies, logic and problem solving, then, would it be correct to assume that if we employ the standards of ethical behavior to such decision-making processes the chosen alternative to the problem may create a dilemma between critical thinking and ethical conduct? At times it may. Many issues have to be taken into consideration. Some of these ethical issues involve tradition, personal believes, family values, patriotism to one’s country, religious believes, and cultural values. Ethical behavior is consistent with agreed principles of correct moral conduct. It is consistent because it is steady, unchanging, dependable and true to type, mainly, agreed principles. The principles, themselves, are agreed upon by a group of individuals that follow correct moral conduct. The conduct itself is correct because any other type of conduct is deemed unacceptable by those that follow this moral conduct. The conduct itself is also moral because it is righteous, upright, honest and blameless. In addition, ethical behavior is concerned with conduct because it is a way of behaving, habits and manners and presiding over situations and events. If these terms are so clearly defined, then why is it that various chosen alternatives with some individuals are in conflict with true happiness and a peaceful state of mind? The most likely reason for this alteration of minds lies with how incorrectly many individuals employ the standards of critical thinking in addition to having a disregard towards ethical conduct. The greater the deviance from critical thinking and ethical conduct, the greater the altered state of mind. Contrary to this, the closer that one is to the standards of critical thinking and ethical conduct, the greater the level of inner peace with oneself in selecting a chosen alternative with decision-making. As per Dr. Chopra: “Once we understand our true nature and learn to live in harmony with natural law, a sense of well-being, good health, fulfilling relationships, energy and enthusiasm for life, and material abundance will spring forth easily and effortlessly.” An example that discusses the impact of ethics on decision-making is the use of marijuana for medical purposes within the state of California. By analyzing this last statement word-by-word, you can safely imply that if marijuana is used for medical purposes, then its use is meant to remedy a medical condition, 2005-06-01T02:22:34-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Impact-of-Ethics-on-Decision-Making-26811.aspx Kellog's Traded Company Financial Statement Analysis Executive Summary Objective: Our goal in composing a financial statement is to construct the most comprehensive, thorough document possible, in order to attract investors and to confirm that we have taken the time to explore as many potential issues for your business as may arise. Summary of findings: Our level of cereal marketing investment early in 1998 was not sufficient in the face of extremely competitive market conditions. This situation hurt our volume performance for much of the year and, combined with other issues in markets around the world, led to a decline in both sales and earnings. Nonetheless, we continue to have the utmost confidence in the future of our grain-based businesses, and we are fully committed to return to both top-line and bottom-line growth. Appendix # 1- Market Research Description of firm and its management: Kellogg's products are manufactured in 20 countries on 6 Continents and distributed in more than 160 countries. Mr. Langbo has been employed by the Kellogg's Company since 1956. He was named President and Chief Operating Officer in 1990 and became Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer in 1992. In June of 1998, Mr. Carlos M. Gutierrez was named President and Chief Operating Officer. The competitive environment: The Company has experienced intense competition for sales of all of its principal products in its major markets, both domestically and internationally. The Company's products compete with advertised and branded products of a similar nature as well as unadvertised and private label products, which are typically distributed at lower prices, and generally with other food products with different characteristics. Principal methods and factors for competition include new product introductions, product quality, composition, and nutritional value, price, advertising and promotion. Economic climate and outlook: Although our 1998 business results were below our performance expectation, it was a year in which we put in place key elements of a stronger foundation for future growth. This included investments in new product development and a complete overhaul of our corporate headquarters and North American organizational structure. Should suitable investment opportunities of working capital needs arise that would require additional financing; management believes that the Company's strong credit rating, balance sheet and earnings history provide a base for obtaining additional financial resources at competitive rates and terms. Based on the expectation of cereal volume growth, and strong results from product innovation and the continued global 2005-05-31T06:02:29-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Kellog-s-Traded-Company--26804.aspx What is money? The definition of money The history of credit and banking goes back much further than the history of coins. Nevertheless the story of the origins of money goes back even further still. What is Money? At first sight the answer to this question seems obvious; the man or woman in the street would agree on coins and banknotes, but would they accept them from any country? What about cheques? They would probably be less willing to accept them than their own country's coins and notes but bank money (i.e. anything for which you can write a cheque) actually accounts for by far the greatest proportion by value of the total supply of money. What about I.O.U.s (I owe you), credit cards and gold? The gold standard belongs to history but even today in many rich people in different parts of the world would rather keep some of their wealth in the form of gold than in official, inflation-prone currencies. The attractiveness of gold, from an aesthetic point of view, and its resistance to corrosion are two of the properties which led to its use for monetary transactions for thousands of years. In complete contrast, a form of money with virtually no tangible properties whatsoever - electronic money - seems set to gain rapidly in popularity. All sorts of things have been used as money at different times in different places. The alphabetical list below, taken from page 27 of A History of Money by Glyn Davies, includes but a minute proportion of the enormous variety of primitive moneys, and none of the modern forms. [i:756d84cb38]Amber, beads, cowries, drums, eggs, feathers, gongs, hoes, ivory, jade, kettles, leather, mats, nails, oxen, pigs, quartz, rice, salt, thimbles, umiacs, vodka, wampum, yarns, and zappozats (decorated axes).[/i:756d84cb38] It is almost impossible to define money in terms of its physical form or properties since these are so diverse. Therefore any definition must be based on its functions. Functions of Money [i:756d84cb38]Specific functions (mostly micro-economic)[/i:756d84cb38] [i:756d84cb38]Unit of account (abstract) [/i:756d84cb38] Common measure of value (abstract) Medium of exchange (concrete) Means of payment (concrete) Standard for deferred payments (abstract) Store of value (concrete) General functions (mostly macro-economic and abstract) [i:756d84cb38]Liquid asset [/i:756d84cb38] Framework of the market allocative system (prices) A causative factor in the economy Controller of the economy The table above comes from page 27 of A History of Money. Not everything used as money as all the functions listed above. Furthermore the 2005-05-27T07:48:42-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Definition-of-Money-26788.aspx Ethics in Business From a business perspective, working under government contracts can be a very lucrative proposition. In general, a stream of orders keep coming in, revenue increases and the company grows in the aggregate. The obvious downfalls to working in this manner is both higher quality expected as well as the extensive research and documentation required for government contracts. If a part fails to perform correctly it can cause minor glitches as well as problems that can carry serious repercussions, such as in the National Semiconductor case. When both the culpable component and company are found, the question arises of how extensive these repercussions should be. Is the company as an entity liable or do you look into individual employees within that company? From an ethical perspective one would have to look at the mitigating factors of both the employees and their superiors along with the role of others in the failure of these components. Next you would have to analyze the final ruling from a corporate perspective and then we must examine the macro issue of corporate responsibility in order to attempt to find a resolution for cases like these. The first mitigating factor involved in the National Semiconductor case is the uncertainty, on the part of the employees, on the duties that they were assigned. It is plausible that during the testing procedure, an employee couldnt distinguish which parts they were to test under government ezdards and commercial ezdards. In some cases they might have even been misinformed on the final consumers of the products that they tested. In fact, ignorance on the part of the employees would fully excuse them from any moral responsibility for any damage that may result from their work. Whether it is decided that an employees is fully excused, or is given some moral responsibility, would have to be looked at on an individual basis. The second mitigating factor is the duress or threats that an employee might suffer if they do not follow through with their assignment. After the bogus testing was completed in the National Semiconductor labs, the documentation department also had to falsify documents stating that the parts had surpassed the governmental testing ezdards. From a legal and ethical ezdpoint, both the testers and the writers of the reports were merely acting as agents on direct orders from a superior. This was also the case when the plant in Singapore refused to 2005-05-27T04:59:51-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Ethics-in-Business--26758.aspx Downsizing Overview: Stages, Method, Manner Downsizing of companies can have many reasons behind it and cannot be avoided at times, there are simple measures a company can take to make the process easier on the laid-off employees and those who survive with the company. - STAGES OF DOWNSIZING - The downsizing process can generally be broken down into three distinct stages. The first stage is called the diagnostic stage. In this stage, management staff pulls together and determines the amount of costs and expenses that need to be reduced, and how much can come out of layoffs (Moore 49). This stage usually takes about two to three months to complete. During this time, the upper management reviews all financial records in order to determine how much is needed to be cut from salary expenditures (Moore 50). This stage is concluded when the senior management has a detailed plan on who will be let go, and who will remain with the company. During this stage, there is one common mistake many companies make: lack of communication. The middle management is usually left out of all downsizing plans. This is wrong and creates a big mistake. Middle management should be looked upon as a valuable tool for giving input where cuts should be made (Moore 51). The next stage of downsizing is the implementation stage. During this stage the employees are laid off. The time between an announcement and the actual layoff should be as short as possible. This will almost insure that a panic will be avoided, and give a clear view of the situation at hand without causing mass-hysteria. In a managerial position, it is difficult to explain to an employee that he or she is being laid off, but Terrence Moore gives a guideline on how it should be done. Small talk should be avoided. Management should clearly explain that the employee is being laid off and be prepared to answer questions directly; avoid beating around the bush. It is extremely important to detail all employee benefits and severance pay, also the employee should be encouraged to come back with any questions that he or she may have (Moore 52). An important note is that the employee should not be given false hope. It should be made clear, from the start, that the employee is being laid off and doesn't have a chance of being rehired. Finally, you should not try to lie to 2005-05-26T09:09:06-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Downsizing-Overview-Stages,-Method,-Manner-26721.aspx Henry Ford and the Assembly Line Henry Ford the most influential person in the last century, created a cheap inexpensive traveling carriage. By doing this, people in America and soon people around the world could travel 200 miles in a ten-hour period. Before this invention of the automobile people could only travel 20 miles in one day by horse. Henry Ford was born on July 30, 1863. He was the first of six to his parents William and Mary Ford. Henry grew up in a typical 19th century home and attended a one-room schoolhouse. At an early age, he had an interested in mechanical things and a dislike for farm work. At the age of 16 in 1879, Henry left his home to work as an apprentice machinist in Detroit. For three years Henry worked as an apprentice, then returned to his home town. The next couple of year's Henry worked at home, and occasionally fixed steam engines, and briefly took over his dad's farm. In 1891, Henry Ford became an engineer with the Edison Illuminating Company in Detroit. Henry was promoted to Chief Engineer in 1893, which gave him enough money to experiment. In 1896 Henry completed his self-propelled Quadricycle. This Quadricycle had four wire wheels that looked like big bike tires. To steer this contraption, a tiller like a boat was used: The automobile had two speeds and no reverse.After two unsuccessful attempts to make a manufacturing company to produce automobiles, the \"Ford Motor Company\" was built in 1903. Fords first assembly line was became the models for future assembly lines. Henry became the Vice-President and Chief Engineer of his own company. The factory built only a few cars a day but still remained in business. Ford soon began working to make a simple, sturdy car that large numbers of people would be able to afford. He achieved one of the first such cars with the Model T, which appeared in 1908. This was the only car Ford produced. The original price of a Model T was $825. This was too high of a price for many customers. To lower the price, Ford and his coworkers tried new ways to reduce production costs. The company created an assembly line method in which conveyor belts brought automobile parts to workers. Each worker performed a particular task such 2005-05-21T08:27:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Henry-Ford-and-the-Assembly-Line-26695.aspx International Trade and Globalization In today's world there are many issues in need of reformation, one of which is international trade, otherwise known as globalization. Although there are a great deal of rules, regulations, and policies imposed on international trade, the manner in which those rules have been enforced is a major controversy that seems to be escalating day by day. At the center of the controversy is the World Trade Organization (WTO). The WTO was established in 1995 in order to transform the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) into an enforceable global commercial code. Critics of the WTO say that instead of being run democratically and in the interest of member countries, it has become the enforcer of corporate managed trade. A system whose ethics are not in favor of the public interest, instead the focus has shifted to large corporations and making money. Profit is the motivating factor behind decisions made by the WTO. By looking at international trade from the rational perspective, the WTO has not only failed to protect consumers, workers, and the environment, it has also acquired a number of opponents and protestors. Recent issues concerning the WTO include President Clinton's signing of a bill, which grants permanent normal trade relations to China and virtually guarantees them membership into the WTO. Not concerned with China's communist regime that abuses its workers, supporters of the bill call it a "major victory for U.S. companies like Microsoft Corp. and Boeing Co., which hoped the deal would result in billions of dollars in new sales in the Chinese marketplace" (abcnews.go.com/wire/world/reuters). Once again they are demonstrating that the pursuit of wealth is it's number one goal and ignoring massive protests launched by American labor unions who argue that the pact could cost hundreds of thousands of American jobs due to an increase in Chinese imports and companies who may decide to relocate factories to China, where cheap labor can be utilized. Another prominent issue concerning the WTO is organically produced foods, which have become a highly demanded product in the last few years. Countries take part in distributing and manufacturing foods because it has led to an increased amount of trade (increasing exports and minimizing imports). The parties that have benefited most from organically produced foods are farmers and agricultural businesses in other countries. But a negative impact would be increased competition among businesses. This represents a rational 2005-05-19T03:28:03-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/International-Trade-and-Globalization-26678.aspx IBM History, IBM Corporate Profile 1890-1938: The early years IBM was incorporated in the state of New York on June 15, 1911 as the Computing-Tabulating-Recording Company. But its origins can be traced back to 1890, during the height of the Industrial Revolution, when the United States was experiencing waves of immigration. The U.S. Census Bureau knew its traditional methods of counting would not be adequate for measuring the population, so it sponsored a contest to find a more efficient means of tabulating census data. The winner was Herman Hollerith, a German immigrant and Census Bureau statistician, whose Punch Card Tabulating Machine used an electric current to sense holes in punch cards and keep a running total of data. Capitalizing on his success, Hollerith formed the Tabulating Machine Co. in 1896. In 1911, Charles R. Flint, a noted trust organizer, engineered the merger of Hollerith's company with two others, Computing Scale Co. of America and International Time Recording Co. The combined Computing-Tabulating-Recording Co., or C-T-R, manufactured and sold machinery ranging from commercial scales and industrial time recorders to meat and cheese slicers and, of course, tabulators and punch cards. Based in New York City, the company had 1,300 employees and offices and plants in Endicott and Binghamton, N.Y.; Dayton, Ohio; Detroit, Mich.; Washington, D.C., and Toronto, Canada. When the diversified businesses of C-T-R proved difficult to manage, Flint turned for help to the former No. 2 executive at the National Cash Register Co., Thomas J. Watson. In 1914, Watson, age 40, joined the company as general manager. The son of Scottish immigrants, Watson had been a top salesman at NCR, but left after clashing with its autocratic leader, John Henry Patterson. However, Watson did adopt some of Patterson's more effective business tactics: generous sales incentives, an insistence on well-groomed, dark-suited salesmen and an evangelical fervor for instilling company pride and loyalty in every worker. Watson boosted company spirit with employee sports teams, family outings and a company band. He preached a positive outlook, and his favorite slogan, "THINK," became a mantra for C-T-R's employees. Watson also stressed the importance of the customer, a lasting IBM tenet. He understood that the success of the client translated into the success of his company, a belief that, years later, manifested itself in the popular adage, "Nobody was ever fired for buying from IBM." Within 11 months of joining C-T-R, Watson became its president. The company 2005-05-19T03:06:30-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Early-History-of-IBM--26664.aspx Retail Inventory Management (RIM) and Inventory Accounting Retail Inventory-Level Planning consists of retail inventory method (RIM) which is an accounting procedure whose objectives are to maintain a perpetual. It also can book inventory in retail dollars amounts and to maintain records that make it possible to determine the cost value of the inventory at any time without taking a physical inventory. Also known as book inventory system or perpetual book inventory. Retailers also have another important choice to make the stock to sales ratio. The stock to sales ratio is derived directly from the planned inventory to determine monthly additions to stock in the merchandise budget plan. Retailers generally think of their inventory at retail price levels rather than at cost. Retailers use their initial markups, additional markups, and markdowns, and so forth as percentages of retail. When retailers compare their prices to competitors', they use retail prices. The problem is that when retailers to design their financial plans, evaluate performance, and prepare financial statements, they need to know the cost value of their inventory. Retailers use physical inventories. This process is time consuming and costly. Retailers take physical inventories once or twice a year. Many retailers use point of sale terminals that keep track of every item sold its original cost, and its final selling price. The rest of the retailers face a problem of not knowing the cost value of their inventory at one time. These retailers with either computerized or manual systems can use retail inventory method. Their are five advantages for using RIM over a system of inventory at cost. The does not have to "cost" each time. When retailers have many SKUs, keeping track of each item becomes difficult and expensive. It is easier to determine the value of inventory with the retail prices marked on the merchandise than unmarked or at coded cost prices. The second advantage for using RIM is that it follows the accepted accounting principal of valuing assets at cost or market value, which is lower. This system lowers the value of inventory when markdowns are taken but does not allow inventory's value increase with additional markups. When using RIM, the amounts and percentages of initial markups, markdowns, and shrinkage can be identified. This information can then be compared with historical records or 2005-05-19T02:53:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Retail-Inventory-Management-and-Inventory-Accounting-26658.aspx Leaders Vs Managers: [i:116e69f5b3]What makes a good leader? What makes a good manager?[/i:116e69f5b3] The business sector in today's society is increasing rapidly, and with this increase comes the need for more people to manage and lead the growing companies, but this growing need also raises some potential questions: Can anyone become a leader or a manager? Is there a difference between the two? Can people be trained to become leaders or a managers? Just like many other questions that might be asked in business; these questions have no one, definite answer. Let's begin first by acknowledging the definitions of the two root words; the word manage means to handle, where as the word lead means to go. Similarly as the two words have different definitions, they also have different purposes. To help individuals increase their potentials in business, an internationally recognized motivational speaker by the name of Marc Sanborn has developed certain "theories" that, much like in science or art, prove some things to be more true than others by providing supporting facts to prove the validity of certain ways of thinking. Many of Marc's theories validate the fact that in general, good managers tend to be good leaders, but good leaders are not always good managers. It is said, "Any company that cannot imagine the future won't be around to enjoy it." Therefore before any manager or leader can affect changes in their business they have to do what Marc describes as visioning; they must mentally "look" into what they want to see as the potential outcome of any given situation. Managers are concerned with the problem at hand; they focus on what has to be done. Leaders on the other hand, notice what has to be done, but spend their time figuring out how to get it done. Marc states "managers vision the destination, leaders vision how to get there". To be an effective leader it is important to focus on the gritty details of a situation, look for opportunities and how to achieve them. Visioning cannot be taught but can be developed. Marc suggests people start from the end and work backwards, or think to themselves "what will this team accomplish because of me?" Leadership is all about taking an organization to a place it would not have otherwise gone without you, in a value-adding, measurable way. When you vision, you think your way into a situation and it 2005-05-16T05:20:48-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Leaders-versus-Managers--26629.aspx Mega Manufacturing Company Analysis and Suggestions Mega Manufacturing is a manufacturer of sports shoes for men and women. They are investigating each department in order to cut back on spending in order to eliminate wastes of resources. One potential waste is coming from the cutting department. The waste of material is costing the company monitory resources that could further benefit the company if allocated elsewhere. Several solutions have been discovered with the cutting process but if the problem were to be solve d there is both a salary saving and the elimination of waste, in this particular department. However the solution lies with the employees of this department and the solution will cost some of them their jobs. The variables effecting the disclosure of this information vary from one's need for monitory income, to the esteem of the position. Management is facing several possible decisions that include employee employment assurance to cost savings and company bottom line figures. Their decisions are founded on management decisions, employee motivations and resistance to innovations and the notion of getting these resistant employees to adopt the innovations. First, the management decisions regarding the cutting process and the problems that are associated with them. The notion that the skilled workers of the cutting department are aware of a solution to the problem with the breaking dies indicates that there is a solution to the problem. On the standpoint of the company, investigation into the proper use and successful completion of the cut using the die needs to be resolved. The die eliminates wastage and will speed up productivity of the cutting process. It will also make the individual machine operator more efficient which will conclude with the elimination of several positions may allocated more resources previously spent on employee salaries. This cost savings will free up allocations previously spent on overhead and allocated to other departments that may increase spending in order to increase sales, or add more to the stockholders bottom line. As a machine operator aware of this notion that relinquishing this information could cost him/her their job, there needs to be some cause for hesitation. The workers are paid on an hourly base so the increase of efficiency will also allow management the ability to cut hours, which will also hurt the workers. If faced with this dilemma I would have to first find out if the solution the breaking dies were legit. Because 2005-05-15T02:08:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Mega-Manufacturing-Company-Analysis-and-Suggestions-26611.aspx Executive Summary: In this study of Norwegian Cruise Lines (NCL) our group analyzed the company’s overall position with focus on their marketing. NCL has been underperforming in their financial reports as compared to the rest of the cruise industry leaders and has been unable to obtain positive income consistently. The cruise industry is rapidly growing with many lucrative opportunities. While there are many different cruise lines, Carnival Cruise Lines and Royal Caribbean dominate ownership and market share. NCL’s main marketing strategy is known as “Freestyle Cruising.” This new approach to cruising is an industry first and has revolutionized cruising. Recently NCL has also adopted several cruises departing from Hawaii and mainland America, and they have flagged some of their fleet under the U.S. flag. While we believe that NCL offers a high value service, they still struggle to inform many potential clients of this value. Overall we believe that more NCL needs to educate their customers and travel agents of what they have to offer. History and Financials: NCL was founded by Knut Kloster and Ted Arison in 1966, creating a single class, casual cruise line, departing from Miami all of which were relatively new to the cruise industry . Arison eventually left, founding Carnival Cruise Line, but NCL still prospered through the 1980’s. In 2000, Singapore-based Star Cruises acquired NCL. Soon after the acquisition, NCL introduced its Freestyle Cruising concept and U.S. Flagged ships. Currently NCL has ten cruise ships and is continually expanding its fleet (See Appendix Q). NCL has an eleven percent control of the market compared to its competitors Royal Caribbean, with thirty-five percent, and Carnival Cruise Lines, with forty-nine percent. Over a three year period these percentages have changed very little (Appendix A). Since Star Cruises acquired NCL the financials contributed by NCL have been buried within Star’s financials. In figuring out how much income was the result of NCL under Star Cruises, we looked at the past financial history of both. Two years of complete financial statements were found and it was determined that NCL contributed around seventy percent of the revenue, which is lower than industry leaders. When looking at the competition it was clear that SG&A expenses are more then double that of Carnival and Royal Caribbean as a percentage. It also had higher non-operating and COGS expenses compared to Carnival as a percentage. 2005-05-14T17:10:20-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Norwegian-Cruise-Lines-26599.aspx The first and most important step in brewing is cleanliness. "Brewing is ninety percent janitorial," said Frederick Bowman, founder of Portland Brewing. (Bowman) The first step in the actual brewing process is malting. Malting is what is done to the barley to prepare it for brewing. The steps of the malting process release the starches that are contained in the barley, while minimizing haze and off-flavors. Grain is allowed to soak in 60° F. water to increase the moisture content of the grain to about 40-45%. The grain is usually spread out on the floor of the germination room, or some other container. These grains are kept at a temperature of about 60° F. The germination is complete when the sprout has grown to about 3/4 the length of the grain and the hard part of the grain, or the shell, has turned soft. The goal for germination is for the starches within the grain to break down into shorter lengths. At this shorter length stage, the grain is called green malt. Kilning is the next stage after the grains have sprouted. Kilning is the process of drying the grain in the kiln where the temperature is slowly raised during the 30-35 hour period. After kilning, the result is finished malt, with soluble starches and developed enzymes. These grains each have a different and distinct flavor depending on how long they are cooked in the kiln. (Porter) After the malting, the grain is ready for milling. Milling is the cracking, and crushing of the grain. This procedure is controlled carefully so as to break the grain while keeping the husk as large and as intact as possible. Milling allows the grain to absorb the water it will be mixed with later as the water will extract sugars from the malt. The malt will now be mixed with warm water in the mash tun. This vessel holds the grain and water mixture for a period of time. Two important things will take place in this step. One is to break down proteins to the more soluble and usable amino acids, providing food for the yeast and foam for a nice head on the beer. The second thing is to break down the starch to simple sugars so yeast can convert them to alcohol and carbon dioxide. (Porter) Mash filtration consists of filtering the converted mash by gravity or pressure in a lauter tub 2005-04-24T07:16:59-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Beer-The-Production-History-and-Consumption-Of-B-26547.aspx The Four Ps Of Marketing While the forms of marketing are almost as varied as the products themselves,there is evidence that there are some universal rules that are applicable to successful marketing in the retail and 2005-04-14T20:38:22-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Four-Ps-Of-Marketing-26504.aspx Corporate Responsibility From a business perspective, working under government contracts can be a very lucrative proposition. In general, a stream of orders keep coming in, revenue increases and the company grows in the aggregate. The obvious downfalls to working in this manner is both higher quality expected as well as the extensive research and documentation required for government contracts. If a part fails to perform correctly it can cause minor glitches as well as problems that can carry serious repercussions, such as in the National Semiconductor case. When both the culpable component and company are found, the question arises of how extensive these repercussions should be. Is the company as an entity liable or do you look into individual employees within that company? From an ethical perspective one would have to look at the mitigating factors of both the employees and their superiors along with the role of others in the failure of these components. Next you would have to analyze the final ruling from a corporate perspective and then we must examine the macro issue of corporate responsibility in order to attempt to find a resolution for cases like these. The first mitigating factor involved in the National Semiconductor case is the uncertainty, on the part of the employees, on the duties that they were assigned. It is plausible that during the testing procedure, an employee couldnt distinguish which parts they were to test under government standards and commercial standards. In some cases they might have even been misinformed on the final consumers of the products that they tested. In fact, ignorance on the part of the employees would fully excuse them from any moral responsibility for any damage that may result from their work. Whether it is decided that an employees is fully excused, or is given some moral responsibility, would have to be looked at on an individual basis. The second mitigating factor is the duress or threatsT employee might suffer if they do not follow through with their assignment. After the bogus testing was completed in the National Semiconductor labs, the documentation department also had to falsify documents stating that the parts had surpassed the governmental testing standards. From a legal and ethical standpoint, both the testers and the writers of the reports were merely acting as agents on direct orders from a superior. This was also the case when the plant in Singapore refused to falsify 2005-04-14T04:30:32-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Corporate-Responsibility-Essay-26496.aspx COMMUNICATING WITH THE CUSTOMER 1.0 What is Integrated Marketing Communication? "Integrated marketing communication simply recognises the need to plan and build-up all relevant marketing communications so that they work together in harmony to greatest effect with greatest efficiency" Pickton and Broderick (2001) In its simplest form, it is the "process of integrating all elements of marketing communications mix across all customer contact points to achieve greater brand coherence" Pickton and Broderick (2001) 1.1 The importance of IMC Major corporations and their partners have adopted IMC, and according to the Advertising Age, a recent survey called it the single most important influence on strategic decision-making today. 1.2 The benefits of IMC "The principal benefit derived from the integration of marketing communication is the synergy. Synergy has been described as the 2+2=5 phenomenon. By bringing together the various facets of marketing communications in a mutually supportive and enhancing way then the resulting 'whole' is more then the simple sum of its parts." (Pickton and Broderick 2001). This can be seen when looking at a television advertisement and the images and messages carried through it. "Each element enhances and supports the other." "Linton and Morley (1995) list ten potential benefits of integrated marketing communications." The benefits are not always easy to achieve because of "difficulties in implementation" · Creative Integrity · Consistent Messages · Unbiased Marketing Recommendations · Better Use of Media · Greater Marketing Precision · Operational Efficiency · Cost Savings · High-calibre consistent service · Easier working relations · Greater agency accountability Pickton and Broderick (2001) 1.3 IMC's role in the Market place IMC has an increasingly central role to play in today's market place, because if offers companies a way to strategically coordinate messages and establish a meaningful dialogue with customers. In short, IMC provides organisations with a strategic method for both establishing and maintaining relationships with key stakeholders. And this is essential for marketing success in the twenty-first century. 1.4 The Drivers of IMC The marketplace is changing. What was once a single audience has fragmented and companies have to establish and maintain brand relationships with a variety of groups of people-customers, as well as other stakeholders, such as employees, investors, suppliers and distributors, local communities, and the media. Organisations now have to communicate with these groups using a wide variety of media. Consequently there are more kinds of messages than ever before and inconsistency can become a company-wide problem. That is why IMC is also needed to coordinate communication consistency Because the mass media now have considerably less importance than they have had 2005-03-27T10:45:09-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/What-is-Integrated-Marketing-Communication-26418.aspx The Definition of a Leader Regardless of how we tend to view leadership, research shows that leaders do not necessarily possess any more positive traits than anyone else. Effective leaders do, however, develop and practice certain behavioral skills that contribute to their success. Rather than relying on personality traits, leaders should work to develop their relationships with followers, peers and other leaders. Effective leaders show intelligence, good judgment, honesty and integrity, responsibility, stability, initiative, persistence, accountability, insight, maturity, dependability, optimism, enthusiasm, ambition, confidence, flexibility, vision, empathy, sincerity, charisma, and trustworthiness. Make sure you don't bring your fears to work. While you don't have to be the life of the party, you have to reassure your employees that, in the larger scheme of things, current events are a bump in the road--painful to be sure, but ones that will be overcome as surely as night follows day. Keep your door open to your employees. Be liberal with time off. Let them know you are there to talk with them anytime--give them a way to reach you at night and on weekends. Encourage them, in a positive manner, not to "work hard," but to do the best work they can. You are counting on them, as are their fellow employees, their families and your customers--indeed, the entire country is counting on one another. To the extent that you can afford it, make counseling available. If you are not able to provide one-on-one therapy, perhaps you can sponsor a group. Remind them frequently that you love them like family and are there for them. Therefore, you must take the first step. Understand that others can perform some of your duties as well or better than you can. Loosening the strings doesn't diminish your importance; it increases it. And continue to remind yourself that, with only so many hours in a day or week, you are limited by those hours. Start to practice hands-off management. Every day, give your employees more tasks and responsibilities. It's perfectly OK to tell them how you handle each such task and, of course, tell them why you do some things a certain way. Then, reassure them that you want them to experiment, to find better ways of producing the product, delivering the service, billing the client, and generating new sales. Let them know several important things. You expect and respect failure. That you learned from your mistakes and they 2005-03-27T10:42:42-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/What-It-Takes-to-Be-a-Leader-26416.aspx This report will give the history of the Philip Morris Company, all of the changes, leaders and acquisitions that it went through to get were it is today. Also all the battles that it is still has to fight in the 21st century. Philip Morris, Esq., a tobacconist and importer of fine cigars founded Philip Morris in the mid 1800's, by opening a shop on Bond Street in London (picture-attachment I). It's first cigar was produced in 1854. Leopold Morris took over his brother's business in 1873, when he passed. Leopold joined Joseph Grunebaum and created Philip Morris & Company and Grunebaum, Ltd. This partnership was separated two years later in 1887; the company now became Philip Morris & Co., Ltd. In 1894 Philip Morris was for the most part controlled by William Curtis Thomason and his family, due to the company being taken over by creditors. Only six years after being taken over by creditors it was appointed tobacconist to King Edward VII. George Eckmeyer, imported and sold English-made cigarettes in the United States, since 1872, he was Philip Morris' only agent in the U.S. He incorporated Philip Morris & Co., Ltd. in New York, in 1902. The ownership was split 50-50 between the British parent and the American partners. It sold the following brands: Philip Morris, Blues, Cambridge, Derby, and one named after the street its London factory was on, Marlborough2. Philip Morris purchased a factory in Richmond, Virginia in 1929, where it first began to manufacture its own cigarettes. Whelan's Tobacco Products Corporation crashes shortly before the market in 1929; Rube Ellis, who calls in Leonard McKitterick and appoints him president, picks up Philip Morris2. Only 3 years later Otway Hebron Chalkley was appointed president of Philip Morris and then became chairman of the company in 1945. Johnny Roventinni, was a bellhop who was discovered in 1933 in a New York Hotel and became the Philip Morris spokesperson for the next forty years. The Axton-Fisher plant and facilities in Louisville, Kentucky was bought out by Philip Morris in 1944. An investor group headed by A.P Giannini, founder of the Bank of America, had bought the Axton-Fisher Tobacco Company in 1942. The company was unsuccessful in making their new Fleetwood cigarette a major contender to Lucky Strike, Camel, and Chesterfield, Axton-Fisher was sold to Philip Morris3. Another 2005-03-19T22:58:33-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Philip-Morris-Company-Timeline,-History,-and-Profile-26380.aspx Private Detectives and Investigators Private detectives and investigators use many means to determine the facts in a variety of matters. To carry out investigations, they may use various types of surveillance or searches. To verify facts, such as an individual's place of employment or income, they may make phone calls or visit a subject's workplace (outlook 1). In other cases, especially those involving missing persons and background checks, investigators often interview people to gather as much information as possible about an individual (Outlook 3). In all cases, private detectives and investigators assist attorneys, businesses, and the public with a variety of legal, financial, and personal problems. Private detectives and investigators offer many services, including executive, corporate, and celebrity protection; pre-employment verification; and individual background profiles. They also provide assistance in civil liability and personal injury cases, insurance claims and fraud, child custody and protection cases, and premarital screening. Increasingly, they are hired to investigate individuals to prove or disprove infidelity. Most detectives and investigators are trained to perform physical surveillance, often for long periods, in a car or van. They may observe a site, such as the home of a subject, from an inconspicuous location. The surveillance continues using still and video cameras, binoculars, and a cell phone, until the desired evidence is obtained. They also may perform computer database searches, or work with someone who does. Computers allow detectives and investigators to quickly obtain massive amounts of information on individuals' prior arrests, convictions, and civil legal judgments; telephone numbers; motor vehicle registrations; association and club memberships; and other matters. The duties of private detectives and investigators depend on the needs of their client. In cases for employers involving workers' fraudulent compensation claims, for example, investigators may carry out long-term covert observation of subjects. If an investigator observes a subject performing an activity that contradicts injuries stated in a workers' compensation claim, the investigator would take video or still photographs to document the activity and report it to the client. Private detectives and investigators often specialize (Outlook 2). Those who focus on intellectual property theft, for example, investigate and document acts of piracy, help clients stop the illegal activity, and provide intelligence for prosecution and civil action. Other investigators specialize in developing financial profiles and asset searches. Their reports reflect information gathered through interviews, investigation and surveillance, and research, including review of public documents. Legal Investigators specialize in cases 2005-03-19T22:04:12-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Private-Detectives-and-Investigators,-Job-Profile-26376.aspx Thinking Outside of the Apple Box When Steve Jobs launched the iMac in 1998, he was quoted as saying, "these new product lines give people what they want most, a lightning fast laptop and a striking new consumer Macintosh." Is Jobs correct in this assessment? Is speed, look, and brand really the main drivers for consumers? Did Jobs' strategy to capture market share in the personal computer industry focus on the right aspects? This paper will venture to say no and suggest the following alternative strategy: Apple should build a new business in "Wintel" PCs, while continuing to sell Macs to the design and publishing segment of the market. In order to support this conclusion, Apple's competitive advantages and industry forces must be analyzed. Apple has been in business since 1976, and has built a number of competitive advantages along the way. Four such differentiations are brand loyalty, innovative hardware design, dedicated market shares, and ease of use. What Jobs recognized in 1998 is that consumers did want a Macintosh. Apple's brand commitment is strong, and has been since the 1970's when Apple user communities were founded to bond enthusiasts. A key component to this is Apple's ease of use. "Adding extra hardware and software to a Mac was almost as easy as plugging speakers into a stereo system." Because of this loyalty, Apple was able to form a tight knit relationship with its customers, particularly within the education and design & publishing industries, which accounted for 80% of Apple's market position in 1998 (Exhibit A). Furthermore, the 1998 "Think Different" campaign propagated Apple's image as inventive and trendy. It enabled Apple to become a substitute based on design alone, giving it a particular edge over its khaki-clad competitors. Albeit these advantages, Apple still managed to lose a large amount of profit, and its market share dwindled from 8% to 3.4% from 1995 - 1998 (Exhibit B). The company also slipped in the education sector during this time by as much as 14% per year. In order to understand why Apple was losing so much ground, we must look into the power of suppliers and buyers in the industry. Most notably on the suppliers' side are microprocessors and operating systems, where Intel and Microsoft are the dominant names. Because of their 2005-02-23T08:31:40-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Apple-s-Competitive-Strategy-26317.aspx Industrial Upgrading as an Historical and Organizational Learning Process From a theoretical point of view, there are three defining elements in this historically and organizationally grounded, global commodity chains approach to industrial upgrading. First, sequences of export roles are contingent, not invariant, features of industrial upgrading. While the progression from assembly to OEM to OBM export roles is quite typical, success in one role does not guarantee success in subsequent ones. Backsliding is possible and the sequences may vary, especially for more advanced forms of upgrading. These export roles are not mutually exclusive, either. In fact, most nations are tied to the world economy in multiple ways (Gereffi, 1995). In the case of apparel, for example, the East Asian NIEs have engaged in assembly, OEM, and OBM from the 1960s through the 1990s, and they have extended their OEM and to a lesser degree OBM capabilities to a diverse array of other export industries. Prominent apparel exporters like China, Mexico, and Turkey are currently making a successful transition from assembly to OEM production, while most nations have not progressed beyond the assembly export role. Second, industrial upgrading is embedded in a social structure of producers, which is made up of "organizational chains" of buying and supplying firms. From this perspective, industrial upgrading involves organization learning to improve the position of firms or nations in international trade and production networks (Gereffi and Tam, 1998). Participation in global commodity chains is a necessary step for industrial upgrading because it puts firms and economies on potentially dynamic learning curves. There are many obstacles, however, to moving up these chains. The barriers to entry for each export role are more demanding as one moves along the industrial upgrading trajectory. Subsequent stages generally require the mastery of skills associated with the previous stage, although new resources and capabilities are also involved in upgrading shifts. Entry into the apparel commodity chain in the assembly export role, for instance, requires that an economy have low labor costs, political stability, and favorable quotas or other forms of trade access to major export markets. The shift from assembly to the OEM role requires, in addition to the foregoing conditions, a local infrastructure of firms capable of supplying a variety of apparel inputs (e.g., textiles, thread, buttons, zippers, labels) at the quality and quantity levels required for 2005-02-20T06:33:58-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Industrial-Upgrading-for-Historical,-Organizational-Learning-26285.aspx Using Global Commodity Chains to Study Industrial Upgrading The increasing integration of domestic economies with the world economy is a central feature of "globalization." What makes globalization different from earlier stages in the international division of labor is, in large part, the ability of producers to slice up the value chain, i.e., to break up of the production process of a commodity into many geographically separated steps (Porter, 1990; Krugman, 1995). This global dispersion of commodity chains increases opportunities for developing countries to participate and gain from trade because it provides greater room for them to specialize in the labor-intensive stages of the manufacturing process of a commodity. Industrial upgrading, from this perspective, involves moving up global commodity chains from labor-intensive activities to more capital- and skill-intensive economic activities that involve organizational learning to improve the position of firms or nations in international trade and production networks (Gereffi, 1999). The concept of industrial upgrading encompasses several related levels of analysis: product characteristics, types of economic activity, intrasectoral shifts, and intersectoral shifts (Gereffi and Tam, 1998). At a product level, one can talk about the movement from simple to more complex goods of the same type (e.g., cotton shirts to men's suits). At the level of economic activities, there are various roles that involve increasingly sophisticated production, marketing, and design tasks. One typology includes: assembly, original equipment manufacturing (OEM), original brandname manufacturing (OBM), and original design manufacturing (ODM). A third type of industrial upgrading involves an intrasectoral progression, typically from the manufacture of finished items to the production of higher value goods and services involving forward and backward linkages along the supply chain. Finally, industrial upgrading may also be viewed as the intersectoral shift from low-value, labor-intensive industries to capital- and technology intensive ones (e.g., clothes to cars to computers). While firms generally implement industrial upgrading, the spatial context in which this activity occurs and is observed includes local, national, and regional economies. In the specific historical context of the global apparel industry, one of the clearest qualitative indicators of industrial upgrading are the role shifts involved in moving from assembly (using imported inputs) to more integrated forms of manufacturing and marketing associated with the OEM and OBM export roles (Gereffi, 1995). Participation in assembly networks (often associated with export-processing zones) is considered the first step in the upgrading process because 2005-02-20T06:32:29-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Using-Global-Commodity-Chains-to-Study-Industrial-Upgrading-26284.aspx Lead Firms in the Apparel Commodity Chain Because of the intensive use of low-skilled labor in apparel production, transnational companies have limited potential for deriving firm-specific advantages from direct foreign investment in overseas locations. Instead, they have turned to other forms of transnational activity, such as the importing of finished garments, brand name and trademark licensing, and the international subcontracting of assembly operations. These various activities have led to multiple lead firms in buyer-driven commodity chains. There are three types of lead firms in the apparel commodity chain: retailers, marketers, and branded manufacturers (Gereffi, 1997). As apparel production has become globally dispersed and the competition between these types of firms intensified, each has developed extensive global sourcing capabilities. While "de-verticalizing" out of production, they are fortifying their activities in the high value-added design and marketing segments of the apparel chain, leading to a blurring of the boundaries between these firms and a realignment of interests within the chain. Here's a quick look at where each lead firm stands in apparel sourcing: Retailers. In the past, retailers were the apparel manufacturers' main customers, but now they are increasingly becoming their competitors. As consumers demand better value, retailers have increasingly turned to imports. In 1975, only 12% of the apparel sold by U.S. retailers was imported; by 1984, retail stores had doubled their use of imported garments (AAMA, 1984). In 1993, retailers accounted for 48% of the total value of imports of the top 100 U.S. apparel importers (who collectively represented about one-quarter of all apparel imports). U.S. apparel marketers, which perform the design and marketing functions but contract out the actual production of apparel to foreign or domestic sources, represented 22% of the value of these imports in 1993, and domestic producers made up an additional 20% of the total (Jones, 1995: 25-26). The picture in Europe is strikingly similar. European retailers account for fully one-half of all apparel imports, and marketers or designers add roughly another 20% (Scheffer, 1994: 11-12). Private label lines (or store brands), which refer to merchandise made for specific retailers and sold exclusively in their stores, constituted about 25% of the total U.S. apparel market in 1993 (Dickerson, 1995: 460). Marketers. These manufacturers without factories include companies like Liz Claiborne, Donna Karan, Ralph Lauren, Tommy Hilfiger, Nautica, and Nike, that literally were born global because most 2005-02-20T06:31:56-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Lead-Firms-in-the-Apparel-Commodity-Chain-26283.aspx Lead Firms in the Automotive Commodity Chain The United States is the world's largest consumer market for passenger cars and light trucks. The "Big Three" U.S. automakers - General Motors, Ford Motor Company, and Chrysler Corp. (now part of DaimlerChrysler following its merger with Daimler-Benz AG) - accounted for 68% of the passenger cars produced in the United States in 1997. The remaining 32% of U.S.-made cars came from Asian and European "transplant" firms. Along with these giant assemblers, the automotive commodity chain also includes parts manufacturers. The auto parts industry is fragmented, consisting of thousands of suppliers ranging in size from small shops to large multinationals. The auto parts segment of the chain is divided between original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and the replacement market. OEMs are companies that produce parts and components that automakers use in the assembly of new vehicles. Participants in the replacement market (also known as the aftermarket) make parts and components to substitute or supplement items that were included in the original assembly of the vehicles. Both OEMs and replacement parts suppliers and distributors may be independent firms or subsidiaries of larger companies. The basic method of making automobiles changed very little between 1913, when Henry Ford first invented the moving assembly line, and the 1970s, when a radical new system of "lean production" began to emerge in Japan. Pioneered by the U.S. Big Three, the automobile industry was the mass-production industry par excellence. The Fordist method of production made a limited range of standardized cars for mass-market customers. Auto manufacturing was carried out in massive assembly plants using rigid methods in which each assembly worker performed a highly specialized and narrow task very quickly and with endless repetition. The big U.S. and European automakers developed a particular kind of relationship with their suppliers, based on short-term, cost-minimizing contracts. As the major producers scoured the world for low-cost components, the increased geographical distance between the assemblers and their suppliers made it necessary for assemblers to hold huge inventories of components at their assembly plants. In this "just-in-case" system, the possibility of the assembly line being disrupted by a temporary shortage of components (or by faulty batches) was reduced. Since the early 1980s, the auto industry has been marked by intensifying competition and increased globalization, which has resulted in lower costs and also improved product 2005-02-20T06:30:02-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Lead-Firms-in-the-Automotive-Commodity-Chain-26282.aspx Rich Experience in cosmetics industry Lancôme has been established in cosmetics market since 1935. Lancôme products have great varieties. Its products include skincare, makeup and fragrance products. In this way, Lancôme's experience of producing many different kinds of cosmetics products has been accumulated for 66 years. This remarkable achievement can make the customers more confident of its products. Guaranteed Product Qualification In order to improve the quality of all its products, Lancôme setup several research centers which collaborate with the international medical community to deepen its understanding of skin. Also, there are more than 2000 experts working there who are professional in innovating and developing products in respond to either problematic skin or normal skin. High Reputation and Professional Image These two strengths has not been only established by rich experience and large scale of research centers but also promoted by famous model, a unique symbol and institutes. Firstly, the famous models are regarded as intelligence, beauty and spiritual symbols in society, for example, Uma Thurman and Isabella Rosselini. They contributed much in developing and promoting the elegant and professional image of Lancôme's products. Moreover, the unique symbol, Lancôme Fragrance Rose, help to establish a unique and easy to be remembered image of Lancôme. Furthermore, Lancome setup an institute to provide the customers with comprehensive services such as body, skin treatment, massages and lessons in order to enhance its professional image. Weakness Lack of experience in youngster cosmetics market Despite the rich experience of producing cosmetics products for adult, Lancôme is a new entrant in youngster cosmetics market. This may negatively affect the customers confident of Lancôme products. A fixed and inflexible image Lancôme professional image has been established for about 66 years. Also there is no change in the image and it has been fixed during this period. This image is mainly designed for targeting adult but not youngster. In order to develop youngster cosmetics market, Lancôme need to setup a new product line or image, which other competitors originally possess. Threat Keen Competition in Cosmetics Market Recently, the competition in cosmetics market has been very keen. Many cosmetics companies such as Fancl, MaxFactor and Shisheido have started to promote their products by all kinds of media. In order to survive, Lancôme has to develop a new product line to diversify its customer type. Strong Competitors in youngster cosmetics market In Hong Kong, there are many well-known cosmetics companies have develop the youngster cosmetics market for several years. For example, Kose, ZA and 2005-02-20T06:18:41-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Lancôme-Cosmetic-Market-Analysis,-Company-Profile-26277.aspx Cigarette Advertising Cigarette advertising restrictions do not have and intended effect, and despite that in many societies there is an increase in cigarette consumption. Only who is affected with those restrictions are the cigarette companies which are in danger of becoming a form of commercial censorship. However, I do not want to claim against consumer protection laws against false or misleading advertising claims. The end result of cigarette advertising restrictions and any other legal products leads to a limited choice, block of free flow of information, emasculate competition and canceling its benefits. Besides this it also penalizes the advertising media by starving them of revenue, and restrains commercial investments and employment. Not only that it endangered current investments, but it also places powers of censorship in the hands of self-centered pressure groups or legislative committees, who have no commercial experience or responsibility to be able to exercise them. The intended effects of cigarette advertising restrictions also have harmful side effects. For example in Croatia for last couple of months on the television you could find commercials with detailed development of tumor on lounges and ruining of aortas. Theses commercials did nothing but discussed large number of population, and even non smokers couldn’t look at the full add, while the smokers felt discriminated and exploited to society as disease and treat. There are also adds which offer 24-7 telephone lines for people who wish to quit smoking, and in these situations they were offering some pride winning rewards, which was a short term stimulant for people to quit smoking. How really can we think that people are that narrow minded that they will do what ever the media tells them to, and that they were not aware of their health risk before. People die of cancer caused by smoking, the tumor is painful and incurable; while on the other side many old people smoked almost all of their life and didn’t face this huge health problem. Maybe the times changed, the cigarettes changed, but the immunity of ones organism depends from one person to another and how it will affect somebody will vary among the society. It is a pleasure and risk just as getting on roller coaster, running too fast by the dangerous street, stealing vegetables from the neighbor since u might get a gun shot if they catch you, and many other human activities 2005-02-02T08:36:33-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Cigarette-Advertisements-Do-Not-Have-Intended-Effect-26236.aspx Your credit card is stolen. You place a phone call to the number provided in your tourist guide or in the local daily press. You provide your details and you cancel your card. You block it. In a few minutes, it should be transferred to the stop-list available to the authorization centres worldwide. From that moment on, no thief will be able to fraudulently use your card. You can sigh in relief. The danger is over. But is it ? It is definitely not. To understand why, we should first review the intricate procedure involved. In principle, the best and safest thing to do is call the authorization centre of the bank that issued your card (the issuer bank). Calling the number published in the media is second best because it connects the cardholder to a “volunteer” bank, which caters for the needs of all the issuers of a given card. Some service organizations (such as IAPA – the International Air Passengers Association) provide a similar service. The “catering bank” accepts the call, notes down the details of the cardholder and prepares a fax containing the instruction to cancel the card. The cancellation fax is then sent on to the issuing bank. The details of all the issuing banks are found in special manuals published by the clearing and payments associations of all the banks that issue a specific card. All the financial institutions that issue Mastercards, Eurocards and a few other more minor cards in Europe are members of Europay International (EPI). Here lies the first snag : the catering bank often mistakes the identity of the issuer. Many banks share the same name or are branches of a network. Banks with identical names can exist in Prague, Budapest and Frankfurt, or Vienna, for instance. Should a fax cancelling the card be sent to the wrong bank – the card will simply not be cancelled until it is too late. By the time the mistake is discovered, the card is usually thoroughly abused and the financial means of the cardholder are exhausted. Additionally, going the indirect route (calling an intermediary bank instead of the issuing bank) translates into a delay which could prove monetarily crucial. By the time the fax is sent, it might be no longer necessary. If the card has been abused and fraudulent purchases or money withdrawals have been debited to the unfortunate cardholders’ bank or 2005-02-02T05:48:40-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Alice-in-Credit-Card-Land-26221.aspx Business Systems in Kenya Business systems do not operate in a vacuum, they operate in an environment of institutions. A theory of business system is derived from this, which acknowledges that business systems differ from country to country because of different historical development of institutions. Four elements are important within an institutional environment: · Financial institutions · Social structure · Market structure · Technological and innovation systems. FRAGMENTED BUSINESS SYSTEMS IN KENYA PUBLIC SECTOR In general there are three sorts of business sectors in Kenya. Firstly the parastatals, characterized by their monopolistic production. Their management is highly indigenised, appointments of top managers however are often politically motivated. Parastatals is a term applied, especially in Africa, to an organization established by a government but which, through its constitution and budgetary arrangements, enjoys a great degree of operational freedom and insulation from direct political interference. The memorandum and articles of association are the founding documents of the company. The articles of association define the powers and functions of the different organs. A fairly standard provision in every company's articles is that the business of the firm be managed by the directors and gives the directors the right to exercise all powers. The exceptions are those that are required by the Companies Act or articles to be exercised by the company in a general meeting. Shareholders in a general meeting can therefore not deprive directors of such powers. The finance management act prohibits the board of a parastatal from taking certain decisions that directors ordinarily are empowered to take. For instance, a public entity and its accounting authority (the board) is prohibited from participating in a "significant" partnership, trust, unincorporated joint venture or a similar arrangement. It cannot acquire or dispose of a significant asset or, more problematically, make a significant change in the nature or extent of any interest in a partnership, trust or unincorporated joint venture unless it has the prior approval of the minister concerned. The shareholders' compact also seeks to give shareholders more rights than they would usually have in a private sector firm. While the framework admits boards should have total accountability for all corporate activities, it still states functions such as making decisions on acquisitions, disposals and so on and appointing senior management are functions that are "best performed by the shareholders". The role of the board is reduced to being a participant in such processes. PRIVATE SECTOR Secondly the private sector, which is dominated by non-indigenous traders, such as 2005-01-08T08:18:11-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Business-Systems-in-Kenya-26146.aspx Risk Management Program: Paramount Canada's Wonderland Background Information Tornoto's, Paramount: Canada's Wonderland (PCW) is located just outside the city of Toronto, Ontario. This particular outdoor theme park provides guests with over 200 attractions (Victoria Falls High Divers and Arthur's Baye Stunt Show), wild rides (Shockwave TM and Drop Zone Stunt Tower), a wide selection of roller coasters and a 20-acre water park for the whole family. The park is open starting near the end of May and stays open until the end of September or early October depending on the weather. This theme park would definitely be a time to remember, but before this amusement park lets anyone through the gates, there are many risks that should be dealt with. In order for the PCW to be fully operational, they would need to develop a risk management program. This will ensure safety for both the customer base as well as the people involved with amusement park's daily operations. The individuals that run daily operations would range from the chief executive officer; to the employees working the gates; to the performers in the stunt shows. In order to develop a risk management program, there are six main areas that must be covered in order to avoid, reduce, retain, and insure PCW. These six areas include: determination of objectives, identification of risks, evaluation of risks, consideration of alternatives and selection of the risk treatment device, implementation of the decision, evaluation and review. By going through these areas in detail, PCW will be in a greater position to deal with possible risks. Determination of Objectives There have been an increasing number of accidents occurring throughout the amusement park industry. Risk management should be considered for every amusement park, including Toronto's, Paramount: Canada's Wonderland. Furthermore, not only does risk management help reduce tension in everyday environment, but it also can be considered value-added as patrons will have a renewed feeling of safety when visiting PCW. Since safety for patrons and maintaining a profit are the greatest objectives for PCW, then a properly conducted risk management program will help to achieve this. If the safety of patrons is maintained, PCW will maintain a profit because the public will be satisfied and keep returning. Moreover, this objective of safety is an obligation for PCW to provide society with utmost protection from injury; therefore, legal legislation installs businesses 2005-01-08T05:20:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Risk-Management-Case-Study-Canadian-Wonderland-26140.aspx ECRM: CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT IN THE INTERNET ERA Abstract Technology has helped fuel the growth of CRM strategies. The evolution of CRM is moving forward with e - business evolutions. eCRM is the new strategy of customer relationship management in the Internet era. This paper addresses the basics of CRM and what is eCRM, explains the relationship between technology and eCRM and introduces the 4 principles of eCRM. Introduction The growing waves of merger and acquisition in the international business arena, coupled with broader use of e - technologies, have contributed to increase in the scale of business relationships and also to exponential increase in customer data. It is obvious that who is able to use the data pro - actively, can make a dramatic difference. To exploit business opportunities, more and more companies are rapidly implementing integrated Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems to make their business processes more customer - focused. CRM is nothing but the evolution of the business processes. Moreover the definition of CRM will evolve and change over time. It will encompass new components with economy development. Basics of Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Defining CRM CRM stands for Customer Relationship Management. It has been defined in a variety of different ways. For some, CRM is a way to identify, acquire, and retain customers. For others, it is a way of automating the front office functions of sales, marketing, and customer service. For some vendors, whatever their current product may be, that is CRM. This diversity of definitions is a result of differences in perspectives. The first is based on a business perspective of increasing competition that is driving companies to focus on their customers. The second is based on the relatively new phenomenon of the integration of previously separate applications such as Sales Force Automation and Customer Service Support into Enterprise Applications. The third is a result of software vendors repositioning their information technology products and services under the CRM umbrella, to take advantage of the fast growth of the CRM market. What is CRM? "CRM is a comprehensive approach which provides seamless integration of every area of business that touches the customer - namely marketing, sales, customer service and field support - through the integration of people, process and technology, taking advantage of the revolutionary impact of the information technology. CRM creates a mutually beneficial relationship with your customers. It is fundamentally cross-functional, customer - focused business 2005-01-08T05:14:12-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Customer-Retention-Strategies-and-CRM-on-the-Internet-26138.aspx Management Problem: Northwest Insurance Background Northwest Insurance is a major regional company which has four autonomous divisions that handle life insurance, automobile insurance, homeowner's and renter's insurance, and retirement planning. Although their information system department is large, it is overworked. Employees of Northwest Insurance found out advantages of using computers and now requested more computers and software development from IS. The budget of information system departure allowed to buy only 30% of requested computers each year for the last three years and only 50% the two years before that. However it takes about siw months for work to even start on a software request. Because of dissatisfaction of information system department, divisions started independently providing their own PC support. They buy it from their own budgets and have pulled employees with computer knowledge from their jobs to support their coworkers computing needs. Problems 1. As each division has bought their own computers the problems with hardware appeared. Because the computers purchased by divisions are not Northwest Insurance standard computers, information system department refused to fixed these problems. They did not use knowledge of specialist from information system departure therefore happened that the computers are not compatible. 2. In each division, now 80% of employees have their own computer on their desks. Individual users also develop some database applications and tracking programs. The applications available on the network are E-Mail and access to the central mainframe. However, they copied data from one computer to another and the data configurations are not compatible. Many of the created programs by employees by their own have minor irritating errors. 3. Because of individual purchase of computers by each divisions and lack of knowledge, Northwest Insurance is unable to benefit from sharing data because there is no connectivity. Employees installed their own programs and they are not connected to the information system department. The IS network has limited capability and two LANs installed by departments in the retirement planning divisions are not connected to the IS network or each other. 4. A large database was recently lost in the automobile insurance division. The employee involved was only person with access to the data and there was no backup. Solutions 1. Create cooperation between information system department and divisions - All information system departments has their specialist which could be helpful with purchasing new computers for each division of company. - Compatibility of the computers with information system department is 2005-01-06T07:43:56-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Solving-Problems-Disconnect-Between-Departments-26131.aspx [i:88599fa90e]Using a tourist destination of your choice as an example, examine the extent to which you agree that there is a conflict between achieving global competitiveness and ensuring sustainable development.[/i:88599fa90e] Given the size and complexity of the tourism industry in the Caribbean States I will concentrate on some of the environmental consequences along with the financial benefits and socio-political effects faced as a result of being a popular destination for millions of people. The focus of this piece will be on the following issues, issues such as water shortage, displacement of people from their traditional forms of livelihood, also the fact that the Caribbean States are over dependant on the tourism industry as a means of attracting foreign investments. Tourism has often been described as an industry that destroys the resources on which it depends for its very existence. In many parts of the world tourism seems to be suffering from its own success. The World Travel and Tourism Environment Review quotes the Financial Times of January 9, 1993, as describing the Mediterranean Sea, a major tourism area, as a "diluted sewer." It continues, "The Mediterranean Basin is home to 130 million people and is visited by 100 million tourists annually. Jointly these generate 2 billion tons of sewerage of which roughly 30% is treated. The remainder is discharged into the sea untreated and contaminates the area with little room to escape. The result? Only 4% of shellfish from the area are considered fit for human consumption and periodic increases in algae are to be expected (WWTTERC Review 1993). A report by the Coral Reef Alliance, in 1995, found that "at the current rate of destruction, up to 70% of the world's coral reefs may be killed within our lifetime. Of the 234,320 square miles of coral reefs world-wide, 10% are already destroyed beyond recovery; 30% face a similar fate in the next 20 years. Destruction of the reefs would mean the extinction of thousands of marine species and elimination of the primary source of food, employment and income for millions of people." The dangers are even greater where the countries involved are small islands with fragile social and ecological systems. The Caribbean receives 14 million overnight tourists and 10 million cruise passenger visitors too. The region, relying as it does on tourism for some 25% of its export earnings, is the world's most tourism dependent region. In 1999 visitors to the Caribbean spent 2005-01-03T04:07:12-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Examination-of-Global-Competition-and-Sustained-Development-26115.aspx Who would have imagined it? After years on top, Nike suddenly looks like a world-class marathoner who, in midrace, questions whether he's got what it takes to keep on running. Nike's symptoms of distress: a global glut of shoes, flat sales in key markets, and declining profits. Moreover, the global brand champ that captured its own winning corporate mindset with the "Just do it" ad slogan has a new pitch, "I can"--to which investors seem to be retorting, "No, you can't." Losing faith, they have knocked Nike stock from its all-time high of $76 about a year ago to a recent $46. What happened? While Nike has tripped on fickle fashion trends and heightened competition before, its main obstacle today appears to be its own success. Here's why: BIG-BRAND BACKLASH. When he founded Nike in 1972, CEO Phil Knight contended that if "five cool guys"--the best and most popular athletes--wore his shoes, other people would want to as well. The strategy worked wonderfully, of course, and now Nike controls an astounding 47% of the U.S. athletic-shoe market. But the brand has become too common to be cool. "I call it the Izod syndrome," says John Horan, publisher of Sporting Goods Intelligence, referring to the once-hip golf shirt. "Nike is everywhere." Brand expert Watts Wacker, chairman of the consulting firm FirstMatter, believes that the ubiquity of the Nike logo--the over-Swooshing of America--turns off important core consumers, the 12- to 24-year-olds. "When I was growing up, we used to say that rooting for the Yankees is like rooting for U.S. Steel," Wacker says. "Today, rooting for Nike is like rooting for Microsoft." THE MARLBORO MISTAKE. Indeed, many cool-conscious youngsters have gravitated to other brands such as Adidas (which sells sneakers at lower prices) and Timberland (a leader in the outdoorsy "brown shoe" trend). Instead of responding with hotter products or lower prices, Nike did what many overconfident giants do (think Marlboro, pre-Marlboro Friday): It raised its prices ahead of inflation. "Retailers loaded up, but the products weren't necessarily reaching consumers' closets," says Josie Esquivel, who follows Nike for Morgan Stanley Dean Witter. Now, Nike is paying with price cuts--in the 50% range--on last year's models (except the irrepressible Air Jordan line). THE (ASIAN) ECONOMY, STUPID. Nike's inventory glut is messiest in Asia, largely because the company operates few outlet stores there. (In the U.S., Nike sells almost half of its leftover shoes 2005-01-03T03:56:42-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Nike-Marketing-Strategies-and-Current-Company-Status-26111.aspx Former University of Oregon track coach and co-founder of Nike Bill Bowerman once said: “If you have a body, you are an athlete!” (NikeBiz) This way of thinking is how Nike conducts every aspect of their business. Every person is a potential athlete or “consumer”. This is a common term when used in the realm of athletics but when Bill Bowerman said this it was in direct reference to the shoe industry. From their marketing strategies to their selling philosophies, Nike has developed one of the most recognizable and demanded name and logo tandems ever. Nike, which is the Greek Goddess of Victory, was born in 1972 when BRS, Blue Ribbon Sports, launched its first branded shoe at the U.S. Olympic track and field trials. A former University of Oregon track team member Phil Knight created Blue Ribbon Sports. At Oregon, Knight was coached by the legendary Bill Bowerman and then went on to become and alumni of the Stanford School of Business. BRS was crafted in 1962 when Knight made a deal with Onitsuka Tiger Company, a Japanese shoe company, to import their shoe to the United States. Knight had the idea to sell a low cost shoe with a very high quality. Knight had high aspirations of taking Adidas out the top spot in the athletic shoe market. In 1964, Bill Bowerman decided to join Knight as a partner at BRS to create a joint quest to be number one. Bowerman redesigned the Tiger shoes while Knight acted as the accountant/personal seller and went on the road to sell their newly crafted sneakers at track meets and local shoe stores. By 1966, Blue Ribbon Sports opened their first store in Portland, Oregon. Knight and Bowerman managed the store with the only other employee being a former Stanford runner Jeff Johnson. (story/chrono, 1) During 1971, BRS caught a break when a trading company called Nissho Iwai introduced BRS to important letters of credit. This credit allowed BRS to subcontract its own shoe line and by 1972 it was selling Nike Brand shoes. Over the next decade Nike expanded almost double its size each year from the previous year. Nike is officially called Nike in 1978 and has signed on tennis great John McEnroe, New York City marathon champion Alberto Salazar, women’s marathon gold medallist Joan Beniot, and Olympic track star and gold medallist Carl Lewis. (story/chrono, 1-2) Also during 2004-12-30T02:38:53-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Nike--26103.aspx Online Recruitment Service The twenty-first century has ushered in many alternative ways in which to do business. Specifically, Human Resource Management has been challenged to keep up with today's fast tools of technology. We will explore the pros and cons of utilizing the internet for recruitment of personnel for staffing purposes. The areas we will consider are cost, time, interviewing techniques and skills in an effort to justify the use for on-line recruitment services. In a recent survey it was reported that 32% of 203 respondents were using the internet as a primary recruitment source; this is up from 20% in 1996. Computer related positions were the most commonly filled through the Internet postings (accounting for 59% of the workers hired) followed by technical (39%), engineering (29%), consulting (21%), sales (15%), management (14%), marketing (14%), accounting (10%), as well as various other job classification. (Dessler) This alone shows success with electronic recruiting for many employers. The obvious reason for using on-line recruitment would be instantaneous access to a wide pool of applicants. This lessens the time it takes to get the message to a targeted area. Additionally, it takes little time to set up an account and get the process going. Payment can be made easily over the internet, which also eliminates time and money. The cost ratio for internet advertising rather than the traditional means such as newspaper, etc. may also be greater. One must consider the amount of time an applicant can stay on the system and/or the employer may advertisement in comparison to a $50 to $100 ad which will be advertised perhaps only two or three days. There is competition between the on-line recruiters so a cost savings is possible with due diligence. Electronic links allow the recruitment process to be better managed since applicants can view opportunities, look at job descriptions and related details, and the potential to submit letters and resumes online. (SHRM) This gives the employers an added targeted area with a wider variety of links. There is obviously a greater need for urban employers rather than rural employers. There may be more competition among companies and thus making on-line recruitment more attractive. Rural areas are typically slower in catching on to technological changes unless they are part of a large corporation. State and federal statutes require that an 2004-12-26T00:40:53-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Online-Recruitment-Service-Industry-26039.aspx You will not be able to purchase a home with a mortgage without it. Home insurance insures on of your most valuable investments from unforeseen damage, and this coverage goes beyond the structure to include the contents. It can cover everything for a storm that has damaged your home to your dog biting someone. There are many things that can go wrong and often do when you own a home. Storms, fire, theft all involve great expense to you and to the company that holds your mortgage. These expense can be devastating. How many times have you seen the survivor of some disaster huddled in a blanket telling the world via the media that you lost everything and have no insurance. Homeowners covers loss of use, liability should someone be injured on your property, and often medical payments involved in those injuries. Because it is such a comprehensive policy, each "peril" is often named in the policy. What is not named in the policy can, of course be purchased as a rider to the policy. I live in a possible earthquake area and have added that to my policy. Folks living in flood zones can often add coverage that would cover damage from such a disaster. The tough part is trying to determine how much you should cover yourself for. Replacement Costs will pay for the replacement of damaged property with no deduction for depreciation. But this coverage has a maximum dollar limit placed on it. Guaranteed Replacement is the same as replacement but there is no dollar limit placed on the policy. The limit can be placed at 120% of the cost of rebuilding your home, but this type of policy is not available in every state. Actual Cash Value pays you an amount that is equal to the value of the damaged property with a big minus to the depreciation. Unless your policy actually states replacement policy, you probably have an actual cash value type. The cost of this policy can increase over time however. Your property may increase in value, improvements may make it worth more, and inflation all play a roll in determining the value of your policy. Is is a good idea to have your agent come by about once every five years or so to reevaluate your property and the coverage you have. Rule of thumb: Make sure your policy covers at least 80% 2004-12-26T00:03:20-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Home-Insurance--26037.aspx Does the average corporate bondholder understand the result of the large amount of mergers and acquisitions? Do they understand the implications on the credit quality of companies who have so much cash that share buybacks and special dividends? Not likely. The average corporate bond investor - and hopefully they are using a bond fund - has been sort of blind sided by these events. The result of these shareholder friendly actions has been a blow to credit ratings, the driving force behind prices and yield - which work in opposites with prices falling as yields increase. An equity friendly environment, one where companies turn their backs on creditors has created the smallest spread for bondholders in over a decade. To understand what this means, we should first look at reward and risk. 2004-12-26T00:00:19-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Flush-with-Cash--26036.aspx I don't know if this is really an "industry report" but it's on outsourcing which relates to any industry. Outsourcing in Today's Business World In a world of globalization, U.S. companies are constantly seeking strategies to become more competitive. Important objectives of the strategic response have been to reduce costs, stay ahead of competition, and enhance profits. Outsourcing has become a main cost-cutting strategy in the twenty-first century. It occurs when a company moves work out of the enterprise. A special report in the Canadian Business Review magazine refers to outsourcing as a strategic tool. The author, Michael F. Corbett, states that in the 1920s and 1930s, the model hat has shaped our thinking about organization has been that of a large, integrated corporation that own, manage, and directly control most or all of its assets and resources. However, today's organizations are increasingly turning to outsourcing and changing the way they do business. As a result, outsourcing becomes a tool that challenges managers to think about creating more flexible organizations based on core competencies and mutually beneficial, long-term outside relationships. I agree with the author in this area. It is impossible for any organization to have expertise in all areas of the company. Therefore, it is wiser to outsource some of the work to other organizations that can do it more efficiently in order to save time and money. How well this process will work depends on the relationship between the parties. Therefore, it is a key element to develop a fair and honest relationship in which both parties can benefit by working together. The author further went on to explain that as organizations adopt an outsourcing strategy, they often find themselves beginning to focus more on their expertise. In another word, organizations are assessing their strengths and advantages and doing the right thing. I totally agree with the author in this sense because it reminds me of the economist David Ricardo's principle of comparative advantage. The theory states that gain will be maximized when each nation, in this case organization, specializes in producing those products for which it has the greatest economic edge. The author says that organizations are asking themselves, "How do I bring the greatest value into my organization to deliver the end product to my customers?" This shifts the traditional focus 2004-12-25T23:52:05-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Outsourcing-in-Today-s-Business-World-26035.aspx Antiglobalization After the break-up of Soviet Union, globalization accelerated through the world. It includes the increasing integration of countries' individual economies, the rise in the world trade and multinational companies and the effect of large sums of money moving in and out of economies. People around the globe are more connected to each other then ever before. Information and money flow more quickly than ever. Goods and services produced in one part of the world are increasingly available in all parts of the world. International travel is more frequent. International communication is commonplace. This phenomenon has been titled "globalization". Not only the term of globalization has increased since last years, but also anti-globalization has appeared and is still increasing. Anti-globalization is the umbrella term for a group of different protest causes, including: environmentalism, third world debt, animal rights, child labor, anarchism, and anti-capitalism and opposition to multinationals. The most attacked institutions of anti-globalization protests have been especially World Trade Organization (WTO), International Monetary Fund (IMF), and World Bank. As the big businesses are growing all around the world, anti-global activities and protests also increasing their level of intensity and violence. Together with the collapse of communism raised the companies that expanded their sphere of business all over the world. Since the meetings of international monetary, trade and environmental organizations incited little or no interest in the past, at the present times; they are drawing the attention of thousands of anti-globalization activists. Large corporations with international undertakings stand accused of social injustice, unfair working conditions (including slave labor wages, living and working conditions), as well as lack of concern for environment, mismanagement of natural resources, and ecological damage. However, protest objectives extend beyond the claimed corporate impropriety. Multinational economic institutions, such as the World Trade Organization, the World Bank, and the International Monetary Fund, are seen as establishing, monitoring, and rendering judgments on global trade practices, and are viewed as the spearheads of economic globalization. These institutions, considering being the servants of corporate interests, exercising more power than elected governments and interested only in the profit motive, have increasingly become principal demonstrating targets. Although multinational corporations and international trade institutions are the subject of criticism, not all observers share a negative perspective. Many commentaries are published which speak in favor of beneficial and positive accomplishments, especially 2004-12-25T23:40:42-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Cons-of-Globalization,-an-Essay-Against-Globalization-26030.aspx Accountants Thesis: An accountant has many choices to what particular field of accounting to specialize in depending on the financial information she wants to analyze and how it is done. Class: Accountants Special Interest: Analyzing Financial Information Subclasses: Financial accountants Tax accountants Internal auditors A college student decides she wants to become an accountant. General accounting and bookkeeping classes can be taken in high school. In college, the student needs to decide on a more specific field of accounting. An accountant has many choices as to what particular field of accounting to specialize in depending on the financial information she wants to analyze and how it is done. Financial accountants, tax accountants and internal auditors are all accountants in general, but require different training and work methods. A financial accountant records economic data and periodically prepares reports that show profit and other financial information of a company using the generally accepted accounting principles. The reports prepared by the accountant are useful for managers, and also for owners, creditors and the public. Based on information in the reports the public can use the reports to choose a company to invest in. Because a financial accountant is employed by an individual company, she is considered a private accountant. Another type of accountant is a tax accountant. A tax accountant prepares yearly tax returns for individual clients. The accountants have to use constant data such as rates of pay and other information to determine the proper amount of taxes to be paid. These accountants have to take a class once a year to catch up on yearly changes in tax laws and regulations. If a tax accountant has met state experience requirements, she may want to take exams to become a Certified Public Accountant (CPA). A third type of accountant is an internal auditor. Auditors are sponsored by the Institute of Internal Auditors and work within an individual firm. The auditor reviews accounting and operating procedures used by a firm to make sure everything is being run properly. If things aren't being run properly, it is the auditor's job to find the problem and to try to rectify it. An auditor is considered a private accountant because he is employed by a firm, yet if he specializes in auditing, he may want to get a Certified Internal Auditor (CIA) certificate. So, an accountant has career choices to make based on more specialized interests in a field, and as with other careers, 2004-12-22T20:53:02-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Choices-and-the-Accounting-Field-25968.aspx Advertising Product placement a. How does the issue you're interested in come up in the movie? (Give a very brief summary of the plot to illustrate.) Advertising is subtly placed within the show “The O.C.” The way the actors use certain products or the way they show off their new cars makes it apparent that they are not just using products to make them look like normal people, the producers are being paid to endorse certain products on the show. The show features young teenage people who live in Orange County. They live very posh and spoiled lives that are filled with drama and teenage romance. b. In your view (based on what we have discussed in class) do you feel that the issue is dealt with in a realistic fashion? Explain why or why not. The way products are featured in the show is designed to not be shoved into the viewers face. Products such as fancy cars and clothes or musical bands are displayed or featured in a way that normal teenagers would view as “cool.” The issues are dealt with in a realistic way. c. Do you feel that the movie has the potential for positive or negative effects with regard to your issue/topic? Describe what kind of effects you think the movie might have. The endorsement of course has potential for positive effects for advertisers. The show is very popular within their target demographic and it has become part of a teenage culture phenomenon. The endorsement or use on TV of BMW cars will present the likely possibility of increased desire of BMWs in future drivers. d. Give your opinion of the movie based on your answers to the first three questions. If you had been the director, what might you have added or changed? Or if you think that the movie is a good one, explain why. e. If I was the director I would continue to place product endorsements on my version of the show. Featuring products brings financial gain to the show and really offers no harm. I believe it is done tastefully in the show in question. I have seen endorsements that go over the top. The movie “National Treasure” with Nicholas Cage features a scene where Visa is prominently displayed. I believe that particular scene was too obvious and as a viewer I felt sold out. As long as The OC continues to 2004-12-20T04:21:21-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advertising-Product-placement-in-The-OC-25866.aspx Marx's Theory Of Money The Theory of Money and the Theory of Value The most important point to emerge from Marx's theory of money is the idea that money is a form of value. The difficulty with this idea is that we are more familiar with money itself than with value in other forms. But value does appear in forms other than money. For example, the balance sheet of a capitalist firm estimates the value of goods in process and of fixed capital which has not yet been depreciated, as well as the value of inventories of finished commodities awaiting sale. Each of these aggregations of commodities has a value, usually expressed as the equivalent of a certain amount of money, but it is clear that neither goods in process nor fixed capital is money. Marx views the value of commodities in this sense as analytically prior to money; money can be explained according to Marx only on the basis of an understanding of the value of commodities. Marx follows Smith in regarding value as the property of exchangeability of commodities. In a society where exchange is common, products come to have a dual character as use values and as values. They have two powers: first, to satisfy particular human needs and wants; and second, to exchange for other products. This second power can be thought of quantitatively, as an amount of exchangeability or command over other commodities. The classical economists viewed value as a real, though socially determined, entity, with its own laws of conservation and motion. Value in this sense bears the same relation to commodities as mass bears to physical objects. It is not surprising that in societies where exchange is widespread value takes on an independent form as money, as an expression of general exchangeability. Value is a central social reality for people; they constantly think and talk about it directly or indirectly; they want some way to transfer it directly among themselves, separate from particular commodities. This is, I think, what we mean by "money." It is the social expression of value separated from the concrete particularity of any use value. With this emergence of money as the social expression of value, money stands, in opposition to commodities, as the abstract always stands in opposition to the particular. We will see value in two forms: as particular commodities, and as money. It is crucial to recognize that 2004-12-20T03:02:47-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Detailed-Explanation-of-Marx-s-Theory-Of-Money-25846.aspx Patterns in Medicinal Advertising The people who develop ads to market prescription medicine products must have an inkling of what the reader wants to see. For instance, the ads in a parenting magazine most often target mothers. The ads in a sports magazine predominately target athletes. How do the advertisers know what the reader will respond to? Patterns are tools that help us to narrow our thinking down and put thoughts into categories that we identify with. Patterns allow us to store information in blocks so that we do not have to relearn information that has already been learned. Some patterns are universal and most people have some categories or patterns that other people have. An example of a universal human pattern is using language to communicate. Other patterns that we have, may be derived from our own experience and unlike those of others. Patterns are useful in advertising because advertisers can target their reader by tapping into specific categories. Perception is a person's understanding of the information they receive. Depending on their experience or their understanding they will categorize their perception and in turn it will become a thought pattern. For instance when a person talks to a priest their perception of him may be that he is perfect or does not sin. They may categorize all priests this way and not judge them in the way that they would any person who is not a priest. I feel that patterns and perception work hand in hand. Sometimes patterns are formed based on perception, sometimes perception is based on a pattern. What came first the chicken or the egg? I'm not quite sure, but I do know they affect each other. Ads are designed by using patterns that target a specific audience. The reader's perception of the product may form exclusively based on the ad. The patterns that I noticed specifically amongst the five medicine ads that I've chosen to analyze is the break through effect. In one ad there was a woman with her child and they were breaking through glass. Another ad featured a woman and her child with clear blue skies breaking through the clouds above. The third ad has a man skiing through a mountain of wild flowers. The thought of breaking through something with a smile is somewhat encouraging and enticing. Thus a reader might perceive this medicine as exciting so they may ask their 2004-12-20T02:59:42-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Patterns-in-Medicinal-Advertising-25845.aspx A career in the securities industry can offer exciting work if you enjoy working in a competitive and demanding atmosphere. Investment bankers, stock brokers, and stock traders all make up the securities industry providing services to each other, as well as the general public. All of people involved in this field deal with stocks, bonds, and other financial material in some way or another, but they all have their own specific objectives and duties. The primary differences between the three are the services they provide and who they provide these services to. Investment banking seems to be the most interesting of the three, as well as the most rewarding. This is due to the nature of the job an investment banker must perform. A career as an investment banker has its pros and cons just as any career does, but if you're looking for a high-demanding, high-risk career that at times is very rewarding financially, investment banking could be the career. Investment banking has been around since stocks have been issued and bonds sold, but the field demanded little, if any new jobs before the 1980's. This was due to the low complexity of the financial markets. Since then, investment banking jobs have been significantly growing due to the availability of complex securities and high-yield bonds, also known as junk bonds.(Investment Banking,12) Now that the financial market has become more complex, companies that didn't require and investment bankers now need their advice to effectively help their company sell stocks and bonds, and to make financial plans for the future. This shows the growing need for investment bankers in the securities industry. Investment bankers serve a major part in shaping our nation's economy as well as the world's. This is done by devising financial plans and putting them into effect. The process of doing this is very time consuming but doesn't seem a bit boring. Investment bankers also spend a lot of time traveling to various clients to present ideas and when at home, investment bankers work on developing financial plans and strategies for clients. All this work can appear to be very time consuming, and it is. According to Linda C. (So You Want To Be, 2) a typical day for an investment banker out of school is to start at nine in the morning and work fairly consistently until midnight, five days a 2004-12-16T03:12:49-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Investment-Banking-Career-Analysis-25844.aspx Burger King is a reliable burger company which has had its ups and downs. In 1974, it came out with a slogan of "Have it your way" and at this time it also had a 4 % market share. Burger King's idea was to have the customer have their burger done their way rather than a standard burger. In the early 80's Burger King was trying to keep sales growing so they had to keep changing their advertising. In 1982 "Battle of the burgers" and "Aren't you hungry for a Burger king now?" were the slogans used. In 1983 "Broiling vs. frying" and 1985 "The big switch". All these ads throughout the years helped increase market shares from 7.6% to 8.3% from 1983 to 1985. "Search for herb" was a slogan used by BK about a person that has never tasted a whopper burger, this campaign was supposed to increase market share by 10% but in reality only increased it by 1% it was a disaster. In 1986-1987 "this is a burger king town" and "best food for fast times" brought a lot of attention to the company. In 1988 "We do it like you do it" was used often but a year later they came out with two new slogans which confused the customer. In 1989 "Sometimes you gotta break the rules" and "BK tee vee" with MTV and Dan Cortese with "I love this place". This was another huge setback for BK because people on the go and parents found this ad loud and irritating. BK at this time has failed to establish a solid image that would differentiate it from its competitors. Ads if anything only confused consumers as to what advantages BK offered. In 1993 it had a market share of 6.1% were McDonalds had 15.6% and BK's sales were growing slower than its rivals. Failed advertising campaigns weren't the only problem's, they also had internal problems. Management lacked focus and direction and has struggled with marketing mix decisions. Franchises became confused and angered, service was slow and food preparation wasn't consistent. Burger King lost its core product-flame broiled burgers, made the way the customer wanted them. Another thing that hurt them was the fact they didn't lower prices to keep competing with their competitors this led to a below average sales growth. Many in store promotion also failed. In 1993 a new CEO was introduced, this 2004-12-16T03:12:02-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Burger-King-Fast-Food-Advertising-Report-25843.aspx The Advantages and Disadvantages of Incorporating a Business In order to mention all the advantages and disadvantages of incorporating a business, first I should try to explain what a corporation is. In 1819, Chief Justice Marshall of the United States Supreme court said: " A corporation is an artificial being, invisible, intangible, and existing only in contemplation of the law." In the Webster’s College Dictionary corporation is defined as "an association of individuals, created by law and having an existence apart from that of its members as well as distinct and inherent powers and liabilities." A corporation is divided into many units called shares of stock. The owners of the stock are called stockholders or shareholders. One of the advantages of incorporating a business is that because a corporation has a legal existence, shares can be sold at any time without affecting the operations of the corporation. Also, shares can be bought at any time. Another big advantage of incorporating a business is that corporation have limited liabilities. This means that the corporation is responsible for its own acts and obligations under the law. This characteristic protects the stockholders of the corporation because the only financial loss that they may suffer is limited to the amount invested. Also, the creditors of the corporation can not go beyond the assets of the corporation to satisfy their claims. The stockholders or the shareholders are the ones who have control over the management of a corporation’s operation and activities. They are the ones who elect the board of directors, and the board of directors are responsible to the stockholders. Also, the board of directors are responsible for the management of the day-to-day operation of the corporation. They also decide when and how much of their income to give to the stockholders or shareholders. Another characteristic that can be an advantage of incorporating a business is that corporations may be organized for nonprofit organizations such as colleges, hospitals, and others humanitarian purposes. However, most of the corporations are organized to earn a profit for stockholders. The biggest disadvantage of a corporation is that corporations are subject to taxes. Corporations are not like proprietorship and partnership forms of organization, they must pay federal income taxes. Also, stockholders must pay income taxes on any dividends distributed to them. So, all the corporations are being 2004-12-16T03:10:13-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Advantages-and-Disadvantages-of-Incorporating-a-Business-25842.aspx Essay on Poverty and Welfare Today it seems as if everyone has a theory about fighting poverty, now it is not necessary to be moving in the theoretical plane. Our country has had successful anti-poverty programs that were effective back a century ago, effective because they were based on these seven points: affiliation, bonding, categorization, discernment, employment, freedom, and God. But a key element in all of them is personal involvement and challenge, both material and spiritual. If folks a hundred years ago could help others to move out of poverty, and then turn their attention to the next group of immigrants and impoverished, why can't we? Did they have more time than we do? No, even though we feel stressed, their work days on the average were longer. Did they have more money? No, we are far more affluent as a society now. Did they have more space in their homes, so they could take in another person and we cannot? No, on the average our houses are far larger. Did they have less of a drug and alcohol problem? Probably not. They did have fewer single-parenting situations - there was less illegitimacy and divorce then - but life expectancy was lower, so there were lots of orphans and half-orphans. We're more spread out now, but our travel time is not any greater. What I learned leads me to wonder: Why can't we do the same? Were Americans then a different people than we are today? Have we become so corrupted that we don't care about others? Have we become so lazy that we are unwilling to suffer with? I think not. I hope not. But we have become used to having someone else do it for us - even though we know that a professional social worker, with a case load of 200 or so, can't do much more than shuffle paper. Bad charity drives out good. My conclusion is that when we complain about a spendthrift modern welfare state, we're right about the costs but we're actually stating the problem backwards. The major flaw of the modern welfare state is not that it is extravagant, but that it is too stingy. It gives the needy bread and tells them to be content with that alone. It gives the rest of us the opportunity to be stingy also: We can soothe our consciences as we scrimp on what many 2004-12-16T03:09:27-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Poverty-and-Welfare-Essay-25841.aspx 'The increasing application of Scientific Management principles of work organisations to services is, despite its limitations, inevitable and irreversible'. Discuss. I Introduction From the outset of this essay it is necessary to define the basic principles of Scientific Management in order for the statement to be fully understood and why if at all such a practice is 'inevitable' and indeed 'irreversible' within a service industry context. The underlying belief that scientific management, or rationalisation= , is able to provide the basis for separating management from the execution of work. 'The rationalisation of work has the effect of transferring functions of planning, allocation and co-ordination to managers, whilst reinforcing the managerial monopoly of decision-making, motivation and control'. Hales (1994). Taylor (1856-1915) has been referred to as the father of Scientific Management. He believed that management, not labour, was the cause of and potential solution to problems in the industry. Taylor concluded that workers systematically 'soldiered' because they believed that faster work would put them out of a job and because hourly or daily wages destroyed individual incentive. Taylor believed that in order to discourage, and indeed halt, this 'soldiering' a 'mental revolution' was required. He believed this could be achieved via four vital principles: (1) the development of the best work method, via systematic observation, measurement and analysis; (2) the scientific selection and development of workers; (3) the relating and bringing together of the best work method and the developed and trained worker; (4) the co-operation of managers and non-managers which includes the division of work and the managers responsibility of work. From this five key facets have evolved that lie at the foundation of scientific management. Hales (1994) has summarised these as follows: - systematic standardised work methods via mechanisation and standard times. - a clean functional division between managers and non-mangers. Braverman (1974) described this as the 'separation of conception from execution'. - centralised planning and control. - an instrumental, low-involvement employment relationship due to the requirement of the individual employee being that of just carrying out their specified low-skilled task. - an ideology of neutral technical efficiency. Industries that have embraced such scientific management methods have essentially deskilled the workforce, often by menial, repetitive tasks, and have attempted to replace workers with machines wherever technically feasible and economic. A classic example of such an application is the Fordist principle of the production line. The remainder of the essay concentrates on the two key aspects 2004-12-16T03:08:03-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Increasing-application-of-Scientific-Management-principles-25840.aspx Accounting Ethics When examining the effect of open marketing on the profession of accounting it is important to view it from three perspectives: the client's, the profession's, and society's. Additionally, two key areas that are affected by marketing must be addressed, these are concerning competition, and ethical implications. Marketing in public accounting is here to stay therefore making an argument against its existence would be fruitless; however, in order to achieve maximum benefit to the firm, the client, and s ociety more stringent guidelines must be implemented at the firm level. The first, and most obvious, of the effected areas is competition. Within competition several points are discussed. First, the implications advertising has on public accounting-- the model of perfect competition versus the model of monopolistic compet ition. Secondly, the relationship between firm size and advertising expenditures. Thirdly, the effect of advertising on firm specialization, the implications of client turnover on public accounting practice. Before making the comparison, a brief explanation why the two models are chosen is in order. Monopolistic competition has been chosen for the pre-advertising era because it most closely resembles the market structure in an extreme sense. The elements o f monopolistic competition are as follows: product differentiation, the presence of large numbers of sellers, and nonprice competition. Although accounting services between firms offer very little service differentiation, the absence of advertising serve s as a replacement because clients are not necessarily aware that other options are easily attainable. The post-advertising era is explained through the model of perfect competition for which the qualifications are as follows: very little or no service d ifferentiation, many sellers, and price as the only means of distinguishing one firms service from anothers. In a perfectly competitive market the price of a particular service is established solely by the interaction of market demand and supply. (Thompson p.277) When market demand for accounting services increases the resulting demand shifts right causing pri ces to increase returning the market back to equilibrium. However when supply increases, such is the theoretical effect of adding advertisement to public accounting practice, the supply curve shifts right causing prices to fall. The model of monopolistic competition is also price sensitive, however only at the firm level. For example, the CPA firm of XYZ has an established clientele base and uses referrals as its sole means of growth. They increase prices only as their cost o f providing 2004-12-16T03:06:35-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Accounting-Ethics--25839.aspx Today, trends in management, the economy, and the workforce are changing. Traditional compensation plans such as pension plan are no longer attractive for employees. A movement toward “non-retirement” plans- that is, contribution plans that provide saving and incentive benefits to employees without a specific funding by the employer, such as PROFIT-SHARING PLANS, STOCK BONUS PLANS and EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLANS. Some of the reasons for this trend include. 1. Increasing acquisition and dissolution discourage long-term employer commitment. 2. Competition and cost pressures to minimize wage and benefits costs. 3. Increased mobility in workforce. 4. Employers are using more part-time employees, leased employees, and independent contractors. 5. Increase in family with two wage earners. This report will focus on Employee Stock Ownership Plan (ESOP). In an ESOP, the employer contributes stock to the plan. Employer’s contribution are not necessarily dependant on profits; benefits are distributable in the stock of the employer company. There are two forms of ESOP-- a stock bonus ESOP or a leveraged ESOP. In a stock bonus ESOP, the employer contributes company stocks to the ESOT (Employee Stock Ownership Trust) and does not use it for obtaining funds. In a leveraged ESOP the employer can use the plan as a means of raising funds on a tax-favoreds basis. Shares of stock are allocated to participants’ accounts under a formula that must meet nondiscrimination requirements. Some ESOP also provide for after-tax employee contributions or a salary reductions. The value of each participant’s account in an ESOP is stated in terms of certain number of shares of employer stock. There are benefits to both the employer and employees in having an ESOP. Some of these benefits to the employer are: 1. ESOP allows an employer to indirectly borrow money from a bank and repay the loan with fully deductible repayment amounts. 2. Company can sell its stock and redeem it without reducing the true value of the stock. 3. The company can increase its working capital, cash flow, and net worth.. 4. An ESOP assists in establishing and maintaining a stable, high performance workforce. 5. It can act as a medium to retain desired employees. 6. An ESOP can be a decisive factor in motivating employees and building loyalty. As stated above an ESOP is also beneficial 2004-12-10T19:29:27-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Employee-Stock-Ownership-Plans-ESOP-25806.aspx Since it first entered the competitive electronic firm market, Motorola has continued to remain successfully as a world leader in mobile communication technology, ranking as the leading maker of cellular telephones, paging devices, automotive semi-conductors, and microchips that are used to operate devices other than computers. Although it has lost a few battles, Motorola has taken on the Japanese head to head, through these times of Japanese competition. In the 1980’s Motorola controlled the emerging U.S, Market for cellular phones and pagers but they weren’t aggressively focused on competing with the Japanese, even though Japanese firms began to flood the U.S. market with low-priced, high-quality telephones and pagers, leaving Motorola pushed into the background. This is when Motorola “heard the call to battle.” Managers at first were not sure how they should respond, so they originally decided to abandon some business areas and even considered merging their own semiconductor operations with those of Toshiba. After a lot of searching they decided to fight back and regain the firm’s lost market position. This fight involved two main strategies: First learn from the Japanese, and then compete with them. To carry out these strategies, Motorola executives decided to to set a number of broad based goals that essentially committed the firm to lowering costs, improving quality, and regaining lost market share. Managers were then sent out on missions, mainly focused on Japan, to learn how to compete better. Some manager even observed Motorola’s own Japanese operations to learn and understand how it fully functioned; while others focused more on how other successful Japanese firms operated. At the same time, the firm also drastically boosted its budget, R&D, and employee training worldwide. One important thing that executives learned from their trip to Japan after viewing a flag flying outside one of its plants was that they had altogether forgotten their old ways of doing business and this is the exact point where they decided to reinvent their firm from top to bottom. Old plants were closed as new ones were built. Workers received new training with a wide range of quality-enhancement techniques. They decided to place their new commitment to quality at the forefront of everything it did. They even decided to announced their goal of achieving a perfection rate of 99.9997% (Six Sigma), and when they actually achieved this level of quality they received the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award. Motorola has 2004-11-04T05:37:08-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Motorola-Business-Strategy-Overview-and-History-25719.aspx [i:353851079f]What are the differences between managers and leaders in the business world?[/i:353851079f] The business sector in today's society is increasing rapidly, and with this increase comes the need for more people to manage and lead the growing companies, but this growing need also raises some potential questions: Can anyone become a leader or a manager? Is there a difference between the two? Can people be trained to become leaders or a managers? Just like many other questions that might be asked in business; these questions have no one, definite answer. Let's begin first by acknowledging the definitions of the two root words; the word manage means to handle, where as the word lead means to go. Similarly as the two words have different definitions, they also have different purposes. To help individuals increase their potentials in business, an internationally recognized motivational speaker by the name of Marc Sanborn has developed certain "theories" that, much like in science or art, prove some things to be more true than others by providing supporting facts to prove the validity of certain ways of thinking. Many of Marc's theories validate the fact that in general, good managers tend to be good leaders, but good leaders are not always good managers. It is said, Any company that cannot imagine the future won't be around to enjoy it. Therefore before any manager or leader can affect changes in their business they have to do what Marc describes as visioning; they must mentally "look" into what they want to see as the potential outcome of any given situation. Managers are concerned with the problem at hand; they focus on what has to be done. Leaders on the other hand, notice what has to be done, but spend their time figuring out how to get it done. Marc states "managers vision the destination, leaders vision how to get there". To be an effective leader it is important to focus on the gritty details of a situation, look for opportunities and how to achieve them. Visioning cannot be taught but can be developed. Marc suggests people start from the end and work backwards, or think to themselves "what will this team accomplish because of me?" Leadership is all about taking an organization to a place it would not have otherwise gone without you, in a value-adding, measurable way. When you vision, you think your way into a situation and it 2004-11-04T05:36:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Managers-Vs_-Leaders--25718.aspx INTRODUCTION Companies are increasingly outsourcing the management of information technology (IT) for reasons that include concern for cost and quality, lagging IT performance, supplier pressure, access to special technical and application skills, and other financial factors. The outsourcing solution is acceptable to large and small firms alike because strategic alliances are now more common and the IT environment is changing rapidly. REASON TO OUTSOURCE Although the mix of factors raising the possibility of outsourcing varies widely from one company to another, there are a series of themes that explain most of the pressures to outsource. First of all, general managers’ concerns about cost and quality drive outsourcing. The same issues such as getting existing services for a reduced price at acceptable quality standard came up repeatedly. Second, failure to meet service standards can force management to find other ways of achieving reliability. It is not atypical to find a company in which cumulative IT management neglect eventually culminated in an out-of-control situation the current IT department could not recover from. Management can see outsourcing as a way to fix a broken department. Third, a firm under intense cost or competitive pressures, which does not see IT as its core competence, may find outsourcing a way to delegate time-consuming, messy problems so it can focus scarce management time and energy on other differentiators. Next, several financial issues can make outsourcing appealing. One is the opportunity to liquidate the firm’s intangible IT asset, thus strengthening the balance sheet and avoiding a stream of sporadic capital investments in the future. Also, outsourcing can turn a largely fixed-cost business into one with variable costs. This is particularly important for firms whose activities vary widely in volume from one year to another or which face significant downsizing. THE BENEFITS FROM OUTSOURCING Outsourcing has identified numerous potential benefits. Financial benefits from outsourcing included rapid funding of new systems development and economies of scale and scope. As consolidate infrastructure through IT outsourcing, a firm can experience cost reductions in hardware and software licensing, facilities, and support headcount. Outsourcing, also, can capitalize on an outside vendor’s extensive IT problem solving knowledge. An outside vendor had the ability to get more of the technology that came out. They could spend money on investments that a company couldn’t afford internally. That opens up a lot more avenues to future technologies. An outside vendor would manage the IT function more efficiently. A vendor’s main competency 2004-11-04T05:34:37-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/IT-Outsourcing,-Analysis-and-Overview-25717.aspx Monetary policy affects the economic and financial decisions of virtually all of us from workers to borrowers to investors (Rukeyser 105). Louis Rukeyser wrote, If we want monetary policy to play its proper role in a true national economic reconstruction, the authentic task is to get the Fed to stop bouncing like a Chinese Ping-Pong ball, switching every few months between the inflationary effect of pumping far too much money into the economy and cramping, recessionary effect of supplying far to little (Rukeyser 104). And, because the US is the largest economy in the world, its monetary policy also has significant economic and financial effects on other countries. The object of monetary policy is to influence the performance of the economy, as reflected in such factors as inflation, economic output, and employment. It does so by affecting demand. Most people are familiar with the fiscal policy tools that affect demand, such as taxes and government spending. Less familiar is monetary policy; it is conducted by the Federal Reserve System, the nation's central bank, and it influences demand mainly by raising and lowering short-term interest rates. The Federal Reserve System (the Fed) is the nation's central bank. It was established by an Act of Congress in 1913 and consists of the seven members of the Board of Governors in Washington, DC and twelve Federal Reserve District Banks. Congress structured the Fed to be independent within the government. What that means is although the Fed I accountable to Congress, it is insulated from day-to-day political pressures. This reflects the conviction held both the US and in many other countries that the people who control the country's money supply should be independent of the people who frame the government's spending decisions. Most studies of central bank independence rank the Fed among the most independent in the world (World 68). Each reserve bank President is appointed to a five-year term by that bank's Board of Directors, subject to final approval by the Board of Governors. This procedure adds to independence, because the directors of each reserve bank, who are not political appointees, provide a regional cross-section of interests, including depository institutions, nonfinancial businesses, labor, and the public. The Fed is structured to be self-sufficient in the sense that it meets its operation expenses primarily from the interest earnings on its portfolio of securities. Therefore, it is independent of Congressional decisions about funding. Even though 2004-11-04T05:30:26-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Federal-Reserve-and-Monetary-Police-Term-Paper-25716.aspx On September 28, 1998, Chairman of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission Arthur Levitt sounded the call to arms in the financial community. Levitt asked for, immediate and coordinated action… to assure credibility and transparency of financial reporting. Levitt's speech emphasized the importance of clear financial reporting to those gathered at New York University. Reporting which has bowed to the pressures and tricks of earnings management. Levitt specifically addresses five of the most popular tricks used by firms to smooth earnings. Secondly, Levitt outlines an eight part action plan to recover the integrity of financial reporting in the U.S. market place. What are the basic objectives of financial reporting? Generally accepted accounting principles provide information that identifies, measures, and communicates financial information about economic entities to reasonably knowledgeable users. Information that is a source of decision making for a wide array of users, most importantly, by investors and creditors. Investors and creditors who are responsible for effective allocation of capital in our economy. If financial reporting becomes obscure and indecipherable, society loses the benefits of effective capital allocation. Nothing illustrates the importance of transparent information better than the pre-1930's era of anything goes accounting. An era that left a chasm of misinformation in the market. A chasm that was a contributing factor to the market collapse of 1929 and the years of economic depression. An entire society suffered the repercussions of misinformation. Families, and retirees depend on the credibility of financial reporting for their futures and livelihoods. Levitt describes financial reporting as, a bond between the company and the investor which if damaged can have disastrous, long-lasting consequences. Once again, the bond is being tested. Tested by a financial community fixated on consensus earnings estimates. The pressure to achieve consensus estimates has never been so intense. The market demands consistency and punishes those who come up short. Eric Benhamou, former CEO of 3COM Corporation, learned this hard lesson over a few short weeks in 1996. Benhamou and shareholders lost $7 billion in market value when 3COM failed to achieve expectations. The pressures are a tangled web of expectations, and conflicts of interest which Levitt describes as almost self-perpetuating. With pressures mounting, the answer from U.S. managers has been earnings management with a mix of managed expectations. March of 1997 Fortune magazine reported that for an unprecedented sixteen consecutive quarters, more S&P 500 companies have beat the consensus earnings estimate than 2004-11-04T05:27:53-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/History-of-Accounting-and-Its-Importance-25715.aspx Advertising is a collective term for public announcements designed to promote the sale of specific commodities or services. Advertising messages are disseminated through numerous and varied channels or media such as televisions. TV advertising used different techniques to attract and get the attention of people to buy the product being advertised even if they do not need the product. Advertising is expensive in all terms of media. According to Encarta 97, research says that in terms of descending order of dollar volume, the major media in the U.S. are newspapers, television, direct mail, radio, magazines, business publications, outdoor and transit advertising and farm publications. On the other hand, advertising also invests a lot. In 1987, newspapers received about 27% of advertising investment in the nation. Next in line was television, with about 21% of advertising investment. American advertising leads the world not only in volume of business but in the complexity of its organization and of its procedures: Each year, millions of dollars are spent on institutional advertising that usually mentions products or services for sale only incidentally. Advertising enables manufacturers and others to sell their products in larger quantities than they would otherwise; the increased volume of sales in turn enables companies to sell individual units at a lower cost than if they were produced in small quantities. Advertising also supplies most of the operating funds of the principal communications media. After much work has been done, we still want to know why do people get attracted in buying products being advertised after watching the advertisement. In other words, what do these techniques do to attract or get the attention of the audience. The purpose of this research was to inform the different kinds of techniques in TV advertising that attract the people or audiences to buy the product being advertised. II. A. History The television started out as nothing more than another new invention. Radio pioneers dreamt of a day when the silent movie would talk. Their dream soon turned into reality. “In the beginning...25,000 plus became entranced by television at a demonstration at a Gimbel’s store, and advertisers were quick to follow the genesis of a massive audience.” The timing of the introduction of the television was perfect. The Second World War had just been won. People had money 2004-10-30T02:04:16-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/History-of-Advertising-25617.aspx A common problem today among managers is how to effectively motivate their employees. During the management boom over the last two decades, there has been an emergence of theories to successfully manage employees towards the goals of the organization (Drucker, 1973). One such theory is that of Douglas McGregor, Theory Y. Theory Y portrays managers as collaborative and trustful of people (Bennis, 1998). It deviates from the traditional form of controlling management to an integration of management and it’s subordinates for the shared objective of a successful organization. In McGregor’s own words: “the key question for top management is what are your assumptions about the most effective way to manage people? The assumption management holds about controlling its human resources determines the whole character of the enterprise (Bennis, 1998).” The assumption that for the average person, work is as natural and desired as rest or play; most people will exercise self-control, display initiative, and actively seek responsibility when they feel committed to a set of objectives (Drucker, 1973). Theory Y assumes fundamentally that people want to be treated as mature adults, and not as juvenile individuals. McGregor’s Theory Y argues people are not parts of machines, but individuals with purpose and objectives (Dearlove, 2000). It is that human behavior is seldom a direct response to objective reality, but is rather a response to the individual’s perception of that reality. The success or failure of an organization does not rely on the method of doing, but the people behind the doing (Managing Human, 2000). The three dimensions of a manager’s style, described by Albrecht (1978), portrays the positive interactions of McGregor’s Y, such dimensions being the integration of autonomy, incentive, and the utilization of participative management. McGregor (1960) presented four steps in which to integrate the employee. Clarify the broad requirements of the job, establish specific “targets” for a limited time period, define the management process during the target period, and appraise the results (McGregor, 1960). McGregor (1960) intended in each of these steps the manager be available for guidance, however the majority of the completion of these steps be from the primary effort of the subordinate. Through the added responsibility on the employee, he/she should be able to better evaluate their position and aspirations that will ultimately be fulfilled with the completion of prescribed 2004-10-29T10:03:17-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/McGregor’s-Theory-Y-25595.aspx Farm Subsidies - A Necessary Evil? Subsidies are payments, economic concessions, or privileges given by the government to favor businesses or consumers. In the 1930s, subsidies were designed to favor agriculture. John Steinbeck expressed his dislike of the farm subsidy system of the United States in his book, The Grapes of Wrath. In that book, the government gave money to farms so that they would grow and sell a certain amount of crops. As a result, Steinbeck argued, many people starved unnecessarily. Steinbeck examined farm subsidies from a personal level, showing how they hurt the common man. Subsidies have a variety of other problems, both on the micro and macro level that should not be ignored. Despite their benefits, farm subsidies are an inefficient and dysfunctional part of our economic system. The problems of the American farmer arose in the 1920s, and various methods were introduced to help solve them. The United States still disagrees on how to solve the continuing problem of agricultural overproduction. In 1916, the number of people living on farms was at its maximum at 32,530,000. Most of these farms were relatively small (Reische 51). Technological advances in the 1920's brought a variety of effects. The use of machinery increased productivity while reducing the need for as many farm laborers. The industrial boom of the 1920s drew many workers off the farm and into the cities. Machinery, while increasing productivity, was very expensive. Demand for food, though, stayed relatively constant (Long 85). As a result of this, food prices went down. The small farmer was no longer able to compete, lacking the capital to buy productive machinery. Small farms lost their practicality, and many farmers were forced to consolidate to compete. Fewer, larger farms resulted (Reische 51). During the Depression, unemployment grew while income shrank. "An extended drought had aggravated the farm problem during the 1930s (Reische 52)." Congress, to counter this, passed price support legislation to assure a profit to the farmers. The Soil Conservation and Domestic Allotment Act of 1936 allowed the government to limit acreage use for certain soil-depleting crops. The Agricultural Marketing Agreement Act of 1937 allowed the government to set the minimum price and amount sold of a good at the market. The Agricultural Adjustment Act of 1938, farmers were given price supports for not growing crops. These allowed farmers to mechanize, which was necessary because of the scarcity of farm labor during World 2004-10-29T01:00:50-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Farm-Subsidies-A-Necessary-Evil-25572.aspx The Coca-Cola company started out as an insignificant one man business and over the last one hundred and ten years it has grown into one of the largest companies in the world. The first operator of the company was Dr. John Pemberton and the current operator is Roberto Goizueta. Without societies help, Coca-Cola could not have become over a 50 billion dollar business. Coca-Cola was invented by Dr. John Pemberton, an Atlanta pharmacist. He concocted the formula in a three legged brass kettle in his backyard on May 8, 1886. He mixed a combination of lime, cinnamon, coca leaves, and the seeds of a Brazilian shrub to make the fabulous beverage. Coca-Cola debuted in Atlanta's largest pharmacy, Jacob's Pharmacy, as a five cent non-carbonated beverage. Later on, the carbonated water was added to the syrup to make the beverage that we know today as Coca-Cola. Coca-Cola was originally used as a nerve and brain tonic and a medical elixir. Coca-Cola was named by Frank Robinson, one of Pemberton's close friends, he also penned the famous Coca-Cola logo in unique script. Dr. John Pemberton sold a portion of the Coca-Cola company to Asa Candler, after Pemberton's death the remainder was sold to Candler. Pemberton was forced to sell because he was in a state of poor health and was in debt. He had paid $76.96 for advertising, but he only made $50.00 in profits. Candler acquired the whole company for $2,300. Candler achieved a lot during his time as owner of the company. On January 31, 1893, the famous Coca-Cola formula was patented. He also opened the first syrup manufacturing plant in 1884. His great achievement was large scale bottling of Coca-Cola in 1899. In 1915, The Root Glass Company made the contour bottle for the Coca-Cola company. Candler aggressively advertised Coca-Cola in newspapers and on billboards. In the newspapers, he would give away coupons for a free Coke at any fountain. Coca-Cola was sold after the Prohibition Era to Ernest Woodruff for 25 million dollars. He gave Coca-Cola to his son, Robert Woodruff, who would be president for six decades. Robert Woodruff was an influential man in Atlanta because of his contributions to area colleges, universities, businesses and organizations. When he made a contribution, he would never leave his name, this is how he became to be known as "Mr. Anonymous." Woodruff introduced the six bottle carton in 1923. He 2004-09-25T05:54:24-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Coca-Cola-and-its-Evolution-25567.aspx In 1759 Adam Smith, then a thirty-six year old Professor of Moral Philosophy at Glasgow University, published his Theory of Moral Sentiments. This work attracted the attention of the guardians of the immensely wealthy Duke of Buccleuch towards retaining its author as a tutor to the youthful Duke whilst on a protracted, and hopefully educational, "Grand Tour" of continental Europe. Whilst acting as tutor from 1763 Smith found some of the time spent in the French provinces hard to fill and seems to have begun his masterpiece An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations, as a way of taking up otherwise idle hours in the summer of 1764. Overall however he derived much personal philosophical benefit from these months of journeying on the continent. In Paris he met amongst others, the "Physiocrat" economic theorist (and court Physician) Quesnay and the French Ministers, Turgot and Necker. French economic policy in these times was conducted in accordance with the "Mercantilism" that had held sway in the economic thinking of Europe for some three centuries. Mercantilism expected that governmental control would be exercised over industry and trade in accordance with the theory that national strength (i.e. the Royal states treasury) is increased by a preponderance of exports over imports. By nature, then, as now, France was fitted to be a great agricultural country, a great producer and exporter of corn and wine; but her legislators for several generations had endeavoured to counteract the apparently natural bias of French economic life towards agriculture, and had tried to make her an exporter of manufactured goods. Like most legislators in those times, they had been prodigiously impressed by the ambitious position which the maritime powers, as they were then called (the comparatively little powers of England and Holland), were able to take in the politics of Europe. They saw that this influence came from wealth, that this wealth was made in trade and manufacture, and therefore they determined that France should not be behindhand, but should have as much trade and manufacture as possible. Accordingly, they imposed prohibitive or deterring duties on the importation of foreign manufacturers; they gave bounties to the corresponding home manufactures. Smith found that the French Physiocrats delighted in attempting to prove that the whole Mercantilist structure of the French laws upon industry was utterly wrong; that the prohibitions ought not 2004-08-02T21:44:54-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Adam-Smith-Wealth-of-Nations-25555.aspx With the importance attached to Adam Smith [1723-1790] as a founding father, if you will, of economics as a "science" [not accurate, by the way] and his imputed role in conceptualizing capital "C" Capitalism, I think it is important to go back in time to get closer to source materials with which to evaluate his contributions and to keep in context the interpretations and extrapolations made of his works by subsequent authors and especially by politicians and polemicists. In this pursuit, I have re-read his central works, reviewed his principal biographers and, especially, opinions of his contemporaries. In short, Adam Smith was a radical, a capital "L" Liberal, friend of David Hume, member of the Scottish Enlightenment and well-known to such as Rousseau and others who are credited with the ideas underlying both French and American Revolutions. In his time, his main thesis on morals was neither popular nor especially well-known by British aristocracy or establishment. Smith's thesis in his Theory of Moral Sentiments is that all our moral sentiments arise from sympathy, empathy or 'fellow-feeling' as he called it. The principle objects of our moral perceptions are the actions of others. Our moral judgments of ourselves are applications to ourselves of decisions made about the conduct of others. In applying these judgments to ourselves, we acquire a sense of duty and a feeling of its paramount authority over all our other principles of action. In this context, it is easier to see that Smith's work on political economy was, in part, an act of moral outrage at the mercantilism and industrial policies of European governments, especially British and French. Smith argued mostly from "wide and keen observation of social facts and his perpetual tendency to dwell on these and elicit their significance, instead of drawing conclusions from abstract principles." As words like "Conservative" and "Liberal" have lost context in the current political jargon, it is helpful to remember that they have roots both in etymology and practice at any given time. "Liberal" proceeds from the Latin, "Liber," free, state of being free, freedom and "liberalis," that which befits a free person. Conservative comes from Latin, "Conservare," to keep fully, to preserve and to protect. In it, there is a sense of service to that which has value. In Sanskrit, the root is "seva." Both "seva" and "service" are moral statements which brings us back to Adam Smith and his Theory 2004-08-02T21:43:47-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Adam-Smith-is-on-Our-Side-25554.aspx Real Estate is one of the oldest forms of investing known to man. Real Estate investing is easy and fortunes are made in a simple manner. For example, and investor decides that a desert area will eventually become an industrial development. He purchases a number of acres at a very low price. If his guess turns out to be correct, ten years later he sells the land hundred times more than what he paid for it.This can happen in any part of the country and is not an exceptional case. As the population keeps growing in the U.S., land prices continue to raise and it means that Real Estate will continue to offer one of the best investment opportunities in the country. Compared to most forms of investment, Real Estate offers greater profit potential. Of course, not every piece of land will turn out to be a winner, and despite the great potential rewards in some cases risks are involved, so the necessity of careful study before invest. One of the problem of Real Estate is his lack of liquidity. Liquid assists are those easily converted into cash like stocks or bons. Most Real Estate investments take years before you can make some money, so it is not wise to tie up all your assets in this type of investment. Your financial situation will determine how much you can wisely invest in properties. There is a difference between a land speculator and an investor. A speculator buys land with the intention to make a quick sale and fast profits and will not hold land for a long period of time. An investor, on the other hand, looks for a long time gain, and usually buys only what he can afford to keep for an indefinite period of time. If you are new at this field, it is wise to refrain from any a speculation until you become more informed, and you will have to devote considerable time to study and research. It is wise also to consult specialists before you act. Without realizing it, you already made a very successful investment in Real Estate if you bought your own home. Before you look for areas to invest, consider the condition of your own house. If you have any plan for selling it, good landscaping has been known to considerably increase the value of a home. Large profits can be attained by purchasing run-down homes and restoring them for eventual 2004-07-11T20:11:35-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Make-Big-Money-In-Real-Estate-25544.aspx Since 1990, a battle has raged in United States courts between the United States government and the Microsoft Corporation headed by Bill Gates. What is at stake is money. The federal government maintains that Microsoft's monopolistic practices are harmful to United States citizens, creating higher prices and potentially downgrading software quality, and should therefore be stopped, while Microsoft and its supporters claim that they are not breaking any laws, and are just doing good business. The only thing Microsoft is guilty of is taking advantage of free enterprise. Microsoft's antitrust problems began for them in the early months of 1990(Check 1), when the Federal Trade Commission began investigating them for possible violations of the Sherman and Clayton Antitrust Acts, (Maldoom 1) which are designed to stop the formation of monopolies. The investigation continued on for the next three years without resolve, until Novell, maker of DR-DOS, a competitor of Microsoft's MS-DOS, filed a complaint with the Competition Directorate of the European Commission in June of 1993. (Maldoom 1) Doing this stalled the investigations even more, until finally in August of 1993, (Check 1) the Federal Trade Commission decided to hand the case over to the Department of Justice. The Department of Justice moved quickly, with Anne K. Bingaman, head of the Antitrust Division of the DOJ, leading the way. (Check 1) The case was finally ended on July 15, 1994, with Microsoft signing a consent settlement. (Check 1) The settlement focused on Microsoft's selling practices with computer manufacturers. Until now, Microsoft would sell MS-DOS and Microsoft's other operating systems to original equipment manufacturers (OEM's) at a 60% discount if that OEM agreed to pay a royalty to Microsoft for every single computer that they sold regardless if it had a Microsoft operating system installed on it or not. After the settlement, Microsoft would be forced to sell their operating systems according to the number of computers shipped with a Microsoft operating system installed, and not for computers that ran other operating systems. (Check 2) Another practice that the Justice Department accused Microsoft of was that Microsoft would specify a minimum number of operating systems that the retailer had to buy, eliminating any chance for another operating system vendor to get their system installed until the retailer had installed all of the Microsoft operating systems that it had installed. (Maldoom 2) In addition to specifying a minimum number of operating systems 2004-07-05T09:33:33-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Microsoft-Monopoly-or-Capitalist-Triumph-25345.aspx The Asian financial crisis serves as a timely reminder of a fact too often overlooked: Merchant banking is the leading edge of shareholder activism. Indeed, one of the chief traits shared by hard-hit Pacific Rim economies is a decided lack of such activism. As a result, their companies are less prepared than they might be for global competition. To one degree or another, much the same holds true in other markets abroad. U.S. companies, in contrast, have seen their competitive ability markedly strengthened by shareholder activism. And much credit goes to merchant banking--that is, private investors managing their own capital. True investor activism as practiced by such financial buyers has created a new model for American enterprise. That model is based on highly leveraged capital structures, on compensation and equity ownership that align the interests of managers with owners, and on effective corporate governance mechanisms to monitor and control the use of free cash flow. All have the objective of maximizing value. Contrary to popular perception, the strategies of merchant banks involve not just financial engineering, but also growth, which would not be achievable without risk capital. In the buyout world, we have seen a fundamental shift from the 1980s mantra of "unlocking value"--capitalizing on arbitrage opportunities and market inefficiencies. Today, the emphasis is on creating value by molding strategic direction, giving incentives to and empowering managers, and rationalizing operations. Increasingly, merchant banks are the key agents of change. In the 1980s, parts of the manufacturing and retailing sectors were entirely reconfigured by leveraged-buyout activity. In the 1990s, financial buyers have changed the landscape of such industries as media, broadcasting, business services, printing and publishing, and food and health services. America's technological reemergence, captured in part by the Silicon Valley phenomenon, has been fueled by venture capital. And for more mature industries, LBOs have triggered corporate renewal. Countless academic studies and real-world examples have highlighted the perils of the corporate governance status quo sans LBO: the central conflict between owners and managers over the control and use of corporate resources, the unenlightened use of free cash flow, and the scrutiny of and pressure on quarter-to-quarter earnings growth versus long-term growth and value creation. By severely constraining and imposing restrictions on the use of free cash flow, LBOs force only positive net present value capital decisions. Studies have shown that operating cash flow increased on average by about 40 percent in a one-to-four-year time frame following 2004-07-05T00:52:38-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/U_S_-Is-On-It-s-Way-25260.aspx Online Marketing Marketing businesses, products and services has become much more complex with the introduction of the internet. In this paper I will attempt to describe the effect of e-business on marketing strategies today, as well as describe the e-business marketing strategies utilized by Kmart, Inc. The internet is an enormous environment that is advancing and developing at a very erratic pace, and only companies able to adapt will survive. The World Wide Web provides a medium that breaks through geographical boundaries, allows the customer much more control, and has no time restrictions as it is always “open”. According to an article by Dr. Ralph F. Wilson, Niche Marketing on the Web, there are three important steps to marketing on the internet; (1) profile your customers, (2) decide where they congregate, and (3) communicate the message where they congregate in a net-acceptable manner (Wilson, 1996). Bluelight.com, Kmart’s e-commerce site launched in 1999, is a shining example of this philosophy, having accumulated over 3.5 million customers in less than one year. Although Kmart had an obvious advantage with a n existing strong customer base, these shoppers were not internet customers. In an effort to establish a web based customer segment, they targeted these existing customers by placing Bluelight.com CD ROM’s which provided information, special offers, and Blue Light specials on-line, throughout all of their stores. According to Mark Goldstein, CEO of Bluelight.com, “When people were checking out they’d get a CD ROM thrown into their bags...our access strategy was important because we already knew what people were accustomed to and preferred to buy at Kmart (America Goes On-Line). According to Goldstein, Bluelight’s core initiative was to “insure that Kmart shoppers (were)...on-line, once we’re convenient to them, or we know where they are, we start thinking about commerce” (America Goes On-Line). Through Bluelight.com customers are able purchase the items normally purchased in one of their nationwide locations in the convenience of their own home. The site is treated as a vehicle to deliver an advantage to their customers, not publicity or branding content, and looks to “enable both e-commerce and real world buying behavior” (America Goes On-Line). Goldstein stated, “We want to integrate the store and the web very tightly...so the web is simply an extension of the store” (America Goes On-Line). In the past three years Kmart has accumulated a vast amount of information about it’s customers through surveys and other various methods, in 2004-07-04T02:28:01-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Online-Marketing-Kmart-Analysis-25207.aspx Sex Tourism In Southeast Asia Tourism is a big part of revenue for many countries in the world today. But just what is it that brings tourist to a specific place? There are many different reasons including buildings, art, beaches, and even prostitution! There is one specific kind of tourism that is causing such an issue in Southeast Asia and other countries. This is called sex tourism which is a major form of prostitution that even involves children. The average girl that is involved in sex tourism is of the ages of 12-40 years old. With the rising popularity of this degrading act, should someone step in and do something? Many people travel to these Southeast Asian countries just to have many different sexual partners without any attachments what so ever. It is highly advertised in these countries and is not looked down upon, but moreover looked at as a means of making money for young girls. One woman is said to be involved with 5,000 tourist that visit the country in one year. That is why the STD and pregnancy rate in these countries are so high. These countries can not outlaw this form of labor because sex tourism brings in a lot of new people who bring a lot of money and also the prostitutes only job on occasions. The fact that these are very poor countries does play a major role in the act of prostitution. In many occasions the wife and daughter of a family will have to sell their body just for the family to be able to eat. With the high unemployment rate in these countries the women have no other job qualifications to enter into a regular field of work. This is caused by the low education rates in these countries also. Without the education to actually perform a regular job what must a women do to make some money? They must go into the survival of the fittest and do whatever they have to just to live without misery and starvation. Another reason it is hard to put on a leash is because the task force would be highly overworked as they already are on crimes that really do not hurt anyone. It is evident that no country is going to shut down 7% 2004-06-10T05:18:02-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Sex-Tourism-In-Southeast-Asia-25116.aspx Marketing and Ethics (United Colors of Benetton) Marketing issues, as they relate to business ethics, extend across a wide range of business activities that characterize a company's relationship with its customers (product manufacturing and integrity; disclosure, labeling and packaging; marketing and advertising; selling practices; pricing; and distribution). In recent years the scope of marketing issues has expanded, including new problems like an environmental responsibility, a firm's relationship to its competitors etc. Companies now are expected to bear a greater responsibility for the integrity, use and consequences of their products and services. Companies' concerns with satisfying society needs have a very rational explanation: if a company will not care about welfare of society, it may ultimately cease to exist, because it operates by community consent to oblige its requirements. For that reason, firms put a lot of effort in dealing with the issue of corporate social responsibility, recognizing the importance (and potential benefits) of doing so. There are plenty of external standards for marketing practices: codes of ethical behavior (e.g. ones established by the American Marketing Association), industry specific guidelines developed by different trade associations and legal standards set forth by national and local governments. These laws and codes provide assistance to companies in establishing their marketing policies. Some of the examples of such policies are as follows (http://www.bsr.org/): *Sears, Roebuck- the company's Code of Conduct states, "...you (employee) are expected to deal fairly, honestly and responsibly with all customers, fellow associates and anyone else you come in contact with while representing Sears. With regard to customers, this duty requires you to conduct sales in a truthful and accurate manner, always maintaining the highest of ethical standards. .... " · USAA: the company's Core Values Statement reads: "We will consistently behave in ways that are ethical, earning the respect of members and customers by being steadfast in our commitment to act in both their best interests and the interests of the Association, regardless of any business, social, economic or personal pressures to the contrary." In what follows, we will focus on the topic of ethical ramifications of certain advertising practices, which are rarely covered by the companies' policies; namely on utilizing emotion-arousing ads. The American Marketing Association (AMA), for example, in its code states that one of the basic marketer's responsibilities is not to harm customers (Sirgy, 1999). It also recommends avoiding false and misleading advertising, but there is no annotation regulating advertising by appealing to customer's 2004-06-10T05:16:23-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Marketing-and-Ethics,-United-Colors-of-Benetton-25115.aspx Introduction to Business Ethics Simply put, ethics involves learning what is right or wrong, and then doing the right thing -- but "the right thing" is not nearly as straightforward as conveyed in a great deal of business ethics literature. Most ethical dilemmas in the workplace are not simply a matter of "Should Bob steal from Jack?" or "Should Jack lie to his boss?" Many ethicists consider emerging ethical beliefs to be "state of the art" legal matters, i.e., what becomes an ethical guideline today is often translated to a law, regulation or rule tomorrow. Values, which guide how we ought to behave, are considered moral values, e.g., values such as respect, honesty, fairness, responsibility, etc. Statements around how these values are applied are sometimes called moral or ethical principles. The concept has come to mean various things to various people, but generally it's coming to know what it right or wrong in the workplace and doing what's right -- this is in regard to effects of products / services and in relationships with stakeholders. Consequently, there is no clear moral compass to guide leaders through complex dilemmas about what is right or wrong. Note that many people react that business ethics, with its continuing attention to "doing the right thing," only asserts the obvious ("be good," "don't lie," etc.), and so these people don't take business ethics seriously. For many of us, these principles of the obvious can go right out the door during times of stress. Business ethics has come to be considered a management discipline, especially since the birth of the social responsibility movement in the 1960s. In that decade, social awareness movement raised expectations of businesses to use their massive financial and social influence to address social problems such as poverty, crime, environmental protection, equal rights, public health and improving education. The emergence of business ethics is similar to other management disciplines. As commerce became more complicated and dynamic, organizations realized they needed more guidance to ensure their dealings supported the common good and did not harm others -- and so business ethics was born. Note that 90% of business schools now provide some form of training in business ethics. Today, ethics in the workplace can be managed through use of codes of ethics, codes of conduct, roles of ethicists and ethics committees, policies and procedures, procedures to resolve ethical dilemmas, ethics training, etc. Many people are used to reading or hearing of 2004-06-10T05:13:11-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Introduction-to-Business-Ethics-25112.aspx Today’s businesses are entrenched in a great conflict. The interests of the stockholders and the interests of the populace at large seem to be in constant turmoil. On one hand, stockholders desire profit for themselves, and on the other, the general population does not care to be exploited by those whose sole motive is profit. This is a conflict because those who buy a business’s products tend to be in the general public, and they have the ability to make or break a company’s profit margin, but many stockholders are less interested in serving any sort of public good than making money. However, in order to maintain economic stasis in the world, and to maintain market share and customers, business needs to evolve to become more socially responsible in both the environment and in labor practices. Current business theory holds that business has operated and is operating in five different generations. This theory is that as the world becomes more aware of business practices, there is more of a need for business to operate in an ethical or responsible manner. With each progressive generation of business issues, the company becomes more socially aware and responsible. Growing from economist Milton Friedman’s idea that the only obligation a company has is to its shareholders to the belief that the corporation has an obligation to help improve the world, the generation theory in business has gone the furthest in explaining the role of the public in business (Mendes 1). First-generation businesses believe, like Friedman, that their only obligation is to themselves and their shareholders. The best examples of first-generation businesses existed in the American Gilded Age (1875 – 1900). In these corporations, the labor was treated as expendable and was prevented from asserting their human status by unionizing. Strikes for better conditions, wages, and hours were often ended with violence, almost always instigated by the wealthy business owners (Zinn 239). Fortunately, businesses of the first generation have essentially ceased to exist with the rise of public interest in the dealings of companies, especially after several different scandals in the 1970s (Mendes 1). Codes of conduct for ethical behavior are the written policies of second-generation businesses. These codes pertain to the employee’s interaction as a representative of the company at large. Primarily, they relate to bribing or accepting bribes from government officials, which could 2004-06-10T04:03:43-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Degredation-of-Business-Ethics-25087.aspx Financial Reporting Ethics Adelphia 1. John Rigas, other Rigas family members, Michael Mulcahey 2. Adelphia backed off-the-book loans for the Rigas family totaling 3.1 billion dollars. The company also overstated earnings and purchased luxury items for the Rigas family. 3. Companies are supposed to serve the stockholders interests and not the founder’s interests. The Rigas family illegally used the money and the resources of the company for their own gain. 4. Money was stolen from the business and the stock price fell and was taken off the charts. 5. The Rigas family wanted to use the company resources for their own gain and were helped by people in the company. 6. Shareholders had money stolen from them and lost money when the stock price fell. Arthur Anderson 1. David B. Duncan 2. Signed off on Enron’s faulty accounting and then shredded related documents after the SEC launched an investigation into Enron’s accounting. 3. An auditor must look at a companies financial statements objectively. It is also illegal to destroy information that is part of an investigation. 4. Arthur Anderson and Enron went out of business. 5. Anderson knew if they confronted Enron about their faulty accounting they would lose their account. 6. Arthur Anderson went out of business and their employees had to find jobs elsewhere. Owners of stock in Enron and Arthur Anderson lost money. Enron 1. CEO Kenneth Lay, CFO Andrew Fastow 2. Inflated profits with off-the-books partnerships. Illegally manipulated the energy markets in Texas and California. 3. Enron fraudulently made it appear that they were making more money than they actually were. They also forced energy prices up using questionable and in some cases illegal methods. 4. Enron filed the largest bankruptcy in history and took their auditor, Arthur Anderson down with them. Their collapse brought the stock market down and brought the accounting practices of many other companies under scrutiny. 5. Management wanted to increase profits and Enron’s stock price using any and every method available. 6. Employees lost their life savings in 401k plans. All stockholders lost money. Global Crossing 1. Ex-CEO Robert Annunziata 2. Inflated revenue by swapping network capacity with other providers. Provided excess compensation to management. 3. Swapping contracts made it look like Global Crossing was doing more business than they actually were. Their CEO contract was also criticized by many for giving too much compensation to the CEO, this may have been a result of a lack of proper corporate governance. 4. Global Crossing went out of business. 5. Management wanted the company to look more attractive to investors. 6. Stockholders and employees. HealthSouth 1. Chairman and CEO Richard Scrushy, CFO William T. Owens 2. Overstated earnings by 1.4 billion dollars. 3. Not adhering to GAAP, fraud. 4. Company stock price 2004-04-28T22:50:38-04:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Recent-Accounting-Scandals--88.aspx Patterns in Medicinal Advertising, An Analysis One of the most innovative trends in print advertising is medicine advertisement. The content of these particular advertisements (ads) are intriguing to me. I intend to analyze five medicinal ads to find the tools used by advertisers and to explore the positive and negative aspects of advertising medicine through print ads for the public. The people who develop ads to market prescription medicine products must have an inkling of what the reader wants to see. For instance, the ads in a parenting magazine most often target mothers. The ads in a sports magazine predominately target athletes. How do the advertisers know what the reader will respond to? Patterns are tools that help us to narrow our thinking down and put thoughts into categories that we identify with. Patterns allow us to store information in blocks so that we do not have to relearn information that has already been learned. Some patterns are universal and most people have some categories or patterns that other people have. An example of a universal human pattern is using language to communicate. Other patterns that we have, may be derived from our own experience and unlike those of others. Patterns are useful in advertising because advertisers can target their reader by tapping into specific categories. Perception is a person's understanding of the information they receive. Depending on their experience or their understanding they will categorize their perception and in turn it will become a thought pattern. For instance when a person talks to a priest their perception of him may be that he is perfect or does not sin. They may categorize all priests this way and not judge them in the way that they would any person who is not a priest. I feel that patterns and perception work hand in hand. Sometimes patterns are formed based on perception, sometimes perception is based on a pattern. What came first the chicken or the egg? I'm not quite sure, but I do know they affect each other. Ads are designed by using patterns that target a specific audience. The reader's perception of the product may form exclusively based on the ad. The patterns that I noticed specifically amongst the five medicine ads that I've chosen to analyze is the break through effect. In one ad there was a woman with her child and they were breaking through glass. Another ad 2004-02-22T06:55:53-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Patterns-in-Medicinal-Advertising-31.aspx Nike Inc., Research Paper Basketball players “wanna be like Mike”, but shoe companies “wanna be like NIKE.” NIKE is the worlds #1 company and controls more than 40% of the US athletic shoe market. The company designs and sells shoes for just about every sport, including baseball, volleyball, cheerleading, and wrestling. NIKE also sells Cole Haan dress and casual shoes and a line of athletic wear and equipment, such as hockey sticks, skates, and timepieces. In addition, it operates NIKETOWN shoe and sportswear stores and is opening JORDAN in store outlets in suburban markets. NIKE sells its product to about 19,000 US accountants, in about 140 other countries, and online. Chairman, CEO, and co-founder Phil Knight owns. Nike Co. is very interesting, as well is a popular brand. Nike, pronounced NI-KEY, is the winged goddess of victory according to Greek mythology. She sat at the side of Zeus, the ruler of the Olympian pantheon, in Olympia. A mystical presence, symbolizing victorious encounters, NIKE presided over history’s earliest battlefields. A Greek would say, “When we go to battle, and win, we say it is NIKE.” Synonymous with honored conquest; NIKE is the twentieth century footwear that lifts the world’s greatest athletes to new levels of mastery and achievement. The NIKE “swoosh” embodies the spirit of the winged goddess who inspired the most courageous and chivalrous warriors at the dawn of civilization. Among artistic representations of Nike are the sculpture by Paeonius (c. 424 BC) and the “Nike of Samothrace.” Rhodians probably erected the latter, discovered on Samothrace in 1863 and now in the Louvre Museum, Paris, about 203 BC to commemorate a sea battle. Excavations have shown that the sculpture was placed alighting on a flagship, which was set in the ground in such a way that it appeared to float. If you were to break the word NIKE down, you would get Ni-key. The pronunciation for Nike is ‘nI-kE. Its function is noun, and its etymology is Greek NiKE. If you defined the word NIKE, you would find out that it means the Greek goddess of victory. Another meaning and definition of a word is SWOOSHING. Main entry: Swoosh, function is noun, and it is an act or instance of swooshing. The origin of the swoosh dates back as far as 1971. Phil Knight was supplementing his modest income from Blue Ribbon Sports Inc. by teaching an accountant class at Portland 2004-02-22T06:55:16-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/Nike-Inc_,-Marketing-Masters-30.aspx Marx's Theory Of Money The most important point to emerge from Marx's theory of money is the idea that money is a form of value. The difficulty with this idea is that we are more familiar with money itself than with value in other forms. But value does appear in forms other than money. For example, the balance sheet of a capitalist firm estimates the value of goods in process and of fixed capital which has not yet been depreciated, as well as the value of inventories of finished commodities awaiting sale. Each of these aggregations of commodities has a value, usually expressed as the equivalent of a certain amount of money, but it is clear that neither goods in process nor fixed capital is money. Marx views the value of commodities in this sense as analytically prior to money; money can be explained according to Marx only on the basis of an understanding of the value of commodities. Marx follows Smith in regarding value as the property of exchangeability of commodities. In a society where exchange is common, products come to have a dual character as use values and as values. They have two powers: first, to satisfy particular human needs and wants; and second, to exchange for other products. This second power can be thought of quantitatively, as an amount of exchangeability or command over other commodities. The classical economists viewed value as a real, though socially determined, entity, with its own laws of conservation and motion. Value in this sense bears the same relation to commodities as mass bears to physical objects. It is not surprising that in societies where exchange is widespread value takes on an independent form as money, as an expression of general exchangeability. Value is a central social reality for people; they constantly think and talk about it directly or indirectly; they want some way to transfer it directly among themselves, separate from particular commodities. This is, I think, what we mean by "money." It is the social expression of value separated from the concrete particularity of any use value. With this emergence of money as the social expression of value, money stands, in opposition to commodities, as the abstract always stands in opposition to the particular. We will see value in two forms: as particular commodities, and as money. It is crucial to recognize that this development is latent in the commodity form 2004-02-22T06:52:11-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Marxian-Theory-of-Money-29.aspx Coca-Cola and its Evolution The Coca-Cola company started out as an insignificant one man business and over the last one hundred and ten years it has grown into one of the largest companies in the world. The first operator of the company was Dr. John Pemberton and the current operator is Roberto Goizueta. Without societies help, Coca-Cola could not have become over a 50 billion dollar business. Coca-Cola was invented by Dr. John Pemberton, an Atlanta pharmacist. He concocted the formula in a three legged brass kettle in his backyard on May 8, 1886. He mixed a combination of lime, cinnamon, coca leaves, and the seeds of a Brazilian shrub to make the fabulous beverage. Coca-Cola debuted in Atlanta's largest pharmacy, Jacob's Pharmacy, as a five cent non-carbonated beverage. Later on, the carbonated water was added to the syrup to make the beverage that we know today as Coca-Cola. Coca-Cola was originally used as a nerve and brain tonic and a medical elixir. Coca-Cola was named by Frank Robinson, one of Pemberton's close friends, he also penned the famous Coca-Cola logo in unique script. Dr. John Pemberton sold a portion of the Coca-Cola company to Asa Candler, after Pemberton's death the remainder was sold to Candler. Pemberton was forced to sell because he was in a state of poor health and was in debt. He had paid $76.96 for advertising, but he only made $50.00 in profits. Candler acquired the whole company for $2,300. Candler achieved a lot during his time as owner of the company. On January 31, 1893, the famous Coca-Cola formula was patented. He also opened the first syrup manufacturing plant in 1884. His great achievement was large scale bottling of Coca-Cola in 1899. In 1915, The Root Glass Company made the contour bottle for the Coca-Cola company. Candler aggressively advertised Coca-Cola in newspapers and on billboards. In the newspapers, he would give away coupons for a free Coke at any fountain. Coca-Cola was sold after the Prohibition Era to Ernest Woodruff for 25 million dollars. He gave Coca-Cola to his son, Robert Woodruff, who would be president for six decades. Robert Woodruff was an influential man in Atlanta because of his contributions to area colleges, universities, businesses and organizations. When he made a contribution, he would never leave his name, this is how he became to be known as "Mr. Anonymous." Woodruff introduced the six bottle carton 2004-02-22T06:51:21-05:00 http://75.150.148.189/free-essay/The-Evolution-of-Coca-Cola--28.aspx